JP7262805B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko game machine.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine capable of executing a display effect using a display device when a game ball enters a starting hole (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

In such a game machine, display effects using character images, patterns, and the like can be performed.

JP 2016-202930 A JP 2016-198339 A JP 2016-182376 A

However, even with the gaming machines described above, there is still room for improvement in terms of techniques for enhancing the interest in games.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object of the present invention is to improve the enjoyment of games.

The present invention has been made to solve at least part of the above problems, and can be implemented as the following application examples. In addition, the reference numerals in parentheses and supplementary explanations in this column indicate the correspondence with the embodiments described later in order to help the understanding of the present invention, and do not limit the present invention in any way. .

[Application example 1]
A gaming machine comprising operation means that can be operated by a player,
having a moveable movable member actuated by an electrical drive source;
The movable member is provided outside the operating means in an exposed state without being covered by other members , and does not cover the hand of the player who operates the operating means at the first position, covering the hand of the player operating the operating means at the second position;
When the movable member is actuated to move from the first position to the second position, the movable member covers the player's hand operating the operation means against the biasing force of the spring, thereby covering the operation means. Executes a production that touches the hand of the player who operates the
In a state where the performance is executed and the movable member covers the hand of the player who operates the operation means, when the power supply is cut off, the movable member is moved to the second position by the biasing force of the spring. to the first position, and the movable member does not cover the hand of the player who operates the operation means.
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

1 is a front view of a game machine; FIG. It is an enlarged view of display devices. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control board side of the gaming machine. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sub-control board side of the gaming machine. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining a main ROM and a main RAM; FIG. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a sub-ROM and a sub-RAM; FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining various random numbers used in the gaming machine; FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining determination tables T1 to T4; It is explanatory drawing of jackpot classification determination table T5. It is explanatory drawing of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 at the time of a non-work-time-saving state. It is explanatory drawing of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 at the time of a time saving state. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of an electric chew opening pattern determination table T7; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of a large winning opening opening pattern determination table T8; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of a V opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9; 4 is a flowchart of main control main processing; 10 is a flowchart of main-side timer interrupt processing; It is a flow chart of a starting port sensor detection process. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 prior determination processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 prior determination processing. 4 is a flowchart of normal operation processing; 4 is a flowchart of special action processing; It is a flowchart of a special symbol standby process. It is a flowchart of big hit determination processing. It is the 1st flow chart of fluctuation pattern selection processing. It is the second flowchart of the variation pattern selection process. It is a flowchart of processing during special symbol fluctuation. It is a flowchart of special design decision processing. It is a flowchart of a game state management process. It is a flowchart of game state reset processing. It is a flowchart of special electric accessary product processing. 4 is a flowchart of V opening/closing member operation processing; It is a flowchart of a game state setting process. 9 is a flowchart of V-region sensor detection processing; It is a flow chart of the number of pending ball processing. 4 is a flowchart showing sub-control main processing; 9 is a flowchart of sub-side timer interrupt processing; 8 is a flowchart of received command analysis processing; It is a flow chart of the look-ahead effect determination process. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the configuration of a prior determination information storage area; FIG. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a look-ahead effect pattern determination table T51; It is a flow chart of the fluctuation effect start processing. It is explanatory drawing of basic production|presentation pattern determination table T52. It is explanatory drawing of chance up production|presentation pattern determination table T53. It is a flow chart of processing in the middle of fluctuation production. 4 is a flowchart of display control processing; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a movement mode of the first movable accessory 14; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second aspect of the first movable accessory 14; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second aspect of the second movable accessory 15; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second aspect of the frame movable accessory 69; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a display effect of a sub-display screen 64; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a fixed stop symbol remaining display effect A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a fixed stop symbol remaining display effect B; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a fixed stop symbol remaining display effect C; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a variable display area change effect A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a variable display area change effect B; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a variable display area change effect C; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a variable display area overlapping effect A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a variable display area overlap effect B; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a variable display area overlapping effect C; It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative design stop position unfixed production A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating decorative design stop position unfixed production B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative design stop position unfixed production C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the decoration design sudden decision stop production|presentation A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating decorative-symbol sudden determination stop production B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative-symbol sudden determination stop production C. FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a role-linked production A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a character-linked production B; It is a figure for demonstrating the role-linked production C. FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a scroll effect A; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a scroll effect B; FIG. FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining a scroll effect C; FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative design special fluctuation|variation production|presentation A. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative-symbol special fluctuation|variation production|presentation B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative design special fluctuation|variation production C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative design missing performance A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating decorative design loss performance B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating decorative-symbol missing performance C. FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a ceiling reaching schedule suggestion effect A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a ceiling reaching schedule suggestion effect B; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a ceiling reaching schedule suggestion effect C; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a mode suggestion image display effect A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a mode suggestion image display effect B; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a mode suggesting image display effect C; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a mode suggestive image continuation effect A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a mode suggestive image continuation effect B; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a mode suggestive image continuation effect C; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a multi-zone display effect A; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a multi-zone display effect B; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a multi-section display effect C; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a function-based timer display effect A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a function-based timer display effect B; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a function-based timer display effect C; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a specific image transition effect A; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a specific image transition effect B; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a specific image transition effect C; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a specific image absorption effect A; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a specific image absorption effect B; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a specific image absorption effect C; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a character string decomposition effect A; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a character string decomposition effect B; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a character string decomposition effect C; It is a figure for demonstrating the jackpot game count display effect|action A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the jackpot game count display effect B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the jackpot game count display effect|action C. FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a double timer display effect A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a double timer display effect B; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a double timer display effect C; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a final screen display effect A; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a final screen display effect B; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a final screen display effect C; FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the promotion suspension continuous production A. FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a promotion hold consecutive effect B; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a promotion suspension consecutive effect C; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an operation instruction display effect A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an operation instruction display effect B; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an operation instruction display effect C; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a button special display effect A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a button special display effect B; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a button special display effect C; It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation button effective invalidity display production|presentation A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation button effective invalidity display production|presentation B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation button effective invalidity display production|presentation C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation automation production|presentation A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation automation production|presentation B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation automation production|presentation C. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the first movable accessory and the frame movable accessory. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a double role product production A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a double character production B; FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the movable member contact production|presentation A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the movable member contact production|presentation B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the movable member contact production C. FIG.

<First embodiment>
1. Structure of Gaming Machine FIG. 1 is a front view of a gaming machine 1 as one embodiment of the present invention. In the following description, the left-right direction of the gaming machine 1 corresponds to the left-right direction viewed from the player facing the gaming machine 1 . Further, the front direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as the direction from the gaming machine 1 to the player, and the rearward direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as the direction from the player to the gaming machine 1 .

The game machine 1 is a pachinko game machine that shoots game balls based on the player's shooting operation, and pays out a predetermined number of game balls to the player based on the winning when the game balls win in a specific winning device. be. The game machine 1 includes a game machine frame 50 and a game board 2, and the game board 2 is attached inside the game machine frame 50.例文帳に追加The game machine frame 50 includes a front frame (front frame portion) 53, an outer frame (base frame portion) that forms the outer shell of the game machine, and an inner frame to which the game board 2 is attached inside the outer frame. I have. The front frame (front frame portion) 53 is a vertically rectangular unit arranged on the front side of the outer frame and the inner frame. ) 62, effect button 63, sub-display screen 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U), sword member 65, frame lamp 66, speaker 67, A frame movable body 69 is provided. An opening is formed in the center of the front frame 53, and the game area 3 of the game board 2 can be viewed through the opening.

The handle 60 is arranged at the lower end on the right side of the front frame 53, and shoots the game ball with a shooting intensity corresponding to the rotation angle. On the right and left sides of the handle 60, movable frame bodies 69 (also referred to as movable frame accessories 69), which are movable so-called gimmicks, are provided. The frame movable body 69 is configured such that two members arranged on the left and right sides of the handle 60 are movable in the left-right direction. Each of the two members is formed of a flexible plate-like member, and is configured such that the main surface moves toward or away from the handle 60 . The frame movable body 69 normally rests at a retracted position (FIG. 1) away from the handle 60 on the left and right sides of the handle 60, and moves (extends) from the retracted position toward the handle 60 so as to approach each other. ) and stop at a position where the handle 60 is touched. The frame movable body 69 touches the handle 60 or the right hand of the player operating the handle 60 when it is in the advanced position.

A batted ball supply tray (upper tray) 61 is provided below the front frame 53 and stores game balls. A surplus ball receiving tray (lower tray) 62 is arranged below the hit ball supply tray (upper tray) 61 and stores game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hit ball supply tray 61 . The production button 63 is an operation unit arranged near the batted ball supply tray (upper tray) 61, and is operated (pressed) by the player at the time of production performed as the game progresses. A vibration motor is arranged inside the effect button 63, and the button itself is configured to vibrate vertically and horizontally according to the effect. The sword member 65 is an operation part in the shape of a sword, and can be pushed downward by the player at the time of an effect executed as the game progresses. The sword member 65 is configured to be capable of executing a first operation of pushing the entire sword member 65 downward and a second operation of pushing the entire sword member 65 upward. The sub-display screen 64 is a screen of a liquid crystal display device, and includes a right sub-display screen 64R, a left sub-display screen 64L, and an upper sub-display screen 64U. The right sub-display screen 64R is provided on the right side of the front frame 53, the left sub-display screen 64L is provided on the left side of the front frame 53, and the upper sub-display screen 64U is provided on the upper side of the front frame 53. The right sub-display screen 64R and the left sub-display screen 64L are arranged in pairs with the game board 2 interposed therebetween. The upper sub-display screen 64U is arranged above the game board 2 . The right sub-display screen 64R, the left sub-display screen 64L, and the upper sub-display screen 64U are arranged so as to surround the opening of the front frame 53. As shown in FIG. The sub display screen 64 may be a liquid crystal display device, or may be another image display device such as an organic EL display device, a plasma display, a projector, or a dot matrix. The frame lamp 66 includes a right frame lamp and a left frame lamp, is arranged above the front frame 53, and emits light during a game or the like. The right frame lamp is an oblique linear light-emitting portion arranged between the upper sub-display screen 64U and the right sub-display screen 64R. The left frame lamp is an oblique linear light-emitting portion arranged between the upper sub-display screen 64U and the left sub-display screen 64L. The speakers 67 are arranged on the upper left and upper right sides of the front frame 53, and produce sound during a game or the like.

The game board 2 includes a game area 3, a rail member 4, a board lamp 5, an image display device 7, a first board movable body 14, a second board movable body 15, and a fixed winning device (navel) 19. , a normal variable winning device (electric chew) 22, a gate (through chucker) 28, a first big winning device (first attacker) 31, a second big winning device (second attacker) 36, and a big winning opening open A starting port 17, a general winning port 27 (ordinary winning port 27), an out port 16, and indicators 40 are provided.

The game area 3 is an area where the game ball shot by the operation of the handle 60 flows down, and a plurality of game pegs for guiding the game ball are protruded. The rail member 4 is arranged at the left end of the game area 3 and guides the game ball shot by operating the handle 60 upwards of the game area 3 . The board lamp 5 is arranged on the back side of the game area 3 and emits light from the back side of the game area 3 . Here, some of the board lamps 5 are connected to the right frame lamp and the left frame lamp, and are configured so that the form and light emission are continuous.

The image display device 7 is provided near the center of the game area 3 and has a display screen 7a. The image display device 7 may be a liquid crystal display device, or may be another image display device such as an organic EL display device, a plasma display, a projector, or a dot matrix. The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 includes a production pattern display area in which production patterns (decorative patterns) 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed (also referred to as variable display), and a reserved image display in which reserved images 9A and 9B are displayed. and a suspended digested image display area (the suspended display area) in which the suspended digested image 9C is displayed. The pending images 9A and 9B are images representing pending and are also called pending icons 9A and 9B. The pending digest image 9C is an image representing the pending, and is also called the pending image 9C, the pending icon 9C, the variable icon 9C, and the variable icon 9C. The pending icon 9C may also be simply called a pending icon.

The performance symbol display area includes three symbol display areas of "left", "middle" and "right". A left effect pattern (left decorative pattern) 8L is displayed in the left pattern display area. A medium effect pattern (middle decorative pattern) 8C is displayed in the middle pattern display area. A right effect pattern (right decorative pattern) 8R is displayed in the right pattern display area. The production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are composed of a plurality of patterns representing numbers "1" to "9", for example. The variable display of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol which will be described later. The image display device 7 displays the first special symbol and the The result of variable display of the second special symbol (big hit lottery result) can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner for the player.

For example, when a jackpot is won, the production pattern is stopped and displayed with double numbers such as "777". In the case of a miss, the production pattern is stopped and displayed with a loose pattern such as "637". This makes it easier for the player to grasp the progress of the game. The player can grasp the jackpot lottery result by the image display device 7 in addition to the first special symbol display device 41a and the second special symbol display device 41b. The position of the pattern display area may not be fixed. Moreover, as a mode of the variable display of the effect symbols, a mode of scrolling in the vertical direction may be used, or a mode other than that may be used. It is not limited to the above, and can be arbitrarily set as to what combination of performance symbols to stop display according to each lottery result. Hereinafter, the effect of displaying the effect symbols 8L, 8C and 8R is also referred to as "variation effect of effect symbol", "variation effect of decorative symbol", or simply "variation effect" and "variation display". In this decorative pattern variation performance, the performance in the period from when the special pattern starts to stop until it stops (also called a special symbol variation period) is counted as one variation performance (one cycle of variation performance). Therefore, even if there is a case in which the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped during the period from when the special symbols start to fluctuate until they stop, the performance of the temporary stop is included in the variable performance of the decorative symbols.

The image display device 7 can display, on the display screen 7a, a big win performance performed in parallel with a big win game (an example of a special game), a demonstration performance for waiting for customers, etc., in addition to the performance symbol variation performance. In the production design variation production, production images such as a background image and a character image may be displayed in addition to the production design. In addition to the effect pattern, the image display device 7 also provides an identification display (fourth pattern, not shown) that can suggest that the special pattern is changing, or that the special pattern lottery result can be suggested. may be displayed on the display screen 7a. The identification display (fourth pattern) may be displayed by a light emitter such as an LED provided in the game area 3 .

The reserved image display area is a first reserved display area that displays a reserved image 9A according to the number of memories of the first special figure reservation described later, and a reserved image 9B according to the number of memories of the second special figure reservation that will be described later. and a second reserved display area. By the display of the pending images 9A and 9B, the storage number of the first special figure suspension displayed on the first special figure suspension display 43a described later, and the second special figure suspension displayed on the second special figure suspension display 43b can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner for the player. The pending digest image display area includes a pending digest display area that displays a pending digest image 9C. The pending digested image 9C corresponds to the production pattern (the production pattern 8L, 8C, 8R) currently fluctuating on the display screen 7a or the display screen 7b. 2 It is possible to display in an easy-to-understand manner for the player that the special figure reservation is digested ("extraction of special figure suspension" described later).

On the left side of the image display device 7, a first board movable body 14 (also referred to as a first movable accessory 14), which is a movable so-called gimmick, is provided. The first movable accessory 14 is configured such that a vertically long rod-shaped member can move in the left-right direction in front of the image display device 7 (front surface). The first movable accessory 14 is normally stationary at the retracted position (FIG. 1) on the left side of the image display device 7, moves (advances) from the retracted position toward the right end of the display screen 7a, and is displayed on the display screen 7a. can rest in any advanced position in front of the The first movable accessory 14 is formed to have substantially the same length as the vertical direction of the image display device 7, and covers part of the image display device 7 from top to bottom at the advanced position.

Above the image display device 7, a second board movable body 15 (also referred to as a second movable accessory 15), which is a movable so-called gimmick, is provided. The second movable accessory 15 is configured such that a rectangular member (decorative portion) labeled with "OARO" can move in the vertical direction. The second movable accessory 15 is normally stationary at the retracted position (FIG. 1) above the image display device 7, and is displayed by moving (advancing) downward from the retracted position toward the center of the display screen 7a. It can stand still at the advanced position in front of the screen 7a. The second movable accessory 15 covers part of the image display device 7 when stopped at the advanced position.

A stage portion 11 is formed below the image display device 7 . The stage portion 11 has a shape capable of guiding a game ball rolling on the upper surface of the stage portion 11 to a first starting port 20 which will be described later. A warp section 12 is provided at the lower left of the image display device 7 . The warp part 12 has an entrance part into which game balls flow in and an exit part from which game balls flow out, and the game balls flowing in from the entrance part flow out to the stage part 11 from the exit part.

A fixed winning device (navel) 19 is arranged below the image display device 7 in the game area 3, and is a first start opening (first start winning opening, first ball entry opening) in which the ease with which a game ball enters is always unchanged. port, fixed starting port) 20. Winning of the game ball to the first starting port 20 triggers a first special symbol lottery (jackpot lottery). In other words, the winning of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is a trigger for the acquisition of the jackpot random number and the like and the jackpot determination and the like.

A normal variable winning device (electric chew) 22 is arranged below the first starting port 20 in the game area 3, and has a second starting port (second starting winning port, second ball entrance, variable starting port) 21. ing. Winning of the game ball to the second starting port 21 triggers a second special symbol lottery (jackpot lottery). The electric chew 22 has a movable member 23 in front of the second starting port 21 , and the second starting port 21 is opened and closed by the operation of the movable member 23 . The movable member 23 is driven by an electric tuning solenoid 24 (FIG. 3). A game ball can enter the second starting port 21 when the movable member 23 is in an open state. It is sufficient for the electric chew 22 to enter the second starting port 21 more easily when the movable member 23 is in the open state than when the movable member 23 is in the closed state. It may be possible to enter the ball into.

The gate (through chucker) 28 is arranged above the first big winning device (first attacker) 31 in the game area 3, and is configured to allow game balls to pass through. Passage of the game ball to the gate 28 triggers a normal symbol lottery for determining whether or not to open the electric chew 22.例文帳に追加In other words, the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 triggers acquisition of a normal symbol random number (hit random number), hit determination, and the like.

Here, the "lottery for special symbols" means that when a game ball wins in the first start port 20 or the second start port 21, a random number for special symbol determination is obtained, and the obtained random number is determined in advance. It is a process of determining whether or not a big hit is made by comparing with the value corresponding to the "big hit". The lottery result of this "jackpot" is not immediately notified to the player, but the variable display of the special symbol is performed on the first special symbol display device 41a or the second special symbol display device 41b, which will be described later, and the predetermined variation is performed. When the time elapses, the special symbol corresponding to the lottery result is stopped and displayed (determined display), and the player is notified of the lottery result. In the image display device 7, a pattern matching game for variably displaying performance patterns is performed in synchronism with the variable display of the special patterns, and the result of the lottery of the big win is reported to the player more effectively by the pattern matching game.

In addition, the "lottery of normal symbols" means that when a game ball passes through the gate 28, a random number for normal symbol determination is obtained, and the obtained random number is compared with a value corresponding to a predetermined "hit". By doing so, it means the process of judging whether or not it is a hit. As for the lottery result of this normal pattern, the game ball passes through the gate 28 and the lottery result is not immediately reported, but the normal pattern is displayed in a normal pattern display device 42 to be described later, and the predetermined fluctuation is performed. When the time elapses, the normal symbol corresponding to the lottery result is fixedly displayed (lighted or extinguished), and the player is notified of the lottery result.

The first big winning device (first attacker, first special variable winning device) 31 is arranged above and to the right of the first starting port 20 in the game area 3, and the first big winning port (first special winning port) 30 and , a V region 39 , a non-V region 70 , and a V opening/closing member 71 . The first big winning hole 30 has an opening/closing member (first special winning hole opening/closing member) 32 that permits or inhibits reception of game balls by a swing-type opening/closing operation. The opening/closing member 32 is driven by a first grand prize winning solenoid 33 (FIG. 3). A game ball can enter the first big winning hole 30 when the opening/closing member 32 is in an open state.

The first big prize winning device 31 has a V area (specific area) 39, a V area sensor 39a (FIG. 3), a non-V area (non-specific area) 70, and a non-V area sensor 70a (FIG. 3). , a first prize winning hole sensor 30a (FIG. 3), a V opening/closing member 71, and a V opening/closing member solenoid 73 (FIG. 3). The V area (specified area) 39 and the non-V area (non-specified area) 70 are configured as areas inside the first big winning device 31 through which game balls that have passed through the first big winning hole 30 can pass. . The first big winning hole sensor 30 a is arranged upstream of the V area 39 and the non-V area 70 and detects the winning of the game ball into the first big winning hole 30 . The V area sensor 39 a is arranged in the V area 39 and detects passage of a game ball to the V area 39 . The non-V area sensor 70 a is arranged in the non-V area 70 and detects passage of a game ball to the non-V area 70 . The V opening/closing member 71 distributes the game ball that has passed through the first big winning hole 30 to either the V area 39 or the non-V area 70 . The V opening/closing member solenoid 73 drives the V opening/closing member 71 . The V opening/closing member 71 is configured to rotate (clockwise and counterclockwise with respect to the game board 2), and when the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is energized, it rotates counterclockwise from the origin position to release the game ball. A first state (rotating state) in which the ball is distributed to the V area 39 is entered, and a second state (stopped state) in which the game ball is positioned at the origin and distributed to the non-V area 70 is entered when the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is not energized. . In addition, the V opening and closing member 71 is not limited to rotational movement, and may have a function of distributing the game ball that has passed through the first big winning hole 30 to either the V area 39 or the non-V area 70. For example, It may be configured to move in the horizontal direction with respect to the game board 2 . That is, when the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is energized, it becomes a retracted state (first state) in which game balls are distributed to the V area 39, and when the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is not energized, it is in an advanced state in which game balls are distributed to the non-V area 70. (Second state). In the gaming machine 1, passage of the game ball to the V area 39 triggers a transition to a high probability state, which will be described later. That is, the V region 39 is a variable probability operating port. On the other hand, the non-V region 70 is not a variable probability operating port. The first big winning device 31 of this embodiment further includes a first big winning device discharge sensor (not shown) that counts the number of game balls discharged from the first big winning device 31 . The first big winning device discharge sensor is provided at a point where the V area 39 and the non-V area 70 merge downstream, and counts the number of game balls that have passed through the V area sensor 39a or the non-V area sensor 70a.

The second big winning device (second attacker, second special variable winning device) 36 is arranged above the first big winning port 30 in the game area 3, and the second big winning port (second special winning port) 35 It has The second big prize winning opening 35 is provided with an opening/closing member (second special winning opening opening/closing member, movable member) 37 that obstructs or permits reception of game balls by a swing-type opening/closing operation. The opening/closing member 37 is driven by a second prize winning opening solenoid 38 (FIG. 3). A game ball can enter the second big winning hole 35 when the opening/closing member 37 is in an open state.

The large winning opening opening start opening 17 is arranged above the first large winning opening 30 in the game area 3, and the first large winning opening 30 is opened when the game ball passes. However, the gaming machine 1 does not have to include the big winning opening opening start opening 17 .

The general winning opening 27 is provided in the lower part of the game area 3 . The out port 16 is provided in the lower part of the game area 3, and discharges out of the game area 3 game balls that have not won any prize winning openings. The display devices 40 are arranged near the center on the right side of the game board 2 . The details of the display devices 40 will be described later. The general winning opening 29 is arranged in the lower right part of the game area 3 and adjacent to the right side of the first big winning opening 30 .

The game area 3 includes a left game area 3A on the left side of the center in the horizontal direction and a right game area 3B on the right side. A hitting method of shooting a game ball so that the game ball flows down the left game area 3A is called "left hitting". On the other hand, the hitting method of shooting the game ball so that the game ball flows down the right game area 3B is called "right hitting". In the gaming machine 1, it is possible to aim for winning the first start hole 20 by hitting left. On the other hand, it is configured so that it is possible to aim to pass through the gate 28 and to win the second starting hole 21, the first big winning hole 30, and the second big winning hole 35 by hitting to the right.

FIG. 2 is an enlarged view of the indicators 40. As shown in FIG. The display devices 40 include a first special symbol display device 41a, a second special symbol display device 41b, a normal symbol display device 42, a first special symbol reservation display device 43a, and a second special symbol reservation display device 43b. , and a normal map holding display 44 . The first special symbol display 41a variably displays the first special symbol. The second special symbol display 41b variably displays the second special symbol. The normal symbol display 42 variably displays normal symbols. The 1st special figure reservation indicator 43a displays the number of memory of operation reservation (1st special figure reservation) of the 1st special design indicator 41a. The 2nd special figure reservation indicator 43b displays the number of memory of operation reservation (2nd special figure reservation) of the 2nd special design indicator 41b. The normal pattern holding display 44 displays the number of memory of operation holding (normal pattern holding) of the normal pattern display 42 . The variable display of the first special symbol is triggered by the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 20. - 特許庁The variable display of the second special symbol is performed with the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 21 as a trigger. Below, the 1st special design and the 2nd special design are named generically, and it is also called a "special design." Also, the first special symbol display device 41a and the second special symbol display device 41b are collectively referred to as "special symbol display device 41". Further, the first special figure reservation display 43a and the second special figure reservation display 43b are also collectively referred to as "special figure reservation display 43".

The special symbol display device 41 variably displays (variable display) the special symbol (identification information), and then displays it in a stopped state, so that a lottery (lottery per special symbol) based on winning the first start port 20 or the second start port 21 is displayed. , jackpot lottery) results. A special symbol to be stopped and displayed (a stop symbol, a special symbol derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one special symbol selected from a plurality of types of special symbols by a special symbol lottery. When the stop pattern is a special pattern (jackpot pattern) of a predetermined jackpot stop mode, the first big prize opening 30 is opened in an opening pattern corresponding to the type of the stopped jackpot pattern (type of jackpot won). Alternatively, a special game (jackpot game) for opening the second big winning hole 35 is performed. The opening patterns of the big winning holes (the first big winning hole 30 and the second big winning hole 35) in the special game will be described later.

The special symbol display device 41 is composed of eight LEDs arranged side by side, and displays a special symbol according to the result of the special symbol winning lottery according to the lighting mode thereof. For example, if you win a jackpot (one of the multiple types of jackpots described later), you can say ``○○●●○○●●'' (○: lit, ●: unlit). , 5th and 6th LEDs light up to display the jackpot symbols. If the game is lost, a lost pattern is displayed in which only the rightmost LED lights up, such as "●●●●●●●○". A mode in which all the LEDs are extinguished may be adopted as the lost pattern. Before the special symbols are stopped and displayed, the special symbols are variably displayed (variably displayed) for a predetermined variation time. As for the aspect of the variable display, for example, each LED may light so that the light repeatedly flows from left to right. The mode of variable display is not limited to the above mode, but can be any lighting mode, as long as each LED is not displayed in a stopped state (lighting display in a specific mode). For example, all LEDs may blink simultaneously in the variable display mode.

In the gaming machine 1, when a game ball enters the first start port 20 or the second start port 21 (enters a ball), the values (numerical information) of various random numbers such as jackpot random numbers acquired for the win are , It is temporarily stored in the special figure reservation storage area 85 (FIG. 5). Specifically, if it is a prize to the first start port 20, it is stored in the first special figure reservation storage area 85a (FIG. 5) as a first special figure reservation, and if it is a prize to the second start port 21 , is stored in the second special figure reservation storage area 85b (FIG. 5) as the second special figure reservation. There is an upper limit to the number of special figure reservations that can be stored in each special figure reservation storage area 85, and the upper limit value in this embodiment is the first special figure reservation storage area 85a and the second special figure reservation storage area 85b. There are four. The special figure reservation stored in the special figure reservation storage area 85 is consumed when the variable display of the special symbol based on the special figure reservation becomes possible. "Digestion of special figure reservation" means to determine a jackpot random number or the like corresponding to the special figure reservation and execute variable display of special symbols for showing the determination result. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1, when the variable display of the special symbols based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 20 or the second start port 21 cannot be performed immediately after the winning, that is, the execution of the variable display of the special symbols. Even if a prize is won during execution of a special game, the right of a jackpot lottery for the prize can be reserved with a predetermined number as the upper limit. The number of special figure reservations is displayed on the special figure reservation indicator 43 . The 1st special figure reservation indicator 43a and the 2nd special figure reservation indicator 43b are each constituted by four LEDs, for example. Each special figure reservation indicator 43 displays the number of special figure reservations by turning on LEDs corresponding to the number of special figure reservations.

The variable display of normal symbols is performed when the game ball passes through the gate 28 as a trigger. The normal symbol display device 42 notifies the result of the normal symbol lottery based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 by displaying the normal symbols variably (variably displaying) and then stopping the display. A normal pattern to be stopped and displayed (a normal pattern stop pattern, a normal pattern derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one normal pattern selected from a plurality of types of normal patterns by a normal pattern lottery. When the normal pattern stop pattern is a predetermined specific normal pattern (a normal pattern of a predetermined stop mode, ie, a normal winning pattern), an auxiliary game that opens the second start port 21 in an opening pattern according to the current game state. is done. The opening pattern of the second starting port 21 will be described later.

The normal symbol display device 42 is composed of two LEDs, and displays a normal symbol according to the result of the normal symbol lottery according to the lighting mode thereof. For example, when the lottery result is a win, a normal win pattern with both LEDs lit up is displayed, such as "○○" (○: lights up, ●: lights out). When the lottery result is a loss, a normal losing pattern in which only the right LED lights up is displayed, such as "●○". A mode in which all the LEDs are extinguished may be employed as a normal losing pattern. Before the normal symbols are stop-displayed, the normal symbols are varied and displayed for a predetermined variation time. As for the aspect of the variable display, for example, both LEDs may alternately light up. The mode of variable display is not limited to the above mode, but can be any lighting mode, as long as each LED is not displayed in a stopped state (lighting display in a specific mode). For example, all LEDs may blink simultaneously in the variable display mode.

In the gaming machine 1, when a game ball passes through the gate 28, the value of the normal symbol random number (hit random number) acquired for the passage is stored in the normal pattern reservation storage area 86 (FIG. 5) as a normal pattern reservation. memorized once. There is an upper limit to the number of normal pattern reservations that can be stored in the general pattern reservation storage area 86, and the upper limit value in this embodiment is four. The normal pattern reservation stored in the normal pattern reservation storage area 86 is terminated when the variable display of the normal pattern based on the normal pattern reservation becomes possible. The digestion of the normal pattern reservation means that the normal design random number (hit random number) corresponding to the normal pattern reservation is determined, and the normal design variable display is performed to show the determination result. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1, when the variable display of the normal symbols based on the passage of the game ball through the gate 28 cannot be performed immediately after the passage, that is, during the execution of the variable display of the normal symbols or during the execution of the auxiliary game, a prize is won. Even if there is, it is possible to reserve the right of the normal symbol lottery for the passage, with a predetermined number as the upper limit. The number of normal map reservations is displayed on the normal map reservation display 44 . The normal map hold indicator 44 is composed of, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal map reserves by lighting the LEDs by the number of normal map reserves.

2. Electrical Configuration of Gaming Machine The electrical configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 3 and 4. FIG. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control board side of the gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sub-control board side of the gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. The gaming machine 1 includes a main control board 80 (FIG. 3), a sub control board 90 (FIG. 4), an image control board 100 (FIG. 4), a lamp control board 107 (FIG. 4), and an audio control board 106 ( 4) and a payout control board 110 (FIG. 3). The main control board 80 is a game control board that controls game profits such as jackpot lottery and game state transition, and constitutes a main control unit. The sub-control board 90 is an effect control board that controls effects executed as the game progresses, and constitutes a sub-control section together with the image control board 100, the lamp control board 107, and the sound control board 106. It should be noted that the sub-control section can be configured as long as it includes at least the sub-control board 90 .

The main control board 80 includes a game control microcomputer 81 and an input/output circuit 87 . The game control microcomputer 81 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the main control board 80, and controls the progress of the game of the gaming machine 1 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a main ROM 83 that stores programs for controlling the progress of the game, a main RAM 84 that is used as a work memory, and a main CPU 82 that executes the programs stored in the main ROM 83. contains. Details of the data stored in the main ROM 83 and details of the storage areas provided in the main RAM 84 will be described later. The main ROM 83 may be configured as an external ROM. The game control microcomputer 81 transmits and receives data to and from other boards and the like via an input/output circuit (I/O port section) 87 . The input/output circuit 87 may be built in the game control microcomputer 81 .

Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87 and a relay board 88 . The main control board 80 receives signals output from each sensor and outputs signals to each solenoid. Sensors connected via the relay board 88 include the large winning opening opening sensor 17a, the first starting opening sensor 20a, the second starting opening sensor 21a, the gate sensor 28a, the first large winning opening sensor 30a, the 2 major winning opening sensor 35a, V area sensor 39a, non-V area sensor 70a, and normal winning opening sensors 27a, 29a are illustrated. Examples of the solenoids connected via the relay board 88 include the electric tuning solenoid 24, the first big winning opening solenoid 33, the second big winning opening solenoid 38, and the V opening/closing member solenoid 73. The large winning opening opening starting opening sensor 17 a is provided inside the large winning opening opening starting opening 17 and detects a game ball that has entered the large winning opening opening starting opening 17 . The first starting hole sensor 20 a is provided inside the first starting hole 20 and detects a game ball that has entered the first starting hole 20 . The second starting hole sensor 21 a is provided inside the second starting hole 21 and detects a game ball that has entered the second starting hole 21 . The gate sensor 28 a is provided inside the gate 28 and detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 28 . The first big winning hole sensor 30 a is provided inside the first big winning hole 30 and detects a game ball that has won the first big winning hole 30 . The second big winning hole sensor 35 a is provided inside the second big winning hole 35 and detects a game ball that has won the second big winning hole 35 . The V area sensor 39 a is provided in the V area 39 inside the first big winning hole 30 and detects a game ball that has passed through the V area 39 . The non-V area sensor 70 a is provided in the non-V area 70 inside the first big winning hole 30 and detects a game ball that has passed through the non-V area 70 . The normal winning hole sensor 27 a is provided inside the normal winning hole 27 and detects a game ball that has entered the normal winning hole 27 . The normal winning hole sensor 29 a detects a game ball that has passed through the normal winning hole 29 . The electric chew solenoid 24 drives the movable member 23 of the electric chew 22 . The first big winning opening solenoid 33 drives the opening/closing member 32 of the first big winning device 31 . The second big prize opening solenoid 38 drives the opening/closing member 37 of the second big prize winning device 36 . The V opening/closing member solenoid 73 drives the V opening/closing member 71 of the first big winning device 31 .

The display devices 40 are connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87 . The game control microcomputer 81 includes a first special symbol display device 41a, a second special symbol display device 41b, a normal symbol display device 42, a first special symbol reservation display device 43a, a second special symbol reservation display device 43b, and a general design reservation. Display control for the display device 44 is performed.

A payout control board 110 is connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87 . The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110 and receives signals from the payout control board 110 for payout monitoring. The payout control board 110 is connected with a prize ball payout device 120 , a rental ball payout device 130 and a card unit 135 , and is connected with a launcher 112 via a launch control circuit 111 . The prize ball payout device 120 pays out prize balls. The payout control board 110 drives the prize ball motor 121 of the prize ball payout device 120 based on the signal from the game control microcomputer 81 to pay out the prize balls. Prize balls to be dispensed are detected by a prize ball sensor 122 for counting. The rental ball dispensing device 130 discharges the rental balls. The payout control board 110 drives the rented ball motor 131 of the rented ball payout device 130 based on the signal from the card unit 135 connected to the gaming machine 1 to pay out the rented balls. The rented balls to be paid out are detected by a rented ball sensor 132 for counting. The card unit 135 is arranged adjacent to the gaming machine 1, and outputs information regarding ball lending based on information such as the inserted prepaid card. Firing device 112 includes handle 60 ( FIG. 1 ), firing motor 113 , touch switch 114 , and firing volume 115 . When the player operates the handle 60 , the shooting device 112 detects the contact of the handle 60 with the touch switch 114 and detects the amount of rotation of the handle 60 with the shooting volume 115 . Then, the shooting motor 113 is driven so that the game ball is shot with strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the shooting volume 115 .

A sub control board 90 ( FIG. 4 ) is connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87 . The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub control board 90 . The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90 is a unidirectional communication connection that allows only transmission of signals from the main control board 80 to the sub control board 90 . That is, between the main control board 80 and the sub-control board 90, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode) (not shown) is interposed as communication direction control means.

The sub-control board 90 includes a production control microcomputer 91 and an input/output circuit 95 . The effect control microcomputer 91 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the sub-control board 90, and controls the game effect of the game machine 1 according to a program. The performance control microcomputer 91 includes a sub ROM 93 for storing programs and the like for controlling the performance as the game progresses, a sub RAM 94 used as a work memory, and a sub ROM 93 for executing the programs stored in the sub ROM 94. and a CPU 92 . Details of the data stored in the sub-ROM 93 and details of the storage areas provided in the sub-RAM 94 will be described later. The sub ROM 93 may be configured as an external ROM. The effect control microcomputer 91 transmits and receives data to and from other boards and the like via an input/output circuit (I/O port section) 95 . The input/output circuit 95 may be built in the effect control microcomputer 91 . An image control board 100 , an audio control board 106 , a lamp control board 107 and a relay board 108 are connected to the sub control board 90 via an input/output circuit 95 .

The image control board 100 includes an image control microcomputer 101, an input circuit 105a, and an output circuit 105b. The image control microcomputer 101 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the image control board 100, and performs display control of the image display device 7 and the sub display screen 64 according to a program. The image control microcomputer 101 includes a CPU 102 , a ROM 103 and a RAM 104 . In the ROM 103, in addition to programs for performing display control, still image data and moving image data displayed on the image display device 7 and the sub-display screen 64, specifically, characters, items, graphics, characters, numbers and symbols are stored. etc. (including production patterns) and image data such as background images are stored. A RAM 104 is used as a memory for developing image data. The CPU 102 executes programs stored in the ROM 103 . The effect control microcomputer 91 causes the image control microcomputer 101 to control the display of the image display device 7 and the sub display screen 64 based on the command received from the main control board 80 . The image control microcomputer 101 reads out image data from the ROM 103 based on a command from the effect control microcomputer 91, and performs display control based on the read image data.

A speaker 67 is connected to the audio control board 106 , and based on commands received from the main control board 80 , the effect control microcomputer 91 outputs sounds, music, and sound effects from the speaker 67 via the audio control board 106 . and so on. Acoustic data such as voice output from the speaker 67 is stored in the sub ROM 93 of the sub control board 90 . Note that the audio control board 106 may have a CPU mounted thereon, and the CPU may execute audio control based on commands. Furthermore, the audio control board 106 may be implemented with a ROM, and the audio data may be stored in the ROM. Alternatively, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100 to cause the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 to perform voice control. Furthermore, the sound data may be stored in the ROM 103 of the image control board 100. FIG.

The frame lamp 66, the board lamp 5, the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and the frame movable accessory 69 are connected to the lamp control board 107, and these are controlled. . The effect control microcomputer 91 performs lighting control of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 via the lamp control board 107 based on the command received from the main control board 80 . In other words, the production control microcomputer 91 creates light emission pattern data (data for deciding on/off and emission color, also referred to as lamp data) that determines the light emission mode of the lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5, and creates light emission patterns. Light emission of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 is controlled according to the data. Data stored in the sub-ROM 93 of the sub-control board 90 is used to create the light emission pattern data. The effect control microcomputer 91 operates the first movable accessory 14 , the second movable accessory 15 and the frame movable accessory 69 based on the command received from the main control board 80 . The effect control microcomputer 91 creates motion pattern data (driving data) for determining the motion mode of each of the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and the frame movable accessory 69, and operates according to the motion pattern data. It controls the operations of the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and the frame movable accessory 69. Data stored in the sub ROM 93 is used to create the operation pattern data. Note that the lamp control board 107 may have a CPU mounted thereon, and the CPU may execute lighting control of the lamp and operation control of the movable accessories 14 and 15 based on commands. In this case, the lamp control board 107 may be mounted with a ROM, and the ROM may store data relating to light emission patterns and operation patterns.

A performance button detection switch 63a and a select button detection switch 68a are connected to the relay board 108 . The production button detection switch 63a detects that the production button 63 (FIG. 1) is pressed. When the effect button 63 is pressed, a switch signal is output from the effect button detection switch 63a to the sub-control board 90 via the relay board 108. A vibration motor is attached to the effect button detection switch 63a, and is driven according to a signal from the relay board 108, so that the effect button 63 can be vibrated. The select button detection switch 68a detects that the select button 68 has been pressed. A sword member detection switch for detecting that the sword member 65 has been detected is also connected to the relay board 108 .

3. Data Configuration of Gaming Machine The data configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6. FIG. FIG. 5A is a diagram for explaining a table stored in the main ROM 83. FIG. FIG. 5B is a diagram for explaining storage areas provided in the main RAM 84. As shown in FIG. FIG. 6A is a diagram for explaining the table stored in the sub ROM 93. As shown in FIG. FIG. 6B is a diagram for explaining storage areas provided in the sub-RAM 94. As shown in FIG.

The main ROM 83 (FIG. 5(A)) contains a jackpot determination table T1, a reach determination table T2, a normal symbol hit determination table T3, a normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4, a jackpot type determination table T5, and a variation pattern. A judgment table T6, an electric chew opening pattern judgment table T7, a big winning opening pattern judgment table T8, and a V opening/closing member opening pattern judgment table T9 are stored. These determination tables are referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 in main control main processing (described later) executed by the game control microcomputer 81 . Specific contents of each determination table will be described later.

The main RAM 84 (FIG. 5(B)) includes a command set area 84a, a flag set area 84b, a counter set area 84c, a special action status set area 84d, a special figure pending storage area 85, and a normal figure pending storage. A region 86 is provided. The command set area 84a is an area (output buffer) in which a command to be output from the main control unit side to the sub control unit side is set in the main control main processing (described later), and is a pre-determining command, a pending pitch command, A variation start command, a variation stop command, an opening command, a round designation command, an ending command, a game state designation command, a V passage command, a customer waiting command, etc. are set. The flag set area 84b is an area where flags indicating the state of the gaming machine and the game state are set in the main control main process (described later), and the jackpot flag, jackpot end flag, first prize flag, second prize flag, A ceiling flag, a V flag, a variable probability flag, a time saving flag, etc. are set. The counter set area 84c is an area where counters used in the main control main process (described later) are set, such as a random number counter, a round counter, a ceiling counter, a variable probability counter, and a time saving counter. The special action status set area 84d is an area in which a status is set for special action processing, which will be described later. The special figure reservation storage area 85 includes a first special figure reservation storage area 85a in which the first special figure reservation is stored, and a second special figure reservation storage area 85b in which the second special figure reservation is stored. In the first special figure reservation storage area 85a, a random number group (reservation information) such as a random number per special symbol corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth of the first special figure reservation A first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided for storing. In the second special figure reservation storage area 85b, the first for storing the random number group (reservation information) corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth of the second special figure reservation A storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided. The general pattern reservation storage area 86 stores a random number group (reservation information) such as normal pattern random numbers (per random numbers) corresponding to the 1st, 2nd, 3rd, and 4th general pattern reservations. A first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided. In addition to the above areas, the main RAM 84 also contains a win type set buffer in which special figure stop symbol data is set, and drive data for driving the movable accessories 14 and 15 and the frame movable body 600. A drive data buffer and the like are provided. The information stored in the main RAM 84 is not cleared even when the power of the game machine 1 is turned off and on, and is maintained as it is. That is, the commands, flags, counters, status information, and pending information described above do not change their states even when the power is turned off and on, and the information is maintained. On the other hand, the information stored in the main RAM 84 is reset by RAM clear of the gaming machine 1 . When reset, the ceiling flag is set to "ON" and the other flags are set to "OFF" as the initial state of the flags. Also, as the initial state of the counters, "500" is set in the ceiling counter and "0" is set in the other counters.

The sub-ROM 93 (FIG. 6A) stores a look-ahead effect pattern determination table T51, a basic effect pattern determination table T52, a chance up effect pattern determination table T53, and a stop symbol pattern determination table T54. . These determination tables are referred to by the effect control microcomputer 91 in sub-control main processing (described later) executed by the effect control microcomputer 91 . Specific contents of each determination table will be described later.

The sub-RAM 94 (FIG. 6B) is provided with a command storage area 94a, an effect command set area 94b, a prior determination information storage area 94c, and a counter set area 94d. The command storage area 94a is an area (input buffer) in which commands input from the main control unit side are stored in the sub-control main process (described later). A stop command, an opening command, a round designation command, an ending command, a game state designation command, a V passage command, a customer waiting command, etc. are stored. The effect command set area 94b is an area ( It is an output buffer), and a variable production start command, a command before the end of fluctuation, a variable production end command, an opening production start command, a round production start command, an ending production start command, etc. are set. The prior determination information storage area 94c stores prior determination information in a sub-control main process (described later). The counter set area 94d is an area where the counters used in the sub-control main process (described later) are set, such as a random number counter, a first special figure pending effect counter, a second special figure pending effect counter, a general figure pending effect counter. , Ceiling production counter, overnight production counter, probability variable production counter, time saving production counter, etc. are set. Of the information stored in the sub-RAM 94, the information other than the overnight effect counter is maintained without being cleared even when the power of the game machine 1 is turned off and on. That is, the above-mentioned commands, counters other than the late-night production counter, and advance determination information do not change their states even when the power is turned off and on, and the information is maintained. The overnight performance counter is reset by turning off and on the power of the game machine 1, and 0 is set as an initial state. Information stored in the sub-RAM 94 is reset by RAM clear of the gaming machine 1 . When reset, 500 is set in the ceiling effect counter and 0 is set in the other counters as the initial state of the counter.

FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining various random numbers used in the gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. FIG. 7A shows random numbers acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 on the main control section side, and FIG. 7B shows random numbers acquired by the effect control microcomputer 91 on the sub control section side. there is The game control microcomputer 81 acquires a "jackpot random number", a "jackpot type random number", a "reach random number", a "fluctuation pattern random number", and a "normal symbol random number (hit random number)" at the timing described later. is configured as The “jackpot random number” is a random number used for lottery (jackpot determination) to determine whether or not a jackpot will be won, and takes a value ranging from 0 to 65,535. The “jackpot type random number” is a random number used for the lottery (jackpot type determination) of the type of the winning jackpot, and takes a value in the range of 0-127. "Reach random number" is a random number used to determine whether or not to generate a reach in the effect symbol variation effect that indicates the result when the big hit determination is a loss, and is a value in the range of 0 to 127. take. Reach is a state in which only one of the plurality of production patterns (decorative patterns) that is displayed in a variable manner remains, and it depends on which design the variable display design is stopped and displayed. It is a state (for example, the state of "7↓7") that is a combination of performance symbols indicating a jackpot winning. In addition, the effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the ready-to-win state may be displayed as if it is shaking within the display screen 7a. “Variation pattern random number” is a random number used to determine a variation pattern including variation time, and takes a value in the range of 0-127. “Normal symbol random number (hit random number)” is used for a lottery (normal symbol lottery) for determining whether or not to perform an auxiliary game for opening the electric chew 22 . The normal symbol random number takes a value in the range of 0-255. The "jackpot random number", "jackpot type random number", "reach random number", and "fluctuation pattern random number" are obtained based on the ball entering the starting port (first starting port 20 or second starting port 21). The random value group obtained based on the ball entering the first starting port 20 is stored in the first special figure reservation storage area 85a, and the random value group obtained based on the ball entering the second starting port 21 is It is stored in the second special figure reservation storage area 85b. “Normal symbol random number (hit random number)” is acquired based on passing through the gate 28 . The acquired normal symbol random number value is stored in the normal symbol reservation storage area 86 .

The effect control microcomputer 91 is configured to acquire a "read-ahead effect random number" and a "chance-up random number" at timings described later. The “read-ahead effect random number” is a random number used for determining the look-ahead effect during the variable effect, and takes a value in the range of 0-127. The “chance-up random number” is a random number used for determining the chance-up effect during the variable effect, and takes a value in the range of 0-127. The "read-ahead effect random number" is acquired based on the output of a pre-determination command from the main control section to the sub-control section. The acquired random value group is stored in the sub-RAM 94 . The "chance-up random number" is acquired based on the output of a variation start command from the main control section to the sub-control section. The acquired random number value is stored in the sub-RAM 94 .

FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining the determination tables T1 to T4. FIG. 8A shows a diagram for explaining the jackpot determination table T1, FIG. 8B shows a diagram for explaining the reach determination table T2, and FIG. shows a diagram for explaining the normal symbol hit determination table T3, and FIG. 8D shows a diagram for explaining the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4.

The jackpot determination table T1 determines whether the jackpot random number value (one of 0 to 65535) obtained by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) corresponds to a "jackpot" or a "loss". It is a table referred to for determination. In FIG. 8 (A), in the "normal probability state", if the jackpot random value is "0 to 164", it is determined to be a "jackpot", and the jackpot random value is a number other than "0 to 164 (165 to 65535 )” is determined to be “losing”. Also, in the "high probability state", if the jackpot random value is "0 to 649", it is determined as a "jackpot", and if the jackpot random value is "a number other than 0 to 649 (650 to 65535)" is determined to be "losing". The contents of the "normal probability state" and the "high probability state" will be described later.

In the reach determination table T2, the game control microcomputer 81 obtains a reach random number (any of 0 to 127) in the main control main process (described later) corresponds to "with reach" or "without reach". This table is referenced to determine whether In FIG. 8 (B), in the "non-time saving state", if the reach random value is "0 to 13", it is determined to be "with reach", and the reach random value is a number other than "0 to 13 (14 to 127)” is determined to be “no reach”. Also, in the "time saving state", if the reach random number is "0 to 5", it is determined that there is reach, and if the reach random number is "a number other than 0 to 5 (6 to 127)" is determined to be "no reach". The contents of the "time saving state" and the "non-working time saving state" will be described later. In the reach determination table T2, the reach at the time of loss is less likely to be applied in the time saving state than in the non-working time saving state. This is to speed up the digestion speed of the special figure reservation by selecting more reach no loss with short fluctuation time in the time saving state.

In the normal symbol hit determination table T3, the normal symbol random number value (any one of 0 to 255) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) corresponds to "win" or "loss". This table is referenced to determine whether to In FIG. 8 (C), in the "non-time saving state", if the normal symbol random number is "0 to 2", it is determined to be "hit", and the normal symbol random number is a number other than "0 to 2 (3 ~ 255)” is determined to be “losing”. Also, in the "time saving state", if the normal symbol random number is "0 to 254", it is determined as "hit", and if the normal symbol random number is "a number other than 0 to 254 (255)" , is determined as “losing”.

In the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4, the game control microcomputer 81 determines how many seconds the normal symbol variation time is according to the game state (whether it is a non-time saving state or a time saving state) in the main control main process (described later). This table is referenced to In FIG. 8 (D), when the "non-time-saving state", the normal pattern variation time is determined to be "30 seconds", and when the "time-saving state", the normal pattern variation time is determined to be "1 second". is shown.

FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining the jackpot type determination table T5. The jackpot type determination table T5 is the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later), according to the jackpot type random number value (any of 0 to 127) acquired, "jack type" and "special symbol It is a table referred to in order to determine "type". In FIG. 9, when winning in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1), if the jackpot type random number is "0 to 24", the jackpot type is determined to be "16RV passage scheduled jackpot", and the special figure 1 stop design (special stop design) is determined as "jackpot design 1". When the jackpot type random value is "25 to 49", the jackpot type is determined as "16RV passage scheduled jackpot", and the special figure stop design is determined as "jackpot design 2". When the jackpot type random value is "50 to 55", the jackpot type is determined as "16R (actually 15R) V passage scheduled jackpot", and the special figure stop pattern is determined as "jackpot pattern 3". When the jackpot type random number value is "56 to 67", the jackpot type is determined as "16R (real 13R) V passage scheduled jackpot", and the special figure stop pattern is determined as "jackpot pattern 4". When the jackpot type random number value is "68 to 127", the jackpot type is determined as "16R (actually 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot", and the special figure stop symbol is determined as "jackpot symbol 5". On the other hand, when winning in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2), if the jackpot type random number is "0 to 82", the jackpot type is determined to be "16RV passage scheduled jackpot", and the special figure 2 A stop symbol (a special figure stop symbol) is determined to be a "jackpot symbol 1". When the jackpot type random number value is "83 to 127", the jackpot type is determined as "16R (actually 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot", and the special figure stop symbol is determined as "jackpot symbol 5". By referring to the jackpot type determination table T5, "special figure stop symbol data" corresponding to the special figure stop symbol, special game "opening (OP) command", "round designation command", "ending (ED) command" can also be specified. For the specific contents of "16RV planned passage jackpot", "16R (real 15R) V planned passage jackpot", "16R (real 13R) V planned passage jackpot" and "16R (real 13R) V non-passage planned jackpot" will be described later.

FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the variation pattern determination table T6 during the non-time saving state. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining the variation pattern determination table T6 during the time saving state. Variation pattern determination table T6 is a table referred to for determining a variation pattern according to the variation pattern random number value (0 to 127) acquired in main control main processing (described later) by the game control microcomputer 81. . In FIG. 10, for example, the first start port 20 is won in a non-time saving state, it is determined to be "losing" in the big hit determination table T1, it is determined to be "with reach" in the reach determination table T2, and the number of retained balls is "1 ~ 2" and the variation pattern random number is "0 to 60", the variation pattern is determined to be "P7". In FIG. 11, for example, the second start port 21 is won in the time saving state, it is determined as "jackpot" in the jackpot determination table T1, and it is determined as "16RV passage scheduled jackpot" in the jackpot type determination table T5, variation pattern random value is "0 to 10", the variation pattern is determined to be "P61". As shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, once the variation pattern is determined, the variation time is also determined. In addition, when it becomes reach, it is also determined whether the reach becomes normal reach or super reach (SP reach). Super reach is a reach production with a longer fluctuation time after reach than normal reach. Here, five types of super reach (SP1, SP2, SP3, SP4, SP5) with different fluctuation times are set. In SP1-3, it is executed progressively through normal reach. The difference between SP1 to SP5 may be, for example, the presence or absence of pseudo-reams.

FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining the electric tube opening pattern determination table T7. The electric chew opening pattern determination table T7 is used by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) in order to determine the opening pattern of the electric chew 22 according to the game state (whether it is a non-time saving state or a time saving state). It is a referenced table. In FIG. 12(A), the open pattern of the electric tube 22 is determined as "open pattern 11" in the "non-time saving state", and the open pattern is determined as "open pattern 12" in the "time saving state". is shown. FIG. 12B shows the contents of open pattern 11 and open pattern 12 . In the opening pattern 11, the power tube 22 is opened once for 0.2 seconds. In the opening pattern 12, the electric tube 22 is opened three times, with an opening time of 2.0 seconds per time, and an interval (opening interval) of 1.0 second. However, the opening of the electric chew 22 is closed even if the opening time remains when a predetermined number of game balls have won a prize (prescribed number of winning prizes, maximum 10).

FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the big winning opening opening pattern determination table T8. The game control microcomputer 81 uses the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) to determine the large winning opening opening pattern determination table T8 according to the special figure stop symbol data (FIG. 9). 35 is a table referenced to determine the T.35 opening pattern. In FIG. 13(A), when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "12H", or "21H", the opening pattern of the first big winning hole 30 and the second big winning hole 35 is "opening pattern 21 ”, and when the special figure stop design data is “14H”, “15H”, “22H”, the open pattern is determined as “open pattern 22”, and when the special figure stop design data is “13H”, open It is shown that the pattern is determined to be "open pattern 23". FIG. 13B shows the contents of open pattern 21, open pattern 22, and open pattern 23. FIG. In the opening pattern 21, in the 1st to 13th and 15th rounds, the number of times of opening is 1 and the opening time is 29.5 seconds (long opening). The opening (long opening) of the second big winning opening 35 with an opening time of 29.5 seconds is performed. In the opening pattern 22, in the 1st to 13th rounds, the number of openings is 1 and the opening time is 29.5 seconds (long opening). The second big prize winning opening 35 is opened for 0.1 seconds (short opening), and the first big winning opening 30 is opened once for 0.1 seconds at the 15th round (short opening). . In the opening pattern 23, in the 1st to 13th and 15th rounds, the number of openings is 1 and the opening time is 29.5 seconds (long opening). The second big prize winning port 35 is opened for 0.1 seconds (short opening), and at the 16th round, the second big prize winning port 35 is opened once for 29.5 seconds (long opening). . However, the opening of the first big winning hole 30 and the second big winning hole 35 is, if there is a predetermined number of game ball wins (regular winning number, maximum 9), even if the opening time remains Closed.

FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining the V opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9. The V opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9 is used by the game control microcomputer 81 to determine the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 according to the special figure stop symbol data (FIG. 9) in the main control main process (described later). It is a referenced table. In FIG. 14A, when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "12H", or "21H", the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 is determined as "open pattern 31", and the special figure stop symbol data When the data is "13H", the open pattern is determined as "open pattern 32", and when the special figure stop design data is "14H", the open pattern is determined as "open pattern 33", and the special figure stop design data is It is shown that the open pattern is determined to be "open pattern 34" when "15H" or "22H". FIG. 14B shows the contents of open pattern 31, open pattern 32, open pattern 33, and open pattern . In the opening pattern 31, in the 2nd, 4th, 6th, and 8th rounds, when the first winning opening 30 receives the first prize, the V opening/closing member 71 is short-opened with an opening time of 0.1 second. In the 10th and 12th rounds, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is short-opened with an opening time of 0.1 second, and when the second prize is won, the opening time is reached. A long opening of the V opening/closing member 71 is performed for a maximum of 31.5 seconds. In the opening pattern 32, in the 2nd, 4th, 6th, and 12th R's, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is short-opened with an opening time of 0.1 second. In the 8th and 10th rounds, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is short-opened with an opening time of 0.1 second, and when the second prize is won, the opening time is A long opening of the V opening/closing member 71 is performed for a maximum of 31.5 seconds. In the opening pattern 33, in the 2nd and 6th rounds, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is short-opened with an opening time of 0.1 second, and when the second prize is won. The V opening/closing member 71 is opened for a long time with an opening time of maximum 31.5 seconds. In the 4th, 8th, 10th, and 12th rounds, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is short-opened with an opening time of 0.1 second. In the opening pattern 34, in the 2nd, 4th, 6th, 8th, 10th, and 12th rounds, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is short-opened with an opening time of 0.1 second. .
open the port.

4. Explanation of Big Wins, etc. In the gaming machine 1, there are "big wins" and "losses" as a result of a big win lottery (special symbol lottery). In the case of "big win", the special symbol display 41 stops displaying "big win". In the case of "losing", the special symbol display 41 stops and displays "losing". When the jackpot is won, the jackpot game opens the jackpots (the first jackpot 30 and the second jackpot 35) in an opening pattern corresponding to the type of the special symbol that is stopped and displayed (the jackpot type). ” is executed. A jackpot game is an example of a special game. The jackpot game includes multiple round games (unit open games), an opening (OP) before the first round game starts, and an ending (ED) after the final round game ends. there is Each round begins with the end of the opening or the end of the previous round and ends with the beginning of the next round. The closing time (interval time) of the big winning opening between round games is included in the open round game before closing.

There are multiple types of jackpots. The types of jackpots are as shown in FIG. Here, the types of jackpots are roughly divided into two types, namely, "V-passing scheduled jackpot" and "V non-passing scheduled jackpot". The ``V passage scheduled jackpot'' operates the opening/closing member 32, the opening/closing member 37 and the V opening/closing member 71 in an opening pattern (V passage scheduled opening pattern) that allows the game ball to pass through the V area 39 during the big winning game. It's a big hit. Here, special figure stop symbol data 11H~14H, 21H big hits correspond to "V passage scheduled big hits (probability variable big hits)". The combination of the opening pattern of the opening/closing member 32 and the opening/closing member 37 shown in FIG. 13 and the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 shown in FIG. ), or (open pattern 23: open pattern 32), it is possible for the game ball to pass through the V area 39 during the jackpot game. The "V non-passing scheduled jackpot (normal jackpot)" is an opening pattern (V non-passing scheduled opening pattern) in which the game ball cannot pass through the V area 39 during the jackpot game. It is a big win that activates the V opening/closing member 71 . Here, the jackpots with the special figure stop symbol data of 15H and 22H correspond to the "V non-passing scheduled jackpot". When the combination of the opening pattern of the opening/closing member 32 and the opening/closing member 37 shown in FIG. 13 and the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 shown in FIG. Passage of a game ball to 39 becomes impossible. As described above, the opening pattern 22 of the opening/closing member 32 and the opening/closing member 37 serves both as the V-passing planned opening pattern and the V-non-passing planned opening pattern.

The "V passage scheduled jackpot" includes "16RV scheduled passage jackpot", "16R (actually 13R) V passage scheduled jackpot", and "16R (substantially 15R) V passage scheduled jackpot". The "16RV scheduled jackpot" has a substantial total number of rounds of 16R. From 1R to 13R and 15R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R. 14R and 16R open the 2nd prize-winning mouth 35 for 29.5 seconds at the maximum per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 21). In 10R and 12R, the V opening/closing member 71 is long opened (FIG. 14: opening pattern 31), and passage to the V area 39 in the first big winning hole 30 is easily possible.

"16R (substantially 13R) V expected passing jackpot" has a total number of rounds of 16R, but a substantial total number of rounds is 13R. In other words, from 1R to 13R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in 15R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened only for 0.1 second per 1R, and 14R and 14R are open. Even in 16R, the second big winning opening 35 is opened only for 0.1 second per 1R (Fig. 13: opening pattern 22). Therefore, in this "16R (substantially 13R) V-passing scheduled jackpot", from 14R to 16R, the opening time of the big prize opening is extremely short, and the rounds are such that no prize balls can be expected. In other words, the "16R (substantially 13R) V passage scheduled jackpot" is a substantially 13R jackpot. In 2R and 6R, the V opening/closing member 71 is long opened ( FIG. 14 : opening pattern 33 ), and passage to the V area 39 in the first big winning hole 30 is easily possible.

"16R (substantial 15R) V scheduled passing jackpot" has a total number of rounds of 16R, but a substantial total number of rounds is 15R. In other words, from 1R to 13R and 15R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, and in the 16R, the second big prize opening 35 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in the 14R The second big winning opening 35 is opened only for 0.1 seconds per 1R (Fig. 13: opening pattern 23). Therefore, in this "16R (substantially 15R) V passage scheduled jackpot", 14R is a round in which the opening time of the big winning hole is extremely short and no prize balls can be expected. In other words, the "16R (substantially 15R) V passage scheduled jackpot" is a substantially 15R jackpot. In 8R and 10R, the V opening/closing member 71 is long opened ( FIG. 14 : opening pattern 32 ), and passage to the V area 39 in the first big winning hole 30 is easily possible.

The "V non-passing scheduled jackpot" is a "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" of the open pattern 22 in which the total number of rounds is 16R, but the substantial total number of rounds is 13. In other words, from 1R to 13R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in 15R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened only for 0.1 second per 1R, and 14R and 14R are open. Even in 16R, the second big winning opening 35 is opened only for 0.1 second per 1R (Fig. 13: opening pattern 22). Therefore, in this "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot", from 14R to 16R, the opening time of the big prize opening is extremely short, making it a round in which prize balls cannot be expected. That is, the "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" is a substantially 13R jackpot. In 2R, 4R, 6R, 8R, 10R and 12R, although the V opening/closing member 71 is opened, the opening is short opening (Fig. It is almost impossible for a game ball to pass through.

As is clear from the above description, the "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" and "16R (substantially 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot" are the first big prize opening 30 and the second big prize opening 35 ( The opening pattern of the opening/closing member 32 and the opening/closing member 37) is the same (opening pattern 22), and only the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 is different (opening pattern 34 and opening pattern 33). In addition, as will be described later, "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" and "16R (substantially 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot" are performed after the jackpot game is completed. It's becoming That is, in the "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot", it is almost impossible for the game ball to pass through the V area 39 in the first big winning hole 30, and the game state after the jackpot is It becomes a low-probability short-time state (low-probability high base state). On the other hand, in the "16R (substantially 13R) V-passing scheduled jackpot", the game ball can easily pass through the V area 39 in the first big winning hole 30, and the game state after the jackpot is highly certain. It becomes a time saving state (high accuracy high base state). As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to distinguish between the "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" and the "16R (substantially 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot", and the game state after the jackpot is not certain. It becomes difficult to determine whether it will be a time saving state (low probability high base state) or a high probability time saving state (high probability high base state). In addition, after the time-saving game is finished, the game state becomes a low probability base state (normal state) in "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot", and the game state in "16R (substantially 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot" appears to be in a normal high probability low base state. That is, in the "16R (substantially 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot", when the game ball passes through the V area 39 in the first big winning hole 30, when the time saving state after the jackpot game ends, the game state is A high-probability-low base state with a high probability becomes a latent state (variable latent probability state), and it is difficult for the player to discern the variable latent probability state. That is, "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot", "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot", "16R (substantial 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" Low probability time saving state (low probability high base state) and “16R (substantially 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot” high-probability time-saving state (high-probability high-base state) after the jackpot game, and “16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot” time-saving end The later low-probability-low base state and the high-probability-low base state after the time-saving end of "16R (substantially 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot" are performed in a manner that is difficult for the player to distinguish.

Also, as shown in FIG. 9, the distribution ratio of the jackpot in the lottery for the first special symbol (special pattern 1) is 68/128 (about 53%) for the V-passing scheduled jackpot and 60/60 for the V non-passing scheduled jackpot. 128 (about 47%). On the other hand, the distribution rate of the jackpot in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is 83/128 (about 64.8%) for the V-passing scheduled jackpot and 45/128 (about 64.8%) for the V non-passing scheduled jackpot. 35.2%). As described above, in the gaming machine 1, the jackpot lottery (lottery of the first special symbol) is performed by winning a game ball in the first start port 20, and the jackpot is performed by winning a game ball in the second start port 21. The lottery (lottery for the second special symbol) is set to be more advantageous for the player.

5. Explanation of Game State The game state of the gaming machine 1 will be explained. The game control microcomputer 81 can execute "probability variation control" and "variation time shortening control" for the special symbols displayed on the special symbol display device 41 and the normal symbols displayed on the normal symbol display device 42, respectively. is. Here, the state in which the game control microcomputer 81 is controlling the probability variation with respect to the special symbol of the special symbol display device 41 is called "high probability state (high probability state, probability variation state, probability variation state)", and the probability variation A non-controlled state is simply called a "normal probability state (non-high probability state, low probability state, normal state)". The game control microcomputer 81 uses a jackpot determination table (FIG. 8A) in which the number of jackpot random numbers determined to be jackpots is larger in the high probability state than in the normal probability state as the probability variation control of the special symbols. A high probability state is realized by performing a big hit determination. Therefore, in the high-probability state, the probability of winning a jackpot is higher than in the normal-probability state. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 is executing the probability variation control for the special symbols of the special symbol display device 41, compared with the case where the probability variation control is not performed, the special symbol display device 41 The probability that the display result (stopped pattern) of the variable display of the special pattern becomes a jackpot pattern increases.

In addition, the state in which the game control microcomputer 81 performs variable time shortening control on the special symbols of the special symbol display 41 is referred to as a "time saving state", and the state in which the variable time shortening control is not performed is simply a "non-time saving state". It says. In the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the special symbol (the time from the start of the fluctuation display to the time of derivation display of the display result) is shorter than the non-time saving state. The game control microcomputer 81, when in the time saving state, the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIGS. 10 and 11) is determined so that the variation pattern with a short variation time is selected more often than in the non-time saving state. The variation pattern used is determined. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 is executing the variation time shortening control for the special symbols of the special symbol display 41, the special symbols are variable compared to the case where the variation time shortening control is not performed. A short variation time is likely to be selected as the display variation time. As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace of digestion of the special figure reservation becomes faster, and the effective winning to the starting opening (the winning that can be stored as the special figure reservation) is likely to occur. As a result, it is possible to aim for a big hit under the smooth progress of the game. Incidentally, the game control microcomputer 81 may simultaneously execute the probability fluctuation control and the fluctuation time shortening control for the special symbols on the special symbol display 41, or may execute only one of them.

The game control microcomputer 81 executes probability variation control and variation time shortening control for the normal symbols of the normal symbol display 42 in synchronization with variation time shortening control for the special symbols of the special symbol display 41 . That is, the game control microcomputer 81 normally executes the probability fluctuation control and the fluctuation time shortening control for the symbol in the case of the time saving state, and does not execute it in the case of the non-time saving state. The game control microcomputer 81, as the probability variation control of normal symbols, normal symbol hit determination table T3 ( Using FIG. 8 (C)), hit determination (normal symbol determination) is performed. Therefore, in the time saving state, the probability of winning is higher than in the normal symbol normal probability state. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 is performing the probability variation control on the normal symbols of the normal symbol display device 42, compared with the case where the probability variation control is not performed, the normal symbol display device 42 The probability that the display result (stopped pattern) of the variable display of the normal pattern becomes a winning pattern increases. In the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal pattern is shorter than the non-working time saving state. Here, the variation time of the normal symbol is 30 seconds in the non-time saving state, but is 1 second in the time saving state (FIG. 8(D)). Furthermore, in the time saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 22 in the auxiliary game is longer than the non-time saving state (Fig. 12). That is, the game control microcomputer 81 is executing opening time extension control for the electric chew 22 . In addition, in the time-saving state, the number of times the electric chew 22 is opened in the auxiliary game is greater than in the non-time-saving state (FIG. 12). That is, the game control microcomputer 81 is executing the control for increasing the number of times of opening the electric chew 22 . game control microcomputer 81, the probability variation control and variation time shortening control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42, and the opening time extension control and opening frequency increase control for the electric chew 22, Compared to the case where these controls are not executed, the electric chew 22 is opened more frequently, and the game balls enter the second starting port 21 more frequently. As a result, the base, which is the ratio of the number of balls awarded to the number of balls fired, increases. Therefore, the state in which these controls are executed is called the "high base state", and the state in which they are not executed is called the "low base state". In the high base state, you can aim for a big hit without greatly reducing the number of game balls you have. Note that the high base state is a state in which so-called electric support control (control for supporting winning to the second starting port 21 by the electric chew 22) is being executed. The high base state (electric sapo control state) does not have to execute all of the above controls. That is, the probability variation control for the normal pattern of the normal symbol display device 42, the variation time shortening control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display device 42, the opening time extension control for the electric chew 22, and the opening frequency increase control for the electric chew 22 By executing one or more controls, it is sufficient that the electric chew 22 is more likely to be opened than when the controls are not executed. Further, the high base state (electrical support control state) may be independently controlled without accompanying the time saving state.

In the game machine 1, the game state after the jackpot game by winning the V passage scheduled jackpot is a high-probability state, a short-time state and a high-base state if the passage to the V area 39 is made during the jackpot game. . This game state is particularly referred to as a "high probability high base state" or a "high probability short working time state". Specifically, the jackpot in which the game state after the jackpot game is in the high-probability-high base state is, among the jackpot types shown in FIG. 16R (substantially 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot”. "16RV scheduled passing jackpot" and "16R (substantially 15R) V passing scheduled jackpot" are such that, in the high probability high base state, after the jackpot game, the next jackpot (next jackpot) is won and the jackpot game is executed. ends with "16R (substantially 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot" is a high-probability-high base state, after the jackpot game, a predetermined number of times (here, 100 times) special symbol variable display is executed High-probability low base state (latent probability variable state), or the next jackpot (next jackpot) is won and the jackpot game is executed. In addition, the game state after the jackpot game by winning the V non-passing scheduled jackpot is normal probability state (non-high probability state (i.e., low-probability state) and time-saving state and high-base state. This game state is particularly referred to as "low probability high base state" and "low probability time saving state". Specifically, the jackpot in which the game state after the jackpot game becomes the low-probability base state is the “16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot” among the jackpot types shown in FIG. In this jackpot, in the low-probability base state, after the jackpot game, the variable display of the special pattern is executed a predetermined number of times (here, 100 times), or the next jackpot (next jackpot) is won and the jackpot is won. The game ends when the game is executed. When the game machine 1 is played for the first time, the game state after power-on is a normal probability state, a non-time-saving state, and a low-base state (non-electric support control state). This game state is particularly referred to as a "low probability low base state". The low-probability low base state may be referred to as "normal game state" or "low-probability non-time-saving state (simply referred to as non-time-saving state)". In addition, the state during execution of the special game (jackpot game) may be referred to as "special game state (jackpot game state)". Furthermore, the state controlled to at least one of the high probability state and the high base state may be referred to as a "specific game state".

In high-base states such as high-probability-high base state and low-probability-high base state, it is possible to advance the game more advantageously by entering the game ball into the right game area 3B (FIG. 1) by hitting to the right. Due to the electric sapo control, it is easier to open the electric tube 22 than in the low base state, and it is easier to win the second start opening 21 than the first start opening 20. be. From this, in the high base state, while passing the game ball to the gate 28 that triggers the normal symbol lottery, the game ball is struck to the right to win the game ball to the second start port 21.例文帳に追加As a result, it is possible to obtain a larger number of starting prizes (winning at the starting opening) than when hitting left. In addition, in the gaming machine 1, the game is played by hitting to the right even during the jackpot game. On the other hand, in the low base state, it is possible to advance the game more advantageously by entering the game ball into the left game area 3A (FIG. 1) by hitting to the left. Since the electric sapo control is not executed, it is difficult to open the electric chew 22 compared to the high base state, and it is easier to win the first start opening 20 than the second start opening 21. This is because For this reason, in the low base state, left-handed hitting is performed in order to win the game ball to the first start hole 20. - 特許庁This allows you to get more starting prizes than hitting right.

6. Operation of Game Control Microcomputer 81 The operation of the game control microcomputer 81 provided on the main control board 80 (FIG. 3) will be described with reference to FIGS. Counters, flags, statuses, buffers, etc. appearing in the description of the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the main RAM 84 . The game control microcomputer 81 corresponds to the success/failure determination means (FIG. 23) and the success/failure preliminary determination means (FIGS. 18 and 19).

[Main control main processing]
FIG. 15 is a flowchart of main control main processing. When the game machine 1 is powered on, the game control microcomputer 81 reads a program for executing main control main processing from the main ROM 83 . In the main control main process, the game control microcomputer 81 first performs initial setting (step S001). In the initial setting, for example, setting of the main CPU 82, resetting of various flags, statuses, counters, and the like are performed. As for the initial value of the flag, the ceiling flag is "1", ie, "ON", and the initial value of the other flags is "0", ie, "OFF". The initial value of status is "1". The initial value of the counter is "500" for the ceiling counter and "0" for the other counters. Note that the initial setting is performed only once after the power is turned on, and is not performed thereafter.

After the initial setting, the game control microcomputer 81 prohibits the interruption of the interruption process (step S002), and performs normal design/special design main random number update process (step S003). In this normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 controls various random number counter values (jackpot random number, jackpot type random number, reach random number, variation pattern random number) shown in FIG. , Normal random number) is added by 1 and updated. When each random number counter value reaches the set upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0", or may be changed randomly. Also, each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated using a known random number generation circuit such as a counter IC.

After the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 permits the interruption of the interruption process (step S004). While interrupts are enabled, it is possible to execute main-side timer interrupt processing (step S005). The main-side timer interrupt processing is executed based on interrupt pulses that are repeatedly input to the main CPU 82 at a predetermined cycle (for example, a 4 msec cycle). That is, the main-side timer interrupt processing is executed at predetermined intervals (for example, 4 msec intervals). Then, after the main side timer interrupt processing is finished, until the next main side timer interrupt processing is started, the update processing of various counter values by the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update processing is repeatedly executed. . If an interrupt pulse is input to the main CPU 82 while interrupts are disabled, the main-side timer interrupt processing is not started immediately, but is started after interrupts are enabled.

[Main side timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 16 is a flowchart of main-side timer interrupt processing (FIG. 15: step S005). In the main timer interrupt process, the game control microcomputer 81 first performs random number update process (step S101). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 updates various random number counter values shown in FIG. 7(A). This random number update process is the same as the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process performed in the main control main process (FIG. 15) described above. That is, the processing for updating the various random number counter values consists of the execution period of the main-side timer interrupt processing and the other period (the period from the end of the main-side timer interrupt processing to the start of the next main-side timer interrupt processing). and both.

After the random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs an input process (step S102). In the input process, the game control microcomputer 81 reads detection signals detected by various sensors attached to the gaming machine 1, and outputs payout data for paying out prize balls according to the type of winning hole to the main RAM 84. set in the buffer. The various sensors include, for example, a first starting opening sensor 20a, a second starting opening sensor 21a, a first large winning opening sensor 30a, a second large winning opening sensor 35a, a normal winning opening sensor 27a, and a normal winning opening sensor 29a (Fig. 3).

After the input process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a starting opening sensor detection process (step S103), a normal operation process (step S104), a special operation process (step S105), a V area sensor detection process (step S106), and a reserved ball. The number processing (step S107) is executed in order. Details of these processes will be described later. After the reserved ball number processing, the game control microcomputer 81 performs output processing (step S108). In the output process, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs to the sub-control board 90 the commands set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 in each process described above. After the output process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processes (step S109). In other processing, for example, based on the number of special-figure 2 reserved balls to be described later, the second special-figure reservation display 43b is controlled to a display mode indicating the number, and the first special-figure based on the number of special-figure 1 reserved balls The pending indicator 43a is controlled to display the number.

[Starting port sensor detection process]
FIG. 17 is a flow chart of the starting opening sensor detection process (FIG. 16: step S103). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the gate 28 (step S201). This determination is made depending on whether or not the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 28a. If the game ball has not passed through the gate 28 (step S201: NO), the process skips to step S205. When the game ball passes through the gate 28 (step S201: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of normal symbol reserved balls is "4 (upper limit)" (step S202). The number of normal pattern reserved balls is the number of normal pattern reservations, more specifically, the value of a counter that counts the number of normal pattern reservations provided in the main RAM 84 . If the normal design reserved ball number is "4" (step S202: YES), the process skips to step S205. When the normal symbol reserved ball number is "3" or less (step S202: NO), after adding "1" to the normal symbol reserved ball number (step S203), a normal symbol random number acquisition process is performed (step S204). Here, the game control microcomputer 81 acquires the normal symbol random number counter value (FIG. 7: label-TRND-H value), and stores the acquired random number value in the normal symbol reservation storage area 86 of the main RAM 84. Among the fourth storage areas, it is stored in a storage area corresponding to the current number of normal symbol reserved balls.

In step S205, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game ball has entered the second starting port 21. FIG. This determination is made depending on whether or not the game ball is detected by the second starting opening sensor 21a. When the game ball has not won the second starting port 21 (step S205: NO), the process skips to step S210. When the game ball wins (step S205: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "4 (upper limit)" (step S206). The number of special figure 2 reservation balls is the number of second special figure reservations, and more specifically, the value of a counter that counts the number of second special figure reservations provided in the main RAM 84 . If the number of special figure 2 pending balls is "4" (step S206: YES), the process skips to step S210. If the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "3" or less (step S206: NO), after adding "1" to the number of special figure 2 reserved balls (step S207), special figure 2 related random number acquisition processing is performed (step S208). Here, the value of the jackpot random number counter (Figure 7: label-TRND-A value), the value of the jackpot type random number counter (Figure 7: label-TRND-AS value), the reach random number counter value (Figure 7: label -TRND-RC value) and the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (FIG. 7: Label-TRND-T1 value). The game control microcomputer 81 stores the acquired random value group in the storage area corresponding to the current special figure 2 reservation ball number among the first to fourth storage areas of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b. The game control microcomputer 81 temporarily stores the acquired random number group in a buffer (preliminary determination buffer) different from the second special figure reservation storage area 85b for the special figure 2 preliminary determination process (FIG. 18) described later. stored (retained). After the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special figure 2 preliminary determination process (step S209). The details of the special figure 2 pre-determination process will be described later.

In step S210, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game ball has entered the first start hole 20. FIG. This determination is made depending on whether or not the game ball is detected by the first starting opening sensor 20a. When the game ball has not won the first start hole 20 (step S210: NO), this process is terminated. When the game ball wins the first start port 20 (step S210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is "4 (upper limit)" ( step S211). The number of special figure 1 reservation balls is the number of the first special figure reservations, and more specifically, the value of the counter that counts the number of the first special figure reservations provided in the main RAM 84 . If the special figure 1 reserved ball number is "4" (step S211: YES), this process is terminated. If the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is "3" or less (step S211: NO), after adding "1" to the number of special figure 1 reserved balls (step S212), special figure 1 related random number acquisition processing is performed (step S213). Here, the value of the jackpot random number counter, the value of the jackpot type random number counter, the value of the reach random number counter, and the value of the variation pattern random number counter are obtained in the same manner as the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (step S208) described above. The game control microcomputer 81 stores the obtained random number group in the storage area corresponding to the current special figure 1 reserved ball number among the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a. The game control microcomputer 81 temporarily stores the obtained random number group in a buffer (preliminary determination buffer) different from the first special figure reservation storage area 85a for the special figure 1 preliminary determination process (FIG. 19) described later. stored (retained). After the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special figure 1 preliminary determination process (step S214). The details of the special figure 1 pre-determination process will be described later.

[Special figure 2 pre-determination process]
FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the special figure 2 preliminary determination process (FIG. 17: step S209). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (step S301). If the probability variation flag is OFF (step S301: NO), this process ends. That is, when the probability variation flag is OFF, the prior determination is not performed. On the other hand, when the variable probability flag is ON, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the high-probability state table in the big-hit determination table T1 (FIG. 8) to perform the big-hit prior determination (step S302). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires a jackpot random value as a determination value temporarily stored in the preliminary determination buffer by special figure 2 related random number acquisition processing (FIG. 17: step S208) do. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a prior determination of whether or not the game is a big hit by using the big hit determination table T1 (FIG. 8) to be referred to and the big hit random number value. Here, since the high probability state (probability variation flag is ON), the game control microcomputer 81 selects the table for the high probability state (jackpot determination value is "0" to "649") among the jackpot determination tables T1. Refer to it and determine in advance whether it is a big hit or not. That is, when the big hit random number is "0" to "649", it is pre-determined as "big hit", and when it is any other value, it is pre-determined as "losing". In addition, in this embodiment, the prior determination is performed using the jackpot determination table T1 used in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 23) to be described later. Pre-determination may be performed using the jackpot determination table.

If the result of the jackpot preliminary determination is "losing" (step S304: NO), the process skips to step S306. On the other hand, when the result of the jackpot pre-determination is "jackpot" (step S304: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs the jackpot type pre-determination (step S305). In the jackpot type pre-determination, the game control microcomputer 81 is, first, a jackpot type random value as a determination value temporarily stored in the buffer for pre-determination by special figure 2 related random number acquisition processing (FIG. 17: step S208) to get Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs prior determination of the jackpot type based on the obtained jackpot type random number value and the jackpot type determination table T5 (FIG. 9). Here, even if the jackpot type random value is any of "0" to "127", it is determined in advance as "16RV passage scheduled jackpot". It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, the prior determination is performed using the jackpot type determination table T5 used in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 23) to be described later, but as another embodiment, different from the jackpot type determination table T5 Prior determination may be performed using a jackpot type determination table for determination.

In step S306, the game control microcomputer 81 performs fluctuation pattern prior determination. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81, first, variation pattern random number as a determination value temporarily stored in the pre-determination buffer by the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208), And get the reach random value. Next, here, since the time saving state (the time saving flag is ON), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the time saving state (FIG. 11), the jackpot prior determination result of step S304, Reach presence or absence pre-determined results obtained from the reach random number, and the fluctuation pattern is specified from the fluctuation pattern random number. In addition, in the variation pattern determination table T6 of FIG. 11, the variation pattern to be selected may differ depending on the number of held balls. Here, it is assumed that all variation patterns that can be selected depending on the difference in the number of held balls are selected. For example, from the jackpot pre-determination result and the reach presence/absence pre-determination result, it is pre-determined that there is a reach, and when the fluctuation pattern random number value is "60", the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the number of pending balls is "1-2 and the variation pattern "P68" which is selected when the number of held balls is "3 to 4". In this embodiment, the variation pattern determination table T6 used in the later-described variation pattern selection process (FIGS. 24 and 25) is used for preliminary determination, but as another embodiment, the variation pattern determination table T6 Pre-determination may be performed using a variation pattern determination table for pre-determination different from.

In step S307, the game control microcomputer 81 creates a pre-determination command. The pre-determination command includes a jackpot pre-determination result, (a jackpot type pre-determination result in the case of winning), and a variation pattern pre-determination result. The game control microcomputer 81 sets the created pre-determination command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S308), and ends this process.

[Special figure 1 pre-determination process]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the special figure 1 preliminary determination process (FIG. 17: step S214). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (step S401). Contrary to the special figure 2 pre-determining process described above, when the probability variation flag is ON (step S401: YES), this process is finished. That is, when the probability variation flag is ON, prior determination is not performed. On the other hand, when the probability variation flag is OFF (step S401: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the table for the normal probability state of the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) to perform the jackpot prior determination (step S402). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires a jackpot random value as a determination value temporarily stored in the preliminary determination buffer by special figure 1 related random number acquisition processing (FIG. 17: step S213) do. Next, here, since it is in the normal probability state (probability variable flag is OFF), the game control microcomputer 81 selects the normal probability state table (jackpot determination value is "0" to "164") out of the jackpot determination table T1. ”), it is determined in advance whether it is a big hit or not. That is, when the jackpot random number is "0" to "164", it is pre-determined as "big hit", and when it is any other value, it is pre-determined as "losing". Incidentally, for the jackpot preliminary determination, a jackpot determination table for preliminary determination that is different from the jackpot determination table T1 may be used. After that, the processing of steps S404 to S408 is the same as steps S304 to S308 of the above-described special figure 2 preliminary determination processing (FIG. 18), so the description is omitted.

[Normal operation processing]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart of normal operation processing (FIG. 16: step S104). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the electric chew 22 is in operation (step S501). If the electric chew 22 is in operation (step S501: YES), the process proceeds to step S520. When the electric chew 22 is not in operation (step S501: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the normal symbol is fluctuating (step S502). When the normal pattern is fluctuating (step S502: YES), the process skips to step S508. When the normal symbol is not fluctuating (step S502: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is "0" (step S503). If the number of pending balls is "0" (step S503: YES), this process is terminated. When the number of reserved balls is 1 or more (step S503: NO), the number of normal symbol reserved balls is decremented by 1 (step S504). Therefore, when the game ball passes through the gate 28 while the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is "0", in step S203 of the starting opening sensor detection process (FIG. 17), the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is temporarily set to "1". ”, and then, in this step S504, the reservation is digested and immediately the number of reserved balls of the normal design becomes “0”. This is the same for the number of reserved balls of special symbols. That is, in step S207 and step S212 of the starting opening sensor detection process (FIG. 17), the number of reserved special symbols is once set to "1", and then step S1404 and step in the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22) to be described later. At S1410, the reservation is digested and the number of reserved balls of the special symbol becomes "0". Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a hit determination with reference to the normal symbol hit determination table T3 (FIG. 8(C)) (step S505). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 is, first, the normal pattern random number value ( random number). Then, the normal symbol random number value, the game state (whether or not the time saving state), and the normal symbol winning determination table T3 are used to determine whether or not the game is successful. For example, in the non-time-saving state, when the normal symbol random number is "0" to "2", it is determined as "hit", and when the normal symbol random number is other than that, it is determined as "losing". (See FIG. 8(C)).

Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern with reference to the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4 (FIG. 8(D)) (step S506). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines the game state (whether or not it is a time saving state), and uses the determination result of the game state and the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4 to determine the normal symbol variation. Select the fluctuation time of the normal design as a pattern. Here, in the non-time saving state, the normal pattern variation time is determined as "30 seconds", and in the time saving state, the normal pattern variation time is determined as "1 second" (see FIG. 8(D)). . The game control microcomputer 81 sets the selected normal symbol variation pattern, thereby starting the variable display of the normal symbol (step S507).

In step S508, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the variation time of the normal symbols has passed and ended. The variable time in the normal design is the variable time selected in step S506 (see FIG. 8(D)). When the fluctuation time has not ended (step S508: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. That is, the variable display of normal symbols is continued. On the other hand, if the variable time has ended (step S508: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 stops the variable display (step S509), (Step S510: NO), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the case of "hit" in the above hit determination (step S510: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the electric chew opening pattern (step S511). The opening pattern of the electric chew 22 is selected with reference to the electric chew opening pattern determination table T7 (FIG. 12(A)). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the game state (whether or not it is a time-saving state), and uses the determination result of the game state and the electric chew opening pattern determination table T7 to determine the opening pattern of the electric chew 22. to select. Here, "opening pattern 11" is selected in the non-time-saving state, and "opening pattern 12" is selected in the time-saving state. After selecting the opening pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 starts the electric chewing operation so as to follow the selected opening pattern (step S512), and ends this process.

In the above-described step S501, when the electric chew 22 is in operation (step S501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the condition for closing the electric chew 22 is satisfied (step S520). The closing condition here is that the number of winning prizes to the electric chew 22 reaches the specified maximum winning number (for example, 6), or the time to close the electric chew 22 after the operating time of the electric chew 22 has passed Either one of the things that has been reached is fulfilled. The operating time of the electric chew 22 is the operating time corresponding to the opening pattern selected in step S511. When the closing condition of the electric chew 22 is not satisfied (step S520: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the electric chew 22 is satisfied (step S520: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (blocks) the electric chew 22 and stops its operation (step S521), and this process finish.

[Special action processing]
FIG. 21 is a flowchart of special operation processing (FIG. 16: step S105). Here, the processing relating to the special symbol display device 41 and the big winning device (the first big winning device 31 and the second big winning device 36) is divided into four stages, each of which has a "special action status" of "1", Call them "2", "3", and "4". When the "special action status" is "1" (step S1301: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a special symbol standby process (step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, big hit determination, variation pattern selection, and the like are executed. When the "special action status" is "2" (step S1301: NO, step S1303: YES), special symbol fluctuation processing is performed (step S1304). In the special symbol fluctuation process, the output of the fluctuation stop command and the like are executed after the fluctuation time has elapsed. When the "special action status" is "3" (steps S1301, S1303: NO, step S1305: YES), special symbol confirmation processing is performed (step S1306). In the special symbol confirmation process, the output of the opening command and the like are executed at the time of the big hit. When the "special action status" is "4" (steps S1301, S1303, S1305: NO), special electric accessory processing is performed (step S1308). In the special electric accessary product process, a jackpot game is executed. Details of each of the above processes will be described later. Note that the special action status is "1" by default.

[Special symbol standby process]
FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 21: step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "0" (step S1401). If the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "0" (step S1401: YES), that is, in the second special figure reservation storage area 85b, the random value group acquired due to the winning of the second start port 21 If not stored, the process moves to step S1407. When the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "1" or more (step S1401: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 executes a big hit determination process (step S1402) and a variation pattern selection process (step S1403). Details of these processes will be described later. After the variation pattern selection process, decrement the number of special figure 2 reserved balls by one (step S1404). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 moves the storage location of the pending information (various random values) stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the second special figure pending storage area 85b to the side read from the current position. While shifting by one, clear the pending information stored in the farthest place from the read side in the second special figure pending storage area 85b (step S1405). For example, when pending information is stored in the first to third storage areas, the pending information stored in the third storage area is cleared, and pending information is stored in the first to fourth storage areas. If so, clear the pending information stored in the fourth storage area. By the above steps, the second special figure reservation is digested in the order in which it was reserved. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reserved image 9B corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b (out of the four reserved images 9B, the leftmost reserved image 9B) is It shifts to the pending digested image display area side and is displayed as a pending digested image 9C. In addition, reserved images 9B corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b (out of the four reserved images 9B, the second, third, and fourth reserved images 9B from the left) are on the left side Shift by one (Fig. 1). Thereby, the player can recognize that one second special figure reservation has been consumed. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step S1406). In the special figure 2 fluctuation start process, the fluctuation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is started, and the fluctuation time timer is set. The variable time timer is set with a variable time determined according to the variable pattern selected in the variable pattern selection process. In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special action status to "2". In addition, the variation start command (special figure 2 variation start command) set in the special figure 2 variation start process includes information on the special figure stop pattern data set in the big hit determination process (step S1402) and variation pattern selection process ( It contains information on the variation pattern set in step S1403) (including information on variation time).

In step S1401, when the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "0" (step S1401: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is "0" ( step S1407). If the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is "0" (step S1407: YES), that is, the random value group acquired due to the winning of the first start port 20 is stored in the first special figure reservation storage area 85a If not stored, the process moves to step S1413. When the special figure 1 reserved ball number is "1" or more (step S1407: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 executes a big hit determination process (step S1408) and a variation pattern selection process (step S1409). Details of these processes will be described later. After the variation pattern selection process, the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is decremented by one (step S1410). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 shifts the storage location of various random numbers stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a by one to the side read from the current position. Along with clearing the pending information stored in the farthest place from the read side in the first special figure pending storage area 85a (step S1411). By the above steps, the first special figure reservation is digested in the order it was reserved. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reserved image 9A (of the four reserved images 9A, the rightmost reserved image 9A) corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a It shifts to the pending digested image display area side and is displayed as a pending digested image 9C. In addition, reserved images 9A corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a (out of the four reserved images 9A, the second, third, and fourth reserved images 9A from the left) are on the right side Shift by one (Fig. 1). Thereby, the player can recognize that one first special figure reservation has been consumed. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (step S1412). In the special figure 1 fluctuation start process, the fluctuation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started, and the fluctuation time timer is set. The variable time timer is set with a variable time determined according to the variable pattern selected in the variable pattern selection process. In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special action status to "2" (step S1406). In addition, the variation start command (special figure 1 variation start command) set in the special figure 1 variation start process includes information on the special figure stop pattern data set in the big hit determination process (step S1408) and variation pattern selection process ( It contains information on the variation pattern (including information on variation time) set in step S1409).

In step S1407, when the number of special-figure 1 reserved balls is "0" (step S1407: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is a standby screen (step S1413). The standby screen is a demo screen for waiting for customers. The game control microcomputer 81 may determine, for example, by ON/OFF of a demonstration screen display flag for customer waiting. If the standby screen is displayed (step S1413: YES), the process ends. If it is not the standby screen (step S1413: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 waits for the lapse of the predetermined standby time, and sets the customer waiting standby command for displaying the standby scene in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84. (Step S1414), this processing ends. As described above, according to the special symbol waiting process of the present embodiment, the variable display of the special symbol based on the first special symbol reservation is executed only when the second special symbol reservation is "0". That is, digestion of the second special figure reservation is executed with priority over digestion of the first special figure reservation. Further, according to the jackpot type determination table T5 of the present embodiment, the lottery based on the second special figure reservation is a jackpot (V passage scheduled jackpot) that is more profitable for the player than the lottery based on the first special figure reservation. It has become easier to be elected to

[Jackpot determination process]
FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the big hit determination process (FIG. 22: steps S1402 and S1408). Special Figure 2 big hit determination process (step S1402) and special figure 1 big hit determination process (step S1408) are similar in process flow, so they will be described collectively. In the jackpot determination process, first, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (step S1501). When the probability variation flag is ON (step S1501: YES), the high-probability state table in the big-hit determination table T1 (FIG. 8) is referred to and the big-hit determination is performed (step S1502). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out a big hit random number value as a determination value. For example, in the special figure 2 jackpot determination process, the jackpot random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first second special figure reservation) of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read. In the special figure 1 jackpot determination process, the jackpot random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first first special figure reservation) of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not it is a big hit by using the big hit determination table T1 and the big hit random number value to refer to. Here, since it is in a high probability state (probability variable flag is ON), whether or not it is a big hit based on the table for high probability state (jackpot determination value is "0" to "649") among the big hit determination tables T1 judge.

In step S1501, when the probability variation flag is OFF (step S1501: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the table for the normal probability state of the big hit determination table T1 (FIG. 8) to perform the big hit determination ( step S1504). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the jackpot random number value by the same method as in step S1502. Next, here, since it is in the normal probability state (probability variable flag is OFF), it is possible to determine whether the jackpot determine whether or not

When the result of the big hit determination is "big hit" (steps S1503, S1505: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the big hit flag (step S1506) and determines the big hit type (step S1507). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the jackpot type random number value as the determination value. For example, in the special figure 2 jackpot determination process, the jackpot type random value stored in the first storage area of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read. In the special figure 1 jackpot determination process, the jackpot type random value stored in the first storage area of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the jackpot type based on the read jackpot type random number value and the jackpot type determination table T5 (FIG. 9). After judging the jackpot type, the special figure stop symbol data (FIG. 9) corresponding to the specified jackpot type is set in the jackpot type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1520), and this process is finished. On the other hand, in step S1503 or step S1505, if the result of the big hit determination is "losing", the special figure stop design data (01H) corresponding to the losing design is set in the big hit type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1520). , the process ends.

[Variation pattern selection process]
24 and 25 are flowcharts of the variation pattern selection process (FIG. 22: steps S1403 and S1409). The variation pattern selection process of special figure 2 (step S1403) and the variation pattern selection process of special figure 1 (step S1409) are similar in process flow, so they will be collectively described. In the variation pattern selection process, first, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game state is the time saving state (step S1600). Determination of whether or not it is in the time saving state is made depending on whether or not the time saving flag is ON. When it is a time saving state (step S1600: YES), a process transfers to step S1612. If it is not in the time saving state (step S1600: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (step S1602). If the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1602: NO), the process proceeds to step S1607. When the jackpot flag is ON (step S1602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot is special figure 2 (step S1603). If the jackpot is a special figure 2 (step S1603: YES), the process skips to step S1605 because the jackpot type is always the V passage schedule jackpot. When the jackpot is the special figure 1 (step S1603: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the jackpot type is the V passage scheduled jackpot (step S1604), and the jackpot type determination is set in the main RAM 84. It is performed based on the special figure stop design data that has been done.

If the jackpot type is the V passage scheduled jackpot (step S1604: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 changes by referring to the table for the non-time-saving state V passage scheduled jackpot among the variation pattern determination tables T6 (FIG. 10). A pattern is selected (step S1605). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads a fluctuation pattern random number value as a determination value. For example, in the variation pattern selection process of special figure 2, the variation pattern random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first second special figure reservation) of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read. In the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 1, the variation pattern random number stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the first special figure reservation) of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern using the variation pattern determination table T6 and the variation pattern random number value. Here, as a table for the non-time-saving state V passage scheduled jackpot, of the variation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time-saving state shown in FIG. ” ~ “P3” part, in the special figure 2 the variation pattern is “P21” ~ “P23” part) is referred to (address is set). From the read variation pattern random number, in special figure 1, either "P1" ~ "P3" as a variation pattern, in special figure 2, either "P21" ~ "P23" is selected.

If the jackpot type is the V non-passing scheduled jackpot (step S1604: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the table for the non-time-saving state V non-passing scheduled jackpot among the variation pattern determination tables T6 (FIG. 10). to select a variation pattern (step S1606). Here, as a table for the non-time-saving state V non-passing scheduled jackpot, the portion corresponding to the V non-passing scheduled jackpot ("P4" to "P6") of the variation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time-saving state shown in FIG. ) are referenced. One of "P4" to "P6" is selected as the variation pattern from the read variation pattern random number value.

In step S1602, when the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1602: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the ready-to-win random number is a ready-to-win random number (step S1607). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out a reach random number as a determination value. In the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 2, the reach random number stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first second special figure reservation) of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read. In the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 1, the reach random number stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the first special figure reservation) of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the presence or absence of the reach using the reach determination table T2 (FIG. 8(B)) and the reach random number. Here, because it is a non-time-saving state, of the reach determination table T2, the reach based on the table for the non-time-saving state (reach determination value (reach establishment random number) is "0" to "13" part) Determine presence/absence.

When the reach random number is the reach establishment random number (step S1607: YES), that is, in the case of reach with loss, the game control microcomputer 81 changes the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10) to a non-time saving state. A variation pattern is selected by referring to the table for loss with reach (step S1608). Here, as a table for loss with non-time-saving state reach, out of the variation pattern determination table T6 for non-time-saving state shown in FIG. The part of "P14", the part of the variation pattern "P24" to "P31" in the special figure 2) is referred to. In the special figure 1, one of "P7" to "P14" is selected as the variation pattern from the read variation pattern random value and the current number of special figure 1 reserved balls (1 to 4). In the special figure 2, the read variation pattern random number, from the current number of special figure 2 reserved balls (1 to 4), either "P24" ~ "P31" is selected as the variation pattern. Since the selected variation pattern changes depending on the number of held balls, the function of shortening variation according to the number of held balls works. That is, in both special figures 1 and 2, when the number of reserved balls is "3" to "4", the fluctuation time is longer than when the number of reserved balls is "1" to "2". Short fluctuation patterns are being selected more often. As a result, when the number of retained balls is large, the digestion speed of special figure retention can be increased.

When the reach random number is not the reach establishment random number (step S1607: NO), that is, in the case of no reach loss, the game control microcomputer 81 changes the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10) to a non-time saving state. A variation pattern is selected by referring to the reach-less loss table (step S1609). Here, as a table for non-time-saving state reach-less loss, of the variation pattern determination table T6 for non-time-saving state shown in FIG. The part of "P16", the part of the variation pattern "P32" to "P33" in the special figure 2) is referred to. In the special figure 1, the fluctuation pattern random number value read out and the current number of special figure 1 reserved balls (1 to 4) are selected as the variation pattern, either "P15" or "P16". In the special figure 2, the read variation pattern random number, from the current number of special figure 2 reserved balls (1 to 4), either "P32" or "P33" is selected as the variation pattern. Also here, since the variation pattern to be selected changes depending on the number of held balls, the function of shortening variation according to the number of held balls works.

In step S1600, when it is determined that the game state is the time saving state, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (FIG. 25: step S1612). After that, the processing of steps S1613 to S1619 is the same as the processing of steps S1603 to S1609 described above except for the following points, so the description thereof is omitted. The difference between the processing of steps S1613 to S1619 and the processing of steps S1603 to S1609 is that in steps S1615, S1616, S1618, and S1619, the portion of the variation pattern determination table T6 referred to in steps S1605, S1606, S1608, and S1609 different from Specifically, in S1605, S1606, S1608, and S1609, the variation pattern determination table T6 for non-time saving state (FIG. 10) is referred to, whereas in steps S1615, S1616, S1618, and S1619, for time saving state The variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 11) is referred to. For example, in the case of step S1615, that is, when the jackpot type is the V passing scheduled jackpot, the part corresponding to the V passing scheduled jackpot (in the special figure 1, the variation pattern determination table T6 for the time saving state shown in FIG. 11 is "P41" ~ "P43" part, in the special figure 2 the variation pattern is "P61" ~ "P63" part) is referred to. From the read variation pattern random number, either "P41" ~ "P43" as a variation pattern in the special figure 1, "P61" ~ "P63" in the special figure 2 is selected. Further, for example, in the case of step S1616, that is, when the jackpot type is the V non-passing scheduled jackpot, the part corresponding to the V non-passing scheduled jackpot ("P44 ” to “P46”) are referred to. One of "P44" to "P46" is selected as the variation pattern from the read variation pattern random number value.

After selecting the variation pattern as described above, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the selected variation pattern (step S1630) and finishes this process. Information on the set variation pattern is included in the variation start command and transmitted to the sub-control board 90 in the output process ( FIG. 16 : step S108). As a result, the variable display of the special symbols is started.

[Processing during special symbol fluctuation]
FIG. 26 is a flow chart of the special symbol changing process (FIG. 21: step S1304). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the special symbol variation time has elapsed (step S1701). The special symbol variation time is a variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process (FIGS. 24 and 25). If the variable time has not ended (step S1701: NO), this process ends. That is, the variable display of the special symbols started in step S1406 or S1412 of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22) is continued. On the other hand, if the fluctuation time has ended (step S1701: YES), a fluctuation stop command is set (step S1702), and the special action status is set to "3" (step S1703). In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processing associated with the fluctuation stop (step S1704). For example, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a process of stopping the variable display of the special symbols with a symbol corresponding to the set special symbol stop symbol data. After that, the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process.

[Special symbol confirmation process]
FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the special symbol confirmation process (FIG. 21: step S1306). The game control microcomputer 81 first performs a game state management process (step S1801). The game state management process is a process for managing the number of times of ST and the number of time saving, and the contents thereof will be described later. After the game state management process, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802). When the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1802: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special action status to "1" (step S1808) and terminates this process. As a result, the jackpot game is not started, and the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22) is entered again, and the jackpot determination and the like for the next hold are executed.

When the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the jackpot and the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member according to the type of jackpot won (step S1803). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the large winning opening opening pattern determination table T8 (FIG. 13), determines the opening pattern of the large winning opening from the special figure stop pattern data, and selects the determined opening pattern. set. For example, when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "opening pattern 21" is set as the opening pattern of the big winning opening. Further, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the V opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9 (FIG. 14), determines the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 from the special figure stop pattern data, and sets the determined opening pattern. . For example, when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "opening pattern 31" is set as the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71. The value of the round counter is set to the number of rounds according to the type of the winning jackpot, together with the set of the opening pattern of the big winning opening and the V opening/closing member. The round counter counts the number of unit open games (round games) executed during the jackpot game. Here, "16" is set in the round counter (FIG. 13(B)).

After setting the release pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 performs game state reset processing (step S1804). The game state reset process is a process for resetting (returning to OFF) the variable probability flag and the time saving flag, and the contents thereof will be described later. After the game state reset process, in order to start the jackpot game, a jackpot opening command is set (step S1805), and the opening is started (step S1806). After that, the special action status is set to "4" (step S1807), and this processing ends.

[Game State Management Processing]
FIG. 28 is a flowchart of the gaming state management process (FIG. 27: step S1801). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (step S2001). If the probability variation flag is OFF (step S2001: NO), the process skips to step S2010. When the probability variation flag is ON (step S2001: YES), the value of the probability variation counter is decremented by 1 (step S2002). The probability variation counter counts the number of variations of the special symbols executed during the high probability state. Here, "100" is set to the variable probability counter at the time of transition to the high probability state. As a result of decrementing the variable probability counter by 1, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the value of the counter has become "0" (step S2003). If the value of the variable probability counter is not "0" (step S2003: NO), the process skips to step S2005. When the value of the variable probability counter is "0" (step S2003: YES), the variable probability flag is switched to OFF (step S2004).

In step S2005, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON. When the time saving flag is OFF (step S2005: NO), the process skips to step S2009. When the time saving flag is ON (step S2005: YES), the value of the time saving counter is decremented by 1 (step S2006). The time-saving counter counts the number of variations of the special symbols executed during the time-saving state. Here, "100" is set to the time saving counter at the time of transition to the time saving state. As a result of decrementing the time saving counter by 1, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the value of the counter has become "0" (step S2007). When the value of the time saving counter is not "0" (step S2007: NO), the process skips to step S2009. When the value of the time saving counter is "0" (step S2007: YES), the time saving flag is switched to OFF (step S2008).

In step S2009, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the game state designation command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this process. The game state designation command includes information about the current game state (whether the ceiling flag is ON, ceiling counter value, probability variable state, probability variable counter value, time saving state, time saving counter value, etc.) include.

In step S2010, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the ceiling flag is ON. If the ceiling flag is OFF (step S2010: NO), the process skips to step S2005. If the ceiling flag is ON (step S2010: YES), the value of the ceiling counter is decremented by 1 (step S2011). The ceiling counter is for counting the specified number of rotations until b time saving (play time) is reached, and counts the number of variations of special symbols executed when the ceiling flag is ON (during low probability state). . Here, when the ceiling flag is set to ON, "500" is set to the ceiling counter as the prescribed number of revolutions. As a result of decrementing the ceiling counter by 1, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the value of the counter has become "0" (step S2012). That is, it is determined whether or not the specified number of rotations has passed until reaching b time saving (play time). If the value of the ceiling counter is not "0" (step S2012: NO), the process skips to step S2005. When the value of the variable probability counter is "0" (step S2012: YES), the time saving flag is switched to ON (step S2013), and "700" is set to the time saving counter as the number of times of saving time (the number of times given). Then, the ceiling flag is switched to OFF (step S2015). After that, the process of step S2009 is executed.

[Game state reset processing]
FIG. 29 is a flowchart of game state reset processing (FIG. 27: step S1804). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (step S2101). If the probability variation flag is OFF (step S2101: NO), the process skips to step S2103. When the probability variation flag is ON (step S2101: YES), the probability variation flag is switched to OFF (step S2102). In step S2103, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON. If the time saving flag is OFF (step S2103: NO), the process skips to 2105. When the time saving flag is ON (step S2103: YES), the time saving flag is switched to OFF (step S2104). In step S2105, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the ceiling flag is ON. If the ceiling flag is OFF (step S2105: NO), this processing ends. If the ceiling flag is ON (step S2105: YES), the ceiling flag is turned OFF (step S2106). That is, during execution of the jackpot game, the ceiling flag is turned OFF in a non-high probability state and a non-time-saving state. In the gaming machine 1, since it is always in the low base state during the non-time saving state, it is in the low base state during execution of the jackpot game.

[Special electric accessory processing]
FIG. 30 is a flowchart of the special electric accessory processing (FIG. 21: step S1308). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200). The “jackpot end flag” is a flag indicating that all the big winning devices (the first big winning device 31 and the second big winning device 36) have been opened based on the opening pattern in the jackpot game being executed. When the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), the process proceeds to step S2230. When the jackpot end flag is OFF (step S2200: NO), V opening/closing member operation processing for operating the V opening/closing member 71 is performed (step S2201). The V opening/closing member 71 of the present embodiment is configured to operate when a predetermined number of game balls enter the first big winning hole 30. In the V opening/closing member operation process, The V opening/closing member 71 is opened for a predetermined period when a predetermined game ball wins. The details of the V opening/closing member operation processing will be described later. After the V opening/closing member operation process, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the big winning openings (the first big winning opening 30 and the second big winning opening 35) are open (step S2202). If it is open (step S2202: YES), the process proceeds to step S2210.

If the big winning opening is not open (step S2202: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not it is time (timing) to open the big winning opening (step S2203). The time to open the big prize gate is, for example, when the time for opening the jackpot has passed and it is time to start opening in the first round game, or when the big prize gate that was temporarily closed after opening is reopened. It includes the time when the interval time (closed time) has passed and it is time to start opening again. If it is not time to open the big winning slot (step S2203: NO), the process proceeds to step S2220.

If it is the time (timing) to open the big winning opening (step S2203: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs the big winning opening opening process (step S2207). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 opens the big winning opening (the first big winning opening 30 or the second big winning opening 35) according to the opening pattern (FIG. 13) corresponding to the kind of big win. After the big winning opening opening process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a round specifying command (step S2208). The round designation command includes information about the number of rounds of the jackpot game being executed, and the game control microcomputer 81 sets the round designation command in the output buffer of the main RAM 84 . In addition, in this embodiment, the large winning opening is not opened a plurality of times during one round game. However, as another embodiment, when the large winning opening is opened a plurality of times during one round game, the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the opening of the large winning opening is in one round. It may be determined whether or not it is the first opening, and the round designation command may be set only in the case of the first opening. After setting the round designation command, this processing ends.

In the above-described step S2202, when the large winning opening is open (step S2202: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the conditions for closing the large winning opening are satisfied (step S2210). The closing condition here is that the number of prizes won into the big prize gate in the round game has reached a prescribed maximum number of prizes (for example, 9 per round), or that the time has come to close the big prize gate. (that is, that a predetermined opening time (FIG. 13) has passed since the opening of the big winning opening) is satisfied. Then, if the condition for closing the big winning opening is not satisfied (step S2210: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, when the conditions for closing the big winning opening are satisfied (step S2210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (blocks) the big winning opening (step S2211).

In step S2203 described above, if it is not time (timing) to open the big winning opening, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended (step S2220). Here, one round ends after a predetermined time (here, two seconds) has passed since the big winning opening was closed. This is because, as described above, the closing time (interval time) of the big winning opening between round games is included in the open round game before closing. The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended depending on whether or not a predetermined interval time has passed since the big winning opening was closed. If the round game has not ended (step S2220: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process.

If the round game has ended (step S2220: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 decrements the value of the round counter by 1 (step S2221), and determines whether the value of the round counter is "0". A determination is made (step S2226). If the value of the round counter is not "0" (step S2226: NO), that is, if the specified number of round games has not yet been played, this process ends to start the next round game. On the other hand, when the value of the round counter is "0", a jackpot ending command is set as jackpot end processing for ending the jackpot game (step S2227), and the jackpot ending is started (step S2228). In this embodiment, the ending time (for example, 18 seconds) when the game ball passes through the V area 39 in the "16R (substantially 13R) V passage scheduled jackpot" is "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passage scheduled It has the same length as the ending time when the game ball does not pass through the V area 39 in the "jackpot". As a result, even if the game ball passes through the V area 39 in the "16R (substantially 13R) V-passing scheduled jackpot" for the player, "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" , it can be made to recognize that the game ball did not pass through the V area 39 . Incidentally, the ending time when the game ball does not pass through the V area 39 in the "16R (substantially 13R) V passage scheduled jackpot" has the same length as these. After starting the ending of the jackpot, the jackpot end flag is set to ON (step S2229), and this processing is finished.

In the above-described step S2200, if the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), since the final round has ended, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot ending time has elapsed. (Step S2230). If the ending time has not elapsed (step S2230: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, if the ending time has passed (step S2230: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns off the jackpot end flag (step S2231), turns off the jackpot flag (step S2232), and sets the special action status. is set to "1" (step S2233). As a result, the special symbol standby process (step S1302) is executed again in the next special action process. After that, a game state setting process (step S2234), which will be described later, is executed, and this process ends.

[V opening/closing member operation processing]
FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the V opening/closing member operation processing (FIG. 30: step S2201). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the current round game (current round) is the open round of the V opening/closing member 71 (step S2501). Here, the 2nd, 4th, 6th, 8th, 10th and 12th rounds correspond to the opening rounds of the V opening/closing member 71 . The game control microcomputer 81 can determine that it is an open round when the value of the round counter is "15", "13", "11", "9", "7" and "5". If it is not the opening round of the V opening/closing member 71 (step S2501: NO), this processing ends. This is because there is no need to operate the V opening/closing member 71 in the round.

If it is the opening round of the V opening/closing member 71 (step S2501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the first winning flag is ON (step S2502). The “first winning flag” is a flag indicating that the first ball has won the first big winning hole 30 in the round. If the first winning flag is ON (step S2502: YES), the process proceeds to step S2520. If the first winning flag is OFF (step S2502: NO), it is determined whether or not the winning of the first ball has been detected (step S2503). If the winning of the first ball has not been detected (step S2503: NO), this processing ends. This is because there is no winning to the first big winning hole 30 in the round, and there is no need to operate the V opening/closing member 71 .

When the winning of the first ball is detected (step S2503: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 short-opens the V opening/closing member 71 and performs V effective period setting processing (step S2504). The reason why the V opening/closing member 71 is short-opened is that in the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 (FIG. 14(B)), in either case of "short opening" or "long opening", the first ball wins. This is for the purpose of executing a short release (here, 0.1 seconds) at times. In the short opening of the V opening and closing member 71, the opening time of the V opening and closing member 71 is very short, so the first game ball that has won the first big prize opening 30 does not pass through the V area 39 It is configured to pass through the V region 70 . In the V effective period setting process, the V effective period during which the V opening/closing member 71 is opened and several seconds after the V opening/closing member 71 is closed is set as the V effective period during which the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a is effective. Here, the game control microcomputer 81 short-opens the V opening/closing member 71 (here, 0.1 second) according to the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 (FIG. 14(B)), and the V opening/closing member 71 is being opened. and 1 second after closing is set as the V validity period. The game control microcomputer 81 sets a period other than the V valid period (including when the jackpot game is not executed) as a V invalid period in which the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a is determined to be invalid. Here, "determining that the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a is valid" means turning on the V flag based on the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a (V area sensor detection described later). processing (see FIG. 33)). Further, "determine that the game ball detection by the V area sensor 39a is invalid" means that the V flag is not turned ON even if the game ball is detected by the V area sensor 39a. The reason why the V effective period includes several seconds (ball brushing period) after the closing of the V opening/closing member 71 is that there is a physical distance between the V opening/closing member 71 and the V area sensor 39a. This takes into consideration the period until the game ball entering the V area 39 side immediately before the V opening/closing member 71 is closed is detected by the V area sensor 39a. That is, here, the V flag is turned ON only when the V passage (passage of the game ball to the V area 39) during the V valid period is detected, and the V flag is turned on when the V passage is detected outside the V valid period (V invalid period). It is supposed not to be turned ON. When the V flag is ON, the variable probability flag is turned ON, that is, the game state after the jackpot game is set to a high probability state (see game state setting processing (FIG. 32) described later). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the V flag from being set to a high probability state by turning on the V flag based on passing through the V due to fraud. After the short opening of the V opening/closing member 71 and the V effective period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag to ON (step S2505), and proceeds to step S2540.

In step S2502, if the first winning flag is ON, that is, if the first ball has already won (step S2502: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the second winning flag is ON. (step S2520). The “second winning flag” is a flag indicating that the second ball has won in the first big winning hole 30 when the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 in the round is long opening. If the second winning flag is ON (step S2520: YES), the process proceeds to step S2540. When the second winning flag is OFF (step S2520: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 in the round is long opening (step S2521). If it is not long open (step S2521: NO), that is, if it is short open, the process proceeds to step S2540. On the other hand, if it is long open (step S2521: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the winning of the second ball is detected (step S2522). If the winning of the second ball is not detected (step S2522: NO), the process proceeds to step S2540.

When the winning of the second ball is detected (step S2522: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 opens the V opening/closing member 71 for a long time and performs V effective period setting processing (step S2523). The reason why the V opening/closing member 71 is opened long is that in the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 (Fig. 14(B)), in the case of "long opening", when the second ball wins, the long opening (here, maximum 31.5 seconds) ) is executed. In addition, here, since the maximum playing time for one round is 31.5 seconds (maximum opening time of the big winning opening is 29.5 seconds + interval closing time is 2 seconds), generally, the winning of the second ball is The time from hour to end of round is less than 31.5 seconds. As will be described later, the V opening/closing member 71 is forcibly closed at the end of the round, so the long opening time of the V opening/closing member 71 is shorter than 31.5 seconds. However, since the long opening of the V opening/closing member 71 has a relatively long opening time of the V opening/closing member 71, at least a part of the game balls after the second ball that has won the first big prize opening 30 will move through the V area 39. configured to pass through. In the V valid period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the V valid period during opening of the V opening/closing member 71, and sets the V invalid period together with closing of the V opening/closing member 71 at the end of the round. After the long opening of the V opening/closing member 71 and the V effective period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the second winning flag to ON (step S2524), and proceeds to step S2540.

In step S2540, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the V opening/closing member 71 is open. When the V opening/closing member 71 is open (step S2540: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended (step S2550). As described above, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended depending on whether or not a predetermined interval time (here, two seconds) has passed since the big winning opening was closed. make a judgment.

When the round game has ended (step S2550: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag and the second winning flag to OFF (step S2551), performs the V opening/closing member closing process and the V invalid period. Setting processing is performed (step S2552). Here, at the end of the round game, the game control microcomputer 81 forcibly closes the V opening/closing member 71, and several seconds (here, one second) after the closing of the V opening/closing member 71, the V invalid period. set and finish this process.

When the round game has not ended (step S2550: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the closing condition of the V opening/closing member 71 is satisfied (step S2560). The closing condition of the V opening/closing member 71 may be, for example, that a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.1 seconds) has elapsed after the opening of the V opening/closing member 71 in the case of short-circuit opening. If the closing condition is satisfied (step S2560: YES), V opening/closing member closing processing and V invalid period setting processing are performed (step S2552), and this processing ends. If the closing condition is not met (step S2560: NO), the process ends while the V opening/closing member 71 is kept open and the V effective period continues.

In step S2540, when the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the V opening/closing member 71 is closed (step S2540: NO), it determines whether or not the round game has ended (step S2571). If the round has ended (step S2571: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns off the first winning flag and the second winning flag (step S2572), and ends this process. If the round has not ended (step S2571: NO), the process ends.

[Game state setting process]
FIG. 32 is a flowchart of the game state setting process (FIG. 30: step S2234). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the V flag is ON (step S2301). When the V flag is OFF (step S2301: NO), the time saving flag is turned ON (step S2302), and "100" is set to the time saving counter (step S2303). Thereby, the game state after the big hit game this time becomes "non-high probability state", "time saving state" and "high base state" (that is, low probability high base). This low-probability-high base state ends when either condition is satisfied, that is, the variable display of special symbols is performed 100 times, or the next jackpot is won.

On the other hand, in step S2301, if the V flag is ON (step S2301: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the probability variation flag (step S2304), sets the probability variation counter to "100" (step S2305), The V flag is turned off (step S2306). In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 turns ON the time saving flag (step S2307), and sets "100" to the time saving counter (step S2308). As a result, the game state after the big hit game this time becomes "high probability state", "time saving state" and "high base state" (that is, high probability and high base). This high-probability/high-base state ends when either condition is satisfied, that is, the variable display of special symbols is performed 100 times, or the next jackpot is won.

In step S2310, the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the ceiling flag, and sets the ceiling counter to "500" as the prescribed number of rotations until b time reduction (play time) is reached (step S2311). As a result, after the jackpot game, when the variable probability flag is OFF, when the game hits 500 times, it enters b time saving (play time). In step S2309, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the game state designation command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this process. The game state specifying command includes information about the set game state (time saving flag, time saving counter, probability variable flag, probability variable counter, ceiling flag, ceiling counter).

[V area sensor detection processing]
FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the V area sensor detection process (FIG. 16: step S106). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the game ball has been detected by the V area sensor 39a (step S2601). If the game ball is not detected by the V area sensor 39a (step S2601: NO), this process is finished. On the other hand, when there is detection (step S2601: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not it is during the V valid period (step S2602). The V effective period is a period set by the V effective period setting process (steps S2504 and S2523) of the V opening/closing member operation process (FIG. 31). The V effective period is set to several seconds (ball brushing period) when the V opening/closing member 71 is opened or closed during the 2nd, 4th, 6th, 8th, 10th and 12th rounds. be done. If it is not during the V valid period (step S2602: NO), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is during the V valid period (step S2602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the V flag (step S2603), sets the V passage command (step S2604), and ends this processing. .

[Processing of pending pitches]
FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the pending ball number processing (FIG. 16: step S107). The game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the number of special figure 1 reserved balls, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls, and the number of normal symbol reserved balls stored in the main RAM 84 (step S2701). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a pending ball number command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S2702). The number of reserved balls command is a command for notifying the number of reserved balls to the sub-control board 90, and includes information on the number of special figure 1 reserved balls, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls, and the number of normal symbol reserved balls. . After setting the reserved ball number command, the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process.

7. Operation of Production Control Microcomputer 91 The operation of the production control microcomputer 91 provided on the sub-control board 90 (FIG. 4) will be described with reference to FIGS. Counters, flags, statuses, buffers, etc. appearing in the operation explanation of the effect control microcomputer 91 are provided in the sub-RAM 94 .

[Sub-control main processing]
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing sub-control main processing. When the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the effect control microcomputer 91 reads out a program for executing a sub-control main process from the sub-ROM 93 . In the sub-control main process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first performs CPU initialization process (step S4000). In the CPU initialization process, for example, the sub CPU 92 is set, various flags, statuses, counters, and the like are reset. The initial value of the flag is "0" or "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". Note that the CPU initialization process is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed thereafter.

After the CPU initialization processing, the effect control microcomputer 91 prohibits interrupt processing (step S4015), and performs random number update processing (step S4020). In this random number update process, the effect control microcomputer 91 adds 1 to the random number counter value shown in FIG. 7(B) and updates it. When each random number counter value reaches the set upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0", or may be changed randomly. Moreover, the random number value may be added by 2 or more instead of adding 1 each time. Each random number may be a so-called hardware random number.

After the random number update process, the effect control microcomputer 91 permits the interruption of the interruption process (step S4025). While interrupts are enabled, sub-side timer interrupt processing (step S4035) can be executed. The sub-side timer interrupt processing is executed based on interrupt pulses that are repeatedly input to the sub CPU 92 at predetermined intervals. That is, the sub-side timer interrupt process is executed at predetermined intervals. After the sub-side timer interrupt processing ends, the random number update processing is repeatedly executed until the next sub-side timer interrupt processing is started.

[Sub-side timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 36 is a flowchart of sub-side timer interrupt processing (FIG. 35: step S4035). The effect control microcomputer 91 first performs received command analysis processing (step S4300). Details of the received command analysis processing will be described later. After the received command analysis process, the production control microcomputer 91 performs the process during the fluctuation production (step S4305). The process during fluctuation production is a process for setting a pre-variation end command at a specific timing during the fluctuation production to cause the display screen 7a to execute a specific display production, the details of which will be described later. After the processing during the variation production, the production control microcomputer 91 performs switch processing (step S4310). In the switch process, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the display contents of the display screen 7a based on the switch data (edge data and level data) output based on the detection signal from the effect button detection switch 63a. . After the switch process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs command transmission process (step S4315). In the command transmission process, the effect control microcomputer 91 transmits various commands set in the effect command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub-RAM 94 in the received command analysis process, etc. , to the relay board 108 . The image control board 100 that has received various commands uses the image display device 7 to execute a display effect according to the received command. In addition, the audio control board 106 that has received various commands executes an audio effect of outputting audio from the speaker 67 in accordance with the received commands. Upon receiving various commands, the lamp control board 107 executes a lamp effect that controls light emission of the board lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66 according to the received command. After the command transmission process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs other processes (step S4320), and ends this process. Other processing includes, for example, random number update processing.

[Receive command analysis processing]
FIG. 37 is a flow chart of the received command analysis process (FIG. 36: step S4300). The effect control microcomputer 91 first determines whether or not a pre-determination command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4415). If it has been received (step S4415: YES), prefetch effect determination processing is performed (step S4420). "Prefetching effect determination processing" is a process of determining whether or not to execute a prefetching effect, and determining a prefetching effect pattern in the case of execution. The details of the look-ahead effect determination process will be described later. On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S4415: NO), the above-described look-ahead effect determination processing is skipped. The look-ahead effect is a effect suggesting that there is a high possibility that the reservation information newly stored in the special figure reservation storage area 85 contains a big hit, and is executed during the variable effect.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not it has received a pending ball number command from the main control board 80 (step S4445). If received (step S4445: YES), hold display processing is performed (step S4450). In the pending display process, based on the information on the special figure 1 reserved ball number, the special figure 2 reserved ball number, and the normal symbol reserved ball number included in the reserved ball number command, the counter set area 94d of the sub RAM 94 is provided. The values of the first special figure reservation effect counter, the second special figure reservation effect counter, and the normal figure reservation effect counter are updated. As a result, not only the main control board 80 side but also the sub-control board 90 side can hold the information of each reserved ball number. In addition, the effect control microcomputer 91 is based on the values of the first special figure pending effect counter, the second special figure pending effect counter, and the general figure pending effect counter, the pending image 9A displayed on the display screen 7a, Update 9B. On the other hand, if the command for the number of pending balls has not been received (step S4445: NO), the above-described pending display processing is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a variation start command is received from the main control board 80 (step S4455). When receiving (step S4455: YES), change production start processing is performed (step S4460). "Variation production start processing" is a process of selecting a variation production pattern (contents) to be executed during special symbol fluctuation. The details of the fluctuation effect start processing will be described later. On the other hand, when it has not received (step S4455: NO), it skips the above-mentioned fluctuation production|presentation start processing.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the fluctuation stop command is received from the main control board 80 (step S4465). If it is received (step S4465: YES), change effect end processing is performed (step S4470). "Variation effect end processing" is a process for stopping the variation effect that is executed during the special symbol variation. In the fluctuation production end processing, the production control microcomputer 91 sets a counter and the like based on the analysis result of the fluctuation stop command, and sets a fluctuation production end command for ending the fluctuation production. As a result, the decoration pattern corresponding to the special figure 1 or special figure 2 during fluctuation is stopped and displayed. In addition, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a prior determination information shift process (FIG. 39), which will be described later. In addition, when the fluctuation stop command is not received (step S4465: NO), the above-mentioned fluctuation production end processing is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not an opening command is received from the main control board 80 (step S4475). If received (step S4475: YES), an opening effect pattern determination process is performed (step S4480). The "opening effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting an opening effect pattern (contents) to be executed at the start of a special game (jackpot game). In the opening performance pattern determination processing, the performance control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the opening command and sets the information on the special figure stop pattern data set at the time of judging the winning of the jackpot, which is included in the opening command, in the sub-RAM 94.例文帳に追加Then, the effect pattern of the opening effect set in advance corresponding to the winning type indicated by the special figure stop pattern data is selected, and the opening effect start command for starting the selected opening effect is sent to the effect command set area of the sub RAM 94. Set to 94b. When the opening effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step S4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 stores a predetermined opening effect image in the ROM 103. , and displayed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 . In addition, in step S4475, when the opening command is not received (step S4475: NO), the above-mentioned opening effect pattern determination processing is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a round designation command is received from the main control board 80 (step S4485). If received (step S4485: YES), round effect pattern determination processing is performed (step S4490). "Round effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting an open game effect pattern (contents) to be executed during the opening of the big winning opening or during the interval between openings in a special game (jackpot game). In the round effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the round designation command, and sets information on the special figure stop pattern data and information on the number of rounds contained in the round designation command in the sub-RAM 94. do. Then, the effect pattern of the round effect set in advance corresponding to the hit type and the number of rounds indicated by the special figure stop pattern data is selected, and the round effect start command for starting the selected round effect is transmitted to the sub RAM 94. It is set in the command set area 94b. When the round effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a predetermined round effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. In addition, in step S4485, when the round designation|designated command is not received (step S4485: NO), the above-mentioned round production|presentation pattern determination process is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not an ending command is received from the main control board 80 (step S4495). If received (step S4495: YES), ending effect pattern determination processing is performed (step S4500). "Ending effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting an ending effect pattern (contents) to be executed during the ending of a special game (big hit game or small hit game). In the ending effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the ending command, and sets information on the special figure stop symbol data included in the ending command in the sub-RAM94. Then, an ending effect pattern corresponding to the winning type indicated by the special figure stop symbol data is selected, and an ending effect start command for starting the selected ending effect is set in the output buffer of the sub RAM94. When the ending effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a predetermined ending effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. In addition, when the ending command is not received (step S4495: NO), the ending effect pattern determination process described above is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs other processing (step S4535). In other processes, for example, the effect control microcomputer 91, when receiving the game state designation command, information on the game state included in the game state designation command (time reduction flag, time reduction counter, probability variation flag, probability variation counter, ceiling flag , ceiling counter, etc.) are stored in the sub-RAM 94 . Specifically, based on the information included in the game state designation command, the values of the time reduction effect counter, probability variable effect counter, and ceiling effect counter provided in the counter set area 94d of the sub RAM 94 are updated. For example, the number of remaining fluctuations (number of games) during time reduction is set in a time reduction performance counter, the number of remaining fluctuations in probability variation is set in a probability variation performance counter, and the remaining variation frequency until reaching the ceiling is set in a ceiling performance counter. As a result, not only the main control board 80 side but also the sub-control board 90 side can hold the information on the number of time reductions, the number of probability variations, and the number of ceilings. Moreover, the microcomputer 91 for production|presentation control makes sub RAM94 hold|maintain the information which V passed, when V passage command is received. In addition, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs processing based on commands other than the above (customer waiting standby command, RAM clear notification command, etc.), and ends this processing.

[Look-ahead effect determination processing]
FIG. 38 is a flowchart of the look-ahead effect determination process (FIG. 37: step S4420). The effect control microcomputer 91 first performs a preliminary determination information rewriting process (step S4601). Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 is included in the advance determination command received from the main control board 80, the jackpot advance judgment result (jackpot judgment information), the jackpot type advance judgment result (jackpot type information), and the variation The pattern pre-determination result (fluctuation pattern information) is stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c.

FIG. 39 is a diagram for explaining the configuration of the advance determination information storage area 94c. In the advance determination information storage area 94c, prefetch effect pattern information is stored in addition to the above-described jackpot determination information, jackpot type information, and variation pattern information. The look-ahead effect pattern information is information indicating the content of the look-ahead effect executed during the variable effect, and is selected in step S4604 described later. FIG. 39 (A) shows that as the preliminary determination results corresponding to the first to third special figures 2 pending, the jackpot determination information "losing" and the variation pattern information "P72" "P73" are the first to third A state in which the data is stored in the storage area and the preliminary determination result corresponding to the variation is stored in the area is shown. FIG. 39(B) shows that there is a special figure 2 winning prize from the state of FIG. The state stored in the corresponding fourth storage area is shown. Here, as the prior determination information, the jackpot determination information "jackpot", the jackpot type information "21H", and the variation pattern information "P61" are stored. In addition, "Pattern A ” is set. FIG. 39(C) shows a state in which the change has ended from the state of FIG. 39(B) and the advance determination information shift process has been executed. Specifically, the prior determination information stored in the first storage area is shifted to the relevant area, the prior determination information stored in the second to fourth storage areas is shifted to the first to third storage areas, and the 4, the pre-determination information in the storage area is cleared. The advance determination information shift process is executed in the fluctuation effect end process (FIG. 37: step S4470).

Returning to FIG. 38, subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not prefetch effect pattern information is stored in the preliminary determination information storage area 94c (step S4602). Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not prefetch effect pattern information is stored in any of the relevant area of the preliminary determination information storage area 94c and the first to fourth storage areas. If the look-ahead effect pattern information is stored (step S4602: YES), this process ends. That is, when the pre-reading effect pattern information is stored in any one of the corresponding area of the pre-determination information storage area 94c and the first to fourth storage areas, the pre-reading effect pattern information is newly selected and not stored. On the other hand, if the pre-read effect pattern information is not stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c (step S4602: NO), the effect control microcomputer 91 determines that the pre-determination result included in the received pre-determination command is "jackpot". Alternatively, it is determined whether or not there is a "loss with reach" (step S4603). Whether or not it is a “big hit” or a “losing with reach” can be determined by, for example, a variation pattern preliminary determination result (variation pattern information). The effect control microcomputer 91 ends this processing when the preliminary determination result included in the received preliminary determination command is "no reach" (step S4603: NO). This is because there is no need to perform a look-ahead effect. On the other hand, if the pre-determination result included in the received pre-determination command is "jackpot" or "loss with reach" (step S4603: YES), pre-reading effect execution determination for determining whether to execute pre-reading effect, And, look-ahead effect pattern selection is performed (step S4604). Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 acquires the counter value of the prefetch effect random number random number, and refers to the acquired random value and the prefetch effect pattern determination table T51 stored in the sub ROM 93 to perform the prefetch effect. Whether to perform or not, and the look-ahead effect pattern in the case of performing the look-ahead effect are determined.

FIG. 40 is a diagram for explaining the look-ahead effect pattern determination table T51. In FIG. 40, when the pre-determination result is "jackpot" and the pre-reading effect random number is "0-55", the pre-reading effect is "none", and when the pre-reading effect random value is "56-67", the pre-reading effect is When "Pattern A" is selected and the look-ahead effect random value is "68 to 127", "Pattern B" is selected as the look-ahead effect. Also, if the pre-judgment result is "losing with reach" and the pre-reading effect random value is "0 to 107", the pre-reading effect will be "none", and if the pre-reading effect random value is "108-114", as a pre-reading effect When "Pattern A" is selected and the look-ahead effect random number is "115 to 127", "Pattern B" is selected as the look-ahead effect. The type and content of the look-ahead effect pattern and the range of random numbers to be selected can be set arbitrarily.

Returning to FIG. 38, when it is determined in step S4604 that the look-ahead effect is to be executed (step S4605: YES), the selected look-ahead effect pattern is stored in the preliminary determination information storage area 94c (step S4606). Here, when the pre-read effect pattern is stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c, not only the storage area corresponding to the received pre-determination command among the first to fourth storage areas, but also the storage area before the corresponding storage area A look-ahead rendering pattern is stored in the area and also in the area. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 39B, in addition to setting "Pattern A" in the fourth storage area corresponding to the received pre-determination command, the first to third storage areas and Also set "Pattern A". As a result, the look-ahead effect pattern A is executed even in the variable effect executed before the variable effect corresponding to the fourth storage area is executed (variable effects corresponding to the area and the first to third storage areas). . Whether or not the look-ahead effect is executed in the variable effect corresponding to the area depends on the progress of the variable effect. That is, in the variable performance, if the timing for executing the look-ahead performance has already passed, the look-ahead performance is not executed, but if it is before the timing for executing the look-ahead performance, it is executed at that timing. This will be discussed later. If it is determined in step S4604 that the look-ahead effect will not be executed (step S4605: NO), the process ends.

[Variation production start processing]
FIG. 41 is a flow chart of the variable effect start process (FIG. 37: step S4460). The effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the variation start command (step S5000). Here, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the information on the special figure stop design data included in the variation start command and the information on the variation pattern to the sub-RAM 94 . The set information includes game state information indicating the current game state, pattern information indicating a pattern as a determination result of the hit determination process of special figure 1 or special figure 2, and the like. The game state information and the pattern information acquired here can be appropriately referred to by the effect control microcomputer 91 .

Subsequently, the production control microcomputer 91 performs basic production pattern determination processing (step S5010). The basic effect pattern determination process includes the basic configuration of the variable effect (for example, the display of the background image on the image display device 7 and its switching, the display of a predetermined character and its operation, the output of the melody and sound effect using the speaker 67). , lighting control of lamps, etc.). The variable effect is completed by superimposing additional effects such as a chance-up effect and a look-ahead effect on the basic effect. The performance control microcomputer 91 refers to a basic performance pattern determination table T52 stored in the sub ROM 93 to determine a basic performance pattern.

FIG. 42 is a diagram for explaining the basic effect pattern determination table T52. In FIG. 42, there are multiple types of core performance patterns for normal reach performance, multiple types of core performance patterns for SP1 performance, multiple types of core performance patterns for SP2 performance, multiple types of core performance patterns for SP3 performance, There are multiple types of basic production patterns that perform a loss production without reach. The type of basic effect pattern can be set arbitrarily. Here, for example, when the variation pattern included in the variation start command is "P1", the basic effect pattern for performing the SP1 effect is selected. Further, when the variation pattern included in the variation start command is "P72", the basic effect pattern for performing the reach-less loss effect is selected.

Returning to FIG. 41, after determining the basic effect pattern, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs chance-up effect pattern determination processing (step S5015). The chance-up effect pattern determination process is a process for determining an additional effect to be superimposed on the variable effect. A performance control microcomputer 91 acquires a counter value of a chance-up random number, and determines a chance-up performance pattern by referring to the acquired random number and a chance-up performance pattern determination table T53 stored in a sub ROM 93. - 特許庁

FIG. 43 is a diagram for explaining the chance-up effect pattern determination table T53. Here, only the part which decides the fluctuation production pattern of special figure 1 at the time of non time saving state among chance up production pattern decision table T53 is shown. That is, FIG. 43 shows the chance-up effect pattern executed when the variation pattern included in the variation start command is "P1" to "P16". The chance-up effect pattern determination table T53 has a portion for determining the chance-up effect pattern to be executed when the variation patterns are "P21" to "P33", "P41" to "P56", "61" to "73". It may or may not be provided.

In FIG. 43, "2-NO" "2-SP1" "2-SP2" "2-SP3" "3-NO" "3-SP1" "3-SP2" "3-SP3" " 4-NO", "4-SP1", "4-SP2", "4-SP3" and "ANO" are set. These chance effect patterns correspond to various chance-up effects, which will be described later.

Returning to FIG. 41, after determining the chance-up effect pattern, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs count effect pattern determination processing (step S5016). Here, the count effect pattern determination process is the number of remaining fluctuations at the time of probability change (number of games), the number of remaining fluctuations during time saving, the number of remaining fluctuations until reaching the ceiling, the number of fluctuations from when the power is turned on, and the number of fluctuations after the jackpot game This is a process for displaying the number of times of change and the like on the display screen 7a. The performance control microcomputer 91 displays the probability variation remaining number of times on the display screen 7a based on the value of the probability variation performance counter at the time of probability variation. In addition, the effect control microcomputer 91 displays the probability variable remaining number of times based on the value of the time saving effect counter during time saving.

Also, the effect control microcomputer 91 can execute various effects based on the value of the ceiling effect counter and the value of the overnight effect counter. The ceiling performance counter stores the number of remaining fluctuations until reaching the ceiling, and the overnight performance counter stores the number of fluctuations from when the power is turned on. The effect control microcomputer 91 can set the number of fluctuations from power-on by, for example, incrementing an overnight effect counter each time a variable effect end command is received from the main control board 80 . The effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the value of the ceiling effect counter when the value of the overnight effect counter is TH1 (eg TH1=10) is below TH2 (eg TH2=200). When the value of the ceiling effect counter is less than TH2, a predetermined chance image is displayed. If the value of the ceiling effect counter is greater than TH2, no chance image is displayed. As a result, the player who sees the chance image can recognize that the gaming machine 1 has inherited the number of games from the previous day and that the RAM clear has not been performed. Moreover, the production control microcomputer 91 may display the value of the ceiling production counter when the value of the overnight production counter is TH3 (for example, TH3=50). Moreover, the effect control microcomputer 91 may turn off the display representing the value of the ceiling effect counter and the chance image again when the value of the overnight effect counter is TH4 (eg, TH4=100). Moreover, the production control microcomputer 91 may display again the value of the ceiling production counter when the value of the overnight production counter is TH5 (for example, TH5=200). The effect control microcomputer 91 may determine whether or not to display the value of the ceiling effect counter as described above based on the value of the overnight effect counter, or may determine based on the value of the ceiling effect counter. good too. For example, the effect control microcomputer 91 displays the value of the ceiling effect counter when the value of the ceiling effect counter is TH6 (eg, TH6=100), and the value of the ceiling effect counter is TH7 (eg, TH7=70). When , the display of the value of the ceiling effect counter may be turned off, and when the value of the ceiling effect counter is TH8 (eg, TH8=50), the value of the ceiling effect counter may be displayed again.

After the count effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 may refer to the random number and stop symbol pattern determination table T54 to determine the combination of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R to be stopped and displayed. Based on these, it is determined what kind of effect is performed as the variable effect.

The effect control microcomputer 91 sets the variable effect start command in the effect command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub RAM 94 so that the variable effect based on the variable effect pattern determined in steps S5010 to S5016 is realized ( step S5020). When the variable effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub RAM 94 is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step S4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 displays the variable effect image. It is read out from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 .

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets a variable effect timer (step S5030), and terminates this process. A variable time (FIG. 42) corresponding to the variation pattern variation pattern included in the variation start command is set in the variation effect timer. For example, when the variation pattern is "P1", "40 seconds" is set to the variation effect timer.

[Processing during fluctuation effect]
FIG. 44 is a flow chart of the processing during the fluctuation effect (FIG. 36: step S4305). The production control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the variable production is in progress (step S4701). Whether or not the variable effect is being performed can be determined by, for example, whether or not the variable effect timer is zero. If the variable effect is not being executed (step SS4701: NO), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the variation effect is being performed (step SS4701: YES), the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not it is time to set the pre-variation end command in the effect command set area 94b of the sub RAM 94 (step S4702). The pre-variation end command is a command that the effect control microcomputer 91 notifies the image control board 100 or the like that it is a specific timing during the change effect. When the image control board 100 receives the pre-variation end command , the effect content is switched, a specific image is displayed, etc., in accordance with the information included in the command before the end of variation.

If it is not the timing to set the pre-variation end command (step S4702: NO), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is time to set the pre-variation end command (step S4702: YES), it is determined whether or not there is prefetch effect pattern information in the area of the advance determination information storage area 94c (step S4703). If there is prefetch effect pattern information in the area (step S4703: YES), the pre-variation end command containing the prefetch effect pattern information is set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub RAM 94 (step S4704). On the other hand, if there is no look-ahead effect pattern information in the area (step S4703: NO), a pre-fluctuation end command that does not include look-ahead effect pattern information is set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94 (step S4705). As a result, when there is the look-ahead effect pattern information in the area, a pre-variation end command including the look-ahead effect pattern information is transmitted to the image control board 100 two seconds before the end of the variation effect. Then, the image control microcomputer 101 starts a look-ahead effect for displaying a look-ahead effect image on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 . On the other hand, even when there is no pre-reading effect pattern information in the area, a pre-change end command is transmitted to the image control board 100 two seconds before the end of the change. Here, when the preview image is already displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the image control microcomputer 101 starts the preview fade effect of fading the preview image.

9. Movement of Movable Body and Display Effect of Sub Display Screen 64 Using FIGS. 69) and the display effects of the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U) will be described. The effect control microcomputer 91 performs drive control to operate the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and the frame movable accessory 69 during the game effect (display effect), the initial operation when the power is turned on, and the like. do In addition, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a display effect of displaying a specific image on the sub-display screen 64 during a game effect (display effect), an initial operation when the power is turned on, or the like.

46A and 46B are explanatory diagrams illustrating movement modes of the first movable accessory 14. FIG. FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the second mode of the first movable accessory 14. FIG. The first movable accessory 14 is a vertically long rod-shaped member, the upper end of which is located near the upper end of the image display device 7 and the lower end thereof is located near the lower end of the image display device 7 . The upper end and lower end of the first movable accessory 14 are difficult to see, and the vicinity of the central portion is visible in front of the image display device 7 (front surface). As shown in FIG. 1, the first movable accessory 14 can rest at a retracted position (home position) on the left side of the image display device 7 (first mode). At the retracted position, the first movable accessory 14 may be partially stored and the remaining part may be visible, or the whole may be stored and difficult to be seen. As shown in FIG. 46, the first movable accessory 14 is configured to be movable in the left-right direction in front of the image display device 7 . It is configured to move (advance) from the retracted position toward the right end of the display screen 7a and move in the left-right direction on the front surface of the display screen 7a. In addition, it can stand still at any advanced position in front of the display screen 7a. The movement mode of the first movable accessory 14 can be set arbitrarily. Also, as shown in FIG. 47, the first movable accessory 14 can move to the right end of the display screen 7a and stand still at that position (second mode). At least a part of the first movable accessory 14 may have a decorative portion, or may have transparency.

FIG. 48 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the second mode of the second movable accessory 15. As shown in FIG. The second movable accessory 15 is provided with a rectangular decorative portion labeled "OARO" and is configured to be vertically movable. As shown in FIG. 1, the second movable accessory 15 can rest at a retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a (first mode). At this time, a part of the second movable accessory 15 becomes difficult to be visually recognized. The second movable accessory 15 moves downward toward the center of the display screen 7a from the state shown in FIG. 1, and can stand still at the advanced position (deployed position) shown in FIG. 48 (second mode). . In this second mode, the decorative portion stops in front of the image display device 7 (front surface) so as to cover the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a. The second movable accessory 15 can move (retreat) upward from the advanced position shown in FIG. 48 to move to the retracted position shown in FIG. 1, where it can stand still.

FIG. 49 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the second mode of the frame movable accessory 69. As shown in FIG. The movable frame accessory 69 is composed of a pair of plate-like members arranged on both left and right sides of the handle 60, and each is configured to be movable in the left and right direction. The two members are formed of flexible members, and are configured so that one major surface of each member moves toward or away from the handle 60 . As shown in FIG. 1, the two members of the movable frame accessory 69 are normally stationary at retracted positions (home positions) away from the handle 60 on the left and right sides of the handle 60 (first mode). . As shown in FIG. 49 , the two members of the movable frame accessory 69 move (advance) from the retracted position toward the direction of approaching the handle 60 , that is, move closer to each other and approach the handle 60 respectively. It can rest at the touching position (second aspect). The movable frame accessory 69 touches the handle 60 or the right hand of the player operating the handle 60 when it is in the advanced position. The movable frame accessory 69 can move in a direction in which the two members are separated from each other so as to change from the second mode to the first mode.

FIG. 50 is an explanatory view showing an example of the display effects of the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U). The right sub-display screen 64R, the left sub-display screen 64L, and the upper sub-display screen 64U can each independently display an image. Moreover, it is possible to perform an effect linked with the image on the display screen 7a.

10. Effect Examples, Effect Examples, Modifications, and Aspect Examples of the Present Embodiment Below, each effect example (display effect example, character object movable effect example) of the present embodiment will be described. In addition, an effect example, a modification example, and a mode example for the effect example will also be described. The effect to be described from now on is based on various information (jackpot determination information, jackpot type information, variation pattern information, advance determination information, etc.) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 81, as described above, based on the effect control microcomputer 91 ( This is an effect realized by the image control microcomputer 101). It should be noted that the following display rendering example is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 or the like. In some cases, the pending display (holding icon) is omitted in the display effect example.

51 to 53, the fixed stop symbol remaining display effects A to C will be described below. This fixed stop symbol remaining display effect is executed during the variation effect of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the fixed stop symbol remaining display effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image display device 7 and sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

[Fixed stop symbol remaining display effect A]
FIG. 51 is a diagram for explaining the fixed stop symbol remaining display effect A. FIG. Fixed stop pattern remaining display effect is, when the decorative pattern is stopped after the variable display, the variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the next special pattern fluctuation is displayed while the display of the decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed is maintained. is. In the fixed stop symbol remaining display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. An icon (the pending icon) 9C is displayed.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R displayed in the first area DA1 of the display screen 7a. The variable display of the special symbol (special symbol variation) is represented by the variable display, and the special symbol lottery result is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special design here may be either the first special design or the second special design. The decorative designs 8l, 8c, and 8r are a set of designs including a left decorative design 8l, a middle decorative design 8c, and a right decorative design 8r displayed in the second area DA2 of the display screen 7a. The variable display of the special symbol (special symbol variation) is represented by the variable display, and the special symbol lottery result is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. Here, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are in a state of being stopped at "789" after the variable display, indicating the last special drawing lottery result. The decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r are variably displayed and correspond to the current special figure variability (the variability).

The second area DA2 of the display screen 7a is positioned below the first area DA1 and is a different area that does not overlap with the first area DA1. Therefore, the variable display of the decorative symbols 8l, 8c and 8r in the second area DA2 is not displayed overlapping the statically displayed decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R in the first area DA1. The decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r may be displayed partially overlapping the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and may be displayed in front of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. , may be displayed on the back side.

Four pending icons 9A are displayed vertically on the right side of the display screen 7a. The variable icon (the pending icon) 9C is displayed in the variable icon display area at the bottom right of the display screen 7a. Here, a pedestal image is displayed below the variable icon display area. Both the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C have a round shape (spherical shape).

As shown in FIG. 51(B), the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r that have been variably displayed are stopped at "234". The decorative symbols 8l, 8c and 8r that are stopped and displayed do not overlap the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R. Along with the stop display of the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r, the variable icon (the suspended icon) 9C disappears. The lowermost pending icon 9A among the four lined pending icons 9A starts moving toward the variable icon display area where the variable icon 9C is displayed. The remaining hold icons 9A are shifted.

As shown in FIG. 51(C), when the next special figure variation is started, the decorative symbols 8f, 8s, and 8t are newly displayed in the form of variation display. The decorative designs 8f, 8s, and 8t are a set of designs including a left decorative design 8f, a middle decorative design 8s, and a right decorative design 8t displayed in the third area DA3 of the display screen 7a. The variable display of the special symbol (special symbol variation) is represented by the variable display, and the special symbol lottery result is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. When the decorative patterns 8f, 8s, and 8t are newly displayed in the variable display mode, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R and the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r are maintained in a stopped state.

The third area DA3 of the display screen 7a is positioned below the second area DA2 and is a different area that does not overlap with the second area DA2. Therefore, the variable display of the decorative patterns 8f, 8s and 8t in the third area DA3 is not displayed overlapping the statically displayed decorative patterns 8l, 8c and 8r in the second area DA2. The decorative patterns 8f, 8s, and 8t may be displayed partially overlapping the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r. At that time, the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r may be displayed on the front side. , may be displayed on the back side.

As shown in FIG. 51(D), the decorative symbols 8f, 8s, and 8t that have been variably displayed are stopped at "567". The decorative patterns 8f, 8s and 8t that are stopped and displayed do not overlap with the decorative patterns 8l, 8c and 8r. When the decorative symbols 8f, 8s, and 8t are stopped and displayed, the variable icon (the suspended icon) 9C disappears. The lowest pending icon 9A among the three lined pending icons 9A starts moving toward the variable icon display area where the variable icon 9C is displayed. The remaining hold icons 9A are shifted.

As shown in FIG. 51(E), when the next special figure variation is started, the decorative symbols 8x, 8y and 8z are newly displayed in the form of variation display. The decorative patterns 8x, 8y, 8z are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8x, a middle decorative pattern 8y, and a right decorative pattern 8z displayed in the fourth area DA4 of the display screen 7a. The variable display of the special symbol (special symbol variation) is represented by the variable display, and the special symbol lottery result is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. When the decorative patterns 8x, 8y and 8z are newly displayed in the variable display mode, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R, the decorative patterns 8l, 8c and 8r, and the decorative patterns 8f, 8s and 8t are stopped and displayed. display is maintained. Here, the variable display of the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, 8z is the same as the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, 8r, and the decorative patterns 8f, 8s, 8t. It's becoming These decorative patterns are variably displayed such that the left, middle and right patterns move from top to bottom.

The fourth area DA4 of the display screen 7a is positioned below the third area DA3 and is a different area that does not overlap with the third area DA3. Therefore, the variable display of the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, 8z in the fourth area DA4 is not displayed overlapping the statically displayed decorative patterns 8f, 8s, 8t in the third area DA3. The decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z may be displayed partially overlapping the decorative patterns 8f, 8s, and 8t, and at that time, may be displayed on the front side of the decorative patterns 8f, 8s, and 8t. , may be displayed on the back side.

As shown in FIG. 51(F), while the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z continue to be variably displayed in the fourth area DA4 of the display screen 7a, they are stopped and displayed in the first area DA1 of the display screen 7a. decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R displayed, decorative patterns 8l, 8c, 8r stop-displayed in the second area DA2 of the display screen 7a, and decorative patterns stop-displayed in the third area DA3 of the display screen 7a. The display of 8f, 8s, and 8t disappears.

After that, as shown in FIG. 51(G), the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z that have been variably displayed in the fourth area DA4 of the display screen 7a are stopped at "735". No decorative pattern is displayed in the first area DA1, the second area DA2, and the third area DA3 of the display screen 7a. When the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z are stopped and displayed, the variable icon (the suspended icon) 9C disappears.

After that, as shown in FIG. 51(H), the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z stopped at "735" in the fourth area DA4 of the display screen 7a disappear, and the decorative patterns are displayed on the display screen 7a. It will be in a state where it has not been done. The lowermost pending icon 9A of the two lined pending icons 9A starts moving toward the variable icon display area where the variable icon 9C is displayed, and the next special figure variation is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 51(I), in the fourth area DA4 of the display screen 7a, the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z are newly displayed in a variable display mode.

After that, as shown in FIG. 51(J), the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z that have been variably displayed in the fourth area DA4 of the display screen 7a are stopped at "135", and the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C is displayed. disappears. The remaining pending icon 9A starts moving toward the variation icon display area where the variation icon 9C is displayed, and the next special figure variation is started.

[Fixed stop symbol remaining display effect B]
FIG. 52 is a diagram for explaining the fixed stop symbol remaining display effect B. FIG. Fixed stop pattern remaining display effect is, when the decorative pattern is stopped after the variable display, the variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the next special pattern fluctuation is displayed while the display of the decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed is maintained. is. Compared with the fixed stop symbol remaining display effect B, the fixed stop symbol remaining display effect B is different from the fixed stop symbol remaining display effect A in that a plurality of decorative symbols are displayed so as to overlap each other and a specific image that partially covers the decorative symbols is displayed. etc. are mainly different. 52(A), decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, decorative patterns 8l, 8c, 8r, a pending icon 9A, and a variable An icon (the pending icon) 9C is displayed.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R displayed in the first area DA1 of the display screen 7a. The variable display of the special symbol (special symbol variation) is represented by the variable display, and the special symbol lottery result is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special design here may be either the first special design or the second special design. The decorative designs 8l, 8c, and 8r are a set of designs including a left decorative design 8l, a middle decorative design 8c, and a right decorative design 8r displayed in the second area DA2 of the display screen 7a. The variable display of the special symbol (special symbol variation) is represented by the variable display, and the special symbol lottery result is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. Here, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are in a state of being stopped at "789" after the variable display, indicating the last special drawing lottery result. The decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r are variably displayed and correspond to the current special figure variability (the variability).

The second area DA2 of the display screen 7a is an area partially overlapping the first area DA1. Therefore, the variable display of the decorative symbols 8l, 8c and 8r in the second area DA2 is displayed partially overlapping the statically displayed decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R in the first area DA1. Here, the decorative designs 8l, 8c and 8r of the second area DA2 are displayed in front of the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R of the first area DA1. The decorative patterns 8l, 8c and 8r may be displayed behind the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R, or may overlap the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R.

Four pending icons 9A are displayed vertically on the right side of the display screen 7a. The variable icon (the pending icon) 9C is displayed in the variable icon display area at the bottom right of the display screen 7a. Here, a pedestal image is displayed below the variable icon display area. Both the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C have a round shape (spherical shape).

As shown in FIG. 52(B), the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r which have been variably displayed are stopped at "234". The decorative patterns 8l, 8c and 8r that are stopped are partially overlapped with the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R, and the overlapping parts are displayed on the front side of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R. Along with the stop display of the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r, the variable icon (the suspended icon) 9C disappears. The lowermost pending icon 9A among the four lined pending icons 9A starts moving toward the variable icon display area where the variable icon 9C is displayed. The remaining hold icons 9A are shifted.

As shown in FIG. 52(C), when the next special figure variation is started, the decorative symbols 8f, 8s, and 8t are newly displayed in the form of variation display. The decorative designs 8f, 8s, and 8t are a set of designs including a left decorative design 8f, a middle decorative design 8s, and a right decorative design 8t displayed in the third area DA3 of the display screen 7a. The variable display of the special symbol (special symbol variation) is represented by the variable display, and the special symbol lottery result is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. When the decorative patterns 8f, 8s, 8t are newly displayed in the variable display mode, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, 8r are maintained in a stopped state.

The third area DA3 of the display screen 7a is an area partially overlapping with the second area DA2. Therefore, the variable display of the decorative patterns 8f, 8s, and 8t in the third area DA3 is partially overlapped with the statically displayed decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r in the second area DA2. Here, the decorative designs 8f, 8s and 8t of the third area DA3 are displayed in front of the decorative designs 8l, 8c and 8r of the second area DA2. The decorative patterns 8f, 8s and 8t may be displayed behind the decorative patterns 8l, 8c and 8r, or may overlap the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R. Also, the third area DA3 may partially overlap the first area DA1, and in this case, the decorative patterns 8f, 8s, and 8t may partially overlap the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. .

As shown in FIG. 52(D), the decorative symbols 8f, 8s, and 8t which have been variably displayed are stopped at "567". The stationary-displayed decorative patterns 8f, 8s, 8t partially overlap the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, 8r, and the overlapping parts are displayed on the front side of the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, 8r. When the decorative symbols 8f, 8s, and 8t are stopped and displayed, the variable icon (the suspended icon) 9C disappears. The lowest pending icon 9A among the three lined pending icons 9A starts moving toward the variable icon display area where the variable icon 9C is displayed. The remaining hold icons 9A are shifted.

As shown in FIG. 52(E), when the next special figure variation is started, the decorative symbols 8x, 8y and 8z are newly displayed in the form of variation display. The decorative patterns 8x, 8y, 8z are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8x, a middle decorative pattern 8y, and a right decorative pattern 8z displayed in the fourth area DA4 of the display screen 7a. The variable display of the special symbol (special symbol variation) is represented by the variable display, and the special symbol lottery result is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. When the decorative patterns 8x, 8y and 8z are newly displayed in the variable display mode, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R, the decorative patterns 8l, 8c and 8r, and the decorative patterns 8f, 8s and 8t are stopped and displayed. display is maintained. Here, the variable display of the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z is different from the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r, and the decorative patterns 8f, 8s, and 8t. . The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, 8r, and the decorative patterns 8f, 8s, 8t move downward from the top to the bottom. The display will fluctuate as follows. On the other hand, the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z are variably displayed so that the left, middle, and right patterns rotate horizontally with the vertical direction as the axis of rotation.

The fourth area DA4 of the display screen 7a is an area that partially overlaps with the third area DA3. Therefore, the variable display of the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, 8z in the fourth area DA4 is displayed partially overlapping the stationary-displayed decorative patterns 8f, 8s, 8t in the third area DA3. Here, the decorative designs 8x, 8y and 8z of the fourth area DA4 are displayed in front of the decorative designs 8f, 8s and 8t of the third area DA3. The decorative patterns 8x, 8y, 8z may be displayed behind the decorative patterns 8f, 8s, 8t, or may overlap the decorative patterns 8f, 8s, 8t. In addition, the fourth area DA4 may partially overlap the second area DA2 or the first area DA1. In this case, the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z may partially Or may overlap with the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R.

As shown in FIGS. 52(F) and 52(G), while the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z continue to be variably displayed in the fourth area DA4 of the display screen 7a, A specific image TG appears. The specific image TG is an image like a shutter, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R stopped and displayed in the first area DA1 of the display screen 7a and the second area DA2 of the display screen 7a are displayed by the specific image TG. The decorative patterns 8l, 8c, 8r stop-displayed on the display screen 7a and the decorative patterns 8f, 8s, 8t stop-displayed on the third area DA3 of the display screen 7a are covered, and the display disappears from the display screen 7a. On the other hand, since the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z of the fourth area DA4, the pending icon 9A, and the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C are displayed on the front side of the specific image TG, the specific image TG is displayed on the display screen. Even if the entire 7a is covered, the display is maintained. That is, the specific image TG is the back side of the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z in the fourth area DA4, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R in the first area DA1, the decorative patterns 8l in the second area DA2, 8c, 8r, and the decorative patterns 8f, 8s, and 8t of the third area DA3 are displayed on the front side.

Here, since the number of times of variation has reached the predetermined number, an effect in which the specific image TG appears is executed. The timing at which the specific image TG appears can be set arbitrarily. For example, the specific image TG may appear when the prefetch-changed pending icon 9A becomes the variable icon 9C, and the specific image TG may appear when the prefetch-changed pending icon 9A appears. Also, when switching from special figure 1 variation to special figure 2 variation, the specific image TG may appear, and the specific image TG may appear when reaching the ceiling (b time saving (play time)).

After that, as shown in FIG. 52(H), the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z that have been variably displayed in the fourth area DA4 of the display screen 7a are stopped at "678". At this time, the specific image TG is displayed in the first area DA1, the second area DA2, and the third area DA3 of the display screen 7a, and the decoration pattern on the back side of the specific image TG is not displayed. Along with the stop display of the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z, the variable icon (the suspended icon) 9C disappears. The lowermost pending icon 9A of the two lined pending icons 9A starts moving toward the variation icon display area, and the next special figure variation is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 52(I), the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z are variably displayed in the fourth area DA4 of the display screen 7a. When the stationary display of the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z in FIG. 52(H) is switched to the variable display of the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z in FIG. 52(I), the display of the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z continues. Alternatively, the stop display of the decorative symbols may disappear once, and the variable display of the decorative symbols may be newly displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 52(J), the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z that have been variably displayed in the fourth area DA4 of the display screen 7a are stopped at "767", and the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C is displayed. disappears. The remaining pending icon 9A starts moving toward the variation icon display area where the variation icon 9C is displayed, and the next special figure variation is started.

[Fixed stop symbol remaining display effect C]
FIG. 53 is a diagram for explaining the fixed stop symbol remaining display effect C. FIG. Fixed stop pattern remaining display effect is, when the decorative pattern is stopped after the variable display, the variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the next special pattern fluctuation is displayed while the display of the decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed is maintained. is. Compared with the fixed stop symbol remaining display effect C, the fixed stop symbol remaining display effect C is different in that a plurality of decorative symbols are displayed so as to overlap each other and a specific image is displayed that partially covers the decorative symbols. etc. are mainly different. In the fixed stop symbol remaining display effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 53(A), the display screen 7a displays decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, a pending icon 9A, and a variable icon (the pending icon) 9C. It is

The decorative designs 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of designs including the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R displayed in the first area DA1 of the display screen 7a. The variable display of special symbols (special symbol fluctuation) is represented by the variable display of , and the special symbol lottery result is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special design here may be either the first special design or the second special design. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed and correspond to the current special figure variability (the variability).

Two pending icons 9A are displayed side by side at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variable icon (the pending icon) 9C is displayed in the variable icon display area at the bottom center of the display screen 7a. Here, a pedestal image is displayed below the variable icon display area. Both the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C have a round shape (spherical shape).

As shown in FIG. 53(B), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that have been variably displayed are stopped at "234". Along with the stop display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, the variable icon (the suspended icon) 9C disappears. Then, the rightmost reserved icon 9A among the arranged reserved icons 9A starts to move toward the variable icon display area where the variable icon 9C is displayed. The remaining hold icons 9A are shifted. Here, an example is shown in which one pending icon 9A is added by winning a prize.

As shown in FIG. 53(C), when the next special figure variation is started, the decorative symbols 8x, 8y and 8z are newly displayed in the form of variation display. The decorative patterns 8x, 8y, 8z are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8x, a middle decorative pattern 8y, and a right decorative pattern 8z displayed in the second area DA2 of the display screen 7a. The variable display of special symbols (special symbol fluctuation) is represented by the variable display of , and the special symbol lottery result is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. When the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z are newly displayed in the variable display mode, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are kept displayed in a stopped state.

The second area DA2 of the display screen 7a overlaps with the first area DA1. Therefore, the variable display of the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, 8z in the second area DA2 is displayed overlapping the statically displayed decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R in the first area DA1. Here, the decorative designs 8x, 8y, 8z of the second area DA2 are displayed in front of the decorative designs 8L, 8C, 8R of the first area DA1. The decorative patterns 8x, 8y, 8z may be displayed behind the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R.

Here, the variable display of the decorative patterns 8x, 8y and 8z is different in the variable display from the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed so that the left, middle, and right patterns move downward from above. On the other hand, the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z are variably displayed so that the left, middle, and right patterns rotate horizontally with the vertical direction as the axis of rotation.

As shown in FIGS. 53(D) and 53(E), while the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z continue to be variably displayed in the second area DA2 of the display screen 7a, from the left side to the right side of the display screen 7a. A specific image TG appears. The specific image TG is an image like a shutter, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R stopped and displayed in the first area DA1 of the display screen 7a are covered with the specific image TG, and the display is removed from the display screen 7a. disappear. On the other hand, since the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z of the second area DA2, the pending icon 9A, and the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C are displayed in front of the specific image TG, the specific image TG is displayed on the display screen. Even if the entire 7a is covered, the display is maintained. That is, the specific image TG is displayed behind the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z in the second area DA2 and in front of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R in the first area DA1.

Here, since the number of times of variation has reached the predetermined number, an effect in which the specific image TG appears is executed. The timing at which the specific image TG appears can be set arbitrarily. For example, the specific image TG may appear when the prefetch-changed pending icon 9A becomes the variable icon 9C, and the specific image TG may appear when the prefetch-changed pending icon 9A appears. Also, when switching from special figure 1 variation to special figure 2 variation, the specific image TG may appear, and the specific image TG may appear when reaching the ceiling (b time saving (play time)).

After that, as shown in FIG. 53(F), the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z that have been variably displayed in the second area DA2 of the display screen 7a are stopped at "567". At this time, the specific image TG is displayed in the first area DA1 of the display screen 7a, and the decoration pattern on the back side of the specific image TG is not displayed. Along with the stop display of the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z, the variable icon (the suspended icon) 9C disappears. The rightmost pending icon 9A of the two lined pending icons 9A starts moving toward the variation icon display area, and the next special figure variation is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 53(G), the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z are variably displayed in the second area DA2 of the display screen 7a. When the stationary display of the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z in FIG. 53(F) is switched to the variable display of the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z in FIG. 53(G), the display of the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z continues. Alternatively, the stop display of the decorative symbols may disappear once, and the variable display of the decorative symbols may be newly displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 53(H), the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z that have been variably displayed in the second area DA2 of the display screen 7a are stopped and displayed at "678", and the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C is displayed. disappears. The remaining pending icon 9A starts moving toward the variation icon display area where the variation icon 9C is displayed, and the next special figure variation is started. When the next special figure fluctuation is started, as shown in FIG. 53 (I), the specific image TG disappears, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed in the first area DA1, and in the second area DA2 Decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z are variably displayed. The variable display of the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, 8z in the second area DA2 is displayed overlapping the statically displayed decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R in the first area DA1. The variable display of the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, 8z and the variable display of the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, 8z correspond to the same special figure variation.

Here, since the pending icon 9A in the state of being prefetched and changed becomes the variable icon 9C, an effect is executed in which the specific image TG disappears. Note that the timing at which the specific image TG disappears can be set arbitrarily. For example, after the specific image TG appears, the specific image TG may disappear when the variation is executed a predetermined number of times. A mode in which the specific image TG disappears may be employed. Moreover, the specific image TG may appear when reaching the ceiling (b time saving (play time)), and the specific image TG may disappear when the special figure 2 variation starts.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 53(J), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R variably displayed in the first area DA1 of the display screen 7a and the ornaments variably displayed in the second area DA2 of the display screen 7a The symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z are all stopped at "678".

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the fixed stop symbol remaining display effect will be shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 51(C) to (E), a set of decorative symbols 8f, 8s, and 8t variably displayed corresponding to the first special figure variation are stopped and displayed. After the first production and the first production, while maintaining the display of a set of decorative patterns 8f, 8s, and 8t that are stopped and displayed, the second special next to the first special figure fluctuation A second effect in which a variable display of a set of decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z corresponding to the figure variation is displayed can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 52 and 53 as well.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 51(E) and (F), after the second effect, a set of decorative symbols 8x that are variably displayed corresponding to the second special figure variation, While the display of 8y and 8z is maintained, a third effect is executed in which the display of a set of decorative symbols 8f, 8s and 8t stopped after being variably displayed corresponding to the first special symbol variation is extinguished. can do. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 52 and 53 as well.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 51(G) to (I), after the third effect, a set of decorative symbols 8x displayed variably corresponding to the second special figure variation. , 8y, 8z are stopped and displayed, and the set of decorative symbols 8x, 8y, 8z stopped and displayed are not displayed, corresponding to the third special figure variation next to the second special figure variation A fourth effect can be executed in which a set of decorative symbols 8x, 8y, 8z are displayed in a variable display. According to this configuration, the game player can be visually entertained by a novel performance that has never been seen in the past, that is, the previous performance in which the stop pattern remains is switched to the performance in which the previous stop pattern does not remain, and the amusement can be improved. . The same applies to FIGS. 52 and 53 as well.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 52(F) and (G), in the third production, a set of decorative symbols 8x and 8y that are variably displayed corresponding to the second special figure variation A specific image TG is displayed on the front side of a set of decorative patterns 8f, 8s, and 8t that are stopped and displayed after being variably displayed corresponding to the first special figure variation and on the back side of 8z. , By being covered with the specific image TG, the display of a set of decorative symbols 8f, 8s, and 8t stopped after being variably displayed corresponding to the first special figure variability disappears. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIG. 53 as well.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 52(D) and (E), in the second production, a set of decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z corresponding to the second special figure variation are displayed in a variable display. are superimposed on the set of decorative symbols 8f, 8s, and 8t that are stopped. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIG. 53 as well.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 52(E), a set of decorative symbols 8f, 8s, and 8t corresponding to the first special figure variation are displayed and the second special figure variation is displayed. The variation mode is different from the variation display of the set of corresponding decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIG. 53 as well.

[Modification]
Below, a modified example of the fixed stop symbol remaining display effect will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In FIG. 51(I) of the ceiling reaching schedule suggesting effect A, the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z are newly displayed in a variable display mode in the fourth area DA4 of the display screen 7a. However, the decoration pattern may be newly displayed in a variable display mode in an area other than the fourth area DA4 of the display screen 7a.
Also, in FIGS. 52(H) and (I) of the ceiling reaching schedule suggestion effect B, after the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z are stopped and displayed in the second area DA2 of the display screen 7a, the next special figure variation is displayed. It is assumed that the variable display of the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z is started. However, the variation display of the decorative symbols corresponding to the next special figure variation may be displayed in an area other than the second area DA2 of the display screen 7a.
In addition, in FIGS. 53(F) and (G) of the ceiling reaching schedule suggestion effect C, in the second area DA2 of the display screen 7a, after the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z are stopped and displayed, the next special figure variation is displayed. It is assumed that the variable display of the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z is started. However, the variation display of the decorative symbols corresponding to the next special figure variation may be displayed in an area other than the second area DA2 of the display screen 7a.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇[Aspect A1-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is a set of decorative patterns capable of informing the propriety,
A first effect in which the set of decorative symbols variably displayed corresponding to the first special figure variation is stopped and displayed;
After the first effect, while maintaining the display of the set of decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed, the set of the set corresponding to the second special figure variation following the first special figure variation A second effect in which a variable display of decorative patterns is displayed, and
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A1-1,
After the second effect, while maintaining the display of the set of decorative symbols variably displayed corresponding to the second special figure variation, the variation display is performed in response to the first special figure variation. capable of executing a third effect in which the display of the set of decorative symbols stop-displayed after being displayed disappears,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A1-2,
After the third effect, the set of decorative symbols variably displayed corresponding to the second special figure variation is stopped and displayed, and the set of stopped and displayed decorative symbols is not displayed. In the state, it is possible to execute a fourth effect in which the variation display of the set of decorative symbols corresponding to the third special figure variation next to the second special figure variation is displayed,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A1-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect A1-2 or aspect A1-3,
In the third effect, on the back side of the set of decorative patterns variably displayed corresponding to the second special figure variation, and variably displayed corresponding to the first special figure variation A specific image is displayed on the front side of the set of decorative patterns that are stopped and displayed after being displayed, and by being covered with the specific image, the stop display is performed after being variably displayed corresponding to the first special figure variation. display of the set of decorative patterns that have been displayed disappears;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A1-1 to A1-4,
In the second effect, the variation display of the set of decorative symbols corresponding to the second special figure variation is displayed overlapping the set of decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A1-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A1-1 to A1-5,
The variation display of the set of decorative symbols corresponding to the first special figure variation and the variation display of the set of decorative symbols corresponding to the second special figure variation are different from each other in variation mode. ,
A gaming machine characterized by:

The variable display area change effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 54 to 56. FIG. This variable display area change effect is executed during the variable effect of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a variable display area change effect, the corresponding image data is read out from the ROM 103 and the image display device 7 is displayed. Images are displayed on the display screen 7a and the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

[Variation display area change effect A]
FIG. 54 is a diagram for explaining the variable display area change effect A. FIG. The variable display area change effect is an effect in which the display area in which the variable display of the decorative pattern is displayed on the display screen 7a changes when the special figure 1 is changed and when the special figure 2 is changed. The special figure 1 variation means the variation of the special symbol in the first special symbol display 41a, and the special figure 2 variation means the variation of the special symbol in the 2 special symbol display 41b. In the variable display area change effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 54A, decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, a pending icon 9A, and a variable icon (the pending icon) 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a. ing. Here, it is assumed that special figure 1 variation is executed in the gaming state in the normal state (low probability base state).

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R displayed in the horizontally long area YA of the display screen 7a. The variable display of the special symbol (special symbol variation) is represented by the variable display, and the special symbol lottery result is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner and correspond to the current special figure 1 variation (the variation). In this case, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed so that the left, middle, and right patterns move downward from above.

Two pending icons 9A are displayed side by side at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variable icon (the pending icon) 9C is displayed in the variable icon display area at the bottom center of the display screen 7a. Here, a pedestal image is displayed below the variable icon display area. Both the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C have a round shape (spherical shape).

As shown in FIG. 54(B), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that have been variably displayed are stopped at "234". Along with the stop display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C disappears. Then, the rightmost reserved icon 9A among the arranged reserved icons 9A starts moving toward the variable icon display area where the variable icon 9C is displayed. The remaining hold icons 9A are shifted. Here, an example is shown in which one pending icon 9A is added by winning a prize. In addition, here, due to the stop display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, the number of fluctuations in the normal state (normal probability state, non-time-saving state, and low base state) reaches 500 times, and the game state is the time-saving state (normal Probability state and time saving state and high base state) shall be switched.

When the game state is switched to the time saving state and the next special figure 1 variation is started, as shown in FIG. The decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z are a set of patterns including an upper decorative pattern 8x, a middle decorative pattern 8y, and a lower decorative pattern 8z displayed in the vertically long area TA of the display screen 7a. The variable display of the special symbol (special symbol variation) is represented by the variable display, and the special symbol lottery result is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The decorative symbols 8x, 8y, 8z are displayed in a variable manner, and correspond to the special figure 1 variation (the variation). Here, the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z are variably displayed so that the top, middle, and bottom patterns move from left to right. The area TA of the display screen 7a is a vertically elongated area that partially overlaps with the area YA, and has approximately the same area. A character image of "longitudinal mode" is displayed according to the variable display of the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z. That is, the state in which the decorative patterns are arranged vertically is notified. When switching from FIG. 54(B) to FIG. 54(C), that is, when switching from the state in which the decorative patterns are displayed in the horizontal direction to the effect in which the decorative patterns are displayed in the vertical direction, the background image is also switched. may

As shown in FIG. 54(D), in the state where the variable display of decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z is continued in the area TA of the display screen 7a, here, the game ball enters the second starting port 21. , and a suspension icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure suspension is newly displayed on the display screen 7a. In FIG. 54(D), the same background image as in FIG. 54(C) is displayed, while the display of the character image in the "vertical mode" disappears.

After that, as shown in FIG. 54(E), the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z that have been variably displayed in the area TA of the display screen 7a are stopped at "789". Along with the stop display of the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z, the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C disappears. Here, the digestion of the second special figure reservation is executed with priority over the digestion of the first special figure reservation. Start moving towards, the next special figure variation (special figure 2 variation) is started. The game state remains in the time saving state.

Then, as shown in FIG. 54(F), the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z are variably displayed in the area TA of the display screen 7a. Here, there is a game ball entering the second starting port 21, and the suspension icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure suspension is newly displayed on the display screen 7a. When switching from FIG. 54 (E) to FIG. 54 (F), that is, when the next special figure variation (special figure 2 variation) is started, the background image may be switched together.

After that, as shown in FIG. 54(G), the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z that have been variably displayed in the area TA of the display screen 7a are stopped at "567". Along with the stationary display of the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z, the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C disappears. In FIG. 54(G), the same background image as in FIG. 54(F) is displayed. Here, the digestion of the second special figure reservation is executed with priority over the digestion of the first special figure reservation. Start moving towards, the next special figure variation (special figure 2 variation) is started. The game state remains in the time saving state.

When the next special figure variation is started, as shown in FIG. 54(H), the variation display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R is displayed. The decorative designs 8L, 8C, and 8R are the same as those shown in FIG. 54A, and include a left decorative design 8L, a middle decorative design 8C, and a right decorative design 8R displayed in the horizontally long area YA of the display screen 7a. . Decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, and correspond to the current special figure 2 variation (the variation). The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed so that the left, middle, and right patterns move downward from above. When switching from FIG. 54(G) to FIG. 54(H), that is, when switching from the state in which the decorative patterns are displayed in the vertical direction to the effect in which the decorative patterns are displayed in the horizontal direction, the background image is also switched. may

Here, depending on the elapsed time from the next variation (Fig. 54 (C)) reaching the ceiling (b time saving (play time)), the display mode of the decorative pattern is the decorative pattern 8x, 8y, 8z of the area TA to the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R of the area YA. The timing at which the display mode of the decorative pattern is switched can be arbitrarily set. For example, the hold icon 9A or the hold icon 9B in the pre-read changed state may be switched when it becomes the variation icon 9C, or may be switched when the variation is performed a predetermined number of times after reaching the ceiling. Moreover, it may switch when reaching the ceiling (b short time (play time)) and return when the play time ends.

After that, as shown in FIG. 54(I), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R that have been variably displayed in the area YA of the display screen 7a are stopped at "735". Along with the stop display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, the variable icon (the suspended icon) 9C disappears. In FIG. 54(I), the same background image as in FIG. 54(H) is displayed. The rightmost pending icon 9A of the two lined pending icons 9A starts moving toward the variation icon display area, and the next special figure variation (special figure 1 variation) is started. Here, the game state remains in the time saving state. When the next special figure variation is started, as shown in FIG. 54(J), the variation display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R is displayed.

[Variation display area change effect B]
FIG. 55 is a diagram for explaining the variable display area change effect B. FIG. The variable display area change effect is an effect in which the display area in which the variable display of the decorative pattern is displayed on the display screen 7a changes when the special figure 1 is changed and when the special figure 2 is changed. The special figure 1 variation means the variation of the special symbol in the first special symbol display 41a, and the special figure 2 variation means the variation of the special symbol in the 2 special symbol display 41b. The variable display area change effect B differs from the variable display area change effect A mainly in the change mode of the display area of the decorative pattern. In the variable display area change effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 1 background image HK1 is displayed. Here, it is assumed that the special figure 1 variation is executed in the normal state (low-probability base state) in the gaming state.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R displayed in the horizontally long area YA of the display screen 7a. The variable display of the special symbol (special symbol variation) is represented by the variable display, and the special symbol lottery result is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner and correspond to the current special figure 1 variation (the variation). In this case, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed so that the left, middle, and right patterns move downward from above.

Two pending icons 9A are displayed side by side at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variable icon (the pending icon) 9C is displayed in the variable icon display area at the bottom center of the display screen 7a. Here, a pedestal image is displayed below the variable icon display area. Both the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C have a round shape (spherical shape). The first background image HK1 is an elliptical image, and is displayed behind the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the pending icon 9A, and the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C.

As shown in FIG. 55(B), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that have been variably displayed are stopped at "234". Along with the stop display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C disappears. Then, the rightmost reserved icon 9A among the arranged reserved icons 9A starts to move toward the variable icon display area where the variable icon 9C is displayed. The remaining hold icons 9A are shifted. Here, due to the stop display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, the number of fluctuations in the normal state (normal probability state, non-time saving state and low base state) reaches 500 times, and the game state is a time saving state (normal probability state and the time saving state and high base state) shall be switched.

When the game state is switched to the time saving state and the next special figure 1 variation is started, as shown in FIG. The decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z are a set of patterns including an upper decorative pattern 8x, a middle decorative pattern 8y, and a lower decorative pattern 8z displayed in a relatively small oblong area YB of the display screen 7a, Variable display of special symbols (special symbol variation) is represented by variable display of a set of symbols, and special symbol lottery results are notified by stop display of a set of symbols. The decorative symbols 8x, 8y, 8z are displayed in a variable manner, and correspond to the special figure 1 variation (the variation). In this case, the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z are variably displayed such that the left, middle, and right patterns move downward from above. An area YB of the display screen 7a is a horizontally long area that is below the area YA and does not overlap with the area YA, and has a smaller area than the area YA. A first mode image MG1 including a character image of "small display mode" is displayed in accordance with the variable display of the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z. That is, the state in which the decorative pattern is displayed relatively small is notified. When switching from FIG. 55(B) to FIG. 55(C), that is, when the position and size of the decorative pattern display area change, the background image switches from the first background image HK1 to the first mode image MG1.

As shown in FIG. 55(D), in the state where the variable display of decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z is continued in the area YB of the display screen 7a, here, the game ball enters the second starting port 21. , and a suspension icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure suspension is newly displayed on the display screen 7a. In FIG. 55(D), the display of the first mode image MG1 continues.

After that, as shown in FIG. 55(E), the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z that have been variably displayed in the area YB of the display screen 7a are stopped at "567". Along with the stationary display of the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z, the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C disappears. Here, since the digestion of the second special figure suspension is executed with priority over the digestion of the first special figure suspension, the suspension icon 9A remains as it is, and the suspension icon 9B starts moving toward the variable icon display area. Then, the next Toku-zu variation (Toku-zu 2 variation) is started. The gaming state remains the time-saving state, and the display of the first mode image MG1 continues.

Then, as shown in FIG. 55(F), the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z are variably displayed in the area YB of the display screen 7a. Here, there is a game ball entering the second starting port 21, and the suspension icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure suspension is newly displayed on the display screen 7a. A second mode image MG2 including a character image of "continuous small display mode" is displayed in accordance with the variable display of the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z. That is, it is notified that the decorative pattern will continue to be displayed in a relatively small size. When switching from FIG. 55 (E) to FIG. 55 (F), that is, when the next special figure variation (special figure 2 variation) is started, the background image switches from the first mode image MG1 to the second mode image MG2 .

After that, as shown in FIG. 55(G), the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z that have been variably displayed in the area YB of the display screen 7a are stopped at "789". Along with the stationary display of the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z, the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C disappears. In FIG. 55(G), the display of the second mode image MG2 continues. Here, the digestion of the second special figure reservation is executed with priority over the digestion of the first special figure reservation. Start moving towards, the next special figure variation (special figure 2 variation) is started. The game state remains in the time saving state.

When the next special figure variation is started, as shown in FIG. 55(H), the variation display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R is displayed. The decorative designs 8L, 8C, and 8R are the same as those shown in FIG. 55A, and include a left decorative design 8L, a middle decorative design 8C, and a right decorative design 8R displayed in the horizontally long area YA of the display screen 7a. . Decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, and correspond to the current special figure 2 variation (the variation). The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed so that the left, middle, and right patterns move downward from above. Here, there is a game ball entering the second starting port 21, and the suspension icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure suspension is newly displayed on the display screen 7a.

A second background image HK2 having a gourd shape is displayed in accordance with the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. The second background image HK2 is displayed behind the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the pending icon 9A, and the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C. When switching from FIG. 55(G) to FIG. 55(H), that is, when the size of the decorative pattern is switched from a small state to a large state, the background image is also switched from the second mode image MG2 to the second background image HK2. .

Here, depending on the elapsed time from the next variation (Fig. 55 (C)) reaching the ceiling (b time saving (play time)), the display mode of the decorative pattern is the decorative pattern 8x, 8y, 8z of the area YB to the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R of the area YA. In addition, the timing at which the display mode of the decorative pattern is switched can be arbitrarily set. For example, the hold icon 9A or the hold icon 9B in the pre-read changed state may be switched when it becomes the variation icon 9C, or may be switched when the variation is performed a predetermined number of times after reaching the ceiling. Moreover, it may switch when reaching the ceiling (b time saving (play time)) and return when the play time ends.

After that, as shown in FIG. 55(I), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R that have been variably displayed in the area YA of the display screen 7a are stopped at "735". Along with the stop display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C disappears. In FIG. 55(I), the display of the second background image HK2 continues. Here, since the digestion of the second special figure suspension is executed with priority over the digestion of the first special figure suspension, the suspension icon 9A remains as it is, and the suspension icon 9B starts moving toward the variable icon display area. Then, the next Toku-zu variation (Toku-zu 2 variation) is started. The game state remains in the time saving state. When the next special figure variation is started, as shown in FIG. 55(J), the variation display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R is displayed.

[Variation display area change effect C]
FIG. 56 is a diagram for explaining the variable display area change effect C. As shown in FIG. The variable display area change effect is an effect in which the display area in which the variable display of the decorative pattern is displayed on the display screen 7a changes when the special figure 1 is changed and when the special figure 2 is changed. The special figure 1 variation means the variation of the special symbol in the first special symbol display 41a, and the special figure 2 variation means the variation of the special symbol in the 2 special symbol display 41b. The variable display area change effect C differs from the variable display area change effect A mainly in the change mode of the display area of the decorative pattern. In the variable display area change effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 56A, the display screen 7a displays decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, a pending icon 9A, a variable icon (the pending icon) 9C, a frame An image WK is displayed. Here, it is assumed that special figure 1 variation is executed in the gaming state in the normal state (low probability base state).

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are a set of patterns including the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R displayed inside the frame image WK, and the set of patterns is displayed in a variable manner. represents the variable display of special symbols (special symbol fluctuation), and the special symbol lottery result is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner and correspond to the current special figure 1 variation (the variation). In this case, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed so that the left, middle, and right patterns move downward from above.

Two pending icons 9A are displayed side by side at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variable icon (the pending icon) 9C is displayed in the variable icon display area at the bottom center of the display screen 7a. Here, a pedestal image is displayed below the variable icon display area. Both the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C have a round shape (spherical shape). The frame image WK is a horizontally long rectangular image, displayed behind the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed inside.

As shown in FIG. 56(B), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that have been variably displayed are stopped at "234". Along with the stop display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, the variable icon (the suspended icon) 9C disappears. Then, the rightmost reserved icon 9A among the arranged reserved icons 9A starts moving toward the variable icon display area where the variable icon 9C is displayed. The remaining hold icons 9A are shifted. Here, due to the stop display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the number of fluctuations in the normal state (normal probability state, non-time saving state and low base state) reaches 500 times, and the game state is a time saving state (normal probability state and the time saving state and high base state) shall be switched.

When the game state is switched to the time saving state and the next special figure 1 fluctuation is started, as shown in FIG. By closing, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R gradually become invisible.

When the shutter is completely closed, as shown in FIG. 56(D), the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z are displayed on the shutter in a variable manner. The decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z are a set of patterns including an upper decorative pattern 8x, a middle decorative pattern 8y, and a lower decorative pattern 8z displayed in a relatively small oblong area SA of the display screen 7a, Variable display of special symbols (special symbol variation) is represented by variable display of a set of symbols, and special symbol lottery results are notified by stop display of a set of symbols. The decorative symbols 8x, 8y, 8z are displayed in a variable manner, and correspond to the special figure 1 variation (the variation). In this case, the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z are variably displayed such that the left, middle, and right patterns move downward from above. The area SA of the display screen 7a is a horizontally long area that is inside the frame image WK and overlaps with the shutter image, and has a smaller area area than the frame image WK. Between FIG. 56(B) and FIG. 56(D), that is, when the position and size of the decorative design display area change, the background image may be switched.

As shown in FIG. 56(D), in the state where the variable display of decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z is continued in the area SA of the display screen 7a, here, the game ball enters the second starting port 21. , and a suspension icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure suspension is newly displayed on the display screen 7a.

After that, as shown in FIG. 56(E), the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z that have been variably displayed in the area SA of the display screen 7a are stopped at "567". Along with the stop display of the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z, the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C disappears. Here, since the digestion of the second special figure suspension is executed with priority over the digestion of the first special figure suspension, the suspension icon 9A remains as it is, and the suspension icon 9B starts moving toward the variable icon display area. Then, the next Toku-zu variation (Toku-zu 2 variation) is started. The game state remains in the time saving state.

Then, as shown in FIG. 56(F), the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z are variably displayed in the area SA of the display screen 7a. When switching from FIG. 56 (E) to FIG. 56 (F), that is, when the next special figure variation (special figure 2 variation) is started, the background image may be switched.

After that, as shown in FIG. 56(G), the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z that have been variably displayed in the area SA of the display screen 7a are stopped at "789". Along with the stationary display of the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z, the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C disappears. Here, the digestion of the second special figure reservation is executed with priority over the digestion of the first special figure reservation. Start moving towards, the next special figure variation (special figure 2 variation) is started. The game state remains in the time saving state.

When the next special figure variation is started, as shown in FIG. gradually become visible. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are in a state of being stopped and displayed at "789" which is the same as the decorative patterns 8x, 8y and 8z.

When the shutter is completely opened, as shown in FIG. 56(I), the stop display of "789" of the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, 8z disappears and the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R is displayed. The decorative designs 8L, 8C, 8R are the same as those shown in FIG. 56A, and include a left decorative design 8L, a middle decorative design 8C, and a right decorative design 8R displayed inside the frame image WK. Decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, and correspond to the current special figure 2 variation (the variation). The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed so that the left, middle, and right patterns move downward from above. Between FIG. 56(G) and FIG. 56(I), that is, when the position and size of the decorative pattern display area change, the background image may be switched.

Here, depending on the elapsed time from the next variation (Fig. 56 (C)) reaching the ceiling (b time saving (play time)), the display mode of the decorative pattern is the decorative pattern 8x, 8y, 8z of the area SA to the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R inside the frame image WK. In addition, the timing at which the display mode of the decorative pattern is switched can be arbitrarily set. For example, the hold icon 9A or the hold icon 9B in the pre-read changed state may be switched when it becomes the variation icon 9C, or may be switched when the variation is performed a predetermined number of times after reaching the ceiling. Alternatively, it may be switched (the shutter is lowered) when the ceiling (b time saving (play time)) is reached, and may be returned (the shutter is raised) when the play time is over.

After that, as shown in FIG. 56(J), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that have been variably displayed inside the frame image WK are stopped at "735". Along with the stop display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C disappears. In FIG. 56(J), the same background image as in FIG. 56(I) is displayed. Suspended icon 9A starts moving toward the variation icon display area, and the next special figure variation (special figure 1 variation) is started. Here, the game state remains in the time saving state. When the next special figure variation is started, the variation display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R is displayed.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the variable display area change rendering will be shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 54(C) to (G), in the area TA of the display screen 7a, a set of decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z corresponding to the special figure 1 variation. A set of decorative patterns 8x, 8y, 8z corresponding to the special figure 2 variation in the first production in which the display is displayed and the special figure variation next to the special figure variation executed in the first production. A second effect in which is displayed in the area TA can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved. 55 and 56 are the same.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 54 (A) ~ (B), in the special figure fluctuation before the special figure 1 fluctuation executed in the first production, it corresponds to the special figure 1 fluctuation A third effect can be executed in which a set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in an area YA of the display screen 7a different from the area TA. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved. 55 and 56 are the same.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 54 (C) ~ (H), in the special figure fluctuation after the special figure 2 fluctuation executed in the second production, corresponding to the special figure 2 fluctuation A fourth effect can be executed in which a set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in the area YA. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved. 55 and 56 are the same.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 54, the game state is different between the first effect (time saving state) and the third effect (normal state). ) and the second effect (time saving state) have the same game state. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved. 55 and 56 are the same.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 54 to 56, the first effect and the third effect have different background images, and the first effect and the second effect have different background images. , the background image is different. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 54, the area YA and the area TA are partially overlapped. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved. FIG. 56 is also the same.
[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Modified Example 2, in the first effect and the second effect, a set of decorations is displayed in the third area of the display screen 7a different from the first area and the second area. Variation display of the pattern is displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
A modification of the variable display area change effect will be shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the variable display area change effect A, the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R1 in the area YA and the variable display of the decorative symbols 8x, 8y and 8z in the area TA may be performed in one variation. That is, during one variation, the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R1 in the area YA may be switched to the variable display of the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z in the area TA. The variable display of the patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z may be switched to the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R1 in the area YA. The same applies to the variable display area change effects B and C as well.

[Modification 2]
In the variable display area change effect A, when the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed in the area YA, and when the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, 8z are displayed in the area TA, what are the areas YA and TA? Decorative designs different from the decorative designs 8L, 8C, 8R and the decorative designs 8x, 8y, 8z may be displayed in different regions of the display screen 7a. The same applies to the variable display area change effects B and C as well.

[Modification 3]
In the variable display area change effect AC, special figure 1 variation and special figure 2 variation may be reversed. That is, in the variable display area change production A ~ C, the portion described as special figure 1 variation may be performed as special figure 2 variation, and the part described as special figure 2 variation may be performed as special figure 1 variation .

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect A2-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is a set of decorative patterns capable of informing the propriety,
a first effect in which a variable display of the set of decorative symbols corresponding to one of the special figure 1 variation and the special figure 2 variation is displayed in the first area of the display means;
In the special figure variation next to the special figure variation executed in the first production, the variation display of the set of decorative symbols corresponding to the other special figure variation of the special figure 1 variation and the special figure 2 variation capable of executing a second effect displayed in the first area;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A2-1,
In the special figure variation before the special figure variation executed in the first production, the variation display of the set of decorative symbols corresponding to the one special figure variation of the special figure 1 variation and the special figure 2 variation is displayed in a second area of the display means different from the first area,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A2-2,
In the special figure variation after the special figure variation executed in the second production, the variation display of the set of decorative symbols corresponding to the other special figure variation of the special figure 1 variation and the special figure 2 variation is capable of executing a fourth effect displayed in the second area,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A2-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect A2-2 or aspect A2-3,
The first effect and the third effect have different game states, and the first effect and the second effect have the same game state.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A2-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A2-2 to A2-4,
The first effect and the third effect have different background images, and the first effect and the second effect have different background images.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A2-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A2-2 to A2-5,
The first region and the second region partially overlap,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A2-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A2-1 to A2-6,
In the first effect and the second effect, a variable display of the set of decorative patterns is displayed in a third area of the display means different from the first area and the second area,
A gaming machine characterized by:

The variable display area overlapping effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 57 to 59. FIG. This variable display area duplication effect is executed during the variable effect of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the variable display area overlapping effect, the corresponding image data is read out from the ROM 103 and displayed on the image display device 7. Images are displayed on the display screen 7a and the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

[Variation display area duplication effect A]
FIG. 57 is a diagram for explaining the variable display area overlap effect A. FIG. In the fluctuating display area duplication effect, decorative patterns are newly displayed in the second area of the display screen 7a in the same state as the decorative patterns in the first area while the display of the decorative patterns is maintained in the first area of the display screen 7a. This is the presentation that will be displayed. In the variable display area overlapping effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 57(A), decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, a pending icon 9A, and a variable icon (the pending icon) 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a. ing. Here, it is assumed that the special figure 1 variation is executed in the normal state (low-probability base state) in the gaming state.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R displayed in the first area DA1 of the display screen 7a. The variable display of the special symbol (special symbol variation) is represented by the variable display, and the special symbol lottery result is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special design here may be either the first special design or the second special design. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed and correspond to the current special figure variability (the variability). In this case, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed so that the left, middle, and right patterns move downward from above.

Four pending icons 9A are displayed side by side at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variable icon (the pending icon) 9C is displayed in the variable icon display area at the bottom center of the display screen 7a. Here, a pedestal image is displayed below the variable icon display area. Both the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C have a round shape (spherical shape).

As shown in FIG. 57(B), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that have been variably displayed are stopped at "234". Along with the stop display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R, the decorative patterns 8l, 8c and 8r are newly displayed in a state of being stopped at "234". The decorative designs 8l, 8c, and 8r are a set of designs including the left decorative design 8l, the middle decorative design 8c, and the right decorative design 8r displayed in the second area DA2 of the display screen 7a. It is in the same state as 8C and 8R. Here, the same state means that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R fluctuate when fluctuating, stop when stopped, and correspond to the same special figure fluctuation. That is, the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, 8r and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are synchronized with each other. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, 8r may have the same switching pattern (fluctuation pattern) during variable display, or may differ from each other. Here, the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r are varied in such a manner that the left, middle, and right patterns move from above to below, similarly to the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. Is displayed. The decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r may be varied and displayed, for example, so that the left, middle, and right patterns rotate horizontally with the vertical direction as the axis of rotation.

When the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, 8r are newly displayed in the mode of stop display, the display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R is maintained in the stopped state. Here, almost simultaneously with the stopped display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r are newly displayed in a stopped state. After a while (for example, 1 to 3 seconds) after the display, the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r may be newly displayed in a stopped state. Further, when the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are still being variably displayed before they stop, the variably displayed decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r are newly displayed, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed. You may make it stop simultaneously with a stop.

The second area DA2 of the display screen 7a is positioned below the first area DA1 and is a different area that does not overlap with the first area DA1. Therefore, the variable display of the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r in the second area DA2 is not displayed overlapping the statically displayed decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R in the first area DA1. The decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r may be displayed overlapping at least a part of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and at that time, may be displayed on the front side of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. and may be displayed on the back side.

Along with the stop display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C disappears. Then, the rightmost reserved icon 9A among the arranged reserved icons 9A starts to move toward the variable icon display area where the variable icon 9C is displayed. The remaining hold icons 9A are shifted.

As shown in FIG. 57(C), when the next special figure variation is started, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r are variably displayed at the same time. After that, as shown in FIG. 57(D), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, 8r are stopped at "567" at the same time. The variation start timing and stop display timing of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, 8r may be shifted. Along with the stop display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, 8r, the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C disappears. Then, the rightmost reserved icon 9A among the arranged reserved icons 9A starts moving toward the variable icon display area where the variable icon 9C is displayed. The remaining hold icons 9A are shifted.

As shown in FIG. 57(E), when the next special figure variation is started, the display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stopped and displayed in the first area DA1 disappears, and is stopped and displayed in the second area DA2. The decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r that have been displayed are variably displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 57(F), decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r are stopped at "789". Along with the stop display of the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r, the variable icon (the suspended icon) 9C disappears. Then, the rightmost reserved icon 9A among the arranged reserved icons 9A starts moving toward the variable icon display area where the variable icon 9C is displayed. The remaining hold icons 9A are shifted.

As shown in FIG. 57(G), when the next special figure variation is started, the decorative symbols 8l, 8c and 8r are variably displayed. While the decorative patterns 8l, 8c and 8r are being variably displayed, as shown in FIG. 57(H), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are newly displayed in the first area DA1 while being variably displayed. That is, here, an effect is executed in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are newly displayed in the same state as the decorative patterns 8l, 8c and 8r. The timing at which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R appear is after a predetermined time has passed since the variable display of the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r is displayed. The timing at which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R appear may be the same as when the variable display of the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 57(I), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, 8r are stopped at "735" at the same time. The stop display timings of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, 8r may be shifted. Along with the stop display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, 8r, the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C disappears. Then, the pending icon 9A starts moving toward the variable icon display area where the variable icon 9C is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 57 (J), when the next special figure fluctuation is started, the display of the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r stopped in the second area DA2 disappears, and is stopped in the first area DA1. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R that have been displayed are variably displayed. The state of FIG. 57(J) is the same as that of FIG. 57(A), and then becomes the state of FIG. 57(B).

[Variation display area duplication effect B]
FIG. 58 is a diagram for explaining the variable display area overlap effect B. FIG. In the fluctuating display area duplication effect, decorative patterns are newly displayed in the second area of the display screen 7a in the same state as the decorative patterns in the first area while the display of the decorative patterns is maintained in the first area of the display screen 7a. This is the presentation that will be displayed. The variable display area duplication effect B differs from the variable display area duplication effect A mainly in that a plurality of sets of decorative symbols are displayed in an overlapping manner. In the variable display area overlapping effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 58(A), decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, a pending icon 9A, and a variable icon (the pending icon) 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a. ing. Here, it is assumed that special figure 1 variation is executed in the gaming state in the normal state (low probability base state).

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R displayed in the first area DA1 of the display screen 7a. The variable display of the special symbol (special symbol variation) is represented by the variable display, and the special symbol lottery result is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special design here may be either the first special design or the second special design. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed and correspond to the current special figure variability (the variability). In this case, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed so that the left, middle, and right patterns move downward from above.

Four pending icons 9A are displayed side by side at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variable icon (the pending icon) 9C is displayed in the variable icon display area at the bottom center of the display screen 7a. Here, a pedestal image is displayed below the variable icon display area. Both the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C have a round shape (spherical shape).

As shown in FIG. 58(B), while the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are being variably displayed, the decorative patterns 8l, 8c and 8r are newly displayed in a variably displayed state. That is, an effect is executed in which the decorative patterns 8l, 8c and 8r are newly displayed in the same state as the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R. The decorative designs 8l, 8c, and 8r are a set of designs including the left decorative design 8l, the middle decorative design 8c, and the right decorative design 8r displayed in the second area DA2 of the display screen 7a. It is in the same state as 8C and 8R. Here, the same state means that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R fluctuate when fluctuating, stop when stopped, and correspond to the same special figure fluctuation. That is, the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, 8r and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are synchronized with each other. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, 8r may have the same switching pattern (fluctuation pattern) during variable display, or may differ from each other. Here, the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r are varied in such a manner that the left, middle, and right patterns move from above to below, similarly to the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. Is displayed. The decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r may be varied and displayed, for example, so that the left, middle, and right patterns rotate horizontally with the vertical direction as the axis of rotation.

The timing at which the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r appear is after a predetermined time (for example, 1 to 3 seconds) has elapsed since the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R was displayed. The timing at which the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r appear may be the same as when the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed.

The second area DA2 of the display screen 7a is an area partially overlapping the first area DA1. Therefore, the variable display of the decorative patterns 8l, 8c and 8r in the second area DA2 is displayed partially overlapping the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R in the first area DA1. Here, the decorative designs 8l, 8c and 8r of the second area DA2 are displayed in front of the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R of the first area DA1. The decorative patterns 8l, 8c and 8r may be displayed behind the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R, or may overlap the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R.

After the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, 8r are variably displayed, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, 8r are displayed simultaneously as shown in FIG. 234” is stopped and displayed. The stop display timings of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, 8r may be shifted. Along with the stop display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, 8r, the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C disappears. Then, the rightmost reserved icon 9A among the arranged reserved icons 9A starts moving toward the variable icon display area where the variable icon 9C is displayed. The remaining hold icons 9A are shifted.

As shown in FIG. 58 (D), when the next special figure variation is started, the display of the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r stopped in the second area DA2 disappears, and is stopped in the first area DA1. Display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that have been displayed are variably displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 58(E), while the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are being variably displayed, the decorative patterns 8l, 8c and 8r are variably displayed and newly displayed. That is, similarly to FIG. 58(B), an effect is executed in which the decorative patterns 8l, 8c and 8r are newly displayed in the same state as the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R.

After the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, 8r are variably displayed, as shown in FIG. 789” is stopped and displayed. As in FIG. 58(C), the variation start timing and stop display timing of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, 8r may be shifted. Along with the stop display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, 8r, the change icon (retained icon) 9C disappears. Then, the rightmost reserved icon 9A among the arranged reserved icons 9A starts to move toward the variable icon display area where the variable icon 9C is displayed. The remaining hold icons 9A are shifted.

As shown in FIG. 58(G), when the next special figure variation is started, the display of the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r stopped in the second area DA2 is displayed in the same manner as in FIG. 58(D). The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that were stopped and displayed in the first area DA1 are variably displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 58(H), while the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are being variably displayed, the decorative patterns 8l, 8c and 8r are variably displayed and newly displayed. That is, similarly to FIGS. 58(B) and (E), an effect is executed in which the decorative patterns 8l, 8c and 8r are newly displayed in the same state as the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R.

After the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, 8r are variably displayed, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, 8r are displayed simultaneously as shown in FIG. 735” is stopped and displayed. As in FIGS. 58(C) and (F), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, 8r may be shifted from each other in timing of start of fluctuation and timing of stop display. For the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, 8r, after the stop display, the front side and the back side are switched. Here, after the stop display of the decorative patterns 8l, 8c and 8r is displayed on the front side of the stop display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R, the effect is switched to the back side of the stop display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R. is performed. After that, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, 8r are changed in front side and back side to perform a variable display. This effect of switching between the front side and the back side is continued over a plurality of variations. The timing at which this replacement effect is started can be arbitrarily set. For example, it may be executed at the time of change corresponding to the change icon 9C in the state of being prefetched changed, or may be executed when the ceiling is reached.

[Variation display area duplication effect C]
FIG. 59 is a diagram for explaining the variable display area overlapping effect C. As shown in FIG. In the fluctuating display area duplication effect, decorative patterns are newly displayed in the second area of the display screen 7a in the same state as the decorative patterns in the first area while the display of the decorative patterns is maintained in the first area of the display screen 7a. This is the presentation that will be displayed. The variable display area duplication effect C differs from the variable display area duplication effect A mainly in that a plurality of sets of decorative symbols are displayed in an overlapping manner. In the variable display area overlapping effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 59(A), the display screen 7a displays the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the pending icon 9A, the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C, and the specified Images IMG and are displayed. Here, it is assumed that special figure 1 variation is executed in the gaming state in the normal state (low probability base state).

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R displayed in the first area DA1 of the display screen 7a. The variable display of the special symbol (special symbol variation) is represented by the variable display, and the special symbol lottery result is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special design here may be either the first special design or the second special design. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed and correspond to the current special figure variability (the variability). In this case, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed so that the left, middle, and right patterns move downward from above.

Four pending icons 9A are displayed side by side at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variable icon (the pending icon) 9C is displayed in the variable icon display area at the bottom center of the display screen 7a. Here, a pedestal image is displayed below the variable icon display area. Both the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C have a round shape (spherical shape). The specific image IMG is an elliptical image, and is displayed behind the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the pending icon 9A, and the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C.

As shown in FIG. 59B, the display of the specific image IMG disappears during the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R. The specific image IMG may disappear by reducing its size, may be framed out by movement, or may be faded out. Moreover, it may be divided into a plurality of fragments and disappear. The timing at which the specific image IMG disappears can be set arbitrarily. For example, the specific image IMG may appear or disappear randomly for each variation pattern, or the specific image IMG may appear or disappear when the number of variations reaches a predetermined number.

When the display of the specific image IMG disappears, the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r that were covered and hidden by the specific image IMG are displayed. That is, the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r are displayed on the back side of the specific image IMG, and an effect made visible by the disappearance of the specific image IMG is executed.

The decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r are newly displayed in a variably displayed state. That is, an effect is executed in which the decorative patterns 8l, 8c and 8r are newly displayed in the same state as the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R. The decorative designs 8l, 8c, and 8r are a set of designs including the left decorative design 8l, the middle decorative design 8c, and the right decorative design 8r displayed in the second area DA2 of the display screen 7a. It is in the same state as 8C and 8R. Here, the same state means that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R fluctuate when fluctuating, stop when stopped, and correspond to the same special figure fluctuation. That is, the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, 8r and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are synchronized with each other. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, 8r may have the same switching pattern (fluctuation pattern) during variable display, or may differ from each other. Here, the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r are varied in such a manner that the left, middle, and right patterns move from above to below, similarly to the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. Is displayed. The decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r may be varied and displayed, for example, so that the left, middle, and right patterns rotate horizontally with the vertical direction as the axis of rotation.

The specific image IMG disappears and the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r appear after a predetermined time (for example, 1 to 3 seconds) has passed since the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R was displayed. there is

The second area DA2 of the display screen 7a overlaps with the first area DA1. Therefore, the variable display of the decorative patterns 8l, 8c and 8r in the second area DA2 is displayed overlapping the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R in the first area DA1. Here, the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R of the first area DA1 are displayed in front of the decorative designs 8l, 8c and 8r of the second area DA2. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R may be displayed behind the decorative patterns 8l, 8c and 8r.

After the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, 8r are variably displayed, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, 8r are displayed simultaneously as shown in FIG. 234” is stopped and displayed. The stop display timings of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, 8r may be shifted. Along with the stop display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, 8r, the change icon (retained icon) 9C disappears. Then, the rightmost reserved icon 9A among the arranged reserved icons 9A starts to move toward the variable icon display area where the variable icon 9C is displayed. The remaining hold icons 9A are shifted.

As shown in FIG. 59 (D), when the next special figure variation is started, the display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stopped and displayed in the first area DA1 disappears, and is stopped and displayed in the second area DA2. The decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r that have been displayed are variably displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 59(E), decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r are stopped at "567". Along with the stop display of the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r, the variable icon (the suspended icon) 9C disappears. Then, the rightmost reserved icon 9A among the arranged reserved icons 9A starts moving toward the variable icon display area where the variable icon 9C is displayed. The remaining hold icons 9A are shifted.

As shown in FIG. 59(F), while the decorative symbols 8l, 8c and 8r are being variably displayed, the variably displayed decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are newly displayed. The timing at which the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is newly displayed is after a predetermined time (for example, 1 to 3 seconds) has elapsed since the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r started to fluctuate. Alternatively, the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R may be newly displayed at the same time when the decorative patterns 8l, 8c and 8r start to fluctuate.

As shown in FIG. 59(G), the specific image IMG is newly displayed while the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, 8r and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are both being variably displayed. The timing at which the specific image IMG appears can be set arbitrarily. For example, the specific image IMG may appear or disappear at random for each variation pattern, or the specific image IMG may appear or disappear when the number of variations reaches a predetermined number.

The specific image IMG is displayed on the front side of the decorative patterns 8l, 8c and 8r and on the back side of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R. Therefore, when the specific image IMG is displayed, the decorative patterns 8l, 8c and 8r are covered with the specific image IMG and disappear, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are displayed in front of the specific image IMG. The specific image IMG may appear by frame-in or may appear by fade-in. Also, it may appear enlarged.

After that, as shown in FIG. 59(H), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped at "735". While the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are still displayed, the display of the specific image IMG disappears again as shown in FIG. 59(I). The method of disappearing the specific image IMG may be the same as in FIG. 59B, or may be different. When the display of the specific image IMG disappears, the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r that were covered and hidden by the specific image IMG are displayed. That is, the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r are displayed on the back side of the specific image IMG, and an effect made visible by the disappearance of the specific image IMG is executed. The decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r are newly displayed in a state of being stopped. That is, an effect is executed in which the decorative patterns 8l, 8c and 8r are newly displayed in the same state as the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R.

After that, as shown in FIG. 59 (J), when the next special figure fluctuation is started, the display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stopped and displayed in the first area DA1 disappears, and the second area DA2 The decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r, which have been stopped and displayed, are variably displayed. The state of FIG. 59(J) is the same as that of FIG. 59(D), and then becomes the state of FIG. 59(E).

[Effect example]
An example of the effects of the variable display area duplication effect will be shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 57(A), (B), (G), and (H), in the first area DA1 of the display screen 7a, the set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R changes. A first effect in which a display is displayed, and after the first effect, a display different from the first area DA1 while maintaining the display of the set of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R in the first area DA1. In the second area DA2 of the screen 7a, another set of decorative patterns 8l, 8c in the same changing or stopping state as the set of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R displayed in the first area DA1. , 8r can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 58 and 59. FIG.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 57(A), (B), (G) to (I), in the second effect, a set of decorative symbols 8L displayed in the first area DA1 , 8C, and 8R are variably displayed, another set of decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r are newly displayed in a variably displayed state in the second area DA2, and after the second effect, the second A third set of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R displayed in the first area DA1 and another set of decorative patterns 8l, 8c, 8r displayed in the second area DA2 are both stopped and displayed. can perform the performance. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 58 and 59. FIG.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 57(D), (E), (G) to (J), after the third effect, another set that is stop-displayed in the second area DA2 While the decorative patterns 8l, 8c and 8r are variably displayed again, the set of decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R stopped and displayed in the first area DA1 are not variably displayed and the display disappears. can do. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIG. 59 as well.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 57(A) to (C), in the second effect, the set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R displayed in the first area DA1 is stopped. When displayed, another set of decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r are newly displayed in the second area DA2 in a stopped state, and displayed in the first area DA1 after the second effect. a set of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R displayed in the second area DA2 and a set of other decorative patterns 8l, 8c, 8r displayed in the second area DA2 are both started to variably display. can be done. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIG. 53 as well.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 57(C) and (D), after the fifth effect, a set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed in the first area DA1, A sixth effect in which the other set of decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r displayed in the second area DA2 are both stop-displayed, and after the sixth effect, they are stop-displayed in the second area DA2. While another set of decorative patterns 8l, 8c and 8r that are present are variably displayed again, the display of the set of decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R that had been stop-displayed in the first area DA1 disappears without being variably displayed. 7 effects can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIG. 59 as well.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 57, a set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed in the first area DA1 are variably displayed, and the others displayed in the second area DA2 A set of decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r are displayed in different manners. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 58 and 59. FIG.
[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 58 and 59, a set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed in the first area DA1 are variably displayed and displayed in the second area DA2. The variable display of the other set of decorative patterns 8l, 8c, 8r displayed is partially overlapped. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 8]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 59, in the first effect, the specific image IMG is displayed in the second area DA2, and in the second effect, the specific image IMG disappears and the specific image Another set of decorative patterns 8l, 8c, 8r are displayed in the area where the IMG disappears. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
A modified example of the variable display area duplication effect will be shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the variable display area overlapping effects A to C, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, 8r may have the same pattern switching mode (fluctuation mode) during variable display, or may be different from each other. may be Further, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, 8r may overlap at least partially.

[Modification 2]
The effects of the variable display area overlapping effects A to C may be appropriately combined, or part of them may be deleted. Also, the variable display area overlapping effects A to C may be executed continuously, or each effect may be repeatedly executed.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect A3-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is a set of decorative patterns capable of informing the propriety,
a first effect in which a variable display of the set of decorative symbols is displayed in the first area of the display means;
After the first effect, the set of decorative patterns is displayed in the first area in a second area of the display means different from the first area while the display of the set of decorative patterns is maintained in the first area. a second effect in which another set of decorative symbols in the same varying or stopped state as the one set of decorative symbols being changed or stopped is newly displayed,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A3-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A3-1,
In the second effect, when the set of decorative symbols displayed in the first area is variably displayed, the other set of decorative designs is variably displayed in the second area. is newly displayed with
After the second effect, the set of decorative patterns displayed in the first area and the other set of decorative patterns displayed in the second area are both stop-displayed. Able to perform the production of
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A3-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A3-2,
After the third effect, the other set of decorative symbols stop-displayed in the second area is again variably displayed, while the set of decoration symbols stop-displayed in the first area is changed. It is possible to execute the fourth effect that the display disappears without changing display,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A3-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A3-1 to A3-3,
In the second effect, when the set of decorative symbols displayed in the first area is statically displayed, the other set of decorative symbols is statically displayed in the second area. is newly displayed with
After the second effect, the set of decorative symbols displayed in the first area and the other set of decorative symbols displayed in the second area both start to variably display. 5 productions can be executed,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A3-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect A3-4,
After the fifth effect, the set of decorative patterns displayed in the first area and the other set of decorative patterns displayed in the second area are both stop-displayed. directing and
After the sixth effect, the other set of decorative symbols stopped and displayed in the second area is again variably displayed, while the set of decorative symbols stopped and displayed in the first area is changed. It is possible to execute the seventh effect that the display disappears without changing display,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A3-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A3-1 to A3-5,
The variable display of the set of decorative patterns displayed in the first area and the variable display of the other set of decorative patterns displayed in the second area are different from each other in terms of fluctuation. ,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A3-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A3-1 to A3-6,
The variable display of the set of decorative designs displayed in the first area and the variable display of the other set of decorative designs displayed in the second area are partially overlapped and displayed. ,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A3-8]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A3-1 to A3-7,
In the first effect, a specific image is displayed in the second area,
In the second effect, the specific image disappears, and the other set of decorative patterns is displayed in the area where the specific image disappears.
A gaming machine characterized by:

60 to 62, the decorative pattern stop position indeterminate effects A to C will be described below. In FIGS. 60 to 62, various movable accessories arranged around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted for ease of viewing.

This decorative pattern stop position indeterminate effect can be executed when the special game mode is entered. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90, and when the command includes an instruction to execute a decorative pattern stop position indeterminate effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7. FIG.

Here, the decorative symbol stop position uncertain effect A will be explained first, the decorative symbol stop position uncertain effect B, and the decorative symbol stop position uncertain effect C will be explained in order.

[Decorative pattern stop position indeterminate effect A]
The decorative symbol stop position indeterminate effect A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol stop position indeterminate effect A. FIG. The decorative symbol stop position indeterminate effect A is performed when the game mode is shifted to the special game mode, and here, the case of shifting from the game mode in the normal game state to the special game mode in the normal game state will be described below. .

First, as shown in FIG. 60(A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, there are vertically long rectangular areas as three decorative pattern variable display areas (also referred to as "decorative pattern variable areas"). Three areas (that is, areas obtained by equally dividing the display screen 7a into three columns) are provided. The left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed in a display mode in which reels are rotated from the upper side of each variable display area toward the lower side of the display screen 7a. (Symbol: number "1" to number "9") A variable effect (variable display) is started. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L starts the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative symbol in a display mode in which the reel rotates from the upper side of the left variable display area 8Lr toward the lower side of the left variable display area 8Lr, The variable performance (variable display) of the decorative design is started in a display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side of the middle variable display area 8Cr toward the lower side of the middle variable display area 8Cr, and the right decorative design 8R is displayed. A variable effect (variable display) of decorative symbols is started in a display mode in which reels are rotated from the upper side of the right variable display area 8Rr toward the lower side of the right variable display area 8Rr. The vertical distance dimension of the left fluctuation display region 8Lr, the vertical distance dimension of the middle fluctuation display region 8Cr, and the vertical distance dimension of the right fluctuation display region 8Rr are the same vertical distance dimension, and the horizontal distance dimension of the left fluctuation display region 8Lr, The horizontal distance dimension of the middle fluctuation display region 8Cr and the horizontal distance dimension of the right fluctuation display region 8Rr are the same horizontal distance dimension.

In the variable production (variable display) of each decorative pattern, all are number “1” → number “2” → number “3” → number “4” → number “5” → number “6” → number “7” → The reels are rotated in the order of number "8"→number "9"→number "1"→number "2"→ .

Among the numbers "1" to "9", the number "1", the number "3", the number "5", and the number "9", which are odd numbers excluding the number "7", have bright red, and even numbers The number "2", the number "4", the number "6", and the number "8", which are the symbols of , have a bright blue color, and the number "7" has a yellow (gold color). Also, the sizes of the numbers "1" to "9" are each about a third of the vertical distance of the left fluctuation display area 8Lr (middle fluctuation display area 8Cr, right fluctuation display area 8Rr). Each normal size has a horizontal distance dimension that is about half the horizontal distance dimension of the left fluctuation display region 8Lr (middle fluctuation display region 8Cr, right fluctuation display region 8Rr). . The numbers "1" to "9" are specially created special typefaces (individually created It is formed by a special typeface).

In the game mode in the normal game state, when the variable performance (variable display) of the decorative symbols is started, the statically displayed decorative symbols change from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed. It becomes a display mode that fluctuates at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed temporarily and then stopped). In addition, in the state of the temporary stop display, the decorative pattern is displayed in a mode of slowly moving up and down in small steps.

In addition, on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, a small left decorative pattern, a small medium decorative pattern, and a small right decorative pattern corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed ( A sub-variation area KSZ having a horizontally long rectangular shape that is displayed in a variable manner is provided. The background image of the sub-variation area KSZ is fixed to a single color (for example, a dark color (dark color system) or a color close to dark (for example, dark green), and does not change to another color. Sub-variation area KSZ is arranged on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, so although it overlaps with the right fluctuation display area 8Rr which is the fluctuation area of the right decorative pattern 8R, the sub-variation area KSZ is arranged so as to be on the front side. By doing so, the right decorative pattern 8R is arranged behind the sub-variation area KSZ, the sub-variation area KSZ is not blocked by the right decorative pattern 8R, and even if another effect image appears, the other effect image is not displayed. The sub-variation area KSZ is arranged behind the sub-variation area KSZ and is not blocked by other effect images.In other words, the content displayed in the sub-variation area KSZ is highly visible due to the right decorative pattern 8R and other effect images. not be impeded.

The small-sized decorative designs are numeric designs, and are different from the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R (e.g., Mincho). It is unified with other single colors (for example, bright colors (yellow and white)) that have a high contrast with respect to the single color, and does not change to other colors. The small decorative pattern is arranged on the front side of the background image of the sub-variation area KSZ and is always in an opaque state, and even when the variation starts, it does not become translucent and disappears from the display screen 7a. There is no

Unlike the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, the small-sized decorative patterns do not have a variable effect (variable display) in the display mode in which the reels are rotated, and have the same size at the same display position. A variable effect (variable display) is performed by a display mode in which numerical patterns appear one after another in an opaque state.

When the variation performance (variation display) by the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is started, along with this, in the sub-variation area KSZ, the small left decorative pattern, the small medium decorative pattern, and the small is started, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed. All the small right decorative patterns are also stopped and displayed.

A state in which one or more of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed in the same pattern to reach is formed), the small left decorative pattern, the small middle decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern are all in a state where the variable effect (variable display) is continued. More specifically, even if the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small left decorative pattern is continuously displayed (variably displayed), and even if the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small right decorative pattern is displayed. is continued, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, the small left decorative pattern, the small medium decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern are displayed. All the symbols are also stopped and displayed.

When the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and they are not aligned with the same pattern and become misaligned, the small left decorative pattern, the small left decorative pattern, and the small left decorative pattern are displayed. The middle decorative pattern and the small right decorative pattern may be the same patterns as the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R, or may be completely different patterns. Specifically, for example, when the left decorative design 8L is displayed as the number "1", the middle decorative design 8C as the number "2", and the right decorative design 8R as the number "3", the small left decorative design is displayed. The number "1", the small medium decorative pattern may be displayed as the number "2", the small right decorative pattern may be displayed as the number "3", or the small left decorative pattern may be displayed as the number "5" and the small medium decoration. The symbol may be stopped at the number "6" and the small right decorative symbol at the number "7".

On the other hand, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and all the same patterns win, the small left decorative pattern, The small-sized middle decorative pattern and the small-sized right decorative pattern are arranged in the same patterns as the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R.

The change icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R, which are currently changing as the digestion of the first special figure reservation, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. is displayed (placed) at the variable display position 9Cd (on the rectangular image (pedestal image)). In the region of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as the first special figure hold. In this pending display area, pending icons 9A can be displayed (can be placed) at four pending display positions 9Ad (on rectangular images (pedestal images)), and up to four pending icons 9A can be stocked. can be done. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, toward the left side of the display screen 7a from a position near the variable display position 9Cd. They are linearly arranged and displayed along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the reserved display position 9Ad.

Since the variable display position 9Cd is arranged in the lower center of the display screen 7a and the first reserved display position 9Ad is arranged on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, the variable display position 9Cd and the first reserved display position 9Ad means that although the middle decorative design 8C overlaps with the middle variable display area 8Cr that is the variable area of the middle decorative design 8C, the middle decorative design 8C is arranged behind the variable display position 9Cd and the first reserved display position 9Ad. The variable display position 9Cd and the first reserved display position 9Ad are not blocked by the 8C. However, when another effect image appears, if the other effect image is arranged behind the variable display position 9Cd and the first reserved display position 9Ad, the other effect image causes the variable display position 9Cd and the first reserved display position 9Ad. Although the display position 9Ad is not blocked, if another effect image is arranged in front of the variable display position 9Cd and the first reserved display position 9Ad, the other effect image will cause the variable display position 9Cd and the first The reserved display position 9Ad is blocked.

Since the second reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad are arranged on the lower left side of the display screen 7a, the second reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad are the variation area of the left decorative pattern 8L. Although it overlaps with the left variable display area 8Lr, the left decorative pattern 8L is arranged behind the second reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, and the left decorative pattern 8L moves from the second reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad. 4 The reserved display position 9Ad is not blocked. However, when another effect image appears, if the other effect image is arranged behind the second to fourth reserved display positions 9Ad to 9Ad, the other effect image will cause the second to fourth reserved display positions 9Ad to 4 Although the reserved display position 9Ad is not obstructed, if other effect images are arranged in front of the second reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position is blocked by the other effect images. 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad are blocked.

In this way, among the first reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, the first reserved display position 9Ad overlaps the middle variable display area 8Cr which is the variable area of the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the second reserved display Since the position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad overlap the left variable display area 8Lr which is the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L, the first reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad. A reservation display area as the first special figure reservation is arranged across the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr and the left fluctuation display area 8Lr.

Here, a white spherical variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, and a suspension icon 9A is displayed at the first suspension display position 9Ad to the fourth suspension display position 9Ad. In other words, there are four pending icons that are stocked without being digested. In the following description, during the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative symbols, the state where the game ball enters the first start port 20 and there are 3 or 4 pending icons (that is, the number of pending 3 or It is assumed that the game ball does not enter the second starting port 21 while the number of reservations is 4). In addition, when the number of holds increases, the time (variation time) from the start of the variable effect (variable display) to the end thereof becomes shorter. For example, in the present embodiment, when the number of reservations is 3 or the number of reservations is 4, the change time is 5000 milliseconds (0.5 seconds) in the loss without reach.

Also, on the upper left side of the display screen 7a, facing the above-described sub-variation area KSZ (aligned on the same horizontal line), the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball to the first start port 20 , and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, are each displayed as the number of reservations (numbers). The vertical dimension of the retained number display area HS and the vertical dimension of the sub-variation area KSZ have the same vertical dimension, and the horizontal dimension of the retained number display area HS and the horizontal dimension of the sub-variation area KSZ are different. , have the same lateral distance dimension. That is, the shape of the number-of-holds display area HS and the shape of the sub-variation area KSZ are the same.

Unlike the background image of the sub-variation area KSZ, the background image of the pending number display area HS is fixed to be colorless and transparent, and does not become opaque or change to another color. Since the pending number display area HS is arranged on the upper left side of the display screen 7a, although it overlaps with the left fluctuation display area 8Lr which is the fluctuation area of the left decorative pattern 8L, the pending number display area HS is the foremost. By being arranged so as to be on the side, the left decorative pattern 8L is arranged behind the reserved number display area HS, and the reserved number display area HS is not blocked by the left decorative pattern 8L, and other effect images appear. However, other effect images are arranged behind the number-of-holds display area HS, and the number-of-holds display area HS is not blocked by other effect images.

The number of the first special reservation (number of reservations (number)) and the number of the second special reservation (number of reservations (number)) are different from the small decorative pattern font (for example, Gothic). , and is set to a different single color having a high contrast with respect to the single color of the background image of the number-of-holds display area HS, and is not changed to another color. The number of the first special figure reservation (number of reservations (number)) and the number of the second special figure reservations (number of reservations (number)) are placed in front of the background image of the number of reservations display area HS and are always opaque. , and does not disappear from the display screen 7a. Specifically, the number of the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball to the first start port 20 is indicated by blue numbers on the left side of the reservation number display area HS, the entry of the game ball to the second start port 21 The number of the second special figure reservation based on is always displayed with red numbers arranged in a state separated from each other on the right side of the reservation number display area HS. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of held balls, they can be difficult to discriminate among various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and are intuitively easy to understand. In other words, the visibility of the content displayed in the number-of-holds display area HS is not hindered by other effect images. In addition, the blue color that indicates the number of the first special figure reservation is a different color from the bright blue color of the even numbered patterns of numbers "2", numbers "4", numbers "6", and numbers "8" (the same color), but similar colors. The red color of the number of the second special figure reservation is a different color from the bright red of the odd number symbols excluding the number "7", the number "1", the number "3", the number "5", and the number "9". (Not the same color), but similar colors.

Here, to briefly explain the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), there is a difference in the expectation of winning during the lottery corresponding to the icon due to the difference in shape and color. represents. For example, among the four icons, a yellow (gold) star icon, a black sphere icon, a smiling sphere icon, and a white sphere icon, the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest probability of winning. , the black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. The smile sphere icon is further set with a high degree of expectation of winning in the order of, for example, blue→green→red→gold (yellow)→seven colors (rainbow (rich win)).

In the game mode in the normal game state, as shown in FIG. 60(A), the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbols is started, and then the left variation display area 8Lr is variably displayed from the upper side to the lower side. The decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the left fluctuation display area 8Lr, and is displayed in a mode of slowly moving up and down in small steps. After that, the right decorative pattern 8R, which is variably displayed in the right variable display area 8Rr from the top to the bottom, is temporarily stopped at the center of the right variable display area 8Rr, and the display mode is such that it slowly moves in the vertical direction. After that, the middle decorative pattern 8C variably displayed from the upper side to the lower side of the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr is temporarily stopped and displayed at the center of the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr, and the display mode is such that it slowly moves up and down.

In addition, in the game mode in the normal game state, a plurality of types of normal game background images are prepared as background images, and the background images are switched as appropriate.

After that, as shown in FIG. 60(B), the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are all stopped and displayed (determined display) at the center of the respective variable display areas, whereby the left decorative design is displayed. 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are arranged on the same horizontal line and stopped (fixed display). Along with this, the change icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

60(C), left decorative symbols 8L, When the middle decorative pattern 8C, the right decorative pattern 8R, the variable display position 9Cd, the first reservation display position 9Ad to the fourth reservation display position 9ad, the variable icon 9C, and all the reservation icons 9A disappear from the display screen 7a, it will be described later. In the second sub-variation area CSZ, a variable effect (variable display) using medium-sized decorative symbols is started, and then the background image is switched from the normal game background image to the A-mode exclusive background image, and a large image is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. A message image MSG, which will be described later, "Enter A mode" is displayed. This A mode is a special game mode. In the A mode, a decorative symbol stop position indeterminate effect A, which is a display mode different from the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative symbols in the game mode in the normal game state shown in FIGS. 60A and 60B, is started. .

The A-mode dedicated background image is a background image different from the normal game background image used as the background image in the game mode in the normal game state, and is a background image exclusively used only in the A mode. Only one A-mode background image may be prepared, or a plurality of types may be prepared.

In the present embodiment, the condition for the indeterminate decorative pattern stop position effect A to occur is, for example, that the number of times the variable effect (variable display) is performed without the occurrence of a win is in a normal probability state (non-high probability state, low probability state) , normal state) to occur when it reaches 2.5 to 3 times. Further, in the decorative pattern stop position indeterminate effect A, a predetermined number of variable effects (variable display) are performed. This "predetermined number of times" is, for example, up to 3.8 times the normal probability state (non-high probability state, low probability state, normal state), and is 115 times here.

When the decorative pattern stop position indeterminate effect A is started, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed on the lower left side of the display screen 7a. , and a second sub-variation area CSZ having a horizontally elongated rectangular shape in which a medium-sized right decorative pattern is variably produced (variably displayed). The vertical distance dimension of the second sub-variation area CSZ has a vertical distance dimension about five times larger than the vertical distance dimension of the sub-variation area KSZ, and the horizontal distance dimension of the second sub-variation area CSZ is the sub-variation. The horizontal distance dimension is about five times larger than the horizontal distance dimension of the region KSZ, and the shape is similar.

The sizes of the medium-sized left decorative pattern, the medium-sized medium decorative pattern, and the medium-sized right decorative pattern that are variably produced (variably displayed) in the second sub-variable area CSZ are variably produced (variably displayed) in the sub-variable area KSZ. It is larger than the small left decorative pattern, the small middle decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern (about five times larger), but compared to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. small. In addition, the left decorative pattern of the medium size, the middle decorative pattern of the medium size, and the right decorative pattern of the medium size are different from the left decorative pattern of the small size, the middle decorative pattern of the small size, and the right decorative pattern of the small size. , the right decorative pattern 8R has a smaller shape, a similar shape, and the same color. In other words, the left decorative pattern of the medium size is obtained by reducing the outer shape of the left decorative pattern 8L and has the same color as the left decorative pattern 8L, and the middle decorative pattern of the medium size is obtained by reducing the outer shape of the middle decorative pattern 8C. and has the same color as the middle decorative pattern 8C.

Unlike the background image of the sub-variation area KSZ, the background image of the second sub-variation area CSZ is fixed to be colorless and transparent, and does not become opaque or change to another color. Since the second sub-variation area CSZ is arranged on the lower left side of the display screen 7a, it overlaps with the left variation display area 8Lr which is the variation area of the left decorative pattern 8L. While the sub-variation area CSZ is displayed on the display screen 7a, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R disappear from the display screen 7a. The variable area KSZ is not blocked. In addition, by arranging the second sub-variation area CSZ so as to be on the front side, even if another effect image appears, the other effect image is arranged behind the second sub-variation area CSZ and the other The effect image does not block the second sub-variation area CSZ. In other words, the visibility of the content displayed in the second sub-variation area CSZ is not hindered by the left decorative pattern 8L or other effect images.

Unlike the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, the medium-sized decorative pattern does not perform a variable effect (variable display) in the display mode in which the reels are rotated, and can be displayed at the same display position, for example, the medium-sized decorative pattern. From the left end of the decorative pattern to the right end of the medium-sized decorative pattern, a variable performance (variable display) is performed as if a coin were rotating. Then, the medium-sized decorative patterns, that is, the medium-sized left decorative pattern, the medium-sized middle decorative pattern, and the medium-sized right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed at the same timing when the variable effect (variable display) is started at the same timing. be.

In this embodiment, when the decorative symbol stop position indeterminate effect A in which the variable effect (variable display) is performed up to 115 times is started, the variable effect (variable display) by the medium-sized decorative pattern is started in the second sub-variation area CSZ. and is performed a predetermined number of times (10 times in this embodiment). During the period in which the variation effect (variation display) by the medium-sized decorative pattern is performed for a predetermined number of times (10 times) in the second sub-variable area CSZ, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed. It has disappeared from the screen 7a. In the second sub-variation area CSZ, a variable effect (variable display) with a medium-sized decorative pattern is started, and when the second variable effect (variable display) is being performed, "Enter A mode" having gold (gold color) is displayed. This message image MSG is displayed for a predetermined time (5 seconds in this embodiment) and then disappears from the display screen 7a. ) along the upper side of the display screen 7a from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a in a telop display mode, during the period when the decorative pattern stop position indeterminate effect A is performed, it is repeatedly moved and displayed.

The telop TP1, which is the message image "A mode", has the same color (gold) as the message image MSG "Enter A mode". The area in which the telop TP1 is moved and displayed is a band-shaped area having a predetermined distance dimension from the upper side of the display screen 7a, and is about four times as long as the vertical distance dimension of the sub-variation area KSZ (or the pending number display area HS). have a size. The area where the telop TP1 is moved and displayed overlaps the sub-variation area KSZ and the pending number display area HS, but is arranged so that the sub-variable area KSZ and the pending number display area HS are on the front side as described above. Therefore, the telop TP1 is arranged behind the sub-variation area KSZ and the pending number display area HS, and the sub-variable area KSZ and the pending number display area HS are not blocked by the telop TP1. That is, the visibility of the content displayed in the sub-variation area KSZ and the number-of-holds display area HS is not hindered by the telop TP1.

The area where the telop TP1 is moved and displayed is, as described above, a band-like area having a predetermined distance dimension from the upper side of the display screen 7a, and this area is the left-moving display that is the changing area of the left decorative pattern 8L. It overlaps with the upper area of the area 8Lr, overlaps with the upper area of the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr that is the fluctuation area of the middle decorative design 8C, and overlaps with the upper area of the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr that is the fluctuation area of the right decorative design 8R. It overlaps with the upper region of the variable display region 8Rr. In this embodiment, the areas where the telop TP1 is moved and displayed are arranged behind the left fluctuation display area 8Lr, the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr, and the right fluctuation display area 8Rr. Therefore, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are not obstructed by the area where the telop TP1 is moved and displayed. In other words, the visibility of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is not hindered by the area where the telop TP1 is moved and displayed.

When the telop TP1 is moved and displayed from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a along the upper side of the display screen 7a, the telop TP1 does not suddenly disappear on the way, nor does it disappear gradually due to granulation. The telop TP1 is moved and displayed at a constant telop TP1 speed.

When the decorative symbol stop position indeterminate effect A is performed, and a predetermined number of times (10th time) variable effect (variable display) is started as the variable effect (variable display) by the medium-sized decorative symbol in the second sub-variation area CSZ, Immediately before this variable effect (variable display) ends, as shown in FIG. 60(D), a counter image CNT of "remaining 105" is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a. The counter image CNT is arranged in front of the counter image background image having a semi-transparent horizontally long rectangular shape. The horizontal distance dimension of the counter image background image having a translucent horizontally long rectangular shape, which is about three times as large as the vertical distance dimension of the sub-variation area KSZ (or the pending number display area HS), is It is about six times as large as the horizontal dimension of the variable area KSZ (or the pending number display area HS).

Although the background image for the counter image having a semi-transparent horizontally long rectangular shape overlaps with the middle variation display area 8Cr that is the variation area of the middle decorative pattern 8C, the background image for the counter image is placed on the front side. , the middle decorative pattern 8C is arranged behind the background image for the counter image, and the counter image CNT arranged in front of the background image for the counter image is not blocked by the middle decorative pattern 8C. Even if a performance image appears, another performance image is arranged behind the background image for the counter image, and the other performance image does not block the counter image CNT arranged in front of the background image for the counter image. That is, the visibility of the counter image CNT arranged in front of the background image for the counter image is not hindered by the middle decorative pattern 8C or other effect images. Since the background image for the counter image is translucent, the area in the background image for the counter image in which the counter image CNT is not arranged (that is, the area in the background image for the counter image that does not correspond to the counter image CNT) is semi-transparent. The middle decorative pattern 8C and other effect images (background images of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R) are visible through the transparent background image for the counter image.

In addition, when the counter image CNT "remaining 105" is displayed in the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a, accompanying this (with a slight delay from the start of the display of the counter image CNT), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right The decorative pattern 8R appears again and is stopped. At this time, the sizes of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R appearing again are the sizes before disappearing, that is, the left decorative patterns in the game mode shown in FIGS. 60(A) and (B). 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, but the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R that have reappeared are temporarily stopped and stopped. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R in the game mode shown in FIGS. 60(A) and (B) are different from the temporary stop display and stop display positions.

Specifically, the position where the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and stopped in the game mode of FIG. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol stop position indeterminate effect A of FIG. It is located on the upper right side of the left fluctuation display area 8Lr. At this time, when the left decorative design of medium size is stop-displayed with the number "1" in the second sub-variation area CSZ, the left decorative design 8L is stop-displayed with the number "1".

The position where the right decorative design 8R is temporarily stopped and stopped displayed in the game mode of FIG. In the decorative symbol stop position indeterminate effect A of (D), the position where the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and stopped is not the center of the right variation display area 8Rr, which is the variation area of the right decorative symbol 8R, but the right variation display. It is on the upper left side of the region 8Rr. At this time, when the medium-sized right decorative pattern is stop-displayed with the number "2" in the second sub-variation area CSZ, the right decorative design 8R is stop-displayed with the number "2".

The position of the temporary stop display and stop display of the middle decorative pattern 8C in the game mode of FIG. In the decorative design stop position indeterminate effect A of (D), the position where the middle decorative design 8C is temporarily stopped and stopped is not the center of the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr that is the fluctuation area of the middle decoration design 8C, but the medium fluctuation display. It is on the lower right side of the region 8Cr. At this time, when the medium-sized middle decorative design is stop-displayed with the number "3" in the second sub-variation area CSZ, the middle-size decorative design 8C is stop-displayed with the number "3". Although the counter image CNT is provided on the lower side of the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr, since the counter image CNT is arranged on the frontmost side, part of the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "3" is displayed by the counter image CNT. becomes covered.

In addition, in the present embodiment, a predetermined number of times (10th time) variation performance (variation display) is performed as a variation performance (variation display) by a medium-sized decorative pattern in the second sub-variation area CSZ, and this variation performance (variation display ) is completed, the counter image CNT of "remaining 105" is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a, and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R reappear and are stopped. However, when the decorative symbol stop position indeterminate effect A is started and a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) elapses, the counter image CNT is displayed, and furthermore, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, The left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R may reappear immediately before the right decorative design 8R is stop-displayed. When the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R appear again, the second sub-variation area CSZ disappears from the display screen 7a, and the medium-sized decorative patterns also disappear from the display screen 7a.

A predetermined number of times (10 times) of variable performance (variable display) is completed, and then a predetermined number of times (10 times) + 1 time (that is, 11th time) of variable performance (variable display) is started, and a medium-sized left decorative pattern, When the variable effect (variable display) is started so that the middle decorative pattern of the medium size and the right decorative pattern of the medium size rotate at the same timing, the second sub-variation area CSZ is displayed as shown in FIG. 60(E). disappears from the display screen 7a, the medium-sized decorative pattern also disappears from the display screen 7a, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R respectively emit light to correspond to the left fluctuation display area 8Lr and the middle fluctuation display area. 8Cr, a variable effect (variable display) is performed so that the reels rotate downward in the right variable display area 8Rr, and the counter image CNT is updated to "104 left" and displayed. In other words, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R start to show a variable effect (variable display) at the same timing as the left decorative pattern of the medium size, the middle decorative pattern of the medium size, and the right decorative pattern of the medium size. . The left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are stop-displayed at the same timing.

At this time, in the decorative symbol stop position indeterminate effect A, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R fluctuate effect (fluctuation display) is the left decorative symbol in the game mode shown in FIGS. This display mode is different from the variable performance (variable display) of the decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. In the variable effects (variable display) of each decorative symbol in the game modes shown in FIGS. Number "4" → number "5" → number "6" → number "7" → number "8" → number "9" → number "1" → number "2" →... The reels rotate in this order. In contrast to the variable performance (variable display) in the display mode, in the decorative design stop position indeterminate performance A, when the variable performance (variable display) of each decorative design stopped and displayed is started, each decorative design is displayed. After emitting light, each decorative pattern is fluctuated downward in the variable display area, or each decorative pattern is fluctuated downward in the variable display area while emitting light, and then stopped and displayed. A number following each decorative pattern does not appear, and a random number appears opaque as a number following each decorative pattern and is stopped and displayed. This is caused by the disappearance of the second sub-variable area CSZ from the display screen 7a and the disappearance of the medium-sized decorative patterns from the display screen 7a, as if the random numbers were one number following each decorative pattern. It is possible to realize a display mode in which the image suddenly appears while being opaque and is displayed stationary.

Specifically, when the variable effect (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number “1” stopped and displayed in FIG. 60(D) is started, the left decorative pattern 8L emits light, ), the number ``2'' following the number ``1'' of the left decorative pattern 8L stopped and displayed appears opaque, and the left decorative pattern 8L is not stopped and displayed in FIG. ” appears opaque and stops. Furthermore, in FIG. 60(D), the position of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "1" stopped and displayed is the upper right side of the left variable display area 8Lr, whereas the variable effect (variable display) is started. 60(E), the position of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "4" stopped and displayed is not on the upper right side of the left fluctuation display area 8Lr but on the lower left side of the left fluctuation display area 8Lr.

When the variable effect (variable display) of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "2" stopped and displayed in FIG. 60(D) is started, the right decorative pattern 8R emits light and is stopped and displayed in FIG. However, the number "3" following the number "2" of the right decorative pattern 8R appears opaque and is not stopped and displayed as the right decorative pattern 8R in FIG. 60(E), and the random number "5" remains opaque. Appears and stops. Further, in FIG. 60(D), the position of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "2" stopped and displayed is the upper left side of the right variable display area 8Rr, whereas the variable effect (variable display) is started. 60(E), the position of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "5" stopped and displayed is not on the upper left side of the right fluctuation display area 8Rr but on the central right side of the right fluctuation display area 8Rr.

When the moving effect (variable display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "3" stopped and displayed in FIG. 60(D) is started, the middle decorative pattern 8C emits light and is stopped and displayed in FIG. 60(D). However, the number "4" following the number "3" of the middle decorative pattern 8C appears opaque and is not stopped and displayed as the middle decorative pattern 8C in FIG. 60(E), and the random number "1" remains opaque. Appears and stops. Furthermore, in FIG. 60(D), the position of the medium decorative pattern 8C of the number "3" stopped and displayed is the lower right side of the medium variable display area 8Cr, whereas the variable effect (variable display) is started. In FIG. 60(E), the position of the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "1" stopped and displayed is not the lower right side of the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr but the center left side of the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr.

When a predetermined number of times (10 times) + 1st time (i.e., 11th time) variation performance (variation display) is started as a variation performance (variation display) by medium-sized decorative symbols in the second sub-variation area CSZ, "There is still more...・” is displayed so that the message image telop TP2 is parallel to the upper side of the display screen 7a, and a plurality of (three telops TP2 in this case) are displayed moving from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a in the display mode of the telop. . The telop TP2 is white, and for other colors (e.g., blue, red, and rainbow colors), the expectation of winning is higher than that of white (e.g., the expectation of winning is lowest for white). , increasing in order of blue, red, and rainbow). The vertical dimension of the telop TP2 is about twice as large as the vertical dimension of the sub-variation area KSZ (or the reserved number display area HS). The area where the telop TP2 is moved and displayed is between the lower side of the area where the telop TP1 is moved and displayed and the upper side of the background image for the counter image. It straddles the variable display area 8Lr, the middle variable display area 8Cr that is the variable area for the middle decorative design 8C, and the right variable display area 8Rr that is the variable area for the right decorative design 8R. By arranging the telop TP2 on the frontmost side, even when the telop TP2 straddles the right fluctuation display area 8Rr, the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr, and the left fluctuation display area 8Lr, the telop TP2 is displayed in the right decoration. The telop TP2 is not blocked by the right decorative pattern 8R, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the left decorative pattern 8L which are arranged in front of the pattern 8R, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the left decorative pattern 8L. In this respect, the above-mentioned telop TP1 is arranged behind the sub-variation area KSZ and the pending number display area HS, and the telop TP1 is blocked by the sub-variation area KSZ and the pending number display area HS.

The telop TP2 is different from the telop TP1 in that once it reaches the left side of the display screen 7a, it does not appear again from the right side of the display screen 7a. The plurality of telops TP2 may be set to have different moving speeds, or may be set to have the same speed. Some fluctuations reach the left side of the display screen 7a and disappear. Some of them disappear after reaching the left side of the display screen 7a.

In addition, when the telop TP2 appears from the right side of the display screen 7a and is displayed moving toward the left side of the display screen 7a, it may suddenly disappear in the middle of the display, or it may become particles and gradually disappear. In some cases, the image information is missing (for example, the image is divided into small blocks, and the image is arranged irregularly and becomes an unclear image), resulting in a display mode that is difficult to read. In that the above-mentioned telop TP1 does not suddenly disappear in the middle when it is displayed moving from the right side of the display screen 7a toward the left side along the upper side of the display screen 7a, and it does not become grainy. It is different in that it does not fade away gradually and does not result in a display mode in which image information is missing.

Also, the telop TP2 may be moved and displayed at the same constant speed as the telop TP1 (telop TP1 speed), or may be displayed at a faster constant speed than the telop TP1 constant speed (telop TP1 speed). It may be displayed moving, or may be displayed moving at a constant speed slower than the constant speed of the telop TP1 (speed for telop TP1). Also, the telop TP2 may be accelerated when displayed moving from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a, and when displayed moving from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a. The speed may be decelerated, and the speed may be accelerated or decelerated while the display is moving from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a. This point is also different from the telop TP1 described above.

Also, when the telop TP2 appears from the right side of the display screen 7a and is displayed moving toward the left side of the display screen 7a, it may suddenly stop in the middle, or it may slow down and stop. . When the telop TP2 stops, it may explode and simply disappear from the display screen 7a, or the display screen 7a may become a blackout (dark screen), which will be described later, and then the win-loss result may be displayed. This point is also different from the telop TP1 described above.

In addition, when the telop TP2 appears from the right side of the display screen 7a and is displayed moving toward the left side of the display screen 7a, the typeface may change in the middle (for example, all characters of the telop TP2 or a single change the font of some characters, change all or some of the characters in the telop TP2 to bold, change all or some of the characters in the telop TP2 to thin, or change all or some of the characters in the telop TP2 change the size of all or some of the characters in telop TP2 to italics, change the size of all or some of the characters in telop TP2 significantly, or change the size of all or some of the characters in telop TP2 to be smaller. all or part of the characters of the telop TP2 are underlined), and the contents may change to other contents. This point is also different from the telop TP1 described above.

In addition, when the telop TP2 appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, the vertical dimension of the telop TP2 is approximately twice as large as the vertical dimension of the sub-variation area KSZ (or the pending number display area HS). However, if the vertical dimension of the telop TP2 is more than twice the vertical dimension of the sub-variation area KSZ (or the pending number display area HS) and is moved and displayed In some cases, the vertical distance dimension of the telop TP2 is less than twice the vertical distance dimension of the sub-variation area KSZ (or the reserved number display area HS) and displayed in a moving manner. In addition, when the telop TP2 is moved and displayed such that the vertical dimension of the telop TP2 exceeds about twice the vertical dimension of the sub-variation area KSZ (or the pending number display area HS), It may be red or rainbow colored. This point is also different from the telop TP1 described above.

There are a plurality of contents of the telop TP2, which the player can select and set by operating the effect button 63.例文帳に追加As the content of the telop TP2, for example, one of a plurality of characters representing the world view of the game machine is selected and set. The contents include part of the lyrics of the music played in , or the contents of comments by a plurality of people expressing the world view of the background image of the decorative pattern stop position indeterminate effect A. Of course, display and non-display of the telop TP2 can also be selectively set. Such selection setting may be performed in the setting mode while the player is playing the game, or may be performed in the setting mode in the customer waiting state (player waiting state). .

In the decorative pattern stop position indeterminate effect A, the variation icon 9C and the pending icon 9A disappear from the display screen 7a, so that the degree of expectation of the big win for the variation cannot be notified by changing the display mode of the variation icon 9C. , the degree of expectation for winning cannot be suggested by changing the display mode of the pending icon 9A by the look-ahead effect. Therefore, in the decorative pattern stop position indeterminate effect A, the degree of expectation for winning can be suggested by variously changing the display mode of the telop TP2. The telop TP1 notifies the player that the game is in the "A mode" and does not convey other information to the player. For this reason, the telop TP2, which can suggest the player's expectation of winning, is arranged in front of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, whereas it is called "A mode". A telop TP1 which does not convey information other than information to the player is arranged behind the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R. In addition, the background image dedicated to A mode is displayed as the background image in the decorative pattern stop position indeterminate effect A. Therefore, when a plurality of types of A-mode-dedicated background images are prepared, an A-mode-dedicated background image corresponding to the degree of expectation of winning may be displayed.

Thus, unlike the telop TP1, the telop TP2 has a wide variety of effects, and suppresses the player's desire to play against the decorative pattern stop position indeterminate effect A, which is the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative patterns. are able to contribute.

A predetermined number of times (10 times) + 1st time (that is, 11th time) of variable performance (variation display) is completed, and then a predetermined number of times (10 times) + 2nd time (that is, 12th time) of variable performance (variation display) is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 60(F), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R respectively emit light, and the corresponding left fluctuation display area 8Lr, middle fluctuation display area 8Cr, and right fluctuation display area are displayed. At 8Rr, a variable effect (variable display) is performed so that the reels rotate downward, and the counter image CNT is updated and displayed to "remaining 103".

At this time, in the decorative design stop position indeterminate production A, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are variable effects (variable display), as described above, one random number follows each decorative design. It appears opaque as a number and is displayed stopped. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stop-displayed at the same timing when the variable effect (variable display) is started at the same timing.

Specifically, when the variable effect (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "4" stopped and displayed in FIG. ), the number ``5'' following the number ``4'' of the left decorative pattern 8L stopped and displayed appears opaque and is not stopped and displayed as the left decorative pattern 8L in FIG. ” appears opaque and stops. Furthermore, in FIG. 60(E), the position of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "4" stopped and displayed is the lower left side of the left variable display area 8Lr, whereas the variable effect (variable display) is started. 60(F), the position of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "6" stopped and displayed is not the lower left side of the left fluctuation display area 8Lr but the center of the left fluctuation display area 8Lr.

When the variable effect (variable display) of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "5" stopped and displayed in FIG. 60(E) is started, the right decorative pattern 8R emits light and is stopped and displayed in FIG. However, the number "6" following the number "5" of the right decorative pattern 8R appears opaque and is not stopped and displayed as the right decorative pattern 8R in FIG. 60(F), and the random number "8" remains opaque. Appears and stops. Further, in FIG. 60(E), the position of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "5" stopped and displayed is the center right side of the right variable display area 8Rr, whereas the variable effect (variable display) is started. 60(F), the position of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "8" stopped and displayed is not on the right side of the center of the right fluctuation display area 8Rr, but on the slightly upper left side of the center of the right fluctuation display area 8Rr.

When the moving effect (variable display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "1" stopped and displayed in FIG. 60(E) is started, the middle decorative pattern 8C emits light and is stopped and displayed in FIG. In addition, the number "2" following the number "1" of the middle decorative pattern 8C appears opaque and is not stopped and displayed as the middle decorative pattern 8C in FIG. 60(F), and the random number "8" remains opaque. Appears and stops. Further, in FIG. 60(E), the position of the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "1" stopped and displayed is the center left side of the middle variable display area 8Cr, whereas the variable effect (variable display) is started. 60(F), the position of the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" stopped and displayed is not on the center left side of the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr but on the center right side of the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr, and the number "8" is displayed. The middle decorative pattern 8C jumps over the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr and straddles the right fluctuation display area 8Rr. Therefore, part of the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" and the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "8" overlap. In other words, the direction in which the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" is changed (variation display) of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "8" (the right decorative pattern 8R fluctuates toward the bottom of the right fluctuation display area 8Rr direction (moving direction)) is displayed (the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "8" is displayed in the direction in which the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" is changed (variably displayed) (the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed in the middle) displayed in a direction (moving direction) that fluctuates toward the lower side of the region 8Cr). Here, as a anteroposterior relationship between the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" and the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "8", the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" moves forward of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "8". The display mode is such that the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" partially covers the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "8".

A predetermined number of times (10 times) + 2nd time (that is, 12th time) of variable performance (variation display) is completed, and then a predetermined number of times (10 times) + 3rd time (that is, 13th time) of variable performance (variation display) is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 60(G), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R respectively emit light, and the corresponding left fluctuation display area 8Lr, middle fluctuation display area 8Cr, and right fluctuation display area are displayed. At 8Rr, a variable effect (variable display) is performed so that the reels rotate downward, and the counter image CNT is updated and displayed to "remaining 102".

At this time, in the decorative design stop position indeterminate production A, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are variable effects (variable display), as described above, one random number follows each decorative design. It appears opaque as a number and is displayed stopped. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stop-displayed at the same timing when the variable effect (variable display) is started at the same timing.

Specifically, when the variable effect (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "6" stopped and displayed in FIG. ), the number ``7'' following the number ``6'' of the left decorative pattern 8L stopped and displayed appears opaque, and the left decorative pattern 8L is not stopped and displayed in FIG. ” appears opaque and stops. Furthermore, in FIG. 60(F), the position of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "6" stopped and displayed is the center of the left variable display area 8Lr, but the variable effect (variable display) is started, In FIG. 60(G), the position of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "1" stopped and displayed is not the center of the left fluctuation display area 8Lr but the upper left side of the left fluctuation display area 8Lr. Although the pending number display area HS is provided on the upper left side of the left fluctuation display area 8Lr, since the left fluctuation display area 8Lr is arranged on the frontmost side, part of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "1" is It will be in a state covered with the number of pending display area HS.

When the variable effect (variable display) of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "8" stopped and displayed in FIG. 60(F) is started, the right decorative pattern 8R emits light and is stopped and displayed in FIG. However, the number "9" following the number "8" of the right decorative pattern 8R appears opaque and is not stopped and displayed as the right decorative pattern 8R in FIG. 60(G), and the random number "2" remains opaque. Appears and stops. Further, in FIG. 60(F), the position of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "8" stopped and displayed is slightly upper left of the center of the right variable display area 8Rr, whereas the variable effect (variable display) starts. As a result, the position of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "2" stopped and displayed in FIG. 60(G) is not at the upper left side of the center of the right fluctuation display area 8Rr, but at the lower right side of the right fluctuation display area 8Rr. .

When the moving effect (variable display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" stopped and displayed in FIG. 60(F) starts, the middle decorative pattern 8C emits light and is stopped and displayed in FIG. 60(F). In addition, the number "9" following the number "8" of the middle decorative pattern 8C appears opaque and is not stopped and displayed as the middle decorative pattern 8C in FIG. 60(G), and the random number "7" remains opaque. Appears and stops. Further, in FIG. 60(F), the position of the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" stopped and displayed is the central right side of the middle variable display area 8Cr. 60(G), the position of the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "7" stopped and displayed is not on the center right side of the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr, but on the lower right side of the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr. 7" middle decorative pattern 8C jumps over the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr and straddles the right fluctuation display area 8Rr. Although the counter image CNT is provided on the lower side of the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr, since the counter image CNT is arranged on the frontmost side, part of the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "7" is displayed by the counter image CNT. becomes covered.

When the predetermined number of times (10 times)+3 times (that is, the 13th time) of the variable effect (variable display) is started, this time the telop TP2, which is the message image "from now on..." is parallel to the upper side of the display screen 7a. It is displayed moving from the right side to the left side of 7a on the display screen in the display mode of the telop. The telop TP2 is white.

A predetermined number of times (10 times) + 3rd time (that is, 13th time) of variable performance (variable display) is completed, and then a predetermined number of times (10 times) + 4th time (that is, 14th time) of variable performance (variable display) is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 60(H), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R respectively emit light, and the corresponding left fluctuation display area 8Lr, middle fluctuation display area 8Cr, and right fluctuation display area are displayed. At 8Rr, a variable effect (variable display) is performed so that the reels rotate downward, and the counter image CNT is updated and displayed to "remaining 101".

At this time, in the decorative design stop position indeterminate production A, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are variable effects (variable display), as described above, one random number follows each decorative design. It appears opaque as a number and is displayed stopped. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stop-displayed at the same timing when the variable effect (variable display) is started at the same timing.

Specifically, when the variable effect (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number “1” stopped and displayed in FIG. 60(G) is started, the left decorative pattern 8L emits light, ), the number ``2'' following the number ``1'' of the left decorative pattern 8L stopped and displayed appears opaque and is not stopped and displayed as the left decorative pattern 8L in FIG. ” appears opaque and stops. Furthermore, in FIG. 60(G), the position of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "1" stopped and displayed is the upper left side of the left variable display area 8Lr, whereas the variable effect (variable display) is started. 60(H), the position of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "9" stopped and displayed is not on the upper left side of the left fluctuation display area 8Lr but on the lower right side of the left fluctuation display area 8Lr.

When the variable effect (variable display) of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "2" stopped and displayed in FIG. 60(G) is started, the right decorative pattern 8R emits light and is stopped and displayed in FIG. However, the number "3" following the number "2" of the right decorative pattern 8R appears opaque and is not stopped and displayed as the right decorative pattern 8R in FIG. 60(H), and the random number "4" remains opaque. Appears and stops. Further, in FIG. 60(G), the position of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "2" stopped and displayed is the lower right side of the right variable display area 8Rr, whereas the variable effect (variable display) is started. 60(H), the position of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "4" stopped and displayed is not on the lower right side of the right fluctuation display area 8Rr, but on the upper left side of the right fluctuation display area 8Rr. The right decorative pattern 8R of "4" jumps over the right fluctuation display area 8Rr and straddles the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr.

When the moving effect (variation display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "7" stopped and displayed in FIG. 60(G) is started, the middle decorative pattern 8C emits light and is stopped and displayed in FIG. In addition, the number "8" following the number "7" of the middle decorative pattern 8C appears opaque and is not stopped and displayed as the middle decorative pattern 8C in FIG. 60(H), and the random number "3" remains opaque. Appears and stops. Further, in FIG. 60(G), the position of the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "7" stopped and displayed is near the lower right side of the middle variable display area 8Cr, whereas the variable effect (variable display) starts. As a result, the position of the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "3" stopped and displayed in FIG. Therefore, part of the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "3" and the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "4" overlap. In other words, the direction in which the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "3" is changed (variation display) of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "4" direction (moving direction)) is displayed (the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "4" is displayed in the direction (variation display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "3" (the middle decorative pattern 8C is medium fluctuation display displayed in a direction (moving direction) that fluctuates toward the lower side of the region 8Cr). Here, as a front-rear relationship between the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "3" and the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "4", the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "4" is in front of the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "3". The right decorative pattern 8R of the number "4" covers a part of the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "3".

After the variable performance (variable display) progresses, the predetermined number of times (10 times) + 54th (that is, 64th) variable performance (variable display) ends, followed by the predetermined number of times (10) + 55th (that is, 65th). When the variable effect (variable display) is started, as shown in FIG. 60(I), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R emit light, respectively, and the corresponding left fluctuation display areas 8Lr, middle In the variable display area 8Cr and the right variable display area 8Rr, a variable effect (variable display) is performed so that the reels rotate downward, and the counter image CNT is updated to "50 left" and displayed.

At this time, in the decorative design stop position indeterminate production A, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are variable effects (variable display), as described above, one random number follows each decorative design. It appears opaque as a number and is displayed stopped. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stop-displayed at the same timing when the variable effect (variable display) is started at the same timing.

Specifically, when the variation effect (variation display) of the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "2" stopped and displayed is started at the 64th time (not shown), the left decorative symbol 8L emits light, and at the 64th time (not shown) The number "3" following the number "2" of the left decorative pattern 8L that has been stopped appears opaque and is not stopped as the left decorative pattern 8L in FIG. Appears opaque and stops. Further, the position of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "2" stopped and displayed at the 64th time (not shown) is the center of the left variable display area 8Lr. In 60(I), the position of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "4" stopped and displayed is not in the center of the left fluctuation display area 8Lr, but slightly to the lower right side of the center of the left fluctuation display area 8Lr.

When the variable effect (variable display) of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "3" stopped and displayed at the 64th time (not shown) is started, the right decorative pattern 8R emits light, and the right decorative pattern 8R which is stopped at the 64th time (not shown) is displayed. The number "4" following the number "3" of the decorative pattern 8R appears opaque and is not stopped as the right decorative pattern 8R in FIG. 60(I), and the random number "1" appears opaque. Stop is displayed. Further, the position of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "3" stopped and displayed at the 64th time (not shown) is the center left side of the right variable display area 8Rr. In FIG. 60(I), the position of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "1" stopped and displayed is not on the center left side of the right fluctuation display area 8Rr but on the upper right side of the right fluctuation display area 8Rr. Although the sub-variation area KSZ is provided above the right variation display area 8Rr, since the sub-variation area KSZ is arranged on the frontmost side, part of the right decorative pattern 8R with the number "1" is part of the sub-variation area. It becomes a state covered with KSZ.

When the moving effect (variation display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "6" stopped and displayed at the 64th time (not shown) is started, the middle decorative pattern 8C emits light, and the middle decorative pattern 8C which is stopped at the 64th time (not shown) is started. The number "7" following the number "6" of the decorative pattern 8C appears opaque and is not stopped as the middle decorative pattern 8C in FIG. 60(I), and the random number "5" appears opaque. Stop is displayed. Further, the position of the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "6" stopped and displayed at the 64th time (not shown) is the upper left side of the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr. In FIG. 60(I), the position of the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "5" stopped and displayed is not on the upper left side of the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr, but on the lower left side of the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr, and the number "5" is displayed. The middle decorative pattern 8C jumps over the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr and straddles the left fluctuation display area 8Lr. Therefore, the middle decorative design 8C of the number "5" and the left decorative design 8L of the number "4" are partially overlapped. In other words, the direction in which the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "5" is changed (variation display) of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "4" (the left decorative pattern 8L fluctuates toward the lower side of the left fluctuation display area 8Lr direction (moving direction)) is displayed (the left decorative pattern 8L of number "4" is displayed in the direction in which the middle decorative pattern 8C of number "5" is variably produced (variable display) (middle decorative design 8C is medium fluctuation display displayed in a direction (moving direction) that fluctuates toward the lower side of the region 8Cr). Here, as a front-rear relationship between the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "5" and the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "4", the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "5" is in front of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "4". The middle decorative pattern 8C with the number "5" covers part of the right decorative pattern 8R with the number "4".

A predetermined number of times (10 times) + 55th (that is, 65th) variable performance (variation display) is completed, and subsequently, a predetermined number of times (10 times) + 56th (that is, 66th) variation performance (variation display) is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 60(J), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R respectively emit light, and the corresponding left fluctuation display area 8Lr, middle fluctuation display area 8Cr, and right fluctuation display area are displayed. At 8Rr, a variable effect (variable display) is performed so that the reels rotate downward, and the counter image CNT is updated to "49 left" and displayed.

At this time, in the decorative design stop position indeterminate production A, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are variable effects (variable display), as described above, one random number follows each decorative design. It appears opaque as a number and is displayed stopped. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stop-displayed at the same timing when the variable effect (variable display) is started at the same timing.

Specifically, when the variable effect (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "4" stopped and displayed in FIG. 60(I) is started, the left decorative pattern 8L emits light, ), the number ``5'' following the number ``4'' of the left decorative pattern 8L stopped and displayed appears opaque, and the left decorative pattern 8L is not stopped and displayed in FIG. ” appears opaque and stops. Further, in FIG. 60(I), the position of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "4" stopped and displayed is slightly lower right in the center of the left variable display area 8Lr, whereas the variable effect (variable display) is The position of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "2" stopped and displayed in FIG. 60(J) is not at the center or lower right side of the left fluctuation display area 8Lr, but at the upper right side of the left fluctuation display area 8Lr. The left decorative pattern 8L with the number "2" jumps over the left fluctuation display area 8Lr and straddles the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr.

When the variable effect (variable display) of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "1" stopped and displayed in FIG. 60(I) is started, the right decorative pattern 8R emits light and is stopped and displayed in FIG. 60(I). However, the number "2" following the number "1" of the right decorative pattern 8R appears opaque and is not stopped and displayed as the right decorative pattern 8R in FIG. 60(J), and the random number "7" remains opaque. Appears and stops. Further, in FIG. 60(I), the position of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "1" stopped and displayed is the upper right side of the right variable display area 8Rr, whereas the variable effect (variable display) is started. 60(J), the position of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "7" stopped and displayed is not at the upper right side of the right fluctuation display area 8Rr but at the lower center of the right fluctuation display area 8Rr.

When the moving effect (variable display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "5" stopped and displayed in FIG. 60(I) is started, the middle decorative pattern 8C emits light and is stopped and displayed in FIG. 60(I). In addition, the number "6" following the number "5" of the middle decorative pattern 8C appears opaque and is not stopped and displayed as the middle decorative pattern 8C in FIG. 60(J), and the random number "8" remains opaque. Appears and stops. Further, in FIG. 60(I), the position of the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "5" stopped and displayed is toward the lower left side of the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr, whereas the fluctuation effect (variation display) is started. In FIG. 60(J), the position of the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" stopped and displayed is not on the lower left side of the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr but on the upper left side of the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr. Therefore, part of the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" and the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "2" overlap. In other words, the direction in which the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" is changed (variation display) of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "2" (the left decorative pattern 8L fluctuates toward the lower side of the left fluctuation display area 8Lr direction (advancing direction)) is displayed (left decorative pattern 8L of number "2" is displayed in the direction in which the middle decorative pattern 8C of number "8" is variable (variable display) (middle decorative pattern 8C is medium variable display displayed in a direction (moving direction) that fluctuates toward the lower side of the region 8Cr). Here, as a front-rear relationship between the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" and the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "2", the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "2" is in front of the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "8". The left decorative pattern 8L of the number "2" covers a part of the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "8".

When the predetermined number of times (10 times) + 56 times (that is, the 66th time) of the variable effect (variable display) is started, this time a message image of "Will it happen soon?" An image, telop TP2, which is a message image of "Ah~, not yet~", is displayed so as to be parallel to the upper side of the display screen 7a, moving from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a in the telop display mode. The telop TP2, which is the message image "Will it happen soon?" is white.

After that, the variable performance (variable display) proceeds, and when the predetermined number of times (10 times) + 105th (that is, 115th) variable performance (variable display) is completed, the A mode ends, and the decorative pattern stop position indeterminate performance A 60(A), (B), left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R (fluctuation display). will be performed.

In addition, in the decorative pattern stop position indeterminate production A, the production in the case of "losing without reach" was shown from FIG. 60 (C) to FIG. 60 (J). , the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are not arranged on the same horizontal line and temporarily stopped, and the display screen 7a blacks out (becomes a pitch black screen) and turns white toward the center of the display screen 7a. Shining rays of light converge and eventually disappear, creating a display that looks like an analog TV cathode-ray tube turned off. At this time, the contents of the pending number display area HS and the sub-variation area KSZ are kept displayed. That is, in the sub-variation area KSZ, the variation performance (variation display) by the small left decorative symbol, the small middle decorative symbol, and the small right decorative symbol is continued. This state is maintained until it is time to announce the win/lose result (loss). Then, when it is time to announce the winning result (loss), as shown in FIGS. In the variable display), as described above, a random number appears opaquely as the number following each decorative pattern and is stopped at the same timing.

On the other hand, in the case of a hit, the display screen 7a first blacks out (becomes a pitch-black screen), and then the white shining rays converge toward the center of the display screen 7a, and then disappear. It becomes a display mode as if the power supply of the cathode ray tube of the analog TV was turned off. At this time, the contents of the number-of-holds display area HS and the sub-variation area KSZ remain displayed. That is, in the sub-variation area KSZ, the variation performance (variation display) by the small left decorative symbol, the small middle decorative symbol, and the small right decorative symbol is continued. After that, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R appear in the center of the left fluctuation display area 8Lr, the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr, and the right fluctuation display area 8Rr, respectively, as a number "7", which is the same. After being temporarily stopped on the horizontal line of , it is stop-displayed, and it becomes a confirmation display that becomes a win as a result of win-lose, and then a win-win game is started. When a hit is reported as a result of winning, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped (determined display), and at the same time, in the sub-variation area KSZ, the small left decorative pattern and the small The middle decorative pattern and the small right decorative pattern are also stopped (determined display) with the same number (number pattern, here the number "7") as the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R. .

In the decorative pattern stop position indeterminate effect A, the longer the period during which the display screen 7a is blacked out (the period during which the screen is completely black), the higher the expectation for winning. Although it is a monotonous screen called blackout (black screen), it can raise the player's expectation and stir it up.

Thus, in the decorative design stop position indeterminate effect A, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are stopped each time the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are fixed and stopped. The position can be changed randomly (irregularly). At this time, when one of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed overlapping with another decorative pattern, for example, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern In the positional relationship between the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R among the pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R, when the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R in FIG. By arranging the middle decorative design 8C on the near side of the right decorative design 8R, the middle decorative design 8C covers a part of the right decorative design 8R, whereas in FIG. When the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed overlapping each other, the right decorative pattern 8R is arranged on the front side of the middle decorative pattern 8C, so that the right decorative pattern 8R partially covers the middle decorative pattern 8C. It is a display mode that covers. Further, for example, among the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R, regarding the positional relationship between the left decorative design 8L and the middle decorative design 8C, the left decorative design 8L and the middle decorative design in FIG. When the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed overlapping with the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C is arranged in front of the left decorative pattern 8L so that the middle decorative pattern 8C covers a part of the left decorative pattern 8L. On the other hand, when the left decorative design 8L and the middle decorative design 8C in FIG. 8L has a display mode in which a part of the middle decorative pattern 8C is covered. Therefore, in the decorative design stop position indeterminate effect A, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R stop positions each time the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are fixed and stopped. In addition to changing randomly (irregularly), the positional relationship (back-and-forth relationship) between the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R, and the positional relationship (back-and-forth relation) between the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C Randomly (irregularly) also change, it is possible to increase the variation of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R fluctuation production (fluctuation display). . As a result, it is possible to contribute to suppressing a decrease in the player's willingness to play the decorative symbol stop position indeterminate effect A.

In addition, in the decorative symbol stop position indeterminate effect A, the left decorative symbol 8L did not jump out from the upper, left and lower sides of the display screen 7a from the left variable display area 8Lr where the variable effect (variable display) is performed, but it does. It is good also as a display mode like this. In this case, the portion where the left decorative pattern 8L protrudes becomes difficult to see. Further, the medium decorative pattern 8C does not protrude from the upper and lower sides of the display screen 7a from the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr where the fluctuation effect (variation display) is performed, but it may be displayed in such a manner as to protrude. In this case, the portion where the middle decorative pattern 8C protrudes becomes difficult to see. Also, the right decorative pattern 8R does not protrude from the upper, right and lower sides of the display screen 7a from the right variable display area 8Rr where the variable effect (variable display) is performed, but it may be displayed in such a manner as to protrude. In this case, the portion where the right decorative pattern 8R protrudes becomes difficult to see.

[Decorative pattern stop position indeterminate effect B]
Next, the decorative pattern stop position indeterminate effect B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 61 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol stop position indeterminate effect B. FIG. The decorative pattern stop position indeterminate effect B is performed when the transition is made to the special game mode, and here, the transition from the game mode in the normal game state to the special game mode in the normal game state will be described below. .

First, as shown in FIG. 61(A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, there are vertically elongated rectangular areas as variable display areas of three decorative patterns (also referred to as "decorative pattern variable areas"). Three areas (that is, areas obtained by equally dividing the display screen 7a into three columns) are provided. The left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed in a display mode in which reels are rotated from the upper side of each variable display area toward the lower side of the display screen 7a. (Symbol: number "1" to number "9") A variable effect (variable display) is started. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L starts the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative symbol in a display mode in which the reel rotates from the upper side of the left variable display area 8Lr toward the lower side of the left variable display area 8Lr, The variable performance (variable display) of the decorative design is started in a display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side of the middle variable display area 8Cr toward the lower side of the middle variable display area 8Cr, and the right decorative design 8R is displayed. A variable effect (variable display) of decorative symbols is started in a display mode in which reels are rotated from the upper side of the right variable display area 8Rr toward the lower side of the right variable display area 8Rr. The vertical distance dimension of the left fluctuation display region 8Lr, the vertical distance dimension of the middle fluctuation display region 8Cr, and the vertical distance dimension of the right fluctuation display region 8Rr are the same vertical distance dimension, and the horizontal distance dimension of the left fluctuation display region 8Lr, The horizontal distance dimension of the middle fluctuation display region 8Cr and the horizontal distance dimension of the right fluctuation display region 8Rr are the same horizontal distance dimension.

In the variable production (variable display) of each decorative pattern, all are number “1” → number “2” → number “3” → number “4” → number “5” → number “6” → number “7” → The reels are rotated in the order of number "8"→number "9"→number "1"→number "2"→ .

Among the numbers "1" to "9", the number "1", the number "3", the number "5", and the number "9", which are odd numbers excluding the number "7", have bright red, and even numbers The number "2", the number "4", the number "6", and the number "8", which are the symbols of , have a bright blue color, and the number "7" has a yellow (gold color). Also, the sizes of the numbers "1" to "9" are each about a third of the vertical distance of the left fluctuation display area 8Lr (middle fluctuation display area 8Cr, right fluctuation display area 8Rr). Each normal size has a horizontal distance dimension that is about half the horizontal distance dimension of the left fluctuation display region 8Lr (middle fluctuation display region 8Cr, right fluctuation display region 8Rr). . The numbers "1" to "9" are specially created special typefaces (individually created It is formed by a special typeface).

In the game mode in the normal game state, when the variable performance (variable display) of the decorative symbols is started, the statically displayed decorative symbols change from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed. It becomes a display mode that fluctuates at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed temporarily and then stopped). In addition, in the state of the temporary stop display, the decorative pattern is displayed in a mode of slowly moving up and down in small steps.

In addition, on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, a small left decorative pattern, a small medium decorative pattern, and a small right decorative pattern corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed ( A sub-variation area KSZ having a horizontally long rectangular shape that is displayed in a variable manner is provided. The background image of the sub-variation area KSZ is fixed to a single color (for example, a dark color (dark color system) or a color close to dark (for example, dark green), and does not change to another color. Sub-variation area KSZ is arranged on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, so although it overlaps with the right fluctuation display area 8Rr which is the fluctuation area of the right decorative pattern 8R, the sub-variation area KSZ is arranged so as to be on the front side. By doing so, the right decorative pattern 8R is arranged behind the sub-variation area KSZ, the sub-variation area KSZ is not blocked by the right decorative pattern 8R, and even if another effect image appears, the other effect image is not displayed. The sub-variation area KSZ is arranged behind the sub-variation area KSZ and is not blocked by other effect images.In other words, the content displayed in the sub-variation area KSZ is highly visible due to the right decorative pattern 8R and other effect images. not be impeded.

The small decorative designs are numeric designs, and are different from the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R (e.g., Mincho). It is unified with other single colors (for example, bright colors (yellow and white)) that have a high contrast with respect to the single color, and does not change to other colors. The small decorative pattern is arranged on the front side of the background image of the sub-variation area KSZ and is always in an opaque state, and even when the variation starts, it does not become translucent and disappears from the display screen 7a. There is no

Unlike the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, the small-sized decorative patterns do not have a variable effect (variable display) in the display mode in which the reels are rotated, and have the same size at the same display position. A variable effect (variable display) is performed by a display mode in which numerical patterns appear one after another in an opaque state.

When the variation performance (variation display) by the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is started, along with this, in the sub-variation area KSZ, the small left decorative pattern, the small medium decorative pattern, and the small is started, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed. All the small right decorative patterns are also stopped and displayed.

A state in which one or more of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed in the same pattern to reach is formed), the small left decorative pattern, the small middle decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern are all in a state where the variable effect (variable display) is continued. Specifically, even if the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small left decorative pattern continues to be varied (variable display), and even if the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small right decorative pattern is displayed. is continued, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, the small left decorative pattern, the small medium decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern are displayed. All the symbols are also stopped and displayed.

When the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and they are not aligned with the same pattern and become misaligned, the small left decorative pattern, the small left decorative pattern, and the small left decorative pattern are displayed. The middle decorative pattern and the small right decorative pattern may be the same patterns as the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R, or may be completely different patterns. Specifically, for example, when the left decorative design 8L is displayed as the number "1", the middle decorative design 8C as the number "2", and the right decorative design 8R as the number "3", the small left decorative design is displayed. The number "1", the small medium decorative pattern may be displayed as the number "2", the small right decorative pattern may be displayed as the number "3", or the small left decorative pattern may be displayed as the number "5" and the small medium decoration. The symbol may be stopped at the number "6" and the small right decorative symbol at the number "7".

On the other hand, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and all the same patterns win, the small left decorative pattern, The small-sized middle decorative pattern and the small-sized right decorative pattern are arranged in the same patterns as the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R.

The change icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, which are currently fluctuating as the completion of the first special figure reservation, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. is displayed (placed) at the variable display position 9Cd (on the rectangular image (pedestal image)). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as the first special figure hold. In this pending display area, pending icons 9A can be displayed (can be placed) at four pending display positions 9Ad (on rectangular images (pedestal images)), and up to four pending icons 9A can be stocked. is now possible. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, toward the left side of the display screen 7a from a position near the variable display position 9Cd. They are linearly arranged and displayed along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the reserved display position 9Ad.

Since the variable display position 9Cd is arranged in the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a and the first reserved display position 9Ad is arranged on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, the variable display position 9Cd and the first reserved display position 9Ad means that although the middle decorative design 8C overlaps with the middle variable display area 8Cr that is the variable area of the middle decorative design 8C, the middle decorative design 8C is arranged behind the variable display position 9Cd and the first reserved display position 9Ad. The variable display position 9Cd and the first reserved display position 9Ad are not blocked by the 8C. However, when another effect image appears, if the other effect image is arranged behind the variable display position 9Cd and the first reserved display position 9Ad, the other effect image causes the variable display position 9Cd and the first reserved display position 9Ad. Although the display position 9Ad is not blocked, if another effect image is arranged in front of the variable display position 9Cd and the first reserved display position 9Ad, the other effect image will cause the variable display position 9Cd and the first reserved display position 9Ad to overlap. The reserved display position 9Ad is blocked.

Since the second reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad are arranged on the lower left side of the display screen 7a, the second reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad are the variation area of the left decorative pattern 8L. Although it overlaps with the left variable display area 8Lr, the left decorative pattern 8L is arranged behind the second reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, and the left decorative pattern 8L moves from the second reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad. 4 The reserved display position 9Ad is not blocked. However, when another effect image appears, if the other effect image is arranged behind the second to fourth reserved display positions 9Ad to 9Ad, the other effect image will cause the second to fourth reserved display positions 9Ad to 4 Although the reserved display position 9Ad is not obstructed, if other effect images are arranged in front of the second reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position is blocked by the other effect images. 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad are blocked.

In this way, among the first reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, the first reserved display position 9Ad overlaps the middle variable display area 8Cr which is the variable area of the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the second reserved display Since the position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad overlap the left variable display area 8Lr which is the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L, the first reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad A reservation display area as the first special figure reservation is arranged across the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr and the left fluctuation display area 8Lr.

Here, a white spherical variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, and a suspension icon 9A is displayed at the first suspension display position 9Ad to the fourth suspension display position 9Ad. In other words, there are four pending icons that are stocked without being digested. In the following description, during the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative symbols, the game ball enters the first start port 20 and there are three or four pending icons (that is, the number of pending 3 or It is assumed that the game ball does not enter the second starting port 21 while the number of reservations is 4). In addition, when the number of reservations increases, the time (variation time) from the start of the variable effect (variable display) to the end thereof becomes shorter. For example, in the present embodiment, when the number of reservations is 3 or the number of reservations is 4, the change time is 5000 milliseconds (0.5 seconds) in the loss without reach.

Also, on the upper left side of the display screen 7a, facing the above-described sub-variation area KSZ (aligned on the same horizontal line), the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball to the first start port 20 , and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are each displayed as the number of reservations (numbers). The vertical distance dimension of the reserved number display area HS and the vertical distance dimension of the sub-variation area KSZ have the same vertical distance dimension, and the horizontal distance dimension of the reserved number display area HS and the horizontal distance dimension of the sub-variation area KSZ are different. , have the same lateral distance dimension. That is, the shape of the number-of-holds display area HS and the shape of the sub-variation area KSZ are the same.

Unlike the background image of the sub-variation area KSZ, the background image of the pending number display area HS is fixed to be colorless and transparent, and does not become opaque or change to another color. Since the holding number display area HS is arranged on the upper left side of the display screen 7a, although it overlaps with the left fluctuation display area 8Lr which is the fluctuation area of the left decorative pattern 8L, the holding number display area HS is the foremost. By being arranged on the side, the left decorative pattern 8L is arranged behind the reserved number display area HS, the reserved number display area HS is not blocked by the left decorative pattern 8L, and other effect images appear. However, other effect images are arranged behind the number-of-holds display area HS, and the number-of-holds display area HS is not blocked by other effect images.

The number of the first special reservation (number of reservations (number)) and the number of the second special reservation (number of reservations (number)) are different from the small decorative pattern font (for example, Gothic). , and is set to a different single color having a high contrast with respect to the single color of the background image of the number-of-holds display area HS, and is not changed to another color. The number of the first special figure reservation (number of reservations (number)) and the number of the second special figure reservations (number of reservations (number)) are placed in front of the background image of the number of reservations display area HS and are always opaque. , and does not disappear from the display screen 7a. Specifically, the number of the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball to the first start port 20 is indicated by blue numbers on the left side of the reservation number display area HS, the entry of the game ball to the second start port 21 The number of the second special figure reservation based on is always displayed with red numbers arranged in a state separated from each other on the right side of the reservation number display area HS. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of held balls, they can be difficult to discriminate among various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and are intuitively easy to understand. In other words, the visibility of the content displayed in the number-of-holds display area HS is not hindered by other effect images. In addition, the blue color that indicates the number of the first special figure reservation is a different color from the bright blue color of the even numbered patterns of numbers "2", numbers "4", numbers "6", and numbers "8" (the same color), but similar colors. The red color of the number of the second special figure reservation is a different color from the bright red of the odd number symbols excluding the number "7", the number "1", the number "3", the number "5", and the number "9". (Not the same color), but similar colors.

Here, to briefly explain the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), there is a difference in the expectation of winning during the lottery corresponding to the icon due to the difference in shape and color. represents. For example, among the four icons, a yellow (gold) star icon, a black sphere icon, a smiling sphere icon, and a white sphere icon, the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest probability of winning. , the black spherical icon has the second highest probability of winning, the smiley spherical icon has the third highest probability of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest probability of winning. The smile sphere icon is further set with a high expectation of winning in the order of, for example, blue→green→red→gold (yellow)→seven colors (rainbow (rich win)).

In the game mode in the normal game state, as shown in FIG. 61(A), the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbols is started, and then the left variation display area 8Lr is variably displayed from the upper side to the lower side. The decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the left fluctuation display area 8Lr, and is displayed in a mode of slowly moving up and down in small steps. After that, the right decorative pattern 8R, which is variably displayed in the right variable display area 8Rr from the top to the bottom, is temporarily stopped at the center of the right variable display area 8Rr, and the display mode is such that it slowly moves in the vertical direction. After that, the middle decorative pattern 8C variably displayed from the upper side to the lower side of the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr is temporarily stopped and displayed at the center of the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr, and the display mode is such that it slowly moves up and down.

In addition, in the game mode in the normal game state, a plurality of types of normal game background images are prepared as background images, and the background images are switched as appropriate.

After that, as shown in FIG. 61(B), the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are all stopped and displayed (confirmed display) at the center of the respective variable display areas, whereby the left decorative design is displayed. 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are arranged on the same horizontal line and stopped (fixed display). Along with this, the change icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

61(C), left decorative symbols 8L, When the middle decorative pattern 8C, the right decorative pattern 8R, the variable display position 9Cd, the first reservation display position 9Ad to the fourth reservation display position 9ad, the variable icon 9C, and all the reservation icons 9A disappear from the display screen 7a, it will be described later. In the second sub-variation area CSZ, a variable effect (variable display) using medium-sized decorative symbols is started, after which the background image is switched from the normal game background image to the A-mode exclusive background image. A message image MSG, which will be described later, "Enter A mode" is displayed. This A mode is a special game mode. In the A mode, a decorative symbol stop position indeterminate effect B, which is a display mode different from the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative symbols in the game mode in the normal game state shown in FIGS. 61A and 61B, is started. .

The A-mode dedicated background image is a background image different from the normal game background image used as the background image in the game mode in the normal game state, and is a background image exclusively used only in the A mode. Only one A-mode background image may be prepared, or a plurality of types may be prepared.

In the present embodiment, the condition for the indeterminate decorative pattern stop position effect B to occur is, for example, that the number of times the variable effect (variable display) is performed without the occurrence of a win is in a normal probability state (non-high probability state, low probability state). , normal state) to occur when it reaches 2.5 to 3 times. Further, in the decorative pattern stop position indeterminate effect B, a predetermined number of variable effects (variable display) are performed. This "predetermined number of times" is, for example, up to 3.8 times the normal probability state (non-high probability state, low probability state, normal state), and is 115 times here.

When the decorative design stop position indeterminate effect B is started, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are displayed on the lower left side of the display screen 7a. , and a second sub-variation area CSZ having a horizontally elongated rectangular shape in which a medium-sized right decorative pattern is variably produced (variably displayed). The vertical distance dimension of the second sub-variation area CSZ has a vertical distance dimension about five times larger than the vertical distance dimension of the sub-variation area KSZ, and the horizontal distance dimension of the second sub-variation area CSZ is the sub-variation. The horizontal distance dimension is about five times larger than the horizontal distance dimension of the region KSZ, and the shape is similar.

The sizes of the medium-sized left decorative pattern, the medium-sized medium decorative pattern, and the medium-sized right decorative pattern that are variably produced (variably displayed) in the second sub-variable area CSZ are variably produced (variably displayed) in the sub-variable area KSZ. It is larger than the small left decorative pattern, the small middle decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern (about five times larger), but compared to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. small. In addition, the left decorative pattern of the medium size, the middle decorative pattern of the medium size, and the right decorative pattern of the medium size are different from the left decorative pattern of the small size, the middle decorative pattern of the small size, and the right decorative pattern of the small size. , the right decorative pattern 8R has a smaller shape, a similar shape, and the same color. In other words, the left decorative pattern of the medium size is obtained by reducing the outer shape of the left decorative pattern 8L and has the same color as the left decorative pattern 8L, and the middle decorative pattern of the medium size is obtained by reducing the outer shape of the middle decorative pattern 8C. and has the same color as the middle decorative pattern 8C.

Unlike the background image of the sub-variation area KSZ, the background image of the second sub-variation area CSZ is fixed to be colorless and transparent, and does not become opaque or change to another color. Since the second sub-variation area CSZ is arranged on the lower left side of the display screen 7a, it overlaps with the left variation display area 8Lr which is the variation area of the left decorative pattern 8L. While the sub-variation area CSZ is displayed on the display screen 7a, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R disappear from the display screen 7a. The variable area KSZ is not blocked. In addition, by arranging the second sub-variation area CSZ so as to be on the front side, even if another effect image appears, the other effect image is arranged behind the second sub-variation area CSZ and the other The effect image does not block the second sub-variation area CSZ. In other words, the visibility of the content displayed in the second sub-variation area CSZ is not hindered by the left decorative pattern 8L or other effect images.

Unlike the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, the medium-sized decorative pattern does not perform a variable effect (variable display) in the display mode in which the reels are rotated, and can be displayed at the same display position, for example, the medium-sized decorative pattern. From the left end of the decorative pattern to the right end of the medium-sized decorative pattern, a variable performance (variable display) is performed as if a coin were rotating. Then, the medium-sized decorative patterns, that is, the medium-sized left decorative pattern, the medium-sized middle decorative pattern, and the medium-sized right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed at the same timing when the variable effect (variable display) is started at the same timing. be.

In this embodiment, when the decorative symbol stop position indeterminate effect B in which the variable effect (variable display) is performed up to 115 times is started, the variable effect (variable display) by the medium-sized decorative pattern is started in the second sub-variation area CSZ. and is performed a predetermined number of times (10 times in this embodiment). During the period in which the variation effect (variation display) by the medium-sized decorative pattern is performed for a predetermined number of times (10 times) in the second sub-variable area CSZ, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed. It has disappeared from the screen 7a. In the second sub-variation area CSZ, a variable effect (variable display) with a medium-sized decorative pattern is started, and when the second variable effect (variable display) is being performed, "Enter A mode" having gold (gold color) is displayed. This message image MSG is displayed for a predetermined time (5 seconds in this embodiment) and then disappears from the display screen 7a. ) along the upper side of the display screen 7a in a telop display mode from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a during the period when the decorative pattern stop position indeterminate performance B is performed.

The telop TP1, which is the message image "A mode", has the same color (gold) as the message image MSG "Enter A mode". The area in which the telop TP1 is moved and displayed is a band-shaped area having a predetermined distance dimension from the upper side of the display screen 7a, and is about four times as long as the vertical distance dimension of the sub-variation area KSZ (or the pending number display area HS). have a size. The area where the telop TP1 is moved and displayed overlaps the sub-variation area KSZ and the pending number display area HS, but is arranged so that the sub-variable area KSZ and the pending number display area HS are on the front side as described above. Therefore, the telop TP1 is arranged behind the sub-variation area KSZ and the pending number display area HS, and the sub-variable area KSZ and the pending number display area HS are not blocked by the telop TP1. That is, the visibility of the content displayed in the sub-variation area KSZ and the number-of-holds display area HS is not hindered by the telop TP1.

The area where the telop TP1 is moved and displayed is, as described above, a band-like area having a predetermined distance dimension from the upper side of the display screen 7a, and this area is the left-moving display that is the changing area of the left decorative pattern 8L. It overlaps with the upper area of the area 8Lr, overlaps with the upper area of the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr that is the fluctuation area of the middle decorative design 8C, and overlaps with the upper area of the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr that is the fluctuation area of the right decorative design 8R. It overlaps with the upper region of the variable display region 8Rr. In this embodiment, the areas where the telop TP1 is moved and displayed are arranged behind the left fluctuation display area 8Lr, the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr, and the right fluctuation display area 8Rr. Therefore, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are not obstructed by the area where the telop TP1 is moved and displayed. In other words, the visibility of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is not hindered by the area where the telop TP1 is moved and displayed.

When the telop TP1 is moved and displayed from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a along the upper side of the display screen 7a, the telop TP1 does not suddenly disappear on the way, nor does it disappear gradually due to granulation. The telop TP1 is moved and displayed at a constant telop TP1 speed.

When the decorative symbol stop position indeterminate effect B is performed, and a predetermined number of times (10th time) variable effect (variable display) is started as the variable effect (variable display) by the medium-sized decorative symbol in the second sub-variable area CSZ, Immediately before this variable effect (variable display) ends, as shown in FIG. 61(D), a counter image CNT of "remaining 105" is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a. The counter image CNT is arranged in front of the counter image background image having a semi-transparent horizontally long rectangular shape. The horizontal distance dimension of the counter image background image having a translucent horizontally long rectangular shape, which is about three times as large as the vertical distance dimension of the sub-variation area KSZ (or the pending number display area HS), is It is about six times as large as the horizontal dimension of the variable area KSZ (or the pending number display area HS).

Although the background image for the counter image having a semi-transparent horizontally long rectangular shape overlaps with the middle variation display area 8Cr that is the variation area of the middle decorative pattern 8C, the background image for the counter image is placed on the front side. , the middle decorative pattern 8C is arranged behind the background image for the counter image, and the counter image CNT arranged in front of the background image for the counter image is not blocked by the middle decorative pattern 8C. Even if a performance image appears, another performance image is arranged behind the background image for the counter image, and the other performance image does not block the counter image CNT arranged in front of the background image for the counter image. That is, the visibility of the counter image CNT arranged in front of the background image for the counter image is not hindered by the middle decorative pattern 8C or other effect images. Since the background image for the counter image is translucent, the area of the background image for the counter image in which the counter image CNT is not arranged (that is, the area of the background image for the counter image that does not correspond to the counter image CNT) is semi-transparent. The middle decorative design 8C and other effect images (background images of the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R) are visible through the transparent background image for the counter image.

In addition, when the counter image CNT "remaining 105" is displayed at the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a, accompanying this (with a slight delay from the start of display of the counter image CNT), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right The decorative pattern 8R appears again and is stopped. At this time, the sizes of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R appearing again are the sizes before disappearing, that is, the left decorative patterns in the game mode shown in FIGS. 61(A) and (B). 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R. The direction of left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R in the shown game mode is different, and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R that appear again are temporarily stopped. 61(A) and (B), the positions where the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed are different from the positions where they are displayed and stopped. there is

Specifically, the size of the left decorative symbol 8L temporarily stopped and stopped in the decorative symbol stop position uncertain effect B of FIG. It is larger than the normal size of the displayed left decorative pattern 8L. In the game mode of FIG. 61(B), the position where the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and stopped is displayed in the center of the left variable display area 8Lr, which is the variable area of the left decorative symbol 8L. In the decorative design stop position indeterminate effect B of FIG. 61(D), the position where the left decorative design 8L is temporarily stopped and stopped is not the center of the left fluctuation display area 8Lr, which is the fluctuation area of the left decorative design 8L, but the left side. It is on the upper right side of the variable display area 8Lr, and the upper part of the left decorative pattern 8L protrudes from the upper side of the left variable display area 8Lr, making it difficult to see. In addition, the left decorative symbol 8L displayed temporarily and stopped in the game mode of FIG. 61D), the inclination of the left decorative symbol 8L temporarily stopped and stopped in the decorative symbol stop position indeterminate effect B in FIG. A vertical line passing through the midpoint between the upper side and the lower side of 8L is slightly inclined counterclockwise with respect to the vertical direction in which the reel rotates, and the left decorative pattern 8L is slightly inclined to the left. ing. At this time, when the left decorative design of medium size is stop-displayed with the number "1" in the second sub-variation area CSZ, the left decorative design 8L is stop-displayed with the number "1".

The size of the right decorative symbol 8R temporarily stopped and stopped displayed in the decorative symbol stop position indeterminate effect B of FIG. Although it is slightly larger than the normal size of the pattern 8R, it is smaller than the size of the left decorative pattern 8L. Further, in the game mode of FIG. 61(B), the position where the right decorative design 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed is the center of the right variation display area 8Rr, which is the variation area of the right decorative design 8R. In the decorative design stop position indeterminate effect B of FIG. 61(D), the position where the right decorative design 8R is temporarily stopped and stopped is displayed not in the center of the right fluctuation display area 8Rr, which is the fluctuation area of the right decorative design 8R, but on the right side. It is on the upper left side of the variable display area 8Rr, and the upper part of the right decorative pattern 8R protrudes from the upper side of the right variable display area 8Rr, making it difficult to see. Although the sub-variation area KSZ is provided above the right variation display area 8Rr, since the sub-variation area KSZ is arranged on the frontmost side, part of the right decorative pattern 8R with the number "2" is part of the sub-variation area. It becomes a state covered with KSZ. In addition, the right decorative pattern 8R displayed temporarily and stopped in the game mode of FIG. 61(D), the inclination of the right decorative symbol 8R displayed temporarily and stopped in the decorative symbol stop position indeterminate effect B of FIG. The vertical line passing through the midpoint between the upper side and the lower side of 8R is inclined slightly clockwise with respect to the vertical direction in which the reel rotates, and the right decorative pattern 8R is inclined slightly to the right. there is At this time, when the medium-sized right decorative pattern is stop-displayed with the number "2" in the second sub-variation area CSZ, the right decorative design 8R is stop-displayed with the number "2".

The size of the intermediate decorative symbols 8C temporarily stopped and stopped displayed in the decorative symbol stop position indeterminate effect B of FIG. It is considerably larger than the normal size of the pattern 8C, and larger than the size of the left decorative pattern 8L. Further, in the game mode of FIG. 61(B), the position of the temporary stop display and stop display of the middle decorative pattern 8C is the center of the middle fluctuation display region 8Cr which is the fluctuation region of the middle decorative pattern 8C. In the decorative design stop position indeterminate effect B of FIG. 61(D), the position where the medium decorative design 8C is temporarily stopped and stopped is displayed not in the center of the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr which is the fluctuation area of the medium decorative design 8C, but in the middle. It is below the variable display area 8Cr. In addition, the right decorative pattern 8R displayed temporarily and stopped in the game mode of FIG. 61(D), the inclination of the right decorative symbol 8R displayed temporarily and stopped in the decorative symbol stop position indeterminate effect B of FIG. The vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper side and the lower side are parallel to the vertical direction in which the reel rotates, and the middle decorative pattern 8C is not tilted. At this time, when the medium-sized middle decorative design is stop-displayed with the number "3" in the second sub-variation area CSZ, the middle-size decorative design 8C is stop-displayed with the number "3". Although the counter image CNT is provided on the lower side of the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr, since the counter image CNT is arranged on the frontmost side, part of the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "3" is displayed by the counter image CNT. becomes covered.

In addition, in the present embodiment, a predetermined number of times (10th time) variation performance (variation display) is performed as a variation performance (variation display) by a medium-sized decorative pattern in the second sub-variation area CSZ, and this variation performance (variation display ) is completed, the counter image CNT of "remaining 105" is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a, and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R reappear and are stopped. However, when the decorative symbol stop position indeterminate effect B is started and a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) elapses, the counter image CNT is displayed, and furthermore, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, The left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R may reappear immediately before the right decorative design 8R is stop-displayed. When the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R appear again, the second sub-variation area CSZ disappears from the display screen 7a, and the medium-sized decorative patterns also disappear from the display screen 7a.

A predetermined number of times (10 times) of variable performance (variable display) is completed, and then a predetermined number of times (10 times) + 1 time (that is, 11th time) of variable performance (variable display) is started, and a medium-sized left decorative pattern, When the variable effect (variable display) is started so that the middle decorative pattern of the medium size and the right decorative pattern of the medium size rotate at the same timing, the second sub-variation area CSZ is displayed as shown in FIG. 61(E). disappears from the display screen 7a, the medium-sized decorative pattern also disappears from the display screen 7a, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R respectively emit light to correspond to the left fluctuation display area 8Lr and the middle fluctuation display area. 8Cr, a variable effect (variable display) is performed so that the reels rotate downward in the right variable display area 8Rr, and the counter image CNT is updated to "104 left" and displayed. In other words, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R start to show a variable effect (variable display) at the same timing as the left decorative pattern of the medium size, the middle decorative pattern of the medium size, and the right decorative pattern of the medium size. . The left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are stop-displayed at the same timing.

At this time, in the decorative symbol stop position indeterminate effect B, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R fluctuating effect (fluctuation display) is the same as the left decorative symbol in the game mode shown in FIGS. This display mode is different from the variable performance (variable display) of the decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. 61 (A), (B) in the game mode shown in the variable performance (variable display) of each decorative pattern, as described above, number "1" → number "2" → number "3" → Number "4" → number "5" → number "6" → number "7" → number "8" → number "9" → number "1" → number "2" →... The reels rotate in this order. In contrast to the variable display (variable display) in the display mode, in the decorative design stop position indeterminate performance B, when the variable performance (variable display) of each decorative design that is stopped and displayed is started, each decorative design is displayed. After emitting light, each decorative pattern is fluctuated downward in the variable display area, or each decorative pattern is fluctuated downward in the variable display area while emitting light, and then stopped and displayed. A number following each decorative pattern does not appear, and a random number appears opaque as a number following each decorative pattern and is stopped and displayed. This is caused by the disappearance of the second sub-variable area CSZ from the display screen 7a and the disappearance of the medium-sized decorative patterns from the display screen 7a, as if the random numbers were one number following each decorative pattern. It is possible to realize a display mode in which the image suddenly appears while being opaque and is stopped.

Specifically, when the variable effect (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number “1” stopped and displayed in FIG. 61(D) is started, the left decorative pattern 8L emits light, ), the number ``2'' following the number ``1'' of the left decorative pattern 8L stopped and displayed appears opaque and is not stopped and displayed as the left decorative pattern 8L in FIG. ” appears opaque and stops. Further, the size of the left decorative pattern 8L temporarily stopped and stopped in FIG. 61(E) is larger than the size of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "1" stopped and displayed in FIG. 61(D). It's becoming Furthermore, in FIG. 61(D), the position of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "1" stopped and displayed is the upper right side of the left variable display area 8Lr, whereas the variable effect (variable display) is started. 61(E), the position of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "4" stopped and displayed is not on the upper right side of the left fluctuation display area 8Lr but on the lower side of the left fluctuation display area 8Lr. Further, in FIG. 61(D), the inclination of the left decorative symbol 8L displayed temporarily and stopped is such that the vertical line passing through the midpoint between the upper side and the lower side of the left decorative symbol 8L is in the vertical direction of the reel rotation. On the other hand, the angle is slightly tilted counterclockwise, and the left decorative pattern 8L is slightly tilted to the left. The inclination of the pattern 8L is such that a vertical line passing through the midpoint between the upper side and the lower side of the left decorative pattern 8L is parallel to the vertical direction in which the reel rotates.

When the variable effect (variable display) of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "2" stopped and displayed in FIG. 61(D) is started, the right decorative pattern 8R emits light and is stopped and displayed in FIG. However, the number "3" following the number "2" of the right decorative pattern 8R appears opaque and is not stopped and displayed as the right decorative pattern 8R in FIG. 61(E), and the random number "5" remains opaque. Appears and stops. Furthermore, the size of the right decorative pattern 8R temporarily stopped and stopped in FIG. 61(E) is considerably larger than the size of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "2" stopped and displayed in FIG. 61(D). It is larger than the size of the left decorative pattern 8L. Further, in FIG. 61(D), the position of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "2" stopped and displayed is the upper left side of the right variable display area 8Rr, whereas the variable effect (variable display) is started. 61(E), the position of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "5" stopped and displayed is not on the upper left side of the right fluctuating display region 8Rr, but on the upper center side of the right fluctuating display region 8Rr. An upper part and a right part of 8R protrude from the upper side and the right side of the right fluctuation display region 8Rr, respectively, and are difficult to see. Further, in FIG. 61(D), the inclination of the right decorative pattern 8R displayed temporarily and stopped is such that the vertical line passing through the midpoint between the upper side and the lower side of the right decorative pattern 8R is in the vertical direction in which the reel rotates. On the other hand, the right decorative pattern 8R is slightly tilted clockwise, and the right decorative pattern 8R is slightly tilted to the right. The inclination of the right decorative pattern 8R is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper side and the lower side of the right decorative pattern 8R are greatly inclined counterclockwise with respect to the vertical direction in which the reel rotates, and the right decorative pattern 8R is tilted to the left. It is in a state of being greatly tilted in the direction.

When the moving effect (variable display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "3" stopped and displayed in FIG. 61(D) is started, the middle decorative pattern 8C emits light and is stopped and displayed in FIG. 61(D). However, the number "4" following the number "3" of the middle decorative pattern 8C appears opaque and is not stopped and displayed as the middle decorative pattern 8C in FIG. 61(E), and the random number "1" remains opaque. Appears and stops. Further, the size of the middle decorative pattern 8C displayed temporarily and stopped in FIG. It is considerably smaller than the normal size, and is considerably smaller than the normal size. Further, in FIG. 61(D), the position of the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "3" stopped and displayed is below the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr, whereas the fluctuation effect (variation display) is started. 61(E), the position of the middle decoration pattern 8C of the number "1" stopped and displayed is not on the lower side of the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr, but slightly to the left of the center of the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr. Further, in FIG. 61(D), the inclination of the middle decorative pattern 8C displayed temporarily and stopped is such that the vertical line passing through the midpoint between the upper side and the lower side of the middle decorative pattern 8C is aligned with the vertical direction in which the reel rotates. In contrast to the parallel state, the inclination of the middle decorative pattern 8C displayed temporarily and stopped in FIG. The line is slightly inclined counterclockwise with respect to the vertical direction in which the reel rotates, and the middle decorative pattern 8C is slightly inclined leftward.

When a predetermined number of times (10 times) + 1st time (i.e., 11th time) variation performance (variation display) is started as a variation performance (variation display) by medium-sized decorative symbols in the second sub-variation area CSZ, "There is still more...・” is displayed so that the message image telop TP2 is parallel to the upper side of the display screen 7a, and a plurality of (three telops TP2 in this case) are displayed moving from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a in the display mode of the telop. . The telop TP2 is white, and for other colors (e.g., blue, red, and rainbow colors), the expectation of winning is higher than that of white (e.g., the expectation of winning is lowest for white). , increasing in order of blue, red, and rainbow). The vertical dimension of the telop TP2 is about twice as large as the vertical dimension of the sub-variation area KSZ (or the reserved number display area HS). The area where the telop TP2 is moved and displayed is between the lower side of the area where the telop TP1 is moved and displayed and the upper side of the background image for the counter image. It straddles the variable display area 8Lr, the middle variable display area 8Cr that is the variable area for the middle decorative design 8C, and the right variable display area 8Rr that is the variable area for the right decorative design 8R. By arranging the telop TP2 on the frontmost side, even when the telop TP2 straddles the right fluctuation display area 8Rr, the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr, and the left fluctuation display area 8Lr, the telop TP2 is displayed in the right decoration. The telop TP2 is not blocked by the right decorative pattern 8R, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the left decorative pattern 8L which are arranged in front of the pattern 8R, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the left decorative pattern 8L. In this respect, the above-mentioned telop TP1 is arranged behind the sub-variation area KSZ and the pending number display area HS, and the telop TP1 is blocked by the sub-variation area KSZ and the pending number display area HS.

The telop TP2 is different from the telop TP1 in that once it reaches the left side of the display screen 7a, it does not appear again from the right side of the display screen 7a. The plurality of telops TP2 may be set to have different moving speeds, or may be set to have the same speed. Some fluctuations reach the left side of the display screen 7a and disappear. Some of them disappear after reaching the left side of the display screen 7a.

In addition, when the telop TP2 appears from the right side of the display screen 7a and is displayed moving toward the left side of the display screen 7a, it may suddenly disappear in the middle of the display, or it may become particles and gradually disappear. In some cases, the image information is missing (for example, the image is divided into small blocks, and the image is arranged irregularly and becomes an unclear image), resulting in a display mode that is difficult to read. In that the above-mentioned telop TP1 does not suddenly disappear in the middle when it is displayed moving from the right side of the display screen 7a toward the left side along the upper side of the display screen 7a, and it does not become grainy. It is different in that it does not disappear gradually and does not show a display mode in which image information is missing.

Also, the telop TP2 may be moved and displayed at the same constant speed as the telop TP1 (telop TP1 speed), or may be displayed at a faster constant speed than the telop TP1 constant speed (telop TP1 speed). It may be displayed moving, or may be displayed moving at a constant speed slower than the constant speed of the telop TP1 (speed for telop TP1). Also, the telop TP2 may be accelerated when displayed moving from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a, and when displayed moving from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a. The speed may be decelerated, and the speed may be accelerated or decelerated while the display is moving from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a. This point is also different from the telop TP1 described above.

Also, when the telop TP2 appears from the right side of the display screen 7a and is displayed moving toward the left side of the display screen 7a, it may suddenly stop in the middle, or it may slow down and stop. . When the telop TP2 stops, it may explode and simply disappear from the display screen 7a, or the display screen 7a may become a blackout (dark screen), which will be described later, and then the win-loss result may be displayed. This point is also different from the telop TP1 described above.

In addition, when the telop TP2 appears from the right side of the display screen 7a and is displayed moving toward the left side of the display screen 7a, the typeface may change in the middle (for example, all characters of the telop TP2 or a single change the font of some characters, change all or some of the characters in the telop TP2 to bold, change all or some of the characters in the telop TP2 to thin, or change all or some of the characters in the telop TP2 change the size of all or some of the characters in telop TP2 to italic, change the size of all or some of the characters in telop TP2 to be smaller, or change the size of all or some of the characters in telop TP2 to be smaller. all or part of the characters of the telop TP2 are underlined), and the contents may change to other contents. This point is also different from the telop TP1 described above.

In addition, when the telop TP2 appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, the vertical dimension of the telop TP2 is about twice as large as the vertical dimension of the sub-variation area KSZ (or the pending number display area HS). However, if the vertical dimension of the telop TP2 is more than double the vertical dimension of the sub-variation area KSZ (or the pending number display area HS) and displayed in a moving manner There is a case where the vertical distance dimension of the telop TP2 is less than twice the vertical distance dimension of the sub-variation area KSZ (or the reserved number display area HS) and displayed in a moving manner. In addition, when the telop TP2 is moved and displayed such that the vertical dimension of the telop TP2 exceeds about twice the vertical dimension of the sub-variation area KSZ (or the pending number display area HS), It may be red or rainbow colored. This point is also different from the telop TP1 described above.

There are a plurality of contents of the telop TP2, which the player can select and set by operating the effect button 63.例文帳に追加As the content of the telop TP2, for example, one of a plurality of characters representing the world view of the game machine is selected and set, and the content of the comment by this selected character, or the decorative pattern stop position undefined effect B , or contents of comments by a plurality of people expressing the world view of the background image of the decorative pattern stop position indeterminate effect B. Of course, display and non-display of the telop TP2 can also be selectively set. Such selection setting may be performed in the setting mode while the player is playing the game, or may be performed in the setting mode in the customer waiting state (player waiting state). .

In the decorative pattern stop position indeterminate effect B, since the variation icon 9C and the pending icon 9A disappear from the display screen 7a, it is not possible to change the display mode of the variation icon 9C to notify the degree of expectation of the big win with respect to the variation. , the degree of expectation for winning cannot be suggested by changing the display mode of the pending icon 9A by the look-ahead effect. Therefore, in the decorative pattern stop position indeterminate effect B, the degree of expectation for winning can be suggested by variously changing the display mode of the telop TP2. The telop TP1 notifies the player of the "A mode" and does not convey other information to the player. For this reason, the telop TP2, which can suggest the player's expectation of winning, is arranged in front of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, whereas it is called "A mode". A telop TP1 which does not convey information other than information to the player is arranged behind the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R. In addition, in the decorative pattern stop position indeterminate effect B, the background image dedicated to the A mode is displayed as the background image. Therefore, when a plurality of types of A-mode-dedicated background images are prepared, an A-mode-dedicated background image corresponding to the expected degree of winning may be displayed.

Thus, unlike the telop TP1, the telop TP2 has a wide variety of effects, and suppresses the decrease in the player's desire to play the decorative pattern stop position indeterminate effect B, which is the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative patterns. are able to contribute.

A predetermined number of times (10 times) + 1st time (that is, 11th time) of the variable performance (variable display) is completed, and then a predetermined number of times (10 times) + 2nd time (that is, 12th time) of variable performance (variable display) is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 61(F), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R respectively emit light, and the corresponding left fluctuation display area 8Lr, middle fluctuation display area 8Cr, and right fluctuation display area are displayed. At 8Rr, a variable effect (variable display) is performed so that the reels rotate downward, and the counter image CNT is updated and displayed as "remaining 103".

At this time, in the decorative design stop position indeterminate production B, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are variable effects (variable display), as described above, one random number follows each decorative design. It appears opaque as a number and is displayed stopped. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stop-displayed at the same timing when the variable effect (variable display) is started at the same timing.

Specifically, when the variable effect (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "4" stopped and displayed in FIG. ), the number "5" following the number "4" of the left decorative pattern 8L stopped and displayed appears opaque and is not stopped and displayed as the left decorative pattern 8L in FIG. ” appears opaque and stops. Further, the size of the left decorative pattern 8L temporarily stopped and stopped in FIG. 61(F) is slightly smaller than the size of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "4" stopped and displayed in FIG. 61(E). Although it is smaller, it is larger than the normal size. Furthermore, in FIG. 61(E), the position of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "4" stopped and displayed is below the left variable display area 8Lr, whereas the variable effect (variable display) is started. 61(F), the position of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "6" stopped and displayed is not at the bottom of the left fluctuation display area 8Lr but at the center of the left fluctuation display area 8Lr. Further, in FIG. 61(E), the inclination of the left decorative symbol 8L displayed temporarily and stopped is such that the vertical line passing through the midpoint between the upper side and the lower side of the left decorative symbol 8L is aligned with the vertical direction in which the reel rotates. In contrast to the parallel state, the inclination of the left decorative pattern 8L displayed temporarily and stopped in FIG. The line is at an angle greatly inclined counterclockwise with respect to the vertical direction in which the reel rotates, and the left decorative pattern 8L is greatly inclined to the left.

When the variable effect (variable display) of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "5" stopped and displayed in FIG. 61(E) is started, the right decorative pattern 8R emits light and is stopped and displayed in FIG. However, the number "6" following the number "5" of the right decorative pattern 8R appears opaque and is not stopped and displayed as the right decorative pattern 8R in FIG. 61(F), and the random number "8" remains opaque. Appears and stops. Furthermore, the size of the right decorative pattern 8R temporarily stopped and stopped in FIG. 61(F) is considerably larger than the size of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "5" stopped and displayed in FIG. 61(E). It is smaller and smaller than the normal size. Further, in FIG. 61(E), the position of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "5" stopped and displayed is near the upper center of the right variable display area 8Rr, whereas the variable effect (variable display) is started. In FIG. 61(F), the position of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "8" stopped and displayed is not near the upper center of the right fluctuation display area 8Rr but slightly above the center of the right fluctuation display area 8Rr. Further, in FIG. 61(E), the inclination of the right decorative pattern 8R displayed temporarily and stopped is such that the vertical line passing through the midpoint between the upper side and the lower side of the right decorative pattern 8R is in the vertical direction in which the reel rotates. On the other hand, the angle is greatly inclined counterclockwise, and the right decorative pattern 8R is greatly inclined to the left. The inclination of the pattern 8R is such that a vertical line passing through the midpoint between the upper side and the lower side of the right decorative pattern 8R is parallel to the vertical direction in which the reel rotates.

When the moving effect (variable display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "1" stopped and displayed in FIG. 61(E) is started, the middle decorative pattern 8C emits light and is stopped and displayed in FIG. However, the number "2" following the number "1" of the middle decorative pattern 8C appears opaque, and is not stopped and displayed as the middle decorative pattern 8C in FIG. 61(F), and the random number "8" remains opaque. Appears and stops. Furthermore, the size of the middle decorative pattern 8C displayed temporarily and stopped in FIG. , and is larger than the size of the left decorative pattern 8L. Furthermore, in FIG. 61(E), the position of the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "1" stopped and displayed is slightly to the left of the center of the middle variable display area 8Cr, whereas the variable effect (variable display) is started. In FIG. 61(F), the position of the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" stopped and displayed is not slightly to the left of the center of the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr, but to the upper right side of the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr. A part of the upper side of the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" protrudes from the upper side of the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr and is difficult to see, and the right side of the middle decoration pattern 8C of the number "8" crosses the right side of the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr. It jumps over and straddles the right fluctuation display area 8Rr. Therefore, part of the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" and the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "8" overlap. In other words, the direction in which the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" is changed (variation display) of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "8" (the right decorative pattern 8R fluctuates toward the bottom of the right fluctuation display area 8Rr direction (moving direction)) is displayed (the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "8" is displayed in the direction in which the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" is changed (variably displayed) (the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed in the middle) displayed in a direction (moving direction) that fluctuates toward the lower side of the region 8Cr). Here, since the size of the middle decorative pattern 8C is larger than the size of the right decorative pattern 8R, the anteroposterior relationship between the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" and the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "8" is , the middle decorative pattern 8C of the large number "8" is arranged in front of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "8", and the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" is the number "8". It is a display mode that covers a part of the right decorative pattern 8R. Further, in FIG. 61(E), the inclination of the middle decorative pattern 8C displayed temporarily and stopped is such that the vertical line passing through the midpoint between the upper side and the lower side of the middle decorative pattern 8C is in the vertical direction in which the reel rotates. On the other hand, the angle is slightly tilted counterclockwise, and the middle decorative pattern 8R is slightly tilted leftward, whereas the middle decoration that is temporarily stopped and stopped is displayed in FIG. 61(F). The tilt of the pattern 8C is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the middle decorative pattern 8C are inclined slightly clockwise with respect to the vertical direction in which the reel rotates, and the middle decorative pattern 8C is to the right. It is in a state of being slightly tilted in the direction.

A predetermined number of times (10 times) + 2nd time (that is, 12th time) of variable performance (variation display) is completed, and then a predetermined number of times (10 times) + 3rd time (that is, 13th time) of variable performance (variation display) is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 61(G), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R respectively emit light, and the corresponding left fluctuation display area 8Lr, middle fluctuation display area 8Cr, and right fluctuation display area are displayed. At 8Rr, a variable effect (variable display) is performed so that the reels rotate downward, and the counter image CNT is updated and displayed to "remaining 102".

At this time, in the decorative design stop position indeterminate production B, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are variable effects (variable display), as described above, one random number follows each decorative design. It appears opaque as a number and is displayed stopped. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stop-displayed at the same timing when the variable effect (variable display) is started at the same timing.

Specifically, when the variable effect (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number “6” stopped and displayed in FIG. 61(F) is started, the left decorative pattern 8L emits light, ), the number "7" following the number "6" of the left decorative pattern 8L stopped and displayed appears opaque and is not stopped and displayed as the left decorative pattern 8L in FIG. ” appears opaque and stops. Further, the size of the left decorative pattern 8L temporarily stopped and stopped in FIG. 61(G) is slightly smaller than the size of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "6" stopped and displayed in FIG. 61(F). Although it is smaller, it is larger than the normal size. Further, in FIG. 61(F), the position of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "6" stopped and displayed is the center of the left variable display area 8Lr, but the variable effect (variable display) is started, In FIG. 61(G), the position of the left decorative design 8L of the number "1" stopped and displayed is not in the center of the left variable display region 8Lr but on the upper left side of the left variable display region 8Lr, and above the left decorative design 8L. A part of it protrudes from the upper side of the left fluctuation display area 8Lr and is difficult to see. Although the pending number display area HS is provided on the upper left side of the left fluctuation display area 8Lr, since the left fluctuation display area 8Lr is arranged on the frontmost side, part of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "1" is It will be in a state covered with the number of pending display area HS. Further, in FIG. 61(F), the inclination of the left decorative symbol 8L displayed temporarily and stopped is such that the vertical line passing through the midpoint between the upper side and the lower side of the left decorative symbol 8L is in the vertical direction in which the reel rotates. On the other hand, the angle is greatly inclined counterclockwise, and the left decorative pattern 8L is greatly inclined to the left. The tilt of the pattern 8L is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper side and the lower side of the left decorative pattern 8L are greatly tilted clockwise with respect to the vertical direction in which the reel rotates, and the left decorative pattern 8L is tilted to the right. It is in a state of being greatly tilted in the direction.

When the variable effect (variable display) of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "8" stopped and displayed in FIG. 61(F) is started, the right decorative pattern 8R emits light and is stopped and displayed in FIG. However, the number "9" following the number "8" of the right decorative pattern 8R appears opaque and is not stopped and displayed as the right decorative pattern 8R in FIG. 61(G), and the random number "2" remains opaque. Appears and stops. Further, the size of the right decorative pattern 8R temporarily stopped and stopped in FIG. 61(G) is larger than the size of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "8" stopped and displayed in FIG. 61(F). It is slightly larger than the normal size. Further, in FIG. 61(F), the position of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "8" stopped and displayed is slightly to the upper left of the center of the right variable display area 8Rr, whereas the variable effect (variable display) starts. As a result, the position of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "2" stopped and displayed in FIG. 61(G) is not slightly upper left in the center of the right fluctuation display area 8Rr, but lower right of the right fluctuation display area 8Rr. , the lower part of the right decorative pattern 8R protrudes from the lower side of the right variable display region 8Rr, making it difficult to see. Further, in FIG. 61(F), the inclination of the right decorative pattern 8R displayed temporarily and stopped is such that the vertical line passing through the midpoint between the upper side and the lower side of the right decorative pattern 8R is aligned with the vertical direction in which the reel rotates. In contrast to the parallel state, the inclination of the right decorative pattern 8R displayed temporarily and stopped in FIG. The line is slightly inclined counterclockwise with respect to the vertical direction in which the reel rotates, and the right decorative pattern 8R is slightly inclined leftward.

When the moving effect (variable display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" stopped and displayed in FIG. 61(F) starts, the middle decorative pattern 8C emits light and is stopped and displayed in FIG. 61(F). In addition, the number "9" following the number "8" of the middle decorative pattern 8C appears opaque and is not stopped and displayed as the middle decorative pattern 8C in FIG. 61(G), and the random number "7" remains opaque. Appears and stops. Furthermore, the size of the middle decorative pattern 8C displayed temporarily and stopped in FIG. , and is larger than the size of the left decorative pattern 8L. Furthermore, in FIG. 61(F), the position of the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" stopped and displayed is the upper right side of the middle variable display area 8Cr, whereas the variable effect (variable display) is started. 61(G), the position of the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "7" stopped and displayed is not on the upper right side of the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr but on the center right side of the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr, and the number "7" is displayed. The middle decorative pattern 8C jumps over the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr and straddles the right fluctuation display area 8Rr. Furthermore, in FIG. 61(F), the inclination of the middle decorative pattern 8C displayed temporarily and stopped is such that the vertical line passing through the midpoint between the upper side and the lower side of the middle decorative pattern 8C is in the vertical direction in which the reel rotates. On the other hand, the angle is slightly tilted clockwise, and the right decorative pattern 8R is slightly tilted to the right, while the middle decorative pattern displayed temporarily and stopped in FIG. 61(G). As for the inclination of 8C, the vertical line passing through the midpoint between the upper side and the lower side of the middle decorative pattern 8C has an angle greatly inclined clockwise with respect to the vertical direction in which the reel rotates, and the right decorative pattern 8R is to the right. It is in a state of being greatly inclined to

When the predetermined number of times (10 times)+3 times (that is, the 13th time) of the variable effect (variable display) is started, this time the telop TP2, which is the message image "from now on..." is parallel to the upper side of the display screen 7a. It is displayed moving from the right side to the left side of 7a on the display screen in the display mode of the telop. The telop TP2 is white.

A predetermined number of times (10 times) + 3rd time (ie 13th time) of variable performance (variation display) is completed, and then a predetermined number of times (10 times) + 4th time (ie 14th time) of variable performance (variation display) is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 61(H), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R respectively emit light, and the corresponding left fluctuation display area 8Lr, middle fluctuation display area 8Cr, and right fluctuation display area are displayed. At 8Rr, a variable effect (variable display) is performed so that the reels rotate downward, and the counter image CNT is updated and displayed with "101 remaining".

At this time, in the decorative design stop position indeterminate production B, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are variable effects (variable display), as described above, one random number follows each decorative design. It appears opaque as a number and is displayed stopped. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stop-displayed at the same timing when the variable effect (variable display) is started at the same timing.

Specifically, when the variable effect (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number “1” stopped and displayed in FIG. 61(G) is started, the left decorative pattern 8L emits light, ), the number ``2'' following the number ``1'' of the left decorative pattern 8L stopped and displayed appears opaque, and the left decorative pattern 8L is not stopped and displayed in FIG. ” appears opaque and stops. Furthermore, the size of the left decorative pattern 8L temporarily stopped and stopped in FIG. 61(H) is considerably larger than the size of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "1" stopped and displayed in FIG. 61(G). It's smaller and smaller than normal size. Furthermore, in FIG. 61(G), the position of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "1" stopped and displayed is the upper left side of the left variable display area 8Lr, whereas the variable effect (variable display) is started. 61(H), the position of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "9" stopped and displayed is not on the upper left side of the left fluctuation display area 8Lr but on the lower right side of the left fluctuation display area 8Lr. Further, in FIG. 61(G), the inclination of the left decorative symbol 8L displayed temporarily and stopped is such that the vertical line passing through the midpoint between the upper side and the lower side of the left decorative symbol 8L is in the vertical direction in which the reel rotates. On the other hand, the left decorative pattern 8L is greatly tilted clockwise, and the left decorative pattern 8L is greatly tilted rightward, while the left decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and stopped in FIG. The inclination of the left decorative symbol 8L is such that the vertical line passing through the midpoint between the upper side and the lower side of the left decorative symbol 8L is tilted further clockwise with respect to the vertical direction in which the reel rotates. In FIG. 61(G), the tilted state is further tilted to the right.

When the variable effect (variable display) of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "2" stopped and displayed in FIG. 61(G) is started, the right decorative pattern 8R emits light and is stopped and displayed in FIG. However, the number "3" following the number "2" of the right decorative pattern 8R appears opaque and is not stopped and displayed as the right decorative pattern 8R in FIG. 61(H), and the random number "4" remains opaque. Appears and stops. Furthermore, the size of the right decorative symbol 8R that is displayed temporarily and stopped in FIG. 61(H) is considerably larger than the size of the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "2" that is stopped and displayed in FIG. 61(G). It's getting bigger, and it's considerably bigger than the normal size. Further, in FIG. 61(G), the position of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "2" stopped and displayed is the lower right side of the right variable display area 8Rr, whereas the variable effect (variable display) is started. 61(H), the position of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "4" stopped and displayed is not on the lower right side of the right fluctuation display area 8Rr, but on the upper left side of the right fluctuation display area 8Rr. The right decorative pattern 8R of "4" jumps over the right fluctuation display area 8Rr and straddles the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr. Further, in FIG. 61(G), the inclination of the right decorative symbol 8R displayed temporarily and stopped is such that the vertical line passing through the midpoint between the upper side and the lower side of the right decorative symbol 8R is in the vertical direction in which the reel rotates. On the other hand, the angle is slightly tilted counterclockwise, and the right decorative pattern 8R is slightly tilted to the left, whereas the right decoration displayed temporarily and stopped in FIG. 61(H). The inclination of the pattern 8R is such that the vertical line passing through the midpoint between the upper side and the lower side of the right decorative pattern 8R is greatly inclined counterclockwise with respect to the vertical direction in which the reel rotates. It is leaning heavily to the left.

When the moving effect (variation display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "7" stopped and displayed in FIG. 61(G) is started, the middle decorative pattern 8C emits light and is stopped and displayed in FIG. In addition, the number "8" following the number "7" of the middle decorative pattern 8C appears opaque and is not stopped and displayed as the middle decorative pattern 8C in FIG. 61(H), and the random number "3" remains opaque. Appears and stops. Furthermore, the size of the middle decorative pattern 8C displayed temporarily and stopped in FIG. Although it is smaller than the normal size, it is larger than the normal size, and is larger than the size of the left decorative pattern 8L. Furthermore, in FIG. 61(G), the position of the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "7" stopped and displayed is the central right side of the middle variable display area 8Cr, whereas the variable effect (variable display) is started. 61(H), the position of the middle decoration pattern 8C of the number "3" stopped and displayed is not on the center right side of the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr but on the upper right side of the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr. Therefore, part of the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "3" and the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "4" overlap. In other words, the direction in which the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "3" is changed (variation display) of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "4" direction (moving direction)) is displayed (the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "4" is displayed in the direction (variation display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "3" (the middle decorative pattern 8C is medium fluctuation display displayed in a direction (moving direction) that fluctuates toward the lower side of the region 8Cr). Here, since the size of the right decorative design 8R is larger than the size of the middle decorative design 8C, the anteroposterior relationship between the middle decorative design 8C of number "3" and the right decorative design 8R of number "4" is , the right decorative pattern 8R with a large number "4" is arranged in front of the middle decorative pattern 8C with a number "3", and the right decorative pattern 8R with a number "4" is a number "3". It is a display mode that covers a part of the middle decorative pattern 8C. Further, in FIG. 61(G), the inclination of the middle decorative pattern 8C displayed temporarily and stopped is such that the vertical line passing through the midpoint between the upper side and the lower side of the middle decorative pattern 8C is in the vertical direction in which the reel rotates. On the other hand, the angle is greatly inclined clockwise, and the right decorative symbol 8R is greatly inclined to the right, whereas the middle decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped and stopped are displayed in FIG. 61(H). The inclination of 8C is such that a vertical line passing through the midpoint between the upper side and the lower side of the middle decorative pattern 8C is parallel to the vertical direction in which the reel rotates.

After the variable performance (variable display) progresses, the predetermined number of times (10 times) + 54th (that is, 64th) variable performance (variable display) ends, followed by the predetermined number of times (10) + 55th (that is, 65th) When the variable effect (variable display) is started, as shown in FIG. 61(I), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R emit light, respectively, and the corresponding left fluctuation display areas 8Lr, middle In the variable display area 8Cr and the right variable display area 8Rr, a variable effect (variable display) is performed so that the reels rotate downward, and the counter image CNT is updated to "50 left" and displayed.

At this time, in the decorative design stop position indeterminate production B, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are variable effects (variable display), as described above, one random number follows each decorative design. It appears opaque as a number and is displayed stopped. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stop-displayed at the same timing when the variable effect (variable display) is started at the same timing.

Specifically, when the variation effect (variation display) of the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "2" stopped and displayed is started at the 64th time (not shown), the left decorative symbol 8L emits light, and at the 64th time (not shown) The number "3" following the number "2" of the left decorative pattern 8L that has been stopped appears opaque and is not stopped as the left decorative pattern 8L in FIG. Appears opaque and stops. Further, in FIG. 61(I), the size of the left decorative pattern 8L temporarily stopped and stopped is considerably smaller than the size of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "2" stopped and displayed at the 64th time (not shown). It is larger than the normal size of what it is. Further, the position of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "2" stopped and displayed at the 64th time (not shown) is the center of the left variable display area 8Lr. In 61(I), the position of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "4" stopped and displayed is not in the center of the left fluctuation display area 8Lr, but slightly to the lower right side of the center of the left fluctuation display area 8Lr. Further, the inclination of the left decorative symbol 8L temporarily stopped and stopped at the 64th time (not shown) is such that the vertical line passing through the midpoint between the upper side and the lower side of the left decorative symbol 8L is parallel to the vertical direction in which the reel rotates. 61(I), the inclination of the left decorative pattern 8L displayed temporarily and stopped in FIG. However, the angle is slightly inclined counterclockwise with respect to the vertical direction in which the reel rotates, and the left decorative pattern 8L is slightly inclined leftward.

When the variable effect (variable display) of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "3" stopped and displayed at the 64th time (not shown) is started, the right decorative pattern 8R emits light, and the right decorative pattern 8R which is stopped at the 64th time (not shown) is displayed. The number "4" following the number "3" of the decorative pattern 8R appears opaque and is not stopped as the right decorative pattern 8R in FIG. 61(I), and the random number "1" appears opaque. Stop is displayed. Further, in FIG. 61(I), the size of the right decorative pattern 8R temporarily stopped and stopped is considerably smaller than the size of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "3" stopped and displayed at the 64th time (not shown). It is considerably smaller than the normal size. Further, the position of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "3" stopped and displayed at the 64th time (not shown) is the center left side of the right variable display area 8Rr. In FIG. 61(I), the position of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "1" stopped and displayed is not on the center left side of the right fluctuation display area 8Rr but on the upper right side of the right fluctuation display area 8Rr. Although the sub-variation area KSZ is provided above the right variation display area 8Rr, since the sub-variation area KSZ is arranged on the frontmost side, part of the right decorative pattern 8R with the number "1" is part of the sub-variation area. It becomes a state covered with KSZ. Further, the inclination of the right decorative symbol 8R temporarily stopped and stopped at the 64th time (not shown) is such that the vertical line passing through the midpoint between the upper side and the lower side of the right decorative symbol 8R is perpendicular to the vertical direction in which the reel rotates. 61(I), the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and stopped. , the vertical line passing through the midpoint between the upper side and the lower side of the right decorative pattern 8R is at an angle greatly inclined counterclockwise with respect to the vertical direction in which the reel rotates, and the right decorative pattern 8R is directed leftward. It is in a state of being greatly inclined to

When the moving effect (variation display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "6" stopped and displayed at the 64th time (not shown) is started, the middle decorative pattern 8C emits light, and the middle decorative pattern 8C which is stopped at the 64th time (not shown) is started. The number "7" following the number "6" of the decorative pattern 8C appears opaque and is not stopped as the middle decorative pattern 8C in FIG. 61(I), and the random number "5" appears opaque. Stop is displayed. Furthermore, in FIG. 61(I), the size of the middle decorative pattern 8C temporarily stopped and stopped displayed is the same as the size of the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "6" temporarily stopped and stopped displayed at the 64th time (not shown). It is considerably larger than the left decorative pattern 8L. Further, the position of the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "6" stopped and displayed at the 64th time (not shown) is the upper left side of the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr. In FIG. 61(I), the position of the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "5" stopped and displayed is not on the upper left side of the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr but on the center left side of the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr, and the number "5" is displayed. The middle decorative pattern 8C jumps over the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr and straddles the left fluctuation display area 8Lr. Therefore, the middle decorative design 8C of the number "5" and the left decorative design 8L of the number "4" are partially overlapped. In other words, the direction in which the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "5" is changed (variation display) of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "4" (the left decorative pattern 8L fluctuates toward the lower side of the left fluctuation display area 8Lr direction (moving direction)) is displayed (the left decorative pattern 8L of number "4" is displayed in the direction in which the middle decorative pattern 8C of number "5" is variably produced (variable display) (middle decorative design 8C is medium fluctuation display displayed in a direction (moving direction) that fluctuates toward the lower side of the region 8Cr). Here, since the size of the middle decorative pattern 8C is larger than the size of the right decorative pattern 8R, the anteroposterior relationship between the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "5" and the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "4" is , the middle decorative pattern 8C of the large number "5" is arranged in front of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "4", and the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "5" is the number "4". It is a display mode that covers a part of the right decorative pattern 8R. Further, the inclination of the middle decorative pattern 8C displayed temporarily and stopped at the 64th time (not shown) is such that the vertical line passing through the midpoints of the upper side and the lower side of the middle decorative pattern 8C is perpendicular to the vertical direction in which the reel rotates. 61(I), the middle decorative symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and stopped. , the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the middle decorative pattern 8C are at an angle that greatly tilts clockwise with respect to the vertical direction in which the reel rotates, and the right decorative pattern 8R moves rightward. It is heavily tilted.

The predetermined number of times (10 times) + 55th (that is, 65th) variable performance (variation display) is completed, and subsequently, the predetermined number of times (10 times) + 56th (that is, 66th) variation performance (variation display) is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 61(J), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R emit light, respectively, and the corresponding left fluctuation display area 8Lr, middle fluctuation display area 8Cr, and right fluctuation display area are displayed. At 8Rr, a variable effect (variable display) is performed so that the reels rotate downward, and the counter image CNT is updated to "49 left" and displayed.

At this time, in the decorative design stop position indeterminate production B, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are variable effects (variable display), as described above, one random number follows each decorative design. It appears opaque as a number and is displayed stopped. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stop-displayed at the same timing when the variable effect (variable display) is started at the same timing.

Specifically, when the variable effect (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "4" stopped and displayed in FIG. 61(I) is started, the left decorative pattern 8L emits light, ), the number "5" following the number "4" of the left decorative pattern 8L stopped and displayed appears opaque, and the left decorative pattern 8L is not stopped and displayed as a random number "2" in FIG. ” appears opaque and stops. Furthermore, the size of the left decorative pattern 8L temporarily stopped and stopped in FIG. 61(J) is considerably larger than the size of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "4" stopped and displayed in FIG. 61(J). It's getting bigger. Further, in FIG. 61(I), the position of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "4" stopped and displayed is slightly lower right in the center of the left variable display area 8Lr, whereas the variable effect (variable display) is The position of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "2" stopped and displayed in FIG. 61(J) is not at the center or lower right side of the left fluctuation display area 8Lr, but at the upper right side of the left fluctuation display area 8Lr. The left decorative pattern 8L with the number "2" jumps over the left fluctuation display area 8Lr and straddles the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr. Further, in FIG. 61(I), the inclination of the left decorative pattern 8L displayed temporarily and stopped is such that the vertical line passing through the midpoint between the upper side and the lower side of the left decorative pattern 8L is in the vertical direction in which the reel rotates. On the other hand, the angle is slightly tilted counterclockwise, and the left decorative pattern 8L is slightly tilted to the left. The tilt of the left decorative pattern 8L is such that the vertical line passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the left decorative pattern 8L is slightly inclined counterclockwise with respect to the vertical direction in which the reel rotates. is slightly tilted to the left.

When the variable effect (variable display) of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "1" stopped and displayed in FIG. 61(I) is started, the right decorative pattern 8R emits light and is stopped and displayed in FIG. 61(I). However, the number "2" following the number "1" of the right decorative pattern 8R appears opaque and is not stopped and displayed as the right decorative pattern 8R in FIG. 61(J), and the random number "7" remains opaque. Appears and stops. Furthermore, the size of the right decorative symbol 8R temporarily stopped and stopped in FIG. 61(J) is considerably larger than the size of the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "1" stopped and displayed in FIG. 61(I). Although it is larger, it is smaller than the left decorative pattern 8L. Further, in FIG. 61(I), the position of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "1" stopped and displayed is the upper right side of the right variable display area 8Rr, whereas the variable effect (variable display) is started. 61(J), the position of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "7" stopped and displayed is not the upper right side of the right fluctuation display area 8Rr but the lower center of the right fluctuation display area 8Rr. Further, in FIG. 61(I), the inclination of the right decorative symbol 8R displayed temporarily and stopped is such that the vertical line passing through the midpoint between the upper side and the lower side of the right decorative symbol 8R is in the vertical direction in which the reel rotates. On the other hand, the angle is greatly inclined counterclockwise, and the right decorative pattern 8R is greatly inclined to the left. The inclination of the pattern 8R is such that the vertical line passing through the midpoint between the upper side and the lower side of the right decorative pattern 8R is slightly inclined counterclockwise with respect to the vertical direction in which the reel rotates. It is slightly tilted to the left, and compared to the right decorative pattern 8R in FIG. It has become more.

When the moving effect (variable display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "5" stopped and displayed in FIG. 61(I) is started, the middle decorative pattern 8C emits light and is stopped and displayed in FIG. 61(I). In addition, the number "6" following the number "5" of the middle decorative pattern 8C appears opaque and is not stopped and displayed as the middle decorative pattern 8C in FIG. 61(J), and the random number "8" remains opaque. Appears and stops. Furthermore, the size of the middle decorative pattern 8C temporarily stopped and stopped in FIG. It is considerably smaller than the normal size, and it is also smaller than the normal size. Further, in FIG. 61(I), the position of the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "5" stopped and displayed is on the left side of the center of the middle variable display area 8Cr, whereas the variable effect (variable display) is started. In FIG. 61(J), the position of the middle decoration pattern 8C of the number "8" stopped and displayed is not on the center left side of the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr but on the upper left side of the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr. Therefore, part of the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" and the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "2" overlap. In other words, the direction in which the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" is changed (variation display) of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "2" (the left decorative pattern 8L fluctuates toward the lower side of the left fluctuation display area 8Lr direction (advancing direction)) is displayed (left decorative pattern 8L of number "2" is displayed in the direction in which the middle decorative pattern 8C of number "8" is variable (variable display) (middle decorative pattern 8C is medium variable display displayed in a direction (moving direction) that fluctuates toward the lower side of the region 8Cr). Here, since the size of the left decorative pattern 8L is larger than the size of the middle decorative pattern 8C, the anteroposterior relationship between the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" and the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "2" is , the left decorative pattern 8L with the large number "2" is arranged in front of the middle decorative pattern 8C with the number "8", and the left decorative pattern 8L with the number "2" is arranged with the number "8". It is a display mode that covers a part of the middle decorative pattern 8C. Further, in FIG. 61(I), the inclination of the middle decorative pattern 8C displayed temporarily and stopped is such that the vertical line passing through the midpoint between the upper side and the lower side of the middle decorative pattern 8C is in the vertical direction in which the reel rotates. On the other hand, the angle is greatly inclined clockwise, and while the right decorative symbol 8R is greatly inclined rightward, the intermediate decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped and stopped are displayed in FIG. 61(J). The inclination of 8C is such that a vertical line passing through the midpoint between the upper side and the lower side of the middle decorative pattern 8C is parallel to the vertical direction in which the reel rotates.

When the predetermined number of times (10 times) + 56 times (that is, the 66th time) of the variable effect (variable display) is started, this time a message image of "Will it happen soon?" An image, telop TP2, which is a message image of "Ah~, not yet~", is displayed so as to be parallel to the upper side of the display screen 7a, moving from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a in the telop display mode. The telop TP2, which is the message image "Will it happen soon?" is white.

After that, the variable performance (variable display) progresses, and when the predetermined number of times (10 times) + 105th (that is, 115th) variable performance (variable display) is completed, the A mode is ended, and the decorative symbol stop position indeterminate performance B 61(A) and (B), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (fluctuation display). will be performed.

In addition, in the decorative pattern stop position indeterminate production B, the production in the case of "losing without reach" was shown from FIG. 61 (C) to FIG. 61 (J). , the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are not arranged on the same horizontal line and temporarily stopped, and the display screen 7a blacks out (becomes a pitch black screen) and turns white toward the center of the display screen 7a. Shining rays of light converge and eventually disappear, creating a display that looks like an analog TV cathode-ray tube turned off. At this time, the contents of the pending number display area HS and the sub-variation area KSZ are kept displayed. That is, in the sub-variation area KSZ, the variation performance (variation display) by the small left decorative symbol, the small middle decorative symbol, and the small right decorative symbol is continued. This state is maintained until it is time to announce the win/lose result (loss). Then, when it is time to announce the winning result (loss), as shown in FIGS. In the variable display), as described above, a random number appears opaquely as the number following each decorative pattern and is stopped at the same timing.

On the other hand, in the case of a hit, the display screen 7a first blacks out (becomes a pitch-black screen), and then the white shining rays converge toward the center of the display screen 7a, and then disappear. It becomes a display mode as if the power supply of the cathode ray tube of the analog TV was turned off. At this time, the contents of the pending number display area HS and the sub-variation area KSZ are kept displayed. That is, in the sub-variation area KSZ, the variation performance (variation display) by the small left decorative symbol, the small middle decorative symbol, and the small right decorative symbol is continued. After that, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R appear in the center of the left fluctuation display area 8Lr, the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr, and the right fluctuation display area 8Rr, respectively, as a number "7", which is the same. After being temporarily stopped on the horizontal line of , it is stop-displayed, and it becomes a confirmation display that becomes a win as a result of win-lose, and then a win-win game is started. When a hit is reported as a result of winning, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped (determined display), and at the same time, in the sub-variation area KSZ, the small left decorative pattern and the small The middle decorative pattern and the small right decorative pattern are also stopped (determined display) with the same number (number pattern, here the number "7") as the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R. .

In the decorative pattern stop position indeterminate effect B, the longer the period during which the display screen 7a is blacked out (the period during which the screen is completely black), the higher the expectation for winning. Although it is a monotonous screen called blackout (black screen), it can raise the player's expectation and stir it up.

Thus, in the decorative design stop position indeterminate effect B, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are stopped each time the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are fixed and stopped. The position can be changed randomly (irregularly). At this time, when one of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed overlapping with another decorative pattern, for example, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern In the positional relationship between the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R among the pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R, when the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R in FIG. By arranging the middle decorative pattern 8C with a large size on the front side of the right decorative pattern 8R, the middle decorative pattern 8C with a large size covers a part of the right decorative pattern 8R. When the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R are displayed overlapping in FIG. The right decorative pattern 8R with a large width covers a part of the middle decorative pattern 8C. Further, for example, among the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R, regarding the positional relationship between the left decorative design 8L and the middle decorative design 8C, the left decorative design 8L and the middle decorative design 8C are overlapped and displayed, the large middle decorative pattern 8C is arranged in front of the left decorative pattern 8L, so that the large middle decorative pattern 8C partially covers the left decorative pattern 8L. In contrast to the covering display mode, when the left decorative design 8L and the middle decorative design 8C in FIG. By arranging it on the front side, the left decorative pattern 8L having a large size covers a part of the middle decorative pattern 8C. Therefore, in the decorative design stop position indeterminate effect B, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R stop positions each time the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are fixed and stopped. In addition to changing randomly (irregularly), the positional relationship (backward relationship) between the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R, and the positional relationship (backward relation) between the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C Also, since the decorative pattern with a large size changes randomly (irregularly) so that it is on the front side, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are changed (variation display) can be increased. As a result, it is possible to contribute to suppressing a decrease in the player's willingness to play the decorative symbol stop position indeterminate effect B.

Furthermore, in the decorative design stop position indeterminate effect B, the size of the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R is random each time the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are fixed and stopped. It is designed to be able to change (irregularly). Therefore, in the decorative symbol stop position indeterminate effect B, variations for the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are rich in variations (variable display), and the game for the decorative symbol stop position indeterminate effect B is provided. It is possible to contribute to further suppressing the decrease in the player's desire to play.

Furthermore, in the decorative design stop position indeterminate effect B, each time the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R are fixed and stopped, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R are tilted. It can change randomly (irregularly). Therefore, in the decorative design stop position indeterminate effect B, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R have more variations for the variable performance (variable display), and the decorative design stop position indeterminate effect B is more abundant. This can contribute to further suppressing the player's desire to play.

[Decorative pattern stop position indeterminate effect C]
Next, the decorative symbol stop position indeterminate effect C will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol stop position indeterminate effect C. FIG. The decorative pattern stop position indeterminate effect C is performed when the transition is made to the special game mode, and here, the transition from the game mode in the normal game state to the special game mode in the normal game state will be described below. .

First, as shown in FIG. 62(A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, there are vertically long rectangular areas as variable display areas of three decorative patterns (also referred to as "decorative pattern variable areas"). Three areas (that is, areas obtained by equally dividing the display screen 7a into three columns) are provided. The left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed in a display mode in which reels are rotated from the upper side of each variable display area toward the lower side of the display screen 7a. (Composed of number patterns (number "1" to number "9") and various character patterns) starts a variable effect (variable display). Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L starts the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative symbol in a display mode in which the reel rotates from the upper side of the left variable display area 8Lr toward the lower side of the left variable display area 8Lr, The variable performance (variable display) of the decorative design is started in a display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side of the middle variable display area 8Cr toward the lower side of the middle variable display area 8Cr, and the right decorative design 8R is displayed. A variable effect (variable display) of decorative symbols is started in a display mode in which reels are rotated from the upper side of the right variable display area 8Rr toward the lower side of the right variable display area 8Rr. The vertical distance dimension of the left fluctuation display region 8Lr, the vertical distance dimension of the middle fluctuation display region 8Cr, and the vertical distance dimension of the right fluctuation display region 8Rr are the same vertical distance dimension, and the horizontal distance dimension of the left fluctuation display region 8Lr, The horizontal distance dimension of the middle fluctuation display region 8Cr and the horizontal distance dimension of the right fluctuation display region 8Rr are the same horizontal distance dimension.

Each decorative pattern of the stereoscopic image is composed of a number pattern (number "1" to number "9") and a character pattern having a plurality of colors (full color), and the character pattern is the main component. displayed as large. For this reason, the size of the number pattern is smaller than the size of the character pattern attached to the number pattern. It should be noted that the character designs attached to the number designs are all different character designs.

Specifically, for example, the left decorative pattern 8L is configured by adding a character pattern 8Lb to the number "6" pattern 8La having a bright blue color (see FIG. 62B), and the middle decorative pattern 8C is bright. A character pattern 8Cb is attached to a red number "3" pattern 8Ca (see FIG. 62B), and the right decorative pattern 8R is a bright blue number "4" pattern 8Ra with a character pattern. A pattern 8Rb is attached (see FIG. 62(B)).

In the variable production (variable display) of each decorative pattern, all are number “1” → number “2” → number “3” → number “4” → number “5” → number “6” → number “7” → The reels are rotated in the order of number "8"→number "9"→number "1"→number "2"→ .

Designs of numbers (hereinbelow, they may be simply referred to as numbers “X”, where X indicates numbers) are colored. Specifically, among the numbers “1” to “9”, the numbers “1”, numbers “3”, numbers “5”, and numbers “9”, which are odd numbers excluding the number “7”, are bright red. , and the even symbols number "2", number "4", number "6" and number "8" have bright blue and number "7" has yellow (gold color). . The size of the decorative pattern composed of the number pattern and the character pattern is about 3 times the vertical distance of the left fluctuating display area 8Lr (middle fluctuating display area 8Cr, right fluctuating display area 8Rr). 1/1, and the horizontal distance dimension is about 1/2 of the horizontal distance dimension of the left fluctuation display area 8Lr (middle fluctuation display area 8Cr, right fluctuation display area 8Rr). Size. At this time, the size of the number design constituting the decorative design having the normal size is the normal size of the number design. The numbers "1" to "9" are specially created special typefaces (individually created It is formed by a special typeface).

In the game mode in the normal game state, when the variable performance (variable display) of the decorative symbols is started, the statically displayed decorative symbols change from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed. It becomes a display mode that fluctuates at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed temporarily and then stopped). In addition, in the state of the temporary stop display, the decorative pattern is displayed in a mode of slowly moving up and down in small steps.

In addition, on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, a small left decorative pattern, a small medium decorative pattern, and a small right decorative pattern corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed ( A sub-variation area KSZ having a horizontally long rectangular shape for variable display is provided. The background image of the sub-variation area KSZ is fixed to a single color (for example, a dark color (dark color system) or a color close to dark (for example, dark green), and does not change to another color. Sub-variation area KSZ is arranged on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, so although it overlaps with the right fluctuation display area 8Rr which is the fluctuation area of the right decorative pattern 8R, the sub-variation area KSZ is arranged so as to be on the front side. By doing so, the right decorative pattern 8R is arranged behind the sub-variation area KSZ, the sub-variation area KSZ is not blocked by the right decorative pattern 8R, and even if another effect image appears, the other effect image is not displayed. The sub-variation area KSZ is arranged behind the sub-variation area KSZ and is not blocked by other effect images.In other words, the content displayed in the sub-variation area KSZ is highly visible due to the right decorative pattern 8R and other effect images. not be impeded.

The small decorative designs are numeric designs, and are different from the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R (e.g., Mincho). It is unified with other single colors (for example, bright colors (yellow and white)) that have a high contrast with respect to the single color, and does not change to other colors. The small decorative pattern is arranged on the front side of the background image of the sub-variation area KSZ and is always in an opaque state, and even when the variation starts, it does not become translucent and disappears from the display screen 7a. There is no

Unlike the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, the small-sized decorative patterns do not have a variable effect (variable display) in the display mode in which the reels are rotated, and have the same size at the same display position. A variable effect (variable display) is performed by a display mode in which numerical patterns appear one after another in an opaque state.

When the variation performance (variation display) by the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is started, along with this, in the sub-variation area KSZ, the small left decorative pattern, the small medium decorative pattern, and the small is started, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed. All the small right decorative patterns are also stopped and displayed.

A state in which one or more of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed in the same pattern to reach is formed), the small left decorative pattern, the small middle decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern are all in a state where the variable effect (variable display) is continued. More specifically, even if the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small left decorative pattern is continuously displayed (variably displayed), and even if the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small right decorative pattern is displayed. is continued, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, the small left decorative pattern, the small medium decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern are displayed. All the symbols are also stopped and displayed.

When the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed and they are not aligned with the same pattern and are out of alignment, the small left decorative pattern and the small left decorative pattern are displayed. The middle decorative pattern and the small right decorative pattern may be the same patterns as the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R, or may be completely different patterns. Specifically, for example, when the left decorative design 8L is displayed as the number "1", the middle decorative design 8C as the number "2", and the right decorative design 8R as the number "3", the small left decorative design is displayed. The number "1", the small middle decorative pattern is the number "2", the small right decorative pattern is the number "3", the small left decorative pattern is the number "5", and the small medium decoration is displayed. The symbol may be stopped at the number "6" and the small right decorative symbol at the number "7".

On the other hand, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and all the same patterns win, the small left decorative pattern, The small-sized middle decorative pattern and the small-sized right decorative pattern are arranged in the same patterns as the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R.

The change icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, which are currently fluctuating as the completion of the first special figure reservation, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. is displayed (placed) at the variable display position 9Cd (on the rectangular image (pedestal image)). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as the first special figure hold. In this pending display area, pending icons 9A can be displayed (can be placed) at four pending display positions 9Ad (on rectangular images (pedestal images)), and up to four pending icons 9A can be stocked. is now possible. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, toward the left side of the display screen 7a from a position near the variable display position 9Cd. They are linearly arranged and displayed along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the reserved display position 9Ad.

Since the variable display position 9Cd is arranged in the lower center of the display screen 7a and the first reserved display position 9Ad is arranged on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, the variable display position 9Cd and the first reserved display position 9Ad means that although the middle decorative design 8C overlaps with the middle variable display area 8Cr that is the variable area of the middle decorative design 8C, the middle decorative design 8C is arranged behind the variable display position 9Cd and the first reserved display position 9Ad. The variable display position 9Cd and the first reserved display position 9Ad are not blocked by the 8C. However, when another effect image appears, if the other effect image is arranged behind the variable display position 9Cd and the first reserved display position 9Ad, the other effect image causes the variable display position 9Cd and the first reserved display position 9Ad. Although the display position 9Ad is not blocked, if another effect image is arranged in front of the variable display position 9Cd and the first reserved display position 9Ad, the other effect image will cause the variable display position 9Cd and the first The reserved display position 9Ad is blocked.

Since the second reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad are arranged on the lower left side of the display screen 7a, the second reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad are the variation area of the left decorative pattern 8L. Although it overlaps with the left variable display area 8Lr, the left decorative pattern 8L is arranged behind the second reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, and the left decorative pattern 8L moves from the second reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad. 4 The reserved display position 9Ad is not blocked. However, when another effect image appears, if the other effect image is arranged behind the second to fourth reserved display positions 9Ad to 9Ad, the other effect image will cause the second to fourth reserved display positions 9Ad to 4 Although the reserved display position 9Ad is not obstructed, if other effect images are arranged in front of the second reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position is blocked by the other effect images. 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad are blocked.

In this way, among the first reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, the first reserved display position 9Ad overlaps the middle variable display area 8Cr which is the variable area of the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the second reserved display Since the position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad overlap the left variable display area 8Lr which is the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L, the first reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad. A reservation display area as the first special figure reservation is arranged across the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr and the left fluctuation display area 8Lr.

Here, a white spherical variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, and a suspension icon 9A is displayed at the first suspension display position 9Ad to the fourth suspension display position 9Ad. In other words, there are four pending icons that are stocked without being digested. In the following description, during the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative symbols, the game ball enters the first start port 20 and there are three or four pending icons (that is, the number of pending 3 or It is assumed that the game ball does not enter the second starting port 21 while the number of reservations is 4). In addition, when the number of reservations increases, the time (variation time) from the start of the variable effect (variable display) to the end thereof becomes shorter. For example, in the present embodiment, when the number of reservations is 3 or the number of reservations is 4, the change time is 5000 milliseconds (0.5 seconds) in the loss without reach.

Also, on the upper left side of the display screen 7a, facing the above-described sub-variation area KSZ (aligned on the same horizontal line), the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball to the first start port 20 , and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are each displayed as the number of reservations (numbers). The vertical distance dimension of the reserved number display area HS and the vertical distance dimension of the sub-variation area KSZ have the same vertical distance dimension, and the horizontal distance dimension of the reserved number display area HS and the horizontal distance dimension of the sub-variation area KSZ are different. , have the same lateral distance dimension. That is, the shape of the number-of-holds display area HS and the shape of the sub-variation area KSZ are the same.

Unlike the background image of the sub-variation area KSZ, the background image of the pending number display area HS is fixed to be colorless and transparent, and does not become opaque or change to another color. Since the pending number display area HS is arranged on the upper left side of the display screen 7a, although it overlaps with the left fluctuation display area 8Lr which is the fluctuation area of the left decorative pattern 8L, the pending number display area HS is the foremost. By being arranged so as to be on the side, the left decorative pattern 8L is arranged behind the reserved number display area HS, and the reserved number display area HS is not blocked by the left decorative pattern 8L, and other effect images appear. However, other effect images are arranged behind the number-of-holds display area HS, and the number-of-holds display area HS is not blocked by other effect images.

The number of the first special reservation (number of reservations (number)) and the number of the second special reservation (number of reservations (number)) are different from the small decorative pattern font (for example, Gothic). , and is set to a different single color having a high contrast with respect to the single color of the background image of the number-of-holds display area HS, and is not changed to another color. The number of the first special figure reservation (number of reservations (number)) and the number of the second special figure reservations (number of reservations (number)) are placed in front of the background image of the number of reservations display area HS and are always opaque. , and does not disappear from the display screen 7a. Specifically, the number of the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball to the first start port 20 is indicated by blue numbers on the left side of the reservation number display area HS, the entry of the game ball to the second start port 21 The number of the second special figure reservation based on is always displayed with red numbers arranged in a state separated from each other on the right side of the reservation number display area HS. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of held balls, they can be difficult to discriminate among various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and are intuitively easy to understand. In other words, the visibility of the content displayed in the number-of-holds display area HS is not hindered by other effect images. In addition, the blue color that indicates the number of the first special figure reservation is a different color from the bright blue color of the even numbered patterns of numbers "2", numbers "4", numbers "6", and numbers "8" (the same color), but similar colors. The red color of the number of the second special figure reservation is a different color from the bright red of the odd number symbols excluding the number "7", the number "1", the number "3", the number "5", and the number "9". (Not the same color), but similar colors.

Here, to briefly explain the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), there is a difference in the expectation of winning during the lottery corresponding to the icon due to the difference in shape and color. represents. For example, among the four icons, a yellow (gold) star icon, a black sphere icon, a smiling sphere icon, and a white sphere icon, the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest probability of winning. , the black spherical icon has the second highest probability of winning, the smiley spherical icon has the third highest probability of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest probability of winning. The smile sphere icon is further set with a high expectation of winning in the order of, for example, blue→green→red→gold (yellow)→seven colors (rainbow (rich win)).

In the game mode in the normal game state, as shown in FIG. 62(A), the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative symbols is started, and then the left variable display area 8Lr is displayed variably from the upper side to the lower side. The decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the left fluctuation display area 8Lr, and is displayed in a mode of slowly moving up and down in small steps. After that, the right decorative pattern 8R, which is variably displayed in the right variable display area 8Rr from the top to the bottom, is temporarily stopped at the center of the right variable display area 8Rr, and the display mode is such that it slowly moves in the vertical direction. After that, the middle decorative pattern 8C variably displayed from the upper side to the lower side of the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr is temporarily stopped and displayed at the center of the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr, and the display mode is such that it slowly moves up and down.

In addition, in the game mode in the normal game state, a plurality of types of normal game background images are prepared as background images, and the background images are switched as appropriate.

After that, as shown in FIG. 62(B), the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are all stopped and displayed (confirmed display) at the center of their respective variable display areas. 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are arranged on the same horizontal line and stopped (fixed display). Along with this, the change icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

62(C), left decorative symbols 8L, When the middle decorative pattern 8C, the right decorative pattern 8R, the variable display position 9Cd, the first reservation display position 9Ad to the fourth reservation display position 9ad, the variable icon 9C, and all the reservation icons 9A disappear from the display screen 7a, it will be described later. In the second sub-variation area CSZ, a variable effect (variable display) using medium-sized decorative symbols is started, and then the background image is switched from the normal game background image to the A-mode exclusive background image, and a large image is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. A message image MSG, which will be described later, "Enter A mode" is displayed. This A mode is a special game mode. In the A mode, a decorative symbol stop position indeterminate effect C, which is a display mode different from the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative symbols in the game mode in the normal game state shown in FIGS. 62A and 62B, is started. .

The A-mode dedicated background image is a background image different from the normal game background image used as the background image in the game mode in the normal game state, and is a background image exclusively used only in the A mode. Only one A-mode background image may be prepared, or a plurality of types may be prepared.

In the present embodiment, the condition for generating the decorative symbol stop position indeterminate effect C is, for example, that the number of times the variable effect (variable display) is performed without the occurrence of a win is in a normal probability state (non-high probability state, low probability state). , normal state) to occur when it reaches 2.5 to 3 times. Further, in the decorative pattern stop position indeterminate effect C, a predetermined number of variable effects (variable display) are performed. This "predetermined number of times" is, for example, up to 3.8 times the normal probability state (non-high probability state, low probability state, normal state), and is 115 times here.

When the decorative design stop position indefinite effect C is started, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are displayed on the lower left side of the display screen 7a. , and a second sub-variation area CSZ having a horizontally elongated rectangular shape in which a medium-sized right decorative pattern is variably produced (variably displayed). The vertical distance dimension of the second sub-variation area CSZ has a vertical distance dimension about five times larger than the vertical distance dimension of the sub-variation area KSZ, and the horizontal distance dimension of the second sub-variation area CSZ is the sub-variation. The horizontal distance dimension is about five times larger than the horizontal distance dimension of the region KSZ, and the shape is similar.

The sizes of the medium-sized left decorative pattern, the medium-sized medium decorative pattern, and the medium-sized right decorative pattern that are variably produced (variably displayed) in the second sub-variable area CSZ are variably produced (variably displayed) in the sub-variable area KSZ. It is larger than the small left decorative pattern, the small middle decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern (about five times larger), but compared to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. small. In addition, the left decorative pattern of the medium size, the middle decorative pattern of the medium size, and the right decorative pattern of the medium size are different from the left decorative pattern of the small size, the middle decorative pattern of the small size, and the right decorative pattern of the small size. , the right decorative pattern 8R has a smaller shape, a similar shape, and the same color. In other words, the left decorative pattern of the medium size is obtained by reducing the outer shape of the left decorative pattern 8L and has the same color as the left decorative pattern 8L, and the middle decorative pattern of the medium size is obtained by reducing the outer shape of the middle decorative pattern 8C. and has the same color as the middle decorative pattern 8C.

Unlike the background image of the sub-variation area KSZ, the background image of the second sub-variation area CSZ is fixed to be colorless and transparent, and does not become opaque or change to another color. Since the second sub-variation area CSZ is arranged on the lower left side of the display screen 7a, it overlaps with the left variation display area 8Lr which is the variation area of the left decorative pattern 8L. While the sub-variation area CSZ is displayed on the display screen 7a, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R disappear from the display screen 7a. The variable area KSZ is not blocked. In addition, by arranging the second sub-variation area CSZ so as to be on the front side, even if another effect image appears, the other effect image is arranged behind the second sub-variation area CSZ and the other The effect image does not block the second sub-variation area CSZ. In other words, the visibility of the content displayed in the second sub-variation area CSZ is not hindered by the left decorative pattern 8L or other effect images.

Unlike the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, the medium-sized decorative pattern does not perform a variable effect (variable display) in the display mode in which the reels are rotated, and can be displayed at the same display position, for example, the medium-sized decorative pattern. From the left end of the decorative pattern to the right end of the medium-sized decorative pattern, a variable performance (variable display) is performed as if a coin were rotating. The medium-sized decorative patterns, that is, the medium-sized left decorative pattern, the medium-sized middle decorative pattern, and the medium-sized right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed at the same timing when the variable effect (variable display) is started at the same timing. be.

In this embodiment, when the decorative symbol stop position indeterminate effect C in which the variable effect (variable display) is performed up to 115 times is started, the variable effect (variable display) by the medium-sized decorative pattern is started in the second sub-variation area CSZ. and is performed a predetermined number of times (10 times in this embodiment). During the period in which the variation effect (variation display) by the medium-sized decorative pattern is performed for a predetermined number of times (10 times) in the second sub-variable area CSZ, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed. It has disappeared from the screen 7a. In the second sub-variation area CSZ, a variable effect (variable display) with a medium-sized decorative pattern is started, and when the second variable effect (variable display) is being performed, "Enter A mode" having gold (gold color) is displayed. This message image MSG is displayed for a predetermined time (5 seconds in this embodiment) and then disappears from the display screen 7a. ) along the upper side of the display screen 7a in a telop display mode from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a during the period when the decorative pattern stop position indeterminate effect C is performed.

The telop TP1, which is the message image "A mode", has the same color (gold) as the message image MSG "Enter A mode". The area in which the telop TP1 is moved and displayed is a band-shaped area having a predetermined distance dimension from the upper side of the display screen 7a, and is about four times as long as the vertical distance dimension of the sub-variation area KSZ (or the pending number display area HS). have a size. The area where the telop TP1 is moved and displayed overlaps the sub-variation area KSZ and the pending number display area HS, but is arranged so that the sub-variable area KSZ and the pending number display area HS are on the front side as described above. Therefore, the telop TP1 is arranged behind the sub-variation area KSZ and the pending number display area HS, and the sub-variable area KSZ and the pending number display area HS are not blocked by the telop TP1. That is, the visibility of the content displayed in the sub-variation area KSZ and the number-of-holds display area HS is not hindered by the telop TP1.

The area where the telop TP1 is moved and displayed is, as described above, a band-like area having a predetermined distance dimension from the upper side of the display screen 7a, and this area is the left-moving display that is the changing area of the left decorative pattern 8L. It overlaps with the upper area of the area 8Lr, overlaps with the upper area of the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr that is the fluctuation area of the middle decorative design 8C, and overlaps with the upper area of the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr that is the fluctuation area of the right decorative design 8R. It overlaps with the upper region of the variable display region 8Rr. In this embodiment, the areas where the telop TP1 is moved and displayed are arranged behind the left fluctuation display area 8Lr, the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr, and the right fluctuation display area 8Rr. Therefore, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are not obstructed by the area where the telop TP1 is moved and displayed. In other words, the visibility of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is not hindered by the area where the telop TP1 is moved and displayed.

When the telop TP1 is moved and displayed from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a along the upper side of the display screen 7a, the telop TP1 does not suddenly disappear on the way, nor does it disappear gradually due to granulation. The telop TP1 is moved and displayed at a constant telop TP1 speed.

When the decorative symbol stop position indeterminate effect C is performed, and the variable effect (variable display) of the predetermined number of times (10th time) is started as the variable effect (variable display) by the medium-sized decorative symbol in the second sub-variation area CSZ, Immediately before this variable effect (variable display) ends, as shown in FIG. 62(D), a counter image CNT of "remaining 105" is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a. The counter image CNT is arranged in front of the counter image background image having a translucent horizontally long rectangular shape, and the longitudinal dimension of the counter image background image having a translucent horizontally long rectangular shape is The horizontal distance dimension of the counter image background image having a translucent horizontally long rectangular shape, which is about three times as large as the vertical distance dimension of the sub-variation area KSZ (or the pending number display area HS), is It is about six times as large as the horizontal dimension of the variable area KSZ (or the pending number display area HS).

Although the background image for the counter image having a semi-transparent horizontally long rectangular shape overlaps with the middle variation display area 8Cr that is the variation area of the middle decorative pattern 8C, the background image for the counter image is positioned on the frontmost side. , the middle decorative pattern 8C is arranged behind the background image for the counter image, and the counter image CNT arranged in front of the background image for the counter image is not blocked by the middle decorative pattern 8C. Even if a performance image appears, another performance image is arranged behind the background image for the counter image, and the other performance image does not block the counter image CNT arranged in front of the background image for the counter image. That is, the visibility of the counter image CNT arranged in front of the background image for the counter image is not hindered by the middle decorative pattern 8C or other effect images. Since the background image for the counter image is translucent, the area of the background image for the counter image in which the counter image CNT is not arranged (that is, the area of the background image for the counter image that does not correspond to the counter image CNT) is semi-transparent. The middle decorative design 8C and other effect images (background images of the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R) are visible through the transparent background image for the counter image.

In addition, when the counter image CNT "remaining 105" is displayed at the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a, accompanying this (with a slight delay from the start of display of the counter image CNT), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right The decorative pattern 8R appears again and is stopped. At this time, the character pattern 8Lb forming the left decorative pattern 8L, the character pattern 8Cb forming the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the character pattern 8Rb forming the right decorative pattern 8R are not displayed again, and the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed. , the number patterns 8Ca that form the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the number patterns 8Ca that form the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed again. Furthermore, the size of the number pattern 8La that makes up the left decorative pattern 8L, the number pattern 8Ca that makes up the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the number pattern 8Ra that makes up the right decorative pattern 8R are the sizes before they disappear. 62(A), 62(B), the size of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R in the game mode shown in FIGS. 62A and 62B. pattern 8La, the number pattern 8Ca that forms the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the number pattern 8Ra that forms the right decorative pattern 8R are the left decorative pattern 8L in the game mode shown in FIGS. , middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the number pattern 8La constituting the left decorative pattern 8L, the number pattern 8Ca constituting the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decoration. The position where the symbol 8Ra of the numbers constituting the symbol 8R is displayed temporarily and stopped is the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R in the game mode shown in FIGS. 62(A) and (B). It is different from the temporary stop indication and stop indication position.

Specifically, in the decorative symbol stop position indeterminate effect C of FIG. The number pattern 8La constituting the left decorative pattern 8L displayed temporarily and stopped in the mode is larger than the normal size of the number pattern. In the game mode of FIG. 62(B), the position where the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and stopped is the center of the left fluctuation display area 8Lr, which is the fluctuation area of the left decorative pattern 8L. In the decorative design stop position indeterminate effect C of FIG. 62(D), the position where the number design 8La constituting the left decorative design 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed is the left fluctuation display area which is the fluctuation area of the left decorative design 8L. It is not in the center of 8Lr, but on the upper right side of the left variable display area 8Lr, and the upper part of the left decorative pattern 8L protrudes from the upper side of the left variable display area 8Lr, making it difficult to see. In addition, the left decorative symbol 8L displayed temporarily and stopped in the game mode of FIG. 62(D), the number pattern 8La constituting the left decorative pattern 8L temporarily stopped and stopped is displayed in the decorative pattern stop position indeterminate effect C of FIG. 62(D). , the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the number pattern 8La are inclined slightly counterclockwise with respect to the vertical direction in which the reel rotates, forming the left decorative pattern 8L. The figure pattern 8La is slightly tilted to the left. At this time, when the left decorative design of medium size is stop-displayed with the number "1" in the second sub-variation area CSZ, the left decorative design 8L is stop-displayed with the number "1".

The size of the number symbol 8Ra constituting the right decorative symbol 8R displayed temporarily and stopped in the decorative symbol stop position indeterminate effect C of FIG. The number pattern 8Ra constituting the stopped right decorative pattern 8R is slightly larger than the normal size of the number pattern, but smaller than the size of the left decorative pattern 8L. In addition, in the game mode of FIG. 62(B), the position where the right decorative design 8R is temporarily stopped and stopped is displayed in the center of the right fluctuation display area 8Rr, which is the fluctuation area of the right decorative design 8R. In the decorative design stop position indeterminate effect C of FIG. 62(D), the position where the number design 8Ra constituting the right decorative design 8R is temporarily stopped and stopped is the right fluctuation display area, which is the fluctuation area of the right decorative design 8R. It is not in the center of 8Rr but on the upper left side of the right variable display area 8Rr, and the upper part of the right decorative pattern 8R protrudes from the upper side of the right variable display area 8Rr, making it difficult to see. Although the sub-variation area KSZ is provided above the right variation display area 8Rr, since the sub-variation area KSZ is arranged on the frontmost side, part of the right decorative pattern 8R with the number "2" is part of the sub-variation area. It becomes a state covered with KSZ. In addition, the right decorative pattern 8R displayed temporarily and stopped in the game mode of FIG. 62(D), in the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect C of FIG. , the vertical line passing through the midpoint between the upper side and the lower side of the right decorative pattern 8R is inclined slightly clockwise with respect to the vertical direction in which the reel rotates. , the pattern 8Ra is slightly tilted to the right. At this time, when the medium-sized right decorative pattern is stop-displayed with the number "2" in the second sub-variation area CSZ, the right decorative design 8R is stop-displayed with the number "2".

In the decorative symbol stop position indeterminate effect C of FIG. 62(D), the temporary stop display and the size of the number symbol 8Ca constituting the stopped middle decorative symbol 8C are the temporary stop display in the game mode of FIG. 62(B). And the number pattern 8Ca constituting the stopped and displayed middle decorative pattern 8C is considerably larger than the normal size of the number pattern, and is larger than the size of the left decorative pattern 8L. In addition, in the game mode of FIG. 62(B), the position where the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and stopped is displayed in the center of the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr which is the fluctuation area of the middle decoration pattern 8C. In the decorative design stop position indeterminate effect C of FIG. 62(D), the position of the temporary stop display and stop display of the number design 8La constituting the medium decorative design 8C is the middle fluctuation display area which is the fluctuation area of the medium decoration design 8C. It is not in the center of 8Cr, but below the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr. In addition, the right decorative pattern 8R displayed temporarily and stopped in the game mode of FIG. 61(D), in the decorative symbol stop position indeterminate effect C of FIG. The inclination is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper side and the lower side of the right decorative pattern 8R are parallel to the vertical direction in which the reel rotates, and the number patterns 8La constituting the middle decorative pattern 8C are inclined. It is in a state of not being At this time, when the medium-sized middle decorative design is stop-displayed with the number "3" in the second sub-variation area CSZ, the middle-size decorative design 8C is stop-displayed with the number "3". Although the counter image CNT is provided on the lower side of the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr, since the counter image CNT is arranged on the frontmost side, part of the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "3" is displayed by the counter image CNT. becomes covered.

In the present embodiment, a predetermined number of times (10th time) variation performance (variation display) is performed as a variation performance (variation display) by a medium-sized decorative pattern in the second sub-variation area CSZ, and this variation performance (variation display ) is completed, a counter image CNT of "remaining 105" is displayed in the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a. Only the number pattern 8Ra constituting the pattern 8Ca and the right decorative pattern 8R reappeared and was stopped and displayed, but the decorative pattern stop position indeterminate effect C was started and a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) passed. Then, the counter image CNT is displayed, and just before the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stop-displayed, the number pattern 8La and the middle decorative pattern forming the left decorative pattern 8L are displayed. Only the number pattern 8Ca forming the 8C and the number pattern 8Ra forming the right decorative pattern 8R may reappear. When the number pattern 8La forming the left decorative pattern 8L, the number pattern 8Ca forming the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the number pattern 8Ra forming the right decorative pattern 8R appear again, the second sub-variation area CSZ is displayed on the display screen. 7a, and the medium-sized decorative pattern also disappears from the display screen 7a.

Hereinafter, for the convenience of explanation, "the number pattern 8La forming the left decorative pattern 8L" is simply referred to as "the left decorative pattern 8L", and "the number pattern 8Ca forming the middle decorative pattern 8C" is simply referred to as "the middle "Decorative design 8C", and "Numerical design 8Ca constituting the right decorative design 8R" may be simply referred to as "right decorative design 8R".

A predetermined number of times (10 times) of variable performance (variable display) is completed, and then a predetermined number of times (10 times) + 1 time (that is, 11th time) of variable performance (variable display) is started, and a medium-sized left decorative pattern, When the variation effect (variation display) is started so that the middle decorative pattern of the medium size and the right decorative pattern of the medium size rotate at the same timing, the second sub-variation area CSZ is displayed as shown in FIG. 62(E). disappears from the display screen 7a, the medium-sized decorative pattern also disappears from the display screen 7a, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R respectively emit light to correspond to the left fluctuation display area 8Lr and the middle fluctuation display area. 8Cr, a variable effect (variable display) is performed so that the reels rotate downward in the right variable display area 8Rr, and the counter image CNT is updated to "104 left" and displayed. In other words, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R start to show a variable performance (variable display) at the same timing as the left decorative pattern of the medium size, the middle decorative pattern of the medium size, and the right decorative pattern of the medium size. . The left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are stop-displayed at the same timing.

At this time, in the decorative symbol stop position indeterminate effect C, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R fluctuate effect (fluctuation display) is the left decorative symbol in the game mode shown in FIGS. This display mode is different from the variable performance (variable display) of the decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. 62 (A), (B) in the game mode of each decorative pattern in the variable effect (variable display), as described above, number "1" → number "2" → number "3" → Number "4" → number "5" → number "6" → number "7" → number "8" → number "9" → number "1" → number "2" →... The reels rotate in this order. While the variable performance (variable display) is performed in the display mode, in the decorative symbol stop position indeterminate performance C, when the variable performance (variable display) of each of the stationary and displayed decorative symbols is started, each decorative symbol is displayed. After emitting light, each decorative pattern is fluctuated downward in the variable display area, or each decorative pattern is fluctuated downward in the variable display area while emitting light, and then stopped and displayed. A number following each decorative pattern does not appear, and a random number appears opaque as a number following each decorative pattern and is stopped and displayed. This is caused by the disappearance of the second sub-variable area CSZ from the display screen 7a and the disappearance of the medium-sized decorative patterns from the display screen 7a, as if the random numbers were one number following each decorative pattern. It is possible to realize a display mode in which the image suddenly appears while being opaque and is stopped.

Specifically, when the variable effect (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number “1” stopped and displayed in FIG. 62(D) is started, the left decorative pattern 8L emits light, ), the number ``2'' following the number ``1'' of the left decorative pattern 8L stopped and displayed appears opaque, and the left decorative pattern 8L is not stopped and displayed in FIG. ” appears opaque and stops. Further, the size of the left decorative pattern 8L temporarily stopped and stopped in FIG. 62(E) is larger than the size of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "1" stopped and displayed in FIG. 62(D). It's becoming Further, in FIG. 62(D), the position of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "1" stopped and displayed is the upper right side of the left variable display area 8Lr, whereas the variable effect (variable display) is started. 62(E), the position of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "4" stopped and displayed is not on the upper right side of the left fluctuation display area 8Lr but on the lower side of the left fluctuation display area 8Lr. Further, in FIG. 62(D), the inclination of the left decorative pattern 8L displayed temporarily and stopped is such that the vertical line passing through the midpoint between the upper side and the lower side of the left decorative pattern 8L is in the vertical direction in which the reel rotates. On the other hand, the angle is slightly tilted counterclockwise, and the left decorative pattern 8L is slightly tilted to the left. The inclination of the pattern 8L is such that a vertical line passing through the midpoint between the upper side and the lower side of the left decorative pattern 8L is parallel to the vertical direction in which the reel rotates.

When the variable effect (variable display) of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "2" stopped and displayed in FIG. 62(D) is started, the right decorative pattern 8R emits light and is stopped and displayed in FIG. However, the number "3" following the number "2" of the right decorative pattern 8R appears opaque and is not stopped and displayed as the right decorative pattern 8R in FIG. 62(E), and the random number "5" remains opaque. Appears and stops. Furthermore, the size of the right decorative pattern 8R temporarily stopped and stopped in FIG. 62(E) is considerably larger than the size of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "2" stopped and displayed in FIG. 62(D). It is larger than the size of the left decorative pattern 8L. Further, in FIG. 62(D), the position of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "2" stopped and displayed is the upper left side of the right variable display area 8Rr, whereas the variable effect (variable display) is started. 62(E), the position of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "5" stopped and displayed is not on the upper left side of the right fluctuating display region 8Rr, but on the upper center side of the right fluctuating display region 8Rr. An upper part and a right part of 8R protrude from the upper side and the right side of the right fluctuation display region 8Rr, respectively, and are difficult to see. Further, in FIG. 62(D), the inclination of the right decorative pattern 8R displayed temporarily and stopped is such that the vertical line passing through the midpoint between the upper side and the lower side of the right decorative pattern 8R is in the vertical direction in which the reel rotates. On the other hand, the right decorative pattern 8R is slightly tilted clockwise, and the right decorative pattern 8R is slightly tilted to the right. The inclination of the right decorative pattern 8R is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper side and the lower side of the right decorative pattern 8R are greatly inclined counterclockwise with respect to the vertical direction in which the reel rotates, and the right decorative pattern 8R is tilted to the left. It is in a state of being greatly tilted in the direction.

When the moving effect (variable display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "3" stopped and displayed in FIG. 62(D) is started, the middle decorative pattern 8C emits light and is stopped and displayed in FIG. 62(D). However, the number "4" following the number "3" of the middle decorative pattern 8C appears opaque and is not stopped and displayed as the middle decorative pattern 8C in FIG. 62(E), and the random number "1" remains opaque. Appears and stops. Furthermore, the size of the middle decorative pattern 8C displayed temporarily and stopped in FIG. It is considerably smaller than the normal size, and the number pattern is considerably smaller than the normal size. Furthermore, in FIG. 62(D), the position of the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "3" stopped and displayed is below the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr, whereas the fluctuation effect (variation display) is started. 62(E), the position of the middle decoration pattern 8C of the number "1" stopped and displayed is not on the lower side of the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr but slightly to the left of the center of the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr. Further, in FIG. 62(D), the inclination of the middle decorative pattern 8C displayed temporarily and stopped is such that the vertical line passing through the midpoint between the upper side and the lower side of the middle decorative pattern 8C is aligned with the vertical direction in which the reel rotates. In contrast to the parallel state, the inclination of the middle decorative pattern 8C displayed temporarily and stopped in FIG. The line is slightly inclined counterclockwise with respect to the vertical direction in which the reel rotates, and the middle decorative pattern 8C is slightly inclined leftward.

When a predetermined number of times (10 times) + 1st time (i.e., 11th time) variation performance (variation display) is started as a variation performance (variation display) by medium-sized decorative symbols in the second sub-variation area CSZ, "There is still more...・” is displayed so that the message image telop TP2 is parallel to the upper side of the display screen 7a, and a plurality of (three telops TP2 in this case) are displayed moving from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a in the display mode of the telop. . The telop TP2 is white, and for other colors (e.g., blue, red, and rainbow colors), the expectation of winning is higher than that of white (e.g., the expectation of winning is lowest for white). , increasing in order of blue, red, and rainbow). The vertical dimension of the telop TP2 is about twice as large as the vertical dimension of the sub-variation area KSZ (or the reserved number display area HS). The area where the telop TP2 is moved and displayed is between the lower side of the area where the telop TP1 is moved and displayed and the upper side of the background image for the counter image. It straddles the variable display area 8Lr, the middle variable display area 8Cr that is the variable area for the middle decorative design 8C, and the right variable display area 8Rr that is the variable area for the right decorative design 8R. By arranging the telop TP2 on the frontmost side, even when the telop TP2 straddles the right fluctuation display area 8Rr, the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr, and the left fluctuation display area 8Lr, the telop TP2 is displayed in the right decoration. The telop TP2 is not blocked by the right decorative pattern 8R, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the left decorative pattern 8L which are arranged in front of the pattern 8R, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the left decorative pattern 8L. In this respect, the above-mentioned telop TP1 is arranged behind the sub-variation area KSZ and the pending number display area HS, and the telop TP1 is blocked by the sub-variation area KSZ and the pending number display area HS.

The telop TP2 is different from the telop TP1 in that once it reaches the left side of the display screen 7a, it does not appear again from the right side of the display screen 7a. The plurality of telops TP2 may be set to have different moving speeds, or may be set to have the same speed. Some fluctuations reach the left side of the display screen 7a and disappear. Some of them disappear after reaching the left side of the display screen 7a.

Also, when the telop TP2 appears from the right side of the display screen 7a and is displayed moving toward the left side of the display screen 7a, it may suddenly disappear in the middle of the display, or it may disappear gradually as particles. In some cases, the image information is missing (for example, the image is divided into small blocks, and the image is arranged irregularly and becomes an unclear image), resulting in a display mode that is difficult to read. In that the above-mentioned telop TP1 does not suddenly disappear in the middle when it is displayed moving from the right side of the display screen 7a toward the left side along the upper side of the display screen 7a, and it does not become grainy. It is different in that it does not fade away gradually and does not result in a display mode in which image information is missing.

Also, the telop TP2 may be moved and displayed at the same constant speed as the telop TP1 (telop TP1 speed), or may be displayed at a faster constant speed than the telop TP1 constant speed (telop TP1 speed). It may be displayed moving, or may be displayed moving at a constant speed slower than the constant speed of the telop TP1 (speed for telop TP1). Also, the telop TP2 may be accelerated when displayed moving from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a, and when displayed moving from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a. The speed may be decelerated, and the speed may be accelerated or decelerated while the display is moving from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a. This point is also different from the telop TP1 described above.

Also, when the telop TP2 appears from the right side of the display screen 7a and is displayed moving toward the left side of the display screen 7a, it may suddenly stop in the middle, or it may slow down and stop. . When the telop TP2 stops, it may explode and simply disappear from the display screen 7a, or the display screen 7a may become a blackout (dark screen), which will be described later, and then the win-loss result may be displayed. This point is also different from the telop TP1 described above.

In addition, when the telop TP2 appears from the right side of the display screen 7a and is displayed moving toward the left side of the display screen 7a, the typeface may change in the middle (for example, all characters of the telop TP2 or a single change the font of some characters, change all or some of the characters in the telop TP2 to bold, change all or some of the characters in the telop TP2 to thin, or change all or some of the characters in the telop TP2 change the size of all or some of the characters in telop TP2 to italics, change the size of all or some of the characters in telop TP2 significantly, or change the size of all or some of the characters in telop TP2 to be smaller. all or part of the characters of the telop TP2 are underlined), and the contents may change to other contents. This point is also different from the telop TP1 described above.

In addition, when the telop TP2 appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, the vertical dimension of the telop TP2 is approximately twice as large as the vertical dimension of the sub-variation area KSZ (or the pending number display area HS). However, if the vertical dimension of the telop TP2 is more than twice the vertical dimension of the sub-variation area KSZ (or the pending number display area HS) and is moved and displayed In some cases, the vertical distance dimension of the telop TP2 is less than twice the vertical distance dimension of the sub-variation area KSZ (or the reserved number display area HS) and displayed in a moving manner. In addition, when the telop TP2 is moved and displayed such that the vertical dimension of the telop TP2 exceeds about twice the vertical dimension of the sub-variation area KSZ (or the pending number display area HS), It may be red or rainbow colored. This point is also different from the telop TP1 described above.

There are a plurality of contents of the telop TP2, which the player can select and set by operating the effect button 63.例文帳に追加As the content of the telop TP2, for example, one of a plurality of characters representing the world view of the game machine is selected and set, and the content of the comment by this selected character, or the decoration pattern stop position uncertain effect C , or contents of comments by a plurality of people expressing the world view of the background image of the decorative pattern stop position indeterminate effect C. Of course, display and non-display of the telop TP2 can also be selectively set. Such selection setting may be performed in the setting mode while the player is playing the game, or may be performed in the setting mode in the customer waiting state (player waiting state). .

Since the variable icon 9C and the pending icon 9A disappear from the display screen 7a in the decorative pattern stop position indeterminate effect C, it is not possible to change the display mode of the variable icon 9C to notify the degree of expectation for the big win with respect to the variation. , the degree of expectation for winning cannot be suggested by changing the display mode of the pending icon 9A by the look-ahead effect. Therefore, in the decorative pattern stop position indeterminate effect C, the degree of expectation for winning can be suggested by variously changing the display mode of the telop TP2. The telop TP1 notifies the player that the game is in the "A mode" and does not convey other information to the player. For this reason, the telop TP2, which can suggest the player's expectation of winning, is arranged in front of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, whereas it is called "A mode". A telop TP1 which does not convey information other than information to the player is arranged behind the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R. In addition, in the decorative pattern stop position indeterminate effect C, the background image dedicated to the A mode is displayed as the background image. Therefore, when a plurality of types of A-mode-dedicated background images are prepared, an A-mode-dedicated background image corresponding to the degree of expectation of winning may be displayed.

Thus, unlike the telop TP1, the telop TP2 has a wide variety of effects, and suppresses the decrease in the player's willingness to play against the decorative pattern stop position indeterminate effect C, which is the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative patterns. are able to contribute.

A predetermined number of times (10 times) + 1st time (that is, 11th time) of variable performance (variation display) is completed, and then a predetermined number of times (10 times) + 2nd time (that is, 12th time) of variable performance (variation display) is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 62(F), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R respectively emit light, and the corresponding left fluctuation display area 8Lr, middle fluctuation display area 8Cr, and right fluctuation display area are displayed. At 8Rr, a variable effect (variable display) is performed so that the reels rotate downward, and the counter image CNT is updated and displayed to "remaining 103".

At this time, in the decorative design stop position indeterminate production C, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are variable effects (variable display), as described above, one random number follows each decorative design. It appears opaque as a number and is displayed stopped. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stop-displayed at the same timing when the variable effect (variable display) is started at the same timing.

Specifically, when the variable effect (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number “4” stopped and displayed in FIG. 62(E) is started, the left decorative pattern 8L emits light, ), the number ``5'' following the number ``4'' of the left decorative pattern 8L stopped and displayed appears opaque and is not stopped and displayed as the left decorative pattern 8L in FIG. ” appears opaque and stops. Further, the size of the left decorative pattern 8L temporarily stopped and stopped in FIG. 62(F) is slightly smaller than the size of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "4" stopped and displayed in FIG. 62(E). Although it is small, the number pattern is larger than the normal size. Furthermore, in FIG. 62(E), the position of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "4" stopped and displayed is below the left variable display area 8Lr, whereas the variable effect (variable display) is started. 62(F), the position of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "6" stopped and displayed is not at the bottom of the left fluctuation display area 8Lr but at the center of the left fluctuation display area 8Lr. Further, in FIG. 62(E), the inclination of the left decorative pattern 8L displayed temporarily and stopped is such that the vertical line passing through the midpoint between the upper side and the lower side of the left decorative pattern 8L is aligned with the vertical direction in which the reel rotates. In contrast to the parallel state, the inclination of the left decorative pattern 8L displayed temporarily and stopped in FIG. The line is at an angle greatly inclined counterclockwise with respect to the vertical direction in which the reel rotates, and the left decorative pattern 8L is greatly inclined to the left.

When the variable effect (variable display) of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "5" stopped and displayed in FIG. 62(E) is started, the right decorative pattern 8R emits light and is stopped and displayed in FIG. However, the number "6" following the number "5" of the right decorative pattern 8R appears opaque and is not stopped and displayed as the right decorative pattern 8R in FIG. 62(F), and the random number "8" remains opaque. Appears and stops. Furthermore, the size of the right decorative pattern 8R temporarily stopped and stopped in FIG. 62(F) is considerably larger than the size of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "5" stopped and displayed in FIG. 62(E). It's getting smaller, and it's a little smaller than the normal size of the number pattern. Further, in FIG. 62(E), the position of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "5" stopped and displayed is near the upper center of the right variable display area 8Rr, whereas the variable effect (variable display) is started. In FIG. 62(F), the position of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "8" stopped and displayed is not near the upper center of the right fluctuation display area 8Rr, but slightly above the center of the right fluctuation display area 8Rr. Further, in FIG. 62(E), the inclination of the right decorative pattern 8R displayed temporarily and stopped is such that the vertical line passing through the midpoint between the upper side and the lower side of the right decorative pattern 8R is in the vertical direction in which the reel rotates. On the other hand, the angle is greatly inclined counterclockwise, and the right decorative pattern 8R is greatly inclined to the left. The inclination of the pattern 8R is such that a vertical line passing through the midpoint between the upper side and the lower side of the right decorative pattern 8R is parallel to the vertical direction in which the reel rotates.

When the moving effect (variation display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "1" stopped and displayed in FIG. 62(E) is started, the middle decorative pattern 8C emits light and is stopped and displayed in FIG. In addition, the number "2" following the number "1" of the middle decorative pattern 8C appears opaque and is not stopped and displayed as the middle decorative pattern 8C in FIG. 62(F), and the random number "8" remains opaque. Appears and stops. Furthermore, the size of the middle decorative pattern 8C displayed temporarily and stopped in FIG. , and is larger than the size of the left decorative pattern 8L. Further, in FIG. 62(E), the position of the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "1" stopped and displayed is slightly to the left of the center of the middle variable display area 8Cr, whereas the variable effect (variable display) is started. In FIG. 62(F), the position of the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" stopped and displayed is not slightly to the left of the center of the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr, but to the upper right side of the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr. A part of the upper side of the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" protrudes from the upper side of the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr and is difficult to see, and the right side of the middle decoration pattern 8C of the number "8" crosses the right side of the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr. It jumps over and straddles the right fluctuation display area 8Rr. Therefore, part of the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" and the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "8" overlap. In other words, the direction in which the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" is changed (variation display) of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "8" (the right decorative pattern 8R fluctuates toward the bottom of the right fluctuation display area 8Rr direction (moving direction)) is displayed (the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "8" is displayed in the direction in which the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" is changed (variably displayed) (the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed in the middle) displayed in a direction (moving direction) that fluctuates toward the lower side of the region 8Cr). Here, since the size of the middle decorative pattern 8C is larger than the size of the right decorative pattern 8R, the anteroposterior relationship between the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" and the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "8" is , the middle decorative pattern 8C of the large number "8" is arranged in front of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "8", and the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" is the number "8". It is a display mode that covers a part of the right decorative pattern 8R. Furthermore, in FIG. 62(E), the inclination of the middle decorative pattern 8C displayed temporarily and stopped is such that the vertical line passing through the midpoint between the upper side and the lower side of the middle decorative pattern 8C is in the vertical direction in which the reel rotates. On the other hand, the angle is slightly tilted counterclockwise, and the middle decorative pattern 8R is slightly tilted leftward, whereas the middle decoration that is temporarily stopped and stopped is displayed in FIG. 62(F). The tilt of the pattern 8C is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the middle decorative pattern 8C are inclined slightly clockwise with respect to the vertical direction in which the reel rotates, and the middle decorative pattern 8C is to the right. It is in a state of being slightly tilted in the direction.

A predetermined number of times (10 times) + 2nd time (that is, 12th time) of variable performance (variation display) is completed, and then a predetermined number of times (10 times) + 3rd time (that is, 13th time) of variable performance (variation display) is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 62(G), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R respectively emit light, and the corresponding left fluctuation display area 8Lr, middle fluctuation display area 8Cr, and right fluctuation display area are displayed. At 8Rr, a variable effect (variable display) is performed so that the reels rotate downward, and the counter image CNT is updated and displayed to "remaining 102".

At this time, in the decorative design stop position indeterminate production C, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are variable effects (variable display), as described above, one random number follows each decorative design. It appears opaque as a number and is displayed stopped. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stop-displayed at the same timing when the variable effect (variable display) is started at the same timing.

Specifically, when the variable effect (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "6" stopped and displayed in FIG. 62(F) is started, the left decorative pattern 8L emits light, ), the number ``7'' following the number ``6'' of the left decorative pattern 8L stopped and displayed appears opaque and is not stopped and displayed as the left decorative pattern 8L in FIG. ” appears opaque and stops. Further, the size of the left decorative pattern 8L temporarily stopped and stopped in FIG. 62(G) is slightly smaller than the size of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "6" stopped and displayed in FIG. 61(F). Although it is small, the number pattern is larger than the normal size. Further, in FIG. 62(F), the position of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "6" stopped and displayed is the center of the left variable display area 8Lr, but the variable effect (variable display) is started, In FIG. 62(G), the position of the left decorative design 8L of the number "1" stopped and displayed is not in the center of the left variable display region 8Lr but on the upper left side of the left variable display region 8Lr, and above the left decorative design 8L. A part of it protrudes from the upper side of the left fluctuation display area 8Lr and is difficult to see. Although the pending number display area HS is provided on the upper left side of the left fluctuation display area 8Lr, since the left fluctuation display area 8Lr is arranged on the frontmost side, part of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "1" is It will be in a state covered with the number of pending display area HS. Further, in FIG. 62(F), the inclination of the left decorative pattern 8L displayed temporarily and stopped is such that the vertical line passing through the midpoint between the upper side and the lower side of the left decorative pattern 8L is in the vertical direction in which the reel rotates. On the other hand, the angle is greatly inclined counterclockwise, and the left decorative pattern 8L is greatly inclined to the left. The tilt of the pattern 8L is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper side and the lower side of the left decorative pattern 8L are greatly tilted clockwise with respect to the vertical direction in which the reel rotates, and the left decorative pattern 8L is tilted to the right. It is in a state of being greatly tilted in the direction.

When the variable effect (variable display) of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "8" stopped and displayed in FIG. 62(F) is started, the right decorative pattern 8R emits light and is stopped and displayed in FIG. However, the number "9" following the number "8" of the right decorative pattern 8R appears opaque and is not stopped and displayed as the right decorative pattern 8R in FIG. 62(G), and the random number "2" remains opaque. Appears and stops. Further, the size of the right decorative pattern 8R temporarily stopped and stopped in FIG. 62(G) is larger than the size of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "8" stopped and displayed in FIG. 62(F). It is a little larger than the normal size of the number pattern. Further, in FIG. 62(F), the position of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "8" stopped and displayed is slightly upper left of the center of the right variable display area 8Rr, but the variable effect (variable display) starts. In FIG. 62(G), the position of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "2" stopped and displayed is not slightly upper left in the center of the right fluctuation display area 8Rr, but lower right of the right fluctuation display area 8Rr. , the lower part of the right decorative pattern 8R protrudes from the lower side of the right variable display region 8Rr, making it difficult to see. Further, in FIG. 62(F), the inclination of the right decorative pattern 8R displayed temporarily and stopped is such that the vertical line passing through the midpoint between the upper side and the lower side of the right decorative pattern 8R is aligned with the vertical direction in which the reel rotates. In contrast to the parallel state, the inclination of the right decorative pattern 8R displayed temporarily and stopped in FIG. The line is slightly inclined counterclockwise with respect to the vertical direction in which the reel rotates, and the right decorative pattern 8R is slightly inclined leftward.

When the moving effect (variable display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" stopped and displayed in FIG. 62(F) starts, the middle decorative pattern 8C emits light and is stopped and displayed in FIG. 62(F). In addition, the number "9" following the number "8" of the middle decorative pattern 8C appears opaque and is not stopped and displayed as the middle decorative pattern 8C in FIG. 62(G), and the random number "7" remains opaque. Appears and stops. Furthermore, the size of the middle decorative pattern 8C displayed temporarily and stopped in FIG. , and is larger than the size of the left decorative pattern 8L. Furthermore, in FIG. 62(F), the position of the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" stopped and displayed is the upper right side of the middle variable display area 8Cr, whereas the variable effect (variable display) is started. 62(G), the position of the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "7" stopped and displayed is not on the upper right side of the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr but on the center right side of the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr, and the number "7" is displayed. The middle decorative pattern 8C jumps over the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr and straddles the right fluctuation display area 8Rr. Furthermore, in FIG. 62(F), the inclination of the middle decorative pattern 8C displayed temporarily and stopped is such that the vertical line passing through the midpoint between the upper side and the lower side of the middle decorative pattern 8C is in the vertical direction in which the reel rotates. On the other hand, the angle is slightly tilted clockwise, and the right decorative pattern 8R is slightly tilted to the right. As for the inclination of 8C, the vertical line passing through the midpoint between the upper side and the lower side of the middle decorative pattern 8C has an angle greatly inclined clockwise with respect to the vertical direction in which the reel rotates, and the right decorative pattern 8R is to the right. It is in a state of being greatly inclined to

When the predetermined number of times (10 times)+3 times (that is, the 13th time) of the variable effect (variable display) is started, this time the telop TP2, which is the message image "from now on..." is parallel to the upper side of the display screen 7a. , so as to move from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a in a telop display mode. The telop TP2 is white.

A predetermined number of times (10 times) + 3rd time (ie 13th time) of variable performance (variation display) is completed, and then a predetermined number of times (10 times) + 4th time (ie 14th time) of variable performance (variation display) is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 62(H), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R emit light, respectively, and the corresponding left fluctuation display area 8Lr, middle fluctuation display area 8Cr, and right fluctuation display area are displayed. At 8Rr, a variable effect (variable display) is performed so that the reels rotate downward, and the counter image CNT is updated and displayed with "101 remaining".

At this time, in the decorative design stop position indeterminate production C, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are variable effects (variable display), as described above, one random number follows each decorative design. It appears opaque as a number and is displayed stopped. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stop-displayed at the same timing when the variable effect (variable display) is started at the same timing.

Specifically, when the variable effect (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number “1” stopped and displayed in FIG. 62(G) is started, the left decorative pattern 8L emits light, ), the number ``2'' following the number ``1'' of the left decorative pattern 8L stopped and displayed appears opaque, and the left decorative pattern 8L is not stopped and displayed in FIG. ” appears opaque and stops. Furthermore, the size of the left decorative pattern 8L temporarily stopped and stopped in FIG. 62(H) is considerably larger than the size of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "1" stopped and displayed in FIG. 62(G). It's getting smaller, and it's smaller than the number pattern normal size. Further, in FIG. 62(G), the position of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "1" stopped and displayed is the upper left side of the left variable display area 8Lr, whereas the variable effect (variable display) is started. 62(H), the position of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "9" stopped and displayed is not on the upper left side of the left fluctuation display area 8Lr but on the lower right side of the left fluctuation display area 8Lr. Further, in FIG. 62(G), the inclination of the left decorative pattern 8L displayed temporarily and stopped is such that the vertical line passing through the midpoint between the upper side and the lower side of the left decorative pattern 8L is in the vertical direction in which the reel rotates. On the other hand, the left decorative pattern 8L is greatly tilted clockwise, and the left decorative pattern 8L is tilted to the right. The inclination of the left decorative symbol 8L is such that the vertical line passing through the midpoint between the upper side and the lower side of the left decorative symbol 8L is tilted further clockwise with respect to the vertical direction in which the reel rotates. In FIG. 62(G), the tilted state is further tilted to the right.

When the variable effect (variable display) of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "2" stopped and displayed in FIG. 62(G) is started, the right decorative pattern 8R emits light and is stopped and displayed in FIG. However, the number "3" following the number "2" of the right decorative pattern 8R appears opaque and is not stopped and displayed as the right decorative pattern 8R in FIG. 62(H), and the random number "4" remains opaque. Appears and stops. Furthermore, the size of the right decorative symbol 8R temporarily stopped and stopped in FIG. 62(H) is considerably larger than the size of the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "2" stopped and displayed in FIG. 62(G). It's getting bigger, and it's pretty big compared to the normal size of the number pattern. Further, in FIG. 62(G), the position of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "2" stopped and displayed is the lower right side of the right variable display area 8Rr, whereas the variable effect (variable display) is started. 62(H), the position of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "4" stopped and displayed is not on the lower right side of the right fluctuation display area 8Rr, but on the upper left side of the right fluctuation display area 8Rr. The right decorative pattern 8R of "4" jumps over the right fluctuation display area 8Rr and straddles the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr. Further, in FIG. 61(G), the inclination of the right decorative pattern 8R displayed temporarily and stopped is such that the vertical line passing through the midpoint between the upper side and the lower side of the right decorative pattern 8R is in the vertical direction in which the reel rotates. On the other hand, the angle is slightly tilted counterclockwise, and the right decorative pattern 8R is slightly tilted leftward, whereas the right decoration displayed temporarily and stopped in FIG. 61(H). The inclination of the pattern 8R is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper side and the lower side of the right decorative pattern 8R are greatly inclined counterclockwise with respect to the vertical direction in which the reel rotates. It is leaning heavily to the left.

When the moving effect (variable display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "7" stopped and displayed in FIG. 62(G) starts, the middle decorative pattern 8C emits light and is stopped and displayed in FIG. 62(G). In addition, the number "8" following the number "7" of the middle decorative pattern 8C appears opaque and is not stopped and displayed as the middle decorative pattern 8C in FIG. 62(H), and the random number "3" remains opaque. Appears and stops. Furthermore, the size of the middle decorative pattern 8C displayed temporarily and stopped in FIG. Although it is smaller than the number pattern, it is larger than the normal size, and is larger than the size of the left decorative pattern 8L. Further, in FIG. 62(G), the position of the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "7" stopped and displayed is the central right side of the middle variable display area 8Cr, whereas the variable effect (variable display) is started. 62(H), the position of the middle decoration pattern 8C of the number "3" stopped and displayed is not on the center right side of the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr but on the upper right side of the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr. Therefore, part of the middle decorative pattern 8C with the number "3" and the right decorative pattern 8R with the number "4" overlap. In other words, the direction in which the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "3" is changed (variation display) of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "4" direction (moving direction)) is displayed (the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "4" is displayed in the direction (variation display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "3" (the middle decorative pattern 8C is medium fluctuation display displayed in a direction (moving direction) that fluctuates toward the lower side of the region 8Cr). Here, since the size of the right decorative design 8R is larger than the size of the middle decorative design 8C, the anteroposterior relationship between the middle decorative design 8C of number "3" and the right decorative design 8R of number "4" is , the right decorative pattern 8R with a large number "4" is arranged in front of the middle decorative pattern 8C with a number "3", and the right decorative pattern 8R with a number "4" is a number "3". It is a display mode that covers a part of the middle decorative pattern 8C. Furthermore, in FIG. 62(G), the inclination of the middle decorative pattern 8C displayed temporarily and stopped is such that the vertical line passing through the midpoint between the upper side and the lower side of the middle decorative pattern 8C is in the vertical direction in which the reel rotates. On the other hand, the angle is greatly inclined clockwise, and the right decorative symbol 8R is greatly inclined to the right. The inclination of 8C is such that a vertical line passing through the midpoint between the upper side and the lower side of the middle decorative pattern 8C is parallel to the vertical direction in which the reel rotates.

When the predetermined number of times (10 times) + 54 times (that is, the 64th time) of the variable effect (variable display) is started, this time the telop TP2, which is the message image "soon...", is parallel to the upper side of the display screen 7a. A plurality of telops (in this case, six telops TP2) are displayed so as to move from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a in the telop display mode. The telop TP2 is rainbow colored, suggesting that the expectation of winning is high.

After the variable performance (variable display) progresses, the predetermined number of times (10 times) + 54th (that is, 64th) variable performance (variable display) ends, followed by the predetermined number of times (10) + 55th (that is, 65th) When the variable effect (variable display) is started, as shown in FIG. 62(I), the display screen 7a blacks out (becomes a pitch-black screen), and white shining rays converge toward the center of the display screen 7a. The light eventually disappears, making it appear as if the power supply of an analog TV cathode ray tube had been turned off. At this time, the contents of the pending number display area HS and the sub-variation area KSZ are kept displayed. That is, in the sub-variation area KSZ, the variation performance (variation display) by the small left decorative symbol, the small middle decorative symbol, and the small right decorative symbol is continued.

After that, as shown in FIG. 62(J), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in the center of the left fluctuation display area 8Lr, the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr, and the right fluctuation display area 8Rr, respectively. The numbers "7" appear, are lined up on the same horizontal line, are provisionally stopped, and then stop display is performed, so that winning is determined as a winning result, and a winning game is started. When a hit is reported as a result of winning, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped (confirmed display), and at the same time, small left decorative patterns, The small middle decorative pattern and the small right decorative pattern are also stopped (determined display) at the number "7" which is the same number (number pattern) as the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R. be.

After that, when the winning game ends, the A mode is already forcibly ended at this time, the decorative symbol stop position indeterminate effect C is also ended, and when returning to the game mode in the normal game state, FIG. 62 ( As shown in A) and (B), a variable effect (variable display) is performed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R.

In addition, in the decorative pattern stop position indeterminate production C, the production in the case of "losing without reach" is shown in FIGS. 62(C) to 62(H). , the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are not arranged on the same horizontal line and temporarily stopped, and the display screen 7a blacks out (becomes a pitch black screen) and turns white toward the center of the display screen 7a. Shining rays of light converge and eventually disappear, creating a display that looks like an analog TV cathode-ray tube turned off. At this time, the contents of the pending number display area HS and the sub-variation area KSZ are kept displayed. That is, in the sub-variation area KSZ, the variation performance (variation display) by the small left decorative symbol, the small middle decorative symbol, and the small right decorative symbol is continued. This state is maintained until it is time to announce the win/lose result (loss). Then, when it is time to notify the result of winning (losing), as shown in FIGS. In the variable display), as described above, a random number appears opaquely as the number following each decorative pattern and is stopped at the same timing.

In the decorative pattern stop position indeterminate effect C, the longer the period during which the display screen 7a is blacked out (the period during which the screen is completely black), the higher the expectation for winning. Although it is a monotonous screen called blackout (black screen), it can raise the player's expectation and stir it up.

Thus, in the decorative design stop position uncertain effect C, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are stopped each time the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are fixed and stopped. The position can be changed randomly (irregularly). At this time, when one of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed overlapping with another decorative pattern, for example, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern In the positional relationship between the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R among the pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R, when the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R in FIG. By arranging the middle decorative pattern 8C with a large size on the front side of the right decorative pattern 8R, the middle decorative pattern 8C with a large size covers a part of the right decorative pattern 8R. When the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R in FIG. 62(H) are displayed overlapping each other, the large right decorative pattern 8R is arranged in front of the middle decorative pattern 8C. The right decorative pattern 8R with a large width covers a part of the middle decorative pattern 8C. Therefore, in the decorative design stop position indefinite effect C, the stop positions of the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are determined every time the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are fixed and stopped. changes randomly (irregularly), for example, the positional relationship (back-and-forth relationship) between the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R is changed randomly ( Since the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are designed to change irregularly, the variation of the variable performance (variable display) can be increased. As a result, it is possible to contribute to suppressing a decrease in the player's willingness to play the decorative symbol stop position indeterminate effect C.

Furthermore, in the decorative design stop position indeterminate effect C, the size of the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R is random each time the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are fixed and stopped. It is designed to be able to change (irregularly). Therefore, in the decorative symbol stop position indeterminate effect C, there are many variations for the variable effect (variable display) of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R, and the game for the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect C. It is possible to contribute to further suppressing the decrease in the player's desire to play.

Furthermore, in the decorative design stop position indeterminate effect C, the inclination of the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R is also increased each time the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are fixed and stopped. It can change randomly (irregularly). For this reason, in the decorative symbol stop position indeterminate effect C, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R have more variation for the variable effect (variable display), and the decorative symbol stop position indeterminate effect C is more varied. This can contribute to further suppressing the player's desire to play.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the decorative pattern stop position indefinite effect will be shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the decorative symbol stop position uncertain effect A of FIG. 60, the decorative symbol stop position uncertain effect B of FIG. 61, and the decorative symbol stop position uncertain effect C of FIG. Equipped with an image display device 7 (display means) capable of performing variable presentation (variable display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R (a plurality of patterns), and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R. The stop positions of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (each pattern) can be randomly changed (decorative pattern Figures 60 (C) to (J) for the indeterminate stop position effect A, Figures 61 (C) to (J) for the indeterminate decorative symbol stop position effect B, and Figures 62 (C) to (H) for the indeterminate decorative symbol stop position effect C )) can be executed. According to this configuration, in the first effect, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R stop positions each time the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are fixed and stopped. can change randomly (irregularly), it can contribute to eliminating the monotony of the variable performance (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R.
Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, the first effect in the decorative symbol stop position uncertain effect B of FIG. 61 and the decorative symbol stop position uncertain effect C of FIG. (D) ~ (J), Figure 62 (D) ~ (H) in the decorative design stop position indeterminate effect C) is for each fixed stop of the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R (design) In addition, the size of each pattern can be changed randomly (irregularly). According to this configuration, the sizes of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R confirmed and stopped last time, and the sizes of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R confirmed and stopped this time. and , are designed to change randomly (irregularly), so by using a display mode that emphasizes and stands out the large decorative patterns (patterns), the decorations that have been displayed large so far The background of the pattern (design) gives the player a feeling that it might be some suggestion for the performance that the player will start from now on, and contributes to the player's own idea of the law of the performance.
Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, the first effect in the decorative symbol stop position uncertain effect B of FIG. 61 and the decorative symbol stop position uncertain effect C of FIG. (D) ~ (J), Figure 62 (D) ~ (H) in the decorative design stop position indeterminate effect C) is for each fixed stop of the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R (design) In addition, the inclination of each pattern can be changed irregularly. According to this configuration, the tilt of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R confirmed and stopped last time and the tilt of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R fixed and stopped this time. , and , change at random (irregularly). It can be given to the player and contribute to the idea of the regularity of the production by himself/herself.
In this way, the first effect is the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design each time the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are confirmed and stopped (designation is stopped). The stop position, size, and inclination of 8R (each symbol) can be changed irregularly. Therefore, it is possible to improve interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the first effect (decoration Figures 60 (F), (H) to (J) in the symbol stop position uncertain effect A, Figures 61 (F), (H) to (J) in the decorative symbol stop position uncertain effect B, decorative symbol stop position uncertain effect C FIG. 62 (F), (H)) shows an effect of displaying one symbol overlapping another symbol when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R (symbol) are fixed and stopped. contains. According to this configuration, for example, the central decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are confirmed and displayed so as to overlap each other. It does not exist at all, and it can be a definite display of a novel decorative pattern (design) that has never existed before. This can contribute to making it difficult for the player to feel monotonous even if this continues.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the first effect (decoration Figures 60 (F), (H) to (J) in the symbol stop position uncertain effect A, Figures 61 (F), (H) to (J) in the decorative symbol stop position uncertain effect B, decorative symbol stop position uncertain effect C 62 (F), (H)), when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (symbol) are fixed and stopped, one pattern is displayed in the advancing direction of the other one pattern. Includes performances. Specifically, for example, in the decorative symbol stop position uncertain effect A of FIG. 60 (F), the decorative symbol stop position uncertain effect B of FIG. 61 (F), and the decorative symbol stop position uncertain effect C of FIG. The middle decorative pattern 8C (one pattern) is displayed in the advancing direction of the right decorative pattern 8R (another pattern) (the direction in which the right decorative pattern 8R fluctuates toward the lower side of the right fluctuating display area 8Rr). According to this configuration, a display mode in which a part of one pattern and a part of another one pattern overlap in the vertical direction can be obtained. Also, it is possible to arrange one pattern and another one pattern so that they are not arranged on the same horizontal line.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the first effect (decoration Figures 60 (D) to (J) for the indeterminate symbol stop position effect A, Figures 61 (D) to (J) for the indeterminate decorative symbol stop position effect B, and Figures 62 (D) to (J) for the indeterminate decorative symbol stop position effect C H)) includes a left varying display area 8Lr of the left decorative design 8L, a middle varying display area 8Cr of the middle decorative design 8C, and a right varying display area 8Rr of the right decorative design 8R (each design in a set of symbols for notifying success or failure). The pattern displayed in the variation area) includes an effect in which the display mode changes for each variation. Specifically, for example, in the decorative design stop position indeterminate effect A of FIGS. The stop position changes and the display mode changes, the middle decorative pattern 8C (a set of patterns for notifying success or failure) changes in the middle variation display area 8Cr, the stop position changes and the display mode changes for each fluctuation, and the right decorative pattern 8R (success or failure A set of symbols for informing of ) changes its stop position and display mode for each variation in the right variation display area 8Rr. 61(D) to (J), in the decorative symbol stop position uncertain effect B, the left decorative symbol 8L (a set of symbols for notifying success or failure) is displayed in the left fluctuation display area 8Lr for each variation in the stop position, size, and inclination. changes, the display mode changes, and the middle decorative pattern 8C (a set of patterns for notifying success or failure) changes its stop position, size, and inclination for each fluctuation in the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr, and the display mode changes, and the right decorative pattern changes. 8R (a set of symbols for notifying success or failure) changes its stop position, size, and inclination for each variation in the right variation display area 8Rr, and its display mode changes. In the decorative symbol stop position uncertain effect C of FIGS. 62(D) to (H), the left decorative symbol 8L (a set of symbols for notifying success or failure) is displayed in the left fluctuation display area 8Lr for each variation in the stop position, size, and inclination. changes, the display mode changes, and the middle decorative pattern 8C (a set of patterns for notifying success or failure) changes its stop position, size, and inclination for each fluctuation in the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr, and the display mode changes, and the right decorative pattern changes. 8R (a set of symbols for notifying success or failure) changes its stop position, size, and inclination for each variation in the right variation display area 8Rr, and its display mode changes. According to this configuration, even when the variable effect (variable display) is repeatedly performed and the symbols in the variable area of each symbol are frequently fixed and stopped, the positions, sizes, and inclinations of the symbols to be fixed and stopped. changes randomly (irregularly) in the variation area of each pattern, which contributes to reducing the monotony of the effect due to the fixed and stopped patterns.
Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the first effect in the decorative symbol stop position uncertain effect A of FIG. 60, the decorative symbol stop position uncertain effect B of FIG. 61, and the decorative symbol stop position uncertain effect C of FIG. (Figs. 60 (D), (E), (G), (I) in the decorative pattern stop position uncertain effect A, and Figs. 61 (D), (E), (G), ( (D), (E), and (G) in FIG. 62(D), (E), (G) in the decorative symbol stop position indeterminate effect C) include effects in which the display mode changes each time the same symbol changes. Specifically, for example, in the decorative pattern stop position indeterminate effect A of FIGS. ). According to this configuration, even when the variable effect (variable display) is repeatedly performed and the same pattern is frequently fixed and stopped, the position of the same fixed and stopped pattern changes randomly (irregularly). Therefore, it is possible to contribute to reducing the monotonousness of the performance by the same symbols that are determined and stopped. Also, for example, the decorative symbol stop position indeterminate effect B in FIGS. In C, the display mode is such that the position, size, and inclination of the numeral "1", which is the same pattern, change randomly (irregularly). According to this configuration, even if the variable effect (variable display) is repeated and the same pattern is frequently fixed and stopped, the position, size and inclination of the fixed and stopped same pattern are random. Since they are changed (irregularly), it is possible to contribute to reducing the monotony of the production by the same pattern that is determined and stopped.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the image display device 7 ( display means) can display a message image MSG, a telop TP1, and a telop TP2 (a plurality of types of images) in addition to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (a plurality of patterns); 60 (C) to (J) in the first effect (decorative pattern stop position indeterminate effect A, FIG. 61 (C) to (J) in the decorative pattern stop position indeterminate effect B, and in the decorative pattern stop position indeterminate effect C, the figure 62 (C) to (H)), while the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are fluctuating and fixed (during the pattern fluctuation and when the pattern is fixed and stopped), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (design), the telop TP2 (first image) is moved and displayed, and the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R (design) are displayed. 60 (E), (G), and (J) in the decorative symbol stop position indeterminate effect A, and in the decorative symbol stop position indeterminate effect B 61 (E), (G), (J), and in the decorative symbol stop position indeterminate effect C, (E), (G), (H) in FIG. 62) can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can easily recognize that the telop TP2 (first image) is displayed, and the suggestion by the telop TP2 (first image) can be emphasized in an easy-to-understand manner for the player.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the first effect (decoration Figures 60 (D) to (J) for the indeterminate symbol stop position effect A, Figures 61 (D) to (J) for the indeterminate decorative symbol stop position effect B, and Figures 62 (D) to (J) for the indeterminate decorative symbol stop position effect C H)) temporarily stops the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (a plurality of patterns) at the same timing, and then stops. According to this configuration, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are displayed each time the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are varied (variable display). At the same time, since it is possible to temporarily stop and then confirm and stop, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are changed and displayed as fixed. , the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are images. , the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped, giving the player the impact of "boom", and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are rhythmically displayed. It is possible to contribute to the reduction of monotony by being able to repeat the variable performance (variable display) of the decorative pattern 8R.

[Modification]
Below, a modification of the decorative pattern stop position indefinite effect will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the decorative symbol stop position uncertain effect A of FIG. 60, the decorative symbol stop position uncertain effect B of FIG. 61, and the decorative symbol stop position uncertain effect C of FIG. was to be done. In other words, it was performed in a so-called left-handed game state. However, it may be performed based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 . In other words, it may be performed in a so-called right-handed game state.

[Modification 2]
In the decorative symbol stop position uncertain effect A of FIG. 60, the decorative symbol stop position uncertain effect B of FIG. 61, and the decorative symbol stop position uncertain effect C of FIG. mode), but instead of the normal game state, even if the special game mode (A mode) is performed when moving from the normal game state to the above-described b time reduction (play time) good.

[Modification 3]
In the decorative symbol stop position uncertain effect A of FIG. 60, the decorative symbol stop position uncertain effect B of FIG. 61, and the decorative symbol stop position uncertain effect C of FIG. Among them, any one of the decorative patterns straddles the variable display area corresponding to the other one decorative pattern, but the other one decorative pattern also straddles the variable display area corresponding to the one decorative pattern. good too. Specifically, for example, in the decorative symbol stop position uncertain effect A of FIG. 60 (F), the decorative symbol stop position uncertain effect B of FIG. 61 (F), and the decorative symbol stop position uncertain effect C of FIG. The middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" jumps over the right side of the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr and straddles the right fluctuation display area 8Rr. may jump over the left side of and stride over the medium-variation display region 8Cr. By doing so, it is possible to contribute to increasing the variation of the variation effect (variation display) of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R. In addition, the direction in which the middle decorative pattern 8C of "8" is changed (variation display) of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "8" (the direction in which the right decorative pattern 8R fluctuates toward the lower side of the right fluctuation display area 8Rr) (Advance direction)) (The direction in which the right decorative pattern 8R of "8" is displayed (variable display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" (the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed in the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr) displayed in a direction that fluctuates toward the bottom (direction of travel)).

[Modification 4]
In the decorative symbol stop position uncertain effect A of FIG. 60, the decorative symbol stop position uncertain effect B of FIG. 61, and the decorative symbol stop position uncertain effect C of FIG. Instead, a random number appeared as a number following each decorative pattern while remaining opaque and was stopped. It may be the same decorative pattern, or the decorative pattern stopped and displayed this time may happen to be the decorative pattern that follows the decorative pattern stopped and displayed last time.

[Modification 5]
In the decorative symbol stop position uncertain effect A of FIG. 60, the decorative symbol stop position uncertain effect B of FIG. 61, and the decorative symbol stop position uncertain effect C of FIG. was to be started as, in other words, to be started suddenly. Therefore, an effect may be provided to suggest that the time to start the A mode is approaching. For example, the number of remaining variable effects (variable displays) at which the A mode is started may be displayed as a numerical value in the upper center of the display screen 7a. Specifically, when the number of remaining variable effects (variable displays) reaches 100, which is the timing for starting the A mode, a white message image of "100 more times" is displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a. After that, it is hidden, and when the number of remaining variable effects (variable displays) that is the start time of the A mode reaches 50 times, a blue message image of "50 more times" is displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a. When the number of remaining variable effects (variable displays) at which the A mode is started reaches 25 times, a yellow message image of "25 more times" is displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a and then turned off. When the number of remaining variable performances (variable displays), which is the start time of A mode, reaches 10 times, a red message image of "10 more times" is displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a, and A mode is displayed. is counted down for each change and the message image in red color continues to be displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a until is started. Then, after displaying a red message image "Remaining 0 (zero)" in the upper center of the display screen 7a, immediately before displaying a yellow (gold) message image MSG reading "Enter A mode", "Remaining 0 (zero)" is displayed. 0 (zero)” is hidden. The color of the message image that indicates the number of remaining variable performances (variable displays) at the start of A mode changes in the order of white → blue → yellow → red as the start time of A mode approaches. It is possible to arouse the player's expectations for the A mode.

[Modification 6]
In the decorative symbol stop position uncertain effect B of FIG. 61 and the decorative symbol stop position uncertain effect C of FIG. The stop positions of the pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R change randomly (irregularly), and furthermore, the size of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R, the size of the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern. 8C and the inclination of the stop position of the right decorative pattern 8R changed randomly (irregularly). However, every time the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are fixed and stopped, the stop positions of the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R, the left decorative design 8L, and the middle decorative design The sizes of 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R may be changed randomly (irregularly). By doing so, it is possible to contribute to eliminating the monotony of the variable performance (variable display) of the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R.

[Modification 7]
In the decorative symbol stop position uncertain effect B of FIG. 61 and the decorative symbol stop position uncertain effect C of FIG. The stop positions of the pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R change randomly (irregularly), and furthermore, the size of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R, the size of the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern. 8C and the inclination of the stop position of the right decorative pattern 8R changed randomly (irregularly). However, every time the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are fixed and stopped, the stop positions of the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R, the left decorative design 8L, and the middle decorative design The inclination of 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R may be changed randomly (irregularly). By doing so, it is possible to contribute to eliminating the monotony of the variable performance (variable display) of the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R.

[Modification 8]
In the decorative symbol stop position uncertain effect A of FIG. 60, the decorative symbol stop position uncertain effect B of FIG. 61, and the decorative symbol stop position uncertain effect C of FIG. Since the probability cannot be suggested, the degree of expectation for the big win can be suggested by variously changing the display mode of the telop TP2. For the pending icon 9A, for example, a smiling sphere icon is set with a high expectation of a big win in the order of blue→green→red→gold (yellow)→seven colors (rainbow (rich big win)). Therefore, the expectation of a big win may be set high in the order of blue→green→red→gold (yellow)→seven colors (rainbow (rich big win)) as the colors of the telop TP2 by the look-ahead effect.

[Modification 9]
In the decorative symbol stop position uncertain effect A of FIG. 60, the decorative symbol stop position uncertain effect B of FIG. 61, and the decorative symbol stop position uncertain effect C of FIG. Three vertical rectangular areas (that is, areas in which the display screen 7a is equally divided into three columns) are provided as areas (decorative pattern variation areas). The variable performance (variable display) of the decorative symbols is started in a display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side of the left variable display area 8Lr to the lower side of the left variable display area 8Lr. A variable effect (variable display) of the decorative symbols is started in a display mode in which the reels are rotated toward the lower side of the display area 8Cr, and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed from the upper side of the right variable display area 8Rr to the lower side of the right variable display area 8Rr. A variable effect (variable display) of decorative symbols was started in a display mode in which the reels were rotated toward the side. However, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, there are three horizontally long rectangular areas as three decorative pattern variable display areas (decorative pattern variable areas) (that is, areas obtained by dividing the display screen 7a into three equal rows). ) may be provided.

In this case, the left decorative pattern 8L is used as the upper decorative pattern, and the decorative pattern fluctuation effect (variable display) is started in a display mode in which the reel is rotated from the right side of the upper fluctuation display area toward the left side of the upper fluctuation display area, and the upper fluctuation is performed. The reels are temporarily stopped at the center of the display area and then stopped, and the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed as the middle decorative pattern in a display mode in which the reel rotates from the right side of the middle fluctuation display area to the left side of the middle fluctuation display area. The effect (variation display) is started, and after it is temporarily stopped in the center of the middle variation display area, it is stopped and displayed, and the right decorative symbol 8R is the lower decoration symbol, and the reels are reeled from the right side of the lower variation display area to the left side of the lower variation display area. A variable effect (variable display) of the decorative symbols is started in the rotated display mode, temporarily stopped at the center of the lower variable display area, and then stop-displayed. Further, for example, a part of the upper decoration pattern may jump out from the upper fluctuation display area to the middle fluctuation display area, and may be stopped across the upper fluctuation display area and the middle fluctuation display area. , a part of it may jump out from the medium fluctuation display area to the upper fluctuation display area and may be stopped across the medium fluctuation display area and the upper fluctuation display area, or may be displayed from the medium fluctuation display area to the lower fluctuation display. In some cases, the lower decorative pattern jumps out into the area and is displayed in a stopped state across the medium fluctuation display area and the lower fluctuation display area. There is a case where the static display straddles the area and the medium fluctuation display area. Of course, part of the upper decorative pattern may protrude from the right side, upper side, and left side of the upper fluctuation display area, making it difficult to see. part of the lower decorative pattern may protrude from the right side, the lower side, and the left side of the lower variable display area, making it difficult to see.

[Modification 10]
In the first effect in the decorative symbol stop position uncertain effect A of FIG. 60, the decorative symbol stop position uncertain effect B of FIG. 61, and the decorative symbol stop position uncertain effect C of FIG. The stop positions of the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R can be changed randomly (irregularly) each time the right decorative design 8R is fixed and stopped. At this time, various effect sounds (various effect sounds) and production sounds may suddenly be muted, and the first production may proceed across a plurality of fluctuations. In this way, it is possible to create a sense of incongruity due to the mute state, and the player himself can make a rule that the longer this state continues, the higher the expectation of winning (the longer it is). This can contribute to reducing the monotony of the variable performance (variable display) of the headline, left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R.

[Modification 11]
In the first effect in the decorative symbol stop position uncertain effect A of FIG. 60, the decorative symbol stop position uncertain effect B of FIG. 61, and the decorative symbol stop position uncertain effect C of FIG. The stop positions of the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R can be changed randomly (irregularly) each time the right decorative design 8R is fixed and stopped. However, two of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed side by side on the same horizontal line and stopped, and the remaining one decorative pattern is stopped on the same horizontal line. An effect that is not displayed may be used, or such an effect may be included. For example, when the left decorative design 8L and the middle decorative design 8C are stop-displayed side by side on the same horizontal line, the right decorative design 8R is not stop-displayed on the same horizontal line. When the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are stop-displayed side by side on the same horizontal line, the middle decorative design 8C is not stop-displayed on the same horizontal line. When the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R are stop-displayed side by side on the same horizontal line, the left decorative design 8L is not stop-displayed on the same horizontal line. When two of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed side by side on the same horizontal line, two decorations are displayed on the same horizontal line. In each variation table area in which the symbols are variably displayed, the pattern may be arranged on the left side, the center, or the right side of each variation display area on the same horizontal line. For example, when the left decorative design 8L and the middle decorative design 8C are stopped and displayed side by side on the same horizontal line above the display screen 7a, the left decorative design 8L is arranged on the upper right side of the left fluctuating display area 8Lr. It is stopped and displayed, and the middle decorative pattern 8C is arranged on the upper left side of the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr and is stopped and displayed.

[Modification 12]
In the first effect in the decorative symbol stop position uncertain effect B of FIG. 61 and the decorative symbol stop position uncertain effect C of FIG. In addition, the inclination of each pattern can be changed irregularly. However, two of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed with the same inclination, and the remaining one decorative pattern is stopped and displayed with the same inclination and a different inclination. It may be an effect that is made to be performed, or such an effect may be included. For example, as an example in which the directions of rotation are completely different, the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C rotate slightly counterclockwise to form an inclined angle, and the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C tilt slightly to the left. The right decorative pattern 8R is stop-displayed in a state slightly tilted to the right at an angle slightly rotated clockwise as a tilt different from the same tilt. Further, for example, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R rotate greatly clockwise to form an inclined angle, and the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are rotated in the same direction but have different inclinations. is stopped and displayed in a state greatly tilted to the right, and the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed in a state tilted slightly to the right at a tilted angle slightly rotated clockwise as a tilt different from the same tilt. becomes.

[Modification 13]
In the decorative symbol stop position uncertain effect A of FIG. 60, the decorative symbol stop position uncertain effect B of FIG. 61, and the decorative symbol stop position uncertain effect C of FIG. , When the temporary stop display (stop display) is performed while jumping over the variable display region (the left variable display region 8Lr, the middle variable display region 8Cr, and the right variable display region 8Rr) and straddling the other variable display regions, When part of the decoration pattern temporarily stopped (stopped) displayed in another variable display area overlaps in the front-back direction, it changes randomly (irregularly) with respect to the positional relationship (back-and-forth relationship). However, among the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, it jumps over its own fluctuation display area (the left fluctuation display area 8Lr, the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr, and the right fluctuation display area 8Rr) to display another fluctuation display. When the temporary stop display (stop display) is performed while straddling the area, the decoration pattern temporarily stopped (stop displayed) across the own variation display area and another variation display area is displayed in the other variation. It may be arranged in front of the decorative pattern that is temporarily stopped (stopped) in the display area. In other words, among the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, jump over the own fluctuation display area (the left fluctuation display area 8Lr, the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr, the right fluctuation display area 8Rr) to other fluctuations. When the temporary stop display (stop display) is performed across the display area, the decorative pattern that is temporarily stopped (stop displayed) across the own variable display area and another variable display area A display mode may be adopted in which a part of the decorative pattern temporarily stopped (stopped) is displayed in the variable display area.

[Modification 14]
In the decorative symbol stop position uncertain effect B of FIG. 61 and the decorative symbol stop position uncertain effect C of FIG. 8Lr, middle fluctuation display area 8Cr, right fluctuation display area 8Rr), and when temporary stop display (stop display) is performed in a state straddling other fluctuation display areas, temporary stop display (stop display) is performed in the other fluctuation display areas. When a part of the decorative pattern to be displayed overlaps in the front-rear direction, the larger decorative pattern is arranged in front of the positional relationship (front-rear relationship). However, among the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, it jumps over its own fluctuation display area (the left fluctuation display area 8Lr, the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr, and the right fluctuation display area 8Rr) to display another fluctuation display. When the temporary stop display (stop display) is performed while straddling the area, the size of the decorative pattern that is temporarily stopped (stop displayed) across the own variable display area and another variable display area, and other A display mode may be adopted in which the size of the decorative pattern temporarily stopped (stopped) displayed in the variable display area is compared with the size of the decorative pattern, and the smaller size of the decorative pattern is arranged in front. In other words, among the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, jump over the own fluctuation display area (the left fluctuation display area 8Lr, the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr, the right fluctuation display area 8Rr) to other fluctuations. When the temporary stop display (stop display) is performed while straddling the display area, the decorative pattern that is temporarily stopped (stop displayed) across the own variable display area and the other variable display area, and the other When the decorative patterns temporarily stopped (stopped) displayed in the variable display area overlap, the decorative pattern with the smaller size is arranged in front of the decorative pattern with the larger size, and the size is larger. It is also possible to adopt a display mode in which a part of one decorative pattern is covered.

[Modification 15]
In the decorative symbol stop position uncertain effect A of FIG. 60, the decorative symbol stop position uncertain effect B of FIG. 61, and the decorative symbol stop position uncertain effect C of FIG. production may be added.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect A4-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of variably displaying a plurality of symbols,
It is possible to execute a first effect in which the stop position, size and inclination of each pattern can be changed irregularly every time the pattern is fixed and stopped.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect A4-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A4-1,
The first effect includes a effect of displaying one pattern overlapping another one pattern when the finalization of the pattern is stopped,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect A4-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect A4-1 or aspect A4-2,
The first effect includes a effect of displaying one symbol in the direction of movement of another symbol when the finalization of the symbol is stopped,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect A4-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A4-1 to A4-3,
The first effect includes an effect in which the display mode changes for each change in the pattern displayed in the variation area of each pattern in the set of patterns that informs the success or failure,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect A4-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A4-1 to A4-4,
The display means can display a plurality of types of images in addition to the plurality of patterns,
A second effect can be executed in which the first image is moved and displayed in front of the symbols and the second image is moved and displayed behind the symbols during the fluctuation of the symbols by the first effect and when the finalization of the symbols is stopped. is
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect A4-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A4-1 to A4-5,
In the first effect, the plurality of symbols are temporarily stopped at the same timing, and then fixed and stopped.
A gaming machine characterized by:

63 to 65, the decorative symbol sudden determination stop effects A to C will be described below. This decorative pattern sudden determination stop effect is executed during the variable effect of the decorative pattern. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the decorative pattern sudden determination stop effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image display device 7 and sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U). Also, the corresponding drive data is read from the ROM 103 to drive the first movable accessory 14 .

[Decorative pattern sudden confirmation stop effect A]
FIG. 63 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol sudden confirmation stop effect A. FIG. The decorative symbol sudden determination stop effect is a effect in which a set of decorative symbols are stopped and displayed (determined stop) in a win mode without being displayed in a reach mode. In the decorative symbol sudden determination stop effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 63(A), the display screen 7a displays the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R that are stopped (determined and stopped). Here, display of the pending icon 9A and the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C is omitted. The pending icon 9A and the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C may or may not be displayed.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R displayed substantially in the center of the display screen 7a. The variable display (special figure variation) of the special figure is represented by the display, and the result of the special figure lottery is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special design here may be either the first special design or the second special design. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped at "234". Here, it is assumed that the game state is normal state (low probability low base state), special figure 1 pending digestion is started, and special figure 1 fluctuation is executed from now on. Also, here, it is assumed that the lottery result of this special figure 1 is a big win, and a variation pattern corresponding to the big win is selected.

As shown in FIG. 63(B), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed corresponding to the current special figure variation (pertinent variation). In this case, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed so that the left, middle, and right patterns move downward from above. Here, since each pattern is moving at high speed, the pattern cannot be visually recognized. In addition, the variation mode of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may be any variation mode. For example, the left, middle, and right symbols may be variably displayed so as to rotate horizontally with the vertical direction as the axis of rotation.

As shown in FIGS. 63(C) and 63(D), when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, and the decorative An effect is executed in which a set of decorative patterns 8l, 8c and 8r different from the patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are framed. The decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r have the same pattern shape and size as the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the left decorative pattern 8l, the middle decorative pattern 8c, and the right decorative pattern 8r are decorated from different directions. Move toward the symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. The left decorative design 8l, the middle decorative design 8c, and the right decorative design 8r are the same design, which is "7" here. The pattern shapes and sizes of the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r are the same as those of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, but may be different.

The left decorative pattern 8l is framed in from the left end of the display screen 7a toward the right direction, overlapped with the left decorative pattern 8L being variably displayed, and displayed on the front side of the left decorative pattern 8L. The middle decorative pattern 8c is framed upward from the lower end of the display screen 7a, overlapped with the middle decorative pattern 8C being variably displayed, and displayed on the front side of the middle decorative pattern 8C. The right decorative pattern 8r is framed in from the right end of the display screen 7a toward the left, overlaps the right decorative pattern 8R that is being variably displayed, and is displayed on the front side of the right decorative pattern 8R.

As shown in FIG. 63(E), the left decorative pattern 8l, the middle decorative pattern 8c, and the right decorative pattern 8r line up in a horizontal line and almost simultaneously stop. Display disappears. As a result, the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r stop displaying (fixed stop) at "777", and then the big win effect is executed. Thus, in the decorative design sudden determination stop effect A, after the start of the special figure fluctuation, the set of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are not variably displayed and then displayed in the ready-to-win mode, and the set of decorative patterns 8l are displayed. , 8c and 8r are stop-displayed in the form of a big win, so that the player can be surprised and amused.

FIGS. 63(F) to 63(J) are other examples of the decorative symbol sudden fixed stop effect A described in FIGS. 63(A) to 63(E). In FIGS. 63(F) to 63(J), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in the stationary state, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R different from the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are framed. The effect of entering is executed.

FIG. 63(F) is the same state as FIG. 63(A). That is, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stopped (determined and stopped) at "234" are displayed on the display screen 7a.

In FIG. 63 (G), despite the state in which the special figure fluctuation has started due to the digestion of the special figure 1 suspension, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R correspond to the current special figure fluctuation (the fluctuation) The stop display is maintained without That is, the display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stopped and displayed corresponding to the previous special figure variation is maintained during the variation.

As shown in FIG. 63 (H) (I), when a predetermined time has elapsed since the current special figure variation (the variation) was started, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a stopped state, An effect is executed in which a set of decorative patterns 8l, 8c and 8r different from the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are framed. The decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r have the same pattern shape and size as the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the left decorative pattern 8l, the middle decorative pattern 8c, and the right decorative pattern 8r are decorated from different directions. Move toward the symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. The left decorative design 8l, the middle decorative design 8c, and the right decorative design 8r are the same design, which is "7" here. The pattern shapes and sizes of the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r are the same as those of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, but may be different.

The left decorative pattern 8l is framed in from the left end of the display screen 7a toward the right direction, overlapped with the left decorative pattern 8L being variably displayed, and displayed on the front side of the left decorative pattern 8L. The middle decorative pattern 8c is framed upward from the lower end of the display screen 7a, overlapped with the middle decorative pattern 8C being variably displayed, and displayed on the front side of the middle decorative pattern 8C. The right decorative pattern 8r is framed in from the right end of the display screen 7a toward the left, overlaps the right decorative pattern 8R that is being variably displayed, and is displayed on the front side of the right decorative pattern 8R.

As shown in FIG. 63(J), when the left decorative pattern 8l, the middle decorative pattern 8c, and the right decorative pattern 8r are stopped in a horizontal line, almost at the same time, the decorative pattern 8L stopped at "234", The display of 8C and 8R disappears. As a result, the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r stop displaying (fixed stop) at "777", and then the big win effect is executed. Thus, in the decorative design sudden determination stop effect A, after the start of the special pattern fluctuation, after the display of the set of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R that were stop-displayed after the previous special pattern fluctuation is maintained, in the ready-to-win mode. Since the set of decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r are stopped and displayed in a jackpot manner without being displayed, the player can be surprised and amused.

[Decorative pattern sudden confirmation stop effect B]
FIG. 64 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol sudden confirmation stop effect B. FIG. The decorative symbol sudden determination stop effect is a effect in which a set of decorative symbols are stopped and displayed (determined stop) in a win mode without being displayed in a reach mode. In comparison with the decorative symbol sudden confirmation stop effect A, the decorative symbol sudden confirmation stop effect B is mainly characterized in that a plurality of sets of decorative symbols are not displayed and only the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are displayed. different. In the decorative symbol sudden determination stop effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 64(A), the display screen 7a displays the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R that are stopped (determined and stopped). Here, display of the pending icon 9A and the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C is omitted. The pending icon 9A and the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C may or may not be displayed.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R displayed substantially in the center of the display screen 7a. The variable display (special figure variation) of the special figure is represented by the display, and the result of the special figure lottery is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special design here may be either the first special design or the second special design. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped at "234". Here, it is assumed that the game state is normal state (low probability low base state), special figure 1 pending digestion is started, and special figure 1 fluctuation is executed from now on. Also, here, it is assumed that the lottery result of this special figure 1 is a big win, and a variation pattern corresponding to the big win is selected.

When the special figure fluctuation is started by the digestion of the special figure 1 pending, in the decorative pattern sudden fixed stop effect B, as shown in FIG. The display disappears instead of being variably displayed corresponding to (the relevant variation).

As shown in FIG. 64(C), after a predetermined time has passed since the current special figure variation (the variation) has started, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R have disappeared, and the character "jackpot" is displayed. An image is displayed, and it is suddenly reported that the special drawing lottery result is a big hit.

After that, as shown in FIG. 64(D), an effect is executed in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are framed. The decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R move toward the center of the display screen 7a from different directions for the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R. The left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are the same design, and are "7" here.

The left decorative pattern 8L frames in from the left end of the display screen 7a toward the right, moves toward the center of the display screen 7a, and stops near the center left of the display screen 7a. The middle decorative pattern 8C frames upward from the lower end of the display screen 7a, moves toward the center of the display screen 7a, and stops near the center of the display screen 7a. The right decorative pattern 8R is framed in from the right end of the display screen 7a toward the left, moves toward the center of the display screen 7a, and stops near the center right of the display screen 7a.

As shown in FIG. 64(E), the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R line up in a horizontal line and stop. As a result, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped at "777" (determined stop), and then the big win effect is executed. Thus, in the decorative pattern sudden determination stop performance B, after the start of the special figure fluctuation, the set of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode without displaying the variable display and the ready-to-win mode. , it is possible to surprise the player and improve the interest of the player.

FIGS. 64(F) to 64(J) are other examples of the decorative symbol sudden determination stop effect B described in FIGS. 64(A) to 64(E). In FIGS. 64(F) to 64(J), after the stopped decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R fade out from the display screen 7a while moving randomly, an effect is executed in which a big win is announced. be.

FIG. 64(F) is the same state as FIG. 64(A). That is, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stopped (determined and stopped) at "234" are displayed on the display screen 7a.

In FIG. 64 (G), due to the digestion of the special figure 1 pending, despite the state in which the special figure variation has started, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R correspond to the current special figure variation (the variation) The stop display is maintained without After that, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R move in different directions and fade out from the display screen 7a. The left decorative design 8L is out of the frame toward the lower left of the display screen 7a, the middle decorative design 8C is out of the frame toward the lower side of the display screen 7a, and the right decorative design 8R is out of the frame toward the lower right of the display screen 7a. Frame out towards the direction.

FIG. 64(H) is the same state as FIG. 64(C). That is, a predetermined time has elapsed since the current special figure variation (the variation) was started, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R faded out and disappeared, and a character image representing "jackpot" is displayed. It is suddenly reported that the special figure lottery result is a big hit.

After that, as shown in FIG. 64(I), an effect is executed in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are framed. The decorative designs 8L, 8C, 8R move from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a while the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are aligned. The left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are the same design, and are "7" here.

As shown in FIG. 64(J), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are arranged in a horizontal line and stopped near the center of the display screen 7a. As a result, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped at "777" (determined stop), and then the big win effect is executed. Thus, in the decorative pattern sudden determination stop performance B, after the start of the special figure fluctuation, the set of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode without displaying the variable display and the ready-to-win mode. , it is possible to surprise the player and improve the interest of the player.

[Decorative pattern sudden confirmation stop effect C]
FIG. 65 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol sudden confirmation stop effect C. FIG. The decorative symbol sudden determination stop effect is an effect in which a set of decorative symbols are stopped and displayed (determined stop) in a win mode without being displayed in a reach mode. In comparison with the decorative symbol sudden confirmation stop effect A, the decorative symbol sudden confirmation stop effect C does not display a plurality of sets of decorative symbols, and is the effect of only the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. The main difference is that the motion of one movable accessory 14 is included. In the decorative symbol sudden determination stop effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 65(A), the display screen 7a displays the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R that are stopped (determined and stopped). Here, display of the pending icon 9A and the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C is omitted. The pending icon 9A and the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C may or may not be displayed. The first movable accessory 14 is stationary at the retracted position on the left side of the display screen 7a.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R displayed substantially in the center of the display screen 7a. The variable display (special figure variation) of the special figure is represented by the display, and the result of the special figure lottery is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special design here may be either the first special design or the second special design. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped at "234". Here, it is assumed that the game state is normal state (low probability low base state), digestion of special figure 1 reservation is started, and special figure 1 fluctuation is executed from now on. Also, here, it is assumed that the lottery result of this special figure 1 is a big win, and a variation pattern corresponding to the big win is selected.

By the digestion of the special figure 1 pending, when the special figure fluctuation is started, as shown in FIG. Stop indication is maintained. In this state, the first movable accessory 14 moves rightward in front (front) of the display screen 7a from the left end to the right end of the display screen 7a. In accordance with the movement of the first movable accessory 14, an effect is executed in which the display contents of the display screen 7a are switched. Specifically, the first screen displaying the stopped decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is switched to the second screen displaying a character image of "jackpot". Here, the first screen does not move, and the second screen moves in front of the first screen to cover the first screen, thereby switching the display contents.

When the first movable accessory 14 moves to the advanced position on the right end, it stops at the advanced position. At this time, as shown in FIG. 65(C), the display screen 7a is in a state of only the second screen on which the character image of "jackpot" is displayed. As a result, it is suddenly reported that the special figure lottery result is a big hit.

After that, as shown in FIG. 65(D), the first movable accessory 14 moves leftward from the right end of the display screen 7a toward the left end in the front (front) of the display screen 7a. In accordance with the movement of the first movable accessory 14, an effect is executed in which the display contents of the display screen 7a are switched. Specifically, the second screen displaying the character image of "big hit" is switched to the first screen displaying the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R stopped at "777". Here, the second screen does not move, and the first screen moves in front of the second screen to cover the second screen, thereby switching the display contents.

When the first movable accessory 14 moves to the retracted position at the left end, it stops at the retracted position. At this time, as shown in FIG. 65(E), the display screen 7a is in a state of only the first screen displaying the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stopped at "777". After that, a jackpot effect is executed. In this way, in the decorative pattern sudden determination stop performance C, after the start of the special figure fluctuation, the set of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are not displayed in a variable display and a ready-to-win mode, and are stopped in a jackpot mode. , it is possible to surprise the player and improve the interest of the player.

FIGS. 65(F) to 65(J) are other examples of the decorative symbol sudden determination stop effect C described in FIGS. 65(A) to 65(E). In FIGS. 65(F) to 65(J), the first screen displaying the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed is switched to the second screen displaying the character image of "jackpot". It differs from FIGS. 65(A) to 65(E).

FIG. 65(F) is the same state as FIG. 65(A). That is, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stopped (determined and stopped) at "234" are displayed on the display screen 7a. Also, the first movable accessory 14 is stationary at the retracted position on the left side of the display screen 7a.

In FIG. 65(G), as in FIG. 65(B), as the first movable accessory 14 moves to the right, from the first screen displaying the stopped decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, The screen is switched to the second screen on which a character image of "jackpot" is displayed. Here, by moving both the first screen and the second screen in the right direction, an effect is performed in which the display contents are slid and switched.

FIG. 65(H) is the same state as FIG. 65(C). That is, when the first movable accessory 14 moves to the advanced position on the right end, it stops at the advanced position. In addition, the display screen 7a becomes a state of only the second screen on which the character image of "jackpot" is displayed. As a result, it is suddenly reported that the special figure lottery result is a big hit.

In FIG. 65(I), similarly to FIG. 65(D), as the first movable accessory 14 moves to the left, the decorative symbols 8L and 8C are displayed from the second screen on which the character image "big win" is displayed. , 8R are displayed stopped at "777". Here, by moving both the first screen and the second screen to the left, an effect is performed in which the display contents are slid and switched.

FIG. 65(J) is the same state as FIG. 65(E). That is, when the first movable accessory 14 moves to the retracted position at the left end, it stops at the retracted position. Also, the display screen 7a is in a state of only the first screen on which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stopped at "777" are displayed. After that, a jackpot effect is executed. In this way, in the decorative pattern sudden determination stop performance C, after the start of the special figure fluctuation, the set of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are not displayed in a variable display and a ready-to-win mode, and are stopped in a jackpot mode. , it is possible to surprise the player and improve the interest of the player.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the decoration symbol sudden confirmation stop effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 63, after the start of the special figure variation, the set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are not displayed in the ready-to-win mode, and the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r win. It is possible to execute an effect that is stopped and displayed in the form of According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 64 and 65 as well.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 63(A) to (E), in this production, after the start of the special figure fluctuation, a set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed to change, and a set of A stop display of the winning mode of the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r is displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 63(F) to (J), in this production, after the special figure fluctuation starts, a set of decorative symbols 8L stopped and displayed after the previous special figure fluctuation, After the display of 8C and 8R is maintained, the stop display of the win mode is displayed without displaying the variable display of the set of decorative symbols 8l, 8c and 8r corresponding to the special figure variation of this time. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIG. 65 as well.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 63, in this effect, the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r stopped and displayed in the win mode are displayed in the frame. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 64 and 65 as well.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, in this effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are not displayed in the ready-to-win state, but the character image of "win" is displayed. After the notification, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed in a winning manner. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to the modification shown in FIG.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 64, in this effect, after the display of the set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R disappears, a character image of "Winning" is displayed to win. is notified, and after the notification, a set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R stopped and displayed in a win mode are displayed in the frame. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to the modification shown in FIG.

[Modification]
Below, a modification of the decorative symbol sudden confirmation stop effect will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the decorative pattern sudden determination stop effect A, after FIG. 63(B), the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R disappears, and in FIG. In the state where the variable display is not displayed, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R may be framed in a state of "7". Then, in FIG. 63(E), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may be determined and stopped at "777" to notify a big win.

[Modification 2]
In FIG. 63(B) of the decorative pattern sudden determination stop effect A, even if the character image of "big hit" appears and the big win is announced in the state where the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R is displayed. good.

[Modification 3]
In the decorative design sudden determination stop effect A, the left decorative design 8l, the middle decorative design 8c, and the right decorative design 8r are assumed to be in the frame at "7". However, the left decorative design 8l, the middle decorative design 8c, and the right decorative design 8r may be numbers other than "7" or images other than the number image. Also, the left decorative pattern 8l, the middle decorative pattern 8c, and the right decorative pattern 8r may be framed in with numbers different from each other, and stop-display may be performed at the losing pattern.

[Modification 4]
In the decorative symbol sudden determination stop effects B and C, the winning notification may be an image other than the character image of "big win". Also, the notification of the big win is not limited to the display of an image, and may be the driving of a character or the generation of a sound.

[Modification 5]
In the decorative symbol sudden determination stop effect C, even if the first movable accessory 14 moves rightward from the retracted position toward the advanced position after the stop symbol "234" of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R disappears. good.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇[Aspect A5-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is a set of decorative patterns capable of informing the propriety,
After the start of the special figure fluctuation, it is possible to execute an effect in which the set of decorative patterns is stopped and displayed in a hit mode without being displayed in a reach mode,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A5-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A5-1,
In the production, after the special figure fluctuation starts, the set of decorative pattern fluctuation display and the winning mode stop display are displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A5-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A5-1,
In the production, after the start of the special figure fluctuation, after the display of the set of decorative patterns stopped and displayed after the previous special figure fluctuation is maintained, the set of decorative patterns corresponding to the special figure fluctuation of this time is changed. The stop display of the win mode is displayed without the display being displayed,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A5-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A5-1 to A5-3,
In the production, the set of decorative symbols stopped and displayed in a win mode is displayed in a frame.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A5-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A5-1 to A5-4,
In the effect, the set of decorative patterns is not displayed in a ready-to-win mode, but the winning is notified, and after the notification, the set of decorative patterns is stopped and displayed in the winning mode.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A5-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect A5-5,
In the production, after the display of the set of decorative patterns disappears, the winning is notified, and after the notification, the set of decorative patterns stopped and displayed in the winning mode is displayed in the frame.
A gaming machine characterized by:

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in the game state management process of FIG. ), it shifts to idle time (low-probability short-time state). This play time is continued until the special symbol changes 700 times.

66 to 68, the character object-linked effects A to C will be described below. This accessory interlocking production is executed during the variable production of decorative symbols in the normal state, the time saving state (low-probability-low base state), or the probability-variable state (high-probability-high base state). That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a character-linked effect, the corresponding image data is read out from the ROM 103 and displayed on the image display device 7. An image is displayed on the screen 7a or the sub-display screen 64. FIG.

[Character-linked production A]
FIG. 66 is a diagram for explaining the accessory-linked effect A. FIG. The accessory-linked production A in FIG. 66 is a production with the same variation of the special symbols. In the accessory-linked production A, first, as shown in FIG. 66A, a decorative symbol variation production is performed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C, and 8R are varied in the vertical direction substantially at the center of the display screen 7a. Also, in the decorative symbol variation effect, the teammate character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. On the display screen 7a, a pending icon 9A and a variable icon 9C are displayed, but they are omitted in the figure. Furthermore, a predetermined background image HK is displayed on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(B), a character development effect is performed. In this accessory deployment effect, the first movable accessory 14 moves in front of the display screen 7a from the retracted position on the left of the display screen 7a toward the deployment position (from left to right on the display screen 7a). In this case, the decoration patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the ally character CRA are moved to the right side of the display screen 7a in conjunction with the movement of the first movable accessory 14 from the retracted position to the deployed position. Further, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R form a ready-to-win state in which the decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are stop-displayed in seven patterns, and the decorative pattern 8C fluctuates at high speed. In the display screen 7a, an effect image EF (for example, a black effect image) is displayed instead of the background image HK in the area through which the first movable accessory 14 has passed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(C), a role object movement effect A is performed. In this accessory movement effect A, the first movable accessory 14 moves from the deployment position to the retracted position (to the left). At this time, as the first movable accessory 14 moves, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R appear from the right end of the display screen 7a. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are arranged such that the decorative pattern 8L is arranged on the top, the decorative pattern 8C is arranged in the center, and the decorative pattern 8R is arranged on the bottom, forming 7 patterns respectively to form a jackpot pattern. Note that the ally character CRA also moves leftward in conjunction with the leftward movement of the first movable accessory 14 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(D), a role object movement effect B is performed. In this role object movement effect B, the first movable role object 14 further moves toward the retraction direction (leftward direction). At this time, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the ally character CRA move leftward so as to be interlocked with the first movable accessory 14 . Specifically, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the ally character CRA move leftward at the same speed as the first movable accessory 14 moves in the retreat direction (leftward). In this case, the display area of the effect image EF becomes smaller and the display area of the background image HK becomes larger as the first movable accessory 14 moves to the retracted position (to the left).

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(E), a role object movement effect C is performed. In this role object moving effect C, in this role object moving effect C, the first movable role object 14 moves to the retracted position, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are positioned substantially in the center of the display screen 7a, and the friendly character The CRA is positioned on the left side of the decorative designs 8L, 8C, 8R. In this case, the background image HK is displayed instead of the effect image EF.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(F), a big hit symbol notification effect is performed. In this jackpot pattern notification effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped near the approximate center of the display screen 7a, and seven jackpot patterns are reported. At this time, the ally character CRA has been erased.

In addition, in the above character object movement effects B and C, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the ally character CRA are linked (moved) to the left at the same speed as the first movable character object 14. , the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R or the ally character CRA may be linked (moved) at a slower speed than the first movable accessory 14, or at a faster speed than the first movable accessory 14. may be interlocked (moved) with .

[Character-linked production B]
FIG. 67 is a diagram for explaining the accessory-linked production B. FIG. The accessory-linked production B in FIG. 67 is a production with the same variation of the special symbols. In the character linked production B, as shown in FIG. 67(A), first, the decorative pattern variation production is performed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C, and 8R are varied in the vertical direction substantially at the center of the display screen 7a. Also, in the decorative symbol variation effect, the teammate character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. On the display screen 7a, the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed, but they are omitted in the drawing. Furthermore, a predetermined background image HK is displayed on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(B), the character development effect A is performed. In this accessory development effect A, the first movable accessory 14 moves in front of the display screen 7a from the retreat position on the left of the display screen 7a toward the deployment position (from left to right on the display screen 7a). In this case, the decoration patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the ally character CRA are moved to the right side of the display screen 7a in conjunction with the movement of the first movable accessory 14 from the retracted position to the deployed position. Further, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped and displayed in six patterns, the decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, forming a ready-to-win state in which the decorative pattern 8C fluctuates at high speed. In the display screen 7a, an effect image EF (for example, a black effect image) is displayed instead of the background image HK in the area through which the first movable accessory 14 has passed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(C), a role object movement effect A is performed. In this accessory movement effect A, the first movable accessory 14 moves from the deployment position to the retracted position (to the left). At this time, as the first movable accessory 14 moves, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R appear from the right end of the display screen 7a. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are arranged such that the decorative pattern 8L is arranged on top, the decorative pattern 8C is arranged in the center, and the decorative pattern 8R is arranged below, forming 6 patterns respectively to form a jackpot pattern. Note that the ally character CRA also moves leftward in conjunction with the leftward movement of the first movable accessory 14 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(D), a character object movement effect B is performed. In this role object movement effect B, the first movable role object 14 further moves toward the retraction direction (leftward direction). At this time, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the ally character CRA move leftward so as to be interlocked with the first movable accessory 14 . Specifically, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the ally character CRA move leftward at the same speed as the first movable accessory 14 moves in the retreat direction (leftward). In this case, the display area of the effect image EF becomes smaller and the display area of the background image HK becomes larger as the first movable accessory 14 moves to the retracted position (to the left).

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(E), the character object movement effect C is performed. In this role object moving effect C, in this role object moving effect C, the first movable role object 14 moves to the retracted position, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are positioned substantially in the center of the display screen 7a, and the friendly character The CRA is positioned on the left side of the decorative designs 8L, 8C, 8R. In this case, the background image HK is displayed instead of the effect image EF.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(F), a timer button presentation is performed. In this timer button effect, a button image XA1 prompting the player to press the effect button 63 is displayed. This button image XA1 includes the characters "PUSH" for prompting the player to press the effect button 63 and the characters "3 seconds left" representing the countdown of the timer.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(G), the character development effect B is performed. In this role development production B, the first movable role 14 moves again from the retracted position on the left side of the display screen 7a toward the deployment position (from the left to the right of the display screen 7a) in front of the display screen 7a. Moving. In this case, an effect image EF (for example, a black effect image) is displayed instead of the background image HK in the area through which the first movable accessory 14 passes on the display screen 7a, and the button image XA1 is deleted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(H), a jackpot symbol promotion effect is performed. In this jackpot pattern promotion performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed near the approximate center of the display screen 7a, changed from 6 patterns to 7 patterns, and announced as jackpot patterns. In other words, the number of symbols is upgraded to 7 symbols, which is relatively advantageous for the player, rather than 6 symbols. At this time, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that have become the seven promoted patterns are displayed without interlocking with the first movable accessory 14.例文帳に追加

In addition, in the above character object movement effects B and C, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the ally character CRA are linked (moved) to the left at the same speed as the first movable character object 14. , the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R or the ally character CRA may be linked (moved) at a slower speed than the first movable accessory 14, or at a faster speed than the first movable accessory 14. may be interlocked (moved) with .

[Character-linked production C]
FIG. 68 is a diagram for explaining the accessory-linked effect C. As shown in FIG. The accessory-linked production C in FIG. 68 is a production with the same variation of the special symbols. In the accessory-linked production C, as shown in FIG. 68(A), first, the decorative pattern variation production is performed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C, and 8R are varied in the vertical direction substantially at the center of the display screen 7a. Also, in the decorative symbol variation effect, the teammate character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. On the display screen 7a, a pending icon 9A and a variable icon 9C are displayed, but they are omitted in the drawing. Furthermore, a predetermined background image HK is displayed on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(B), the character development effect A is performed. In this accessory development effect A, the first movable accessory 14 moves in front of the display screen 7a from the retreat position on the left of the display screen 7a toward the deployment position (from left to right on the display screen 7a). In this case, the decoration patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the ally character CRA are moved to the right side of the display screen 7a in conjunction with the movement of the first movable accessory 14 from the retracted position to the deployed position. Further, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped and displayed in six patterns, the decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, forming a ready-to-win state in which the decorative pattern 8C fluctuates at high speed. In the display screen 7a, an effect image EF (for example, a black effect image) is displayed instead of the background image HK in the area through which the first movable accessory 14 has passed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(C), a role object movement effect A is performed. In this accessory movement effect A, the first movable accessory 14 moves from the deployment position to the retracted position (to the left). At this time, as the first movable accessory 14 moves, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R appear from the right end of the display screen 7a. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are arranged such that the decorative pattern 8L is arranged on top, the decorative pattern 8C is arranged in the center, and the decorative pattern 8R is arranged below, forming 6 patterns respectively to form a jackpot pattern. Note that the ally character CRA also moves leftward in conjunction with the leftward movement of the first movable accessory 14 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(D), a role object movement effect B is performed. In this role object movement effect B, the first movable role object 14 further moves toward the retraction direction (leftward direction). At this time, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the ally character CRA move leftward so as to be interlocked with the first movable accessory 14 . Specifically, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the ally character CRA move leftward at the same speed as the first movable accessory 14 moves in the retreat direction (leftward). In this case, the display area of the effect image EF becomes smaller and the display area of the background image HK becomes larger as the first movable accessory 14 moves to the retracted position (to the left).

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(E), a character object movement effect C is performed. In this role object moving effect C, in this role object moving effect C, the first movable role object 14 moves to the retracted position, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are positioned substantially in the center of the display screen 7a, and the friendly character The CRA is positioned on the left side of the decorative designs 8L, 8C, 8R. In this case, the background image HK is displayed instead of the effect image EF.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(F), a big win pattern enlargement effect is performed. In this jackpot symbol enlargement performance, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are enlarged. At this time, the decorative patterns 8L and 8R are displayed so as to protrude from the display screen 7a. Also, the ally character CRA has been erased.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(G), a timer button presentation is performed. In this timer button effect, a button image XA1 prompting the player to press the effect button 63 is displayed. This button image XA1 includes the characters "PUSH" for prompting the player to press the effect button 63 and the characters "3 seconds left" representing the countdown of the timer.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(H), character development effect B is performed. In this role development production B, the first movable role 14 moves again from the retracted position on the left side of the display screen 7a toward the deployment position (from the left to the right of the display screen 7a) in front of the display screen 7a. Moving. In this case, an effect image EF (for example, a black effect image) is displayed instead of the background image HK in the area through which the first movable accessory 14 passes on the display screen 7a, and the button image XA1 is deleted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(I), a jackpot symbol promotion effect is performed. In this jackpot pattern promotion performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed near the approximate center of the display screen 7a, changed from 6 patterns to 7 patterns, and announced as jackpot patterns. In other words, the number of symbols is upgraded to 7 symbols, which is relatively advantageous for the player, rather than 6 symbols. At this time, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that have become the seven promoted patterns are displayed without interlocking with the first movable accessory 14.例文帳に追加

In addition, in the above character object movement effects B and C, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the ally character CRA are linked (moved) to the left at the same speed as the first movable character object 14. , the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R or the ally character CRA may be linked (moved) at a slower speed than the first movable accessory 14, or at a faster speed than the first movable accessory 14. may be interlocked (moved) with .

[Modification]
In the performances A to C above, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R appear from the right end of the display screen 7a when interlocked with the first movable role 14, but this is not the only option. The symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may be interlocked with the first movable accessory 14 from the state of being stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a.
In the above-mentioned role interlocking productions A to C, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R interlocked with the first movable role 14 are interlocked while forming the jackpot pattern. The symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may be interlocked with the first movable accessory 14 in a state in which the missing symbols are formed.

[Effect example]
In the above-mentioned role interlocking productions A to C, after the variable production of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, as shown in the role moving productions A to C, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are moved and the first movable role is performed. It is performed in conjunction with the movement of the object 14 . According to this configuration, the movement of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the movement of the first movable role 14 can be emphasized, and the movements of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the first movable role 14 can be played. can draw people's attention. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the role object interlocking productions A to C, as shown in the role object movement productions A to C, when the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are moved and the first movable role object 14 is moved, the decorative pattern 8L , 8C, 8R and the movement of the first movable accessory 14 are interlocked in the same direction. According to this configuration, the movements of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the movements of the first movable role 14 can be synchronized, and the movements of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the first movable role 14 can be played. It can draw people's attention. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the role object interlocking productions A to C, as shown in the role object movement productions A to C, when the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are moved and the first movable role object 14 is moved, the decorative pattern 8L , 8C, 8R and the movement of the first movable accessory 14 are interlocked at the same speed. According to this configuration, the movement of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the movement of the first movable accessory 14 can be completely synchronized, and the movement of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the first movable accessory 14 can be synchronized. can be brought to the player's attention. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the above-mentioned role object interlocking productions A to C, as shown in the role object movement productions A to C, when the movement of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the movement of the first movable accessory 14 are interlocked, The first movable accessory 14 moves from the deployed position toward the retracted position. According to this configuration, when the first movable accessory 14 moves in the direction of leaving the display screen 7a, the movement of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the movement of the first movable accessory 14 are interlocked. Since this is performed, the movement of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the first movable accessory 14 can be emphasized by the player. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the above-mentioned role object interlocking productions A to C, as shown in the role object movement productions A to C, when the movement of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the movement of the first movable accessory 14 are interlocked, The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are gradually displayed on the display screen 7a as the first movable role object 14 moves from a state in which they are not displayed on the display screen 7a. The whole is displayed on the display screen 7a. According to this configuration, the movement of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the movement of the first movable accessory 14 can be gradually synchronized, and the movement of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the first movable accessory 14 can be synchronized. can be brought to the player's attention. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the above-mentioned role object interlocking productions A to C, as shown in the role object movement productions A to C, when the movement of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the movement of the first movable accessory 14 are interlocked, The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R form a jackpot pattern. According to this configuration, the notification of the big win by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R can be emphasized, and the joy of the big win by the player can be amplified. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect XA-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects and a movable accessory,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is a effect of moving the decorative pattern,
The second display effect is a effect of moving the movable accessory,
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the first display effect and the second display effect are performed, and the movement of the decorative pattern in the first display effect and the movement of the movable accessory in the second display effect. is performed in conjunction with
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XA-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect XA-1,
In the combination effect, the movement of the decorative pattern in the first display effect and the movement of the movable accessory in the second display effect are interlocked in the same direction.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XA-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect XA-2,
In the combination effect, the movement of the decorative pattern in the first display effect and the movement of the movable accessory in the second display effect are performed in conjunction with each other at the same moving speed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XA-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect XA-3,
The movable accessory is movable between a retracted position and a deployed position,
In the combination effect, when the movement of the decorative symbol in the first display effect and the movement of the movable accessory in the second display effect are performed in conjunction with each other, the movable accessory is deployed. moving from a position towards a retracted position,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XA-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect XA-4,
In the combination effect, when the movement of the decorative pattern in the first display effect and the movement of the movable accessory in the second display effect are performed in conjunction with each other, the decorative pattern is displayed on the display means. The decorative pattern is gradually displayed on the display means as the movable accessory moves from a state in which it is not displayed on the display, and then the decorative pattern is displayed in its entirety on the display means.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XA-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect XA-5,
The decorative pattern to be moved in the first display effect is a decorative pattern forming a jackpot pattern,
A gaming machine characterized by:

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in the game state management process of FIG. ), it shifts to idle time (low-probability short-time state). This play time is continued until the special symbol changes 700 times.

Scroll effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71. FIG. This scrolling effect is executed during the variable effect of the decorative symbols in the normal state, the time saving state (low-probability-low base state), or the probability-variable state (high-probability-high base state). That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a scroll effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Alternatively, an image is displayed on the sub display screen 64 .

[Scroll effect A]
FIG. 69 is a diagram for explaining the scroll effect A. FIG. The scroll effect A in FIG. 69 is a effect with the same variation of special symbols. In the scroll effect A, as shown in FIG. 69(A), first, a decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C, and 8R are vertically varied on the display screen 7a substantially at the center of the display screen 7a. Also, in the decorative symbol variation effect, the teammate character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. On the display screen 7a, the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed, but they are omitted in the figure.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69(B), a decorative symbol temporary stop effect is performed. In this decorative symbol temporary stop effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are temporarily stopped. Specifically, the decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped after 7 symbols, the decorative symbol 8C is temporarily stopped after 5 symbols, and the decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped after 3 symbols. Also, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped at positions corresponding to the vertices of predetermined triangles. Also, in this decorative symbol temporary stop effect, the teammate character CRA is arranged on the upper right. In this decorative symbol temporary stop effect, an image including the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the teammate character CRA displayed on the display screen 7a is also referred to as a still image XB1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69(C), a downward scroll effect is performed. In this downward scroll effect, the still images XB1 that are consecutively arranged in the vertical direction are scrolled (moved) from the top to the bottom on the display screen 7a. At this time, a boundary portion XB2 is provided between successive still images XB1. This boundary XB2 is indicated by hatching in the drawing. In the drawing, an arrow indicates that the boundary XB2 is scrolling (moving) downward.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69(D), a downward scroll stop effect is performed. In this downward-scrolling stop effect, two still images XB1 continuously connected in the vertical direction are stopped and displayed so that a boundary portion XB2 provided between the two still images XB1 can be seen. In this case, the two still images XB1 are each partially displayed, and when the two are combined, one still image XB1 is obtained. Specifically, in FIG. 69(C), when the upper still image XB1 is arranged below the lower still image XB1, one complete still image XB1 is formed. That is, one still image XB1 is displayed on the entire display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69(E), a reach replacement effect is performed. In this reach replacement effect, the two consecutive still images XB1 move downward, the boundary portion XB2 moves to the lower end of the display screen 7a and stops, the boundary portion XB2 disappears, and then the decoration in the still image XB1 is performed. The symbols 8L, 8C, 8R disappear and new decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed to form a ready-to-win state. At this time, the new decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are 7 patterns including the production pattern 8L and the decorative pattern 8R, and the decorative pattern 8C fluctuates at high speed. Also, in this reach replacement presentation, a new ally character CRA is displayed after being transformed, adding to the mysterious atmosphere.
After that, all of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped, and a symbol confirmation stop performance suggesting a loss or a big win is performed.
Note that the image displayed on the display screen 7a in the reach replacement effect is an image different from the still image XB1.

[Scroll effect B]
FIG. 70 is a diagram for explaining scroll effect B. FIG. The scroll effect B in FIG. 70 is a effect with the same variation of special symbols. In the scroll effect B, as shown in FIG. 70(A), first, a decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C, and 8R are vertically varied on the display screen 7a substantially at the center of the display screen 7a. Also, in the decorative symbol variation effect, the teammate character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. On the display screen 7a, a pending icon 9A and a variable icon 9C are displayed, but they are omitted in the drawing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70(B), a decorative symbol temporary stop effect is performed. In this decorative symbol temporary stop effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are temporarily stopped. Specifically, the decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped after 7 symbols, the decorative symbol 8C is temporarily stopped after 5 symbols, and the decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped after 3 symbols. Also, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped at positions corresponding to the vertices of predetermined triangles. Also, in this decorative symbol temporary stop effect, the teammate character CRA is arranged on the upper right. In this decorative symbol temporary stop effect, an image including the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the teammate character CRA displayed on the display screen 7a is also referred to as a still image XB1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70(C), a downward scroll effect is performed. In this downward scroll effect, the still images XB1 that are consecutively arranged in the vertical direction are scrolled (moved) from the top to the bottom (first direction) on the display screen 7a. At this time, a boundary portion XB2 is provided between successive still images XB1. This boundary XB2 is indicated by hatching in the figure. In the drawing, an arrow indicates that the boundary XB2 is scrolling (moving) downward.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70(D), a downward scroll stop effect is performed. In this downward-scrolling stop effect, two still images XB1 continuously connected in the vertical direction are stopped and displayed so that a boundary portion XB2 provided between the two still images XB1 can be seen. In this case, the two still images XB1 are each partially displayed, and when the two are combined, one still image XB1 is obtained. Specifically, in FIG. 70(C), when the upper still image XB1 is arranged below the lower still image XB1, one complete still image XB1 is formed. That is, one still image XB1 is displayed on the entire display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70(E), an upward scroll effect is performed. In this upward scrolling effect, the continuous still image XB1 scrolls (moves) upward (second direction) from the bottom scrolling stop effect. In the drawing, an arrow indicates that the boundary XB2 is also scrolling (moving) upward.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70(F), an upward scroll stop effect is performed. In this upward-scrolling stop effect, two still images XB1 continuously connected in the vertical direction are stopped and displayed so that a boundary part XB2 provided between the two still images XB1 can be seen. . In this case, the two still images XB1 are each partially displayed, and when the two are combined, one still image XB1 is obtained. Specifically, in FIG. 70(F), when the upper still image XB1 is arranged below the lower still image XB1, one complete still image XB1 is obtained. That is, one still image XB1 is displayed on the entire display screen 7a.

The stop position of the boundary portion XB2 in the downward scroll stop effect and the stop position of the boundary portion XB2 in the upward scroll stop effect are different. According to this configuration, the stopping position differs depending on the scrolling in different directions, so that the player can be provided with a mysterious atmosphere, and as a result, the interest in the game can be improved.
Note that the stop position of the boundary portion XB2 in the downward scroll stop effect may be the same as the stop position of the boundary portion XB2 in the upward scroll stop effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70(G), a reach replacement effect is performed. In this reach replacement effect, the two continuous still images XB1 move downward, the boundary portion XB2 moves to the lower end of the display screen 7a and stops, the boundary portion XB2 disappears, and then the decoration in the still image XB1 is performed. The symbols 8L, 8C, 8R disappear and new decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed to form a ready-to-win state. At this time, the new decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are 7 patterns including the production pattern 8L and the decorative pattern 8R, and the decorative pattern 8C fluctuates at high speed. Also, in this reach replacement presentation, a new ally character CRA is displayed after being transformed, adding to the mysterious atmosphere.
After that, all of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped, and a symbol confirmation stop performance suggesting a loss or a big win is performed.
Note that the image displayed on the display screen 7a in the reach replacement effect is an image different from the still image XB1.

[Scroll effect C]
FIG. 71 is a diagram for explaining the scroll effect C. FIG. The scroll effect C in FIG. 71 is a effect with the same variation of special symbols. In the scroll effect C, as shown in FIG. 71(A), first, a decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C, and 8R are vertically varied on the display screen 7a substantially at the center of the display screen 7a. Also, in the decorative symbol variation effect, the teammate character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. On the display screen 7a, a pending icon 9A and a variable icon 9C are displayed, but they are omitted in the figure.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(B), a decorative symbol temporary stop effect is performed. In this decorative symbol temporary stop effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are temporarily stopped. Specifically, the decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped after 7 symbols, the decorative symbol 8C is temporarily stopped after 5 symbols, and the decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped after 3 symbols. Also, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped at positions corresponding to the vertices of predetermined triangles. Also, in this decorative symbol temporary stop effect, the teammate character CRA is arranged on the upper right. In this decorative symbol temporary stop effect, an image including the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the teammate character CRA displayed on the display screen 7a is also referred to as a still image XB1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(C), a downward scroll effect is performed. In this downward scroll effect, the still images XB1 that are consecutively arranged in the vertical direction are scrolled (moved) from the top to the bottom (first direction) on the display screen 7a. At this time, a boundary portion XB2 is provided between successive still images XB1. This boundary XB2 is indicated by hatching in the drawing. In the drawing, an arrow indicates that the boundary XB2 is scrolling (moving) downward.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(D), a downward scroll stop effect is performed. In this downward-scrolling stop effect, two still images XB1 continuously connected in the vertical direction are stopped and displayed so that a boundary portion XB2 provided between the two still images XB1 can be seen. In this case, the two still images XB1 are each partially displayed, and when the two are combined, one still image XB1 is obtained. Specifically, in FIG. 71(C), when the upper still image XB1 is arranged below the lower still image XB1, one complete still image XB1 is formed. That is, one still image XB1 is displayed on the entire display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(E), an upward scroll effect is performed. In this upward scrolling effect, the continuous still image XB1 scrolls (moves) upward (second direction) from the bottom scrolling stop effect. In the drawing, an arrow indicates that the boundary XB2 is also scrolling (moving) upward.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(F), an upward scroll stop effect is performed. In this upward-scrolling stop effect, two still images XB1 continuously connected in the vertical direction are stopped and displayed so that a boundary part XB2 provided between the two still images XB1 can be seen. . In this case, the two still images XB1 are each partially displayed, and when the two are combined, one still image XB1 is obtained. Specifically, in FIG. 71(F), when the upper still image XB1 is arranged below the lower still image XB1, one complete still image XB1 is obtained. That is, one still image XB1 is displayed on the entire display screen 7a.

The stop position of the boundary portion XB2 in the downward scroll stop effect and the stop position of the boundary portion XB2 in the upward scroll stop effect are different. According to this configuration, the stopping position differs depending on the scrolling in different directions, so that a mysterious atmosphere can be provided to the player, and as a result, the interest in the game can be improved.
The stop position of the boundary portion XB2 in the downward scroll stop effect may be the same as the stop position of the boundary portion XB2 in the upward scroll stop effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(G), boundary effect A is performed. In this boundary part production A, the boundary part XB2 is expanded in the vertical direction, and three characters XB3 appear in the boundary part XB2. This character XB3 is a character showing a smiling face.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(H), boundary effect B is performed. In this boundary part production B, the character XB3 is produced to jump out (move) from the boundary part XB2. In this case, the character XB3 includes a character that completely protrudes from the boundary portion XB2 and a character that only partially protrudes from the boundary portion XB2. According to this configuration, after the mysterious atmosphere is created by the scroll effect and the scroll stop effect, the player can be surprised by the boundary effect. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(I), a reach replacement effect is performed. In this reach replacement effect, the two continuous still images XB1 move downward, the boundary portion XB2 moves to the lower end of the display screen 7a and stops, the boundary portion XB2 disappears, and then the decoration in the still image XB1 is performed. The symbols 8L, 8C, 8R disappear and new decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed to form a ready-to-win state. At this time, the new decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are 7 patterns including the production pattern 8L and the decorative pattern 8R, and the decorative pattern 8C fluctuates at high speed. Also, in this reach replacement presentation, a new ally character CRA is displayed after being transformed, adding to the mysterious atmosphere.
After that, all of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped, and a symbol confirmation stop performance suggesting a loss or a big win is performed.
Note that the image displayed on the display screen 7a in the reach replacement effect is an image different from the still image XB1.

[Modification]
A predetermined image (for example, an effect image or a character image) may be displayed in the boundary portion XB2.
In the above scroll effects A to C, when the continuous still image XB1 is scrolled, the second movable accessory 15 may be moved in the scroll direction. That is, the scrolling of the still image XB1 and the movement of the second movable accessory 15 may be interlocked.

[Effect example]
In the above-mentioned scroll effects A to C, a stop image XB1 including temporarily stopped decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and an ally character CRA is displayed in the decorative pattern temporary stop effect, and then a plurality of continuous stop images XB1 are displayed. The screen 7a is scrolled in the first direction (downward), and then two consecutive still images XB1 are displayed still on the display screen 7a so that the boundary XB2 between the two still images XB1 can be seen. According to this configuration, a plurality of continuous still images XB1 are scrolled in the first direction (downward) on the display screen 7a, and then two continuous still images XB1 are displayed at the boundary between the two still images XB1. Since the XB2 is displayed stopped so that it can be seen, it is possible to provide the player with a mysterious atmosphere, and the player can see the subsequent development (whether it is scrolled again or a different effect from scrolling). (For example, whether a pseudo-continuous effect, a look-ahead effect, or a chance-up effect) will be performed. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the above scroll effects A to C, a plurality of continuous still images XB1 are scrolled in the first direction (downward) on the display screen 7a, and then two continuous still images XB1 are scrolled on the display screen 7a. The still images XB1 are stopped so that the boundary part XB2 of the two still images XB1 can be seen, and then a plurality of consecutive still images XB1 are scrolled in the second direction (upward) on the display screen 7a. According to this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with a more mysterious atmosphere, and to the player, the subsequent development (whether it will be scrolled again, or the effect different from the scroll (for example, pseudo-continuous It is possible to draw attention to whether a production, a look-ahead production, and a chance-up production) will be performed. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the above scroll effects A to C, a plurality of continuous still images XB1 are scrolled in the first direction (downward) on the display screen 7a, and then two continuous still images XB1 are scrolled on the display screen 7a. The two still images XB1 are stopped and displayed so that the boundary part XB2 of the two still images XB1 can be seen. The display is stopped so that the boundary portion XB2 of the image XB1 can be seen. According to this configuration, it is possible to incite a mysterious atmosphere to the player, and the subsequent development (whether it is scrolled again, or an effect different from scrolling (for example, a pseudo-continuous effect, a look-ahead effect, etc.) , chance-up effect) will be performed). As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the scroll effects B to C, the position of the boundary XB2 during the downward scroll stop effect is different from the position of the boundary XB2 during the upward scroll stop effect. According to this configuration, it is possible to emphasize the difference in performance between the downward scrolling effect of scrolling in the first direction and the upward scrolling effect of scrolling in the second direction, and as a result, the amusement of the game can be improved. can be done.

The above scroll effects A to C are performed during the same variation of special symbols. According to this configuration, the above-mentioned scroll effects A to C are performed respectively at the same variation of the special symbols, so that the player can be provided with a mysterious atmosphere in a short period of time, and the subsequent development ( It is possible to draw attention to whether the game is scrolled again, or whether an effect different from scrolling (for example, a pseudo-continuous effect, a look-ahead effect, or a chance-up effect) is performed. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect XB-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects and a movable accessory,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is a effect of displaying a first image,
the second display effect is a effect of scrolling and displaying a plurality of consecutive first images in a first direction on the display means;
the third display effect is a effect of stopping and displaying two continuous first images on the display means so that a boundary between the two continuous first images can be seen;
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, after the first display effect is performed, the second display effect is performed, and after the second display effect is performed, the A third display effect is performed,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XB-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect XB-1,
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
In the fourth display effect, the plurality of continuous first images are scroll-displayed on the display means in a second direction opposite to the first direction,
The combination effect may include the fourth display effect,
In the combination effect, the fourth display effect is performed after the third display effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XB-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect XB-2,
A fifth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
In the fifth display effect, a stop display is performed on the display means so that a boundary between the two continuous first images can be seen,
The combination effect may include the fifth display effect,
In the combination effect, the fifth display effect is performed after the fourth display effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XB-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect XB-3,
A position of the boundary portion in the third display effect and a position of the boundary portion in the fifth display effect are different,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XB-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect XB-4,
Equipped with variable display means for variable display of special symbols,
The combination effect is performed during the same variation of the special symbol on the variation display means,
A gaming machine characterized by:

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in the game state management process of FIG. ), it shifts to idle time (low-probability short-time state). This play time is continued until the special symbol changes 700 times.

The decorative symbol special variation effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 72 to 74. FIG. This decorative symbol special variation performance is executed during the variation performance of the decorative symbols in the normal state, the time saving state (low-probability-low base state), or the probability-variable state (high-probability-high base state). That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a decorative pattern special variation effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the image display device 7. An image is displayed on the display screen 7 a or the sub-display screen 64 .

[Decorative pattern special variation effect A]
FIG. 72 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol special variation effect A. FIG. The decorative symbol special variation effect A of FIG. 72 is an effect with the same variation of special symbols. In the decorative symbol special variation effect A, as shown in FIG. 72(A), first, the decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C, and 8R are vertically varied on the display screen 7a substantially at the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in the decorative symbol variation effect, a right-hand hitting suggestion display XC1 is displayed on the upper left of the display screen 7a. This right-handed hitting suggestion display XC1 is a display that urges the player to hit right-handed. On the display screen 7a, the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed, but they are omitted in the figure.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(B), an effect before the start of movement of the moving object is performed. In this effect before starting the movement of the moving body, the display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is erased. At this time, the right-handed hitting indication XC1 is continuously displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(C), moving object movement effect A is performed. In this moving object movement effect A, the moving object XC2 appears from above the display screen 7a. The moving body XC2 is an image that imitates the second movable accessory 15, and is specifically composed of a rectangular image and a rod-shaped image. Various letters and characters are displayed on the rectangular portion of the moving object XC2. In this moving object movement effect A, when the moving object XC2 appears from above, the decoration pattern 8L is displayed according to the movement of the moving object XC2. The production pattern 8L has 7 patterns. Regardless of the movement of the moving body XC2, the indication XC1 for suggesting hitting to the right is continuously displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(D), moving object movement effect B is performed. In this moving object movement effect B, the moving object XC2 moves upward. Then, in this moving object movement effect B, the decoration pattern 8C is displayed according to the movement of the moving object XC2. Regardless of the movement of the moving body XC2, the indication XC1 for suggesting hitting to the right is continuously displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(E), moving object movement effect C is performed. In this moving object movement effect C, the moving object XC2 moves downward. In this moving object movement effect C, the decoration pattern 8R and the character XC4 are displayed according to the movement of the moving object XC2. This character XC4 is a smiling face character. Regardless of the movement of the moving body XC2, the indication XC1 for suggesting hitting to the right is continuously displayed.
After that, regardless of the movement of the moving body XC2, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped to form a losing or jackpot symbol.

[Decorative pattern special variation effect B]
FIG. 73 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol special variation effect B. FIG. The decorative symbol special variation effect B of FIG. 73 is an effect with the same variation of special symbols. In the decorative symbol special variation effect B, as shown in FIG. 73(A), first, the decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C, and 8R are vertically varied on the display screen 7a substantially at the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in the decorative symbol variation effect, a right-hand hitting suggestion display XC1 is displayed on the upper left of the display screen 7a. This right-handed hitting suggestion display XC1 is a display that urges the player to hit right-handed. On the display screen 7a, a pending icon 9A and a variable icon 9C are displayed, but they are omitted in the drawing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(B), an icon display effect is performed. In this icon display effect, display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R is erased and a plurality of icon images XC3 are displayed. This icon image XC3 represents a predetermined emblem, and is displayed scattered throughout the display screen 7a. At this time, the right-handed hitting indication XC1 is continuously displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(C), moving object movement effect A is performed. In this moving object movement effect A, the moving object XC5 appears from the left side of the display screen 7a. The moving object XC5 moves from left to right on the display screen 7a. The moving body XC5 is an image that imitates the first movable accessory 14, and is specifically a rod-shaped image. In this moving object movement effect A, when the moving object XC5 passes through the icon image XC3, the icon image XC3 is erased from the part that touches the moving object XC5. In addition, in the moving body movement effect A, the decoration pattern 8L is gradually displayed in accordance with the movement of the moving body XC5 in the post-movement area XC6 that expands as the moving body XC5 moves from the left direction to the right direction. The post-movement area XC6 is an area after the moving object XC5 has moved on the display screen 7a. The decorative pattern 8L has 7 patterns. Regardless of the movement of the moving body XC5, the indication XC1 for suggesting hitting to the right is continuously displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(D), moving object movement effect B is performed. In this moving object movement effect B, the moving object XC5 moves further to the right on the display screen 7a. In this moving object movement effect B, when the moving object XC5 passes through the icon image XC3, the icon image XC3 is erased from the part that touches the moving object XC5. In addition, in the moving object movement effect B, the decoration pattern 8L is completely displayed in the post-movement area XC6 that expands as the moving object XC5 moves from left to right. Regardless of the movement of the moving body XC5, the indication XC1 for suggesting hitting to the right is continuously displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(E), moving object movement effect C is performed. In this moving object movement effect C, the moving object XC5 moves further to the right on the display screen 7a. In this moving object movement effect C, when the moving object XC5 passes through the icon image XC3, the icon image XC3 is erased from the part that touches the moving object XC5. In addition, in the moving body movement effect C, the decoration pattern 8C is gradually displayed in accordance with the movement of the moving body XC5 in the post-movement area XC6 that expands as the moving body XC5 moves from the left direction to the right direction. Regardless of the movement of the moving body XC5, the indication XC1 for suggesting hitting to the right is continuously displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(F), a moving object movement effect D is performed. In this moving object movement effect D, the moving object XC5 moves further to the right on the display screen 7a. In this moving object movement effect D, when the moving object XC5 passes through the icon image XC3, the icon image XC3 is erased from the part that touches the moving object XC5. Further, in the moving object movement effect D, the decoration pattern 8C is completely displayed in the post-movement area XC6 that expands as the moving object XC5 moves from left to right. Regardless of the movement of the moving body XC5, the indication XC1 for suggesting hitting to the right is continuously displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(G), moving object movement effect E is performed. In this moving object movement effect E, the moving object XC5 moves further to the right on the display screen 7a. In this moving object movement effect E, when the moving object XC5 passes through the icon image XC3, the icon image XC3 is erased from the part that touches the moving object XC5. In addition, in the moving object movement effect E, the decorative pattern 8R and the character XC4 are gradually displayed in accordance with the movement of the moving object XC5 in the post-movement area XC6 that expands as the moving object XC5 moves from left to right. be. This character XC4 is a smiling face character. Regardless of the movement of the moving body XC5, the indication XC1 for suggesting hitting to the right is continuously displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(H), moving object movement effect F is performed. In this moving object movement effect F, the moving object XC5 moves further to the right on the display screen 7a. In this moving object movement effect F, when the moving object XC5 passes through the icon image XC3, the icon image XC3 is erased from the part that touches the moving object XC5. In addition, in the moving body movement effect F, the decoration pattern 8C and the character XC4 are completely displayed in the post-movement area XC6 that expands as the moving body XC5 moves from left to right. Regardless of the movement of the moving body XC5, the indication XC1 for suggesting hitting to the right is continuously displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(I), a decorative pattern enlarging effect is performed. In this decorative symbol enlargement effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are enlarged while the moving body XC5 is stopped. At this time, the character XC4 is not enlarged. Character XC4 may be enlarged. The icon image XC3 that has not been erased by the moving body XC5 is continuously displayed. The right hitting suggestion display XC1 is continuously displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(J), a decorative symbol fade-out effect is performed. In this decorative pattern fade-out effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the character XC4 gradually disappear. The icon image XC3 that has not been erased by the moving body XC5 is continuously displayed. The right hitting suggestion display XC1 is continuously displayed.
After that, regardless of the movement of the moving body XC5, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped to form a losing or big winning symbol.

[Decorative pattern special variation effect C]
FIG. 74 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol special variation effect C. FIG. The decorative symbol special variation effect C of FIG. 74 is an effect with the same variation of special symbols. In the decorative symbol special variation effect C, as shown in FIG. 74(A), first, the decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C, and 8R are vertically varied on the display screen 7a substantially at the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in the decorative symbol variation effect, a right-hand hitting suggestion display XC1 is displayed on the upper left of the display screen 7a. This indication XC1 for suggesting hitting to the right is a display that urges the player to hit to the right. On the display screen 7a, the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed, but they are omitted in the drawing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(B), an icon display effect is performed. In this icon display effect, display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R is erased and a plurality of icon images XC3 are displayed. This icon image XC3 represents a predetermined emblem, and is displayed scattered throughout the display screen 7a. At this time, the right-handed hitting indication XC1 is continuously displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(C), moving object movement effect A is performed. In this moving object movement effect A, the moving object XC5 appears from the left side of the display screen 7a. The moving object XC5 moves from left to right on the display screen 7a. The moving body XC5 is an image that imitates the first movable accessory 14, and is specifically a rod-shaped image. In this moving object movement effect A, when the moving object XC5 passes through the icon image XC3, the icon image XC3 is erased from the part that touches the moving object XC5. In addition, in the moving body movement effect A, the decoration pattern 8L is gradually displayed in accordance with the movement of the moving body XC5 in the post-movement area XC6 that expands as the moving body XC5 moves from the left direction to the right direction. The post-movement area XC6 is an area after the moving object XC5 has moved on the display screen 7a. The decorative pattern 8L has 7 patterns. Regardless of the movement of the moving body XC5, the indication XC1 for suggesting hitting to the right is continuously displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(D), moving object movement effect B is performed. In this moving object movement effect B, the moving object XC5 moves further to the right on the display screen 7a. In this moving object movement effect B, when the moving object XC5 passes through the icon image XC3, the icon image XC3 is erased from the part that touches the moving object XC5. In addition, in the moving object movement effect B, the decoration pattern 8L is completely displayed in the post-movement area XC6 that expands as the moving object XC5 moves from left to right. Regardless of the movement of the moving body XC5, the indication XC1 for suggesting hitting to the right is continuously displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(E), moving object movement effect C is performed. In this moving object movement effect C, the moving object XC5 moves further to the right on the display screen 7a. In this moving object movement effect C, when the moving object XC5 passes through the icon image XC3, the icon image XC3 is erased from the part that touches the moving object XC5. In addition, in the moving body movement effect C, the decoration pattern 8C is gradually displayed in accordance with the movement of the moving body XC5 in the post-movement area XC6 that expands as the moving body XC5 moves from the left direction to the right direction. Regardless of the movement of the moving body XC5, the indication XC1 for suggesting hitting to the right is continuously displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(F), moving object movement effect D is performed. In this moving object movement effect D, the moving object XC5 moves further to the right on the display screen 7a. In this moving object movement effect D, when the moving object XC5 passes through the icon image XC3, the icon image XC3 is erased from the part that touches the moving object XC5. Further, in the moving object movement effect D, the decoration pattern 8C is completely displayed in the post-movement area XC6 that expands as the moving object XC5 moves from left to right. Regardless of the movement of the moving body XC5, the indication XC1 for suggesting hitting to the right is continuously displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(G), moving object movement effect E is performed. In this moving object movement effect E, the moving object XC5 moves further to the right on the display screen 7a. In this moving object movement effect E, when the moving object XC5 passes through the icon image XC3, the icon image XC3 is erased from the part that touches the moving object XC5. In addition, in the moving object movement effect E, the decorative pattern 8R and the character XC4 are gradually displayed in accordance with the movement of the moving object XC5 in the post-movement area XC6 that expands as the moving object XC5 moves from left to right. be. This character XC4 is a smiling face character. Regardless of the movement of the moving body XC5, the indication XC1 for suggesting hitting to the right is continuously displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(H), moving object movement effect F is performed. In this moving object movement effect F, the moving object XC5 moves further to the right on the display screen 7a. In this moving object movement effect F, when the moving object XC5 passes through the icon image XC3, the icon image XC3 is erased from the part that touches the moving object XC5. In addition, in the moving body movement effect F, the decoration pattern 8C and the character XC4 are completely displayed in the post-movement area XC6 that expands as the moving body XC5 moves from left to right. Regardless of the movement of the moving body XC5, the indication XC1 for suggesting hitting to the right is continuously displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(I), a moving object movement effect G is performed. In this moving object movement effect G, the moving object XC5 is reversed and moves from the right direction to the left direction on the display screen 7a. In this moving object movement effect G, the decorative pattern 8R and the character XC4 are erased from the part that touches the moving object XC5. That is, the decorative pattern 8R and the character XC4 are gradually erased as the moving body XC5 moves. Regardless of the movement of the moving body XC5, the indication XC1 for suggesting hitting to the right is continuously displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(J), moving object movement effect H is performed. In this moving body movement effect H, the moving body XC5 moves further leftward on the display screen 7a. In this moving object movement effect H, the decorative pattern 8R and the character XC4 are completely erased. Regardless of the movement of the moving body XC5, the indication XC1 for suggesting hitting to the right is continuously displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(K), moving object movement effect I is performed. In this moving body movement effect I, the moving body XC5 moves further leftward on the display screen 7a. In this moving object movement effect I, the decorative pattern 8C is erased from the part that touches the moving object XC5. That is, the decorative pattern 8C is gradually erased as the moving object XC5 moves. Regardless of the movement of the moving body XC5, the indication XC1 for suggesting hitting to the right is continuously displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(L), a moving object movement effect J is performed. In this moving body movement effect J, the moving body XC5 moves further leftward on the display screen 7a. In this moving body movement effect J, the decoration pattern 8C is completely erased. Regardless of the movement of the moving body XC5, the indication XC1 for suggesting hitting to the right is continuously displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(M), a moving object movement effect K is performed. In this moving object movement effect K, the moving object XC5 moves further leftward on the display screen 7a. In this moving body movement effect K, the decorative pattern 8L is erased from the part that touches the moving body XC5. That is, the decorative pattern 8L is gradually erased as the moving object XC5 moves. Regardless of the movement of the moving body XC5, the indication XC1 for suggesting hitting to the right is continuously displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(N), moving object movement effect L is performed. In this moving object movement effect L, the moving object XC5 moves further leftward on the display screen 7a. In this moving object movement effect L, the decorative pattern 8L is completely erased. Regardless of the movement of the moving object XC5, the indication XC1 for suggesting hitting to the right is continuously displayed.
After that, regardless of the movement of the moving body XC5, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are determined and stopped to form a losing or a jackpot symbol.

[Modification]
In the above-mentioned decorative symbol special variation effect C, in the moving object movement effects G to L, the decorative symbol or character is erased from the part that touches the moving object XC5. may be deleted from the portion superimposed on the moving object XC5.
The decorative symbol special variation performance B and the decorative symbol special variation performance C can be executed in different variations, and for example, they may be executed during the same game state (time saving state, probability variable state).

[Effect example]
In the decorative symbol special variation effects A to C, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are gradually displayed in accordance with the movement of the moving object in the moving object movement effect. According to this configuration, the display effect of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R can be expressed by contrast with the moving body, and the display effect of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R can be made interesting. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the decorative symbol special variation effects B to C, in the moving object movement effect, part of the decorative symbols are displayed in the post-movement area XC6, which is the area after the moving object XC5 moves. The display area of the decorative pattern is gradually increased in the enlarged post-movement area XC6. According to this configuration, since the movement of the moving body XC5 and the manner in which the decorative patterns are displayed are interlocked, it is possible to provide the player with a new variable performance of the decorative patterns, and the variable performance of the decorative patterns is mysterious. It can be sublimated into something interesting. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the decorative symbol special variation effects A to C, the decorative symbols are not displayed before the moving body movement effect in which the decorative symbols are gradually displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to sublimate the display of the decorative pattern in the moving object movement effect to a more mysterious and interesting one. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the decorative symbol special variation effect B, after the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed in the moving object movement effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are erased in the decorative symbol fade-out effect regardless of the movement of the moving object. be done. According to this configuration, it is possible to sublimate the display of the decorative pattern in the moving object movement effect to a more mysterious and interesting one. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the decorative symbol special variation effect B, after the moving object movement effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are enlarged in the decorative symbol enlargement effect, and are gradually faded and erased in the decorative symbol fade-out effect. According to this configuration, it is possible to sublimate the display of the decorative pattern in the moving object movement effect to a more mysterious and interesting one. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

The decorative symbol special fluctuation effects A to C are the same fluctuation, and are performed in a high base state (probability variable game state or time saving state) that is relatively advantageous to the player compared to the low base state (normal state). be Players have more expectations for big wins in the high base state than in the low base state. According to this configuration, the moving object movement effect is performed in a predetermined fluctuation in the high base state, thereby making the moving object movement effect more mysterious and increasing the expectation for the moving object movement effect. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect XC-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is a effect of displaying a moving object,
The second display effect is a effect of displaying a decorative pattern,
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, when the first display effect is being performed, the second display effect is performed, and when the first display effect and the second display effect are performed, The decorative pattern is gradually displayed in the second display effect as the moving body moves in the first display effect,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XC-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect XC-1,
In the combination effect, the second display effect displays a part of the decorative pattern in a post-movement area, which is an area after the movement of the moving body, and expands as the moving body moves. displaying so as to gradually increase the display area of the decorative pattern in the post-movement area;
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XC-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect XC-2,
In the combination effect, the decorative pattern is not displayed before the second display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XC-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect XC-3,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The third display effect is a effect in which the decorative pattern is erased,
The combination effect may include the third display effect,
In the combination effect, the third display effect is performed after the second display effect, and in the second display effect, after the decorative pattern is displayed in the post-movement area, the third display effect is performed. In the display effect, the decorative pattern is erased regardless of the movement of the moving body.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XC-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect XC-4,
In the combination effect, in the third display effect, when the decorative pattern is erased, it gradually fades and disappears while expanding,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XC-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect XC-5,
The game state of the gaming machine is always one of a plurality of game states including a first game state that is relatively disadvantageous to the player and a second game state that is relatively advantageous to the player. and
In the combination effect, the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect are the same variation and are performed during the second game state,
A gaming machine characterized by:

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in the game state management process of FIG. ), it shifts to idle time (low-probability short-time state). This play time is continued until the special symbol changes 700 times.

75 to 77, the decorative symbol missing effects A to C will be described below. This decorative symbol missing effect is executed during the decorative symbol variation effect in the normal state, the time-saving state (low-probability-low base state), or the probability-variable state (high-probability-high base state). That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the decorative pattern loss effect, the corresponding image data is read out from the ROM 103 and displayed on the image display device 7. An image is displayed on the screen 7a or the sub-display screen 64. FIG.

[Decorative pattern missing effect A]
FIG. 75 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol missing effect A. FIG. The decorative symbol missing effect A in FIG. 75 is an effect with the same variation of special symbols. In the decorative symbol missing effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 75(A), the decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C, and 8R are vertically varied on the display screen 7a substantially at the center of the display screen 7a. On the display screen 7a, the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed, but they are omitted in the figure.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(B), a ready-to-win state display effect is performed. In this ready-to-win state display performance, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with seven symbols, and the decorative symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with four symbols to form a ready-to-win state. Also, in the ready-to-reach state display effect, an icon image XD1 is displayed. This icon image XD1 represents a predetermined emblem. This icon image XD1 moves in the direction of the arrow in the drawing (the direction toward the decorative pattern 8C).

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(C), a moving object collision effect A is performed. In this moving body collision effect A, the icon image XD1 is a effect in which the icon image XD1 collides with the vicinity of the upper portion of the decorative pattern 8C. In this moving body collision effect A, the icon image XD1 collides with the decorative pattern 8C (four patterns), so that the collision portion of the decorative pattern 8C is lost and a missing portion XD2 is generated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(D), a moving body collision effect B is performed. In this moving object collision effect B, the icon image XD1 collides with the vicinity of the central portion of the decorative pattern 8C while the decorative pattern 8C expands and deforms. In this moving object collision effect B, the icon image XD1 collides with the decorative pattern 8C (four patterns), so that the collision part of the decorative pattern 8C is further lost, and a new missing part XD2 is generated. That is, in this moving object collision effect B, the defect part XD2 is expanded while the decorative pattern 8C expands and deforms.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(D), a moving object collision effect C is performed. In this moving object collision effect C, the icon image XD1 collides with the vicinity of the lower portion of the decorative pattern 8C while the decorative pattern 8C is further enlarged and deformed. In this moving body collision effect C, the icon image XD1 collides with the decorative pattern 8C (four patterns), so that the collision part of the decorative pattern 8C is further lost, and a new missing part XD2 is generated. That is, in this moving object collision effect C, the defective part XD2 is expanded while the decorative pattern 8C expands and deforms.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(F), a moving object collision effect D is performed. In this moving body collision effect D, the four decorative patterns 8C having a plurality of defective portions XD2 (enlarged defective portions XD2) are erased, and the decorative patterns 8C representing five new patterns are temporarily stopped and displayed in a ready-to-win state. forming Also, the icon image XD1 is displayed with its position changed. This icon image XD1 moves in the direction of the arrow in the drawing (the direction toward the decorative pattern 8C).

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(G), a moving object collision effect E is performed. In this moving object collision effect E, the icon image XD1 is a effect in which the icon image XD1 collides with the vicinity of the upper portion of the decorative pattern 8C. In this moving body collision effect E, the icon image XD1 collides with the decorative pattern 8C (five patterns), so that the collision portion of the decorative pattern 8C is lost, resulting in a missing portion XD2.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(H), a moving object collision effect F is performed. In this moving body collision effect F, the icon image XD1 collides with the vicinity of the central portion of the decorative pattern 8C while the decorative pattern 8C expands and deforms. In this moving object collision effect F, the icon image XD1 collides with the decorative pattern 8C (five patterns), so that the collision part of the decorative pattern 8C is further lost, and a new missing part XD2 is generated. That is, in this moving object collision effect F, the defect part XD2 is expanded while the decorative pattern 8C expands and deforms.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(I), a moving object collision effect G is performed. In this moving body collision effect G, the icon image XD1 collides with the vicinity of the lower part of the decorative pattern 8C while the decorative pattern 8C is further enlarged and deformed. In this moving object collision effect G, the icon image XD1 collides with the decorative pattern 8C (5 patterns), so that the colliding portion of the decorative pattern 8C is further lost, resulting in a new missing portion XD2. In other words, in this moving body collision effect G, the decorative pattern 8C expands and deforms while the missing portion XD2 expands.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(J), a super ready-to-win effect is performed. In this super ready-to-win production, seven decorative patterns 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed, and the decorative pattern 8C fluctuates at high speed to form a ready-to-win state, and an ally character CRA and an icon image XD1 are displayed, and an icon image is displayed. This is an effect in which XD1 launches an attack on the ally character CRA.
After that, using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, a losing symbol or a big hit symbol is displayed.

[Decorative pattern missing effect B]
FIG. 76 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol missing effect B. FIG. The decorative symbol missing effect B in FIG. 76 is an effect with the same variation of special symbols. In the decorative symbol missing effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 76(A), the decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C, and 8R are vertically varied on the display screen 7a substantially at the center of the display screen 7a. On the display screen 7a, a pending icon 9A and a variable icon 9C are displayed, but they are omitted in the drawing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(B), a ready-to-win state display effect is performed. In this ready-to-win state display performance, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with seven symbols, and the decorative symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with four symbols to form a ready-to-win state. Also, in the ready-to-reach state display effect, an icon image XD1 is displayed. This icon image XD1 represents a predetermined emblem. This icon image XD1 moves in the direction of the arrow in the drawing (the direction toward the decorative pattern 8C).

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(C), a moving object collision effect A is performed. In this moving body collision effect A, the icon image XD1 is a effect in which the icon image XD1 collides with the vicinity of the upper portion of the decorative pattern 8C. In this moving body collision effect A, the icon image XD1 collides with the decorative pattern 8C (four patterns), so that the collision portion of the decorative pattern 8C is lost and a missing portion XD2 is generated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(D), a moving object collision effect B is performed. In this moving object collision effect B, the icon image XD1 collides with the vicinity of the central portion of the decorative pattern 8C while the decorative pattern 8C expands and deforms. In this moving object collision effect B, the icon image XD1 collides with the decorative pattern 8C (four patterns), so that the collision part of the decorative pattern 8C is further lost, and a new missing part XD2 is generated. That is, in this moving object collision effect B, the defect part XD2 is expanded while the decorative pattern 8C expands and deforms.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(D), a moving object collision effect C is performed. In this moving object collision effect C, the icon image XD1 collides with the vicinity of the lower portion of the decorative pattern 8C while the decorative pattern 8C is further enlarged and deformed. In this moving body collision effect C, the icon image XD1 collides with the decorative pattern 8C (four patterns), so that the collision part of the decorative pattern 8C is further lost, and a new missing part XD2 is generated. That is, in this moving object collision effect C, the defective part XD2 is expanded while the decorative pattern 8C expands and deforms.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(F), a moving object collision effect D is performed. In this moving body collision effect D, the four decorative patterns 8C having a plurality of defective portions XD2 (enlarged defective portions XD2) are erased, and the decorative patterns 8C representing five new patterns are temporarily stopped and displayed in a ready-to-win state. forming Also, the icon image XD1 is displayed with its position changed. This icon image XD1 moves in the direction of the arrow in the drawing (the direction toward the decorative pattern 8C).

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(G), a moving object collision effect E is performed. In this moving object collision effect E, the icon image XD1 is a effect in which the icon image XD1 collides with the vicinity of the upper portion of the decorative pattern 8C. In this moving body collision effect E, the icon image XD1 collides with the decorative pattern 8C (five patterns), so that the collision portion of the decorative pattern 8C is lost, resulting in a missing portion XD2.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(H), a moving object collision effect F is performed. In this moving body collision effect F, the icon image XD1 collides with the vicinity of the central portion of the decorative pattern 8C while the decorative pattern 8C expands and deforms. In this moving object collision effect F, the icon image XD1 collides with the decorative pattern 8C (five patterns), so that the collision part of the decorative pattern 8C is further lost, and a new missing part XD2 is generated. That is, in this moving object collision effect F, the defect part XD2 is expanded while the decorative pattern 8C expands and deforms.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(I), a moving object collision effect G is performed. In this moving body collision effect G, the icon image XD1 collides with the vicinity of the lower part of the decorative pattern 8C while the decorative pattern 8C is further enlarged and deformed. In this moving object collision effect G, the icon image XD1 collides with the decorative pattern 8C (5 patterns), so that the colliding portion of the decorative pattern 8C is further lost, resulting in a new missing portion XD2. In other words, in this moving body collision effect G, the decorative pattern 8C expands and deforms while the missing portion XD2 expands.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(J), a decorative symbol restoration effect A is performed. In this decorative pattern repair effect A, the decorative pattern 8C (5 patterns) is partially repaired by light emitted from the icon image XD1, and the area of the missing part XD2 is reduced. Specifically, in the decorative pattern repair effect A, the missing parts XD2 in the middle and lower parts of the decorative pattern 8C are repaired to return to the state before the collision with the icon image XD1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(K), a decorative symbol restoration effect B is performed. In this decorative pattern repair effect B, the decorative pattern 8C (5 patterns) is completely repaired by the light emitted from the icon image XD1, and the missing part XD2 disappears. Specifically, in the decorative design repair effect B, the upper part of the decorative design 8C is further repaired, and the decorative design 8C completely returns to the state before colliding with the icon image XD1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(L), a super ready-to-win effect is performed. In this super ready-to-win production, seven decorative patterns 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed, and the decorative pattern 8C fluctuates at high speed to form a ready-to-win state, and an ally character CRA and an icon image XD1 are displayed and an icon image is displayed. This is an effect in which XD1 launches an attack on the ally character CRA.
After that, using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, a losing symbol or a big hit symbol is displayed.

[Decorative pattern missing effect C]
FIG. 77 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol missing effect C. FIG. The decorative symbol missing effect C in FIG. 77 is an effect with the same fluctuation of the special symbols. In the decorative symbol missing effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 77(A), the decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C, and 8R are vertically varied on the display screen 7a substantially at the center of the display screen 7a. On the display screen 7a, the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed, but they are omitted in the figure.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(B), a ready-to-win state display effect is performed. In this ready-to-win state display performance, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with seven symbols, and the decorative symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with four symbols to form a ready-to-win state. Also, in the ready-to-reach state display effect, an icon image XD1 is displayed. This icon image XD1 represents a predetermined emblem. This icon image XD1 moves in the direction of the arrow in the drawing (the direction toward the decorative pattern 8C).

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(C), a moving object collision effect A is performed. In this moving body collision effect A, the icon image XD1 is a effect in which the icon image XD1 collides with the vicinity of the upper portion of the decorative pattern 8C. In this moving body collision effect A, the icon image XD1 collides with the decorative pattern 8C (four patterns), so that the collision portion of the decorative pattern 8C is lost and a missing portion XD2 is generated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(D), a moving body collision effect B is performed. In this moving object collision effect B, the icon image XD1 collides with the vicinity of the central portion of the decorative pattern 8C while the decorative pattern 8C expands and deforms. In this moving object collision effect B, the icon image XD1 collides with the decorative pattern 8C (four patterns), so that the collision part of the decorative pattern 8C is further lost, and a new missing part XD2 is generated. That is, in this moving object collision effect B, the defect part XD2 is expanded while the decorative pattern 8C expands and deforms.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(D), a moving object collision effect C is performed. In this moving object collision effect C, the icon image XD1 collides with the vicinity of the lower portion of the decorative pattern 8C while the decorative pattern 8C is further enlarged and deformed. In this moving body collision effect C, the icon image XD1 collides with the decorative pattern 8C (four patterns), so that the collision part of the decorative pattern 8C is further lost, and a new missing part XD2 is generated. That is, in this moving object collision effect C, the defective part XD2 is expanded while the decorative pattern 8C expands and deforms.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(F), a moving object collision effect D is performed. In this moving body collision effect D, the four decorative patterns 8C having a plurality of defective portions XD2 (enlarged defective portions XD2) are erased, and the decorative patterns 8C representing five new patterns are temporarily stopped and displayed in a ready-to-win state. forming Also, the icon image XD1 is displayed with its position changed. This icon image XD1 moves in the direction of the arrow in the drawing (the direction toward the decorative pattern 8C).

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(G), a moving object collision effect E is performed. In this moving object collision effect E, the icon image XD1 is a effect in which the icon image XD1 collides with the vicinity of the upper portion of the decorative pattern 8C. In this moving body collision effect E, the icon image XD1 collides with the decorative pattern 8C (five patterns), so that the collision portion of the decorative pattern 8C is lost, resulting in a missing portion XD2.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(H), a moving object collision effect F is performed. In this moving body collision effect F, the icon image XD1 collides with the vicinity of the central portion of the decorative pattern 8C while the decorative pattern 8C expands and deforms. In this moving object collision effect F, the icon image XD1 collides with the decorative pattern 8C (five patterns), so that the collision part of the decorative pattern 8C is further lost, and a new missing part XD2 is generated. That is, in this moving object collision effect F, the defect part XD2 is expanded while the decorative pattern 8C expands and deforms.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(I), a moving object collision effect G is performed. In this moving body collision effect G, the icon image XD1 collides with the vicinity of the lower part of the decorative pattern 8C while the decorative pattern 8C is further enlarged and deformed. In this moving object collision effect G, the icon image XD1 collides with the decorative pattern 8C (5 patterns), so that the colliding portion of the decorative pattern 8C is further lost, resulting in a new missing portion XD2. In other words, in this moving body collision effect G, the decorative pattern 8C expands and deforms while the missing portion XD2 expands.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(J), a cut-in effect is performed. In this cut-in effect, the cut-in image XD3 is displayed so as to hide the decorative pattern 8C having the missing portion XD2 or the decorative patterns 8L and 8R. This cut-in image XD3 includes an icon image XD1 as a chance-up, the characters "It's super hot!" as a chance-up, and an ally character CRA as a chance-up.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(K), a decorative symbol restoration effect A is performed. In this decorative pattern repair effect A, the decorative pattern 8C (5 patterns) is partially repaired by light emitted from the icon image XD1, and the area of the missing part XD2 is reduced. Specifically, in the decorative pattern repair effect A, the missing parts XD2 in the middle and lower parts of the decorative pattern 8C are repaired to return to the state before the collision with the icon image XD1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(L), a decorative symbol restoration effect B is performed. In this decorative pattern repair effect B, the decorative pattern 8C (5 patterns) is completely repaired by the light emitted from the icon image XD1, and the missing part XD2 disappears. Specifically, in the decorative design repair effect B, the upper part of the decorative design 8C is further repaired, and the decorative design 8C completely returns to the state before colliding with the icon image XD1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(M), a super ready-to-win effect is performed. In this super ready-to-win production, seven decorative patterns 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed, and the decorative pattern 8C fluctuates at high speed to form a ready-to-win state, and an ally character CRA and an icon image XD1 are displayed and an icon image is displayed. This is an effect in which XD1 launches an attack on the ally character CRA.
After that, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are used to display the losing symbols or the big winning symbols.

[Modification]
In the above-mentioned decorative pattern loss productions A to C, the icon image XD1 is used as the moving object that collides with the decorative pattern, but the moving object is not limited to this. .
In the above-mentioned decorative pattern loss effects A to C, the moving object collision effect is performed for the decorative pattern in the reach state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the moving object collision effect is performed for the changing decorative pattern. You can do it. In this case, the decorative design during fluctuation may be a decorative design during low speed fluctuation, which is slower than the normal fluctuation.
In the above-mentioned decorative symbol missing effect C, the cut-in effect is performed after the moving object collision effect G, but the cut-in effect is not limited to this. It may be performed during the decorative pattern repair performance.

[Effect example]
In the above-mentioned decorative pattern missing effects A to C, the icon image XD1 as a moving body and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed. An effect is performed in which the collision part is lost and the missing part XD2 is generated. According to this configuration, the action of the icon image XD1 as a moving object can make the variation effect of the decorative symbols mysterious, and as a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

In the above-described decorative symbol loss effects A to C, when the missing part XD2 is generated in the decorative symbol 8C in the collision effect of the moving body, the size of the decorative symbol 8C increases as the missing part XD2 expands. According to this configuration, when the missing part XD2 is enlarged by the icon image XD1, the decorative pattern becomes larger, so that the enlargement of the missing part XD2 by the icon image XD1 can be emphasized, and the variation effect of the decorative pattern is more mysterious. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the above-mentioned decorative symbol loss effects A to C, when the missing part XD2 is generated in the decorative symbol 8C in the collision effect of the moving body, the decorative symbol 8C is deformed as the missing part XD2 expands. According to this configuration, when the missing part XD2 is enlarged by the icon image XD1, the decorative pattern is deformed, so that the enlargement of the missing part XD2 by the icon image XD1 can be emphasized, and the variation effect of the decorative pattern is more mysterious. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the decorative symbol loss effects A to C, in the moving object collision effects A to C, the missing part XD2 is generated and expanded in the decorative symbol 8C which is 4 symbols, and these 4 symbols disappear, and then the moving object collides. In productions D to G, production is performed in which a missing portion XD2 is generated and expanded in the decorative pattern 8C, which is one of the five patterns. According to this configuration, in the decorative pattern 8C, the different patterns are sequentially lost and enlarged, so that the variation performance of the decorative patterns can be made more mysterious, and as a result, the interest in the game can be improved. can.

In the decorative symbol loss effects A to C, in the moving object collision effects A to C, the missing part XD2 is generated and expanded in the decorative symbol 8C which is 4 symbols, and these 4 symbols disappear, and then the moving object collides. In productions D to G, a production is performed in which a missing portion XD2 is generated and expanded in the decorative pattern 8C, which is the 5 patterns, and then a super ready-to-win production is performed. According to this configuration, in the decorative pattern 8C, different patterns are sequentially lost and expanded, and furthermore, the super ready-to-win effect is developed thereafter, so that the variable effect of the decorative pattern can be made more mysterious. Furthermore, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the subsequent super ready-to-win effect. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.
[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect XD-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is a effect of displaying a predetermined moving object,
The second display effect is a effect of displaying the first decorative pattern,
The third display effect is a effect in which the collision part of the first decorative pattern is lost due to the collision of the predetermined moving object with the first decorative pattern,
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the second display effect is performed while the first display effect is being performed, and then the third display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XD-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect XD-1,
In the third display effect of the combination effect, the first decorative pattern becomes larger as the missing part expands,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XD-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect XD-2,
In the third display effect of the combination effect, the first decorative pattern is deformed as the missing part expands,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XD-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect XD-3,
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
In the fourth display effect, a second decorative pattern different from the first decorative pattern is displayed, and the moving body collides with the second decorative pattern to cause collision with the second decorative pattern. It is a production in which a part is missing,
The combination effect may include a fourth display effect,
In the combination effect, in the third display effect, after the missing part of the first decorative pattern is enlarged, the first decorative pattern disappears, and then the fourth display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XD-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect XD-4,
In the fourth display effect of the combination effect, the missing part of the second decorative pattern is expanded, and then the second decorative pattern disappears, and then the super reach effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Ceiling reaching schedule suggestion effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 78 to 80. FIG. This ceiling reaching schedule suggesting effect is executed during the variation effect of the decorative pattern. In other words, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the ceiling reaching schedule suggestion effect, the corresponding image data is read out from the ROM 103 and displayed on the image display device 7. Images are displayed on the display screen 7a and the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

[Ceiling reaching schedule indication A]
FIG. 78 is a diagram for explaining the ceiling reaching schedule suggestion effect A. FIG. The ceiling reaching schedule suggestion effect displays information (scheduled arrival information) related to the number of remaining fluctuations until b time reduction (play time) is reached in the normal state (normal probability state, non-time saving state and low base state). , is an effect that suggests to the player the number of times of variation (the number of games) until the play time is reached. The main control board 80 switches the game state to the time saving state (normal probability state, time saving state and high base state) when the number of fluctuations reaches 600 times in the normal state (normal probability state, non-time saving state and low base state). . Here, the number of fluctuations reaching the play time is called a ceiling, and the number of fluctuations reaching the number of fluctuations is also called a ceiling.

In the ceiling reaching schedule suggesting effect A, first, as shown in FIG. A game number display GS is displayed. Variation display of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is variation display corresponding to special figure 1 variation in normal state. The display of the pending icon 9A and the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C is omitted. The pending icon 9A and the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C may or may not be displayed.

The number-of-games display GS is displayed at the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, and includes a numerical value representing the number of games (number of fluctuations) after the end of the jackpot game. Here, the number of times of variation (the number of games) after the end of the jackpot game is 400, and the character image of "the number of games is 400" is displayed. The number of games displayed in the number-of-games display GS is not cleared by turning the gaming machine 1 on or off. The number of games displayed on the number-of-games display GS may be cleared by turning the power ON/OFF.

Also, in FIG. 78A, the number of remaining fluctuations until reaching the ceiling is 200, and the value TC of the ceiling effect counter is 201 (TC=201). The sub-RAM of the gaming machine 1 is set (stored) with a first threshold TH1=201, a second threshold TH2=51, a third threshold TH3=11, and a fourth threshold TH4=1 as thresholds for the ceiling effect counter. ing. Note that these threshold values are examples and can be set to arbitrary numerical values.

The sub-control board 90 determines whether or not the value TC of the ceiling effect counter is equal to the first threshold TH1 for each change. Then, when the value TC of the ceiling effect counter becomes equal to the first threshold TH1 (TC=TH1=201), as shown in FIG. After a predetermined time has passed since the variable display was displayed, the first arrival schedule information TJ is displayed on the display screen 7a. The arrival schedule information TJ is displayed at a first position in the center of the left end of the display screen 7a, and includes a mode image MG and remaining count information CD.

The mode image MG represents an effect mode that is executed after the number of times of variation reaches 600 (after reaching the ceiling) in the normal state. Since the game machine 1 of the present embodiment starts the "play time mode" effect after reaching the ceiling, an image showing the characters "play time mode" is displayed. The remaining number of times information CD is a character image of "until 200 times", and together with the mode image MG displayed above, can be read as "200 times until play time mode". The "200 times" portion indicates the number of remaining variations until reaching the ceiling, and corresponds to a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the value TC of the ceiling effect counter. When this arrival schedule information TJ is displayed, the player can know the number of remaining fluctuations until reaching b time reduction (play time).

The arrival schedule information TJ disappears before the change (change of TC=TH1=201) ends (stop display). That is, the arrival schedule information TJ is displayed after the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R when the value TC of the ceiling effect counter becomes equal to the first threshold value TH1 is displayed, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, The display disappears before the 8R variable display switches to the stop display. After the display of the arrival schedule information TJ disappears, the stop display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R is displayed.

After repeating the special figure 1 fluctuation a plurality of times from FIG. 78(B), the sub-control board 90 determines whether or not the value TC of the ceiling effect counter is equal to the second threshold TH2 for each fluctuation. Then, when the value TC of the ceiling effect counter becomes equal to the second threshold TH2 (TC=TH2=51), as shown in FIGS. , 8R after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the second arrival schedule information TJ is displayed on the display screen 7a. The arrival schedule information TJ is displayed at the second position in the center of the right end of the display screen 7a, and includes the mode image MG and the remaining number of times information CD as in the previous (first) display.

The mode image MG is a character image of "play time mode" similar to the previous time. The remaining number of times information CD is a character image of "90% achieved to", and together with the mode image MG displayed above, it is configured so that it can be read as "90% achieved to play time mode". . The "90%" part indicates the ratio (%) of the number of fluctuations executed so far (required number minus remaining number) to the number of fluctuations required to reach the ceiling (e.g. 600). there is This is the second display of the expected arrival information TJ. After knowing the number of remaining fluctuations once, I am in a state of not knowing again, and my heart is pounding. By displaying the arrival schedule information TJ for the second time, it is possible to give a sense of security after the excitement.

The second arrival schedule information TJ disappears before the change (change of TC=TH2=51) ends. That is, the second arrival schedule information TJ is displayed after the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed when the value TC of the ceiling effect counter becomes equal to the second threshold value TH2. The display disappears before the variable display of 8L, 8C, and 8R switches to the stop display. After the display of the arrival schedule information TJ disappears, the stop display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R is displayed.

After repeating the special figure 1 fluctuation a plurality of times from FIG. 78(D), the sub-control board 90 determines whether or not the value TC of the ceiling effect counter is equal to the third threshold TH3 for each fluctuation. Then, when the value TC of the ceiling effect counter becomes equal to the third threshold TH3 (TC=TH3=11), the sub-control board 90 reaches the display screen 7a for the third time, as shown in FIG. Display schedule information TJ. The arrival schedule information TJ is displayed at the first position in the center of the left end of the display screen 7a, and includes the mode image MG and the remaining count information CD as in the first (previous) and second (previous) displays. there is

After the third arrival schedule information TJ is displayed on the display screen 7a, the arrival schedule information TJ moves downward toward the lower left end of the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 78(F). When reaching the third position at the lower left corner of the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 78(G), the arrival schedule information TJ moves rightward toward the fourth position at the lower right corner of the display screen 7a. .

When the arrival schedule information TJ reaches the fourth position at the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, it is displayed vertically and adjacent to the game number display GS displayed at the lower right corner of the display screen 7a. Here, a rectangular frame image is newly displayed, and inside the frame image, the remaining number of times information CD of "10 times to go" and the number of games display GS of "590 games" are displayed vertically side by side.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 78(H), even after the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed, the display of the third arrival schedule information TJ is maintained. The third arrival schedule information TJ is kept displayed at the fourth position at the lower right corner of the display screen 7a until the ceiling is reached (until the number of fluctuations in the normal state reaches the ceiling reaching number).

From FIG. 78(H), the special figure 1 variation is repeated multiple times, and when the ceiling effect counter value TC equals the fourth threshold TH4 (TC=TH4=1), as shown in FIGS. 78(I) and (J) , the remaining number of times information CD of the arrival schedule information TJ becomes "0 until", and the game number display GS becomes "600 games".

When the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed and the next variation is started, the value TC of the ceiling effect counter becomes 0 (zero), and the main control board 80 changes the game state to the normal state (normal probability state). And switch from non-time-saving state and low-base state) to time-saving state (normal probability state, time-saving state and high-base state). As a result, b time saving (play time) is entered. Here, since the special figure 1 reservation remains, the special figure 1 lottery of the time saving state is executed after rushing.

As shown in FIG. 78(K), the display of the arrival schedule information TJ disappears from the display screen 7a, and the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 78(L), a mode image MG of "play time mode" and a start image TN of "rush" are displayed. As a result, it is notified that the ceiling has been reached and the "play time mode" effect has started.

[Ceiling reaching schedule suggestion production B]
FIG. 79 is a diagram for explaining ceiling reaching schedule suggestion effect B. FIG. The ceiling reaching schedule suggestion production displays information (scheduled arrival information) related to the number of remaining fluctuations until b time reduction (play time) is reached in normal time (normal probability state, non-time saving state and low base state), This is an effect that suggests to the player the number of times of variation (the number of games) until the play time is reached. The main control board 80 switches the game state to the time saving state (normal probability state, time saving state and high base state) when the number of fluctuations reaches 600 times in the normal state (normal probability state, non working time saving state and low base state). . Here, the number of fluctuations reaching the play time is called a ceiling, and the number of fluctuations reaching the number of fluctuations is also called a ceiling.

In FIG. 79A, the number of remaining variations until reaching the ceiling is 200, and the value TC of the ceiling effect counter is 201 (TC=201). The sub-RAM of the gaming machine 1 is set (stored) with a first threshold TH1=201, a second threshold TH2=51, a third threshold TH3=11, and a fourth threshold TH4=1 as thresholds for the ceiling effect counter. ing. Note that these threshold values are examples and can be set to arbitrary numerical values.

The sub-control board 90 determines whether or not the value TC of the ceiling effect counter is equal to the first threshold TH1 for each change. Then, when the value TC of the ceiling effect counter becomes equal to the first threshold TH1 (TC=TH1=201), as shown in FIG. Display schedule information TJ. The arrival schedule information TJ is displayed in a large size at a first position near the center of the display screen 7a, and includes a mode image MG and remaining count information CD.

The mode image MG represents an effect mode that is executed after the number of times of variation reaches 600 (after reaching the ceiling) in the normal state. Since the game machine 1 of the present embodiment starts the "play time mode" effect after reaching the ceiling, an image showing the characters "play time mode" is displayed. The remaining number of times information CD includes a character image of "until 200 times", a rectangular meter image, and a percentage image of "40%".
The text image of "until 200 times" is configured so that it can be read as "until play time mode 200 times" together with the mode image MG displayed above. The "200 times" portion indicates the number of remaining variations until reaching the ceiling, and corresponds to a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the value TC of the ceiling effect counter. The ratio image represented by "40%" indicates the ratio (%) of the remaining number of times until reaching the ceiling with respect to the required number of fluctuations (for example, 600) until reaching the ceiling. In the meter image, the numerical value of the ratio image corresponds to the area of the specific color region, and the area of the specific color region decreases as the numerical value of the ratio image decreases. When this arrival schedule information TJ is displayed, the player can know the degree of the remaining number of fluctuations until reaching b time reduction (play time).

As shown in FIG. 79(A), the display screen 7a also displays a variable display of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and a game number display GS representing the number of games (number of variations) after the end of the jackpot game. be done. Variation display of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is variation display corresponding to special figure 1 variation. The display of the pending icon 9A and the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C is omitted. The pending icon 9A and the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C may or may not be displayed.

The number-of-games display GS is displayed at the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, and includes a numerical value representing the number of games (number of fluctuations) after the end of the jackpot game. Here, the number of times of variation (the number of games) after the end of the jackpot game is 400, and the character image of "the number of games is 400" is displayed. The number of games displayed in the number-of-games display GS is not cleared by turning the gaming machine 1 on or off. The number of games displayed on the number-of-games display GS may be cleared by turning the power ON/OFF.

The arrival schedule information TJ disappears before the change (change of TC=TH1=201) ends. That is, the arrival schedule information TJ is displayed after the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R is displayed when the value TC of the ceiling effect counter becomes equal to the first threshold value TH1, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C are displayed. , 8R disappear before the change display switches to the stop display. After the display of the arrival schedule information TJ disappears, as shown in FIG. 79(B), the stop display of "567" of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R is displayed.

After repeating the special figure 1 fluctuation a plurality of times from FIG. 79(B), the sub-control board 90 determines whether or not the value TC of the ceiling effect counter is equal to the second threshold TH2 for each fluctuation. Then, when the value TC of the ceiling effect counter becomes equal to the second threshold TH2 (TC=TH2=51), the sub-control board 90 reaches the display screen 7a for the second time, as shown in FIG. Display schedule information TJ. The second scheduled arrival information TJ is displayed at the same first position as the first scheduled arrival information TJ. That is, it is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. The arrival schedule information TJ for the second time includes the mode image MG and the remaining number of times information CD, similarly to the time when it was displayed last time. When the arrival schedule information TJ is displayed, the display areas of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R that have been variably displayed are reduced.

The mode image MG is a character image of "play time mode" similar to the previous time. The remaining number of times information CD includes a character image of "50 more times", a rectangular meter image, and a percentage image of "10%". The character image of "50 more times" is configured to read "50 times until play time mode" together with the mode image MG displayed above. The percentage image represented by "10%" indicates the ratio (%) of the remaining number of times until reaching the ceiling with respect to the required number of fluctuations (for example, 600) until reaching the ceiling. In the meter image, the numerical value of the ratio image corresponds to the area of the specific color region, and the area of the specific color region decreases as the numerical value of the ratio image decreases. This is the second display of the expected arrival information TJ, and 150 times have passed since the previous display/erasure of the first expected arrival information TJ in FIG. 79(A). , Once I knew the number of remaining fluctuations, I was in a state of not knowing again, and my heart was pounding. By displaying the arrival schedule information TJ for the second time, it is possible to give a sense of security after the excitement.

After the arrival schedule information TJ is displayed for the second time, as shown in FIG. 79(D), the arrival schedule information TJ moves toward the lower right corner of the display screen 7a while being reduced in size. When it reaches the second position at the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, it is displayed vertically side by side with the game number display GS displayed at the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, adjacent to each other. The second arrival schedule information TJ is kept displayed at the second position at the lower right corner of the display screen 7a until it reaches the ceiling (until the number of fluctuations in the normal state reaches the ceiling reaching number). As the arrival schedule information TJ is reduced and moved, the display areas of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that have been variably displayed are enlarged.

After that, as shown in FIG. 79(E), while the arrival schedule information TJ is displayed, the fake arrival schedule information tj is displayed in a large size. Whether or not to display the false arrival schedule information tj is randomly determined by lottery for each variation pattern. Here, it is assumed that the display is determined by lottery. Further, although the false arrival schedule information tj is displayed at the same time as the arrival schedule information TJ is displayed here, it may be displayed at a time after the time when the arrival schedule information TJ is displayed. Further, the scheduled arrival information TJ may be displayed after the variation in which the false scheduled arrival information tj is displayed. Like the arrival schedule information TJ, the false arrival schedule information tj includes the mode image mg and the false remaining count information cd.

The mode image mg is a character image of "play time mode" like the mode image MG. The false remaining number of times information cd includes a character image of "10 times until", a rectangular meter image, and a percentage image of "2%". The text image of "until 10 times" is configured so that it can be read as "until play time mode 10 times" together with the mode image MG displayed above. The "10 times" portion is a numerical value different from the number of remaining fluctuations until reaching the ceiling, and indicates the false remaining number of fluctuations. The false number of changes remaining may be greater or less than the actual number of changes remaining and is determined randomly. The "10 times" portion is then decremented by one for each variation. The ratio image represented by "2%" indicates the ratio (%) of false remaining counts to the ceiling with respect to the required number of variations (eg, 600) to reach the ceiling. In the meter image, the numerical value of the ratio image corresponds to the area of the specific color region, and the area of the specific color region decreases as the numerical value of the ratio image decreases. When this false arrival schedule information tj is displayed, the player misunderstands that it is the number of remaining fluctuations until reaching b time reduction (play time).

After the false arrival schedule information tj is displayed, as shown in FIG. 79(F), the false arrival schedule information tj moves toward the lower left end of the display screen 7a while being reduced in size. When it reaches the lower left end of the display screen 7a, it is displayed side by side with the arrival schedule information TJ displayed at the lower right end of the display screen 7a so as to be adjacent to each other. The player is confused as to which of the expected arrival information TJ and the false expected arrival information tj is the correct information. As a result, it is possible to make the player's heart throb and improve the interest.

After repeating the special figure 1 fluctuation multiple times from FIG. 79 (F), as shown in FIG. Then, at the same time, a character image of "false" is displayed to notify that the false arrival schedule information tj is fake. After that, as shown in FIG. 79(H), the display of the false arrival schedule information tj disappears. The arrival schedule information TJ is continuously displayed.

From FIG. 79(H), the special figure 1 variation is repeated multiple times, and when the value TC of the ceiling effect counter is equal to the fourth threshold TH4 (TC=TH4=1), as shown in FIGS. 79(I) and (J) , the remaining number of times information CD of the arrival schedule information TJ becomes "0 until", and the game number display GS becomes "600 games".

When the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed at "789" and the next fluctuation is started, the value TC of the ceiling effect counter becomes 0 (zero), and the main control board 80 changes the game state to the normal state. Switch from (normal probability state, non-time saving state and low base state) to time saving state (normal probability state, time saving state and high base state). As a result, b time saving (play time) is entered. Here, since the special figure 1 reservation remains, the special figure 1 lottery of the time saving state is executed after rushing.

As shown in FIG. 79(K), the display of the arrival schedule information TJ disappears from the display screen 7a, and the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 79(L), a mode image MG of "play time mode" and a start image TN of "rush" are displayed. As a result, it is notified that the ceiling has been reached and the "play time mode" effect has started.

[Ceiling reaching schedule suggestion production C]
FIG. 80 is a diagram for explaining the ceiling reaching schedule suggestion effect C. FIG. The ceiling reaching schedule suggestion production displays information (scheduled arrival information) related to the number of remaining fluctuations until b time reduction (play time) is reached in normal time (normal probability state, non-time saving state and low base state), This is an effect that suggests to the player the number of times of variation (the number of games) until the play time is reached. The main control board 80 switches the game state to the time saving state (normal probability state, time saving state and high base state) when the number of fluctuations reaches 600 times in the normal state (normal probability state, non-time saving state and low base state). . Here, the number of fluctuations reaching the play time is called a ceiling, and the number of fluctuations reaching the number of fluctuations is also called a ceiling.

In FIG. 80(A), the number of remaining fluctuations until reaching the ceiling is 200, and the value TC of the ceiling effect counter is 201 (TC=201). The sub-RAM of the gaming machine 1 is set (stored) with a first threshold TH1=201, a second threshold TH2=51, a third threshold TH3=11, and a fourth threshold TH4=1 as thresholds for the ceiling effect counter. ing. Note that these threshold values are examples and can be set to arbitrary numerical values.

The sub-control board 90 determines whether or not the value TC of the ceiling effect counter is equal to the first threshold TH1 for each change. Then, when the value TC of the ceiling effect counter becomes equal to the first threshold value TH1 (TC=TH1=201), as shown in FIG. Display schedule information TJ. The arrival schedule information TJ is displayed in a large size at a first position near the center of the display screen 7a, and includes a mode image MG and remaining count information CD.

The mode image MG represents an effect mode that is executed after the number of times of variation reaches 600 (after reaching the ceiling) in the normal state. Since the game machine 1 of the present embodiment starts the mode effect represented by the smiley face image after reaching the ceiling, the smiley face image and the characters "mode" are displayed. The remaining number of times information CD is a character image of "coming soon", and together with the mode image MG displayed above, it is configured so that it can be read as "coming soon to smiley face image mode". The part "coming soon" qualitatively indicates the number of remaining fluctuations until reaching the ceiling, and corresponds to the value TC of the ceiling effect counter. In this way, the remaining number of times information CD may have qualitative contents other than numerical values. Here, according to the number of remaining fluctuations until reaching the ceiling, "not yet", "good condition", "soon", "a little more", "almost achieved", and "achieved" are displayed in order. When this arrival schedule information TJ is displayed, the player can generally know the degree of the number of remaining fluctuations until reaching b time saving (play time).

As shown in FIG. 80(A), the display screen 7a also displays variable display of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and a game number display GS representing the number of games (number of variations) after the end of the jackpot game. be done. Variation display of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is variation display corresponding to special figure 1 variation. The display of the pending icon 9A and the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C is omitted. The pending icon 9A and the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C may or may not be displayed.

The number-of-games display GS is displayed at the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, and includes a numerical value representing the number of games (number of fluctuations) after the end of the jackpot game. Here, the number of times of variation (the number of games) after the end of the jackpot game is 400, and the character image of "the number of games is 400" is displayed. The number of games displayed in the number-of-games display GS is not cleared by turning the gaming machine 1 on or off. The number of games displayed on the number-of-games display GS may be cleared by turning the power ON/OFF.

The arrival schedule information TJ disappears before the change (change of TC=TH1=201) ends. That is, the arrival schedule information TJ is displayed after the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R is displayed when the value TC of the ceiling effect counter becomes equal to the first threshold value TH1, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C are displayed. , 8R disappear before the change display switches to the stop display. After the display of the arrival schedule information TJ disappears, as shown in FIG. 80(B), the stop display of "567" of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R is displayed.

After repeating the special figure 1 fluctuation a plurality of times from FIG. 80(B), the sub-control board 90 determines whether or not the value TC of the ceiling effect counter is equal to the second threshold TH2 for each fluctuation. Then, when the value TC of the ceiling effect counter becomes equal to the second threshold TH2 (TC=TH2=51), as shown in FIG. 80(C), the sub control board 90 reaches the display screen 7a for the second time. Display schedule information TJ. The second scheduled arrival information TJ is displayed at the same first position as the first scheduled arrival information TJ. That is, it is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. The arrival schedule information TJ for the second time includes the mode image MG and the remaining number of times information CD, similarly to the time when it was displayed last time. When the arrival schedule information TJ is displayed, the display areas of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R that have been variably displayed are reduced.

The mode image MG is a character image of "play time mode" similar to the previous time. The remaining number of times information CD is a character image of "just a little more", and together with the mode image MG displayed above, it is constructed so that it can be read as "just a little more to smile face image mode". This is the second display of the expected arrival information TJ, and 150 times have passed since the previous display/erasure of the expected arrival information TJ in FIG. 80(A). , Once I know the degree of the remaining number of fluctuations, I am in a state of not knowing again, and my heart is pounding. This second display can give a sense of security after the excitement.

After the arrival schedule information TJ is displayed for the second time, as shown in FIG. 80(D), the arrival schedule information TJ moves toward the lower right end of the display screen 7a while being reduced in size. When it reaches the second position at the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, it is displayed vertically side by side with the game number display GS displayed at the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, adjacent to each other. The second arrival schedule information TJ is kept displayed at the second position at the lower right corner of the display screen 7a until it reaches the ceiling (until the number of fluctuations in the normal state reaches the ceiling reaching number). As the arrival schedule information TJ is reduced and moved, the display areas of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that have been variably displayed are enlarged.

After that, as shown in FIG. 80(E), even after the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that have been variably displayed are stopped and displayed, the display of the arrival schedule information TJ is continued. As shown in FIG. 80(F), when the next variation is started, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R that have been stopped and displayed are again variably displayed. On the other hand, the arrival schedule information TJ continues to display the same content without being changed from the previous change. In addition, as shown in FIG. 80(G), even after the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that have been variably displayed are stopped and displayed, the display of the arrival schedule information TJ is continued. The arrival schedule information TJ is continuously displayed with the same content without being changed from the previous change. That is, the remaining number of times information CD is a character image of "just a little more", and does not change with each change, but changes after a certain number of changes.

After repeating the special figure 1 fluctuation a plurality of times from FIG. 80(G), the sub-control board 90 determines whether or not the value TC of the ceiling effect counter is equal to the third threshold TH3 for each fluctuation. Then, when the value TC of the ceiling effect counter becomes equal to the third threshold TH3 (TC=TH3=11), as shown in FIG. Change the contents of the CD. Specifically, the character image of "a little more" is changed to "almost achieved".

From FIG. 80 (H), the special figure 1 fluctuation is repeated multiple times, and when the value TC of the ceiling effect counter becomes equal to the fourth threshold TH4 (TC=TH4=1), as shown in FIGS. 80 (I) and (J) , further changes the contents of the remaining number of times information CD of the arrival schedule information TJ. Specifically, the character image of "almost achieved" is changed to "achieved". The number of games displayed GS is "600 games".

When the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed at "678" and the next fluctuation is started, the value TC of the ceiling effect counter becomes 0 (zero), and the main control board 80 changes the game state to the normal state. Switch from (normal probability state, non-time saving state and low base state) to time saving state (normal probability state, time saving state and high base state). As a result, b time saving (play time) is entered. Here, since the special figure 1 reservation remains, the special figure 1 lottery of the time saving state is executed after rushing.

As shown in FIG. 80(K), the display of the arrival schedule information TJ disappears from the display screen 7a, and the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 80(L), a mode image MG of "smiley face image mode" and a start image TN of "rush" are displayed. As a result, it is notified that the ceiling has been reached and the "smiley face image mode" effect has started.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the ceiling reaching schedule suggestion effect will be shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 78A to 78E, in the normal state, the arrival schedule information TJ, which is information related to the number of remaining fluctuations until reaching the ceiling achievement number, is displayed. a second effect in which the display of the expected arrival information TJ disappears in the normal state after the first effect; and after the second effect, the expected arrival information TJ is displayed again in the normal state. and a third effect to be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 79 and 80. FIG.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 78(E) to (J), in the third effect, the arrival schedule information TJ continues to be displayed until the number of fluctuations in the normal state reaches the ceiling reaching number. be. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 79 and 80. FIG.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 78, the arrival schedule information TJ includes a mode image representing an effect mode (play time mode) executed after the number of fluctuations in the normal state reaches the ceiling number. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 79 and 80. FIG.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 78(L), a mode image representing the effect mode is displayed at the start of the effect mode executed after reaching the ceiling. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 79 and 80. FIG.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 79, the arrival schedule information TJ is displayed at the first position of the display screen 7a in the first presentation, and the arrival schedule information TJ is displayed in the third presentation. is displayed at the first position, then moves to the second position on the display screen 7a while being reduced, and is continuously displayed at the second position. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIG. 80 as well.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 78, the arrival schedule information TJ includes a numerical image representing the number of remaining fluctuations until the number of times of reaching the ceiling is reached. At position 2, a numerical image representing the number of games is displayed adjacent to the arrival schedule information TJ. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIG. 79 as well.

[Modification]
Below, a modified example of the ceiling reaching schedule suggestion effect will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the ceiling reaching schedule suggesting effects A and B, the remaining count information CD corresponds to a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the value TC of the ceiling effect counter. However, the remaining number of times information CD may correspond to the value TC of the ceiling effect counter. For example, in the above embodiment, the remaining number of times information CD is displayed as 0 at the time of the fluctuation just before reaching the ceiling, but the remaining number of times information CD is 1 at the time of the fluctuation just before reaching the ceiling. Thus, the idle time mode may be started without displaying the state where the remaining count information CD becomes 0.

[Modification 2]
In the ceiling reaching schedule suggestion performance B, the timing at which the false reaching schedule information tj is displayed is determined at random. That is, the false arrival schedule information tj may be displayed before the arrival schedule information TJ is displayed. Further, either the remaining count information CD of the scheduled arrival information TJ or the false remaining count information cd of the false scheduled arrival information tj may become 0 first. For example, even if the remaining number of times information CD of the arrival schedule information TJ becomes 0 first in a state where the false remaining number of times information cd of the false arrival schedule information tj is not 0, and the remaining number of times information CD play time mode is entered. good.

[Modification 3]
In the ceiling reaching schedule suggestion performance B, the remaining number of times information CD includes a character image of "200 times until", a rectangular meter image, and a percentage image of "40%". . However, the remaining count information CD may be at least one of them.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect A10-1]
a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images;
A gaming machine comprising game state switching means for switching the game state to a second game state when the number of fluctuations in the first game state reaches a specific number of times,
A first effect in which, in the first game state, arrival schedule information, which is information related to the number of remaining fluctuations until the specific number of times is reached, is displayed;
a second effect in which the display of the expected arrival information disappears in the first game state after the first effect;
After the second effect, in the first game state, a third effect in which the expected arrival information is displayed again,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A10-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A10-1,
In the third effect, the display of the expected arrival information is continued until the number of fluctuations in the first game state reaches the specific number of times.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A10-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect A10-1 or aspect A10-2,
The arrival schedule information includes a mode image representing an effect mode to be executed after the number of fluctuations in the first game state reaches the specific number of times.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A10-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect A10-3,
The mode image is displayed at the start of the production mode,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A10-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A10-1 to A10-4,
In the first effect, the expected arrival information is displayed at a first position of the display means,
In the third effect, the expected arrival information is displayed at the first position, then moves to the second position of the display means while being reduced, and is continuously displayed at the second position. Ru
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A10-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect A10-5,
The arrival schedule information includes a numerical image representing the number of remaining fluctuations until the specific number of times is reached,
In the third effect, a numerical image representing the number of games is displayed adjacent to the expected arrival information at the second position.
A gaming machine characterized by:

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in the game state management process of FIG. When it reaches the ceiling), it shifts to idle time (low-probability short-time state). This play time is continued until the special symbol changes 700 times. In the present embodiment, the display mode during the normal state is also referred to as the normal mode, and the display mode during the low-probability short working hours (free time) is also referred to as the "short running time mode". Hereinafter, in the low-probability state (normal state), ``when the number of variations of the special symbol reaches 500 times (when the ceiling counter reaches 0)'' is also simply referred to as ``when the ceiling is reached''.

Mode-indicating image display effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 81 to 83. FIG. This mode suggestive image display effect is executed during the variation effect of the decorative symbols in the normal state (low probability state) or the time saving state (low probability low base state). That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a mode-indicating image display effect, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image display device 7. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a or the sub-display screen 64. FIG.

[Mode suggestion image display effect A]
FIG. 81 is a diagram for explaining the mode suggesting image display effect A. FIG. In this mode suggestive image display effect A, in the low probability state (normal state), the number of fluctuations in the special pattern before reaching the ceiling (ceiling count is 0), the number of fluctuations when reaching the ceiling, and the number after reaching the ceiling Represents each display effect in variation. Specifically, in the mode-indicating image display effect A, the ceiling front effect A is a display effect when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is three fluctuations remaining until the ceiling is reached, and the ceiling front effect B is the fluctuation of the special symbol. The number of times is a display effect when there are 2 fluctuations remaining until reaching the ceiling, and the pre-ceiling effect C is a display effect when the number of fluctuations of the special pattern is 1 change until reaching the ceiling, and ceiling reaching effects A to C. is the display effect when the number of fluctuations of the special pattern is 0 fluctuations until reaching the ceiling (reaching the ceiling), and the ceiling reaching production D is when the number of fluctuations of the special pattern has changed by 1 after reaching the ceiling, in other words , It is a display effect when it fluctuates by 1 after entering the fast running time mode (play time), and the ceiling reaching effect E is when the number of times of fluctuation of the special pattern changes by a predetermined value (for example, 10 fluctuations) after reaching the ceiling. This is a display effect when a predetermined variation (for example, 10 variation) occurs after entering the time saving mode (play time). In the mode suggesting image display effect in FIG. 81, the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, but they are omitted in the drawing.

In this mode suggesting image display effect A, in the ceiling front effect A shown in FIG. A first mode suggestion image XE1 and a remaining variation count display XE2 are displayed. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are misplaced patterns. Specifically, seven patterns are stop-displayed for the decorative design 8L, four patterns are stop-displayed for the decorative design 8C, and the decorative design 8R is 8 symbols are stopped and displayed. Also, the first mode suggesting image XE1 is an image suggesting the short running time mode, and has a rectangular shape. That is, in this pre-ceiling effect A, the first mode suggesting image XE1 is displayed even though the game state is the normal state and the display mode is the normal mode. Further, the remaining variation count display XE2 is displayed in association with the first mode suggestive image XE1, and indicates the remaining variation count until reaching the ceiling. In the pre-ceiling effect A, since the number of fluctuations of the special symbols is 3 fluctuations remaining until reaching the ceiling, the remaining fluctuation number display XE2 is expressed as "3 remaining times".

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(B), in the front ceiling effect B, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed from approximately the center to the left of the display screen 7a, and the first pattern is displayed from approximately the center to the lower right. The mode suggestive image XE1 and the remaining variation count display XE2 are continuously displayed. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are misplaced patterns. Specifically, 9 patterns of the decorative pattern 8L are stopped and displayed, 8 patterns of the decorative pattern 8C are stopped and displayed, and the decorative pattern 8R is 4 symbols are stopped and displayed. In this pre-ceiling effect B, the first mode suggestion image XE1 is displayed although the game state is the normal state and the display mode is the normal mode. Further, the remaining variation count display XE2 is displayed in association with the first mode suggestive image XE1. In the pre-ceiling effect B, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is two fluctuations remaining until reaching the ceiling, so the remaining number of fluctuations display XE2 is expressed as "remaining two times".

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(C), in the front ceiling effect C, decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed from approximately the center to the left of the display screen 7a, and the first pattern is displayed from approximately the center to the lower right. The mode suggestive image XE1 and the remaining variation count display XE2 are continuously displayed. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are misplaced patterns. Specifically, the decorative pattern 8L has 5 patterns stopped and displayed, the decorative pattern 8C has 4 patterns stopped and displayed, and the decorative pattern 8R is 7 symbols are stopped and displayed. In this pre-ceiling effect C, the first mode suggesting image XE1 is displayed even though the game state is the normal state and the display mode is the normal mode. Further, the remaining variation count display XE2 is displayed in association with the first mode suggestive image XE1. In the pre-ceiling effect C, since the number of fluctuations of the special symbol remains one fluctuation until reaching the ceiling, the remaining number of fluctuations display XE2 is expressed as "one remaining number".

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(D), in the ceiling reaching effect A, the remaining fluctuation count display XE2 is continuously displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a, and the right-handed hitting display XE3 is displayed on the upper right. The time saving mode entry suggestion image XE4 is displayed substantially in the center. The hitting right display XE3 is a display suggesting the launch direction of the game ball to the player, specifically, a display suggesting hitting right to the player. The short running time mode entry suggestion image XE4 is an image that suggests to the player that the short running time mode has been entered, and is labeled with "Congratulations!". In the ceiling reaching effect A, the number of fluctuations of the special symbols has reached the ceiling, so the remaining number of fluctuations display XE2 is represented as "remaining 0 number".

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(E), in the ceiling reaching effect B, the right hitting display XE3 is continuously displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a, and the second mode suggesting image XE5 is displayed on the lower left. . The second mode-suggesting image XE5 is an image suggesting the short-running mode. The second mode suggestive image XE5 has a trapezoidal shape, which is different from the shape of the first mode suggestive image XE1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(F), in the ceiling reaching effect C, the right hitting display XE3 is continuously displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a, and the mode explanation image XE6 is displayed substantially in the center. This mode explanation image XE6 is an image representing the explanation of the short running time mode, and specifically, it is displayed as "a big hit if the movable role can be moved", that is, the short running time mode is a movable role (for example, If the first movable accessory 14 or the second movable accessory 15) moves (moves) from the retracted position to the expanded position, it means that a big win is achieved.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(G), in the ceiling reaching effect D, the right-handed hitting display XE3 is continuously displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a, and the second mode suggesting image XE5 is displayed on the lower left of the display screen 7a. Decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed from approximately the center to the right. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are misplaced patterns. Specifically, 9 patterns of the decorative pattern 8L are stop-displayed, 4 patterns of the decorative pattern 8C are stop-displayed, and the decorative pattern 8R is 8 symbols are stopped and displayed. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R in the ceiling reaching effect D are the same size as the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R in the ceiling front effects AC.

Next, after a predetermined change (for example, after 10 changes) from the ceiling reaching effect D, as shown in FIG. The second mode suggesting image XE5 is erased from the lower left, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are continuously displayed from the approximate center to the right. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are misplaced patterns. Specifically, 9 patterns of the decorative pattern 8L are stop-displayed, 5 patterns of the decorative pattern 8C are stop-displayed, and the decorative pattern 8R is 7 symbols are stopped and displayed. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R in the ceiling reaching effect E have the same size as the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R in the ceiling front effects AC.
After that, the effect similar to the ceiling reaching effect E is performed during the short running time mode.

[Mode suggestion image display effect B]
FIG. 82 is a diagram for explaining a mode suggestion image display effect B. FIG. In this mode suggestive image display effect B, the number of fluctuations in the special pattern in the low probability state (normal state) is the number fluctuation before reaching the ceiling (the ceiling count is 0), the number when reaching the ceiling, and the number after reaching the ceiling. Represents each display effect in variation. Specifically, in the mode suggestive image display effect B, the pre-ceiling effect A is a display effect when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 3 fluctuations remaining until reaching the ceiling, and the pre-ceiling effect B is the fluctuation of the special symbol. The number of times is a display effect when there are 2 fluctuations remaining until reaching the ceiling, and the pre-ceiling effect C is a display effect when the number of fluctuations of the special pattern is 1 change until reaching the ceiling, and ceiling reaching effects A to C. is the display effect when the number of fluctuations of the special pattern is 0 fluctuations until reaching the ceiling (reaching the ceiling), and the ceiling reaching production D is when the number of fluctuations of the special pattern has changed by 1 after reaching the ceiling, in other words , It is a display effect when it fluctuates by 1 after entering the fast running time mode (play time), and the ceiling reaching effect E is when the number of times of fluctuation of the special pattern changes by a predetermined value (for example, 10 fluctuations) after reaching the ceiling. This is a display effect when a predetermined variation (for example, 10 variation) occurs after entering the time saving mode (play time). In the mode suggestive image display effect in FIG. 82, the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, but they are omitted in the figure.

In this mode suggesting image display effect B, in the ceiling front effect A shown in FIG. 82(A), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed from approximately the center to the left of the display screen 7a, and from approximately the center to the lower right. A first mode suggestion image XE1 and a remaining variation count display XE2 are displayed. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are misplaced patterns. Specifically, seven patterns are stop-displayed for the decorative design 8L, four patterns are stop-displayed for the decorative design 8C, and the decorative design 8R is 8 symbols are stopped and displayed. Also, the first mode suggesting image XE1 is an image suggesting the short running time mode, and has a rectangular shape. That is, in this pre-ceiling effect A, the first mode suggesting image XE1 is displayed even though the game state is the normal state and the display mode is the normal mode. Further, the remaining variation count display XE2 is displayed in association with the first mode suggestive image XE1, and indicates the remaining variation count until reaching the ceiling. In the pre-ceiling effect A, since the number of fluctuations of the special symbols is 3 fluctuations remaining until reaching the ceiling, the remaining fluctuation number display XE2 is expressed as "3 remaining times".

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(B), in the front ceiling effect B, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed from approximately the center to the left of the display screen 7a, and the first pattern is displayed from approximately the center to the lower right. The mode suggestive image XE1 and the remaining variation count display XE2 are continuously displayed. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are misplaced patterns. Specifically, 9 patterns of the decorative pattern 8L are stopped and displayed, 8 patterns of the decorative pattern 8C are stopped and displayed, and the decorative pattern 8R is 4 symbols are stopped and displayed. In this pre-ceiling effect B, the first mode suggestion image XE1 is displayed although the game state is the normal state and the display mode is the normal mode. Further, the remaining variation count display XE2 is displayed in association with the first mode suggestive image XE1. In the pre-ceiling effect B, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is two fluctuations remaining until reaching the ceiling, so the remaining number of fluctuations display XE2 is expressed as "remaining two times".

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(C), in the front ceiling effect C, decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed from approximately the center to the left of the display screen 7a, and the first pattern is displayed from approximately the center to the lower right. The mode suggestive image XE1 and the remaining variation count display XE2 are continuously displayed. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are misplaced patterns. Specifically, the decorative pattern 8L has 5 patterns stopped and displayed, the decorative pattern 8C has 4 patterns stopped and displayed, and the decorative pattern 8R is 7 symbols are stopped and displayed. In this pre-ceiling effect C, the first mode suggesting image XE1 is displayed even though the game state is the normal state and the display mode is the normal mode. Further, the remaining variation count display XE2 is displayed in association with the first mode suggestive image XE1. In the pre-ceiling effect C, since the number of fluctuations of the special symbol remains one fluctuation until reaching the ceiling, the remaining number of fluctuations display XE2 is expressed as "one remaining number".

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(D), in the ceiling reaching effect A, the remaining fluctuation count display XE2 is continuously displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a, and the right-handed hitting display XE3 is displayed on the upper right. The time saving mode entry suggestion image XE4 is displayed substantially in the center. The hitting right display XE3 is a display suggesting the launching direction of the game ball to the player, specifically, a display suggesting hitting right to the player. The short running time mode entry suggestion image XE4 is an image that suggests to the player that the short running time mode has been entered, and is labeled with "Congratulations!". In the ceiling reaching effect A, the number of fluctuations of the special symbols has reached the ceiling, so the remaining number of fluctuations display XE2 is represented as "remaining 0 number".

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(E), in the ceiling reaching effect B, the right-handed display XE3 is continuously displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a, and the second mode suggesting image XE5 is displayed from below the approximate center. Displayed in the lower right corner. The second mode-suggesting image XE5 is an image suggesting the short-running mode. The second mode suggestive image XE5 is rectangular and has the same shape as the first mode suggestive image XE1. However, the second mode suggestive image XE5 is formed larger than the first mode suggestive image XE1. The display position of the second mode suggestive image XE5 is the same as the display position of the first mode suggestive image XE1. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display position of the second mode suggestive image XE5 may be different from the display position of the first mode suggestive image XE1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(F), in the ceiling reaching effect C, the right hitting display XE3 is continuously displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a, and the mode explanation image XE6 is displayed substantially in the center. This mode explanation image XE6 is an image representing the explanation of the short running time mode, and specifically, it is displayed as "a big hit if the movable role can be moved", that is, the short running time mode is a movable role (for example, If the first movable accessory 14 or the second movable accessory 15) moves (moves) from the retracted position to the expanded position, it means that a big win is achieved.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(G), in the ceiling reaching effect D, the right-handed display XE3 is continuously displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a, and the second mode suggesting image XE5 is displayed from below the approximate center. It is displayed toward the lower right, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed from approximately the center to the right. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are misplaced patterns. Specifically, 9 patterns of the decorative pattern 8L are stop-displayed, 4 patterns of the decorative pattern 8C are stop-displayed, and the decorative pattern 8R is 8 symbols are stopped and displayed. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R in the ceiling reaching effect D are the same size as the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R in the ceiling front effects AC.

Next, after a predetermined change (for example, after 10 changes) from the ceiling reaching effect D, as shown in FIG. The second mode suggesting image XE5 is erased from the lower left, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are continuously displayed from the approximate center to the right. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are misplaced patterns. Specifically, 9 patterns of the decorative pattern 8L are stop-displayed, 5 patterns of the decorative pattern 8C are stop-displayed, and the decorative pattern 8R is 7 symbols are stopped and displayed. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R in the ceiling reaching effect E have the same size as the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R in the ceiling front effects AC.
After that, the effect similar to the ceiling reaching effect E is performed during the short running time mode.

[Mode suggestion image display effect C]
FIG. 83 is a diagram for explaining the mode suggestion image display effect C. FIG. This mode suggestive image display effect C is the number fluctuation before the number of special symbol fluctuations reaches the ceiling (ceiling count is 0) in the low probability state (normal state), the number when reaching the ceiling, and the number after reaching the ceiling Represents each display effect in variation. Specifically, in the mode-indicative image display effect C, the ceiling front effect A is a display effect when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 3 remaining until reaching the ceiling, and the ceiling front effect B is the fluctuation of the special symbol. The number of times is a display effect when there are 2 fluctuations remaining until reaching the ceiling, and the pre-ceiling effect C is a display effect when the number of fluctuations of the special pattern is 1 change until reaching the ceiling, and ceiling reaching effects A to C. is a display effect when the number of fluctuations of the special pattern is 0 fluctuations until reaching the ceiling (reaching the ceiling), and the ceiling reaching production D is when the number of fluctuations of the special pattern has changed by 1 after reaching the ceiling, in other words , It is a display effect when it fluctuates by 1 after entering the fast running time mode (play time), and the ceiling reaching effect E is when the number of times of fluctuation of the special pattern changes by a predetermined value (for example, 10 fluctuations) after reaching the ceiling. This is a display effect when a predetermined variation (for example, 10 variation) occurs after entering the time saving mode (play time). In the mode suggestive image display effect in FIG. 83, the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, but they are omitted in the figure.

In this mode-indicative image display effect C, in the ceiling front effect A shown in FIG. A first mode suggestion image XE1 and a remaining variation count display XE2 are displayed. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are misplaced patterns. Specifically, seven patterns are stop-displayed for the decorative design 8L, four patterns are stop-displayed for the decorative design 8C, and the decorative design 8R is 8 symbols are stopped and displayed. Also, the first mode suggesting image XE1 is an image suggesting the short running time mode, and has a rectangular shape. That is, in this pre-ceiling effect A, the first mode suggesting image XE1 is displayed even though the game state is the normal state and the display mode is the normal mode. Further, the remaining variation count display XE2 is displayed in association with the first mode suggestive image XE1, and indicates the remaining variation count until reaching the ceiling. In the pre-ceiling effect A, since the number of fluctuations of the special symbols is 3 fluctuations remaining until reaching the ceiling, the remaining fluctuation number display XE2 is expressed as "3 remaining times".

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(B), in the front ceiling effect B, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed from approximately the center to the left of the display screen 7a, and the first pattern is displayed from approximately the center to the lower right. The mode suggestive image XE1 and the remaining variation count display XE2 are continuously displayed. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are misplaced patterns. Specifically, 9 patterns of the decorative pattern 8L are stopped and displayed, 8 patterns of the decorative pattern 8C are stopped and displayed, and the decorative pattern 8R is 4 symbols are stopped and displayed. In this pre-ceiling effect B, the first mode suggestion image XE1 is displayed although the game state is the normal state and the display mode is the normal mode. Further, the remaining variation count display XE2 is displayed in association with the first mode suggestive image XE1. In the pre-ceiling effect B, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is two fluctuations remaining until reaching the ceiling, so the remaining number of fluctuations display XE2 is expressed as "remaining two times".

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(C), in the front ceiling effect C, decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed from approximately the center to the left of the display screen 7a, and the first pattern is displayed from approximately the center to the lower right. The mode suggestive image XE1 and the remaining variation count display XE2 are continuously displayed. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are misplaced patterns. Specifically, the decorative pattern 8L has 5 patterns stopped and displayed, the decorative pattern 8C has 4 patterns stopped and displayed, and the decorative pattern 8R is 7 symbols are stopped and displayed. In this pre-ceiling effect C, the first mode suggesting image XE1 is displayed even though the game state is the normal state and the display mode is the normal mode. Further, the remaining variation count display XE2 is displayed in association with the first mode suggestive image XE1. In the pre-ceiling effect C, since the number of fluctuations of the special symbol remains one fluctuation until reaching the ceiling, the remaining number of fluctuations display XE2 is expressed as "one remaining number".

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(D), in the ceiling reaching effect A, the remaining fluctuation number display XE2 is continuously displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a, and the right-handed hitting display XE3 is displayed on the upper right side. The time saving mode entry suggestion image XE4 is displayed substantially in the center. The hitting right display XE3 is a display suggesting the launch direction of the game ball to the player, specifically, a display suggesting hitting right to the player. The short running time mode entry suggestion image XE4 is an image that suggests to the player that the short running time mode has been entered, and is labeled with "Congratulations!". In the ceiling reaching effect A, the number of fluctuations of the special symbols has reached the ceiling, so the remaining number of fluctuations display XE2 is represented as "remaining 0 number".

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(E), in the ceiling reaching effect B, the right-handed display XE3 is continuously displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a, and the second mode suggesting image XE5 is displayed from below the approximate center. Displayed in the lower right corner. The second mode-suggesting image XE5 is an image suggesting the short-running mode. The second mode suggestive image XE5 is rectangular and has the same shape as the first mode suggestive image XE1. However, the second mode suggestive image XE5 is formed larger than the first mode suggestive image XE1. The display position of the second mode suggestive image XE5 is the same as the display position of the first mode suggestive image XE1. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display position of the second mode suggestive image XE5 may be different from the display position of the first mode suggestive image XE1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(F), in the ceiling reaching effect C, the right hitting display XE3 is continuously displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a, and the mode explanation image XE6 is displayed substantially in the center. This mode explanation image XE6 is an image representing the explanation of the short running time mode, and specifically, it is displayed as "a big hit if the movable role can be moved", that is, the short running time mode is a movable role (for example, If the first movable accessory 14 or the second movable accessory 15) moves (moves) from the retracted position to the expanded position, it means that a big win is achieved.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(G), in the ceiling reaching effect D, the right-handed display XE3 is continuously displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a, and the second mode suggesting image XE5 is displayed from below the approximate center. It is displayed toward the lower right, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed from approximately the center to the right. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are misplaced patterns. Specifically, 9 patterns of the decorative pattern 8L are stop-displayed, 4 patterns of the decorative pattern 8C are stop-displayed, and the decorative pattern 8R is 8 symbols are stopped and displayed. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R in the ceiling reaching effect D are displayed smaller than the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R in the ceiling front effects AC.

Next, after a predetermined change (for example, after 10 changes) from the ceiling reaching effect D, as shown in FIG. The second mode suggesting image XE5 is erased from the lower left, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are continuously displayed from the approximate center to the right. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are misplaced patterns. Specifically, 9 patterns of the decorative pattern 8L are stop-displayed, 5 patterns of the decorative pattern 8C are stop-displayed, and the decorative pattern 8R is 7 symbols are stopped and displayed. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R in the ceiling reaching effect E are displayed smaller than the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R in the ceiling front effects AC.
After that, the effect similar to the ceiling reaching effect E is performed during the short running time mode.

[Modification]
In the mode suggestive image display effect A, the shapes of the first mode suggestive image XE1 and the second mode suggestive image XE5 are different. The written characters "blow-up time reduction mode" are the same. However, it is not limited to this, and the characters written in the first mode suggestive image XE1 and the second mode suggestive image XE5 may be different.

[Effect example]
In the mode suggestive image display effects A to C, in the normal state, before the number of fluctuations in the special pattern reaches the ceiling, despite the normal mode in the normal state, the short run time mode (play time) Display the first mode suggestive image XE1 suggesting , and then change from the normal state to the low-probability short-time state by reaching the ceiling, and the display mode is changed from the normal mode to the short-running time mode. WHEREIN: The 2nd mode suggestion image XE5 which suggests short working hours mode is displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to give the player a feeling of anticipation for the bursting time reduction mode before reaching the ceiling, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In the mode suggestive image display effects A to C, the first mode suggestive image XE1 is displayed in association with the remaining variation count display XE2. According to this configuration, it is possible to give the player a higher sense of anticipation for the bursting time reduction mode before reaching the ceiling, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In the mode suggestive image display effects A to C, the second mode suggestive image XE5 is erased after a predetermined change after the number of fluctuations of the special symbols reaches the ceiling (predetermined number of times: 500). According to this configuration, since the second mode suggesting image XE5 is deleted after the display mode enters the short working hours mode, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the display effect of the short working hours mode. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the mode suggestive image display effects A to C, when the vehicle reaches the ceiling (before the second mode suggestive image XE5 is erased), a mode explanatory image XE6, which is an image representing the description of the fast running mode, is displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to convey the details of the explosive short-time mode while giving the player an expectation of the explosive short-time mode, so that the expectation of the explosive short-time mode can be dramatically increased. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the above-described mode suggestive image display effects A to C, when the ball reaches the ceiling, the right-handed display XE3 is displayed before the second mode suggestive image XE5 is displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be urged to launch a game ball when entering the short running time mode, and the player can be prevented from being disadvantaged. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect XE-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
The game machine performs a game in one game state out of a plurality of game states including a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state, and performs the game in the first game state. state, when the number of variations of the special symbols reaches a predetermined number, the game state is changed to the second game state, and when the game state is the second game state, the display mode of the display means shifts to a specific mode,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
In the first display effect, the game state is the first game state, and before the number of variations of the special symbol reaches the predetermined number, the game state is the first game state. , an effect of displaying a first mode suggesting image suggesting the specific mode in the second gaming state;
In the second display effect, the game state is changed from the first game state to the second game state by the number of times of variation of the special symbols reaching a predetermined number of times, and the display mode is changed to the specific game state. an effect of displaying a second mode suggesting image suggesting the specific mode when shifting to a mode,
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, and then the second display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XE-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect XE-1,
In the first display effect of the combination effect, the first mode suggesting image is displayed in association with the remaining number of times up to the predetermined number of times.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XE-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect XE-2,
In the second display effect of the combination effect, the second mode suggesting image is erased after the number of times of variation of the special symbol reaches the predetermined number of times and reaches a specific number of times.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XE-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect XE-3,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The third display effect is a effect in which a mode explanation display representing an explanation of the specific mode is performed,
The combination effect may include the third display effect,
In the combination effect, the third display effect is performed before the second mode suggestive image is erased in the second display effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XE-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect XE-4,
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fourth display effect is a effect in which a direction suggesting display that suggests the launch direction of the game ball is performed,
The combination effect may include the fourth display effect,
In the combination effect, the fourth display effect is performed before the second mode suggestion image is displayed in the second display effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in the game state management process of FIG. When it reaches the ceiling), it shifts to idle time (low-probability short-time state). This play time is continued until the special symbol changes 700 times. In the present embodiment, the display mode during the normal state is also referred to as the normal mode, and the display mode during the low-probability short working hours (free time) is also referred to as the "short running time mode". Hereinafter, in the low-probability state (normal state), ``when the number of variations of the special symbol reaches 500 times (when the ceiling counter reaches 0)'' is also simply referred to as ``when the ceiling is reached''.

In addition, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, at the end of the jackpot game, in the gaming state setting process of FIG. 32, when the V flag is OFF (step 2301: NO) (that is, when transitioning to the low-probability short-time gaming state) In, 100 is set to the time saving counter (step S2303) (that is, the low probability time saving game state is performed after the big hit until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 100 times), but not limited to this, the low after the big hit When shifting to the definite working hours gaming state, the low definite working hours state may be continued until the number of fluctuations of the special symbols reaches 499 times. Also, in the game state setting process of FIG. 32, when the V flag is ON (step 2301: YES) (that is, when shifting to the high-accuracy time-saving game state), 100 is set to the time-saving count (step S2308). , After the big hit, the high-probability time-saving state is performed until the number of fluctuations in the special pattern reaches 100 times. There may be cases where the low-probability short-time state continues until it becomes.
The following mode suggestive image continuation effects A to C are, in this way, when the low probability short working hours state continues until the number of fluctuations of the special symbols after the big hit reaches 499 times, or the fluctuation of the special symbols after the high probability short working hours state It is an effect that can occur when the low probability short working hours state continues until the number of times reaches 499 times.
In addition, when the number of fluctuations in the special design reaches 499 times after the jackpot, or when the number of fluctuations in the special design reaches 499 times after the high probability time saving state, "When the fluctuation occurs before reaching the ceiling" call.

Mode-indicating image continuation effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 84 to 86. FIG. This mode suggestive image continuation effect is executed during the variation effect of the decorative symbols in the normal state (low probability state) or the time saving state (low probability low base state) in the game state. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the mode suggesting image continuation effect, the corresponding image data is read out from the ROM 103 and the image display device 7 is displayed. An image is displayed on the display screen 7 a or the sub-display screen 64 .

[Mode suggestion image continuation effect A]
FIG. 84 is a diagram for explaining the mode suggestive image continuation effect A. FIG. This mode suggestive image continuation effect A is, in the low probability state (normal state), the number fluctuation before the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches the ceiling reaching fluctuation, the ceiling reaching fluctuation, and the fluctuation when reaching the ceiling Represents display effects. Specifically, in the mode-indicating image continuation effect A, the effect before the ceiling is a display effect when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is three fluctuations remaining before the change before reaching the ceiling, and the effect before the ceiling is the special symbol. is a display effect when the number of fluctuations of is 2 fluctuations remaining until the fluctuation before reaching the ceiling, and the before ceiling production C is a display production when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 1 fluctuation remaining until the fluctuation before reaching the ceiling, The fluctuation performances A to B before reaching the ceiling are display performances at the time of fluctuation before reaching the ceiling. It is a display effect when entering the time saving mode (play time). In this mode suggestive image continuation effect A, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, but they are omitted in the figure.

In this mode suggestive image continuation effect A, in the ceiling front effect A shown in FIG. A short running time mode suggestion image XF1 and a remaining variation count display XF2 are displayed. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are misplaced patterns. Specifically, seven patterns are stop-displayed for the decorative design 8L, four patterns are stop-displayed for the decorative design 8C, and the decorative design 8R is 8 symbols are stopped and displayed. In addition, the explosive short working hours mode suggestive image XF1 is an image suggesting that the gaming state is the low-probability short working hours state, that is, an image suggesting the short short working hours mode, and has a trapezoidal shape. The explosive short working hours mode suggestion image XF1 includes characters “runaway short working hours mode” and various effects. In addition, the remaining fluctuation count display XF2 is displayed in association with the explosive short working hours mode suggestion image XF1, the remaining number of times until the gaming state shifts from the low probability short working hours state to the normal state, in other words, the fluctuation before reaching the ceiling Represents the remaining number of times. In the pre-ceiling effect A, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 3 fluctuations remaining until the fluctuation before reaching the ceiling, so the remaining fluctuation number display XF2 is expressed as "remaining 3 times".

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(B), in the front ceiling effect B, decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed from approximately the center to the left of the display screen 7a, and from the bottom to the bottom right of the approximately center, the short running time mode is displayed. The suggestive image XF1 and the remaining variation count display XF2 are continuously displayed. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are misplaced patterns. Specifically, 9 patterns of the decorative pattern 8L are stopped and displayed, 8 patterns of the decorative pattern 8C are stopped and displayed, and the decorative pattern 8R is 4 symbols are stopped and displayed. In addition, the remaining variation count display XF2 is displayed in association with the short running time mode suggestion image XF1. In the pre-ceiling effect B, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is two fluctuations remaining until the fluctuation before reaching the ceiling.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(C), in the ceiling front effect C, decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed from approximately the center to the left of the display screen 7a, and from the bottom to the bottom right of the approximately center, the short time mode is displayed. The suggestive image XF1 and the remaining variation count display XF2 are continuously displayed. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are misplaced patterns. Specifically, the decorative pattern 8L has 5 patterns stopped and displayed, the decorative pattern 8C has 4 patterns stopped and displayed, and the decorative pattern 8R is 7 symbols are stopped and displayed. In addition, the remaining variation count display XF2 is displayed in association with the short running time mode suggestion image XF1. In the pre-ceiling effect C, the number of fluctuations of the special symbols is 1 fluctuation remaining until the fluctuation before reaching the ceiling, so the remaining fluctuation number display XF2 is expressed as "1 remaining number".

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(D), in the pre-ceiling fluctuation effect A, an enlarged short running time mode suggestive image XF1 is displayed substantially in the center of the display screen 7a.
Then, as shown in FIG. 84(E), in the pre-ceiling variation effect B, decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed from approximately the center to the left of the display screen 7a, and from approximately the center to the lower right. The short running mode suggestion image XF1 and the remaining variation count display XF2 are displayed. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are misplaced patterns. Specifically, 9 patterns of the decorative pattern 8L are stop-displayed, 4 patterns of the decorative pattern 8C are stop-displayed, and the decorative pattern 8R is 8 symbols are stopped and displayed. In addition, the remaining variation count display XF2 is displayed in association with the short running time mode suggestion image XF1. In the pre-ceiling fluctuation effect B, the effect is the pre-ceiling fluctuation, that is, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 0 remaining fluctuations until the pre-ceiling fluctuation, so the remaining fluctuation number display XF2 is "0 remaining times". is represented. That is, in this ceiling-before-reaching fluctuation effect B, the explosive short working hours mode suggestion image XF1 is displayed although the gaming state is changed from the low-probability short working hours state to the normal state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (F), in the ceiling reaching effect, decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed from approximately the center to the left of the display screen 7a, and from approximately the center to the bottom right, the short running time mode is suggested. An image XF1 is displayed, and a right-hand shot display XF4 is displayed on the upper right. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are misplaced patterns. Specifically, 9 patterns of the decorative pattern 8L are stop-displayed, 5 patterns of the decorative pattern 8C are stop-displayed, and the decorative pattern 8R is 7 symbols are stopped and displayed. The right-handed display XF4 is a display that suggests the direction in which the game ball is launched to the player, and more specifically, is a display that suggests the player to hit right-handed.
After that, when the jackpot is not hit, the bursting time saving mode is continued, and the production is continued in a low probability time saving state like the ceiling reaching production. In addition, after reaching the ceiling, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 700 times, the game state is changed from the low probability short working time state to the normal state, the short running time mode ends, and the display of the short running time mode suggestion image XF1 also ends. .

[Mode suggestion image continuation effect B]
FIG. 85 is a diagram for explaining the mode suggesting image continuation effect B. FIG. This mode suggestive image continuation effect B is, in the low probability state (normal state), the number fluctuation before the number of special symbol fluctuations reaches the ceiling reaching fluctuation, the ceiling reaching fluctuation, and the fluctuation when reaching the ceiling Represents display effects. Specifically, in the mode suggestive image continuation effect B, the ceiling front effect A is a display effect when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is three fluctuations remaining until the fluctuation before reaching the ceiling, and the ceiling front effect B is the special pattern. is a display effect when the number of fluctuations of is 2 fluctuations remaining until the fluctuation before reaching the ceiling, and the before ceiling production C is a display production when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 1 fluctuation remaining until the fluctuation before reaching the ceiling, The fluctuation performances A to B before reaching the ceiling are display performances at the time of fluctuation before reaching the ceiling. It is a display effect when entering the time saving mode (play time). In this mode suggesting image continuation effect B, the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, but they are omitted in the figure.

In this mode suggestive image continuation effect B, in the ceiling front effect A shown in FIG. 85(A), decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed from approximately the center to the left side of the display screen 7a, and the short running time mode suggestive image is displayed on the lower side. XF1 and remaining fluctuation count display XF2 are displayed. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are misplaced patterns. Specifically, seven patterns are stop-displayed for the decorative design 8L, four patterns are stop-displayed for the decorative design 8C, and the decorative design 8R is 8 symbols are stopped and displayed. In addition, the explosive short working hours mode suggestive image XF1 is an image suggesting that the gaming state is the low-probability short working hours state, that is, an image suggesting the short short working hours mode, and has a trapezoidal shape. The explosive short working hours mode suggestion image XF1 includes characters “runaway short working hours mode” and various effects. In addition, the remaining fluctuation count display XF2 is displayed in association with the explosive short working hours mode suggestion image XF1, the remaining number of times until the gaming state shifts from the low probability short working hours state to the normal state, in other words, the fluctuation before reaching the ceiling Represents the remaining number of times. In the pre-ceiling effect A, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 3 fluctuations remaining until the fluctuation before reaching the ceiling, so the remaining fluctuation number display XF2 is expressed as "remaining 3 times". In addition, the short running time mode suggestion image XF1 and the change count display XF2 move from the right to the left on the display screen 7a, and when they reach the left end, they appear again from the right end and move left again.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(B), in the front ceiling effect B, decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed from approximately the center to the left side of the display screen 7a, and an image XF1 suggesting the short running time mode and the remainder are displayed on the lower side. The change count display XF2 is continuously displayed. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are misplaced patterns. Specifically, 9 patterns of the decorative pattern 8L are stopped and displayed, 8 patterns of the decorative pattern 8C are stopped and displayed, and the decorative pattern 8R is 4 symbols are stopped and displayed. In addition, the remaining variation count display XF2 is displayed in association with the short running time mode suggestion image XF1. In the pre-ceiling effect B, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is two fluctuations remaining until the fluctuation before reaching the ceiling. In addition, the short running time mode suggestion image XF1 and the change count display XF2 move from the right to the left on the display screen 7a, and when they reach the left end, they appear again from the right end and move left again.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(C), in the front ceiling effect C, decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed from approximately the center to the left side of the display screen 7a, and an image XF1 suggesting the short running time mode and the remainder are displayed on the lower side. The change count display XF2 is continuously displayed. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are misplaced patterns. Specifically, the decorative pattern 8L has 5 patterns stopped and displayed, the decorative pattern 8C has 4 patterns stopped and displayed, and the decorative pattern 8R is 7 symbols are stopped and displayed. In addition, the remaining variation count display XF2 is displayed in association with the short running time mode suggestion image XF1. In the pre-ceiling effect C, the number of fluctuations of the special symbols is 1 fluctuation remaining until the fluctuation before reaching the ceiling, so the remaining fluctuation number display XF2 is expressed as "1 remaining number". In addition, the short running time mode suggestion image XF1 and the change count display XF2 move from the right to the left on the display screen 7a, and when they reach the left end, they appear again from the right end and move left again.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(D), in the pre-ceiling fluctuation effect A, an enlarged fast running time mode suggestive image XF1 is displayed substantially in the center of the display screen 7a.
Then, as shown in FIG. 85(E), in the variable effect B before reaching the ceiling, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed from the approximate center to the left of the display screen 7a, and the lower side indicates the short running time mode. An image XF1 and a remaining variation count display XF2 are displayed. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are misplaced patterns. Specifically, 9 patterns of the decorative pattern 8L are stop-displayed, 4 patterns of the decorative pattern 8C are stop-displayed, and the decorative pattern 8R is 8 symbols are stopped and displayed. In addition, the remaining variation count display XF2 is displayed in association with the short running time mode suggestion image XF1. In the pre-ceiling fluctuation effect B, the effect is the pre-ceiling fluctuation, that is, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 0 remaining fluctuations until the pre-ceiling fluctuation, so the remaining fluctuation number display XF2 is "0 remaining times". is represented. That is, in this ceiling-before-reaching fluctuation effect B, the explosive short working hours mode suggestion image XF1 is displayed although the gaming state is changed from the low-probability short working hours state to the normal state. In addition, the short running time mode suggestion image XF1 and the change count display XF2 move from the right to the left on the display screen 7a, and when they reach the left end, they appear again from the right end and move left again.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(F), in the ceiling reaching effect, decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed from approximately the center to the left side of the display screen 7a, and an image XF1 suggesting the fast speed mode is displayed below. , right-handed display XF4 is displayed on the upper right. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are misplaced patterns. Specifically, 9 patterns of the decorative pattern 8L are stop-displayed, 5 patterns of the decorative pattern 8C are stop-displayed, and the decorative pattern 8R is 7 symbols are stopped and displayed. The right-handed display XF4 is a display that suggests the direction in which the game ball is launched to the player, and more specifically, is a display that suggests the player to hit right-handed. In addition, the short running time mode suggestive image XF1 moves from the right to the left on the display screen 7a, and when it reaches the left end, it appears again from the right end and moves left again.
After that, when the jackpot is not hit, the bursting time saving mode is continued, and the production is continued in a low probability time saving state like the ceiling reaching production. In addition, after reaching the ceiling, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 700 times, the game state is changed from the low probability short working time state to the normal state, the short running time mode ends, and the display of the short running time mode suggestion image XF1 also ends. .

[Mode suggestion image continuation effect C]
FIG. 86 is a diagram for explaining the mode suggesting image continuation effect C. FIG. This mode suggestive image continuation effect C is, in the low probability state (normal state), the number fluctuation before the number of special symbol fluctuations reaches the ceiling reaching fluctuation, the ceiling reaching fluctuation, and the fluctuation when reaching the ceiling Represents display effects. Specifically, in the mode suggestive image continuation effect C, the ceiling front effect A is a display effect when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is three fluctuations remaining until the fluctuation before reaching the ceiling, and the ceiling front effect B is the special symbol. is a display effect when the number of fluctuations of is 2 fluctuations remaining until the fluctuation before reaching the ceiling, and the before ceiling production C is a display production when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 1 fluctuation remaining until the fluctuation before reaching the ceiling, The fluctuation performances A to B before reaching the ceiling are display performances at the time of fluctuation before reaching the ceiling. It is a display effect when entering the time saving mode (play time). In this mode suggesting image continuation effect C, the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, but they are omitted in the figure.

In this mode suggestive image continuation effect C, in the ceiling front effect A shown in FIG. A change count display XF2 is displayed. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are misplaced patterns. Specifically, seven patterns are stop-displayed for the decorative design 8L, four patterns are stop-displayed for the decorative design 8C, and the decorative design 8R is 8 symbols are stopped and displayed. In addition, the explosive time-saving mode suggestion image XF1 is an image that suggests that the gaming state is a low probability time-saving state, that is, an image that suggests the explosive time-saving mode. formed in The explosive short working hours mode suggestion image XF1 includes characters “runaway short working hours mode” and various effects. In addition, the remaining fluctuation count display XF2 is displayed in association with the explosive short working hours mode suggestion image XF1, the remaining number of times until the gaming state shifts from the low probability short working hours state to the normal state, in other words, the fluctuation before reaching the ceiling Represents the remaining number of times. In the pre-ceiling effect A, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 3 fluctuations remaining until the fluctuation before reaching the ceiling, so the remaining fluctuation number display XF2 is expressed as "remaining 3 times". In addition, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed on the front side of the short running time mode suggestion image XF1 (characters, effects, etc.). In other words, the short running time mode suggestive image XF1 is displayed behind the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. In addition, in the image XF1 suggesting the short running time mode, the characters representing the short running time mode move from the right to the left on the display screen 7a. Moving.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86(B), in the front ceiling effect B, decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed on the lower left of the display screen 7a, and an image XF1 suggesting the short running time mode and the number of remaining fluctuations are displayed on the lower side. XF2 continues to be displayed. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are misplaced patterns. Specifically, 9 patterns of the decorative pattern 8L are stopped and displayed, 8 patterns of the decorative pattern 8C are stopped and displayed, and the decorative pattern 8R is 4 symbols are stopped and displayed. In addition, the remaining variation count display XF2 is displayed in association with the short running time mode suggestion image XF1. In the pre-ceiling effect B, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is two fluctuations remaining until the fluctuation before reaching the ceiling. In addition, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed on the front side of the short running time mode suggestion image XF1 (characters, effects, etc.). In other words, the short running time mode suggestive image XF1 is displayed behind the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. In addition, in the image XF1 suggesting the short running time mode, the characters representing the short running time mode move from the right to the left on the display screen 7a. Moving.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86(C), in the front ceiling effect C, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed on the lower left of the display screen 7a, and the image XF1 suggesting the short running time mode and the number of remaining fluctuations are displayed on the lower side. XF2 continues to be displayed. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are misplaced patterns. Specifically, the decorative pattern 8L has 5 patterns stopped and displayed, the decorative pattern 8C has 4 patterns stopped and displayed, and the decorative pattern 8R is 7 symbols are stopped and displayed. In addition, the remaining variation count display XF2 is displayed in association with the short running time mode suggestion image XF1. In the pre-ceiling effect C, the number of fluctuations of the special symbols is 1 fluctuation remaining until the fluctuation before reaching the ceiling, so the remaining fluctuation number display XF2 is expressed as "1 remaining number". In addition, the short running time mode suggestion image XF1 and the change count display XF2 move from the right to the left on the display screen 7a, and when they reach the left end, they appear again from the right end and move left again. In addition, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed on the front side of the short running time mode suggestion image XF1 (characters, effects, etc.). In other words, the short running time mode suggestive image XF1 is displayed behind the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. In addition, in the image XF1 suggesting the short running time mode, the characters representing the short running time mode move from the right to the left on the display screen 7a. Moving.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86(D), in the pre-ceiling-reaching variation effect A, an enlarged speed-short mode suggestive image XF1 is displayed substantially in the center of the display screen 7a.
Then, as shown in FIG. 86(E), in the pre-ceiling variation effect B, the decoration patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed at the lower left, and the image XF1 suggesting the short running time mode and the number of remaining variations are displayed at the lower side. XF2 is displayed. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are misplaced patterns. Specifically, 9 patterns of the decorative pattern 8L are stop-displayed, 4 patterns of the decorative pattern 8C are stop-displayed, and the decorative pattern 8R is 8 symbols are stopped and displayed. In addition, the remaining variation count display XF2 is displayed in association with the short running time mode suggestion image XF1. In the pre-ceiling fluctuation effect B, the effect is the pre-ceiling fluctuation, that is, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 0 remaining fluctuations until the pre-ceiling fluctuation, so the remaining fluctuation number display XF2 is "0 remaining times". is represented. That is, in this ceiling-before-reaching fluctuation effect B, the explosive short working hours mode suggestion image XF1 is displayed although the gaming state is changed from the low-probability short working hours state to the normal state. In addition, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed on the front side of the short running time mode suggestion image XF1 (characters, effects, etc.). In other words, the short running time mode suggestive image XF1 is displayed behind the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. In addition, in the image XF1 suggesting the short running time mode, the characters representing the short running time mode move from the right to the left on the display screen 7a. Moving.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86(F), in the ceiling reaching effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a, the short run time mode suggestion image XF1 is displayed at the lower side, and the image XF1 is displayed at the upper right. A right hitting display XF4 is displayed. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are misplaced patterns. Specifically, nine patterns of the decorative pattern 8L are stop-displayed, five patterns of the decorative pattern 8C are stop-displayed, and the decorative pattern 8R is 7 symbols are stopped and displayed. The right-handed display XF4 is a display that suggests the direction in which the game ball is launched to the player, and more specifically, is a display that suggests the player to hit right-handed. In addition, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed on the front side of the short running time mode suggestion image XF1 (characters, effects, etc.). In other words, the short running time mode suggestive image XF1 is displayed behind the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. In addition, in the image XF1 suggesting the short running time mode, the characters representing the short running time mode move from the right to the left on the display screen 7a. Moving.
After that, when the jackpot is not hit, the bursting short working hours mode is continued, and the production is continued in a low probability short working hour state like the ceiling reaching production. In addition, after reaching the ceiling, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 700 times, the game state is changed from the low probability short working time state to the normal state, the short running time mode ends, and the display of the short running time mode suggestion image XF1 also ends. .

[Modification]
In the mode suggestive image continuation effect C, in the short time mode suggestive image XF1, the characters and effects included in the short time mode suggestive image XF1 are configured to move in a predetermined direction, but not limited to this, the short time mode suggestion The characters and effects inside may move while the image XF1 moves.

In the above mode suggestive image continuation effects A to C, the explosive short-time mode suggestive image XF1 in the ceiling front production and the explosive short-time mode suggestive image XF1 in the variable production before reaching the ceiling were the same, but the explosive short-time mode in the ceiling front production The suggestive image XF1 and the explosive short-time mode suggestive image XF1 in the pre-ceiling fluctuation effect may have different shapes, may include different characters, may include different effects, or may be different images. may contain In addition, although the short running time mode suggestion image XF1 in the ceiling front production and the short running time mode suggestion image XF1 in the ceiling reaching production were the same, the short running time mode suggestion image XF1 in the front production of the ceiling and the short running time mode in the ceiling reaching production The mode suggestive image XF1 may have a different shape, may contain different characters, may contain different effects, or may contain a different image. Furthermore, although the short-running mode suggestion image XF1 in the fluctuation performance before reaching the ceiling and the short-running mode suggestion image XF1 in the ceiling reaching production were the same, the short-running time mode suggestion image XF1 in the fluctuation before reaching the ceiling and the ceiling reaching production , may have a different shape, may include different characters, may include different effects, or may include different images.

[Effect example]
In the mode suggestive image continuation effects A to C, in the low probability state (normal state), in the ceiling front effect of the number fluctuation before the number of special symbol fluctuations reaches the ceiling reach fluctuation, the explosive short time mode suggestive image XF1 is displayed. Displayed, after that, in the fluctuation effect before reaching the ceiling in which the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reached 499 times before the ceiling (equivalent to the second prescribed number of times), the game state was changed from the low-probability short-time state to the normal state. In spite of this, the short running time mode suggestive image XF1 indicating the low probability short working time state is displayed, and after that, when the ceiling is reached, the short short working time mode suggestive image XF1 is continuously displayed in the ceiling reaching performance. According to this configuration, when the low-probability short working hours state returns to the normal state once before reaching the ceiling, and the low-probability short working hours state immediately returns to the ceiling, and when it returns to the normal state, it returns to the normal state. Since the short running time mode advantageous to the player is notified without informing the player of the fact, it is possible to suppress the depression of the player's mood due to the return to the normal state, and the player feels comfortable in the short running time mode. can enjoy. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the above-described mode suggestive image continuation effects A to C, the explosive short-time mode suggestive image XF1 in the pre-ceiling effect and the explosive short-time mode suggestive image XF1 in the pre-ceiling fluctuation effect have the same configuration. According to this configuration, when the low-probability short working hours state returns to the normal state once before reaching the ceiling, and the low-probability short working hours state immediately returns to the ceiling, and when it returns to the normal state, it returns to the normal state. It is possible to suppress the depression of the player's mood due to the accident, and the player can comfortably enjoy the short running mode. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the above-described mode suggestive image continuation effects A to C, the explosive short time mode suggestive image XF1 in the ceiling front effect and the explosive short time mode suggestive image XF1 in the ceiling reaching effect have the same configuration. According to this configuration, when the low-probability short working hours state returns to the normal state once before reaching the ceiling, and the low-probability short working hours state immediately returns to the ceiling, and when it returns to the normal state, it returns to the normal state. It is possible to suppress the depression of the player's mood due to the accident, and the player can comfortably enjoy the short running mode. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the above-described mode suggestive image continuation effect C, the explosive short time mode suggestive image XF1 has a configuration in which characters and effects inside move. According to this configuration, it is possible to emphasize the short working hours mode suggestion image XF1 to the player, and the player can comfortably enjoy the short working hours mode. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the mode-indicative image continuation effects A to C, the remaining variation count display XF2 is performed in the front ceiling effects A to C. According to this configuration, it is possible to display a countdown from the low-probability short working hours state to the normal state once, and it is possible to give the player a sense of urgency until the state returns to the normal state. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect XF-1]
A display means capable of executing a plurality of display performances is provided, and one of a plurality of game states including a first game state relatively disadvantageous to the player and a second game state relatively advantageous to the player. A game is played in a game state, and when the game state is the first game state and the number of variations of the special symbols reaches a first prescribed number of times, the gaming machine is changed to the second game state,
In the gaming machine, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches a second specified number of times which is a number smaller than the first specified number of times in the second game state, the game state is changed to the second game state. There is a case where the game state is changed to the first game state,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is a effect of displaying an advantageous mode suggesting image suggesting that the mode is advantageous to the player on the display means in the case of the second game state,
The second display effect is performed after the first display effect and when the number of times of variation of the special symbol reaches the second specified number of times, and the number of times of variation of the special symbol reaches the second number. 2, an effect of displaying the advantageous mode suggesting image even though the game state has been changed to the first game state by reaching the prescribed number of times of 2;
The third display effect is performed after the second display effect and when the number of times of variation of the special symbol reaches the first specified number of times, and the image indicating the advantageous mode is displayed. is a performance,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XF-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect XF-1,
The advantageous mode suggesting image in the first display effect and the advantageous mode suggesting image in the second display effect are the same.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XF-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect XF-2,
The advantageous mode suggesting image in the first display effect and the advantageous mode suggesting image in the third display effect are the same.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XF-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect XF-3,
the advantageous mode suggestive image includes a moving image;
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XF-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect XF-4,
In the first display effect, display the remaining number of fluctuations representing the remaining number of times until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches the second specified number of times,
A gaming machine characterized by:

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in the game state management process of FIG. ), it shifts to idle time (low-probability short-time state). This play time is continued until the special symbol changes 700 times.

87 to 89, the multi-section display effects A to C will be described below. This multi-section display effect is executed during the variable effect of the decorative symbols in the normal state, the time-saving state (low-probability-low base state), or the variable-probability state (high-probability-high base state). That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a multi-zone display effect, the corresponding image data is read out from the ROM 103 and displayed on the image display device 7. An image is displayed on the screen 7a or the sub-display screen 64. FIG.

[Multi-section display effect A]
FIG. 87 is a diagram for explaining the multi-section display effect A. FIG. The multi-zone display effect A in FIG. 87 is a effect with the same variation of special symbols. In the multi-section display effect A, as shown in FIG. 87(A), first, the decorative pattern variation effect is performed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C, and 8R are vertically varied on the display screen 7a substantially at the center of the display screen 7a. On the display screen 7a, the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed, but they are omitted in the drawing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(B), a button display effect is performed. In this button display effect, the decorative pattern 8L and the decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed, and the button image XG is displayed on the changing decorative pattern 8C. This button image XG is an image for prompting the player to operate the effect button 63, and "PUSH" is displayed in the image. The decorative pattern 8L is stop-displayed with two patterns, and the decorative pattern 8R is stop-displayed with three patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(C), a screen division effect is performed. In this screen division effect, the button image XG is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a, and a predetermined area is divided into nine sections G11, G12, G13, G21, G22, G23, G31, G32, and G33. A region G is formed. The button image XG is displayed in section G22. In other words, in this screen split effect, the split area G is formed so that the button image XG is positioned in the section G22. Each section of the divided area G is formed in a matrix (lattice, grid).

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(D), a block image display effect is performed. In the divided image display effect, in the divided area G, the second character group CRB is displayed in the division G11, then the first character group CRA is displayed in the division G21, and then the first character group CRA is displayed in the division G31. Next, the first character group CRA is displayed in section G32, then the first character group CRA is displayed in section G33, then the first character group CRA is displayed in section G23, and then , the first character group CRA is displayed in the section G13, and then the second character group CRB is displayed in the section G12. That is, in the partition image display effect, after the second character group CRB is displayed in the partition G11 in the divided area G, the first character group CRA or the second character group is displayed in each partition clockwise starting from the button image XG. CRBs are displayed in order. The first character group CRA is an image representing a fight between a friend character and an enemy character. The second character group CRB is an image representing characters with smiling faces and emblems made up of circles and triangles.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(E), a division image erasing effect is performed. In this division image erasing effect, the first character group CRA, the second character group CRB, or the button image XG displayed in each division of the divided area G are all erased and blacked out. In the example of FIG. 87(E), the blackout state is represented by hatching. It should be noted that, instead of blackout, other images such as a sandstorm image may be displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(F), the section whole image display effect is performed. In this section entire image display effect, a character image CRC different from the first character group CRA and the second character group CRB is displayed in the entire divided area G (each section). This character image CRC represents a fighting warrior character.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(G), a super ready-to-win effect A is performed. In this super ready-to-win effect A, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R form a ready-to-win state. More specifically, the decorative patterns 8L and 8R are stop-displayed at seven patterns, and the decorative pattern 8C fluctuates at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(H), a super ready-to-win effect B is performed. In this super ready-to-win effect B, while the ready-to-win state is continued by the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the first character group CRA displayed in a plurality of sections of the divided area G of the divided image display effect is displayed, and a predetermined expand the action of

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(I), a super ready-to-win effect C is performed. In this super ready-to-win effect C, the character image CRC and the second character group CRB are displayed while the ready-to-win state is continued by the decoration patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and an action in which they confront each other develops.
After that, a winning pattern or a big winning pattern is displayed by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and a losing or big winning is announced.

[Multi-section display effect B]
FIG. 88 is a diagram for explaining a multi-section display effect B. FIG. The multi-section display effect B in FIG. 88 is a effect with the same variation of special symbols. In the multi-section display effect B, as shown in FIG. 88(A), first, the decorative pattern variation effect is performed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C, and 8R are vertically varied on the display screen 7a substantially at the center of the display screen 7a. On the display screen 7a, the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed, but they are omitted in the figure.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88(B), a button display effect is performed. In this button display effect, the decorative pattern 8L and the decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed, and the button image XG is displayed on the changing decorative pattern 8C. This button image XG is an image for prompting the player to operate the effect button 63, and "PUSH" is displayed in the image. The decorative pattern 8L is stop-displayed with two patterns, and the decorative pattern 8R is stop-displayed with three patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88(C), a screen division effect is performed. In this screen division effect, the button image XG is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a, and a predetermined area is divided into nine sections G11, G12, G13, G21, G22, G23, G31, G32, and G33. A region G is formed. The button image XG is displayed in section G22. In other words, in this screen split effect, the split area G is formed so that the button image XG is positioned in the section G22. Each section of the divided area G is formed in a matrix (lattice, grid).

Next, as shown in FIG. 88(D), a block image display effect is performed. In the divided image display effect, in the divided area G, the second character group CRB is displayed in the division G11, then the first character group CRA is displayed in the division G21, and then the first character group CRA is displayed in the division G31. Next, the first character group CRA is displayed in section G32, then the first character group CRA is displayed in section G33, then the first character group CRA is displayed in section G23, and then , the first character group CRA is displayed in the section G13, and then the second character group CRB is displayed in the section G12. That is, in the partition image display effect, after the second character group CRB is displayed in the partition G11 in the divided area G, the first character group CRA or the second character group is displayed in each partition clockwise starting from the button image XG. CRBs are displayed in order. The first character group CRA is an image representing a fight between a friend character and an enemy character. The second character group CRB is an image representing characters with smiling faces and emblems made up of circles and triangles.

Also, in the divided area G, the frame of each section has an effect effect of a predetermined color, and in each section, the color of the effect portion of the frame differs depending on the displayed image. Specifically, in sections G21, G31, G32, G33, G23, and G13 where the first character group CRA is displayed, the color of the effect portion of the frame is red, and the second character group CRB is displayed. In the partitions G12 and G11, the color of the effect portion of the frame is blue, and in the partition G22 in which the button image XG is displayed, the color of the effect portion of the frame is green.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88(E), a division image erasing effect is performed. In this division image erasing effect, the first character group CRA, the second character group CRB, or the button image XG displayed in each division of the divided area G are all erased and blacked out. In the example of FIG. 88(E), the blackout state is indicated by hatching. It should be noted that, instead of blackout, other images such as a sandstorm image may be displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88(F), the section whole image display effect is performed. In this block whole image display effect, the first character group CRA and the second character group CRB displayed in each block in the block image display effect are displayed in the entire divided area G (each block).

Next, as shown in FIG. 88(G), a super ready-to-win effect A is performed. In this super ready-to-win effect A, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R form a ready-to-win state. More specifically, the decorative patterns 8L and 8R are stop-displayed at seven patterns, and the decorative pattern 8C fluctuates at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88(H), a super ready-to-win effect B is performed. In this super ready-to-win effect B, while the ready-to-win state is continued by the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the first character group CRA displayed in a plurality of sections of the divided area G of the divided image display effect is displayed, and a predetermined expand the action of

Next, as shown in FIG. 88(I), a super ready-to-win effect C is performed. In this super ready-to-win effect C, the character image CRC and the second character group CRB are displayed while the ready-to-win state is continued by the decoration patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and an action in which they confront each other develops. This character image CRC represents a fighting warrior character.
After that, a winning pattern or a big winning pattern is displayed by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and a losing or big winning is announced.

[Multi-section display effect C]
FIG. 89 is a diagram for explaining the multi-section display effect C. FIG. The multi-section display effect C in FIG. 89 is a effect with the same variation of special symbols. In the multi-zone display effect C, as shown in FIG. 89(A), first, the decorative pattern variation effect is performed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C, and 8R are vertically varied on the display screen 7a substantially at the center of the display screen 7a. On the display screen 7a, a pending icon 9A and a variable icon 9C are displayed, but they are omitted in the drawing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(B), a button display effect is performed. In this button display effect, the decorative pattern 8L and the decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed, and the button image XG is displayed on the changing decorative pattern 8C. This button image XG is an image for prompting the player to operate the effect button 63, and "PUSH" is displayed in the image. The decorative pattern 8L is stop-displayed with two patterns, and the decorative pattern 8R is stop-displayed with three patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(C), a screen division effect is performed. In this screen division effect, the button image XG is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a, and a predetermined area is divided into nine sections G11, G12, G13, G21, G22, G23, G31, G32, and G33. A region G is formed. The button image XG is displayed in section G22. In other words, in this screen split effect, the split area G is formed so that the button image XG is positioned in the section G22. Each section of the divided area G is a quadrangle and is formed in a substantially matrix shape (lattice shape, grid shape). The shape and size of each section of the divided area G are different.
Adjacent sections of the divided area G are basically separated by a predetermined distance. However, adjacent sections of the divided region G may have contact portions. In the section image display effect, the section image erasing effect, and the section whole image display effect described below, the distance between adjacent sections is the same as the distance during the screen split effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(D), a block image display effect is performed. In the divided image display effect, in the divided area G, the second character group CRB is displayed in the division G11, then the first character group CRA is displayed in the division G21, and then the first character group CRA is displayed in the division G31. Next, the first character group CRA is displayed in section G32, then the first character group CRA is displayed in section G33, then the first character group CRA is displayed in section G23, and then , the first character group CRA is displayed in the section G13, and then the second character group CRB is displayed in the section G12. That is, in the partition image display effect, after the second character group CRB is displayed in the partition G11 in the divided area G, the first character group CRA or the second character group is displayed in each partition clockwise starting from the button image XG. CRBs are displayed in order. The first character group CRA is an image representing a fight between a friend character and an enemy character. The second character group CRB is an image representing characters with smiling faces and emblems made up of circles and triangles.

Also, in the divided area G, the frame of each section has an effect effect of a predetermined color, and in each section, the color of the effect portion of the frame differs depending on the displayed image. Specifically, in sections G21, G31, G32, G33, G23, and G13 where the first character group CRA is displayed, the color of the effect portion of the frame is red, and the second character group CRB is displayed. In the partitions G12 and G11, the color of the effect portion of the frame is blue, and in the partition G22 in which the button image XG is displayed, the color of the effect portion of the frame is green.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(E), a division image erasing effect is performed. In this division image erasing effect, the first character group CRA, the second character group CRB, or the button image XG displayed in each division of the divided area G are all erased and blacked out. In the example of FIG. 89(E), the blackout state is represented by hatching. It should be noted that, instead of blackout, other images such as a sandstorm image may be displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(F), the section whole image display effect is performed. In this block whole image display effect, the first character group CRA and the second character group CRB displayed in each block in the block image display effect are displayed in the entire divided area G (each block).

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(G), a super ready-to-win effect A is performed. In this super ready-to-win effect A, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R form a ready-to-win state. More specifically, the decorative patterns 8L and 8R are stop-displayed at seven patterns, and the decorative pattern 8C fluctuates at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(H), a super ready-to-win effect B is performed. In this super ready-to-win effect B, while the ready-to-win state is continued by the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the first character group CRA displayed in a plurality of sections of the divided area G of the divided image display effect is displayed, and a predetermined expand the action of

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(I), a super ready-to-win effect C is performed. In this super ready-to-win effect C, the character image CRC and the second character group CRB are displayed while the ready-to-win state is continued by the decoration patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the action of confrontation between them develops.
After that, a winning pattern or a big winning pattern is displayed by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and a losing or big winning is announced.

[Modification]
In the multi-zone display effects B and C, in the zone whole image effect, the first character group CRA, which has the larger number of displayed zones, out of the first character group CRA and the second character group CRB in the zone image display effect, is divided into areas. Although it was designed to be displayed in the entirety of G, this is not the only option. In the division image display effect, the second character group CRB, which has the smaller number of divisions displayed, out of the first character group CRA and the second character group CRB, can be displayed. You may make it display.
In the multi-section display effects A to C, the button image XG has the same shape and size in the button display effect, the screen division effect, and the division image display effect. Different shapes and/or different sizes may be used in the display effect, screen split effect, and block image display effect.

[Effect example]
In the multi-section display effects A to C, a divided area G that divides a predetermined area of the display screen 7a is displayed in the screen division effect, and six of the nine divisions of the divided area G are displayed in the divided image display effect. The first character group CRA is displayed, the second character group CRB is displayed in two of the nine sections of the divided area G, and then the player presses the effect button 63 in the block image erasing effect. As a result, an effect is performed in which the first character group CRA displayed in six sections and the second character group CRB displayed in two sections disappear. According to this configuration, different image groups displayed in a plurality of sections disappear, so that the player can be provided with a momentary spectacle, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the multi-section display effects A to C, the first character group CRA is displayed in six of the nine sections of the divided area G, and two of the nine sections of the divided area G are displayed. When the second character group CRB is displayed in , the button image XG representing the effect button 63 is displayed. According to this configuration, the button image XG is displayed mixed with the first character group CRA and the second character group CRB displayed in a plurality of sections, so that the player can be provided with a spectacular and mysterious feeling. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the multi-section display effect A, in the block image display effect, the first character group CRA is displayed in six of the nine sections of the divided area G, and two of the nine sections of the divided area G The second character group CRB is displayed, and then the player presses the effect button 63 in the block image erasing effect. The second character group CRB disappears, and thereafter, a part of the image (character image CRC) different from the first character group CRA and the second character group CRB is displayed in the divided area G in the division whole image effect. . According to this configuration, the display of the first character group CRA, the second character group CRB, and the button image XG in the divided area G can create a sense of mystery, and the division image display effect can be enhanced. can be improved. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the multi-section display effect A, in the block image display effect, the first character group CRA is displayed in six of the nine sections of the divided area G, and two of the nine sections of the divided area G The second character group CRB is displayed, the button image XG is displayed in one section of the divided area G, and then displayed in six sections by pressing the performance button 63 by the player in the section image erasing effect. The first character group CRA, the second character group CRB, and the button image XG displayed in the two sections disappear. Two character groups CRB and an image (character image CRC) different from the button image XG are displayed. According to this configuration, the display of the first character group CRA, the second character group CRB, and the button image XG in the divided area G can create a more mysterious feeling, and the division image display effect is interesting. can be improved. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the multi-section display effects A to C, in the state where the button image XG is displayed in the button display effect, the division area G is formed so as to include the button image XG in one division in the screen split effect. According to this configuration, the player can be made to recognize that the divided area G is formed around the button image XG, and the player can feel the expectation of the effect using the effect button 63 corresponding to the button image XG. can be given. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect XG-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects and operation means operable by a player,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
In the first display effect, the display area of the display means is divided into a plurality of sections for display, a first image is displayed in each of a first number of the plurality of sections, and the plurality of is an effect in which the second image is displayed in each of the second number of the sections of the section,
The second display effect includes the first image displayed in the first number of sections and the second image displayed in the second number of sections by the operation of the operation means by the player. It is a production that disappears with the image of
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, and then the second display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[XG-2]
The gaming machine according to XG-1,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
the third display effect is a effect in which an operating means image representing the operating means is displayed in a predetermined section of the plurality of sections of the display means;
The combination effect includes the third display effect,
In the combination effect, the third display effect is performed while the first display effect is being performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[XG-3]
The gaming machine according to XG-2,
In the second display effect in the combination effect, the first image and the second image disappear and an image different from the first image and the second image is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[XG-4]
The gaming machine according to XG-3,
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
In the fourth display effect, in the plurality of sections of the display means, a section displaying the first image, a section displaying the second image, and the operation means image are displayed. A production in which a predetermined image is expressed using a section,
The combination effect includes the fourth display effect,
In the combination effect, the fourth display effect is performed after the second display effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[XG-5]
The gaming machine according to XG-4,
When the first display effect and the third display effect of the combination effect are performed, and when the display area of the display means is divided into a plurality of sections and displayed, the operation means image is performed in the displayed state,
A gaming machine characterized by:

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in the game state management process of FIG. ), it shifts to idle time (low-probability short-time state). This play time is continued until the special symbol changes 700 times.

The functional timer display effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 90 to 92. FIG. This function-specific timer display effect is executed during the variable effect of decorative symbols in the normal state, the time-saving state (low-probability-low base state), or the probability-variable state (high-probability-high base state). That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the instruction to execute the functional timer display effect is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image display device 7 is displayed. An image is displayed on the display screen 7 a or the sub-display screen 64 .

[Timer display by function A]
FIG. 90 is a diagram for explaining the function-based timer display effect A. FIG. The function-based timer display effect A in FIG. 90 is a effect with the same variation of special symbols. In the function-based timer display effect A, as shown in FIG. 90(A), first, a decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C, and 8R are vertically varied on the display screen 7a substantially at the center of the display screen 7a. On the display screen 7a, the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed, but they are omitted in the drawing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(B), the first timer display effect A is performed. In this first timer display effect A, the first timer display XH1 is displayed on the upper side of the display screen 7a, and the teammate character CRA is displayed on the lower side thereof. The first timer display XH1 is a countdown type timer, and the timer value is displayed in a double rectangular frame. It is possible to display the number of seconds until. In the illustrated example, the first timer display XH1 is set to exactly 10 seconds as the initial timer value. The target timer value for the first timer display XH1 is 0 seconds (00:00).

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(C), the first timer display effect B is performed. In this first timer display effect B, the first timer display XH1 and the ally character CRA are continuously displayed at the same position, and the timer value of the first timer display XH1 becomes 0 seconds, which is the target timer value. is.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(D), a movable accessory actuation presentation is performed. In this movable accessory actuation effect, the first movable accessory 14 is activated and moves from the retracted position on the left side of the display screen 7a to the deployed position. At this time, in the display screen 7a, the area through which the first movable accessory 14 has passed is displayed dark, emphasizing that the first movable accessory 14 has been activated. In the example of the figure, the darkened area on the display screen 7a after the first movable accessory 14 has passed is indicated by hatching.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(E), a big winning symbol effect A is performed. In this jackpot pattern presentation A, a jackpot pattern is formed using the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. At this time, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are each composed of 6 patterns, that is, a jackpot pattern is formed by doubles of the 6 patterns. The jackpot pattern with these 6 patterns suggests that the game state after the jackpot shifts to a low-probability short-time state (low-probability-high base state), and is less valuable to the player than the jackpot pattern with 7 patterns described later. It is a jackpot pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(F), a second timer display effect is performed. In this second timer display effect, the second timer display XH2 is displayed at the same position as the first timer display XH1 was displayed on the display screen 7a. The second timer display XH2 is a countdown type timer, in which a timer value is displayed in a single rectangular frame, and is different from the first timer display XH1. In the second timer display XH2, the timer value can be displayed in two-digit seconds, but fractional seconds are omitted. In the illustrated example, the second timer display XH2 is set to a value of 5 seconds as the initial timer value. The second timer display XH2 has a target timer value of 0 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(G), a button image display effect is performed. In this button image display effect, the button image XH3 is displayed below the second timer display XH2 on the display screen 7a. The button image XH3 is an image for prompting the player to press the effect button 63, and is displayed in association with the second timer display XH2. The button image XH3 is displayed a short time after the second timer display XH2 starts counting down. In the figure, the button image XH3 is displayed when the timer value of the second timer display XH2 is 3 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(H), a big hit symbol effect B is performed. In this jackpot pattern presentation B, a jackpot pattern is formed using the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. At this time, each of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is composed of 7 symbols. The jackpot pattern with these 7 patterns suggests that the game state after the jackpot shifts to a probability variable state (high probability short-time state), and is a jackpot pattern that is more valuable to the player than the jackpot pattern with the above-mentioned 6 patterns. be.
After that, a jackpot game is performed, and after the jackpot game, the state shifts to a variable probability state (high probability and high base state).

[Timer display by function B]
FIG. 91 is a diagram for explaining function-specific timer display effect B. FIG. The function-based timer display effect B in FIG. 91 is a effect with the same variation of special symbols. In the function-based timer display effect B, as shown in FIG. 91(A), first, a decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C, and 8R are vertically varied on the display screen 7a substantially at the center of the display screen 7a. On the display screen 7a, a pending icon 9A and a variable icon 9C are displayed, but they are omitted in the figure.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(B), the first timer display effect A is performed. In this first timer display effect A, the first timer display XH1 is displayed on the upper side of the display screen 7a, and the teammate character CRA is displayed on the lower side thereof. The first timer display XH1 is a countdown type timer, and the timer value is displayed in a double rectangular frame. It is possible to display the number of seconds until. In the illustrated example, the first timer display XH1 is set to exactly 10 seconds as the initial timer value. The target timer value for the first timer display XH1 is 0 seconds (00:00).

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(C), the first timer display effect B is performed. In this first timer display effect B, the first timer display XH1 and the ally character CRA are continuously displayed at the same position, and the timer value of the first timer display XH1 becomes 0 seconds, which is the target timer value. is.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(D), a movable accessory actuation presentation is performed. In this movable accessory actuation effect, the first movable accessory 14 is activated and moves from the retracted position on the left side of the display screen 7a to the deployed position. At this time, in the display screen 7a, the area through which the first movable accessory 14 has passed is displayed dark, emphasizing that the first movable accessory 14 has been activated. In the example of the figure, the darkened area on the display screen 7a after the first movable accessory 14 has passed is indicated by hatching.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(E), a big hit symbol effect A is performed. In this jackpot pattern presentation A, a jackpot pattern is formed using the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. At this time, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are each composed of 6 patterns, that is, a jackpot pattern is formed by doubles of the 6 patterns. The jackpot pattern with these 6 patterns suggests that the game state after the jackpot shifts to a low-probability short-time state (low-probability-high base state), and is less valuable to the player than the jackpot pattern with 7 patterns described later. It is a jackpot design.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(F), a second timer display effect is performed. In this second timer display effect, a second timer display XH2 is displayed on the display screen 7a at a position different from the position where the first timer display XH1, which will be described later, was displayed. The second timer display XH2 is a countdown type timer, in which a timer value is displayed in a hexagonal frame, and has a shape (mode) different from that of the first timer display XH1. In the second timer display XH2, the timer value can be displayed in two-digit seconds, but fractional seconds are omitted. In the illustrated example, the second timer display XH2 is set to a value of 5 seconds as the initial timer value. The second timer display XH2 has a target timer value of 0 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(G), a button image display effect is performed. In this button image display effect, the button image XH3 is displayed below the second timer display XH2 on the display screen 7a. The button image XH3 is an image for prompting the player to press the effect button 63, and is displayed in association with the second timer display XH2. The button image XH3 is displayed a short time after the second timer display XH2 starts counting down. In the figure, the button image XH3 is displayed when the timer value of the second timer display XH2 is 3 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(H), a big hit symbol effect B is performed. In this jackpot pattern presentation B, a jackpot pattern is formed using the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. At this time, each of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is composed of 7 symbols. The jackpot pattern with these 7 patterns suggests that the game state after the jackpot shifts to a probability variable state (high probability short-time state), and is a jackpot pattern that is more valuable to the player than the jackpot pattern with the above-mentioned 6 patterns. be.
After that, a jackpot game is performed, and after the jackpot game, the state shifts to a probability variable state (high probability and high base state).

[Timer display by function C]
FIG. 92 is a diagram for explaining the function-based timer display effect C. FIG. The function-based timer display effect C in FIG. 92 is a effect with the same variation of special symbols. In the function-based timer display effect C, as shown in FIG. 92(A), first, a decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C, and 8R are vertically varied on the display screen 7a substantially at the center of the display screen 7a. On the display screen 7a, a pending icon 9A and a variable icon 9C are displayed, but they are omitted in the drawing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 92(B), the first timer display effect A is performed. In this first timer display effect A, the first timer display XH1 is displayed on the upper side of the display screen 7a, and the teammate character CRA is displayed on the lower side thereof. The first timer display XH1 is a countdown type timer, and the timer value is displayed in a double rectangular frame. It is possible to display the number of seconds until. In the illustrated example, the first timer display XH1 is set to exactly 10 seconds as the initial timer value. The target timer value for the first timer display XH1 is 0 seconds (00:00).

Next, as shown in FIG. 92(C), the first timer display effect B is performed. In this first timer display effect B, the first timer display XH1 and the ally character CRA are continuously displayed at the same position, and before the timer value of the first timer display XH1 reaches the target timer value of 0 seconds. It is a production that will be 5 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 92(D), a movable accessory actuation presentation is performed. In this movable accessory actuation effect, the first movable accessory 14 is activated and moves from the retracted position on the left side of the display screen 7a to the deployed position. That is, this movable accessory actuation effect is an effect in which the first movable accessory 14 operates before the timer value of the first timer display XH1 reaches 0 seconds, which is the target timer value to reach. At this time, in the display screen 7a, the area through which the first movable accessory 14 has passed is displayed dark, emphasizing that the first movable accessory 14 has been activated. In the example of the figure, the darkened area on the display screen 7a after the first movable accessory 14 has passed is indicated by hatching. In the figure, the first timer display XH1 indicates that the timer value is 04:50, which is earlier than the target timer value to be reached.

Next, as shown in FIG. 92(E), a big hit symbol effect A is performed. In this jackpot pattern presentation A, a jackpot pattern is formed using the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. At this time, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are each composed of 6 patterns, that is, a jackpot pattern is formed by doubles of the 6 patterns. The jackpot pattern with these 6 patterns suggests that the game state after the jackpot shifts to a low-probability short-time state (low-probability-high base state), and is less valuable to the player than the jackpot pattern with 7 patterns described later. It is a jackpot design.

Next, as shown in FIG. 92(F), a second timer display effect is performed. In this second timer display effect, a second timer display XH2 is displayed on the display screen 7a at a position different from the position where the first timer display XH1, which will be described later, was displayed. The second timer display XH2 is a countdown type timer, in which a timer value is displayed in a hexagonal frame, and has a shape (mode) different from that of the first timer display XH1. In the second timer display XH2, the timer value can be displayed in two-digit seconds, but fractional seconds are omitted. In the illustrated example, the second timer display XH2 is set to a value of 5 seconds as the initial timer value. The second timer display XH2 has a target timer value of 0 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 92(G), a button image display effect is performed. In this button image display effect, the button image XH3 is displayed below the second timer display XH2 on the display screen 7a. The button image XH3 is an image for prompting the player to press the effect button 63, and is displayed in association with the second timer display XH2. The button image XH3 is displayed a short time after the second timer display XH2 starts counting down. In the figure, the button image XH3 is displayed when the timer value of the second timer display XH2 is 3 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 92(H), a big hit symbol effect B is performed. In this jackpot pattern presentation B, a jackpot pattern is formed using the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. At this time, each of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is composed of 7 symbols. The jackpot pattern with these 7 patterns suggests that the game state after the jackpot shifts to a probability variable state (high probability short-time state), and is a jackpot pattern that is more valuable to the player than the jackpot pattern with the above-mentioned 6 patterns. be.
After that, a jackpot game is performed, and after the jackpot game, the state shifts to a probability variable state (high probability and high base state).

[Modification]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the function-specific timer display effects A to C are performed in the same variation, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the function-specific timer display effects A to C are performed across multiple variations. You can do it.
In the function-specific timer display effects A to C, the first movable accessory 14 operates based on the first timer display effect in the same variation, the big win pattern effect is performed, and then the second timer display effect is performed. However, this is not restrictive, and the big win pattern presentation is performed based on the second timer display presentation, and then the first movable accessory 14 is performed based on the first timer display presentation. may operate to perform a jackpot symbol production.
In the functional timer display presentations A to C above, the first timer display XH1 and the second timer display XH2 are countdown type timers. Both may be count-up type timers.
In the functional timer display presentations A to C, the first timer display XH1 and the second timer display XH2 do not appear at the same timing. The display XH2 may appear at the same timing.
In the function-specific timer display effects A to C, the button image XH3 is displayed after the second timer display XH2 is displayed, but is not limited to this, and before the second timer display XH2 is displayed or It may be displayed at the timing when the second timer display XH2 is displayed.
In the function-based timer display effects A to C, when the second timer display XH2 appears and the button image XH3 is displayed, a jackpot pattern (decorative pattern) that is relatively more valuable to the player than in the jackpot pattern effect A is displayed. 7 symbols of 8L, 8C, and 8R) are displayed, but if the button image XH3 does not appear even if the second timer display XH2 appears, the jackpot symbols are not upgraded and the jackpot is displayed. The configuration may be such that the same jackpot pattern as in the pattern presentation A is displayed.

[Effect example]
In the function-based timer display effects A to C, the first movable accessory 14 operates (moves) based on the first timer display XH1 in the same variation, and then the jackpot pattern is displayed based on the second timer display XH2. be done. According to this configuration, two different timer displays are performed with the same variation and have different roles, one timer display operates the first movable accessory 14, and the other timer display displays a jackpot pattern. As a result, it is possible to prevent the timer effect from becoming boring and improve interest in the timer effect. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the function-based timer display effects A to C, the first movable role 14 operates (moves) based on the first timer display XH1 in the same fluctuation, and six symbols suggest a jackpot with a low comparative value for the player. The jackpot symbols are displayed, and then, based on the second timer display XH2, seven jackpot symbols suggesting a jackpot that is of relatively high value to the player are displayed. According to this configuration, two different timer displays are performed with the same variation, each having a different role, and one timer display activates the first movable accessory 14 and suggests a jackpot with low comparative value for the player. 6 big winning patterns are displayed, and another timer display displays 7 big winning patterns suggesting a big win of relatively high value to the player, so that the player enjoys each timer display. Thus, it is possible to prevent the timer effect from becoming tedious and improve interest in the timer effect. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the function-based timer display effect C, in the first timer display effect, the initial timer value of the first timer display XH1 is set and counted down. It is configured such that the accessory 14 operates. According to this configuration, it is possible to surprise the player and improve the interest of the timer effect. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the functional timer display effects B and C, the display position of the first timer display XH1 in the first timer display effect is different from the display position of the second timer display XH2 in the second timer display effect. there is According to this configuration, since the display position of the first timer display XH1 and the display position of the second timer display XH2 are different, it is possible to clearly show the difference between the two timer displays to the player. Therefore, the player can distinguish between the two timer displays and enjoy them, thereby preventing the timer effect from becoming tedious and increasing interest in the timer effect. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the functional timer display effects B and C, the first timer display XH1 in the first timer display effect and the second timer display XH2 in the second timer display effect are different in size. According to this configuration, since the first timer display XH1 and the second timer display XH2 are different in size, it is possible to clearly show the difference between the two timer displays to the player. Therefore, the player can distinguish between the two timer displays and enjoy them, thereby preventing the timer effect from becoming tedious and increasing interest in the timer effect. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect XH-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects and a movable member,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is a effect in which the movable member operates based on the timer display of the first mode,
The second display effect is a effect of displaying a first jackpot symbol based on a second mode of timer display different from the first mode of timer display,
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the first display effect and the second display effect are performed in the same variation.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XH-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect XH-1,
In the first display effect of the combination effect, the movable member operates based on the timer display of the first mode, and a second jackpot pattern different from the first jackpot pattern is displayed,
The first jackpot pattern is a jackpot pattern that is more valuable to the player than the second jackpot pattern,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XH-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect XH-2,
In the first display effect of the combination effect, the initial timer value of the timer display of the first mode is set and counted, and the timer value of the timer display of the first mode reaches the target value. the movable member is actuated;
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XH-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect XH-3,
In the combination effect, the display position on the display means differs between the timer display of the first mode in the first display effect and the timer display of the second mode in the second display effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XH-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect XH-4,
In the combination effect, the timer display of the first mode in the first display effect and the timer display of the second mode in the second display effect are different in size,
A gaming machine characterized by:

Specific image transition effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 93 to 95. FIG. This specific image transition effect can be executed during the variation effect of the effect symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a specific image transition effect, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103, An image is displayed on the display screen 7 a of the display device 7 .

[Specific image transition effect A]
FIG. 93 is a diagram for explaining specific image transition effect A. FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 93(A), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and show a state of high-speed fluctuation. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending and the variation icon 9C are displayed. The three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending correspond respectively to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the first special figure pending storage area 85a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 93(B), a ready-to-win effect is executed. The reach formation effect is a effect in which the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R temporarily stop at the same numerical value. Here, both the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at "5". In addition, the middle production pattern 8C fluctuates at high speed. Also here, three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending and the variation icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 93(C), a battle start effect is executed. The battle start effect is the start effect of the battle effect in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. Here, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a in a state of facing each other. The left effect symbol 8L is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen 7a, and the right effect symbol 8R is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 93(D) to (F), an image transition effect is executed. In the image transition effect, four images G1, G2, G3, and G4 of "FIGHT" are displayed on the periphery of the display screen 7a. Specifically, the image G1 is displayed in the upper part of the display screen 7a, the image G2 is displayed in the left part of the display screen 7a, the image G3 is displayed in the lower part of the display screen 7a, and the image G4 is displayed in the right part of the display screen 7a. to be displayed.

In FIG. 93(D), the brightness of an image G1, which is one of the four images labeled "FIGHT", is set higher than the brightness of the other images G2 to G4. As a result, the image G1 appears brighter than the other images G2 to G4.

In FIG. 93(E), the brightness of an image G2, which is one of the four images labeled "FIGHT", is set higher than the brightness of the other images G1, G3, and G4. As a result, the image G2 appears brighter than the other images G1, G3, and G4.

In FIG. 93F, the brightness of an image G4, which is one of the four images labeled "FIGHT", is set higher than the brightness of the other images G1 to G3. As a result, the image G4 appears brighter than the other images G1 to G3.

In the image transition effect, an image with higher brightness than other images is created in the order of image G1→image G2→image G3→image G4→image G1→ . As a result, in the image transition effect, a brightly displayed "FIGHT" image is displayed so as to rotate leftward (counterclockwise) around the periphery of the display screen 7a.

Incidentally, while the image transition effect is being executed, a battle effect between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is unfolded in the central portion of the display screen 7a. During the image transition effect, the left effect symbol 8L is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen 7a, and the right effect symbol 8R is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 93(G), a winning/losing determination effect is executed. The win/loss determination effect is a effect for notifying the result of the battle effect. Here, the teammate character CRA is displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a. This indicates that the ally character CRA has won the battle presentation. If the ally character CRA is defeated in the battle effect, the enemy character CRB is displayed in the central portion of the display screen.

Next, as shown in FIG. 93(H), a fixed stop effect (win) is executed. The fixed stop production (hit) is a production in which the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R become doubles and the game is fixed and stopped. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all fixed and stopped at "5".

[Specific image transition effect B]
FIG. 94 is a diagram for explaining specific image transition effect B. FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 94(A), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and show a state of high-speed fluctuation. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending and the variation icon 9C are displayed. The three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending correspond respectively to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the first special figure pending storage area 85a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 94(B), a ready-to-win effect is executed. The reach formation effect is a effect in which the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R temporarily stop at the same numerical value. Here, both the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at "5". In addition, the middle production pattern 8C fluctuates at high speed. Also here, three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending and the variation icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 94(C), a battle start effect is executed. The battle start effect is the start effect of the battle effect in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. Here, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a in a state of facing each other. The left effect symbol 8L is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen 7a, and the right effect symbol 8R is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 94(D) to (F), an image transition effect is executed. In the image transition effect, six images G1, G2, G3, G4, G5, and G6 forming the character string "BATTLE" are displayed on the periphery of the display screen 7a. Specifically, the image G1 of "B" is displayed in the upper part of the display screen 7a, the image G2 of "A" is displayed in the left part of the display screen 7a, and the image G3 of "T" is displayed in the lower left part of the display screen 7a. , the image G4 of "T" is displayed in the lower part of the display screen 7a, the image G5 of "L" is displayed in the lower right part of the display screen 7a, and the image G6 of "E" is displayed in the upper right part of the display screen 7a. to be displayed.

In FIG. 94D, the brightness of the image G1 of "B", which is one of the six images forming the character string "BATTLE", is set higher than the brightness of the other images G2 to G6. As a result, the "B" image G1 appears brighter than the other images G2 to G6.

In FIG. 94(E), the brightness of the image G4 of "T", which is one of the six images forming the character string "BATTLE", is set higher than the brightness of the other images G1 to G3, G5, and G6. are doing. As a result, the image G4 of "T" appears brighter than the other images G1 to G3, G5, and G6.

In FIG. 94F, the luminance of an image G6 of "E", which is one of the six images forming the character string "BATTLE", is set higher than the brightness of the other images G1 to G5. As a result, the image G6 of "E" appears brighter than the other images G1 to G5.

In the image transition effect, the image G1 of "B" → the image G2 of "A" → the image G3 of "T" → the image G4 of "T" → the image G5 of "L" → the image G6 of "E" → "B" In the order of the image G1 of . As a result, in the image transition effect, each character constituting the character string "BATTLE" is displayed so as to rotate counterclockwise around the periphery of the display screen 7a.

Incidentally, while the image transition effect is being executed, a battle effect between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is unfolded in the central portion of the display screen 7a. During the image transition effect, the left effect symbol 8L is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen 7a, and the right effect symbol 8R is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 94(G), a winning/losing determination effect is executed. The win/loss determination effect is a effect for notifying the result of the battle effect. Here, the teammate character CRA is displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a. This indicates that the ally character CRA has won the battle presentation. If the ally character CRA is defeated in the battle effect, the enemy character CRB is displayed in the central portion of the display screen.

Next, as shown in FIG. 94(H), a fixed stop effect (win) is executed. The fixed stop production (hit) is a production in which the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R become doubles and the game is fixed and stopped. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all fixed and stopped at "5".

[Specific image transition effect C]
FIG. 95 is a diagram for explaining the specific image transition effect C. FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 95(A), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and show a state of high-speed fluctuation. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending and the variation icon 9C are displayed. The three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending correspond respectively to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the first special figure pending storage area 85a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95(B), a ready-to-win effect is executed. The reach formation effect is a effect in which the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R temporarily stop at the same numerical value. Here, both the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at "5". In addition, the middle production pattern 8C fluctuates at high speed. Also here, three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending and the variation icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95(C), a battle start effect is executed. The battle start effect is the start effect of the battle effect in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. Here, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a in a state of facing each other. The left effect symbol 8L is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen 7a, and the right effect symbol 8R is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 95(D) to (F), an image transition effect is executed. In the image transition effect, six images G1, G2, G3, G4, G5, and G6 forming the character string "BATTLE" are displayed on the periphery of the display screen 7a. Specifically, the image G1 of "B" is displayed in the upper left part of the display screen 7a, the image G2 of "A" is displayed in the left part of the display screen 7a, and the image G3 of "T" is displayed in the lower left part of the display screen 7a. The image G4 of "T" is displayed in the lower part of the display screen 7a, the image G5 of "L" is displayed in the lower right part of the display screen 7a, and the image G6 of "E" is displayed in the upper right part of the display screen 7a. displayed in the

In the image transition effect, the second movable accessory 15 moves (advances) downward from the retracted position and stops at the advanced position in front of the display screen 7a. The characters "OARO" of the second movable accessory 15 are configured so that each character can be illuminated independently. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which not only the light is emitted but also the luminance can be adjusted.

In FIG. 95(D), the brightness of the image G1 of "B", which is one of the six images forming the character string "BATTLE", is set higher than the brightness of the other images G2 to G6. As a result, the "B" image G1 appears brighter than the other images G2 to G6.

In FIG. 95(E), the brightness of an image G6 of "E", which is one of the six images forming the character string "BATTLE", is set higher than the brightness of the other images G1 to G5. As a result, the image G6 of "E" appears brighter than the other images G1 to G5.

In FIG. 95(F), the brightness of the character "O" (rightmost "O"), which is one of the four characters forming the character string "OARO", is set higher than the other characters. ing. As a result, the letter "O" appears brighter than the other letters.

In the image transition effect, the image G1 of "B" → the image G2 of "A" → the image G3 of "T" → the image G4 of "T" → the image G5 of "L" → the image G6 of "E" → "O" → Character “R” → Character “A” → Character “O” → Image G1 “B” → . . . . As a result, in the image transition effect, the characters forming the character strings "BATTLE" and "OARO" are displayed so as to rotate counterclockwise around the periphery of the display screen 7a.

Incidentally, while the image transition effect is being executed, a battle effect between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is unfolded in the central portion of the display screen 7a. During the image transition effect, the left effect symbol 8L is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen 7a, and the right effect symbol 8R is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95(G), a winning/losing determination effect is executed. The win/loss determination effect is a effect for notifying the result of the battle effect. Here, the teammate character CRA is displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a. This indicates that the ally character CRA has won the battle presentation. If the ally character CRA is defeated in the battle effect, the enemy character CRB is displayed in the central portion of the display screen.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95(H), a fixed stop effect (win) is executed. The fixed stop production (hit) is a production in which the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R become doubles and the game is fixed and stopped. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all fixed and stopped at "5".

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the specific image transition effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a plurality of images are displayed on the periphery of the display screen 7a of the display device 7, and by changing the luminance of the images, a specific image among the plurality of images is distinguished from the rest of the images. A specific image among the plurality of images is transitioned by repeating the enabling process. Specifically, four images "FIGHT" are displayed, and the brightness of the four images G1 to G4 is changed to change the character string "FIGHT" (FIGS. 93(D), (E), (F) ). Also, by changing the brightness of the six images G1 to G6 that make up the character string of "BATTLE", each character is transitioned (Figs. 94(D), (E), (F), Figs. (F)). According to this configuration, the display of the image on the periphery of the display screen 7a becomes novel, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

The images G1 to G4 of "FIGHT" and the images G1 to G6 forming the character string "BATTLE" correspond to the "predetermined images". In addition, luminance corresponds to "color attribute". Furthermore, the image transition effects in FIGS. 93 to 95 correspond to "transition effects".

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the image transition effect, a specific image among the plurality of images transitions counterclockwise toward the display screen 7a (FIGS. 93(D) to (F), FIG. 94 (D)-(F), FIG. 95(D)-(F)). According to this configuration, the display of the image on the peripheral portion of the display screen 7a can be displayed with rotational movement, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the second movable accessory 15 is provided, and the characters forming the character string "OARO" emit light in accordance with the transition of the specific image (FIG. 95(F)). According to this configuration, it is possible to add motion to the display of the image in the peripheral part including the second movable accessory 15, and to improve the interest of the game. It should be noted that the second movable accessory 15 corresponds to the "light emitting part" and the "accessory".

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, when the image transition effect is being executed, a battle effect between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is unfolded in the central portion of the display screen 7a. According to this configuration, it is possible to add motion to the periphery of the battle presentation, and to improve the interest of the game. A moving image in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight corresponds to the "image related to the predetermined image", and the battle effect corresponds to the "image display effect".

[Modification]
Modified examples of the specific image transition effect are shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the above description, the brightness of the image is changed in the transition rendering, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any change may be made as long as the color attribute, which is the attribute of the display color of the predetermined image, is changed. The color attributes here include luminance, lightness, saturation, hue, and the like.

[Modification 2]
In the transition effect described above, the specific image is transitioned counterclockwise, but it may be transitioned clockwise. Further, the specific images may be transitioned in a predetermined order other than clockwise or counterclockwise, or may be transitioned in a random order.

[Modification 3]
In the above description, the second movable accessory 15 is used to cause the characters forming the character string "OARO" to emit light in accordance with the transition of the specific image (FIG. 95(F)). On the other hand, the "light emitting section" may be realized as an image. For example, the characters "OARO" may be displayed as an image on the display screen 7a.

[Modification 4]
In the above, the second movable accessory 15 is used as the "light-emitting part", but there may be a plurality of "light-emitting parts", for example, four board lamps may be provided near the corners of the display screen 7a. .

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect B6-1]
A gaming machine having a display device,
A plurality of predetermined images are displayed on the periphery of the display screen of the display device, and a color attribute, which is an attribute of a display color of the plurality of predetermined images, is changed so that a specific image among the plurality of predetermined images is displayed on the remaining portion of the predetermined image. It is possible to execute a transition effect that transitions the specific image by repeating the process of making it distinguishable from the image.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B6-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B6-1,
In the transition effect, the specific image among the plurality of predetermined images transitions clockwise or counterclockwise toward the display screen.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B6-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect B6-1 or aspect B6-2,
further comprising a light-emitting unit arranged near the periphery of the display screen and capable of emitting light;
The light emitting unit emits light according to the transition of the specific image,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B6-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect B6-3,
The light emitting unit is displayed as an image on the display screen,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B6-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect B6-3,
The light emitting unit is arranged as an accessory on the peripheral edge of the display screen,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B6-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B6-1 to B6-5,
In parallel with the transition effect, an image display effect for displaying an image related to the predetermined image in a specific area of the display screen can be executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Specific image absorption effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 96 to 98. FIG. This specific image absorption effect can be executed during the variation effect of the effect symbol. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a specific image absorption effect, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103, An image is displayed on the display screen 7 a of the display device 7 .

[Specific Image Absorption Effect A]
FIG. 96 is a diagram for explaining the specific image absorption effect A. FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 96(A), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and show a state of high-speed fluctuation. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending and the variation icon 9C are displayed. The three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending correspond respectively to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the first special figure pending storage area 85a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96(B), a ready-to-win effect is executed. The reach formation effect is a effect in which the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R temporarily stop at the same numerical value. Here, both the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at "5". In addition, the middle production pattern 8C fluctuates at high speed. Also here, three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending and the variation icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 96(C), 96(D) and 96(F), image effects are executed. The image effect is performed while the second movable accessory 15 is moved so as to overlap the display screen 7 a of the display device 7 . It should be noted that the image effect is also executed in the enlargement image display effect of FIG. 96(G) and the display color change effect of FIG. 96(H). A character string "OARO" composed of a plurality of characters is written on the second movable accessory 15. - 特許庁

As shown in FIG. 96(C), in the image effect (initial), the leftmost characters "O", "A", and "R" among the plurality of characters forming the character string of the second movable role "OARO" are displayed. Images TG1, TG2 and TG3 corresponding to are displayed. Then, the image TG1 of "O" moves on the display screen 7a toward "O" at the left end of the second movable accessory 15 as indicated by the arrow Y1. The image TG2 of "A" moves on the display screen 7a toward "A" of the second movable accessory 15 as indicated by the arrow Y2. The image TG3 of "R" moves on the display screen 7a toward the "R" of the second movable accessory 15 as indicated by the arrow Y3. Note that the image corresponding to the rightmost "O" forming the character string "OARO" is not displayed here.

Note that the moving speeds of the images TG1 to TG3 may be the same or different. Further, as shown in FIG. 96(C), the images TG1 to TG3 may move so as to draw a straight trajectory, or may move while drawing a curved trajectory so as to sway. Furthermore, the images TG1 to TG3 may move while rotating. Any axis of rotation may be used at this time.

As shown in FIG. 96(D), in the image rendering (mid-term), the image TG1 of "O" is closer to the leftmost "O" of the second movable accessory 15 than in the image rendering (initial). . The image TG1 of "O" moves on the display screen 7a so as to get closer to the leftmost "O" of the second movable accessory 15, as indicated by the arrow Y1. Also, the image TG2 of "A" moves as indicated by an arrow Y2, and disappears near "A" of the second movable accessory 15 (indicated by a dashed line in the drawing). For example, the image TG2 of "A" is reduced so as to be sucked into "A" of the second movable accessory 15, becomes more transparent, and disappears. When the image TG2 of "A" disappears, the image TG4 of "A" is newly displayed. The image TG4 of "A" moves on the display screen 7a toward "A" of the second movable accessory 15 as indicated by an arrow Y4. Also, the image TG3 of "R" is closer to the "R" of the second movable accessory 15 than in the image production (initial). The image TG3 of "R" moves on the display screen 7a so as to come closer to the "R" of the second movable accessory 15, as indicated by the arrow Y3.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96(E), a chance effect is executed. The chance effect is a effect executed based on the degree of expectation for winning. Here, an ally character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a, and a message image MSG of "chance" is displayed. Note that the chance effect is not limited to such effect, and may be a sound effect such as outputting a sound effect, for example.

As shown in FIG. 96(F), in the image effect (late stage), the image TG5 of "O" is displayed on the display screen 7a toward the leftmost "O" of the second movable accessory 15, as indicated by the arrow Y5. move up. The image TG6 of "A" moves on the display screen 7a toward "A" of the second movable accessory 15 as indicated by an arrow Y6. The image TG7 of "R" moves on the display screen 7a toward the "R" of the second movable accessory 15 as indicated by an arrow Y7. The image TG8 of "O" moves on the display screen 7a toward "O" at the right end of the second movable accessory 15, as indicated by an arrow Y8. The images TG5 to TG8 move toward the corresponding characters of the second movable accessory 15 and disappear in the vicinity of the characters.

In the image effect (late stage), an image TG8 corresponding to the rightmost "O" of the character string "OARO" of the second movable accessory 15 is newly displayed and moves on the display screen 7a. In the image effect, an image corresponding to the character string "OARO" of the second movable accessory 15 is displayed, moves on the display screen 7a and disappears. Compared to the case where the effect is performed with the corresponding images, the case where the effect is performed with the image corresponding to "O", "A", "R", and "O" suggests that the expectation of winning is higher. It has become. That is, the corresponding character is determined based on the degree of expectation for winning. Therefore, when an effect is performed with an image corresponding to the "O" of "OARO", an effect may be performed with an image corresponding to the "O" and "A" of "OARO".

It should be noted that image effects are executed in parallel in the subsequent effects as well, but since they are the same as the image effects (late stage), the description is omitted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96(G), an enlarged image display effect is executed. The enlarged image display effect is an effect in which one of the characters to be rendered corresponding to "OARO" of the second movable accessory 15 is enlarged and displayed at the bottom center of the display screen 7a. Here, the state where the image UG of "O" is displayed is shown. The degree of expectation for winning may differ depending on the character. It is assumed that the display color of the image UG of "O" is blue. The display colors here can be, for example, blue, green, purple, red, gold, and the like. It also suggests that expectations for winning are higher in the order of blue, green, purple, red, and gold.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96(H), a display color change effect is executed. The display color change effect is a effect of changing the display color of the image enlarged and displayed in the enlarged image display effect. Here, a state in which the color of the image UG of "O" is changed to red is shown. This is a production that suggests that the expectation of winning is high.

[Specific Image Absorption Effect B]
FIG. 97 is a diagram for explaining specific image absorption effect B. FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 97(A), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and show a state of high-speed fluctuation. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending and the variation icon 9C are displayed. The three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending correspond respectively to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the first special figure pending storage area 85a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97(B), a ready-to-win effect is executed. The reach formation effect is a effect in which the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R temporarily stop at the same numerical value. Here, both the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at "5". In addition, the middle production pattern 8C fluctuates at high speed. Also here, three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending and the variation icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 97C, 97D, and 97F, image effects are executed. The image effect is performed while the second movable accessory 15 is moved so as to overlap the display screen 7 a of the display device 7 . Note that the image effect is also executed in the enlarged image display effect of FIG. 97(G) and the battle effect of FIG. 97(H). A character string "OARO" composed of a plurality of characters is written on the second movable accessory 15. - 特許庁

As shown in FIG. 97(C), in the image effect (initial), the leftmost characters "O", "A", and "R" among the plurality of characters forming the character string of the second movable role "OARO" are displayed. Images TG1, TG2, TG3, TG4 and TG5 corresponding to are displayed. Then, the image TG1 of "O" moves on the display screen 7a toward "O" at the left end of the second movable accessory 15 as indicated by the arrow Y1. The image TG2 of "O" moves on the display screen 7a toward the leftmost "O" of the second movable accessory 15, as indicated by the arrow Y2. The image TG3 of "A" moves on the display screen 7a toward "A" of the second movable accessory 15 as indicated by an arrow Y3. The image TG4 of "A" moves on the display screen 7a toward "A" of the second movable accessory 15 as indicated by the arrow Y4. The image TG5 of "R" moves on the display screen 7a toward the "R" of the second movable accessory 15 as indicated by the arrow Y5. Note that the image corresponding to the rightmost "O" forming the character string "OARO" is not displayed here.

Note that the moving speeds of the images TG1 to TG5 may be the same or different. Further, as shown in FIG. 97C, the images TG1 to TG5 may move so as to draw a straight trajectory, or may move while drawing a curved trajectory so as to sway. Furthermore, the images TG1 to TG5 may move while rotating. Any axis of rotation may be used at this time.

Here, images TG1 and TG2 correspond to the character string "OARO" of the second movable accessory 15 and the character "O" at the left end. Also, images TG3 and TG4 correspond to the character string "OARO" of the second movable accessory 15, "A". In this way, images corresponding to respective characters forming the character string of the second movable accessory 15 may be a plurality of images. For example, three or more images may correspond to each character.

As shown in FIG. 97(D), in the image rendering (mid-term), the image TG1 of "O" is closer to the leftmost "O" of the second movable accessory 15 than in the image rendering (initial). . The image TG1 of "O" moves on the display screen 7a so as to get closer to the leftmost "O" of the second movable accessory 15, as indicated by the arrow Y1. The image TG2 of "O" is closer to the leftmost "O" of the second movable accessory 15 than in the image production (initial). The image TG2 of "O" moves on the display screen 7a so as to approach the leftmost "O" of the second movable accessory 15, as indicated by the arrow Y2. Also, the image TG3 of "A" moves as indicated by an arrow Y3 and disappears near "A" of the second movable accessory 15 (indicated by a dashed line in the drawing). For example, the image TG3 of "A" is reduced so as to be sucked into "A" of the second movable accessory 15, becomes more transparent, and disappears. The image TG4 of "A" is closer to "A" of the second movable accessory 15 than in the image production (initial). The image TG4 of "A" moves on the display screen 7a so as to come closer to "A" of the second movable accessory 15, as indicated by the arrow Y4. The "R" image TG5 is closer to the "R" of the second movable accessory 15 than in the image production (initial). The image TG5 of "R" moves on the display screen 7a so as to come closer to the "R" of the second movable accessory 15, as indicated by the arrow Y5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97(E), a chance effect is executed. The chance effect is a effect executed based on the degree of expectation for winning. Here, an ally character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a, and a message image MSG of "chance" is displayed. Note that the chance effect is not limited to such effect, and may be a sound effect such as outputting a sound effect, for example.

As shown in FIG. 97(F), in the image effect (late stage), the image TG6 of "O" is displayed on the display screen 7a toward the leftmost "O" of the second movable accessory 15, as indicated by the arrow Y6. move up. The image TG7 of "O" moves on the display screen 7a toward the leftmost "O" of the second movable accessory 15, as indicated by an arrow Y7. The image TG8 of "A" moves on the display screen 7a toward "A" of the second movable accessory 15 as indicated by an arrow Y8. The image TG9 of "R" moves on the display screen 7a toward the "R" of the second movable accessory 15 as indicated by an arrow Y9. The image TG10 of "O" moves on the display screen 7a toward "O" at the right end of the second movable accessory 15, as indicated by the arrow Y10. The images TG6 to TG10 move toward the corresponding characters of the second movable accessory 15 and disappear in the vicinity of the characters.

In the image effect (late stage), an image TG10 corresponding to the rightmost "O" of the character string "OARO" of the second movable accessory 15 is newly displayed and moves on the display screen 7a. In the image effect, an image corresponding to the character string "OARO" of the second movable accessory 15 is displayed, moves on the display screen 7a and disappears. Compared to the case where the effect is performed with the corresponding images, the case where the effect is performed with the image corresponding to "O", "A", "R", and "O" suggests that the expectation of winning is higher. It has become. That is, the corresponding character is determined based on the degree of expectation for winning. Therefore, when an effect is performed with an image corresponding to the "O" of "OARO", an effect may be performed with an image corresponding to the "O" and "A" of "OARO".

It should be noted that image effects are executed in parallel in the subsequent effects as well, but since they are the same as the image effects (late stage), the description is omitted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97(G), an enlarged image display effect is executed. The enlarged image display effect is an effect in which one of the characters to be rendered corresponding to "OARO" of the second movable accessory 15 is enlarged and displayed at the bottom center of the display screen 7a. Here, the state where the image UG of "O" is displayed is shown. The degree of expectation for winning may differ depending on the character. It is assumed that the display color of the image UG of "O" is red. The display colors here can be, for example, blue, green, purple, red, gold, and the like. It also suggests that expectations for winning are higher in the order of blue, green, purple, red, and gold.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97(H), a battle effect is executed. The battle effect is a effect in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. After the image UG of "O" disappears, the battle effect is unfolded in the display area of the image UG of "O". It should be noted that the win is confirmed by winning the battle production.

[Specific Image Absorption Effect C]
FIG. 98 is a diagram for explaining the specific image absorption effect C. FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 98(A), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and show a state of high-speed fluctuation. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending and the variation icon 9C are displayed. The three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending correspond respectively to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the first special figure pending storage area 85a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(B), a ready-to-win effect is executed. The reach formation effect is a effect in which the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R temporarily stop at the same numerical value. Here, both the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at "5". In addition, the middle production pattern 8C fluctuates at high speed. Also here, three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending and the variation icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 98C, 98D, and 98F, image effects are executed. The image effect is performed while the second movable accessory 15 is moved so as to overlap the display screen 7 a of the display device 7 . It should be noted that the image effect is executed thereafter also in the enlarged image display effect of FIG. 98(G) and the display color change effect of FIG. 98(H). A character string "OARO" composed of a plurality of characters is written on the second movable accessory 15. - 特許庁

As shown in FIG. 98(C), in the image rendering (initial), an image TG1 corresponding to "OA" among a plurality of characters forming the character string "OARO" of the second movable role is displayed. Then, the image TG1 of "OA" moves on the display screen 7a toward "OA" of the second movable accessory 15 as indicated by the arrow Y1. Also, here, the image of “OA” is larger than the “OA” of the second movable accessory 15 . As in the specific image absorption effect B, two or more "OA" images may be provided.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 98C, the image TG1 may move so as to draw a linear trajectory, or may move while drawing a curved trajectory so as to sway. Furthermore, the image TG1 may move while rotating. Any axis of rotation may be used at this time.

As shown in FIG. 98(D), in the image production (mid-term), the image TG1 of "OA" moves as indicated by the arrow Y1 and disappears near "OA" of the second movable accessory 15 ( indicated by a dashed line in the figure). For example, the image TG1 of "OA" is reduced so as to be sucked into "OA" of the second movable accessory 15, increases its transparency, and disappears. Note that the image TG1 of "OA" is reduced and becomes smaller as it moves.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(E), a chance effect is executed. The chance effect is a effect executed based on the degree of expectation for winning. Here, an ally character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a, and a message image MSG of "chance" is displayed. Note that the chance effect is not limited to such effect, and may be a sound effect such as outputting a sound effect, for example.

As shown in FIG. 98(F), in the image effect (late stage), the image TG2 of "OA" is displayed on the display screen 7a toward "OA" of the second movable accessory 15, as indicated by the arrow Y2. Moving. The image TG3 of "RO" moves on the display screen 7a toward "RO" on the left end of the second movable accessory 15, as indicated by an arrow Y3. The images TG2 and TG3 move toward the corresponding character string of the second movable accessory 15 and disappear near the character string.

In the image effect (late stage), an image TG3 corresponding to "RO" in the character string "OARO" of the second movable accessory 15 is newly displayed and moves on the display screen 7a. In the image effect, the image corresponding to the character string "OARO" of the second movable accessory 15 is displayed, moves on the display screen 7a and disappears, but the effect is performed with the image corresponding to "OA". Compared to the case, the case where the effect is performed with the images corresponding to "OA" and "RO" suggests that the degree of expectation for winning is higher. That is, the corresponding character string is determined based on the degree of expectation for winning.

It should be noted that image effects are executed in parallel in the subsequent effects as well, but since they are the same as the image effects (late stage), the description is omitted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(G), an enlarged image display effect is executed. The enlarged image display effect is an effect in which one of the character strings to be rendered corresponding to "OARO" of the second movable accessory 15 is enlarged and displayed at the bottom center of the display screen 7a. . Here, the state where the image UG of "OA" is displayed is shown. The degree of expectation for winning may differ depending on the character string. It is assumed that the display color of the image UG of "OA" is blue. The display colors here can be, for example, blue, green, purple, red, gold, and the like. It also suggests that expectations for winning are higher in the order of blue, green, purple, red, and gold.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(H), a battle effect is executed. The battle effect is a effect in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. After the "OA" image UG disappears, the battle effect is unfolded in the display area of the "OA" image UG. It should be noted that the win is confirmed by winning the battle production.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the specific image absorption rendering will be shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a character image similar to the character displayed by the second movable accessory 15 is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the character image is moved on the display screen 7a so as to approach the character of the second movable accessory 15. 96(C)(D)(F), 97(C)(D)(F), 98(C)(D)(F). )). According to this configuration, it is possible to realize an effect in cooperation with the second movable accessory 15, and to improve the interest of the game.

The second movable accessory 15 corresponds to the "display unit", the images TG1 to TG10 correspond to the "specific image", and the image effect corresponds to the "specific image effect".

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the second movable accessory 15 displays a plurality of characters "O", "A", "R", and "O". At least one of the characters "O" is targeted for the effect (Figs. 96(C)(D)(F), Figs. 97(C)(D)(F), Figs. 98(C)(D) )(F)). According to this configuration, the effect in cooperation with the second movable accessory 15 can be widened, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the number of characters targeted for image rendering in the character string "OARO" of the second movable accessory 15 is determined based on the degree of expectation for winning. According to this configuration, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation for winning by the performance in cooperation with the second movable accessory 15, and to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, "hit" corresponds to "advantageous game advantageous to the player", and "advantageous game" includes normal state (low probability low Base state) includes a game state that is advantageous compared to the base state.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the number of characters targeted for the image effect in the character string "OARO" of the second movable accessory 15 is increased during the variation of the effect symbol (FIG. 96(F), FIG. 97(F), FIG. 98(F)). According to this configuration, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation for winning by the effect in cooperation with the second movable accessory 15, and to improve the amusement of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the image UG corresponding to one of the characters (character strings) to be subjected to image rendering in the character string "OARO" of the second movable accessory 15 is displayed on the display screen 7a. Enlarged image display effect displayed in the lower center is executed (Fig. 96(G), Fig. 97(G), Fig. 98(G)). According to this configuration, one of the characters that is the target of the effect is displayed in an enlarged manner, which can surprise the player and improve the interest of the game.

Note that the image UG corresponds to the "corresponding image", and the enlarged image display effect corresponds to the "image display effect".

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the display color of the image UG corresponding to one of the characters (character strings) targeted for image rendering among the character string "OARO" of the second movable accessory 15 is displayed as a win. 96(H), 97(G), 98(G)). According to this configuration, the image UG corresponding to one of the characters (character strings) to be imaged can be used to suggest the degree of expectation for winning, and the interest in the game can be improved. can.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the display color of the image UG corresponding to one of the characters (character strings) targeted for image rendering in the character string "OARO" of the second movable accessory 15 is varied. medium (FIG. 96(H)). According to this configuration, the image UG corresponding to one of the characters (character strings) to be imaged can be used to suggest the degree of expectation for winning, and the interest in the game can be improved. can.

In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, after displaying the image UG, a battle effect is executed instead of the image UG (FIGS. 97(G) and (H), FIGS. 98(G) and (H)). According to this configuration, the connection between the effects becomes smoother, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Modifications of the specific image absorption rendering will be shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the above description, images of the characters "O", "A", "R", and "O" forming the character string "OARO" of the second movable accessory 15, or images of the character strings "OA" and "RO" are used. I was doing imagery. However, it is not necessary to be limited to such characters. That is, the "symbols displayed by the display unit" include figures with meanings such as marks and pictures.

[Modification 2]
In the above description, the second movable accessory 15 displays the character string "OARO", but the accessory displays "O", "A", and "R". may be provided with a plurality of display units. For example, four display units may be provided near the corners of the display screen 7a.

[Modification 3]
Although the second movable accessory 15 is configured to move between the retracted position and the advanced position in the above description, it may be configured using a non-movable display unit.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect B7-1]
a display device capable of displaying an image;
a display unit that is arranged close to the periphery of the display screen of the display device and displays a symbol, the gaming machine comprising:
A specific image, which is an image similar to the symbol displayed by the display unit, is displayed on the display screen, is moved on the display screen so as to approach the symbol on the display unit, and is displayed on the symbol on the display unit. It is possible to execute a specific image effect that disappears in the vicinity,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B7-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B7-1,
The display unit displays a plurality of symbols,
In the specific image rendering, rendering is performed for at least one symbol among the plurality of symbols.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B7-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B7-2,
In the specific image effect, the number of symbols targeted for the specific image effect out of the plurality of symbols is determined based on the player's expectation of transition to an advantageous game.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B7-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect B7-2 or aspect B7-3,
In the specific image effect, the number of symbols targeted for the specific image effect among the plurality of symbols can be increased while the effect pattern is changing.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B7-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B7-1 to B7-4,
An image display effect is executed for displaying, in a specific area of the display screen of the display device, a corresponding image obtained by enlarging an image corresponding to one of the symbols targeted for the specific image effect among the plurality of symbols. is possible,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B7-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect B7-5,
In the image display effect, the display color of the corresponding image is determined based on the player's expectation of transition to an advantageous game.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B7-7]
The gaming machine according to aspect B7-5 or aspect B7-6,
In the image display effect, the display color of the corresponding image can be changed while the effect pattern is changing.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B7-8]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B7-5 to B7-7,
In the image display effect, after displaying the corresponding image, a moving image can be displayed instead of the corresponding image.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Character string decomposition effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 99 to 101. FIG. This character string decomposition effect can be executed during the variable effect of the effect pattern. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the instruction to execute the character string decomposition effect is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103, and the main An image is displayed on the display screen 7 a of the display device 7 .

[Character string decomposition effect A]
FIG. 99 is a diagram for explaining the character string decomposition effect A. FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 99(A), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and show a state of high-speed fluctuation. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending and the variation icon 9C are displayed. The three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending correspond respectively to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the first special figure pending storage area 85a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 99(B), a ready-to-win effect is executed. The reach formation effect is a effect in which the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R temporarily stop at the same numerical value. Here, both the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at "5". In addition, the middle production pattern 8C fluctuates at high speed. Also here, three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending and the variation icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 99(C), a character string display effect is executed. The character string display effect is an effect of displaying an image of a character string on the display screen 7a. Here, a character string image MG saying "Chance!" is displayed, and a frame image WG surrounding the character string image MG is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 99(D), a frame line change effect is executed. The frame line change effect is a effect of enlarging the frame image WG displayed in accordance with the character string image MG. Here, the frame image WG is enlarged to the periphery of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 99(E) and (F), constituent character effects are executed. The constituent character effect is a effect in which the characters "chi", "cha", "n", "su", and "!" constituting the character string "Chance!" move in predetermined directions.

As shown in FIG. 99(E), in the constituent character rendering (first half), the character image K1 of "chi" moves diagonally downward to the left on the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow Y1. In addition, the character image K2 of "a" moves substantially upward on the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow Y2. The character image K3 of "n" moves diagonally downward to the right on the display screen 7a as indicated by an arrow Y3. The character image K4 of "su" moves diagonally upward to the right on the display screen 7a as indicated by an arrow Y4. The character image K5 of "!" moves diagonally downward to the right on the display screen 7a as indicated by an arrow Y5.

As shown in FIG. 99(F), in the constituent character rendering (second half), in addition to the movement in the constituent character rendering (first half), the character images K1 to K5 move further. The character image K1 of "chi" moves diagonally downward to the left on the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow Y1. In addition, the character image K2 of "a" moves substantially upward on the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow Y2. The character image K3 of "n" moves diagonally downward to the right on the display screen 7a as indicated by an arrow Y3. The character image K4 of "su" moves diagonally upward to the right on the display screen 7a as indicated by an arrow Y4. The character image K5 of "!" moves diagonally downward to the right on the display screen 7a as indicated by an arrow Y5. The character image K5 of "!" reaches the boundary of the frame image WG.

Note that the moving speeds of the images K1 to K5 may be the same or different. In addition, the images K1 to K5 may move so as to draw a straight trajectory, or may move so as to draw a curved trajectory so as to sway.

Next, as shown in FIG. 99(G), a battle effect is executed. The battle effect is a effect in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. Winning is confirmed when the ally character CRA wins in the battle production. On the other hand, if the ally character CRA is defeated in the battle production, the loss is confirmed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 99(H), a fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. The fixed stop effect (loss) is a effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped in the form of loss. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are confirmed and stopped at "5", and the middle effect symbol 8C is confirmed and stopped at "6". Note that the change icon 9C is hidden at the same time as the fixed stop effect is produced.

[Character string decomposition effect B]
FIG. 100 is a diagram for explaining the character string decomposition effect B. FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 100(A), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and show a state of high-speed fluctuation. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending and the variation icon 9C are displayed. The three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending correspond respectively to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the first special figure pending storage area 85a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100(B), a ready-to-win effect is executed. The reach formation effect is a effect in which the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R temporarily stop at the same numerical value. Here, both the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at "5". In addition, the middle production pattern 8C fluctuates at high speed. Also here, three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending and the variation icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100(C), a character string display effect is executed. The character string display effect is an effect of displaying an image of a character string on the display screen 7a. Here, a character string image MG reading "Chance!" is displayed, and a frame image WG surrounding the character string image MG is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100(D), a frame line change effect is executed. The frame line change effect is a effect of enlarging the frame image WG displayed in accordance with the character string image MG. Here, the frame image WG is enlarged to the periphery of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 100(E) and (F), constituent character effects are executed. The component character effect is a effect in which the characters "chi", "cha", "n", "su", and "!" constituting the character string "Chance!" rotate and move in a predetermined direction.

As shown in FIG. 100(E), in the constituent character rendering (first half), the character image K1 of "chi" moves diagonally downward to the left on the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow Y1. The character image K1 of "chi" rotates to the left (counterclockwise) about the direction perpendicular to the display screen 7a. The character image K2 of "a" moves substantially upward on the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow Y2. The character image K2 of "a" rotates rightward (clockwise) about the direction perpendicular to the display screen 7a. The character image K3 of "n" moves diagonally downward to the right on the display screen 7a as indicated by an arrow Y3. The character image K3 of "n" rotates rightward (clockwise) about the direction perpendicular to the display screen 7a. The character image K4 of "su" moves diagonally upward to the right on the display screen 7a as indicated by an arrow Y4. The character image K4 of "S" rotates counterclockwise around a direction perpendicular to the display screen 7a. The character image K5 of "!" moves diagonally downward to the right on the display screen 7a as indicated by an arrow Y5. The character image K5 of "!" rotates rightward (clockwise) about the direction perpendicular to the display screen 7a.

As shown in FIG. 100(F), in the constituent character presentation (second half), in addition to the movements in the constituent character presentation (first half), the character images K1 to K5 move. The character image K1 of "chi" moves diagonally downward to the left on the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow Y1. The character image K1 of "chi" rotates to the left (counterclockwise) about the direction perpendicular to the display screen 7a. The character image K2 of "a" moves substantially upward on the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow Y2. The character image K2 of "a" rotates rightward (clockwise) about the direction perpendicular to the display screen 7a. The character image K3 of "n" moves diagonally downward to the right on the display screen 7a as indicated by an arrow Y3. The character image K3 of "n" rotates rightward (clockwise) about the direction perpendicular to the display screen 7a. The character image K4 of "su" moves diagonally upward to the right on the display screen 7a as indicated by an arrow Y4. The character image K4 of "S" rotates counterclockwise around a direction perpendicular to the display screen 7a. The character image K5 of "!" moves diagonally downward to the right on the display screen 7a as indicated by an arrow Y5. The character image K5 of "!" rotates rightward (clockwise) about the direction perpendicular to the display screen 7a. The character image K5 of "!" reaches the boundary of the frame image WG.

Note that the moving speeds of the images K1 to K5 may be the same or different. In addition, the images K1 to K5 may move so as to draw a straight trajectory, or may move so as to draw a curved trajectory so as to sway. Furthermore, the axes of rotation of the images K1 to K5 are not limited. For example, the horizontal direction parallel to the display screen 7a may be the rotation axis, or the vertical direction parallel to the display screen 7a may be the rotation axis. Also, a rotation axis having a predetermined angle may be set.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100(G), a battle effect is executed. The battle effect is a effect in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. Winning is confirmed when the ally character CRA wins in the battle production. On the other hand, if the ally character CRA is defeated in the battle production, the loss is confirmed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100(H), a fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. The fixed stop effect (loss) is a effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped in the form of loss. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are confirmed and stopped at "5", and the middle effect symbol 8C is confirmed and stopped at "6". Note that the change icon 9C is hidden at the same time as the fixed stop effect is produced.

[Character string decomposition effect C]
FIG. 101 is a diagram for explaining the character string decomposition effect C. As shown in FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 101(A), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and show a state of high-speed fluctuation. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending and the variation icon 9C are displayed. The three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending correspond respectively to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the first special figure pending storage area 85a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 101(B), a ready-to-win effect is executed. The reach formation effect is a effect in which the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R temporarily stop at the same numerical value. Here, both the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at "5". In addition, the middle production pattern 8C fluctuates at high speed. Also here, three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending and the variation icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 101(C), a character string display effect is executed. The character string display effect is an effect of displaying an image of a character string on the display screen 7a. Here, a character string image MG saying "Chance!" is displayed, and a frame image WG surrounding the character string image MG is displayed. It is assumed that the border of the frame image WG is white.

Next, as shown in FIG. 101(D), a frame line change effect is executed. The frame line change effect is a effect of enlarging the frame image WG displayed in accordance with the character string image MG. Here, the frame image WG is enlarged to the periphery of the display screen 7a. In this case, the boundary of the frame image is particularly thick, and the display color of the boundary is red. The display color of the boundary of the frame image WG suggests the degree of expectation for winning. For example, the degree of expectation for winning increases in the order of white, blue, green, purple, red, and gold.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 101(E) and (F), constituent character effects are executed. The constituent character effect is a effect in which the characters ``chi'', ``cha'', ``n'', ``su'', and ``!'' constituting the character string ``chance!'' rotate and move in a predetermined direction.

As shown in FIG. 101(E), in the constituent character presentation (first half), the character image K1 of "chi" moves diagonally downward to the left on the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow Y1. The character image K1 of "chi" rotates to the left (counterclockwise) about the direction perpendicular to the display screen 7a. The character image K2 of "a" moves substantially upward on the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow Y2. The character image K2 of "a" rotates rightward (clockwise) about the direction perpendicular to the display screen 7a. The character image K3 of "n" moves diagonally downward to the right on the display screen 7a as indicated by an arrow Y3. The character image K3 of "n" rotates rightward (clockwise) about the direction perpendicular to the display screen 7a. The character image K4 of "su" moves diagonally upward to the right on the display screen 7a as indicated by an arrow Y4. The character image K4 of "S" rotates counterclockwise around a direction perpendicular to the display screen 7a. The character image K5 of "!" moves diagonally downward to the right on the display screen 7a as indicated by an arrow Y5. The character image K5 of "!" rotates rightward (clockwise) about the direction perpendicular to the display screen 7a.

As shown in FIG. 101(F), in the constituent character presentation (second half), in addition to the movements in the constituent character presentation (first half), the character images K1 to K5 move. The character image K1 of "chi" moves diagonally downward to the left on the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow Y1. The character image K1 of "chi" rotates to the left (counterclockwise) about the direction perpendicular to the display screen 7a. The character image K2 of "a" moves substantially upward on the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow Y2. The character image K2 of "a" rotates rightward (clockwise) about the direction perpendicular to the display screen 7a. The character image K3 of "n" moves diagonally downward to the right on the display screen 7a as indicated by an arrow Y3. The character image K3 of "n" rotates rightward (clockwise) about the direction perpendicular to the display screen 7a. The character image K4 of "su" moves diagonally upward to the right on the display screen 7a as indicated by an arrow Y4. The character image K4 of "S" rotates counterclockwise around a direction perpendicular to the display screen 7a. The character image K5 of "!" moves diagonally downward to the right on the display screen 7a as indicated by an arrow Y5. The character image K5 of "!" rotates rightward (clockwise) about the direction perpendicular to the display screen 7a. The character image K5 of "!" reaches the boundary of the frame image WG.

Note that the moving speeds of the images K1 to K5 may be the same or different. Further, the images K1 to K5 may move so as to draw a straight trajectory, or may move so as to draw a curved trajectory so as to sway. Furthermore, the axes of rotation of the images K1 to K5 are not limited. For example, the horizontal direction parallel to the display screen 7a may be the rotation axis, or the vertical direction parallel to the display screen 7a may be the rotation axis. Also, a rotation axis having a predetermined angle may be set.

Next, as shown in FIG. 101(G), a battle effect is executed. The battle effect is a effect in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. Winning is confirmed when the ally character CRA wins in the battle production. On the other hand, if the ally character CRA is defeated in the battle production, the loss is confirmed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 101(H), a fixed stop effect (win) is executed. The fixed stop production (win) is a production in which the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped in a win mode. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all fixed and stopped at "5". Note that the change icon 9C is hidden at the same time as the fixed stop effect is produced.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the character string decomposition effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the character string display effect of displaying the character string "Chance!" is executed on the display screen 7a of the display device 7 (FIGS. C)), and next, the characters ``Chi'', ``Cha'', ``N'', ``Su'', and ``!'' that make up the character string are moved in predetermined directions, respectively, to perform constituent character effects (FIG. 99 ( E)(F), Figures 100(E)(F), Figures 101(E)(F)). According to this configuration, compared to the effect of simply displaying a character string, the message is enhanced, and the interest in the game can be improved.

The character string "chance!" , ``su'' and ``!'' correspond to the ``constituent symbol'' and the ``constituent character'', and the constituent character rendering corresponds to the ``second rendering''.

In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the constituent character presentation, the characters "chi", "cha", "n", "su", and "!" that make up the character string are moved in predetermined directions while being rotated. (Figs. 100(E)(F), Figs. 101(E)(F)). According to this configuration, compared to the effect of simply displaying a character string, the message is enhanced, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the frame image WG surrounding the character string image MG is displayed in the character string display effect. According to this configuration, since the character string image MG is emphasized by the frame image WG, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.
Note that the frame image WG may be, for example, a "balloon" indicating that it is a character's dialogue.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the frame line change effect is executed before the constituent character effect is executed, and the boundary of the frame image WG is expanded to the peripheral portion of the display screen 7a (Fig. 99(D), Fig. 100 (D), FIG. 101(D)). According to this configuration, it is possible to increase the possibility that the player will be forced to pay attention to the next constituent character presentation, thereby improving the amusement of the game. Note that the frame line change effect is included in the “second effect”.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the component character presentation, the character "!" that constitutes the character string reaches the boundary of the frame image WG (Fig. 99 (F), Fig. 100 (F), Fig. 101 ( F)). According to this configuration, the composition character presentation becomes dynamic, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
A modification of the character string decomposition effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
Although the above is an example of displaying the character string "chance!", it is not necessary to limit the character string to such a character string. The "symbol string" includes figures with meanings such as marks and pictures.

[Modification 2]
In the above description, the characters ``Chi'', ``Cha'', ``N'', ``Su'', and ``!'' constituting the character string are rotated with the direction perpendicular to the display screen 7a as the axis of rotation. may In that case, it is conceivable to model the characters "chi", "cha", "n", "su", and "!" as three-dimensional models.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect B8-1]
A gaming machine comprising a display device capable of displaying an image,
a first effect of displaying a symbol string on the display screen of the display device;
a second effect of moving constituent symbols forming the symbol string displayed in the first effect in a predetermined direction, respectively;
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B8-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B8-1,
wherein the symbol string is a character string and the constituent symbols are constituent characters;
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B8-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect B8-1 or aspect B8-2,
In the second effect, the constituent symbols are moved while being rotated;
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B8-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B8-1 to B8-3,
In the first effect, the symbol string is displayed, and a frame image surrounding the symbol string is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B8-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect B8-4,
In the second effect, after deforming the frame image, the constituent symbols are moved;
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B8-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect B8-4 or aspect B8-5,
In the second effect, at least part of the constituent symbols reaches the boundary of the frame image.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B8-7]
The gaming machine according to aspect B8-4 or aspect B8-6,
The display color of the frame image suggests the player's expectation of transition to an advantageous gaming state,
A gaming machine characterized by:

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in the game state management process of FIG. ), it shifts to idle time (low-probability short-time state). This play time is continued until the special symbol changes 700 times. In addition, in the case of a 2R jackpot, two round games are performed at the first big prize winning port 30. - 特許庁In this case, in one round game, when 10 game balls enter the first big winning hole 30, the first big winning hole 30 closes, and one game ball enters the first big winning hole 30. The number of game balls paid out when a ball wins is 10, that is, the number of game balls paid out in one round game is 100 (when there is no over-winning). Therefore, the number of game balls that can be paid out in the 2R jackpot is 200 if there is no over winning.
The jackpot game count display effects A to C shown below are effects that can appear when one of two types of 2R jackpots is won.

The jackpot game count display effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 102 to 104. FIG. This jackpot game count display is executed during the variable performance of the decorative symbols in the normal state, the time-saving state (low-probability-low base state), or the probability-variable state (high-probability-high base state). That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the command includes an instruction to execute a jackpot game count display effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the image display device 7. An image is displayed on the display screen 7 a or the sub-display screen 64 .

[Jackpot game count display effect A]
FIG. 102 is a diagram for explaining the jackpot game count display effect A. FIG. The jackpot game count display effect A in FIG. 102 is a effect with the same variation of special symbols. In the jackpot game count display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 102(A), the ready-to-win effect is performed after the decorative symbol variation effect. In this ready-to-win effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped at approximately the center of the display screen 7a, and the decorative symbol 8C is vertically fluctuated at high speed to form a ready-to-win state. Also, in this ready-to-win effect, a variation number display XI6 is displayed near the lower left of the display screen 7a. This change number display XI6 represents the number of changes of the special symbols after the end of the previous big win. In addition, although the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, they are omitted in the figure.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(B), a special jackpot notification effect is performed. In this special jackpot notification effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R form a 2R jackpot pattern indicating a 2R jackpot. Specifically, in the special jackpot notification performance, the decorative patterns 8L and 8R are stop-displayed with seven patterns, and the decorative pattern 8C is stop-displayed with a special pattern (a pattern in which a triangle is arranged inside a circle). A special symbol stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol 8C suggests a 2R jackpot. In addition, in the special jackpot notification effect, the change count display XI6 is continuously displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(C), a jackpot game effect A is performed. In this jackpot game effect A, the acquired game ball number display XI1 is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a, the count display XI2 is displayed substantially in the lower center, and the count target suggestion display XI3 is displayed from the left to the center. The acquired game ball number display XI1 represents the number of game balls acquired by the big win game (round game) during the big win game (from the start of the round game). A count display XI2 represents a count-up method and is represented by an integer of 0 or more in a hexagonal frame. In this jackpot game effect A, the winning game ball number display XI1 shows "0" for the number of winning balls, and the count display XI2 shows "0" in a hexagonal frame. The count target suggesting display XI3 is a display that suggests a count value (a possible final count value) targeted by the count display XI2, and is written as "Aim for a count of 20!" It suggests that it is "20". In addition, in this jackpot game effect A, the display of the number of times of variation display XI6 is deleted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(D), a jackpot game effect B is performed. In this jackpot game effect B, the winning game ball number display XI1, the count display XI2, and the count target suggestion display XI3 are continuously displayed on the display screen 7a. The count display XI2 is larger than that of the jackpot game presentation A. In addition, in this jackpot game presentation B, the winning game ball number display XI1 shows "100" as the number of winning balls, and the count display XI2 shows "10" in a hexagonal frame. Here, when the number of acquired balls displayed on the acquired game ball display XI1 increases, the count displayed on the count display XI2 also increases. Specifically, when the number of acquired balls displayed on the acquired game ball number display XI1 increases by "10", the count of the count display XI2 increases by "1", and when the number of acquired balls displayed increases by "100", the count displayed on the count display XI2 increases. is increased by "10", in other words, when one round game (10 wins to the first big winning opening 30) is completed, the count display XI2 is increased by "10". In the jackpot game effect B, the acquired game ball number display XI1 and the count display XI2 are displays at the end of the 1st round game. Incidentally, in this case, in the acquired game ball number display XI1, the acquired game balls that have entered the first big winning hole 30 in excess of 10 are not included in the acquired game balls.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(E), a jackpot game effect C is performed. In this jackpot game effect C, the winning game ball number display XI1, the count display XI2, and the count target suggestion display XI3 are continuously displayed on the display screen 7a. The count display XI2 is larger than that of the jackpot game presentation B. In addition, in this jackpot game effect C, the winning game ball number display XI1 shows "200" as the number of winning balls, and the count display XI2 shows "20" in a hexagonal frame. Here, when the number of acquired balls displayed on the acquired game ball display XI1 increases, the count displayed on the count display XI2 also increases. Specifically, when the number of acquired balls displayed on the acquired game ball number display XI1 increases by "10", the count of the count display XI2 increases by "1", and when the number of acquired balls displayed increases by "100", the count displayed on the count display XI2 increases. is increased by "10", in other words, when one round game (10 wins to the first big winning port 30) is completed, the count display XI2 is increased by "10". In the jackpot game effect C, the acquired game ball number display XI1 and the count display XI2 are displays at the end of the second round game. In this case, in the obtained game ball number display XI1, the obtained game balls that have entered the first big winning hole 30 in excess of 10 are not included in the obtained game balls.

Of the two types of 2R jackpots, if the current jackpot is a 2R probability variable jackpot, the following jackpot game performance D is performed, and if the current jackpot is a 2R latent probability variable jackpot, the following jackpots. A game presentation E is performed.

When the current jackpot is a 2R probability variable jackpot, as shown in FIG. 102(F), a jackpot game effect D is performed. In this jackpot game effect D, a super explosive mode suggestion image XI4 is displayed on the display screen 7a. This super explosive mode suggesting image XI4 is written as "entering super explosive mode", and is an image suggesting that the display mode after the big win will be the super explosive mode. This is an image suggesting that there is
After that, on the display screen 7a, an effect based on the super explosive mode is performed, that is, an effect suggesting that the variable probability state is performed.

When the current jackpot is the 2R latent probability variable jackpot, as shown in FIG. 102(G), a jackpot game presentation E is performed. In this jackpot game effect E, a relaxed mode suggestion image XI5 is displayed on the display screen 7a. This Yururi mode suggesting image XI5 is described as "Entering into Yururi mode", and is an image suggesting that the display mode after the big win will be the Yururi mode. This is an image that suggests
After that, on the display screen 7a, an effect based on the Yururi mode is performed, that is, an effect suggesting that the player is in the latent probability variable state is performed.

[Jackpot game count display effect B]
FIG. 103 is a diagram for explaining the jackpot game count display effect B. FIG. The jackpot game count display effect B in FIG. 103 is a effect with the same variation of special symbols. In the jackpot game count display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 103(A), the ready-to-win effect is performed after the decorative symbol variation effect. In this ready-to-win effect, seven decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed substantially in the center of the display screen 7a, and a ready-to-win state is formed by vertically fluctuating the decorative symbol 8C at high speed. Also, in this ready-to-win effect, a change count display XI6 is displayed near the lower left of the display screen 7a. This change number display XI6 represents the number of changes of the special symbols after the end of the previous big win. In addition, although the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, they are omitted in the figure.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(B), a special jackpot notification effect is performed. In this special jackpot notification effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R form a 2R jackpot pattern indicating a 2R jackpot. Specifically, in the special jackpot notification performance, the decorative patterns 8L and 8R are stop-displayed with seven patterns, and the decorative pattern 8C is stop-displayed with a special pattern (a pattern in which a triangle is arranged inside a circle). A special symbol stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol 8C suggests a 2R jackpot. In addition, in the special jackpot notification effect, the change count display XI6 is continuously displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(C), a jackpot game effect A is performed. In this jackpot game effect A, the winning game ball number display XI1 is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a, the count display XI2 is displayed substantially in the lower center, and the count target indication display XI3 is displayed from the left to the center. The acquired game ball number display XI1 represents the number of game balls acquired by the big win game (round game) during the big win game (from the start of the round game). A count display XI2 represents a countdown method and is represented by an integer of 0 or more in a hexagonal frame. In this jackpot game effect A, the acquired game ball number display XI1 shows "0" for the number of acquired balls, and the count display XI2 shows "20" in a hexagonal frame. The count target suggestion display XI3 is a display that suggests the count value (the count value that can be the final value) targeted by the count display XI2. It suggests that it is "0". In addition, in this jackpot game effect A, the display of the number of times of variation display XI6 is deleted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(D), a jackpot game effect B is performed. In this jackpot game effect B, the winning game ball number display XI1, the count display XI2, and the count target suggestion display XI3 are continuously displayed on the display screen 7a. The count display XI2 is larger than that of the jackpot game presentation A. In addition, in this jackpot game effect B, the acquired game ball number display XI1 shows "100" as the number of acquired balls, and the count display XI2 shows "10" in a hexagonal frame. Here, when the number of acquired balls displayed on the acquired game ball display XI1 increases, the count displayed on the count display XI2 decreases. Specifically, when the number of acquired balls displayed on the acquired game ball number display XI1 increases by "10", the count of the count display XI2 decreases by "1", and when the number of acquired balls displayed increases by "100", the count displayed on the count display XI2 increases. is reduced by "10", in other words, when one round game (10 wins to the first big prize opening 30) is completed, the count display XI2 is reduced by "10". In the jackpot game effect B, the acquired game ball number display XI1 and the count display XI2 are displays at the end of the first round game. In this case, in the obtained game ball number display XI1, the obtained game balls that have entered the first big winning hole 30 in excess of 10 are not included in the obtained game balls.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(E), a jackpot game effect C is performed. In this jackpot game effect C, the winning game ball number display XI1, the count display XI2, and the count target suggestion display XI3 are continuously displayed on the display screen 7a. The count display XI2 is larger than that of the jackpot game presentation B. In addition, in this jackpot game effect C, the winning game ball number display XI1 shows "200" as the number of winning balls, and the count display XI2 shows "0" in a hexagonal frame. Here, when the number of acquired balls displayed on the acquired game ball display XI1 increases, the count displayed on the count display XI2 decreases. Specifically, when the number of acquired balls displayed on the acquired game ball number display XI1 increases by "10", the count of the count display XI2 decreases by "1", and when the number of acquired balls displayed increases by "100", the count displayed on the count display XI2 increases. is reduced by "10", in other words, when one round game (10 wins to the first big prize opening 30) is completed, the count display XI2 is reduced by "10". In the jackpot game effect C, the acquired game ball number display XI1 and the count display XI2 are displays at the end of the second round game. In this case, in the obtained game ball number display XI1, the obtained game balls that have entered the first big winning hole 30 in excess of 10 are not included in the obtained game balls.

Of the two types of 2R jackpots, if the current jackpot is the 2R probability variable jackpot, the following jackpot game performance D is performed, and if the current jackpot is the 2R latent probability variable jackpot, the following jackpots. A game presentation E is performed.

When the current jackpot is a 2R probability variable jackpot, as shown in FIG. 103(F), a jackpot game effect D is performed. In this jackpot game effect D, a super explosive mode suggestion image XI4 is displayed on the display screen 7a. This super explosive mode suggestive image XI4 is written as "entering super explosive mode", and is an image suggesting that the display mode after the big win will be the super explosive mode. This is an image suggesting that there is
After that, on the display screen 7a, an effect based on the super explosive mode is performed, that is, an effect suggesting that it is in the variable probability state is performed.

If the current jackpot is the 2R latent probability variable jackpot, as shown in FIG. 103(G), a jackpot game presentation E is performed. In this jackpot game effect E, a relaxed mode suggestion image XI5 is displayed on the display screen 7a. This Yururi mode suggesting image XI5 is described as "Entering into Yururi mode", and is an image suggesting that the display mode after the big win will be the Yururi mode. This is an image that suggests
After that, on the display screen 7a, an effect based on the Yururi mode is performed, that is, an effect suggesting that the player is in the latent probability variable state is performed.

[Jackpot game count display effect C]
FIG. 104 is a diagram for explaining the jackpot game count display effect C. FIG. The jackpot game count display effect C in FIG. 104 is an effect with the same variation of special symbols. In the jackpot game count display effect C, as shown in FIG. 104(A), first, the ready-to-win effect is performed after the decorative symbol variation effect. In this ready-to-win effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped at approximately the center of the display screen 7a, and the decorative symbol 8C is vertically fluctuated at high speed to form a ready-to-win state. Also, in this ready-to-win effect, a change count display XI6 is displayed near the lower left of the display screen 7a. This change number display XI6 represents the number of changes of the special symbols after the end of the previous big win. In addition, although the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, they are omitted in the figure.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104(B), a special jackpot notification effect is performed. In this special jackpot notification effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R form a 2R jackpot pattern indicating a 2R jackpot. Specifically, in the special jackpot notification performance, the decorative patterns 8L and 8R are stop-displayed with seven patterns, and the decorative pattern 8C is stop-displayed with a special pattern (a pattern in which a triangle is arranged inside a circle). A special symbol stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol 8C suggests a 2R jackpot. In addition, in the special jackpot notification effect, the change count display XI6 is continuously displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104(C), a jackpot game effect A is performed. In this jackpot game effect A, on the display screen 7a, the acquired game ball number display XI1 is displayed on the right side, the count display XI2 is displayed substantially in the lower center, the count target suggestion display XI3 is displayed from the left side to the center, and the upper side is displayed. An expectation level suggestion effect image XI7 is displayed. The acquired game ball number display XI1 represents the number of game balls acquired by the big win game (round game) during the big win game (from the start of the round game). A count display XI2 represents a countdown method and is represented by an integer of 0 or more in a hexagonal frame. In this jackpot game effect A, the acquired game ball number display XI1 shows "0" for the number of acquired balls, and the count display XI2 shows "20" in a hexagonal frame. The count target suggesting display XI3 is a display that suggests a count value (a possible final count value) targeted by the count display XI2, and is written as "Aim for a count of 0!" It suggests that it is "0". In addition, in this jackpot game effect A, the display of the number of times of variation display XI6 is deleted.

The expectation suggesting effect image XI7 is an image suggesting the expectation that the jackpot in the special jackpot notification effect is the 2R probability variable jackpot, and the expectation is suggested by the color of the effect. If the effect color is blue, the expectation that it is a 2R probability variation jackpot is the lowest, if the effect color is yellow, the expectation that it is a 2R probability variation jackpot is higher than blue, and if the effect color is green, 2R probability variation If the expectation that it is a jackpot is higher than yellow, and the effect color is purple, the expectation that it is a 2R probability variation jackpot is higher than green, and if the effect color is red, the expectation that it is a 2R probability variation jackpot is the highest. is configured to be
The effect color of the expectation degree suggesting effect image XI7 in this jackpot game presentation A is blue.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104(D), a jackpot game effect B is performed. In this jackpot game effect B, the display screen 7a continuously displays the acquired game ball number display XI1, the count display XI2, the count target suggestive display XI3, and the expectation degree suggestive effect image XI7. The count display XI2 is larger than that of the jackpot game presentation A. In addition, in this jackpot game effect B, the acquired game ball number display XI1 shows "100" as the number of acquired balls, and the count display XI2 shows "10" in a hexagonal frame. Here, when the number of acquired balls displayed on the acquired game ball display XI1 increases, the count displayed on the count display XI2 decreases. Specifically, when the number of acquired balls displayed on the acquired game ball number display XI1 increases by "10", the count of the count display XI2 decreases by "1", and when the number of acquired balls displayed increases by "100", the count displayed on the count display XI2 increases. is reduced by "10", in other words, when one round game (10 wins to the first big prize opening 30) is completed, the count display XI2 is reduced by "10". In the jackpot game effect B, the acquired game ball number display XI1 and the count display XI2 are displays at the end of the first round game. In this case, in the obtained game ball number display XI1, the obtained game balls that have entered the first big winning hole 30 in excess of 10 are not included in the obtained game balls. In addition, the expectation level suggesting effect image XI7 shows that the effect has changed from blue to green, and the level of expectation for the 2R probability variable jackpot has increased.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104(E), a jackpot game effect C is performed. In this jackpot game effect C, the display screen 7a continuously displays the acquired game ball number display XI1, the count display XI2, the count target suggestion display XI3, and the expectation level suggestion effect image XI7. The count display XI2 is larger than that of the jackpot game presentation B. In addition, in this jackpot game effect C, the winning game ball number display XI1 shows "200" as the number of winning balls, and the count display XI2 shows "0" in a hexagonal frame. Here, when the number of acquired balls displayed on the acquired game ball display XI1 increases, the count displayed on the count display XI2 decreases. Specifically, when the number of acquired balls displayed on the acquired game ball number display XI1 increases by "10", the count of the count display XI2 decreases by "1", and when the number of acquired balls displayed increases by "100", the count displayed on the count display XI2 increases. is reduced by "10", in other words, when one round game (10 wins to the first big prize opening 30) is completed, the count display XI2 is reduced by "10". In the jackpot game effect C, the acquired game ball number display XI1 and the count display XI2 are displays at the end of the second round game. In this case, in the obtained game ball number display XI1, the obtained game balls that have entered the first big winning hole 30 in excess of 10 are not included in the obtained game balls. In addition, the expectation degree suggesting effect image XI7 shows that the effect has changed from green to red, and the degree of expectation for the 2R probability variable jackpot has reached its climax.

Of the two types of 2R jackpots, if the current jackpot is the 2R probability variable jackpot, the following jackpot game performance D is performed, and if the current jackpot is the 2R latent probability variable jackpot, the following jackpots. A game presentation E is performed.

When the current jackpot is a 2R probability variable jackpot, as shown in FIG. 104(F), a jackpot game effect D is performed. In this jackpot game effect D, a super explosive mode suggestion image XI4 is displayed on the display screen 7a. This super explosive mode suggestive image XI4 is written as "entering super explosive mode", and is an image suggesting that the display mode after the big win will be the super explosive mode. This is an image suggesting that there is
After that, on the display screen 7a, an effect based on the super explosive mode is performed, that is, an effect suggesting that it is in the variable probability state is performed.

If the current jackpot is the 2R latent probability variable jackpot, as shown in FIG. 104(G), a jackpot game presentation E is performed. In this jackpot game effect E, a relaxed mode suggestion image XI5 is displayed on the display screen 7a. This Yururi mode suggesting image XI5 is described as "Entering into Yururi mode", and is an image suggesting that the display mode after the big win will be the Yururi mode. This is an image that suggests
After that, on the display screen 7a, an effect based on the Yururi mode is performed, that is, an effect suggesting that the player is in the latent probability variable state is performed.

[Modification]
In the above jackpot game count display effects A to C, in the winning game ball number display XI1, the winning game balls that have won more than 10 in the first big winning hole 30 are not included. Not limited to this, in the acquired game ball number display XI1, the acquired game balls that have entered the first big winning hole 30 in excess of 10 may be included in the acquired game balls.
In the jackpot game count display effects A to C, in the case of a special jackpot, that is, in the case of a 2R jackpot, the jackpot game effects A to E are performed, and in the case of a 16R jackpot, the jackpot game count display effects A to C are performed. It is a configuration that cannot be used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot game effects in the jackpot game count display effects A to C may be performed even when the 16R jackpot is won.

[Effect example]
In the jackpot game count display performances A to C, during the jackpot game, the obtained game ball number display XI1 indicating the number of game balls obtained by the jackpot game and the count display XI2 indicating the count are performed, and then the obtained game ball number is displayed. The count display XI2 is changed according to the change of the display XI1. According to this configuration, as the jackpot game (round game) progresses (according to the digestion), the count display XI2 also progresses, so the mode announced at the end of the jackpot game is the super explosive mode. can gradually raise the expectation of the game, and can raise the excitement of a relatively boring jackpot game (round game). As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the jackpot game count display effects A to C, in the jackpot game effects, the acquired game ball number display XI1 does not change depending on the game balls won by entering a prize-winning port other than the first big prize-winning port 30, and the first It changes only by acquiring a game ball based on the winning to the big winning opening 30. - 特許庁According to this configuration, the count display XI2 is linked to the winning of the first big prize hole 30 in an easy-to-understand manner, so that the player can easily recognize the progress of the big win game (round game), and at the end of the big win game. It is possible to gradually build up the expectation that the notified mode is the super-running mode, and to build up the relatively boring jackpot game (round game). As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the big win game count display effects A to C, before the big win game effect (that is, during the ready-to-win effect or the special big win notification effect), a change number display XI6 representing the number of times the special symbols change is performed. According to this configuration, the fluctuation count display XI6 is performed before the big win game performance, so that the more addicted the game is, the more the expectation for the big win can be gradually increased, and the subsequent big win game performance (round game) is further excited. be able to. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the jackpot game count display effects A to C, before the jackpot game effects (that is, during the ready-to-win effect and the special jackpot notification effect), a variation count display XI6 representing the number of times the special symbols fluctuate is performed, and during the jackpot game effects, It is reset (erased). According to this configuration, the variation count display XI6 is performed before the big win game presentation, so that the more addicted the game is, the more the expectation for the big win can be gradually increased, and the reset gives a sense of relief when the player wins. It is possible to further enhance the subsequent jackpot game production (round game). As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the jackpot game count display effects A to C, after changing the count display XI2 according to the change in the acquired game ball number display XI1 in the jackpot game effects, at the end of the jackpot game, in the case of the 2R probability variable jackpot, the jackpot A super explosive mode suggestive image XI4 is displayed to suggest that the later game state is a probability variable state, and in the case of a 2R latent probability variable jackpot, it is indicated that the game state after the jackpot is a time-saving state (low probability high base state). A suggestive loose mode suggestive image XI5 is displayed. According to this configuration, the winning game ball number display XI1 and the count display XI2 are displayed during the jackpot game, and the super explosive mode suggestive image XI4 or the mode suggestive image XI5 is displayed at the end of the jackpot game. The player can recognize the next mode before the player's excitement cools down with the acquired game ball number display XI1 and the count display XI2, and can greatly enjoy the performance during the relatively boring jackpot game. can. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect I-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is, during the jackpot game, a display of the number of acquired game media representing the number of game media acquired by the jackpot game and a count display representing the count,
The second display effect is performed after the first display effect, and is an effect of changing the count display according to a change in the display of the number of acquired game media.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect I-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect I-1,
The display of the acquired game media in the second display effect does not change depending on the game media acquired by winning a winning slot other than the big winning slot during the jackpot game, and is based on the winning of the big winning slot. change with the acquisition of
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect I-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect I-2,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The third display effect is performed before the first display effect, and is an effect that displays the number of times of variation representing the number of times of variation of the special symbol.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect I-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect I-3,
the display of the number of times of variation in the third display effect is erased before the first display effect is performed;
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect I-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect I-4,
In the gaming machine, in the case of a jackpot, one jackpot is selected from a plurality of jackpots including a first jackpot and a second jackpot that is more advantageous to the player than the first jackpot, and
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A fifth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fourth display effect is performed after the second display effect in the case where the jackpot is the first jackpot, and is an effect for performing the first display,
The fifth display effect is performed after the second display effect when the jackpot is the second jackpot, and is a effect of performing a second display different from the first display,
The second display suggests that the game state is more advantageous to the player than the first display,
A gaming machine characterized by:

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in the game state management process of FIG. ), it shifts to idle time (low-probability short-time state). This play time is continued until the special symbol changes 700 times.

The double timer display effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 105 to 107. FIG. This double timer display effect is executed during the variable effect of the decorative symbols in the normal state, the time saving state (low-probability-low base state), or the probability-variable state (high-probability-high base state). That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the instruction to execute the double timer display effect is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the image display device 7. An image is displayed on the screen 7a or the sub-display screen 64. FIG.

[Double timer display effect A]
FIG. 105 is a diagram for explaining the double timer display effect A. FIG. The double timer display effect A in FIG. 105 is a effect with the same variation of special symbols. In the double timer display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 105(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C, and 8R are vertically varied on the display screen 7a substantially at the center of the display screen 7a. A pending icon 9A and a variable icon 9C are displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a. The colors of the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C at this time are white. The pending icon 9A or the variable icon 9C suggests the degree of expectation for a big win with the color of the icon. In this case, if the color of the icon is white, the expectation of the jackpot is the lowest, yellow is the third highest expectation of the jackpot, green is the second highest expectation of the jackpot, and red is the highest expectation of the jackpot. is highly configured.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(B), the first timer display effect is performed. In this first timer display effect, the first timer display XJ1 is displayed substantially in the center of the display screen 7a. This first timer display XJ1 is a display representing a count-up (timer operation) at a longer time interval than a second timer display XJ2, which will be described later. Specifically, it is a display representing a count-up every 15 seconds. The first timer display XJ1 displays a timer value in a rectangular frame. At this time, as shown in FIG. 105B, the first timer display XJ1 displays "00:00" indicating that the timer value is 0 seconds, and the color of the frame portion is blue. This first timer display XJ1 disappears after this display, and is redisplayed at the time of count-up. Note that the first timer display XJ1 may be, for example, a display representing a count-up at an interval longer than 1 second.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(C), a second timer display effect is performed. In this second timer display effect, a second timer display XJ2 is displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a. During this second timer display presentation, the first timer display XJ1 is off. This second timer display XJ2 is a display showing count-up (timer operation) at a time interval shorter than that of the above-described first timer display XJ1, and more specifically, a display showing count-up every second. At this time, as shown in FIG. 105(C), the second timer display XJ2 displays "0" indicating that the timer value is 0 seconds. This second timer display XJ2 continues to be displayed at the upper right of the display screen 7a even after this display. It should be noted that the second timer display XJ2 may be, for example, a display representing a count-up at intervals of one second or less.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(D), a first timer appearance effect is performed. In this first timer appearance effect, the second timer display XJ2 is continuously displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a, and the first timer display XJ1 is redisplayed substantially in the center of the display screen 7a. The second timer display XJ2 counts up every second and has a timer value of "10", and the first timer display XJ1 counts up at intervals of 15 seconds and has a timer value of "15:00". It has become.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(E), the first timer state change effect is performed. In this first timer mode change effect, the second timer display XJ2 is continuously displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a, and the mode of the first timer display XJ1 changes substantially in the center of the display screen 7a. Specifically, the first timer display XJ1 rotates and expands on the surface of the display screen 7a, and the color of the frame changes from blue to green, red, or the like. The first timer display XJ1 is not limited to this, and the display screen 7a may be rotated from the near side to the far side, the font of the timer value may be changed, or the first timer display XJ1 may be moved.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(F), the first timer disappearance effect is performed. In this first timer disappearing effect, the first timer display XJ1 gradually disappears while the second timer display XJ2 is continuously displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(G), time-up effect A is performed. In this time-up effect A, the second timer display XJ2 is continuously displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a, and the first timer display XJ1 is redisplayed substantially in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the mode of the first timer display XJ1 changes as in the above-described first timer mode change effect. In this case, the timer value of the first timer display XJ1 becomes "30:00" (30 seconds) and the time is up. The first timer display XJ1 is erased after the mode change. Also, at this time, the second timer display XJ2 indicates that the timer value is "25" (25 seconds).

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(H), chance-up effect A is performed. This chance-up effect A is performed when the first timer display XJ1 times out, and the chance-up image XJ3 is displayed at the position where the first timer display XJ1 was displayed on the display screen 7a, and the hold icon 9A. changes from blue to green (hatched part in the figure). It shows that the change of hold improves the expectation of a big win in the change corresponding to the change of hold icon 9A. The chance-up image XJ3 is an image suggesting that the degree of expectation for a big win has increased, and is labeled as "chance" in FIG. 105(H).

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(I), time-up effect B is performed. In this time-up effect B, the second timer display XJ2 is continuously displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a. In this case, the timer value of the second timer display XJ2 becomes "30" (30 seconds) and the time is up.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(J), chance-up effect B is performed. This chance-up effect B is performed when the second timer display XJ2 times out, and the chance-up image XJ3 is displayed substantially in the center of the display screen 7a, and the hold icon 9A changes from green to red (see FIG. 7). cross-hatched part). Due to this pending change, the degree of expectation for a big win in the change corresponding to the pending changed pending icon 9A is further increased than in the case of the chance-up effect A.例文帳に追加The chance-up image XJ3 is labeled as “hot” in FIG.

[Double timer display effect B]
FIG. 106 is a diagram for explaining the double timer display effect B. FIG. The double timer display effect B in FIG. 106 is a effect with the same variation of special symbols. In the double timer display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 106(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C, and 8R are vertically varied on the display screen 7a substantially at the center of the display screen 7a. A pending icon 9A and a variable icon 9C are displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a. The colors of the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C at this time are white. The pending icon 9A or the variable icon 9C suggests the degree of expectation for a big win with the color of the icon. In this case, if the color of the icon is white, the expectation of the jackpot is the lowest, yellow is the third highest expectation of the jackpot, green is the second highest expectation of the jackpot, and red is the highest expectation of the jackpot. is highly configured.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(B), a first timer display effect is performed. In this first timer display effect, the first timer display XJ1 is displayed substantially in the center of the display screen 7a. This first timer display XJ1 is a display showing a countdown (timer operation) at a time interval longer than that of the second timer display XJ2, which will be described later. Specifically, the timer value is a display showing countdown every 20 seconds. . The first timer display XJ1 displays a timer value in a rectangular frame. At this time, as shown in FIG. 106B, the first timer display XJ1 displays "40:00" indicating that the timer value is 40 seconds, and the frame color is blue. This first timer display XJ1 disappears after this display and is redisplayed during the countdown. Note that the first timer display XJ1 may be, for example, a display representing a countdown with an interval longer than one second.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(C), a second timer display effect is performed. In this second timer display effect, a second timer display XJ2 is displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a. During this second timer display presentation, the first timer display XJ1 is off. This second timer display XJ2 is a display showing count-up (timer operation) at a time interval shorter than that of the first timer display XJ1, and more specifically, a display showing count-down every second. At this time, as shown in FIG. 106C, the second timer display XJ2 displays "20" indicating that the timer value is 20 seconds. This second timer display XJ2 continues to be displayed at the upper right of the display screen 7a even after this display. Note that the second timer display XJ2 may be, for example, a display representing a countdown at intervals of one second or less.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(D), a first timer appearance effect is performed. In this first timer appearance effect, the second timer display XJ2 is continuously displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a, and the first timer display XJ1 is redisplayed substantially in the center of the display screen 7a. The second timer display XJ2 counts down every second and has a timer value of "10", and the first timer display XJ1 counts down at intervals of 20 seconds and has a timer value of "20:00". ing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(E), the first timer state change effect is performed. In this first timer mode change effect, the second timer display XJ2 is continuously displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a, and the mode of the first timer display XJ1 changes substantially in the center of the display screen 7a. Specifically, the first timer display XJ1 rotates and expands on the surface of the display screen 7a, and the color of the frame changes from blue to green, red, or the like. The first timer display XJ1 is not limited to this, and the display screen 7a may be rotated from the near side to the far side, the font of the timer value may be changed, or the first timer display XJ1 may be moved.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(F), the first timer disappearance effect is performed. In this first timer disappearing effect, the first timer display XJ1 gradually disappears while the second timer display XJ2 is continuously displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(G), time-up effect A is performed. In this time-up effect A, the second timer display XJ2 is continuously displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a, and the timer value becomes "0" (0 seconds), and the timer is up.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(H), a chance-up effect A is performed. This chance-up effect A is performed when the second timer display XJ2 times out, and the chance-up image XJ3 is displayed substantially in the center of the display screen 7a, and the hold icon 9A changes from blue to green (see FIG. 7). hatched part). It shows that the change of hold improves the expectation of a big win in the change corresponding to the change of hold icon 9A. The chance-up image XJ3 is an image suggesting that the degree of expectation for a big win has increased, and is labeled as "chance" in FIG. 106(H).

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(I), time-up effect B is performed. In this time-up effect B, the first timer display XJ1 is re-displayed approximately in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the mode of the first timer display XJ1 changes as in the above-described first timer mode change effect. Also, in this case, the timer value of the first timer display XJ1 becomes "00:00" (0 seconds) and the time is up. The first timer display XJ1 is erased after the mode change.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(J), a chance-up effect B is performed. This chance-up effect B is performed when the first timer display XJ1 times out, and the chance-up image XJ3 is displayed substantially in the center of the display screen 7a, and the hold icon 9A changes from green to red (see FIG. 7). cross-hatched part). Due to this pending change, the degree of expectation for a big win in the change corresponding to the pending changed pending icon 9A is further increased than in the case of the chance-up effect A.例文帳に追加The chance-up image XJ3 is labeled as “hot” in FIG.

[Double timer display effect C]
FIG. 107 is a diagram for explaining the double timer display effect C. FIG. The double timer display effect C in FIG. 107 is a effect with the same variation of special symbols. In the double timer display effect C, as shown in FIG. 107(A), first, the decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C, and 8R are vertically varied on the display screen 7a substantially at the center of the display screen 7a. A pending icon 9A and a variable icon 9C are displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a. The colors of the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C at this time are white. The pending icon 9A or the variable icon 9C suggests the degree of expectation for a big win with the color of the icon. In this case, if the color of the icon is white, the expectation of the jackpot is the lowest, yellow is the third highest expectation of the jackpot, green is the second highest expectation of the jackpot, and red is the highest expectation of the jackpot. is highly configured.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107(B), the first timer display effect is performed. In this first timer display effect, the first timer display XJ1 is displayed substantially in the center of the display screen 7a. This first timer display XJ1 is a display showing a countdown (timer operation) at a longer time interval than a second timer display XJ2, which will be described later. Specifically, it is a display showing a countdown every 10 seconds. The first timer display XJ1 displays a timer value in a rectangular frame. At this time, as shown in FIG. 107B, the first timer display XJ1 displays "20:00" representing 20 seconds, and the frame color is blue. This first timer display XJ1 disappears after this display and is redisplayed during the countdown. Note that the first timer display XJ1 may be, for example, a display representing a countdown with an interval longer than one second.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107(C), a second timer display effect is performed. In this second timer display effect, the second timer display XJ2 is displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a. During this second timer display presentation, the first timer display XJ1 is off. This second timer display XJ2 is a display showing count-up (timer operation) at a time interval shorter than that of the first timer display XJ1, and more specifically, a display showing count-down every second. At this time, as shown in FIG. 107(C), the second timer display XJ2 displays "20" representing 20 seconds. This second timer display XJ2 continues to be displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a even after this display. It should be noted that the second timer display XJ2 may be, for example, a display representing a countdown at intervals of one second or less.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107(D), a first timer appearance effect is performed. In this first timer appearance effect, the second timer display XJ2 is continuously displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a, and the first timer display XJ1 is redisplayed substantially in the center of the display screen 7a. The second timer display XJ2 counts down every second and becomes "10", and the first timer display XJ1 counts down every 10 seconds and becomes "10:00". That is, the timer values of the first timer display XJ1 and the second timer display XJ2 are the same.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107(E), the first timer state change effect is performed. In this first timer mode change effect, the second timer display XJ2 is continuously displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a, and the mode of the first timer display XJ1 changes substantially in the center of the display screen 7a. Specifically, the first timer display XJ1 rotates and expands on the surface of the display screen 7a, and the color of the frame changes from blue to green, red, or the like. The first timer display XJ1 is not limited to this, and the display screen 7a may be rotated from the near side to the far side, the font of the timer value may be changed, or the first timer display XJ1 may be moved.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107(F), the first timer disappearance effect is performed. In this first timer disappearing effect, the first timer display XJ1 gradually disappears while the second timer display XJ2 is continuously displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107(G), a time-up effect is performed. In this time-up effect, the second timer display XJ2 is continuously displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a, and the first timer display XJ1 is displayed substantially in the center. In this case, the timer value of the first timer display XJ1 is "00:00" (0 seconds) and time is up, and the timer value of the second timer display XJ2 is "0" (0 seconds). timer is up. At this time, the mode of the first timer display XJ1 changes as in the above-described first timer mode change effect. The first timer display XJ1 is erased after the mode change.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107(H), a chance-up effect is performed. This chance-up effect is performed when the first timer display XJ1 and the second timer display XJ2 time up, and the chance-up image XJ3 is displayed substantially in the center of the display screen 7a, and the pending icon 9A changes from blue to red. change to hold (cross-hatched part in the figure). It is shown that the change of hold greatly increases the expectation of a big win in the change corresponding to the change of hold icon 9A. The chance-up image XJ3 is an image that suggests that the degree of expectation for a big win has increased.

In the above double timer display effects A to C, the mode of the second timer display XJ2 does not change. However, the configuration may be such that the mode of the second timer display XJ2 changes. For example, the second timer display XJ2 may be enlarged, reduced, changed in color, rotated, or displayed with effects.

[Effect example]
In the above double timer display effects A to C, a first timer display XJ1 that performs timer operation display (count up display or count down display) at relatively long time intervals (20 seconds in the double timer display effect B) in the same fluctuation, A second timer display XJ2 is performed at relatively short time intervals (0.01 seconds). According to this configuration, two timer displays can be experienced on different time axes, a thrilling feeling and a surprise feeling can be imparted to the timer display, and the interest of the timer presentation can be improved. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the above double timer display effects A to C, the first timer display XJ1 is displayed at the timing of displaying the timer operation (count-up display or count-down display) in the first timer mode change effect, and the second timer display XJ2. displayed larger than According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with the first timer display XJ1. It can attract the player's interest. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the double timer display effects A to C, the first timer display XJ1 performs a predetermined mode change at the timing of timer operation display (count-up display or count-down display). According to this configuration, by changing the mode of the first timer display XJ1, the player can be impressed with the first timer display XJ1. can be used to attract the player's attention to two different timer displays. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the above double timer display effects A to C, the first timer display XJ1 rotates at the timing of timer operation display (count-up display or count-down display). According to this configuration, by rotating the first timer display XJ1, it is possible to impress the player with the first timer display XJ1. can be used to attract the player's attention to two different timer displays. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the above double timer display effects A to C, the first timer display XJ1 changes color at the timing of timer operation display (count-up display or count-down display). According to this configuration, the first timer display XJ1 can impress the player by changing the color of the first timer display XJ1. It can be made easier and the player's interest can be drawn to two different timer displays. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect XJ-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is a effect of performing a first timer display in which a timer operation display is performed at relatively long time intervals,
The second display effect is a effect of performing a second timer display in which a timer operation display is performed at relatively short time intervals,
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed,
A game machine, wherein in the combination effect, the first display effect and the second display effect are performed in the same variation.
[Aspect XJ-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect XJ-1,
In the combination effect, the first timer display of the first display effect is displayed larger than the second timer display at the timing of performing the timer operation display.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XJ-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect XJ-2,
In the combination effect, the first timer display of the first display effect performs a predetermined mode change at the timing of performing the timer operation display,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XJ-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect XJ-3,
In the combination effect, the first timer display of the first display effect rotates as the predetermined mode change at the timing of performing the timer operation display.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XJ-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect XJ-3 or aspect XJ-4,
In the combination effect, the first timer display of the first display effect changes color as the predetermined mode change at the timing of performing the timer operation display.
A gaming machine characterized by:

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, when the jackpot is hit, the game state after the jackpot is the probability variable game state (high probability high base state), and the time saving game state (low probability high base state). However, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbols reaches 100 times in both the variable probability game state and the time saving game state, the normal game state is entered.
Here, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the following three jackpots may be provided.
1. After the big win, the game state becomes the variable probability game state, and when the number of fluctuations of the special symbols reaches the first specified number of times, the big win K1 shifts to the normal game state.
2. After the big win, the game state becomes the variable probability game state, and when the number of fluctuations of the special symbols reaches the second specified number of times, the big win K2 shifts to the normal game state.
3. After the jackpot, the game state becomes the probability variable game state, and when the number of fluctuations of the special symbols reaches the first specified number of times, the state shifts to the time-saving game state, and further, when the number of variations of the special symbols reaches the second specified number of times, the normal game state. Jackpot K3 to shift to.
The jackpots K1 to K3 are selected with a predetermined probability at the time of jackpot.

The final screen display effect A described below represents the display effect after the big win game based on the big win K1, the final screen display effect B represents the display effect after the big win game based on the big win K2, and the final screen display effect C. , represents the display effect after the big win game based on the big win K3.
Further, in the present embodiment, the first prescribed number of times is set to 100 times, and the second prescribed number of times is set to 200 times. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first specified number of times may be any number as long as it is smaller than the second specified number of times. The second specified number of times may be any number as long as it is greater than the first specified number of times.
In addition, since the normal game state is a game state that is relatively disadvantageous to the player, it is also called a disadvantageous game state, and the time-saving game state and the variable probability game state are game states that are relatively advantageous to the player. It is collectively called an advantageous game state.

Final screen display effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. This final screen display effect is executed during the variable effect of the decorative symbols in the normal state, the time-saving state (low-probability-low base state), or the variable-probability state (high-probability-high base state). That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the instruction to execute the final screen display effect is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the image display device 7. An image is displayed on the screen 7a or the sub-display screen 64. FIG.

[Final screen display effect A]
FIG. 108 is a diagram for explaining the final screen display effect A. FIG. This final screen display effect A includes a variable probability game effect, a result information display effect, and a normal game effect. The probability variation game effect is a display effect of the variation when the number of variations of the special symbol is 5 times remaining until the first specified number of times in the probability variation game state (high probability high base state) that enters after the big hit K1, and the result information display. The effect is the display effect in the variation when the first prescribed number of times (100 times) is reached, and the normal game effect is the display effect in the variation when the normal game state is entered. In this result information display effect A, the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, but they are omitted in the figure.

In the final screen display effect A, the variable probability game effect is performed as shown in FIG. 108(A) in the variable probability game state after the big win K1. In this variable probability game effect, a right hitting indication XK1 is displayed on the upper left of the display screen 7a, a variable probability indication indication XK2 is displayed on the upper right, a variable probability remaining number of times indication XK3 is displayed on the lower right, and a decorative pattern 8L is displayed substantially in the center. , 8C and 8R are performed, and the teammate character CRA is displayed on the lower side. The right-hand shot suggestion display XK1 is a display that urges the player to hit right. The variable probability suggestion display XK2 is a display that suggests that the gaming state is the variable probability gaming state. The variable probability remaining number display XK3 is a display that suggests how many more times the variable probability gaming state will be continued. This number represents the number of variations of the special symbol. In FIG. 108(A), since the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is five times remaining until the first specified number of times, the probability variation remaining number display XK3 is represented as "five times left".

Next, when the first specified number of times (100 times) has been reached after the big win K1, a result information display effect is performed as shown in FIG. 108(B). In this result information display effect, the result information display XK4 is displayed on the display screen 7a. This result information display XK4 includes information representing the result of the current game state during the consecutive chances. "During consecutive chan" means that after hitting the jackpot (also called the first jackpot) in the normal game state, it becomes a variable game state or a short-time game state, and then returns to the normal game state (except during the jackpot game). Say. For example, "six consecutive chances" means that six jackpots, including the first jackpot, are won after the first jackpot before returning to the normal game state (except during the jackpot game). In addition, the information indicating the result of the game state during the consecutive chance includes the obtained ball information indicating the obtained ball obtained during the consecutive game (represented as “acquisition” in the result information display XK4) and the consecutive game number indicating the number of consecutive games. Chance number information (represented as "number of consecutive wins" in the result information display XK4) and average time information representing the average time until the jackpot is obtained during the consecutive wins (represented as "average time" in the result information display XK4) , and rank information representing a predetermined rank (denoted as “rank” in the result information display XK4). The average time information is, for example, 2 minutes and 30 seconds if the number of consecutive wins is 6 and the time spent to win the jackpot 6 times is 15 minutes. Also, the rank information is ranked up in proportion to the number of winning balls and the number of consecutive wins. In the result information display XK4 in FIG. 108(B), the obtained ball information is "Acquisition: 5312 balls", the consecutive game number information is "Consecutive game number: 6 times", and the average time information is "Average time: 2 minutes 30 seconds". ”, and the rank information is “Rank: A”. Note that in the result information display effect, the right-handed hitting suggestion display XK1 is continuously displayed.

Next, in the normal game state, as shown in FIG. 108(C), the normal game effect is performed. In this normal game effect, the indication XK1 suggesting hitting to the right is erased, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are changed.

[Final screen display effect B]
FIG. 109 is a diagram for explaining the final screen display effect B. FIG. The final screen display effect B includes a variable probability game effect A, a result information display effect A, an advantageous game state continuation effect, a variable probability game effect B, a result information display effect B, and a normal game effect. The variable probability game performance A is a display performance when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 5 times remaining to the first specified number of times in the variable probability game state (high probability high base state) that enters after the big hit K2, and the result information display performance. A is the display effect in the variation when the first specified number of times (100 times) is reached, and the advantageous game state continuation effect is the display effect in the variation when the first specified number of times (100 times) is reached. It is a display effect performed after the result information display effect A, and the probability variable game effect B is a display effect in the variation when the number of times of variation of the special symbol remains 3 times to the second specified number of times in the probability variable game state. , The result information display effect B is a display effect in the variation when the second specified number of times is reached in the variable probability game state, and the normal game effect is a display effect in the change when shifting to the normal game state. In this final screen display effect B, the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, but they are omitted in the figure.

In the final screen display effect B, the variable probability game effect A is performed as shown in FIG. 109(A) in the variable probability game state after the big win K2. In this variable probability game production A, the display screen 7a displays a right hitting indication XK1 at the upper left, a probability varying suggestion indication XK2 at the upper right, a probability variation remaining number indication XK3 at the lower right, and a decorative symbol in the approximate center. Variation effects of 8L, 8C, and 8R are performed, and an ally character CRA is displayed on the lower side. The right-hand shot suggestion display XK1 is a display that urges the player to hit right. The variable probability suggestion display XK2 is a display that suggests that the gaming state is the variable probability gaming state. The variable probability remaining number display XK3 is a display that suggests how many more times the variable probability gaming state will be continued. This number represents the number of variations of the special symbol. In FIG. 109(A), since the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is five times remaining until the first specified number of times, the probability variation remaining number display XK3 is represented as "five times left".

Next, when the first specified number of times (100 times) has been reached after the big win K2, the result information display effect A is performed as shown in FIG. 109(B). In this result information display effect A, the result information display XK4 is displayed on the display screen 7a. This result information display XK4 includes information representing the result of the game during the continuous game at the present time. "Consecutive chan" means that after hitting the jackpot (also called the first jackpot) in the normal game state, it becomes a variable game state or a short-time game state, and then returns to the normal game state (except during the jackpot game). Say. For example, "six consecutive chances" means that six jackpots including the first jackpot are won after the first jackpot before returning to the normal game state (except during the jackpot game). Further, the information indicating the result of the game during the consecutive game is the obtained ball information indicating the obtained ball obtained during the consecutive game (denoted as “acquisition” in the result information display XK4) and the consecutive game number indicating the number of consecutive games. Number of times information (denoted as “number of consecutive wins” in the result information display XK4), average time information representing the average time until the jackpot is obtained during the consecutive wins (denoted as “average time” in the result information display XK4), and rank information representing a predetermined rank (denoted as “rank” in the result information display XK4). The average time information is, for example, 2 minutes and 30 seconds if the number of consecutive wins is 6 and the time spent to win the jackpot 6 times is 15 minutes. Also, the rank information is ranked up in proportion to the number of winning balls and the number of consecutive wins. In the result information display XK4 in FIG. 109(B), the obtained ball information is "Acquisition: 5312 balls", the number of consecutive wins information is "Number of consecutive wins: 6 times", and the average time information is "Average time: 2 minutes 30 seconds". ”, and the rank information is “Rank: A”. In the result information display effect, the indication XK1 suggesting hitting to the right is continuously displayed.

Next, after the result information display effect A is completed, as shown in FIG. 109(C), the advantageous game state continuation effect is performed. In this advantageous game state continuation effect, a state suggesting display XK5 suggesting that the advantageous game state (here, variable probability game state) is displayed in substantially the center of the display screen 7a. In FIG. 109(C), the state suggestion display XK5 is written as "advantageous game state continued!". In addition, in the advantageous game state continuous display effect, the right-hand hitting suggestion display XK1 is continuously displayed.

Next, the probability variation gaming state is continued, and as shown in FIG. 109(D), the probability variation gaming state production B is performed. In this probability variation game production B, the right hitting indication XK1 is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a, the probability variation indication indication XK2 is displayed on the upper right, and the probability variation remaining number indication XK3 is displayed on the lower right, and is decorated in the approximate center. A variable performance of the symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is performed, and an ally character CRA is displayed on the lower side. In FIG. 109(D), since the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is three times remaining until the second specified number of times, the probability variation remaining number display XK3 is represented as "3 more times".

Next, when the variation reaches the second specified number of times in the probability variable gaming state, the result information display effect B is performed as shown in FIG. 109(E). In this result information display effect B, a result information display XK6 is displayed on the display screen 7a. This result information display XK6 includes information representing the result of the game during the consecutive chance at the present time. In addition, the information indicating the result of the game during the consecutive game of the result information display XK6 is the obtained ball information indicating the obtained ball obtained during the consecutive game ("Acquired" in the result information display XK4) similarly to the result information display XK4. ”), information on the number of consecutive wins (represented as “number of consecutive wins” in the result information display XK4), and average time information indicating the average time to win the jackpot during the consecutive wins (result In the information display XK4, it is written as "average time"), and rank information representing a predetermined rank (indicated as "rank" in the result information display XK4). In the result information display XK6 in FIG. 109(E), the obtained ball information is "acquired: 10000 balls", the consecutive game number information is "consecutive game number: 12 times", and the average time information is "average time: 2 minutes 22 seconds". ”, and the rank information is “Rank: S”. In the result information display effect, the indication XK1 suggesting hitting to the right is continuously displayed.

Next, when the normal game state changes, a normal game effect is performed as shown in FIG. 109(F). In this normal game effect, the indication XK1 suggesting hitting to the right is erased, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are changed.

[Final screen display effect C]
FIG. 110 is a diagram for explaining the final screen display effect C. FIG. The final screen display effect C includes a variable probability game effect, a result information display effect A, an advantageous game state continuation effect, a time saving game effect, a result information display effect B, and a normal game effect. The variable probability game effect is a display effect when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 5 times remaining to the first specified number of times in the variable probability game state (high probability high base state) that enters after the big hit K3, and the result information display effect A is the display effect in the variation when the first specified number of times (100 times) is reached, and the advantageous game state continuation effect is the display effect in the variation when the first specified number of times (100 times) is reached. It is a display effect that is performed after the result information display effect A, and the time saving game effect is the time when the number of times of special symbol fluctuation remains 10 times up to the second specified number in the time saving game state that shifts after the first specified number of times. It is a display effect in variation, the result information display effect B is a display effect in variation when the second specified number of times in the time saving game state, and the normal game effect is in the change when shifting to the normal game state. It is a display performance. In this final screen display effect C, the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, but they are omitted in the figure.

In the final screen display effect C, in the variable probability game state after the big win K3, as shown in FIG. 110(A), the variable probability game effect is performed. In this variable probability game effect, a right hitting indication XK1 is displayed on the upper left of the display screen 7a, a variable probability indication indication XK2 is displayed on the upper right, a variable probability remaining number of times indication XK3 is displayed on the lower right, and a decorative pattern 8L is displayed substantially in the center. , 8C and 8R are performed, and the teammate character CRA is displayed on the lower side. The right-hand shot suggestion display XK1 is a display that urges the player to hit right. The variable probability suggestion display XK2 is a display that suggests that the gaming state is the variable probability gaming state. The variable probability remaining number display XK3 is a display that suggests how many more times the variable probability gaming state will be continued. This number represents the number of variations of the special symbol. In FIG. 110(A), since the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is five times remaining until the first prescribed number of times, the probability variation remaining number display XK3 is represented as "five times left".

Next, when the first specified number of times (100 times) has been reached after the big win K3, the result information display effect A is performed as shown in FIG. 110(B). In this result information display effect A, the result information display XK4 is displayed on the display screen 7a. This result information display XK4 includes information representing the result of the current game state during the consecutive chances. "During consecutive chan" means that after hitting the jackpot (also called the first jackpot) in the normal game state, it becomes a variable game state or a short-time game state, and then returns to the normal game state (except during the jackpot game). Say. For example, "six consecutive chances" means that six jackpots, including the first jackpot, are won after the first jackpot before returning to the normal game state (except during the jackpot game). In addition, the information indicating the result of the game state during the consecutive chance includes the obtained ball information indicating the obtained ball obtained during the consecutive game (represented as “acquisition” in the result information display XK4) and the consecutive game number indicating the number of consecutive games. Chance number information (represented as "number of consecutive wins" in the result information display XK4) and average time information representing the average time until the jackpot is obtained during the consecutive wins (represented as "average time" in the result information display XK4) , and rank information representing a predetermined rank (denoted as “rank” in the result information display XK4). The average time information is, for example, 2 minutes and 30 seconds if the number of consecutive wins is 6 and the time spent to win the jackpot 6 times is 15 minutes. Also, the rank information is ranked up in proportion to the number of winning balls and the number of consecutive wins. In the result information display XK4 in FIG. 110(B), the obtained ball information is "Acquisition: 5312 balls", the consecutive game number information is "Consecutive game number: 6 times", and the average time information is "Average time: 2 minutes 30 seconds". ”, and the rank information is “Rank: A”. Note that in the result information display effect, the right-handed hitting suggestion display XK1 is continuously displayed.

Next, after the result information display effect A, which is the variation of the first specified number of times (100 times), as shown in FIG. 110(C), the advantageous game state continuous effect is performed. In this advantageous game state continuation effect, a state suggesting display XK7 suggesting that the advantageous game state (here, the time-saving game state) will be displayed in substantially the center of the display screen 7a. In FIG. 110(C), the state suggestive display XK7 is written as "advantageous game state continued! Time-saving game state entered". In addition, in the advantageous game state continuous display effect, the right-hand hitting suggestion display XK1 is continuously displayed.

Next, when the time-saving game state is entered and the remaining 10 times change to the second specified number of times, as shown in FIG. 110(D), the time-saving game effect is performed. In this time-saving game effect, the display screen 7a continues to display a right-handed hitting indication XK1 on the upper left, a time-saving indicating indication XK8 on the upper right, and a time-saving remaining number of times indication XK9 on the lower right, and a decorative pattern substantially in the center. 8L, 8C, and 8R variations are performed, and an ally character CRA is displayed on the lower side. In FIG. 110(D), since the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 10 times remaining until the second specified number of times, the remaining number of time reduction display XK9 is represented as "10 times left".

Next, when the variation reaches the second prescribed number of times in the variable probability gaming state, as shown in FIG. 110(E), result information display effect B is performed. In this result information display effect B, a result information display XK10 is displayed on the display screen 7a. This result information display XK10 includes information representing the result of the game during the consecutive chance at the present time. In addition, the information indicating the result of the game during the consecutive game of the result information display XK10 is the obtained ball information indicating the obtained ball obtained during the consecutive game (in the result information display XK4, "Acquisition ”), information on the number of consecutive wins (represented as “number of consecutive wins” in the result information display XK4), and average time information indicating the average time to win the jackpot during the consecutive wins (result In the information display XK4, it is written as "average time"), and rank information representing a predetermined rank (indicated as "rank" in the result information display XK4). In the result information display XK6 in FIG. 110(E), the acquired ball information is "Acquisition: 10000 balls", the number of consecutive wins information is "Number of consecutive wins: 12 times", and the average time information is "Average time: 2 minutes 22 seconds". ”, and the rank information is “Rank: S”. Note that in the result information display effect, the right-handed hitting suggestion display XK1 is continuously displayed.

Next, when the normal game state changes, a normal game effect is performed as shown in FIG. 110(F). In this normal game effect, the indication XK1 suggesting hitting to the right is erased, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are changed.

In the final screen display effects B to C, the result information display effect A is performed, and although the result information display XK4 is displayed, the normal game state is not returned and the advantageous game state is continued. The game information such as the jackpot and winning balls in the advantageous game state after the result information display XK4 is included in the information representing the result of the consecutive wins in the result information display XK6 and the result information display XK10. For example, in the above-mentioned final screen display effect B, the number of acquired balls indicated by the acquired ball information on the result information display XK4 is 6000, and in an advantageous game state after the result information display XK4 is displayed, a jackpot is made and an additional 1000 balls are played. is obtained, and after the jackpot game, the special symbols are changed to display the result information display XK4 or the result information display XK6, the obtained ball information indicated by the obtained ball information in the result information display XK4 or the result information display XK6 7000 balls will be released.

[Modification]
In the final screen display effects A to C, when the normal game effect (normal game state) is entered and the third specified number of times is reached, the time-saving game state may be entered. In this case, the game information such as the jackpot and winning balls in this time-saving game state may be included in the information representing the result of the game during the consecutive wins in the result information display to be displayed thereafter.

[Effect example]
In the final screen display effects B to C, when the game state is an advantageous game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) that is relatively advantageous to the player, the number of times the special symbol changes is the first specified value (for example, 100 times) is reached, the advantageous game state ends and the game state shifts to a disadvantageous game state (normal game state) which is relatively disadvantageous to the player, and the display suggests that the game state is changed to a relatively disadvantageous game state (normal game state). Result information display XK4 representing the result of the jackpot game is performed, and then display suggesting that it is in an advantageous gaming state (state suggesting display XK5 and probability variation suggesting display XK2, or state suggesting display XK7 and time saving game state suggesting display XK8 ). According to this configuration, even if the result information display XK4 suggesting a transition to a disadvantageous gaming state is displayed, the advantageous gaming state can be continued even after that, so that the player does not see the result information display XK4 displayed. However, it is possible to maintain the desire for the continuation of the advantageous game state, and to give a high interest to the progress of the display performance until the actual transition to the normal game state. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the final screen display effect C, when the game state is the variable probability game state, the variable probability game state ends and shifts to the normal game state based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbols reaching the first specified value. A result information display XK4 indicating the result of the jackpot game during the consecutive wins, which is a display suggesting that, is performed. According to this configuration, even if the result information display XK4 suggesting a transition to the normal game state is displayed, the time-saving game state can be entered even after that, so that the player can , it is possible to maintain the desire for the continuation of the time-saving game state, and to impart a high degree of interest in the progress of the display performance until the actual transition to the normal game state. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the final screen display effect C, although the result information display XK4 is performed, the state suggestion display XK7 is performed, after that the game state shifts to the time saving game state, and the number of times the special symbol changes is the second. is reached, a result information display XK10 showing the result of the jackpot game during the consecutive chance is performed. That is, even if the result information display XK4 suggesting a transition to the normal game state is displayed, the state suggesting display XK7 is displayed and the time-saving game state is entered even after that, and from there, the number of times the special symbol changes is the first. 2, the result information display XK10 is performed. According to this configuration, even if the first result information display XK4 is displayed, the player can continue to desire the time-saving gaming state until the second result information display XK10 is displayed. It is possible to give the player a high interest in the display effect. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the final screen display effect C, although the result information display XK4 is performed, the state suggesting display XK7 is performed, after that the game state shifts to the time saving game state, and the number of times the special symbol changes is the second. reaches a specified value (for example, 200), a result information display XK10 showing the result of the jackpot game during the consecutive chance is performed, and the game state is changed from the time-saving game state to the normal game state. That is, even if the result information display XK4 suggesting a shift to the normal game state is displayed, the state suggesting display XK7 is displayed and the time-saving game state is entered even after that, and from there the number of times the special symbol changes becomes the second. When the specified value is reached, result information display XK10 is performed, and the game state is changed from the time-saving game state to the normal game state. According to this configuration, even if the first result information display XK4 is displayed, the player can continue to desire the time-saving game state until the normal game state actually occurs, and during this time, the display is displayed to the player. It is possible to impart a high interest in the production. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the final screen display effects B to C, the result information display XK4 and the state suggestion display XK7 respectively include information representing the number of consecutive wins and information representing the number of winning balls. According to this configuration, the player can be notified of the number of consecutive wins and the number of winning balls at once, and the player can be given a sense of accomplishment for consecutive wins. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect XK-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
The gaming machine performs a game in one of a plurality of game states including a first game state that is relatively disadvantageous to the player and two game states that are relatively advantageous to the player,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect, when the game state is the second game state, is based on the fact that the number of times the special symbols have changed has reached a first prescribed value, and the second game state ends. an effect for displaying the first result information indicating the result of the jackpot game during the consecutive wins, which is a display suggesting a transition to the first game state;
The second display effect is a effect for performing a state suggestive display suggesting that the game state is the second game state,
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, and then the second display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XK-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect XK-1,
The second gaming state is either a probability variable gaming state or a time-saving gaming state,
In the combination effect, in the first display effect, when the game state is the probability variation gaming state, the probability variation gaming state is terminated based on the fact that the number of fluctuations of the special symbols has reached the first specified value Then, the first result information is displayed, which is a display suggesting that the game state is shifted to the first game state, and which indicates the result of the jackpot game during the consecutive chance, and then, in the second display performance, the time saving perform a state suggestive display that suggests a game state,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XK-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect XK-2,
In the combination effect, after the state suggestion display is performed in the second display effect, the game state shifts to the time-saving game state, and then the number of times the special symbol changes reaches a second prescribed value. Based on, display the second result information representing the result of the jackpot game during the consecutive chance,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XK-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect XK-3,
In the combination effect, after the second result information display is performed, the game state is changed from the time-saving game state to the first game state,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XK-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect XK-4,
The first result information display and the second result information display each include information representing the number of consecutive wins and information representing the number of acquired game media,
A gaming machine characterized by:

111 to 113, promotion holding consecutive effects A to C will be described below. A characteristic effect of this promotion pending series production is a promotion production (with pending series) that is executed after the winning is notified. In the present embodiment, the presentation during the jackpot is also included in the promotion pending continuous presentation. In addition, the promotion effect (with reserved group) is characterized by notifying that there is a winning hold in the first special reservation (hereinafter also referred to as "reserved group").

[Promotion Suspension Consecutive Performance A]
FIG. 111 is a diagram for explaining the promotion suspension consecutive effect A. FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 111(A), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and show a state of high-speed fluctuation. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending and the variation icon 9C are displayed. The three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending correspond respectively to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the first special figure pending storage area 85a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 111(B), a win notification effect is executed. The win notification effect is a effect for notifying that a win has been achieved by means of the modes of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Here, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are all "4". This suggests that it is a "16R (actually 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot". It should be noted that the stage of the winning notification effect is a state in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped, unlike the fixed stop effect. Also here, three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending and the variation icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. Here, especially, there is a hold that is the first special figure hold corresponding to the hold icon 9A.

Next, as shown in FIG. 111(C), a sword operation prompting effect is executed. The sword operation prompting effect is an effect for prompting the sword member 65 to be operated. Here, a sword image KG imitating the sword member 65 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and a message image MG saying "push" is displayed. Here, when the player operates the sword member 65, the following effects are executed. Even if the player does not operate the sword member 65, the next effect is executed when the effective time of operating the sword member 65 elapses.

Next, as shown in FIG. 111(D), a promotion effect (with hold group) is executed. In the promotion effect (with hold group), the first movable accessory 14 moves (advances) from the retracted position toward the right end of the display screen 7a and stops at the advanced position in the front center of the display screen 7a. The display screen 7a is divided into a left screen and a right screen by the first movable accessory 14. - 特許庁Here, on the left screen, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all displayed as "7". This means that the announced "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" has been promoted to "16RV passing scheduled jackpot". Also, a message image MG of "V" is displayed on the right screen. This is for notifying the reserved group. Here, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, and the next performance is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 111(E), a jackpot effect A is executed. The jackpot digestion production A is a production for digesting the jackpot in the immediately preceding variation (hereinafter also referred to as “the jackpot”). Here again, the first movable accessory 14 remains stationary at the advanced position in the center in front of the display screen 7a. Then, an ally character CRA is displayed on the left screen, and the number of rounds of the jackpot game is displayed on the upper left part of the left screen. Here, a round display RH of "1R" is performed. This round display is performed from 1R to 16R. When the round display becomes 16R and the jackpot is completed, the next performance is executed. Here, too, a message image MG of "V" is displayed on the right screen.

Next, as shown in FIG. 111(F), a movable body movement effect is executed. In the movable object movement effect, the first movable accessory 14, which has been stationary at the advanced position in the center in front of the display screen 7a, moves slowly toward the left side of the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow Y. be. As the first movable accessory 14 moves, the area of the right screen expands. On this right side screen, performance symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are displayed instead of the message display MG "V". Here, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all "7". This means that the reserve group is a "16RV passage scheduled jackpot". At the start of the movement of the first movable accessory 14, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are not displayed. 8C and 8R may be displayed to give the player expectations regarding the type of jackpot. The first movable accessory 14 returns to the retracted position and stops.

Next, as shown in FIG. 111(G), a jackpot effect B is executed. The jackpot digestion effect B is an effect for digesting the holding series. Here, an ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the number of rounds of the jackpot game is displayed in the upper left part. Here, a round display RH of "1R" is performed. This round display is performed from 1R to 16R. When the round display becomes 16R and the jackpot is completed, the next performance is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 111(H), a state notification effect is executed. The state notification effect is for notifying the game state. Here, a message image MG is displayed that reads, "There's still more to come!" This means that it will be in the probability variable gaming state (high probability high base state) from the next fluctuation.

[Promotion Suspension Consecutive Performance B]
FIG. 112 is a diagram for explaining the promotion suspension consecutive effect B. FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 112(A), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and show a state of high-speed fluctuation. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending and the variation icon 9C are displayed. The three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending correspond respectively to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the first special figure pending storage area 85a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 112(B), a win notification effect is executed. The win notification effect is a effect for notifying that a win has been achieved by means of the modes of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Here, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are all "4". This suggests that it is a "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot". Note that the stage of the hit notification effect is a state in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped, unlike the fixed stop effect. Also here, three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending and the variation icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. In particular, it is assumed that there is a hold that is the first special figure hold corresponding to the hold icon 9A.

Next, as shown in FIG. 112(C), a sword operation prompting effect is executed. The sword operation prompting effect is an effect for prompting the sword member 65 to be operated. Here, a sword image KG imitating the sword member 65 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and a message image MG saying "push" is displayed. Here, when the player operates the sword member 65, the following effect is executed. Note that even if the player does not operate the sword member 65, the next effect is executed when the effective time of operating the sword member 65 elapses.

Next, as shown in FIG. 112(D), a promotion effect (with hold group) is executed. In the promotion effect (with hold group), the first movable accessory 14 moves (advances) from the retracted position toward the right end of the display screen 7a and stops at the advanced position in the front center of the display screen 7a. The display screen 7a is divided into a left screen and a right screen by the first movable accessory 14. - 特許庁Here, a message image MG1 reading "MAX jackpot" is displayed on the left screen. This means that the announced "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" has been promoted to "16RV passing scheduled jackpot". In addition, a message image MG2 reading "MAX jackpot" is also displayed on the right screen. This notifies the reserved group, and moreover, it notifies that it is a "16RV passage scheduled jackpot". Here, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, 8R (not shown) are determined and stopped, and the next performance is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 112(E), a jackpot effect A is executed. The jackpot digestion performance A is a performance for digesting the jackpot. Here again, the first movable accessory 14 remains stationary at the advanced position in the center in front of the display screen 7a. Then, an ally character CRA is displayed on the left screen, and the number of rounds of the jackpot game is displayed on the upper left part of the left screen. Here, a round display RH of "1R" is performed. This round display is performed from 1R to 16R. When the round display becomes 16R and the jackpot is completed, the next performance is executed. Here, too, a message image MG2 of "MAX jackpot" is displayed on the right screen.

Next, as shown in FIG. 112(F), a movable body movement effect is executed. In the movable object movement effect, the first movable accessory 14, which has been stationary at the advanced position in the center in front of the display screen 7a, moves slowly toward the left side of the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow Y. be. As the first movable accessory 14 moves, the area of the right screen expands. Along with the enlargement of the right screen, an enlarged message image MG2 reading "MAX jackpot" is displayed. The first movable accessory 14 returns to the retracted position and stops.

Next, as shown in FIG. 112(G), a jackpot effect B is executed. The jackpot digestion effect B is an effect for digesting the holding series. Here, an ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the number of rounds of the jackpot game is displayed in the upper left part. Here, a round display RH of "1R" is performed. This round display is performed from 1R to 16R. When the round display becomes 16R and the jackpot is completed, the next performance is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 112(H), a state notification effect is executed. The state notification effect is for notifying the game state. Here, a message image MG is displayed that reads, "There's still more to come!" This means that it will be in the probability variable gaming state (high probability high base state) from the next fluctuation.

[Promotion Suspension Consecutive Performance C]
FIG. 113 is a diagram for explaining the promotion suspension consecutive effect C. FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 113(A), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and show a state of high-speed fluctuation. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending and the variation icon 9C are displayed. The three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending correspond respectively to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the first special figure pending storage area 85a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 113(B), a win notification effect is executed. The win notification effect is a effect for notifying that a win has been achieved by means of the modes of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Here, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are all "4". This suggests that it is a "16R (actually 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot". It should be noted that the stage of the winning notification effect is a state in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped, unlike the fixed stop effect. Also here, three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending and the variation icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. Here, especially, there is a hold that is the first special figure hold corresponding to the hold icon 9A.

Next, as shown in FIG. 113(C), a sword operation prompting effect is executed. The sword operation prompting effect is an effect for prompting the sword member 65 to be operated. Here, a sword image KG imitating the sword member 65 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and a message image MG saying "push" is displayed. Here, when the player operates the sword member 65, the following effects are executed. Even if the player does not operate the sword member 65, the next effect is executed when the effective time of operating the sword member 65 elapses.

Next, as shown in FIG. 113(D), a promotion effect (with hold group) is executed. In the promotion effect (with the holding group), the effect symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Here, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are all "7". This means that the announced "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" has been promoted to "16RV passing scheduled jackpot". In addition, a message image MG reading "next time is also 777" is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. This notifies the reserved group, and moreover, it notifies that it is a "16RV passage scheduled jackpot". Here, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, and the next performance is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 113(E), a jackpot effect A (first half) is executed. The jackpot digestion effect A (first half) is the first half part of the effect for digesting the jackpot. Here, an ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and round balls RB indicating the number of rounds of the jackpot game are displayed on both left and right sides of the ally character CRA. Specifically, 16 round balls RB are displayed on the left side of the ally character CRA. This indicates that the jackpot is 16 rounds. Also, 16 round balls RB are displayed on the right side of the ally character CRA. This indicates that there are 16 rounds of hits in the first special pending.

Next, as shown in FIG. 113(F), a jackpot effect A (second half) is executed. The jackpot digestion effect A (second half) is the latter half of the effect for digesting the jackpot. Also here, the teammate character CRA is displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a, and the round balls RB indicating the number of rounds of the jackpot game are displayed on the left and right sides of the teammate character CRA. Then, in the jackpot redemption effect A, the round ball RB on the left side of the ally character CRA is marked with a cross each time a round is redeemed. When all 16 round balls RB on the left side of the ally character CRA are crossed out, the big win is digested and the next performance is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 113(G), a jackpot effect B is executed. The jackpot digestion effect B is an effect for digesting the holding series. The big win performance B is continuously executed while the screen of the big win performance A is maintained. Then, in the big win redemption effect B, a cross mark is attached to the round ball RB on the right side of the ally character CRA each time a round is redeemed. All the 16 round balls RB on the right side of the ally character CRA are marked with a cross, and the hit in the first special figure reservation is digested, and the next performance is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 113(H), a state notification effect is executed. The state notification effect is for notifying the game state. Here, a message image MG is displayed that reads, "There's still more to come!" This means that it will be in the probability variable gaming state (high probability high base state) from the next fluctuation.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the character string decomposition effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, when the ``16RV scheduled jackpot'' is won, the winning of the ``16RV scheduled passage jackpot'' is reported after pretending that the ``16R (actually 13R) V non-passage scheduled jackpot'' has been won. It is possible to execute a promotion effect to do. Furthermore, in the promotion effect, if the group is on hold, the fact that it is a group on hold is notified (FIGS. 111(D), 112(D), and 113(D)). According to this configuration, it is possible to surprise and delight the player and improve the interest of the game.

In addition, "16R (actually 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" corresponds to "first advantageous game", "16RV passing scheduled jackpot" corresponds to "second advantageous game", and the promotion effect (with pending series) It corresponds to "promotion performance", the first special price reservation corresponds to "suspension memory", and the information notified in the promotion performance (with pending series) corresponds to "winning information".

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the promotion effect (there is a holding group), only the holding group is notified (FIG. 111(D)). According to this configuration, since the type of jackpot is unknown at the stage of the promotion performance (with the pending series), it is possible to make the player feel a sense of anticipation and improve the amusement of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the promotion effect (with the holding group), it is notified that it is a holding group, and at the same time, it is a "16RV passage scheduled jackpot" or a "16R (actually 13R) V non-passage scheduled jackpot". The presence is reported (Fig. 112(D), Fig. 113(D)). According to this configuration, since the jackpot type can be known at the stage of the promotion performance (with the pending series), it is possible to make the player feel happy and improve the amusement of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the sword operation promotion effect is executed, and when the player pushes the sword member 65, the promotion effect (with hold string) is executed (FIGS. 111(C), (D), FIG. (C)(D), FIG. 113(C)(D)). According to this configuration, the player is highly likely to expect the operation of pushing in the sword member 65, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the promotion to the "16RV passage scheduled jackpot" is performed on the left screen of the display screen 7a, and the holding group is displayed on the right screen of the display screen 7a (FIG. 111 (D), FIG. 112(D)). In addition, the promotion to the "16 RV passage scheduled jackpot" is performed in the central part of the display screen 7a, and the fact that it is a reserved group is performed in the lower central part of the display screen 7a (Fig. 113(D)). According to this configuration, since the notification of the promotion and the reserved group is performed in parallel on the display screen 7a, the amusement of the game can be improved.

Incidentally, in the promotion holding series effects A and B, the left area of the display screen 7a corresponds to the "first area", and the right area of the display screen 7a corresponds to the "second area". Further, in the promotion hold continuous effect C, the central portion of the display screen 7a corresponds to the "first area", and the central lower portion of the display screen 7a corresponds to the "second area".

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the left screen and the right screen of the display screen 7a are separated by the first movable accessory 14 (FIGS. 111(D), (E), (F), FIGS. 112(D), (E) (F)). According to this configuration, the information on the display screen 7a is organized, and the movement of the first movable accessory 14 can surprise the player, thereby improving the interest in the game. The first movable accessory 14 corresponds to the "movable accessory".

[Modification]
Below, a modification of the promotion holding series effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
Although the above is a configuration in which the promotion effect (with a pending run) is executed before the big win game, the promotion effect (with a pending run) may be executed in the middle of the big win game.

[Modification 2]
Although the sword member 65 is operated by executing the sword operation promoting effect, the effect button 63 may be operated.

[Modification 3]
The above is an example on the premise that there is a holding group in the promotion effect, but if it is not a holding group, in FIGS. 111(D) and 112(D), " It is conceivable to display a message image such as "Sorry". The same applies to FIG. 113(D).
Alternatively, if there is no reserved group, the presence or absence of the reserved group is not produced, for example, without moving the first movable accessory 14, only the promotion production is performed in the center of the display screen 7a.

[Modification 4]
Although the above is an example of the holding group of the first special price reservation, it can also be carried out in the same way in the case of the second special price reservation.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect C4-1]
It is possible to hold a reservation memory for holding a winning lottery triggered by the entry of a ball into a predetermined ball entrance, and if the lottery is won when the lottery is performed, an advantageous game that is advantageous to the player is executed. A gaming machine that
The advantageous game includes a first advantageous game and a second advantageous game that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous game,
When the second advantageous game is won, after pretending that the first advantageous game has been won, a promotion effect can be executed to notify the winning of the second advantageous game,
In the promotion effect, if there is a reserved memory indicating that the lottery has been won in the reserved memory when the promotion effect is executed, it is possible to execute a notification effect for notifying winning information based on the winning.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C4-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C4-1,
The winning information is information that there is a winning reserved memory in the reserved memory,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C4-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect C4-1,
The winning information is information indicating which one of the first advantageous game and the second advantageous game has been won, and that there is a winning reserved memory in the reserved memory.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C4-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C4-1 to C4-3,
Further comprising an operation unit that can be operated by the player,
In the promotion effect, the promotion to the second advantageous game is notified at the timing of the operation of the operation unit, and the winning information is notified.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C4-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C4-1 to C4-4,
further comprising a display device capable of displaying an image,
In the promotion effect, the promotion to the second advantageous game is notified in the first area of the display screen of the display device, and the winning information is notified in the second area of the display screen of the display device.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C4-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect C4-5,
Further equipped with a movable accessory that is movable,
In the promotion effect, the first area and the second area are separated by the movable accessory,
A gaming machine characterized by:

Operation instruction display effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 114 to 116. FIG. This operation instruction display effect is executed during the variation effect of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the instruction to execute the operation instruction display effect is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the image display device 7. Images are displayed on the screen 7a and the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

[Operation instruction display effect A]
FIG. 114 is a diagram for explaining the operation instruction display effect A. FIG. In the operation instruction display effect, after displaying an operation prompting image prompting the player to operate the operation means, when the operation means is operated, the display of the operation prompt image is erased, and the operation of the operation means is stopped (canceled). , and the operation prompting image is displayed again. In the operation instruction display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 114(A), decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed on the display screen 7a, and then the ready-to-win state is entered. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped at "3", resulting in "3↓3". After that, a special effect start image BKH is displayed for informing that a battle effect as a special ready-to-win effect is started. The display of the pending icon 9A and the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C is omitted. The pending icon 9A and the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C may or may not be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 114(B), when the special ready-to-win effect is started, the "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L is reduced and moved toward the upper left of the display screen 7a while maintaining its display. Temporarily stop at the position. The "3" of the right decorative pattern 8R is reduced and moves toward the upper right of the display screen 7a while maintaining its display, and temporarily stops at that position. A friend character CRA, an enemy character CRB, a button image BTN, and an operation prompting image RND are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The button image BTN is an image simulating at least part of the appearance of the effect button 63 . The operation prompting image RND includes an arrow image representing the operation direction (downward direction) for the button image BTN and a character image of "continuous hit", and prompts the player to operate (continuously press) the effect button 63. . Here, an image of a fight between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is displayed according to the operation (continuous hit) of the effect button 63 by the player.

When the player operates (repeatedly hits) the effect button 63, the display of the button image BTN and the operation promotion image RND disappears, as shown in FIG. 114(C). That is, since the player is operating, there is no need for an image prompting the operation. As a result, more battle images can be shown.

When the operation (continuous hitting) of the effect button 63 by the player is stopped while the battle video is being displayed, the button image BTN and the operation prompting image RND are displayed again as shown in FIG. 114(D). be done. This prompts the player to operate (continuously press) the effect button 63 again. At this time, the progress of the image in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight may be interrupted or may proceed as it is.

When the player again operates (hit) the effect button 63, the display of the button image BTN and the operation promotion image RND disappears again, as shown in FIG. 114(E). At this time, progress of the interrupted battle video may be resumed.

FIG. 114(F) displays the climax portion of the battle effect executed after the lapse of a predetermined time. At this time, an operation invalid image SMK and a button image BTN are displayed on the display screen 7a. The operation invalid image SMK is an image for notifying the player that the operation of the effect button 63 is in an invalid period. The button image BTN is overlaid with an “x” image to indicate that the operation is invalid. In this state, the production of the climax part of the battle production progresses.

After that, as shown in FIG. 114(G), the selection images ST1 and ST2 are displayed on the display screen 7a. At this time, the display of the operation disabled image SMK and the button image BTN marked with "x" is maintained. The selection images STG1 and STG2 are images including a plurality of options that can be selected by the player by operating the operating means. and a second selection image STG2 indicated as "long press (kick)". At this time, since the operation of the effect button 63 is disabled, even if the player operates the effect button 63, the corresponding change in effect does not occur on the display screen 7a.

After that, as shown in FIG. 114(H), after a predetermined period of time has passed, the display of the operation invalid image SMK and the button image BTN marked with "x" disappears. When these displays disappear, the operation of the effect button 63 becomes valid, and the operation of the effect button 63 enables the operation of selecting one of the first selected image STG1 and the second selected image STG2. Here, the first selected image STG1 is selected, and the display color of the first selected image STG1 is changed.

After that, when a predetermined period of time elapses, as shown in FIG. 114(I), the display of the second selection image STG2 that is not selected out of the selection images STG1 and STG2 disappears, and the display of the selected first selection image STG1 is displayed. remains. After that, as shown in FIG. 114(J), a button image BTN, a validity period image TBI, and an operation prompting image RND are displayed. The valid period image TBI is a meter image representing the valid period of operation of the effect button 63, and is a so-called timer bar representing the passage of time by increasing the area of a specific color. The operation urging image RND includes an arrow image representing the operation direction (downward) for the button image BTN and a character image of "Continuous hit", prompting the player to operate (consecutively hit) the effect button 63. This operation prompting image RND corresponds to the content selected from the selection images STG1 and STG2. Here, "punch" is displayed because the first selection image STG1 representing "punch" is selected. When the second selection image STG2 indicated as "long press (kick)" is selected, the operation prompting image RND is displayed as "long press". That is, the operation prompting image RND is a selection result image representing an option selected from the options of the first selection image STG1 and the second selection image STG2.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 114(K), an effect is executed in which the ally character CRA wins against the enemy character CRB. This effect is executed regardless of whether or not the player repeatedly hits the effect button 63 . This will inform you of the big win. After that, as shown in FIG. 114(L), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stop-displayed in a jackpot mode of "333".

[Operation instruction display effect B]
FIG. 115 is a diagram for explaining the operation instruction display effect B. FIG. In the operation instruction display effect, after displaying an operation prompting image for prompting the player to operate the operation means, the display of the operation prompting image is erased when the operation means is operated, and when the operation of the operation means is stopped, the operation is prompted again. This is an effect that displays an image. FIGS. 115A to 115D of the operation instruction display effect B are the same as FIGS. 114B to 114E of the operation instruction display effect A. FIG. That is, FIG. 115(A) is executed after the operation instruction display effect A of FIG. 114(A).

FIG. 115(E) shows the climax portion of the battle presentation. At this time, if the effect button 63 is operated (for example, hit repeatedly) by the player, the operation invalid image SMK and the button image BTN are displayed on the display screen 7a. The operation invalid image SMK is an image for notifying the player that the operation of the effect button 63 is in an invalid period. The button image BTN is overlaid with an “x” image to indicate that the operation is invalid. In this state, the production of the climax part of the battle production progresses.

When the player cancels the operation (for example, repeated hitting) of the effect button 63, the display of the invalid operation image SMK and the button image BTN marked with "x" disappears, as shown in FIG. 115(F). That is, since the player does not operate, there is no need for an image to notify that the operation is invalid. This makes it possible to show more of the climax part of the battle video.

When the player again operates (for example, hits repeatedly) the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. . In this state, the production of the climax portion of the battle production progresses.

When the operation (for example, repeated hitting) of the effect button 63 by the player is canceled again, as shown in FIG. . That is, when the player operates the effect button 63, the operation invalid image SMK and the button image BTN with "x" are displayed, and when the player stops operating the effect button 63, these displays disappear.

After that, as shown in FIG. 115(I), the selection images ST1 and ST2 are displayed on the display screen 7a. At this time, the operation invalid image SMK and the button image BTN with "x" are not displayed. The selection images STG1 and STG2 are images including a plurality of options that can be selected by the player by operating the operating means. and a second selection image STG2 indicated as "long press (kick)". By operating the effect button 63, an operation of selecting one of the first selection image STG1 and the second selection image STG2 becomes possible. Here, one selected display color changes.

After that, when a predetermined period of time elapses, as shown in FIG. 115(J), an operation disabled image SMK and a button image BTN marked with "x" are displayed. As a result, the operation of the effect button 63 is disabled, and the selection between the first selection image STG1 and the second selection image STG2 cannot be changed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 115K, of the selection images STG1 and STG2, the display of the second selection image STG2 that is not selected disappears, and the display of the selected first selection image STG1 remains. After that, as shown in FIG. 115(L), a button image BTN, a validity period image TBI, and an operation prompting image RND are displayed. The valid period image TBI is a meter image representing the valid period of operation of the effect button 63, and is a so-called timer bar representing the passage of time by increasing the area of a specific color. The operation prompting image RND includes an arrow image representing the operation direction (downward) for the button image BTN and a character image of "Continuous hit", prompting the player to operate (consecutively hit) the effect button 63 . This operation prompting image RND corresponds to the content selected from the selection images STG1 and STG2. Here, "punch" is displayed because the first selection image STG1 representing "punch" is selected. When the second selection image STG2 indicated as "long press (kick)" is selected, "long press" is displayed. That is, the operation prompting image RND is a selection result image representing an option selected from the options of the first selection image STG1 and the second selection image STG2.

FIG. 115(L) is the same as FIG. 114(J) of the operation instruction display effect A. After FIG. 115(L), an effect similar to FIG. 114(K) and (L) of the operation instruction display effect A is executed.

[Operation instruction display effect C]
FIG. 116 is a diagram for explaining the operation instruction display effect C. FIG. In the operation instruction display effect, after displaying an operation prompting image for prompting the player to operate the operation means, the display of the operation prompting image is erased when the operation means is operated, and when the operation of the operation means is stopped, the operation is prompted again. This is an effect that displays an image. FIG. 116A of the operation instruction display effect C is the same as FIG. 114A of the operation instruction display effect A. FIG. That is, after the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed on the display screen 7a, the ready-to-win mode is entered. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped at "3", resulting in "3↓3". After that, a special effect start image BKH is displayed for informing that a battle effect as a special ready-to-win effect is started.

As shown in FIG. 116(B), when the special ready-to-win effect is started, the "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L is reduced and moved toward the upper left of the display screen 7a while maintaining its display. Temporarily stop at the position. The "3" of the right decorative pattern 8R is reduced and moves toward the upper right of the display screen 7a while maintaining its display, and temporarily stops at that position. A friend character CRA, an enemy character CRB, a meter image MG, a button image BTN, and an operation prompting image RND are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The meter image MG indicates the amount of energy required for the ally character CRA to perform a special move. Any target can be set as the object represented by the meter image MG. The button image BTN is an image simulating at least part of the appearance of the select button 68 . The operation prompting image RND includes a text image of “Press and hold to charge”, prompting the player to operate (long press) the select button 68 . Here, among the four buttons of the select button 68 represented by the button image BTN, the color of the upper button has changed to notify the player to press the upper button. When the player presses the upper button of the select button 68 for a long time, an effect of charging the meter of the meter image MG is executed.

When the player presses the upper button of the select button 68 for a long time, the display of the button image BTN and the operation prompting image RND disappears, as shown in FIG. 116(C). That is, since the player is operating, there is no need for an image prompting the operation. As a result, more battle images can be shown. Further, when the upper button of the recto button 68 is pressed for a long time, an effect of charging the energy of the meter image MG is executed.

When the player stops pressing the upper button of the select button 68 while the battle video is being displayed, the button image BTN and the operation prompting image RND are displayed again as shown in FIG. 116(D). be. This prompts the player to press the upper button of the select button 68 for a long time again. At this time, an effect in which the energy of the meter image MG decreases may be executed.

When the player presses the upper button of the select button 68 for a long time again, the display of the button image BTN and the operation prompting image RND disappears again, as shown in FIG. 116(E). At this time, an effect is executed in which the energy of the meter image MG is increased again (charged).

FIG. 116(F) shows the climax portion of the battle effect that is executed after the lapse of the predetermined time. At this time, when the upper button of the select button 68 is pressed for a long time, the operation disabled image SMK and the button image BTN are displayed on the display screen 7a. The operation invalid image SMK is an image that informs the player that the operation of the select button 68 is invalid. The button image BTN is overlaid with an image of "x" to indicate that the operation is invalid. In this state, the production of the climax portion of the battle production progresses.

After that, as shown in FIG. 116(G), after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the display of the disabled operation image SMK and the button image BTN marked with "x" disappears, and the selection images ST1 and ST2, the button image BTN, and the A selection promoting image NTK is displayed. The selection images STG1 and STG2 are images containing a plurality of options that can be selected by the player. )” and a second selection image STG2.

The button image BTN is an image that imitates at least a part of the appearance of the select button 68, as described above. is changing color, informing the player to press the left or right button. The selection facilitating image NTK includes a character image of "Select", and prompts the player to select one of the first selection image STG1 and the second selection image STG2 by operating the left and right buttons of the select button 68. urging you to By operating the left and right buttons of the select button 68, it is possible to select one of the first selected image STG1 and the second selected image STG2. Here, the first selected image STG1 is selected, and the display color of the second selected image STG2 is changed.

After that, when a predetermined period of time elapses, as shown in FIG. 116(H), the display of the second selection image STG2 that is not selected out of the selection images STG1 and STG2 disappears, and the display of the selected first selection image STG1 is displayed. remains. The display of the button image BTN and the selection promoting image NTK is maintained. After that, as shown in FIG. 116(I), the display of the button image BTN and the selection promoting image NTK disappears. In this state, when the player operates the select button 68, as shown in FIG. 116(J), an operation disabled image SMK and a button image BTN marked with "x" are displayed. As a result, the player is notified that the operation of the select button 68 is invalid.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 116(K), an effect is executed in which the ally character CRA is defeated by the enemy character CRB. After that, as shown in FIG. 116(L), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stop-displayed in the form of "323" being lost.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the operation instruction display effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 114(B) to 114(E), after displaying the operation prompting image RND prompting the player to operate the operation means, when the operation means is operated, the operation prompt is displayed. When the display of the image is turned off and the operation of the operation means is stopped, the first effect of displaying the operation prompting image RND again can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 115 and 116. FIG.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 114(F) and (G), after the first effect, when the operation means is being operated, at least one of the operations of the operation means is disabled. A second effect of displaying an operation invalid image SMK indicating that is can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 115 and 116. FIG.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 114(G), in the second effect, a plurality of options selectable by the player by operating the operation means are displayed while the operation invalid image SMK is displayed. can be executed to display the selected images STG1 and STG2 including . According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 115 and 116. FIG.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 114(J), in the second effect, when the selection images STG1 and STG2 are displayed, the player selects images to be included in the selection images STG1 and STG2. When one of the multiple options is selected, a selection result image (operation prompting image RND) representing the selected option is displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIG. 115 as well.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 114B and 114D, in the first effect, an operation means image BTN imitating at least part of the appearance of the operation means is displayed together with the operation promotion image RND. be done. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 115 and 116. FIG.

[Modification]
Modified examples of the operation instruction display effects are shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the operation instruction display effect A, the operation invalid image SMK is displayed regardless of whether the effect button 63 is operated or not in the climax portion of the battle effect shown in FIGS. 114(F) and (G). However, the operation invalid image SMK may be configured to be displayed when the effect button 63 is operated and not to be displayed when the effect button 63 is not operated.

[Modification 2]
In the operation instruction display effects A and B, when the operation invalid image SMK is displayed, all operations of the effect button 63 may be invalid, or only a specific operation (for example, repeated hits) may be invalid. (for example, long press) may be effective. Similarly, in the operation instruction display effect C, when the operation invalid image SMK is displayed, the operation of all four buttons of the select button 68 may be invalid, or the operation of a specific button (for example, the up and down buttons) may be invalid. may be invalid and other operations (for example, left and right buttons) may be valid.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect A22-1]
an operation means that can be operated by a player;
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is an operation promotion image prompting the player to operate the operation means;
After displaying the operation prompting image, when the operation means is operated, the display of the operation prompting image is erased, and when the operation of the operating means is stopped, the first effect of displaying the operation prompting image again is executed. Possible,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A22-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A22-1,
one of the plurality of types of images is an operation invalid image indicating that at least one operation of the operation means is invalid;
After the first effect, a second effect of displaying the operation invalid image can be executed when the operation means is being operated,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A22-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A22-2,
one of the plurality of types of images is a selection image including a plurality of options selectable by the player by operating the operation means;
In the second effect, a third effect of displaying the selected image while the operation invalid image is displayed can be executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A22-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect A22-3,
In the second effect, when the player selects one of a plurality of options included in the selection image while the selection image is being displayed, a selection result image representing the selected option is displayed. is displayed,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A22-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A22-1 to A22-3,
one of the plurality of types of images is an operation means image that imitates at least part of the appearance of the operation means;
In the first effect, the operation means image is displayed together with the operation promotion image.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The button special display effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 117 to 119. FIG. This button special display effect is executed in a standby state (when the demo screen is displayed when the player is not playing a game), or during a variation effect of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the instruction to execute the button special display effect is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the image display device 7. An image is displayed on the screen 7a or the sub-display screen 64. FIG.

The game machine 1 of this embodiment is provided with a select button 68 . The select button 68 is a cross-shaped button having buttons on the top, bottom, left, and right. That is, the sub-control board 90 can independently detect the player's operation (pressing) of the upper, lower, left, and right buttons of the select button 68 via the select button detection switch 68a.

[Button special display effect A]
FIG. 117 is a diagram for explaining the button special display effect A. FIG. In the button special display effect A of FIG. 117, a standby effect, a decorative pattern variation effect, a mode change effect, and a change impossibility effect are performed. Decorative pattern variation effects other than standby effects, mode change effects, and non-changeable effects are effects in the same variation. In the effects of the same variation other than the standby effects, the pending icon 9A and the variation icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, but they are omitted in the drawing.

In the button special display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 117(A), a standby effect is performed. This waiting effect is executed when the player operates the handle 60 and does not play a game for a predetermined period of time, that is, when the display screen 7a is a predetermined demonstration screen. This is an effect performed in response to pressing the button 63 . In the standby effect, a mode suggesting image XL1, a select button image XL4, a select button corresponding image XL4A, an effect button image XL5, and an effect button corresponding image XL5A are displayed.

The mode suggesting image XL1 is an image suggesting one display mode. The select button image XL4 is an image that imitates the select button 68 and is an image that prompts the user to operate the select button 68 . The select button corresponding image XL4A is displayed on the right side of the select button image XL4 and is labeled "Select". The select button corresponding image XL4A suggests that the display mode can be selected by operating the select button 68 . The effect button image XL5 is an image that imitates the effect button 63 and is an image that prompts the user to operate the effect button 63 . The effect button corresponding image XL5A is displayed on the right side of the effect button image XL5, and is indicated as "determine". The effect button corresponding image XL5A suggests that the selected display mode is determined by operating the effect button 63 . In the example of FIG. 117A, "mode B" is selected for the mode suggestive image XL1.

When the player shoots a game ball during standby and the game ball enters the first starting port 20, the special symbol variation is started, and as shown in FIG. It is carried out. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a from the center to the right side of the display screen 7a and fluctuate in the vertical direction. Also, in the decorative symbol variation effect, a mode suggestion image XL1 and a select button image XL4 are displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a. In this case, the mode suggestive image XL1 is displayed so as to be associated with the select button image XL4. Specifically, the mode suggesting image XL1 is displayed above the select button image XL4, that is, the mode suggesting image XL1 is displayed so as to correspond to the top button of the cross button of the select button image XL4.

Next, as shown in FIG. 117(C), a mode change effect is performed. In this mode change effect, the mode suggesting image XL1 is continuously associated with the select button image XL4. In the mode change effect, the player operates (presses) the upper button of the select button 68 to change the display mode of the mode suggestive image XL1 even though the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are changing. It is a performance to do. In the example of FIG. 117(C), the mode suggestive image XL1 is changed to "mode C". When the display mode is changed to mode B in the mode suggesting image XL1, the display mode in the display screen 7a becomes mode B. FIG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 117(D), an unchangeable effect is executed. In this change-impossible effect, a mode-change-impossible image XL6 is displayed so as to hide the mode suggesting image XL1 and the select button image XL4. The mode-change-impossible image XL6 is represented by a square with a lightly dark x mark, suggesting that the mode-suggesting image XL1 cannot be changed for a predetermined period of time (until the change ends in this embodiment). In other words, the mode change disabled image XL6 suggests that the input of the select button 68 is disabled for a predetermined period (in this embodiment, until the change ends).
After that, ready-to-win performance is performed, winning symbols or big winning symbols are displayed, and big winning game performance is performed.

In each of the standby effect, the decorative pattern variation effect, the mode change effect, and the unchangeable effect, the mode suggestion image XL1 and the select button image XL4 are displayed. good. For example, the size, color, shape, etc., of the mode suggesting image XL1 in the standby effect and the mode suggesting image XL1 in the decorative design variation effect may be different.

[Button special display effect B]
FIG. 118 is a diagram for explaining button special display effect B. FIG. In the button special display effect B in FIG. 118, a standby effect, a decorative pattern change effect, a mode change effect, a language change effect, an auto button change effect, and a non-changeable effect are performed. Decorative pattern variation effects other than standby effects, mode change effects, language change effects, auto button change effects, and non-changeable effects are effects in the same variation. In the effects of the same variation other than the standby effects, the pending icon 9A and the variation icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, but they are omitted in the figure.

In the button special display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 118(A), a standby effect is performed. This waiting effect is performed when the player operates the handle 60 and does not play a game for a predetermined period of time, that is, when the display screen 7a is a predetermined demonstration screen, the player presses the select button 68 or presses the effect. This is an effect performed in response to pressing the button 63 . In the standby effect, a mode suggesting image XL1, a button auto presence/absence suggesting image XL2, a language suggesting image XL3, a select button image XL4, a select button corresponding image XL4A, a effect button image XL5, and a effect button corresponding image XL5A are displayed. Is displayed.

The mode suggesting image XL1 is an image suggesting one display mode. The button auto presence/absence suggesting image XL2 indicates whether the button auto mode, which means that the effect button 63 is automatically pressed without pressing the effect button 63 when a button image prompting the user to press the effect button 63 appears on the display screen 7a, is ON or OFF. It is an image representing The language-suggesting image XL3 is an image suggesting the language used in the display effect on the display screen 7a. For example, when the language is indicated as "English" in the language suggestive image XL3, the language mode is English, and the display effects on the display screen 7a use English partially or wholly. The select button image XL4 is an image that imitates the select button 68 and is an image that prompts the user to operate the select button 68 . The select button corresponding image XL4A is displayed on the right side of the select button image XL4 and is labeled "Select". The select button corresponding image XL4A suggests that by operating the select button 68, it is possible to select the display mode, the presence or absence of the button auto mode, and the language mode. The effect button image XL5 is an image that imitates the effect button 63 and is an image that prompts the user to operate the effect button 63 . The effect button corresponding image XL5A is displayed on the right side of the effect button image XL5, and is indicated as "determine". The effect button corresponding image XL5A suggests that the selected display mode, the presence or absence of the button auto mode, and the language mode are determined by operating the effect button 63 . In the example of FIG. 118A, "mode B" is selected for the mode suggestive image XL1, "auto ON" is selected for the button auto presence/absence suggestive image XL2, and "Japanese" is selected for the language suggestive image XL3. selected.

When the player shoots a game ball during standby and the game ball enters the first starting port 20, the special symbols start to change, and as shown in FIG. It is carried out. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a from the center to the right side of the display screen 7a and fluctuate in the vertical direction. Further, in the decorative symbol variation effect, a mode suggesting image XL1, a button auto presence/absence suggesting image XL2, a language suggesting image XL3, and a select button image XL4 are displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a. In this case, the mode suggestive image XL1, the button auto presence/absence suggestive image XL2, and the language suggestive image XL3 are displayed so as to be associated with the select button image XL4. Specifically, the mode suggesting image XL1 is displayed above the select button image XL4, that is, the mode suggesting image XL1 is displayed so as to correspond to the top button of the cross button of the select button image XL4. Further, the image XL2 suggesting whether or not button auto is present is displayed to the left of select button image XL4, that is, image XL2 suggesting whether or not button auto is present is displayed so as to correspond to the left button of the cross button of select button image XL4. The language suggestive image XL3 is displayed below the select button image XL4, that is, the language suggestive image XL3 is displayed so as to correspond to the lower button of the cross button of the select button image XL4.

Next, as shown in FIG. 118(C), a mode change effect is performed. In this mode change effect, the mode suggesting image XL1, the button auto presence/absence suggesting image XL2, and the language suggesting image XL3 are continuously associated with the select button image XL4. In the mode change effect, the player operates (presses) the upper button of the select button 68 to change the display mode of the mode suggesting image XL1 even though the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing. It is a performance to do. In the example of FIG. 118(C), the mode suggestive image XL1 is changed to "mode C". When the display mode is changed to mode B in the mode suggesting image XL1, the display mode in the display screen 7a becomes mode B.

Next, as shown in FIG. 118(D), a language change effect is performed. In this language change effect, the mode suggesting image XL1, the button auto presence/absence suggesting image XL2, and the language suggesting image XL3 are continuously associated with the select button image XL4. Also, in the language change effect, the player operates (presses) the lower button of the select button 68 to change the language mode in the language suggestive image XL3 while the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing. It is a performance to do. In the example of FIG. 118(D), the language suggestive image XL3 has its language mode changed to "Chinese". When the language is changed to Chinese in the language suggestive image XL3, the language displayed on the display screen 7a becomes Chinese.

Next, as shown in FIG. 118(E), an auto button change effect is performed. In this auto button change effect, the mode suggesting image XL1, the button auto presence/absence suggesting image XL2, and the language suggesting image XL3 are continuously associated with the select button image XL4. In addition, in the auto button change effect, when the player operates (presses) the left button of the select button 68, the buttons in the button auto presence/absence suggesting image XL2 are displayed even though the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing. This is an effect for changing ON or OFF of the auto mode. In the example of FIG. 118(E), the button auto presence/absence suggestive image XL2 has the button auto mode changed from ON to OFF, and becomes "auto OFF". When the button auto mode is changed to auto OFF in the button auto presence/absence suggesting image XL2, the effect button 63 is considered to be operated even if the effect button 63 is not operated, and the operation of the effect button 63 becomes valid.

Next, as shown in FIG. 118(F), an unchangeable effect is executed. In this change-impossible effect, a mode-change-impossible image XL6 is displayed so as to hide the mode suggesting image XL1, the button auto presence/absence suggesting image XL2, the language suggesting image XL3, and the select button image XL4. The mode-change-impossible image XL6 is represented by a square with a lightly dark x mark, and the mode-suggesting image XL1, the button-auto presence/absence-suggesting image XL2, or the language-suggesting image XL3 are changed for a predetermined period (until the change ends in this embodiment). ) suggests that it cannot. In other words, the mode change disabled image XL6 suggests that the input of the select button 68 is disabled for a predetermined period (in this embodiment, until the change ends).
After that, ready-to-win performance is performed, winning symbols or big winning symbols are displayed, and big winning game performance is performed.

It should be noted that, in each of the standby effect, the decorative pattern variation effect, the mode change effect, the language change effect, the auto button change effect, and the non-changeable effect, the mode suggestive image XL1, the button auto presence/absence suggestive image XL2, and the language suggestive image XL3. , and the select button image XL4 are displayed, the mode may be different for each effect. For example, the size, color, shape, etc., of the mode suggesting image XL1 in the standby effect and the mode suggesting image XL1 in the decorative design variation effect may be different.

[Button special display effect C]
FIG. 119 is a diagram for explaining the button special display effect C. FIG. In the button special display effect C of FIG. 119, a standby effect, a decorative pattern change effect, a mode change effect, a language change effect, an auto button change effect, a non-changeable effect, and a super ready-to-win effect AD are performed. Decorative symbol variation effects other than standby effects, mode change effects, language change effects, auto button change effects, unchangeable effects, and super ready-to-win effects A to D are effects in the same variation. In the effects of the same variation other than the standby effects, the pending icon 9A and the variation icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, but they are omitted in the figure.

In the button special display effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 119(A), a standby effect is performed. This waiting effect is executed when the player operates the handle 60 and does not play a game for a predetermined period of time, that is, when the display screen 7a is a predetermined demonstration screen. This is an effect performed in response to pressing the button 63 . In the standby effect, a mode suggesting image XL1, a button auto presence/absence suggesting image XL2, a language suggesting image XL3, a select button image XL4, a select button corresponding image XL4A, a effect button image XL5, and a effect button corresponding image XL5A are displayed. Is displayed.

The mode suggesting image XL1 is an image suggesting one display mode. The button auto presence/absence suggesting image XL2 indicates whether the button auto mode, which means that the effect button 63 is automatically pressed without pressing the effect button 63 when a button image prompting the user to press the effect button 63 appears on the display screen 7a, is ON or OFF. It is an image representing The language-suggesting image XL3 is an image suggesting the language used in the display effect on the display screen 7a. For example, when the language is indicated as "English" in the language suggestive image XL3, the language mode is English, and the display effects on the display screen 7a use English partially or wholly. The select button image XL4 is an image that imitates the select button 68 and is an image that prompts the user to operate the select button 68 . The select button corresponding image XL4A is displayed on the right side of the select button image XL4 and is labeled "Select". The select button corresponding image XL4A suggests that by operating the select button 68, it is possible to select the display mode, the presence or absence of the button auto mode, and the language mode. The effect button image XL5 is an image that imitates the effect button 63 and is an image that prompts the user to operate the effect button 63 . The effect button corresponding image XL5A is displayed on the right side of the effect button image XL5, and is indicated as "determine". The effect button corresponding image XL5A suggests that the selected display mode, the presence or absence of the button auto mode, and the language mode are determined by operating the effect button 63 . In the example of FIG. 119A, "mode B" is selected for the mode suggesting image XL1, "auto ON" is selected for the button auto presence/absence suggesting image XL2, and "Japanese" is selected for the language suggesting image XL3. selected.

When the player shoots a game ball during standby and the game ball enters the first starting port 20, the special symbol variation is started, and as shown in FIG. It is carried out. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a from the center to the right side of the display screen 7a and fluctuate in the vertical direction. Further, in the decorative symbol variation effect, a mode suggesting image XL1, a button auto presence/absence suggesting image XL2, a language suggesting image XL3, and a select button image XL4 are displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a. In this case, the mode suggestive image XL1, the button auto presence/absence suggestive image XL2, and the language suggestive image XL3 are displayed so as to be associated with the select button image XL4. Specifically, the mode suggesting image XL1 is displayed above the select button image XL4, that is, the mode suggesting image XL1 is displayed so as to correspond to the top button of the cross button of the select button image XL4. Further, the image XL2 suggesting whether or not button auto is present is displayed to the left of select button image XL4, that is, image XL2 suggesting whether or not button auto is present is displayed so as to correspond to the left button of the cross button of select button image XL4. The language suggestive image XL3 is displayed below the select button image XL4, that is, the language suggestive image XL3 is displayed so as to correspond to the lower button of the cross button of the select button image XL4.

Next, as shown in FIG. 119(C), a mode change effect is performed. In this mode change effect, the mode suggesting image XL1, the button auto presence/absence suggesting image XL2, and the language suggesting image XL3 are continuously associated with the select button image XL4. In the mode change effect, the player operates (presses) the upper button of the select button 68 to change the display mode of the mode suggesting image XL1 even though the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing. It is a performance to do. In the example of FIG. 119(C), the mode suggestive image XL1 is changed to "mode C". When the display mode is changed to mode B in the mode suggesting image XL1, the display mode in the display screen 7a becomes mode B.

Next, as shown in FIG. 119(D), a language change effect is performed. In this language change effect, the mode suggesting image XL1, the button auto presence/absence suggesting image XL2, and the language suggesting image XL3 are continuously associated with the select button image XL4. Also, in the language change effect, the player operates (presses) the lower button of the select button 68 to change the language mode in the language suggestive image XL3 while the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing. It is a performance to do. In the example of FIG. 119(D), the language suggestive image XL3 has its language mode changed to "Chinese". When the language is changed to Chinese in the language suggestive image XL3, the language displayed on the display screen 7a becomes Chinese.

Next, as shown in FIG. 119(E), an auto button change effect is performed. In this auto button change effect, the mode suggesting image XL1, the button auto presence/absence suggesting image XL2, and the language suggesting image XL3 are continuously associated with the select button image XL4. In addition, in the auto button change effect, when the player operates (presses) the left button of the select button 68, the buttons in the button auto presence/absence suggesting image XL2 are displayed even though the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing. This is an effect for changing ON or OFF of the auto mode. In the example of FIG. 119(E), the button auto presence/absence suggesting image XL2 has the button auto mode changed from ON to OFF, and becomes "auto OFF". When the button auto mode is changed to auto OFF in the button auto presence/absence suggesting image XL2, the effect button 63 is considered to be operated even if the effect button 63 is not operated, and the operation of the effect button 63 becomes valid.

Next, as shown in FIG. 119(F), an unchangeable effect is executed. In this change-impossible effect, a mode-change-impossible image XL6 is displayed so as to hide the mode suggesting image XL1, the button auto presence/absence suggesting image XL2, the language suggesting image XL3, and the select button image XL4. The mode-change-impossible image XL6 is represented by a square with a lightly dark x mark, and the mode-suggesting image XL1, the button-auto presence/absence-suggesting image XL2, or the language-suggesting image XL3 are changed for a predetermined period (until the change ends in this embodiment). ) suggests that it cannot. In other words, the mode change disabled image XL6 suggests that the input of the select button 68 is disabled for a predetermined period (in this embodiment, until the change ends).

Next, as shown in FIG. 119(G), a super ready-to-win effect A is performed. In this super ready-to-win performance A, the ready-to-win state is formed by temporarily stopping the decorative patterns 8L and 8R at 7 patterns while the mode change disabled image XL6 is continuously displayed, and the decorative pattern 8C fluctuates at high speed. An effect button image XL7 is displayed. This effect button image XL7 is an image imitating the effect button 63, and is an image prompting the player to operate (depress) the effect button 63. FIG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 119(H), a super ready-to-win effect B is performed. In this super ready-to-win effect B, the display of the mode change impossible image XL6 and the ready-to-win state by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are continued, and when the player presses the effect button 63, the chance up image XL8 is displayed. be. This chance-up image XL8 is an image suggesting that the degree of expectation for a big win has increased, and is described as "extremely hot".

Next, as shown in FIG. 119(I), super ready-to-win effect C is performed. In this super ready-to-win effect C, the display of the mode change disabled image XL6 and the ready-to-win state by the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are continued, and the select button image XL9 is displayed. This select button image XL9 is an image imitating the select button 68, and is an image prompting the player to operate (press) the select button 68. FIG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 119(J), a super ready-to-win effect D is performed. In this super ready-to-win effect D, the player operates any one of the upper, lower, left, and right buttons of the select button 68 in a state in which the display of the mode change-impossible image XL6 is continued, so that decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R displays 7 jackpot symbols.
After that, a jackpot game presentation is performed.

In addition, in each of the standby effect, decorative pattern variation effect, mode change effect, language change effect, auto button change effect, change impossible effect, and super reach effect A to D, mode suggesting image XL1, button auto presence suggesting. Although the image XL2, the language suggestive image XL3, and the select button image XL4 are displayed, the mode may be different for each effect. For example, the size, color, shape, etc., of the mode suggesting image XL1 in the standby effect and the mode suggesting image XL1 in the decorative design variation effect may be different.

[Modification]
In the button special display effects B to C, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R sometimes overlap the mode suggesting image XL1, the button auto presence/absence suggesting image XL2, the language suggesting image XL3, the select button image XL4, and the mode change disabled image XL6. There may be. In this case, the decorative designs 8L, 8C, and 8R may be arranged behind the mode suggestive image XL1, the button auto presence/absence suggestive image XL2, the language suggestive image XL3, the select button image XL4, and the mode change disabled image XL6.
In the above-mentioned button special display effects B to C, the display result of the pending display indicating the pending number and the special pattern is associated with the mode suggesting image XL1, the button auto presence/absence suggesting image XL2, the language suggesting image XL3, and the select button image XL4. You may make it display a lottery result showing . This hold indication may consist of only a number representing the number of holds. Further, this lottery result display may be displayed in the same arrangement as the stop symbols of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R. For example, if the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are "777", the lottery result is also displayed as "777".

[Effect example]
In the above button special display effects A to C, when the display mode is to be changed while the mode suggestion image XL1 and the select button image XL4 are displayed in association with each other in the mode change effect, the corresponding display mode mode suggestion image XL1. According to this configuration, even when the display mode is changed, the mode suggesting image XL1 is associated with the select button image XL4. It is easy to recognize that XL4 should be used, and it is possible to quickly change to a suitable display mode. As a result, it is possible to smoothly change the display mode and improve the interest of the game.

In the button special display effects A to C, as shown in the change-disabled effects, there is a display-mode-change-disabled period in which the display mode cannot be changed after the display mode is changed. According to this configuration, the display mode change disabled period is provided after the display mode is changed, so that the player can be prevented from being distracted by changing the display mode, and the display effect on the display screen 7a. the player can concentrate on. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the button special display effects A to C, the change prohibition effect is performed after the mode change effect, and in the change prohibition effect, the mode change prohibition image XL6 is displayed so as to overlap the mode suggestion image XL1. According to this configuration, the player can quickly recognize that the display mode cannot be changed, and the player concentrates on the display effect on the display screen 7a without trying to change the display mode. be able to. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the button special display effects B to C, when the mode suggesting image XL1 is displayed in correspondence with the select button image XL4, the language suggesting image XL3 is displayed in correspondence with the select button image XL4. According to this configuration, even when the language suggestive image XL3 is to be changed, the language suggestive image XL3 is associated with the select button image XL4. It can be easily recognized that the button image XL4 should be used, and the display mode can be quickly changed to a suitable one. As a result, it is possible to smoothly change the display mode and improve the interest of the game.

In the button special display effects B to C, when the mode suggesting image XL1 is displayed in correspondence with the select button image XL4, the button auto existence suggesting image XL2 is displayed in correspondence with the select button image XL4. . According to this configuration, even when the image XL2 suggesting the presence/absence of button auto is changed, the image XL2 suggesting the presence/absence of button auto is associated with the select button image XL4. It can be easily recognized that the selection button image XL4 should be used for the change, and the display mode can be quickly changed to a suitable display mode. As a result, it is possible to smoothly change the display mode and improve the interest of the game.

The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect XL-1]
A game machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects and operation means capable of being operated,
one display mode out of a plurality of display modes can be executed on the display means;
The display mode can be changed by operating the operation unit,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is a effect of displaying a display mode suggesting image suggesting one display mode and an operating means image representing the operating unit in association with each other,
In the second display effect, when the display mode is changed from the first display mode to the second display mode, the second display is performed from the display mode suggesting image suggesting the first display mode. an effect of changing to the display mode suggesting image suggesting a mode,
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the second display effect is performed while the first display effect is being performed while the special symbols are changing.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XL-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect XL-1,
After the second display effect in the combination effect is performed, there is a display mode change disabled period in which the display mode cannot be changed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XL-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect XL-2,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
the third display effect is a effect of displaying a display mode change disabled image indicating that the display mode cannot be changed during the display mode change disabled period;
The combination effect may include the third display effect,
In the combination effect, the third display effect is performed after the second display effect, and the display mode change-impossible image of the third display effect is displayed so as to overlap the display mode suggesting image. Ru
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XL-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect XL-3,
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fourth display effect is a effect of displaying a language suggestive image suggesting a language to be used for display and the operation means image in association with each other,
The combination effect may include the fourth display effect,
In the combination effect, the fourth display effect is performed while the first display effect is being performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XL-5”
The gaming machine according to aspect XL-3 or aspect XL-4,
A fifth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fifth display effect is a effect of displaying an operation means automatic image suggesting that the operation means is operated automatically and the operation means image in association with each other,
The combination effect may include the fifth display effect,
In the combination effect, the fifth display effect is performed while the first display effect is being performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Effect button valid/invalid display effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 120 to 122. FIG. 120 to 122, some of the movable accessories arranged around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted for ease of viewing.

This effect button valid/invalid display effect is performed during the variable effect (variable display) of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90, and if the command includes an instruction to execute the effect button valid/invalid display effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7. FIG. Further, the lamp control board 107 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90, and changes the position and light emission mode of the second movable accessory 15 provided on the game board 2.

Here, the effect button valid/invalid display effect A will be explained first, the effect button valid/invalid display effect B, and the effect button valid/invalid display effect C will be explained in order.

[Effect button valid/invalid display effect A]
The effect button valid/invalid display effect A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 120 is a diagram for explaining the effect button valid/invalid display effect A. FIG. The effect button valid/invalid display effect A is performed during the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative symbols.

First, as shown in FIG. 120(A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, vertically elongated rectangular patterns are displayed as variable display areas of three decorative patterns (also referred to as "decorative pattern variable regions") (not shown). Three regions (that is, regions obtained by dividing the display screen 7a into three equal rows) are provided, a left decorative pattern 8L of a stereoscopic image, a middle decorative pattern 8C of a stereoscopic image, and a right decorative pattern 8R of a stereoscopic image. is a display mode in which reels are rotated from the upper side of each variable display area toward the lower side of the display screen 7a. be.

Specifically, the variable performance (variable display) of the decorative symbols is started in a display mode in which the left decorative symbols 8L are rotated from the upper side of the left variable display area toward the lower side of the left variable display area 8, and the middle The decorative pattern 8C is displayed in a display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side of the middle fluctuation display area to the lower side of the middle fluctuation display area, and the decorative pattern fluctuation performance (variation display) is started, and the right decorative pattern 8R is right-fluctuation display. A variable effect (variable display) of decorative symbols is started in a display mode in which reels are rotated from the upper side of the area toward the lower side of the right variable display area. The vertical distance of the left fluctuation display area, the vertical distance of the middle fluctuation display area, and the vertical distance of the right fluctuation display area are the same vertical distance, and the horizontal distance of the left fluctuation display area and the middle fluctuation display area are the same. , and the horizontal distance dimension of the right variable display area are the same horizontal distance dimension.

In the variable production (variable display) of each decorative pattern, all are number “1” → number “2” → number “3” → number “4” → number “5” → number “6” → number “7” → The reels are rotated in the order of number "8"→number "9"→number "1"→number "2"→ .

Among the numbers "1" to "9", the number "1", the number "3", the number "5", and the number "9", which are odd numbers excluding the number "7", have bright red, and even numbers The number "2", the number "4", the number "6", and the number "8", which are the symbols of , have a bright blue color, and the number "7" has a yellow (gold color). In addition, the sizes of numbers "1" to "9" each have a vertical distance dimension that is approximately one third of the vertical distance dimension of the left fluctuation display area (middle fluctuation display area, right fluctuation display area). Each of them has a normal size in which the horizontal distance dimension is about half the horizontal distance dimension of the left variable display area (middle variable display area, right variable display area). The numbers "1" to "9" are specially created special typefaces (individually created It is formed by a special typeface).

When the variable performance (variable display) of the decorative patterns is started, the decorative patterns stopped and displayed change from a low speed to a semi-transparent state while gradually increasing the speed, and become a display mode in which the display changes at a high speed. . As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed temporarily and then stopped). In addition, in the state of the temporary stop display, the decorative pattern is displayed in a mode of slowly moving up and down in small steps. A plurality of types of background images are prepared, and the background images are switched as appropriate.

In addition, on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, a small left decorative pattern, a small medium decorative pattern, and a small right decorative pattern corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed ( A sub-variation area KSZ having a horizontally long rectangular shape for variable display is provided. The background image of the sub-variation area KSZ is fixed to a single color (for example, a dark color (dark color system) or a color close to dark (for example, dark green), and does not change to another color. Sub-variation area KSZ , is arranged on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, so although it overlaps with the right fluctuation display area which is the fluctuation area of the right decorative pattern 8R, the sub-variation area KSZ is arranged so as to be on the frontmost side. As a result, the right decorative design 8R is arranged behind the sub-variation area KSZ, and the sub-variation area KSZ is not blocked by the right decorative design 8R. The sub-variation area KSZ is placed behind the variation area KSZ and is not blocked by other effect images.In other words, the visibility of the content displayed in the sub-variation area KSZ is hindered by the right decorative pattern 8R and other effect images. It is designed not to be

The small decorative designs are numeric designs, and are different from the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R (e.g., Mincho). It is unified with other single colors (for example, bright colors (yellow and white)) that have a high contrast with respect to the single color, and does not change to other colors. The small decorative pattern is arranged on the front side of the background image of the sub-variation area KSZ and is always in an opaque state, and even when the variation starts, it does not become translucent and disappears from the display screen 7a. There is no

Unlike the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, the small-sized decorative patterns do not have a variable effect (variable display) in the display mode in which the reels are rotated, and have the same size at the same display position. A variable effect (variable display) is performed by a display mode in which numerical patterns appear one after another in an opaque state.

When the variation performance (variation display) by the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is started, along with this, in the sub-variation area KSZ, the small left decorative pattern, the small medium decorative pattern, and the small is started, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed. All the small right decorative patterns are also stopped and displayed.

A state in which one or more of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed in the same pattern to reach is formed), the small left decorative pattern, the small middle decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern are all in a state where the variable effect (variable display) is continued. Specifically, even if the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small left decorative pattern continues to be varied (variable display), and even if the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small right decorative pattern is displayed. is continued, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, the small left decorative pattern, the small medium decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern are displayed. All the symbols are also stopped and displayed.

When the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and they are not aligned with the same pattern and become misaligned, the small left decorative pattern, the small left decorative pattern, and the small left decorative pattern are displayed. The middle decorative pattern and the small right decorative pattern may be the same patterns as the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R, or may be completely different patterns. Specifically, for example, when the left decorative design 8L is displayed as the number "1", the middle decorative design 8C as the number "2", and the right decorative design 8R as the number "3", the small left decorative design is displayed. The number "1", the small medium decorative pattern may be displayed as the number "2", the small right decorative pattern may be displayed as the number "3", or the small left decorative pattern may be displayed as the number "5" and the small medium decoration. The symbol may be stopped at the number "6" and the small right decorative symbol at the number "7".

On the other hand, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed and all the same patterns win, the small left decorative pattern, The small-sized middle decorative pattern and the small-sized right decorative pattern are arranged in the same patterns as the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R.

The change icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R, which are currently changing as the digestion of the first special figure reservation, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. is displayed (placed) at the variable display position 9Cd (on the rectangular image (pedestal image)). In the region of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as the first special figure hold. In this pending display area, pending icons 9A can be displayed (can be placed) at four pending display positions 9Ad (on rectangular images (pedestal images)), and up to four pending icons 9A can be stocked. can be done. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, toward the left side of the display screen 7a from a position near the variable display position 9Cd. They are linearly arranged and displayed along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the reserved display position 9Ad.

Since the variable display position 9Cd is arranged in the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a and the first reserved display position 9Ad is arranged on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, the variable display position 9Cd and the first reserved display position 9Ad means that the middle decorative pattern 8C is arranged behind the variable display position 9Cd and the first reserved display position 9Ad although it overlaps with the middle variable display area that is the variable area of the middle decorative design 8C. Therefore, the variable display position 9Cd and the first reserved display position 9Ad are not blocked. However, when another effect image appears, if the other effect image is arranged behind the variable display position 9Cd and the first reserved display position 9Ad, the other effect image causes the variable display position 9Cd and the first reserved display position 9Ad. Although the display position 9Ad is not blocked, if another effect image is arranged in front of the variable display position 9Cd and the first reserved display position 9Ad, the other effect image will cause the variable display position 9Cd and the first reserved display position 9Ad to overlap. The reserved display position 9Ad is blocked.

Since the second reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad are arranged on the lower left side of the display screen 7a, the second reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad are the variation area of the left decorative pattern 8L. Although it overlaps with the left fluctuation display area, the left decorative pattern 8L is arranged behind the second reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, and the left decorative pattern 8L moves the second reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad. The reserved display position 9Ad is not blocked. However, when another effect image appears, if the other effect image is arranged behind the second to fourth reservation display positions 9Ad to 9Ad, the other effect image will cause the second to fourth reservation display positions 9Ad to 4 Although the reserved display position 9Ad is not obstructed, if other effect images are arranged in front of the second reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position is blocked by the other effect images. 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad are blocked.

In this way, among the first reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, the first reserved display position 9Ad overlaps the middle variable display area which is the variable area of the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the second reserved display position Since 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad overlap with the left fluctuation display area which is the fluctuation area of the left decorative pattern 8L, the first reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad A reservation display area as a special figure reservation is arranged across the middle fluctuation display area and the left fluctuation display area.

Here, the white spherical variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, the suspension icon 9A is displayed at the first suspension display position 9Ad to the third suspension display position 9Ad, and the fourth suspension display position 9Ad does not display the pending icon 9A. In other words, there are three pending icons that are stocked without being digested. In the following explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting hole 20 and the second starting hole 21 during the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative symbols.

Also, on the upper left side of the display screen 7a, facing the above-described sub-variation area KSZ (aligned on the same horizontal line), the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball to the first start port 20 , and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, are each displayed as the number of reservations (numbers). The vertical distance dimension of the reserved number display area HS and the vertical distance dimension of the sub-variation area KSZ have the same distance dimension, and the horizontal distance dimension of the reserved number display area HS and the horizontal distance dimension of the sub-variation area KSZ are have the same distance dimension. That is, the shape of the number-of-holds display area HS and the shape of the sub-variation area KSZ are the same.

Unlike the background image of the sub-variation area KSZ, the background image of the pending number display area HS is fixed to be colorless and transparent, and does not become opaque or change to another color. Since the holding number display area HS is arranged on the upper left side of the display screen 7a, although it overlaps with the left fluctuation display area which is the fluctuation area of the left decorative pattern 8L, the holding number display area HS is the closest side. , the left decorative pattern 8L is arranged behind the reserved number display area HS, the reserved number display area HS is not blocked by the left decorative pattern 8L, and other effect images appear. Also, another effect image is arranged behind the number-of-holds display area HS, and the number-of-holds display area HS is not blocked by other effect images.

The number of the first special reservation (number of reservations (number)) and the number of the second special reservation (number of reservations (number)) are different from the small decorative pattern font (for example, Gothic). , and is set to a different single color having a high contrast with respect to the single color of the background image of the number-of-holds display area HS, and is not changed to another color. The number of the first special figure reservation (number of reservations (number)) and the number of the second special figure reservations (number of reservations (number)) are placed in front of the background image of the number of reservations display area HS and are always opaque. , and does not disappear from the display screen 7a. Specifically, the number of the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball to the first start port 20 is indicated by blue numbers on the left side of the reservation number display area HS, the entry of the game ball to the second start port 21 The number of the second special figure reservation based on is always displayed with red numbers arranged in a state separated from each other on the right side of the reservation number display area HS. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of held balls, they can be difficult to discriminate among various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and are intuitively easy to understand. In other words, the visibility of the content displayed in the number-of-holds display area HS is not hindered by other effect images. In addition, the blue color that indicates the number of the first special figure reservation is a different color from the bright blue color of the even numbered patterns of numbers "2", numbers "4", numbers "6", and numbers "8" (the same color), but similar colors. The red color of the number of the second special figure reservation is a different color from the bright red of the odd number symbols excluding the number "7", the number "1", the number "3", the number "5", and the number "9". (Not the same color), but similar colors.

Here, to briefly explain the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), there is a difference in the expectation of winning during the lottery corresponding to the icon due to the difference in shape and color. represents. For example, among the four icons, a yellow (gold) star icon, a black sphere icon, a smiling sphere icon, and a white sphere icon, the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest probability of winning. , the black spherical icon has the second highest probability of winning, the smiley spherical icon has the third highest probability of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest probability of winning. The smile sphere icon is further set with a high expectation of winning in the order of, for example, blue→green→red→gold (yellow)→seven colors (rainbow (rich win)).

The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R all start fluctuating effects (fluctuation display) at the same timing, and as shown in FIG. 120(A), the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed in left fluctuation. A variable effect (variable display) is started from the upper side to the lower side of the area, the middle decorative pattern 8C is started to change the left variable display area from the upper side to the lower side, and the right decorative pattern 8R is started. starts a variable effect (variable display) from the upper side to the lower side of the left variable display area.

After that, as shown in FIG. 120(B), the left decorative pattern 8L, which is variably displayed in the left variable display area from the top to the bottom, is temporarily stopped at the center of the left variable display area with the number "1" and displayed in the vertical direction. After that, the right decorative pattern 8R that is variably displayed in the right fluctuating display area from the top to the bottom is temporarily stopped at the center of the right fluctuating display area with the number "1", and is displayed up and down. The left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R become the same pattern (here, number "1") to form a reach. At this time, the middle decorative pattern 8C continues to be variably displayed from the top to the bottom of the middle variability display area.

When the reach is formed and the effect button valid/invalid display effect A is started as shown in FIG. When it jumps into the display screen 7a, passes toward the right side of the display screen 7a, and jumps out to the outside of the right side of the display screen 7a, it jumps into the display screen 7a again from the outside of the upper side of the display screen 7a, and stops near the center of the display screen 7a. It becomes an explosive display mode. Although the above-described sub-variation region KSZ is provided on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, since the sub-variation region KSZ is arranged on the frontmost side, a part of the flash FL overlaps the sub-variation region KSZ. Even if it passes through, part of the flash FL will be covered with the sub-variation area KSZ.

When the flash FL stops near the center of the display screen 7a and explodes, as shown in FIG. is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a as an image that does not match)). Even if the player presses the production button 63 during the period in which the production button image BTN is displayed as an unclear image (out-of-focus image (out-of-focus image)), it is displayed on the display screen 7a. Nothing is reflected in the production. In other words, the period during which the effect button image BTN is displayed as an unclear image (out-of-focus image (out-of-focus image)) is a period during which the pressing operation of the effect button 63 is disabled. The button image BTN is displayed in an inactive display mode as an unclear image (out-of-focus image (out-of-focus image)). In addition, in the effect button valid/invalid display effect A, the display mode in which the effect button image BTN is displayed as an inactive display mode in which the effect button image BTN is an unclear image (out-of-focus image (out-of-focus image)) is referred to as the "operation invalid display mode. ”.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 120(E), the effect button image BTN in the operation disabled display mode is switched to a clear image (focused image (focused image)). When the player presses the production button 63 during the period in which the production button image BTN is displayed as a clear image (focused image (focused image)), the degree of expectation for the big win is set high in advance. A teammate character CRA may be displayed (appear) on the display screen 7a, suggesting development to a battle effect, and the player's pressing operation of the effect button 63 will not affect the effect displayed on the display screen 7a. may be reflected. In other words, the period during which the effect button image BTN is displayed as a clear image (focused image (focused image)) is a period during which the pressing operation of the effect button 63 is validated. The effect button image BTN is displayed as an active display mode in which a clear image (focused image (focused image)) is displayed. In the effect button valid/invalid display effect A, the display mode in which the effect button image BTN is displayed as an active display mode in which the effect button image BTN is a clear image (focused image (focused image)) is referred to as the "operation valid display mode. ”.

After that, the effect button image BTN is displayed while the operation effective display mode is maintained, and the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R disappear from the display screen 7a. At this time, although the middle decorative pattern 8C during the variable effect (variable display) also disappears from the display screen 7a, in the sub-variation area KSZ, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R correspond respectively to the small left decorative patterns. The variable performance (variable display) by the decorative pattern, the small middle decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern is continued without being temporarily stopped and displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 120(F), from the state where the second movable accessory 15 is stationary at the retracted position (home position) above the image display device 7, the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is displayed. , advances (moves) toward the center position (advance position) of the display screen 7a, and stops for a predetermined time (for example, about 5 seconds). When the second movable accessory 15 moves to the advanced position and stops, the second movable accessory 15 covers the effect button image BTN, and the lower part of the effect button image BTN can be visually recognized. Become. In other words, the second movable accessory 15 covers part of the effect button image BTN. Even if the second movable accessory 15 partially covers the effect button image BTN, the effect button image BTN continues to be displayed in the operation-effective display mode (that is, the second movable accessory 15 covers part of the effect button image BTN, the active display mode of the effect button image BTN is continued). Of course, even if the second movable accessory 15 partially covers the effect button image BTN, the effect button image BTN is still displayed in the operation-effective display mode. The pressing operation of the button 63 may affect the effect displayed on the display screen 7a.

After that, the second movable accessory 15 returns from the advanced position to the retracted position (home position) again, and as shown in FIG. continue. Of course, even when the second movable accessory 15 returns from the advanced position to the retracted position (home position), the effect button image BTN is still displayed in the operation effective display mode. The player's pressing operation of the effect button 63 may affect the effect displayed on the display screen 7a.

When the player presses the production button 63 while the production button image BTN is displayed in the operation valid display mode, the second movable accessory 15 moves from the advanced position to the retracted position ( When it returns to the home position), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed again in a temporarily stopped state, and the effect button image BTN disappears from the display screen 7a, and the variable effect (variable display) is in progress. The middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed again, and the effect button valid/invalid display effect A is completed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 120(H), when the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a (in the center of the medium fluctuation display area), the battle effect is performed as shown in FIG. 120(I). be started. In the battle production, the friendly character CRA appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, the enemy character CRB appears from the left side of the display screen 7a, and the friendly character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight in the center of the display screen 7a. It is a production with high expectations set in advance. In the battle effect, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R disappear again from the display screen 7a, and the variable display position 9Cd, the suspended display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, and the suspended icon 9A disappear from the display screen 7a. disappear. In the battle production, in the sub-variation area KSZ, a fluctuation production (variation display) is continued without a temporary stop display. In addition, in the reservation number display area HS, the first special figure reservation and the second special figure reservation are respectively displayed as the number of reservations (numbers).

When the ally character CRA is defeated and the enemy character CRB wins in the battle production, as shown in FIG. 8R becomes the number "1" and is stopped (confirmed display) at the same timing, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are not aligned with the same pattern (here, the number "1"). , will be out of order. At this time, the variable display position 9Cd, the pending display position 9Ad and the pending icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the variable icon 9C is not displayed due to the end of the variable. Subsequently, the suspended icon 9A displayed at the first suspended display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, and the variation effect is the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R. (variation display) is started.

In the battle production, when the ally character CRA wins and the enemy character CRB loses, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed with the same pattern, resulting in a big win, and then a big win game. (jackpot production) is started. When the big win is confirmed, the change display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad and the hold icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the change icon 9C is not displayed due to the end of the change.

Also, in FIG. 120(H), the teammate character CRA was displayed in the center of the display screen 7a (the center of the medium fluctuation display area), but the teammate character CRA was displayed in the center of the display screen 7a (the center of the medium fluctuation display area). When not displayed, as shown in FIG. 120(J), the left decorative pattern 8L is the number "1", the middle decorative pattern 8C is the number "2", and the right decorative pattern 8R is the number "1". The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are not aligned with the same pattern (here, the number "1"), and as a result of winning and dropping, a failure is displayed. It will happen. In other words, when the ally character CRA is not displayed in the center of the display screen 7a (the center of the medium fluctuation display area) in FIG. It's like

120(E) to (G), the effect button image BTN was a clear image (focused image (focused image)), but at this time, the effect button image BTN is clear. A state in which color light emission (for example, white light emission) is performed may be employed. The expected degree of winning may be suggested in the order of white->blue->red->yellow as bright-color light emission. By doing so, it is possible to increase the variations of the effect by the bright color light emission of the effect button image BTN.

[Effect button valid/invalid display effect B]
Next, the effect button valid/invalid display effect B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 121 is a diagram for explaining the effect button valid/invalid display effect B. FIG. The effect button valid/invalid display effect B is performed during the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative symbols.

First, as shown in FIG. 121(A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, vertically elongated rectangular patterns are displayed as variable display areas of three decorative patterns (also referred to as "decorative pattern variable regions"). Three regions (that is, regions obtained by dividing the display screen 7a into three equal rows) are provided, a left decorative pattern 8L of a stereoscopic image, a middle decorative pattern 8C of a stereoscopic image, and a right decorative pattern 8R of a stereoscopic image. is a display mode in which reels are rotated from the upper side of each variable display area toward the lower side of the display screen 7a. be.

Specifically, the variable performance (variable display) of the decorative symbols is started in a display mode in which the left decorative symbols 8L are rotated from the upper side of the left variable display area toward the lower side of the left variable display area 8, and the middle The decorative pattern 8C is displayed in a display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side of the middle fluctuation display area to the lower side of the middle fluctuation display area, and the decorative pattern fluctuation performance (variation display) is started, and the right decorative pattern 8R is right-fluctuation display. A variable effect (variable display) of decorative symbols is started in a display mode in which reels are rotated from the upper side of the area toward the lower side of the right variable display area. The vertical distance of the left fluctuation display area, the vertical distance of the middle fluctuation display area, and the vertical distance of the right fluctuation display area are the same vertical distance, and the horizontal distance of the left fluctuation display area and the middle fluctuation display area are the same. , and the horizontal distance dimension of the right variable display area are the same horizontal distance dimension.

In the variable production (variable display) of each decorative pattern, all are number “1” → number “2” → number “3” → number “4” → number “5” → number “6” → number “7” → The reels are rotated in the order of number "8"→number "9"→number "1"→number "2"→ .

Among the numbers "1" to "9", the number "1", the number "3", the number "5", and the number "9", which are odd numbers excluding the number "7", have bright red, and even numbers The number "2", the number "4", the number "6", and the number "8", which are the symbols of , have a bright blue color, and the number "7" has a yellow (gold color). In addition, the sizes of the numbers "1" to "9" each have a vertical distance dimension that is approximately one third of the vertical distance dimension of the left fluctuation display area (middle fluctuation display area, right fluctuation display area). Each of them has a normal size in which the horizontal distance dimension is about half the horizontal distance dimension of the left variable display area (middle variable display area, right variable display area). The numbers "1" to "9" are specially created special typefaces (individually created It is formed by a special typeface).

When the variable performance (variable display) of the decorative patterns is started, the decorative patterns stopped and displayed change from a low speed to a semi-transparent state while gradually increasing the speed, and become a display mode in which the display changes at a high speed. . As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed temporarily and then stopped). In addition, in the state of the temporary stop display, the decorative pattern is displayed in a mode of slowly moving up and down in small steps. A plurality of types of background images are prepared, and the background images are switched as appropriate.

In addition, on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, a small left decorative pattern, a small medium decorative pattern, and a small right decorative pattern corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed ( A sub-variation area KSZ having a horizontally long rectangular shape for variable display is provided. The background image of the sub-variation area KSZ is fixed to a single color (for example, a dark color (dark color system) or a color close to dark (for example, dark green), and does not change to another color. Sub-variation area KSZ , is arranged on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, so although it overlaps with the right fluctuation display area which is the fluctuation area of the right decorative pattern 8R, the sub-variation area KSZ is arranged so as to be on the frontmost side. As a result, the right decorative design 8R is arranged behind the sub-variation area KSZ, and the sub-variation area KSZ is not blocked by the right decorative design 8R. The sub-variation area KSZ is placed behind the variation area KSZ and is not blocked by other effect images.In other words, the visibility of the content displayed in the sub-variation area KSZ is hindered by the right decorative pattern 8R and other effect images. It is designed not to be

The small-sized decorative designs are numeric designs, and are different from the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R (e.g., Mincho). It is unified with other single colors (for example, bright colors (yellow and white)) that have a high contrast with respect to the single color, and does not change to other colors. The small decorative pattern is arranged on the front side of the background image of the sub-variation area KSZ and is always in an opaque state, and even when the variation starts, it does not become translucent and disappears from the display screen 7a. There is no

Unlike the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, the small-sized decorative patterns do not have a variable effect (variable display) in the display mode in which the reels are rotated, and have the same size at the same display position. A variable effect (variable display) is performed by a display mode in which numerical patterns appear one after another in an opaque state.

When the variation performance (variation display) by the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is started, along with this, in the sub-variation area KSZ, the small left decorative pattern, the small medium decorative pattern, and the small is started, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed. All the small right decorative patterns are also stopped and displayed.

A state in which one or more of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed in the same pattern to reach is formed), the small left decorative pattern, the small middle decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern are all in a state where the variable effect (variable display) is continued. Specifically, even if the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small left decorative pattern continues to be varied (variable display), and even if the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small right decorative pattern is displayed. is continued, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, the small left decorative pattern, the small medium decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern are displayed. All the symbols are also stopped and displayed.

When the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and they are not aligned with the same pattern and become misaligned, the small left decorative pattern, the small left decorative pattern, and the small left decorative pattern are displayed. The middle decorative pattern and the small right decorative pattern may be the same patterns as the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R, or may be completely different patterns. Specifically, for example, when the left decorative design 8L is displayed as the number "1", the middle decorative design 8C as the number "2", and the right decorative design 8R as the number "3", the small left decorative design is displayed. The number "1", the small medium decorative pattern may be displayed as the number "2", the small right decorative pattern may be displayed as the number "3", or the small left decorative pattern may be displayed as the number "5" and the small medium decoration. The symbol may be stopped at the number "6" and the small right decorative symbol at the number "7".

On the other hand, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed and all the same patterns win, the small left decorative pattern, The small-sized middle decorative pattern and the small-sized right decorative pattern are arranged in the same patterns as the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R.

The change icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R, which are currently changing as the digestion of the first special figure reservation, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. is displayed (placed) at the variable display position 9Cd (on the rectangular image (pedestal image)). In the region of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as the first special figure hold. In this pending display area, pending icons 9A can be displayed (can be placed) at four pending display positions 9Ad (on rectangular images (pedestal images)), and up to four pending icons 9A can be stocked. can be done. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, toward the left side of the display screen 7a from a position near the variable display position 9Cd. They are linearly arranged and displayed along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the reserved display position 9Ad.

Since the variable display position 9Cd is arranged in the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a and the first reserved display position 9Ad is arranged on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, the variable display position 9Cd and the first reserved display position 9Ad means that the middle decorative pattern 8C is arranged behind the variable display position 9Cd and the first reserved display position 9Ad although it overlaps with the middle variable display area that is the variable area of the middle decorative design 8C. Therefore, the variable display position 9Cd and the first reserved display position 9Ad are not blocked. However, when another effect image appears, if the other effect image is arranged behind the variable display position 9Cd and the first reserved display position 9Ad, the other effect image causes the variable display position 9Cd and the first reserved display position 9Ad. Although the display position 9Ad is not blocked, if another effect image is arranged in front of the variable display position 9Cd and the first reserved display position 9Ad, the other effect image will cause the variable display position 9Cd and the first reserved display position 9Ad to overlap. The reserved display position 9Ad is blocked.

Since the second reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad are arranged on the lower left side of the display screen 7a, the second reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad are the variation area of the left decorative pattern 8L. Although it overlaps with the left fluctuation display area, the left decorative pattern 8L is arranged behind the second reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, and the left decorative pattern 8L moves the second reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad. The reserved display position 9Ad is not blocked. However, when another effect image appears, if the other effect image is arranged behind the second to fourth reservation display positions 9Ad to 9Ad, the other effect image will cause the second to fourth reservation display positions 9Ad to 4 Although the reserved display position 9Ad is not obstructed, if other effect images are arranged in front of the second reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position is blocked by the other effect images. 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad are blocked.

In this way, among the first reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, the first reserved display position 9Ad overlaps the middle variable display area which is the variable area of the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the second reserved display position Since 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad overlap with the left fluctuation display area which is the fluctuation area of the left decorative pattern 8L, the first reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad A reservation display area as a special figure reservation is arranged across the middle fluctuation display area and the left fluctuation display area.

Here, the white spherical variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, the suspension icon 9A is displayed at the first suspension display position 9Ad to the third suspension display position 9Ad, and the fourth suspension display position 9Ad does not display the pending icon 9A. In other words, there are three pending icons that are stocked without being digested. In the following explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting hole 20 and the second starting hole 21 during the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative symbols.

Also, on the upper left side of the display screen 7a, facing the above-described sub-variation area KSZ (aligned on the same horizontal line), the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball to the first start port 20 , and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, are each displayed as the number of reservations (numbers). The vertical distance dimension of the reserved number display area HS and the vertical distance dimension of the sub-variation area KSZ have the same distance dimension, and the horizontal distance dimension of the reserved number display area HS and the horizontal distance dimension of the sub-variation area KSZ are have the same distance dimension. That is, the shape of the number-of-holds display area HS and the shape of the sub-variation area KSZ are the same.

Unlike the background image of the sub-variation area KSZ, the background image of the pending number display area HS is fixed to be colorless and transparent, and does not become opaque or change to another color. Since the holding number display area HS is arranged on the upper left side of the display screen 7a, although it overlaps with the left fluctuation display area which is the fluctuation area of the left decorative pattern 8L, the holding number display area HS is the closest side. , the left decorative pattern 8L is arranged behind the reserved number display area HS, the reserved number display area HS is not blocked by the left decorative pattern 8L, and other effect images appear. Also, another effect image is arranged behind the number-of-holds display area HS, and the number-of-holds display area HS is not blocked by other effect images.

The number of the first special reservation (number of reservations (number)) and the number of the second special reservation (number of reservations (number)) are different from the small decorative pattern font (for example, Gothic). , and is set to a different single color having a high contrast with respect to the single color of the background image of the number-of-holds display area HS, and is not changed to another color. The number of the first special figure reservation (number of reservations (number)) and the number of the second special figure reservations (number of reservations (number)) are placed in front of the background image of the number of reservations display area HS and are always opaque. , and does not disappear from the display screen 7a. Specifically, the number of the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball to the first start port 20 is indicated by blue numbers on the left side of the reservation number display area HS, the entry of the game ball to the second start port 21 The number of the second special figure reservation based on is always displayed with red numbers arranged in a state separated from each other on the right side of the reservation number display area HS. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of held balls, they can be difficult to discriminate among various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and are intuitively easy to understand. In other words, the visibility of the content displayed in the number-of-holds display area HS is not hindered by other effect images. In addition, the blue color that indicates the number of the first special figure reservation is a different color from the bright blue color of the even numbered patterns of numbers "2", numbers "4", numbers "6", and numbers "8" (the same color), but similar colors. The red color of the number of the second special figure reservation is a different color from the bright red color of the odd number patterns excluding the number "7", the number "1", the number "3", the number "5", and the number "9". (Not the same color), but similar colors.

Here, to briefly explain the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), there is a difference in the expectation of winning during the lottery corresponding to the icon due to the difference in shape and color. represents. For example, among the four icons, a yellow (gold) star icon, a black sphere icon, a smiling sphere icon, and a white sphere icon, the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest probability of winning. , the black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. The smile sphere icon is further set with a high degree of expectation of winning in the order of, for example, blue→green→red→gold (yellow)→seven colors (rainbow (rich win)).

The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R all start fluctuating production (fluctuation display) at the same timing, and as shown in FIG. A variable effect (variable display) is started from the upper side to the lower side of the area, the middle decorative pattern 8C is started to change the left variable display area from the upper side to the lower side, and the right decorative pattern 8R is started. starts a variable effect (variable display) from the upper side to the lower side of the left variable display area.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 121(B), the white spherical variation icon 9C changes to a yellow (gold) star-shaped variation icon 9C, and the left variation display area is variably displayed from the top to the bottom. The left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed at the center of the left variable display area with the number "5", and is displayed in a manner of slowly moving up and down in small steps. The right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped at the center of the right fluctuating display area with the number "5", and is displayed in a manner of slowly moving up and down in small steps. Here, the number is "5"), and a reach is formed. At this time, the middle decorative pattern 8C continues to be variably displayed from the top to the bottom of the middle variability display area.

When the reach is formed and the effect button valid/invalid display effect B is started as shown in FIG. It is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a in the display mode. At this time, the production button image BTN is arranged and displayed on the front side of the middle decorative pattern 8C, and further, a repeated hit image MG for telling the player that the production button 63 is hit repeatedly is arranged on the front side of the middle decorative pattern 8C. is displayed on the upper right side of the effect button image BTN. When the player presses the production button 63 during the period in which the production button image BTN is displayed as the bright-colored active display mode, it suggests the development of a battle production in which the degree of expectation for a big win is set high in advance. The teammate character CRA may be displayed (appear) on the display screen 7a, and the effect displayed on the display screen 7a may be affected by the pressing operation of the effect button 63 by the player. In other words, the period during which the effect button image BTN is displayed as the active display mode emitting bright light is the period during which the pressing operation of the effect button 63 is validated. In addition, in the effect button valid/invalid display effect B, the display mode in which the effect button image BTN is displayed as an active display mode in which the effect button image BTN emits bright light is referred to as an "operation valid display mode".

After that, as shown in FIG. 121(D), the effect button image BTN in the operation-effective display mode is switched to an inactive display mode in which it emits dark light (for example, dark gray). Even if the player presses the production button 63 during the period when the production button image BTN is displayed as the inactive display mode emitting dark light, nothing is reflected in the production displayed on the display screen 7a. In other words, the period during which the effect button image BTN is displayed as the inactive display mode emitting dark light is a period during which the pressing operation of the effect button 63 is disabled. In the effect button valid/invalid display effect B, the display mode in which the effect button image BTN emits dark light in an inactive display mode is referred to as an "operation invalid display mode".

After that, the production button image BTN is displayed while the operation disabled display mode remains, and the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R disappear from the display screen 7a. At this time, although the middle decorative pattern 8C during the variable effect (variable display) also disappears from the display screen 7a, in the sub-variable area KSZ, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R correspond respectively to the small left decorative patterns. The variable performance (variable display) by the decorative pattern, the small middle decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern is continued without being temporarily stopped and displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 121(E), an image in which the background image has seven colors (a so-called “rainbow image”) is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the second movable accessory 15 retreats above the image display device 7. From a stationary position (home position), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 advances (moves) toward the front (front) of the display screen 7a and toward the center position (advancement position) of the display screen 7a for a predetermined time (for example, about 5 seconds). When the second movable accessory 15 moves to the advanced position and stops, the second movable accessory 15 covers the effect button image BTN, and the lower part of the effect button image BTN can be visually recognized. Become. In other words, the second movable accessory 15 covers part of the effect button image BTN. Even if the second movable accessory 15 partially covers the effect button image BTN, the effect button image BTN continues to be displayed in the operation disabled display mode. Of course, even if the second movable accessory 15 partially covers the effect button image BTN, the effect button image BTN is still displayed in the operation disabled display mode. The effect displayed on the display screen 7a by the pressing operation of the button 63 is not reflected at all. The rainbow image is a special background image that notifies (suggests) the player that the big win is confirmed.

After that, the second movable accessory 15 returns from the advanced position to the retracted position (home position), and as shown in FIG. continue. Of course, even when the second movable accessory 15 returns from the advanced position to the retracted position (home position), the effect button image BTN is still displayed in the disabled operation display mode. The pressing operation of the performance button 63 by the player has no effect on the performance displayed on the display screen 7a.

When the player presses the production button 63 while the production button image BTN is displayed in the operation valid display mode, the second movable accessory 15 moves from the advanced position to the retracted position ( When it returns to the home position), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed again in a state of temporary stop display, and the effect button image BTN disappears from the display screen 7a, and the variable effect (variable display) is in progress. The middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed again, and the effect button valid/invalid display effect B ends.

After that, as shown in FIG. 121(G), when the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a (in the center of the medium fluctuation display area), the battle effect is performed as shown in FIG. 121(H). be started. In the battle production, the friendly character CRA appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, the enemy character CRB appears from the left side of the display screen 7a, and the friendly character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight in the center of the display screen 7a. It is a production with high expectations set in advance. In the battle effect, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R disappear again from the display screen 7a, and the variable display position 9Cd, the suspended display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, and the suspended icon 9A disappear from the display screen 7a. disappear. In the battle production, in the sub-variation area KSZ, a fluctuation production (variation display) is continued without a temporary stop display. In addition, in the reservation number display area HS, the first special figure reservation and the second special figure reservation are respectively displayed as the number of reservations (numbers).

In the battle production, as shown in FIG. 121(I), when the winged ally character CRA is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a, the ally character CRA wins and the enemy character CRB is defeated. ), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed with the same pattern (here, the number "5"), and after that, a big win game (big win performance) is performed. be started. When the big win is confirmed, the change display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad and the hold icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the change icon 9C is not displayed due to the end of the change. Although the above-described sub-variation area KSZ is provided on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, part of the wings of the winged ally character CRA in FIG. 121(I) overlaps the sub-variation area KSZ. Even so, since the sub-variation area KSZ is arranged on the foremost side, part of the wings of the winged human form ally character CRA is covered with the sub-variation area KSZ. In addition, although the above-described pending number display area HS is provided on the upper left side of the display screen 7a, even if the winged ally character CRA moves and a part of the wing overlaps the pending number display area HS, , since the pending number display area HS is arranged on the frontmost side, part of the wings of the winged ally character CRA is covered with the pending number display area HS.

In the battle production, when the ally character CRA is defeated and the enemy character CRB wins, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped (confirmed) displayed at the same timing, and the left decorative pattern is displayed. 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are not aligned with the same pattern (here, the number "5"), resulting in a misalignment. At this time, the variable display position 9Cd, the pending display position 9Ad and the pending icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the variable icon 9C is not displayed due to the end of the variable. Subsequently, the suspended icon 9A displayed at the first suspended display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R fluctuate effect. (variation display) is started.

Further, in FIG. 121(E), the rainbow background image is not displayed as the background image of the display screen 7a, and further, in FIG. If not, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R are stopped (confirmed display) at the same timing, and the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R are the same design. (Here, the number "5") is not aligned, and a loss is displayed as a win-lose result. In other words, in FIG. 121(E), the rainbow background image is not displayed as the background image of the display screen 7a. If it is not displayed, it will not develop into a battle effect, and will be displayed as a win-lose result.

In FIG. 121(C), the effect button image BTN is white as bright light emission, but the degree of expectation for winning may be suggested in the order of white→blue→red→yellow. By doing so, it is possible to increase the variations of the effect by the bright color light emission of the effect button image BTN.

[Effect button valid/invalid display effect C]
Next, the effect button valid/invalid display effect C will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 122 is a diagram for explaining the effect button valid/invalid display effect C. FIG. The effect button valid/invalid display effect C is performed based on the change of the pending icon by the look-ahead effect.

First, as shown in FIG. 122(A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, vertically elongated rectangular patterns are displayed as variable display areas (also referred to as "decorative design variable areas") of three decorative patterns (not shown). Three regions (that is, regions in which the display screen 7a is equally divided into three columns) are provided, the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image. is a display mode in which reels are rotated from the upper side of each variable display area toward the lower side of the display screen 7a. be.

Specifically, the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative symbols is started in a display mode in which the left decorative symbols 8L are rotated from the upper side of the left variable display area toward the lower side of the left variable display area 8, and the middle A decorative design variation performance (variation display) is started in a display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side of the middle variation display area to the lower side of the middle variation display area, and the right decorative design 8R is displayed in the right variation. A variable effect (variable display) of decorative symbols is started in a display mode in which reels are rotated from the upper side of the area toward the lower side of the right variable display area. The vertical distance of the left fluctuation display area, the vertical distance of the middle fluctuation display area, and the vertical distance of the right fluctuation display area are the same vertical distance, and the horizontal distance of the left fluctuation display area and the middle fluctuation display area are the same. , and the horizontal distance dimension of the right variable display area are the same horizontal distance dimension.

In the variable production (variable display) of each decorative pattern, all are number “1” → number “2” → number “3” → number “4” → number “5” → number “6” → number “7” → The reels are rotated in the order of number "8"→number "9"→number "1"→number "2"→ .

Among the numbers "1" to "9", the number "1", the number "3", the number "5", and the number "9", which are odd numbers excluding the number "7", have bright red, and even numbers The number "2", the number "4", the number "6", and the number "8", which are the symbols of , have a bright blue color, and the number "7" has a yellow (gold color). In addition, the sizes of the numbers "1" to "9" each have a vertical distance dimension that is approximately one third of the vertical distance dimension of the left fluctuation display area (middle fluctuation display area, right fluctuation display area). Each of them has a normal size in which the horizontal distance dimension is about half the horizontal distance dimension of the left variable display area (middle variable display area, right variable display area). The numbers "1" to "9" are specially created special typefaces (individually created It is formed by a special typeface).

When the variable performance (variable display) of the decorative patterns is started, the decorative patterns stopped and displayed change from a low speed to a semi-transparent state while gradually increasing the speed, and become a display mode in which the display changes at a high speed. . As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed temporarily and then stopped). In addition, in the state of the temporary stop display, the decorative pattern is displayed in a mode of slowly moving up and down in small steps. A plurality of types of background images are prepared, and the background images are switched as appropriate.

In addition, on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, a small left decorative pattern, a small medium decorative pattern, and a small right decorative pattern corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed ( A sub-variation area KSZ having a horizontally long rectangular shape for variable display is provided. The background image of the sub-variation area KSZ is fixed to a single color (for example, a dark color (dark color system) or a color close to dark (for example, dark green), and does not change to another color. Sub-variation area KSZ is arranged on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, so although it overlaps with the right fluctuation display area which is the fluctuation area of the right decorative pattern 8R, it is arranged so that the sub-variation area KSZ is on the frontmost side. As a result, the right decorative pattern 8R is arranged behind the sub-variation area KSZ, and the sub-variation area KSZ is not blocked by the right decorative pattern 8R. The sub-variation area KSZ is placed behind the variation area KSZ and is not blocked by other effect images.In other words, the visibility of the content displayed in the sub-variation area KSZ is hindered by the right decorative pattern 8R or other effect images. It is designed not to be

The small decorative designs are numeric designs, and are different from the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R (e.g., Mincho). It is unified with other single colors (for example, bright colors (yellow and white)) that have a high contrast with respect to the single color, and does not change to other colors. The small decorative pattern is arranged on the front side of the background image of the sub-variation area KSZ and is always in an opaque state, and even when the variation starts, it does not become translucent and disappears from the display screen 7a. There is no

Unlike the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, the small-sized decorative patterns do not have a variable effect (variable display) in the display mode in which the reels are rotated, and have the same size at the same display position. A variable effect (variable display) is performed by a display mode in which numerical patterns appear one after another in an opaque state.

When the variation performance (variation display) by the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is started, along with this, in the sub-variation area KSZ, the small left decorative pattern, the small medium decorative pattern, and the small is started, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed. All the small right decorative patterns are also stopped and displayed.

A state in which one or more of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed in the same pattern to reach is formed), the small left decorative pattern, the small middle decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern are all in a state where the variable effect (variable display) is continued. More specifically, even if the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small left decorative pattern is continuously displayed (variably displayed), and even if the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small right decorative pattern is displayed. is continued, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, the small left decorative pattern, the small medium decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern are displayed. All the symbols are also stopped and displayed.

When the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed and they are not aligned with the same pattern and are out of alignment, the small left decorative pattern and the small left decorative pattern are displayed. The middle decorative pattern and the small right decorative pattern may be the same patterns as the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R, or may be completely different patterns. Specifically, for example, when the left decorative design 8L is displayed as the number "1", the middle decorative design 8C as the number "2", and the right decorative design 8R as the number "3", the small left decorative design is displayed. The number "1", the small middle decorative pattern is the number "2", the small right decorative pattern is the number "3", the small left decorative pattern is the number "5", and the small medium decoration is displayed. The symbol may be stopped at the number "6" and the small right decorative symbol at the number "7".

On the other hand, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and all the same patterns win, the small left decorative pattern, The small-sized middle decorative pattern and the small-sized right decorative pattern are arranged in the same patterns as the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R.

The change icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, which are currently fluctuating as the completion of the first special figure reservation, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. is displayed (placed) at the variable display position 9Cd (on the rectangular image (pedestal image)). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as the first special figure hold. In this pending display area, pending icons 9A can be displayed (can be placed) at four pending display positions 9Ad (on rectangular images (pedestal images)), and up to four pending icons 9A can be stocked. is now possible. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, toward the left side of the display screen 7a from a position near the variable display position 9Cd. They are linearly arranged and displayed along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the reserved display position 9Ad.

Since the variable display position 9Cd is arranged in the lower center of the display screen 7a and the first reserved display position 9Ad is arranged on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, the variable display position 9Cd and the first reserved display position 9Ad means that the middle decorative pattern 8C is arranged behind the variable display position 9Cd and the first reserved display position 9Ad although it overlaps with the middle variable display area that is the variable area of the middle decorative design 8C. Therefore, the variable display position 9Cd and the first reserved display position 9Ad are not blocked. However, when another effect image appears, if the other effect image is arranged behind the variable display position 9Cd and the first reserved display position 9Ad, the other effect image causes the variable display position 9Cd and the first reserved display position 9Ad. Although the display position 9Ad is not blocked, if another effect image is arranged in front of the variable display position 9Cd and the first reserved display position 9Ad, the other effect image will cause the variable display position 9Cd and the first The reserved display position 9Ad is blocked.

Since the second reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad are arranged on the lower left side of the display screen 7a, the second reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad are the variation area of the left decorative pattern 8L. Although it overlaps with the left fluctuation display area, the left decorative pattern 8L is arranged behind the second reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, and the left decorative pattern 8L moves the second reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad. The reserved display position 9Ad is not blocked. However, when another effect image appears, if the other effect image is arranged behind the second to fourth reservation display positions 9Ad to 9Ad, the other effect image will cause the second to fourth reservation display positions 9Ad to 4 Although the reserved display position 9Ad is not obstructed, if other effect images are arranged in front of the second reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position is blocked by the other effect images. 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad are blocked.

In this way, among the first reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, the first reserved display position 9Ad overlaps the middle variable display area which is the variable area of the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the second reserved display position Since 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad overlap with the left fluctuation display area which is the fluctuation area of the left decorative pattern 8L, the first reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad A reservation display area as a special figure reservation is arranged across the middle fluctuation display area and the left fluctuation display area.

Here, the white spherical variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, the suspension icon 9A is displayed at the first suspension display position 9Ad to the third suspension display position 9Ad, and the fourth suspension display position 9Ad does not display the pending icon 9A. In other words, there are three pending icons that are stocked without being digested. In the following explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting hole 20 and the second starting hole 21 during the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative symbols.

Also, on the upper left side of the display screen 7a, facing the above-described sub-variation area KSZ (aligned on the same horizontal line), the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball to the first start port 20 , and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, are each displayed as the number of reservations (numbers). The vertical distance dimension of the reserved number display area HS and the vertical distance dimension of the sub-variation area KSZ have the same distance dimension, and the horizontal distance dimension of the reserved number display area HS and the horizontal distance dimension of the sub-variation area KSZ are have the same distance dimension. That is, the shape of the number-of-holds display area HS and the shape of the sub-variation area KSZ are the same.

Unlike the background image of the sub-variation area KSZ, the background image of the pending number display area HS is fixed to be colorless and transparent, and does not become opaque or change to another color. Since the holding number display area HS is arranged on the upper left side of the display screen 7a, although it overlaps with the left fluctuation display area which is the fluctuation area of the left decorative pattern 8L, the holding number display area HS is the closest side. , the left decorative pattern 8L is arranged behind the reserved number display area HS, the reserved number display area HS is not blocked by the left decorative pattern 8L, and other effect images appear. Also, another effect image is arranged behind the number-of-holds display area HS, and the number-of-holds display area HS is not blocked by other effect images.

The number of the first special reservation (number of reservations (number)) and the number of the second special reservation (number of reservations (number)) are different from the small decorative pattern font (for example, Gothic). , and is set to a different single color having a high contrast with respect to the single color of the background image of the number-of-holds display area HS, and is not changed to another color. The number of the first special figure reservation (number of reservations (number)) and the number of the second special figure reservations (number of reservations (number)) are placed in front of the background image of the number of reservations display area HS and are always opaque. , and does not disappear from the display screen 7a. Specifically, the number of the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball to the first start port 20 is indicated by blue numbers on the left side of the reservation number display area HS, the entry of the game ball to the second start port 21 The number of the second special figure reservation based on is always displayed with red numbers arranged in a state separated from each other on the right side of the reservation number display area HS. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of held balls, they can be difficult to discriminate among various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and are intuitively easy to understand. In other words, the visibility of the content displayed in the number-of-holds display area HS is not hindered by other effect images. In addition, the blue color that indicates the number of the first special figure reservation is a different color from the bright blue color of the even numbered patterns of numbers "2", numbers "4", numbers "6", and numbers "8" (the same color), but similar colors. The red color of the number of the second special figure reservation is a different color from the bright red of the odd number symbols excluding the number "7", the number "1", the number "3", the number "5", and the number "9". (Not the same color), but similar colors.

Here, to briefly explain the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), there is a difference in the expectation of winning during the lottery corresponding to the icon due to the difference in shape and color. represents. For example, among the four icons, a yellow (gold) star icon, a black sphere icon, a smiling sphere icon, and a white sphere icon, the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest probability of winning. , the black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. The smile sphere icon is further set with a high degree of expectation of winning in the order of, for example, blue→green→red→gold (yellow)→seven colors (rainbow (rich win)).

The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R all start fluctuating production (fluctuation display) at the same timing, and as shown in FIG. A variable effect (variable display) is started from the upper side to the lower side of the area, the middle decorative pattern 8C is started to change the left variable display area from the upper side to the lower side, and the right decorative pattern 8R is started. starts a variable effect (variable display) from the upper side to the lower side of the left variable display area.

After that, as shown in FIG. 122(B), the white spherical hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad changes to a yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon 9A, and the effect button valid/invalid display effect When C is started, an effect button image BTN imitating the effect button 63 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a in an inactive display mode emitting dark light (for example, dark gray). In other words, based on the fact that the white spherical pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad has changed to the yellow (gold) star-shaped pending icon 9A by the look-ahead effect, the effect button valid/invalid display effect C is started. Although the effect button image BTN displayed in this inactive display mode is arranged behind the middle decorative pattern 8C, the effect button image BTN is visually recognized through the translucent middle decorative pattern 8C during the variable effect (variable display). It is in a state where it can be done. The effect button 63 can display (appear) on the display screen 7a a teammate character CRA suggesting development to a battle effect in which the degree of expectation for a big win is set high in advance. Even if the player presses the production button 63 during the period when the production button image BTN is displayed as the inactive display mode emitting dark light, nothing is reflected in the production displayed on the display screen 7a. In other words, the period during which the effect button image BTN is displayed as the inactive display mode emitting dark light is a period during which the pressing operation of the effect button 63 is disabled. In the effect button valid/invalid display effect C, the display mode in which the effect button image BTN emits dark light in an inactive display mode is referred to as an "operation invalid display mode".

After that, as shown in FIG. 122(C), the left decorative pattern 8L, which is variably displayed in the left variable display area from the top to the bottom, is temporarily stopped at the center of the left variable display area with the number "1" and displayed in the vertical direction. After that, the right decorative pattern 8R, which is variably displayed in the right variable display area from the top to the bottom, is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "3" in the center of the right variable display area. After that, the medium decorative pattern 8C, which is variably displayed from the upper side to the lower side of the medium fluctuation display area, is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "2" in the center of the medium fluctuation display area. Then, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed (confirmed display) all at once at the same timing, and the same patterns are not aligned, resulting in a loss. At this time, the change icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a due to the end of the change. Also here, the effect button image BTN continues to be displayed in the operation disabled display mode.

After that, the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C (At this time, the pending icon 9A displayed at the third pending display position 9Ad becomes It moves to the second holding position 9Ad, and the holding icon 9A displayed at the second holding display position 9Ad moves to the first holding display position 9Ad.) As shown in FIG. , When the variable effect (variable display) by the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R is started, the effect button image BTN that imitates the effect button 63 emits a bright color (for example, emits white light) on the display screen in an active display mode. It is displayed in the center of 7a. When the player presses the production button 63 during the period in which the production button image BTN is displayed as the bright-colored active display mode, it suggests the development of a battle production in which the degree of expectation for a big win is set high in advance. The teammate character CRA may be displayed (appear) on the display screen 7a, and the effect displayed on the display screen 7a may be affected by the pressing operation of the effect button 63 by the player. In other words, the period during which the effect button image BTN is displayed as the active display mode emitting bright light is the period during which the pressing operation of the effect button 63 is validated. In the effect button valid/invalid display effect C, the display mode in which the effect button image BTN emits light in an active display mode is referred to as an "operation valid display mode".

Even if the effect button image BTN is switched from the operation disabled display mode to the operation enabled display mode, the effect button image BTN continues to be arranged behind the middle decorative pattern 8C, but the variable effect (variable display ), the effect button image BTN can be visually recognized through the translucent middle decorative pattern 8C.

After that, the left decorative pattern 8L, which is variably displayed in the left variable display area from the upper side to the lower side, is temporarily stopped at the center of the left variable display area with the number "7", and the display mode is such that it slowly moves up and down in small steps. After that, the right decorative pattern 8R, which is variably displayed in the right variable display area from the top to the bottom, is temporarily stopped at the center of the right variable display area with the number "7", and the display mode is such that it slowly moves up and down. , the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R become the same pattern (number "7" in this case) to form a reach. At this time, the middle decorative pattern 8C continues to be variably displayed from the top to the bottom of the middle variability display area. Also here, the effect button image BTN continues to be displayed in the operation effective display mode.

When reach is formed, as shown in FIG. 122(E), the effect button image BTN is arranged and displayed on the front side of the middle decorative pattern 8C, and furthermore, the player is informed that the effect button 63 is to be hit repeatedly. A repeated hitting image MG is arranged on the front side of the middle decorative pattern 8C and displayed on the upper right side of the effect button image BTN.

After that, as shown in FIG. 122(F), the effect button image BTN in the operation valid display mode is switched again to the operation invalid display mode. After that, the production button image BTN is displayed while the operation disabled display mode remains, and the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R disappear from the display screen 7a. At this time, although the middle decorative pattern 8C during the variable effect (variable display) also disappears from the display screen 7a, in the sub-variable area KSZ, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R correspond respectively to the small left decorative patterns. The variable performance (variable display) by the decorative pattern, the small middle decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern is continued without being temporarily stopped and displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 122(G), an image in which the background image has seven colors (a so-called “rainbow image”) is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the second movable accessory 15 retreats above the image display device 7. It advances (moves) from a stationary state at a position (home position) toward the center position (advance position) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 on the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a for a predetermined time (for example, about 5 seconds). When the second movable accessory 15 moves to the advanced position and stops, the second movable accessory 15 covers the effect button image BTN, and the lower part of the effect button image BTN can be visually recognized. Become. In other words, the second movable accessory 15 covers part of the effect button image BTN. Even if the second movable accessory 15 partially covers the effect button image BTN, the effect button image BTN continues to be displayed in the operation disabled display mode. Of course, even if the second movable accessory 15 partially covers the effect button image BTN, the effect button image BTN is still displayed in the operation disabled display mode. The effect displayed on the display screen 7a by the pressing operation of the button 63 is not reflected at all. The rainbow image is a special background image that notifies (suggests) the player that the big win is confirmed.

After that, the second movable accessory 15 returns from the advanced position to the retracted position (home position) again, and as shown in FIG. continue. Of course, even when the second movable accessory 15 returns from the advanced position to the retracted position (home position), the effect button image BTN is still displayed in the disabled operation display mode. The pressing operation of the performance button 63 by the player has no effect on the performance displayed on the display screen 7a.

When the player presses the production button 63 while the production button image BTN is displayed in the operation valid display mode, the second movable accessory 15 moves from the advanced position to the retracted position ( When it returns to the home position), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed again in a temporarily stopped state, and the effect button image BTN disappears from the display screen 7a, and the variable effect (variable display) is in progress. The middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed again, and the effect button valid/invalid display effect C ends.

After that, as shown in FIG. 122(I), in the center of the display screen 7a (the center of the middle fluctuation display area), unlike the normal ally character CRA, the winged ally character CRA suddenly appears on the display screen 7a and appears large. When displayed, as shown in FIG. 122(J), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stop-displayed with the same pattern (number "7" in this case), resulting in a big win. After that, the jackpot game (jackpot effect) is started. In other words, unlike the normal ally character CRA, when the winged ally character CRA is suddenly displayed, a big win is displayed as a result of winning without starting the battle effect.

When the big win is confirmed, the change display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad and the hold icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the change icon 9C is not displayed due to the end of the change. Although the above-described sub-variation area KSZ is provided on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, part of the wings of the winged ally character CRA in FIG. 122(I) overlaps the sub-variation area KSZ. Even so, since the sub-variation area KSZ is arranged on the foremost side, part of the wings of the winged human form ally character CRA is covered with the sub-variation area KSZ. In addition, although the above-described pending number display area HS is provided on the upper left side of the display screen 7a, even if the winged ally character CRA moves and a part of the wing overlaps the pending number display area HS, , since the pending number display area HS is arranged on the frontmost side, part of the wings of the winged ally character CRA is covered with the pending number display area HS.

In FIG. 122(I), the winged ally character CRA suddenly appears on the display screen 7a and is not displayed in a large size, and the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a (the center of the medium fluctuation display area). Then, after that, the battle production is started. In the battle production, the friendly character CRA appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, the enemy character CRB appears from the left side of the display screen 7a, and the friendly character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight in the center of the display screen 7a. It is a production with high expectations set in advance. In the battle effect, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R disappear again from the display screen 7a, and the variable display position 9Cd, the suspended display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, and the suspended icon 9A disappear from the display screen 7a. disappear. In the battle production, in the sub-variation area KSZ, a fluctuation production (variation display) is continued without a temporary stop display. In addition, in the reservation number display area HS, the first special figure reservation and the second special figure reservation are respectively displayed as the number of reservations (numbers).

In the battle production, when the ally character CRA wins and the enemy character CRB loses, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stop-displayed with the same pattern (number "7" in this case), and a big hit is achieved. After that, the jackpot game (jackpot effect) is started. When the big win is confirmed, the change display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad and the hold icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the change icon 9C is not displayed due to the end of the change. On the other hand, in the battle production, when the ally character CRA is defeated and the enemy character CRB wins, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped (confirmed) displayed at the same timing, and the left decorative pattern is displayed. 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are not aligned with the same pattern (here, the number "7"), and are misaligned. At this time, the variable display position 9Cd, the pending display position 9Ad and the pending icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the variable icon 9C is not displayed due to the end of the variable. Subsequently, the suspended icon 9A displayed at the first suspended display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, and the variation effect is the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R. (variation display) is started.

Further, in FIG. 122(G), the rainbow background image is not displayed as the background image of the display screen 7a, and further, in FIG. 122(I), the winged ally character CRA suddenly appears on the display screen 7a and is not displayed large. In this case, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are stopped and displayed (confirmed display) at the same timing, and the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are the same design ( In this case, the number "7") is not aligned, and a loss is displayed as a win-lose result. In other words, when the rainbow background image is not displayed as the background image of the display screen 7a in FIG. Without developing into a battle production, the loss is displayed as a result of winning.

In addition, in FIGS. 122(D) and (E), the effect button image BTN is white as bright light emission, but even if the degree of expectation for winning is suggested in the order of white→blue→red→yellow, good. By doing so, it is possible to increase the variations of the effect by the bright color light emission of the effect button image BTN.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the effect button valid/invalid display effect will be shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the player can operate the effect button valid/invalid display effect A in FIG. 120, the effect button valid/invalid display effect B in FIG. an effect button 63 (operation means), an image display device 7 (display means) capable of displaying a plurality of types of images, and a second movable accessory movable to a predetermined position in front of the image display device 7 (display means). 15 (movable body), and the second movable accessory 15 (movable body) advances from the retracted position in a state where a performance button image BTN (operation means image) imitating a performance button 63 (operation means) is displayed. When it moves to the position, the first effect (the effect button valid/invalid display effect A in FIG. FIG. 121(E) can be executed in the effect button valid/invalid display effect B, and FIG. 122(G) can be executed in the effect button effective/invalid display effect C). According to this configuration, when the second movable accessory 15 (movable body) moves from the retracted position to the advanced position while the effect button image BTN (operation means image) imitating the effect button 63 (operation means) is displayed, , the second movable accessory 15 (movable body) covers the effect button image BTN (operation means image), and the effect button image BTN (operation means image) prompting the player to operate the effect button 63 (operation means) is displayed. Since it is possible to provide the player with a sense of incompatibility that the second movable accessory 15 (movable body) is purposely covered, the player can be provided with such a sense of discomfort as a novel performance that has not existed in the past. . Therefore, it is possible to improve interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the first effect (effect FIG. 120 (F) for the button valid/invalid display effect A, FIG. 121(E) for the effect button valid/invalid display effect B, and FIG. When the movable object) moves from the retracted position to the advanced position, the second movable accessory 15 (movable object) can cover a part of the effect button image BTN (operation means image). According to this configuration, although the second movable accessory 15 (movable body) covers the effect button image BTN (operation means image), the entire effect button image BTN (operation means image) is covered by the second movable accessory 15 (movable body). Since a part of the effect button image BTN (operation means image) can be visually recognized without being covered by a body), the presence of the effect button image BTN (operation means image) can be used by other users. It is possible to contribute to making the player expect the development to the performance.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the first effect (effect FIG. 120 (G) for the button valid/invalid display effect A, FIG. 121 (F) for the effect button valid/invalid display effect B, and FIG. The display of the effect button image BTN (operation means image) can be continued even when the movable body moves from the advanced position to the retracted position. According to this configuration, even when the second movable accessory 15 (movable body) moves from the advanced position to the retracted position, the effect button image BTN (operation means image) continues to be displayed. The presence of the BTN (operation means image) can be made more uncomfortable.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the image display device 7 ( The display means) can variably display the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (a plurality of decorative patterns) among the plurality of types of images, and the first effect (effect button valid/invalid display effect 120(F) to FIG. 120(G), during the production button valid/invalid display effect B, during the production progressing from FIG. 121(D) to FIG. 121(E), the effect button is valid/invalid In the display effect C, in the middle of the effect progressing from FIG. 122(F) to FIG. 122(G)), the variable effect ( The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (a plurality of decorative patterns) in the variable display) can be hidden. According to this configuration, by the time the second movable accessory 15 (movable body) starts to move from the retracted position to the advanced position, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right While the decorative pattern 8R (a plurality of decorative patterns) is hidden, the display of the effect button image BTN (operation means image) is continued, so that the player's line of sight is naturally displayed by the effect button image BTN (operation means image). means image), it is possible to draw attention to the effect button image BTN (operation means image). As a result, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (a plurality of decorative patterns) in the variable production (variable display) are absent, whereas the production button image BTN (operation means image) is It is possible to create an effect in which the presence of the effect button image BTN (operation means image) stands out.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the first effect in the effect button valid/invalid display effect C of FIG. 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R (a plurality of decorative patterns), and variable display (multiple times (variation display)) can be executed. According to this configuration, since the effect button image BTN (operation means image) is displayed over a plurality of times of variable display, the player can easily recognize the presence of the effect button image BTN (operation means image). can.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the first effect in the effect button valid/invalid display effect B in FIG. 121 and the effect button effective/invalid display effect C in FIG. ), and in the effect button valid/invalid display effect C, FIG. to an operation invalid display mode suggesting that the operation of the effect button 63 (operating means) is invalid from the operation valid display mode suggesting that the operation of the effect button 63 (operating means) is valid. It can be switched. According to this configuration, the display mode of the effect button image BTN (operation means image) changes from the operation valid display mode to the operation invalid display before the second movable accessory 15 (movable body) starts to move from the retracted position to the advanced position. Since the state is switched to the mode and the effect button image BTN (operation means image) is displayed, it is possible to contribute to giving the player a sense of expectation that another effect will develop.

[Modification]
A modification of the effect button valid/invalid display effect will be shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the effect button valid/invalid display effect A of FIG. 120, the effect button valid/invalid display effect B of FIG. 121, and the effect button effective/invalid display effect C of FIG. was to be done. In other words, it was performed in a so-called left-handed game state. However, it may be performed based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 . In other words, it may be performed in a so-called right-handed game state.

[Modification 2]
120, the effect button valid/invalid display effect B in FIG. 121, and the effect button valid/invalid display effect C in FIG. 122, the second movable accessory 15 (movable body) moves from the retracted position to the advanced position. , the second movable accessory 15 (movable body) can cover a part of the effect button image BTN (operation means image). That is, part of the effect button image BTN (operation means image) imitating the effect button 63 (operation means) that the player can operate is covered with the second movable accessory 15 (movable body) that has advanced to the advanced position. was However, the select button 68 may be used instead of the effect button 63 . In this case, a select button image (operation means image) imitating the select button 68 is displayed on the display screen 7a, and corresponds to at least one of the select button 68's up button, right button, down button, and left button. The select button image (operation means image) to be selected may be covered with the second movable accessory 15 (movable body) advanced to the advanced position.

[Modification 3]
In the effect button valid/invalid display effect A in FIG. 120, the effect button valid/invalid display effect B in FIG. 121, and the effect button effective/invalid display effect C in FIG. means) was displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. However, if a part of the effect button image BTN can be visually recognized by the operation of the second movable accessory 15 (movable body), it can be displayed at another position different from the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (display means). may be displayed.

[Modification 4]
In the effect button valid/invalid display effect A in FIG. 120, the effect button valid/invalid display effect B in FIG. 121, and the effect button effective/invalid display effect C in FIG. The effect button image BTN may be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (display means) such that a part of the effect button image BTN is covered by the arm member that reciprocates the .

[Modification 5]
120, the effect button valid/invalid display effect B in FIG. 121, and the effect button valid/invalid display effect C in FIG. 122, the second movable accessory 15 (movable body) moves from the retracted position to the advanced position. The display mode of the effect button image BTN (operation means image) has already been switched from the operation valid display mode to the operation invalid display mode by the time the movement to is started. However, when the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped, the display mode of the effect button image BTN (operation means image) is switched from the operation valid display mode to the operation invalid display mode. good too. At this time, the variable effect (variable display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C is continued. Further, when the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped at the same timing, the display mode of the effect button image BTN (operation means image) changes from the operation valid display mode to the operation invalid display mode when the temporary stop is made. You may make it switch to a mode. At this time, the variable effect (variable display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C is continued.

[Modification 6]
In the effect button valid/invalid display effect A of FIG. 120, the effect button valid/invalid display effect B of FIG. 121, and the effect button effective/invalid display effect C of FIG. It is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (display means) in the state as it is, and by pressing the production button 63 by the player, the development to the battle production in which the expectation of the big win is set high in advance. There was a case where the suggesting ally character CRA was displayed (appeared) on the display screen 7a. However, by pressing the production button 63 by the player, the second movable accessory 15 (movable body) moves to the retreat position (home position), advances (moves) toward the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and toward the center position (advancement position) of the display screen 7a, for a predetermined time (for example, about 5 seconds). ) may be stopped. In this case, when the second movable accessory 15 moves to the advanced position and stops, the second movable accessory 15 covers the effect button image BTN, and the lower part of the effect button image BTN can be visually recognized. be able to do so. In other words, the second movable accessory 15 covers part of the effect button image BTN. Even if the second movable accessory 15 partially covers the effect button image BTN, the effect button image BTN continues to be displayed in the operation effective display mode. After that, the second movable accessory 15 returns from the advanced position to the retracted position (home position), and the effect button image BTN continues to be displayed in the operation effective display mode.

[Modification 7]
In the effect button valid/invalid display effect C of FIG. 122, the white spherical hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad by the look-ahead effect is changed to the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon 9A. Also, the holding icon 9A is displayed at the first holding display position 9Ad to the third holding display position 9Ad, the holding icon 9A is not displayed at the fourth holding display position 9Ad, and the decorative pattern variation effect It is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 during (variation display). However, instead of this, when the game ball enters the first start port 20 during the variable effect (variable display) by the variable icon 9C, and the pending icon 9A is displayed at the fourth pending display position 9Ad , the effect button valid/invalid display effect C may be performed based on the yellow (gold) star-shaped pending icon 9A being displayed at the fourth pending display position 9Ad by the look-ahead effect. In this case, when the effect button valid/invalid display effect C is started during the variable effect (variable display) by the current variable icon 9C, then the pending icon 9A at the fourth pending display position 9Ad becomes the variable icon 9C. Thus, the effect button valid/invalid display effect C is continuously performed even during the variable effect (variable display). Thus, the effect button valid/invalid display effect C can be performed over a plurality of variable displays by the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern (a plurality of decorative patterns). Incidentally, when the effect button valid/invalid display effect C is started, as shown in FIGS. Although the state of being arranged behind the pattern 8C is maintained, the effect button image BTN can be visually recognized through the translucent middle decorative pattern 8C during the variable effect (variable display).

[Modification 8]
In the effect button valid/invalid display effect C of FIG. 122, the white spherical hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad by the look-ahead effect is changed to the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon 9A. It was done. However, regardless of the look-ahead effect, during the variable effect (variable display) by any of the variable icons 9C, for example, by lottery processing in the sub-control board 90 itself, the start of the effect button valid/invalid display effect C is determined, and a predetermined The effect button valid/invalid display effect C may be performed over a number of variable displays (for example, 2 to 10 times). At this time, when the effect button valid/invalid display effect C is started, as shown in FIGS. Although the state of being arranged behind the decorative pattern 8C is maintained, the production button image BTN can be visually recognized through the translucent middle decorative pattern 8C during the variable production (variable display).

[Modification 9]
The effect button valid/invalid display effect A in FIG. 120, the effect button valid/invalid display effect B in FIG. 121, and the effect button valid/invalid display effect C in FIG. production may be added.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect D3-1]
A gaming machine comprising an operation means operable by a player, a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images, and a movable body movable to a predetermined position in front of the display means,
When the movable body moves from the retracted position to the advanced position while the operating means image simulating the operating means is displayed, a first effect in which the movable body and the operating means image overlap in the front-rear direction can be executed. be,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect D3-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect D3-1,
In the first effect, when the movable body moves from the retracted position to the advanced position, the movable body covers a part of the operation means image.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect D3-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect D3-1 or aspect D3-2,
The first effect continues to display the operation means image even when the movable body moves from the advanced position to the retracted position.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect D3-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D3-1 to D3-3,
The display means is capable of variably displaying a plurality of decorative patterns among the plurality of types of images,
In the first effect, before the movable body starts to move from the retracted position to the advanced position, the plurality of decorative symbols being variably displayed are hidden.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect D3-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect D3-4,
The first effect can be executed over a plurality of times of variable display with the plurality of decorative symbols.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect D3-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D3-1 to D3-5,
The first effect changes the display mode of the operation means image from the operation effective display mode suggesting that the operation of the operation means is effective before the time when the movable body starts to move. Switching to an operation invalid display mode that suggests that the operation of the operation means is invalid,
A gaming machine characterized by:

Operation automation effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 123 to 125. FIG. This operation automation effect can be executed during the variable effect of the effect pattern. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the instruction to execute the operation automation effect is included, the corresponding image data is read out from the ROM 103 and displayed on the main display device. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of 7.

[Operation automation production A]
123 is a diagram for explaining the operation automation effect A. FIG.
In the operation automation effect A, even if the player does not press the effect button 63, a predetermined effect is performed assuming that the effect button 63 has been pressed.

First, as shown in FIG. 123(A), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and show a state of high-speed fluctuation. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending and the variation icon 9C are displayed. The three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending correspond respectively to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the first special figure pending storage area 85a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 123(B), a ready-to-win effect is executed. The reach formation effect is a effect in which the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R temporarily stop at the same numerical value. Here, both the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at "5". In addition, the middle production pattern 8C fluctuates at high speed. Also here, three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending and the variation icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 123(C), an operation prompting effect is executed. The operation promotion effect is an effect that prompts the player to operate the effect button 63 . Here, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed, and a message image MG saying "press" is displayed. Further, here, the pressing surface (upper surface) shown in the button image BG is white (normal color). Note that this button image BG is an image in a state in which the performance button 63 is not pressed (state in which the projecting portion is enlarged). When the player operates the production button 63 in this state, the operation of the production button 63 is invalidated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 123(D), animation image display effect (initial) is executed. In the animation image display effect (initial), the game ball image KG is framed from the upper right portion of the display screen 7a, and then moves toward the pressing surface (upper surface) indicated by the button image BG as indicated by the arrow Y. do. At this time as well, the message image MG "press" is displayed. The game ball image KG is white (normal color).

Next, as shown in FIG. 123(E), animation image display effects (mid-term) are executed. In the animation image display effect (middle term), the game ball image KG collides with the pressing surface (upper surface) indicated by the button image BG, and then, as indicated by the arrow Y, the pressing surface (upper surface) indicated by the button image BG. , and moves toward the upper left part of the display screen 7a. The button image BG is an image in a state in which the performance button 63 is pressed (a state in which the protruding portion is reduced) due to the collision of the game ball image KG. At this time as well, the message image MG "press" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 123(F), animation image display effect (late stage) is executed. In the animation image display effect (late stage), the game ball image KG moves toward the upper left part of the display screen 7a and out of the frame. At this time, the button image BG is an image in a state in which the performance button 63 is not pressed (state in which the projecting portion is enlarged). At this time as well, the message image MG "press" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 123(G), a win confirmation effect is executed. The hit confirmation effect is an effect for notifying that the win is confirmed. Here, an ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and a rainbow effect is displayed around it. As a result, the player can know that it is a win before the production pattern is displayed with double eyes.

Next, as shown in FIG. 123(H), a fixed stop effect (win) is executed. The fixed stop production (hit) is a production in which the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R become doubles and the game is fixed and stopped. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all fixed and stopped at "5".

It should be noted that whether or not to execute animation image display effects (FIGS. 123D to 123F) after the operation prompting effect (FIG. 123C) is stored in the sub-RAM 94 of the game machine 1 as setting information. It is This setting information is configured to be set using the select button 68, for example. Of course, it may be configured to be set using the effect button 63, the sword member 65, or the like. Specifically, by pressing a predetermined key of the select button 68, the animation image display effect is switched between ON and OFF. In other words, when the animation image display effect is on, the animation image display effects shown in FIGS. 123(D) to 123(F) are executed. The operation automation effect A is an example in which the animation image display effect is turned on. On the other hand, when the animated image display effect is off, the win determination effect shown in FIG. 123(G) is executed after the operation prompting effect shown in FIG. 123(C). In this case, the player's depression of the effect button 63 in the operation promotion effect of FIG. 123(C) becomes effective.

[Operation automation production B]
FIG. 124 is a diagram for explaining the operation automation effect B. FIG.
In the operation automation effect B, even if the player does not press the effect button 63, a predetermined effect is performed assuming that the effect button 63 has been pressed. Similar to the operation automation effect A described above, this is an example in which the animation image display effect is turned on.

First, as shown in FIG. 124(A), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and show a state of high-speed fluctuation. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending and the variation icon 9C are displayed. The three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending correspond respectively to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the first special figure pending storage area 85a. Here, in particular, an image T1 of "AUTO" is displayed in the upper right portion of the display screen 7a. This indicates that animation display effect is to be executed (the same applies to (B) to (H) below).

Next, as shown in FIG. 124(B), a ready-to-win effect is executed. The reach formation effect is a effect in which the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R temporarily stop at the same numerical value. Here, both the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at "5". In addition, the middle production pattern 8C fluctuates at high speed. Also here, three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending and the variation icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 124(C), an operation prompting effect is executed. The operation promotion effect is an effect that prompts the player to operate the effect button 63 . Here, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed, and a message image MG saying "press" is displayed. Here, the pressing surface (upper surface) shown in the button image BG is red. Note that this button image BG is an image in a state in which the performance button 63 is not pressed (state in which the protruding portion is enlarged). When the player operates the production button 63 in this state, the operation of the production button 63 is invalidated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 124(D), animation image display effect (initial) is executed. In the animation image display effect (initial), the game ball image KG is framed from the upper right part of the display screen 7a, and then moves toward the pressing surface (upper surface) indicated by the button image BG as indicated by the arrow Y. do. At this time as well, the message image MG "press" is displayed. Note that the game ball image KG is red.

Next, as shown in FIG. 124(E), animation image display effect (mid-term) is executed. In the animation image display effect (middle term), the game ball image KG collides with the pressing surface (upper surface) indicated by the button image BG, and then, as indicated by the arrow Y, the pressing surface (upper surface) indicated by the button image BG. , and moves toward the upper left part of the display screen 7a. Here, the button image BG is an image in a state in which the effect button 63 has been pressed (a state in which the projecting portion is reduced) due to the collision of the game ball image KG. At this time as well, the message image MG "press" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 124(F), animation image display effect (late stage) is executed. In the animation image display effect (late stage), the game ball image KG moves toward the upper left part of the display screen 7a and out of the frame. At this time, the button image BG is an image in a state in which the performance button 63 is not pressed (state in which the projecting portion is enlarged).

Next, as shown in FIG. 124(G), a win confirmation effect is executed. The hit confirmation effect is an effect for notifying that the win is confirmed. Here, an ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and a rainbow effect is displayed around it. As a result, the player can know that it is a win before the production pattern is displayed with double eyes.

Next, as shown in FIG. 124(H), a fixed stop effect (win) is executed. The fixed stop production (hit) is a production in which the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R become doubles and the game is fixed and stopped. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all fixed and stopped at "5".

In the operation automation effect B, an image T1 of "automatic" is displayed in the upper right part of the display screen 7a, so that it is easy to understand that the animation image display effect is being executed. Also, the pressing surface (upper surface) of the button shown in the button image BG and the game ball image KG are "red". The pressing surface of the button and the display color of the game ball image are set based on the hit expectation. For example, the probability of winning increases in the order of white, blue, green, red, and gold. Therefore, the operation automation effect B is an effect with a higher expectation of winning than the operation automation effect A. - 特許庁

[Operation automation production C]
125(A) to (D) are diagrams for explaining the operation automation effect C. FIG.
The operation automation effect C is an example in which the animation image display effect is turned on according to the setting information, but there is an instruction to hit to the right. When there is a right-handed instruction (high probability high base state, low probability high base state), the animation display effect is not executed.

First, as shown in FIG. 125(A), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and show a state of high-speed fluctuation. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9B corresponding to the second special figure pending and the variation icon 9C are displayed. The three pending icons 9B corresponding to the second special figure pending correspond respectively to the first storage area, the second storage area and the third storage area of the second special figure pending storage area 85b. In particular, an image T2 of "MANUAL" is displayed in the upper right portion of the display screen 7a. This indicates that the animated image display effect is not executed (the same applies to (B) to (D) below). At the bottom left of the display screen 7a, "Right shot" is displayed (the same applies to (B) to (D) below).

Next, as shown in FIG. 125(B), a ready-to-win effect is executed. The reach formation effect is a effect in which the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R temporarily stop at the same numerical value. Here, both the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at "5". In addition, the middle production pattern 8C fluctuates at high speed. Also here, three pending icons 9B corresponding to the first special figure pending and the variation icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 125(C), an operation prompting effect is executed. The operation promotion effect is an effect that prompts the player to operate the effect button 63 . Here, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed, and a message image MG saying "press" is displayed. Here, the pressing surface (upper surface) shown in the button image BG is white. Note that this button image BG is an image in a state in which the performance button 63 is not pressed (state in which the protruding portion is enlarged).

Next, as shown in FIG. 125(D), a fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. The fixed stop production (loss) is a production in which the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are lost and the game is fixed and stopped. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are confirmed and stopped at "5", and the middle effect symbol 8C is confirmed and stopped at "6".

In the operation automation effect C, the image T2 of "MANUAL" is displayed in the upper right part of the display screen 7a, so that it is easy to understand that the animation image display effect is not executed.

In the animation image display effect, the game ball image KG collides with the button image BG so that the button shown in the button image BG is operated only once. On the other hand, animation image display effects corresponding to various operation of the effect button 63 may be executed.

125(E) and (F) are animation image display effects corresponding to the "long press" of the effect button 63. FIG.
As shown in FIG. 125(E), an animation image display effect (long press 1) is executed. In the animation image display effect (long press 1), a large game ball image KG is framed from the upper center of the display screen 7a and, as indicated by the arrow Y, faces the pressing surface (upper surface) of the button indicated by the button image BG. It is a production that moves by moving.

Next, as shown in FIG. 125(F), an animation image display effect (long press 2) is executed. The animation image display effect (long press 2) is an effect in which the large game ball image KG comes into contact with the pressing surface (upper surface) of the button indicated by the button image BG and stops. At this time, by pressing the game ball image KG, the button image BG is in a pressed state (a state in which the projecting portion is reduced).

FIGS. 125(G) and (H) are animation image display effects corresponding to the "continuous hit" of the effect button 63. FIG.
As shown in FIG. 125(G), animation image display effects (continuous hits 1) are executed. In the animation image display effect (consecutive hits 1), the game ball image KG enters the frame from the upper center of the display screen and moves toward the pressing surface (upper surface) of the button indicated by the button image BG as indicated by the arrow Y. It is a performance.

Next, as shown in FIG. 125(H), animation image display effects (continuous hits 2) are executed. The animation image display effect (consecutive hits 2) is a effect in which the game ball image KG collides with the pressing surface (upper surface) of the button indicated by the button image BG and rebounds. At this time, due to the collision of the game ball image KG, the button image BG is in a state in which the effect button 63 is pressed down (a state in which the protruding portion is reduced).

After that, by alternately executing the animation image display effect (continuous hit 1) in FIG. 125(G) and the animation image display effect (continuous hit 2) in FIG. The collision of the game ball image KG with the upper surface) is repeated.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the operation automation presentation is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the display device 7, and an operation promoting effect is executed to prompt the player to operate the effect button 63 (FIG. 123(C), FIG. 124(C), FIG. 125(C)). After that, after an animation image showing how the button image BG is operated is displayed on the display screen 7a of the display device 7, it is assumed that the effect button 63 has been operated, and the win confirmation effect is executed (Fig. 123 (D) ( E) (F) (G), FIG. 124 (D) (E) (F) (G)). According to this configuration, the operation of the effect button 63 can be automated, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Note that the effect button 63 corresponds to the "operation part", the button image BG corresponds to the "operation part image", the operation promotion effect corresponds to the "first effect", and the animation image display effect corresponds to the "second effect". , and the hit confirmation effect corresponds to "predetermined effect".
The operation unit may be the sword member 65 or the select button 68 as long as it can be operated by the player.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, animation image display effects are executed based on setting information set from the outside. According to this configuration, the player can use the select button 68 to set the setting information, thereby automating the operation of the effect button 63 and enhancing the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, even if the animation image display effect is turned on by the setting information, if there is an instruction to hit to the right (high probability high base state, low probability high base state), the animation display effect is executed. not. According to this configuration, the player can operate the effect button 63 in a specific case, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, when the animated image display effect is executed, an “automatic” image T1 is displayed in the upper right portion of the display screen (FIGS. 124(A) to (H)). According to this configuration, it becomes easy to understand that the animation image display effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game. It should be noted that the "automatic" image T1 corresponds to "display of the first mode indicating that it is the permitted period".

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, when the animated image display effect is not executed, the "manual" image T2 is displayed in the upper right portion of the display screen (FIGS. 125(A) to (D)). According to this configuration, it becomes easy to understand that the animation image display effect is not executed, and the amusement of the game can be improved. It should be noted that the image T2 of "manual" corresponds to "display of the second mode indicating that it is a prohibition period".

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the animation image display effect is executed, the player's operation of the effect button 63 in the operation promoting effect is disabled. According to this configuration, the animation image display effect is executed regardless of whether the player operates the effect button 63 or not, and the predetermined effect is executed assuming that the effect button 63 is operated, thereby improving the interest of the game. be able to.

[Modification]
A modification of the operation automation effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the above, the display colors of both the button image BG and the game ball image KG are changed based on the degree of expectation for winning.
On the other hand, the display color of at least one of the button image BG and the game ball image KG may be changed based on the expectation of winning. Moreover, not only the display color but also the display mode of at least one of the button image BG and the game ball image KG may be changed based on the degree of expectation for winning. For example, it is conceivable to display a gorgeous button image BG compared to the normal button image BG.

[Modification 2]
In the above, even if the animation display effect is turned on by the setting information, if there is a right-handed instruction (high probability high base state, low probability high base state), the animation display effect was not executed. .
The condition for not executing the animation image display effect is not limited to this. For example, in one variation, the animation image display effect is executed for the operation of the effect button 63 in the middle chance-up effect, and the animation image display effect is not executed for the operation of the effect button 63 in the final final effect. is.

[Modification 3]
In the above description, the images T1 and T2 of "automatic" and "manual" are displayed for execution/non-execution of animation image display effects. Any image may be used as the image representing execution/non-execution of such an animation image display effect. Auto, manual, etc. may be used, and symbols corresponding to auto and manual may be used. In addition, since it is sufficient to know whether the animation display effect is executed or not, an image is displayed only when the animation display effect is executed, and the image is not displayed when the animation display effect is not executed. You may do so.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect D4-1]
a display device for displaying an image;
and an operation unit that can be operated by a player,
A gaming machine capable of executing a predetermined effect based on the operation of the operation unit,
a first effect of displaying an operation unit image simulating the operation unit on the display device and prompting a player to operate the operation unit;
After the first effect, after displaying the operation unit image indicating the operation mode on the display device, assuming that the operation unit is operated, a second effect of executing the predetermined effect is executed. is possible,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect D4-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect D4-1,
Whether or not to execute the second effect is determined based on setting information set from the outside,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect D4-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect D4-2,
Execution of the second effect is prohibited in a specific period regardless of the setting information.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect D4-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D4-1 to D4-3,
During the permission period during which execution of the second effect is permitted, the display device displays a first mode indicating that it is the permission period,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect D4-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D4-1 to D4-4,
During the prohibited period during which execution of the second effect is prohibited, a display in a second mode indicating that it is the prohibited period is performed on the display device.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect D4-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D4-1 to D4-5,
During the permission period during which the execution of the second effect is permitted, the operation of the operation unit by the player during the first effect is invalidated.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect D4-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D4-1 to D4-6,
After waiting for a predetermined time for the player to operate the operation unit in the first effect, if the player does not operate the operation unit, the second effect is executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The relationship between the first movable role 14 and the frame movable role 69 will be described below with reference to FIG. 126, and the double role effects A and B will be described with reference to FIGS. 127 and 128, the display effect on the display screen 7a is shown on the left side, and the relationship between the frame movable accessory 69 and the handle 60 is shown on the right side. This double role production is executed during the variation production of decorative symbols in the normal state, the time saving state (low-probability-low base state), or the probability-variable state (high-probability-high base state). That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the command includes an instruction to execute the double character effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the image display device 7. An image is displayed on the screen 7a or the sub-display screen 64. FIG.

FIG. 126 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the first movable accessory 14 and the frame movable accessory 69. FIG. In FIG. 126(A), the first movable accessory 14 will be explained, and in FIG. 126(B), the frame movable accessory 69 will be explained.
As shown in FIG. 126(A), when the first movable accessory 14 is movable, from the retreat position located on the left side of the display screen 7a toward the advanced position, rightward (in the direction of the arrow in the figure) Moving.
The first movable accessory 14 is arranged in a space within the frame formed by the game machine frame 50 and the game board 2 (see FIG. 1).

A handle 60 of the gaming machine 1 is provided with a button XMM. This button XMM has a button detection switch (not shown) and is connected to the main control board 80 via the firing control circuit 111 and the payout control board 110 . When the button XMM is operated, the main control board 80 transmits button operation information to the sub-control board 90 side. As a result, a button image simulating the button XMM can be displayed on the display screen 7a, and a button effect can be performed in which a predetermined display effect is performed by operating the button XMM. The button operation of the button XMM on the handle 60 is performed, for example, by the player pressing the button XMM rightward with the thumb of the right hand. Therefore, the operation direction of the button XMM is rightward as shown in the drawing.
As shown in FIG. 126(B), the frame movable accessory 69 is composed of a left member and a right member. The right member of the frame movable accessory 69 is arranged so as to sandwich the handle 60 . That is, the left member of the frame movable accessory 69 is arranged on the extension line of the opposite direction (left direction) to the operation direction (right direction) of the button XMM with respect to the button XMM, and the right member of the frame movable accessory 69 is , on the extension line of the button XMM in the operation direction (right direction).
When the frame movable accessory 69 is moved to the advanced position, it moves in the direction toward the handle 60 as shown in FIG. 126(B). Specifically, the frame movable accessory 69 arranged on the left side of the handle 60 moves rightward, and the frame movable accessory 69 arranged on the right side of the handle 60 moves leftward. FIG. 49 shows the state when the frame movable accessory 69 is moved and moved to the advanced position.
When the player grips the handle 60 and touches the button XMM, when the frame movable accessory 69 moves to the advance position, the frame movable accessory 69 touches the player's hand. .
In addition, when the first movable accessory 14 and the frame movable accessory 69 perform a movable effect, the operation direction of the button XMM, the moving direction of the first movable accessory 14, and the frame movable accessory 69 on the left side of the handle 60 The direction of movement is the same.

[Double role production A]
FIG. 127 is a diagram for explaining the double role product production A. FIG. The double performance A of FIG. 127 is a performance with the same variation of special symbols. In the double role production A, as shown in the left diagram of FIG. 127(A), first, the decorative pattern variation production is performed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C, and 8R are vertically shifted substantially in the center of the display screen 7a, and the teammate character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. In addition, in the decorative symbol variation effect, as shown in the right side of FIG. 127(A), the player holds the handle 60 and the frame movable accessory 69 is positioned at the retracted position. In this state, the frame movable accessory 69 is not in contact with the player. In addition, in the decorative symbol special variation effect, the pending icon 9A and the variation icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, but they are omitted in the figure.

Next, as shown in the left diagram of FIG. 127(B), a ready-to-win effect is performed. In this ready-to-win effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with seven symbols, the ready-to-win state in which the decorative symbol 8C fluctuates at high speed is formed in the upper left of the display screen 7a, and the teammate character CRA is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. displayed large. Also, in the ready-to-win effect, as shown in the right diagram of FIG. 127(B), the player holds the handle 60 and the frame movable accessory 69 is positioned at the retracted position. The player can frequently operate the button XMM in the operating direction (rightward) in anticipation of the appearance of the chance-up effect in the ready-to-win state. In this state, the frame movable accessory 69 is not in contact with the player.

Next, as shown on the left side of FIG. 127(C), a character object movement presentation is performed. In this accessory movable effect, the first movable accessory 14 moves on the display screen 7a from the retracted position on the left side of the display screen 7a toward the advanced position. 127(C), the player grips the handle 60, or the player grips the handle 60 and operates the button XMM. , the frame movable accessory 69 moves from the retracted position to the advanced position, that is, the left member frame movable accessory 69 moves rightward, and the right member frame movable accessory 69 moves leftward. As a result, the frame movable accessory 69 of the left member contacts the player's thumb or the like, and the frame movable accessory 69 of the right member contacts the player's little finger or the like.

Next, as shown in the diagram on the left side of FIG. 127(D), a big winning symbol display effect is performed. In this jackpot symbol display effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are interlocked while the first movable accessory 14 moves from the advanced position to the retracted position (while the first movable accessory 14 moves leftward). Then, 7 symbols appearing from the right side of the display screen 7a, and the jackpot symbols of 7 symbols are displayed substantially in the center of the display screen 7a. This interlocking production is the same as the character interlocking productions A to C, as shown in FIGS. Also, in the big hit symbol display effect, as shown in the right side of FIG. 127(D), the frame movable accessory 69 moves from the advance position to the retreat position, and the contact with the player is released.
After that, a jackpot game presentation is performed.

[Double character production B]
FIG. 128 is a diagram for explaining the double role product production B. FIG. The double performance B of FIG. 128 is a performance with the same variation of the special symbols. In the double role production B, as shown in the left diagram of FIG. 128(A), first, the decorative pattern variation production is performed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C, and 8R are vertically shifted substantially in the center of the display screen 7a, and the teammate character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. Also, in the decorative symbol variation effect, as shown in the right side of FIG. 128(A), the player is holding the handle 60 and the frame movable accessory 69 is positioned at the retracted position. In this state, the frame movable accessory 69 is not in contact with the player. In addition, in the decorative symbol special variation effect, the pending icon 9A and the variation icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, but they are omitted in the figure.

Next, as shown in the left diagram of FIG. 128(B), a ready-to-win effect is performed. In this ready-to-win effect, seven decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed, and a ready-to-win state in which the decorative symbol 8C fluctuates at high speed is formed at the upper left of the display screen 7a, and the teammate character CRA is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. displayed large. Also, in the ready-to-win effect, as shown in the right diagram of FIG. 128(B), the player is holding the handle 60, and the frame movable accessory 69 is positioned at the retracted position. The player can frequently operate the button XMM in the operating direction (rightward) in anticipation of the appearance of the chance-up effect when the ready-to-win state is reached. In this state, the frame movable accessory 69 is not in contact with the player.

Next, as shown in the left diagram of FIG. 128(C), the button operation explanation effect A is performed. In this button operation explanation effect A, a button operation explanation image XM1 is displayed substantially in the center of the display screen 7a. This button operation explanation image XM1 is an image that represents the gaming machine 1 as a whole and suggests the positional relationship of the buttons XMM with respect to the gaming machine 1 . Specifically, in the button operation explanation image XM1, it is suggested that there is a button XMM at the position indicated by the arrow (the position indicated as "here"). Also, the button operation explanation image XM1 suggests the positional relationship between the first movable accessory 14 and the button XMM. The button operation explanation image XM1 may be a diagram representing the entire actual gaming machine 1. FIG. Further, in the button operation explanation effect A, as shown in the right diagram of FIG. 128(C), the player is holding the handle 60 and the frame movable accessory 69 is positioned at the retracted position. In this state, the frame movable accessory 69 is not in contact with the player.

Next, as shown in the left diagram of FIG. 128(D), the button operation explanation effect B is performed. In this button operation explanation effect B, a button operation explanation image XM2 is displayed substantially in the center of the display screen 7a. This button operation explanation image XM2 is an image that represents the periphery of the handle 60 and the frame movable accessory 69 and suggests the positional relationship between the handle 60 and the frame movable accessory 69 . Furthermore, the button operation explanation image XM2 is written with the characters "PUSH the arrow" and an arrow, indicates the position of the button XMM on the handle 60, and urges the player to press (operate) the button XMM. It is an image for In other words, the button operation explanation image XM2 is a diagram showing the actual zoomed-in button XMM. Further, in the button operation explanation effect B, as shown in the right diagram of FIG. 128(D), the player is holding the handle 60 and the frame movable accessory 69 is positioned at the retracted position. The player presses the button XMM while gripping the handle 60 by seeing the button operation explanation image XM2. In this state, the frame movable accessory 69 is not in contact with the player.

Next, as shown in the left diagram of FIG. 128(E), a character object movement presentation is performed. In this accessory movable effect, the first movable accessory 14 moves on the display screen 7a from the retracted position on the left side of the display screen 7a toward the advanced position. 128(E), the player grips the handle 60, or the player grips the handle 60 and operates the button XMM. , the frame movable accessory 69 moves from the retracted position to the advanced position, that is, the left member frame movable accessory 69 moves rightward, and the right member frame movable accessory 69 moves leftward. As a result, the frame movable accessory 69 of the left member contacts the player's thumb or the like, and the frame movable accessory 69 of the right member contacts the player's little finger or the like.

Next, as shown in the diagram on the left side of FIG. 128(F), a big win symbol display effect is performed. In this jackpot symbol display effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are interlocked while the first movable accessory 14 moves from the advanced position to the retracted position (while the first movable accessory 14 moves leftward). Then, 7 symbols appearing from the right side of the display screen 7a, and the jackpot symbols of 7 symbols are displayed substantially in the center of the display screen 7a. This interlocking production is the same as the character interlocking productions A to C, as shown in FIGS. Also, in the jackpot symbol display effect, as shown in the right side of FIG. 128(F), the frame movable accessory 69 moves from the advanced position to the retracted position, and the contact with the player is released.
After that, a jackpot game presentation is performed.

[Modification]
In the above double accessory productions A and B, the frame movable accessory 69 is used as the out-of-frame movable accessory in the accessory movable presentation, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the left member and the right member of the movable frame accessory 69 may be arranged so as to sandwich the production button 63 .
In the double role productions A and B, in the movable role production, the movement of the first movable role 14 and the frame movable role 69 is performed regardless of the player's operation of the button XMM. For example, the movement of the first movable accessory 14 and the frame movable accessory 69 may be performed based on the player's operation of the button XMM.

[Effect example]
In the above-described double accessory effects A and B, the frame movable accessory 69 placed outside the frame is movable while the first movable accessory 14 placed inside the frame is moving. According to this configuration, by using the first movable accessory 14 and the frame movable accessory 69, it is possible to perform a momentary role product presentation with a sense of depth, and to surprise the player efficiently in a short time. can be given. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the above double role productions A and B, the movement of the first movable role 14 placed inside the frame and the movement of the frame movable role 69 placed outside the frame each suggest a big win, and the first movable role After the performance of moving the accessory 14 and the movable frame accessory 69 is performed, the big win pattern display performance is performed. According to this configuration, the first movable accessory 14 and the frame movable accessory 69 are used, and after the role product presentation with a momentary sense of depth, the long-awaited jackpot pattern display presentation is performed. It can give a person a great sense of bliss. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the above-described double role productions A and B, the first movable role 14 placed inside the frame and the frame movable role 69 placed outside the frame both move in a predetermined direction (this embodiment Now move to the right). According to this configuration, the two movable accessories can produce a sense of unity in addition to a sense of depth. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the button XMM provided on the handle 60 is used for display effects and effects using movable accessories, and can be operated by the player applying force in the operation direction (rightward direction). be. In addition, the frame movable accessory 69 (left member) is arranged on the extension line in the opposite direction (left direction) to the operation direction (right direction) with respect to the button XMM. In the double role productions A and B, when the player touches the button XMM to apply force in the operation direction and the role movement production is performed, the frame movable role 69 is moved in the movement direction. By doing so, the frame movable accessory 69 touches the player. According to this configuration, the player can enjoy the performance physically in addition to the visual sense, and can enjoy the performance of moving the character to the maximum. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the above-described double accessory productions A and B, the frame movable accessory 69 is made of a softer material than the first movable accessory 14 . According to this configuration, the player can be prevented from being injured, and the player can be encouraged to enjoy the game. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect XM-1]
A game machine comprising a game machine frame, a game board, a first movable member, and a second movable member, and capable of executing a plurality of effects,
The first movable member is arranged in a space within a frame formed by the game machine frame and the game board,
The second movable member is arranged in an extra-frame space outside the intra-frame space,
As one of the plurality of effects, a first effect may be performed,
As one of the plurality of effects, a second effect may be performed,
The first effect is a effect of moving the first movable member,
The second effect is a effect of moving the second movable member,
A combination effect including the first effect and the second effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the second effect is performed while the first effect is being performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XM-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect XM-1,
further comprising display means capable of executing display effects,
As one of the plurality of effects, a third effect may be performed,
The third effect is a effect of displaying a jackpot pattern on the display means,
The combination effect may include the third effect,
In the combination effect, the movement of the first movable member in the first effect and the movement of the second movable member in the second effect each suggest a big win, and the third effect is , performed after the first effect and the second effect are performed,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XM-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect XM-2,
In the combination effect, the first movable member in the first effect and the second movable member in the second effect are both movable in a predetermined direction,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XM-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect XM-3,
further comprising operation means that can be operated by the player applying force in a predetermined operation direction;
The second movable member is arranged on an extension line in a direction opposite to the operation direction with respect to the operation means,
In the combination effect, when the second effect is performed when the player touches the operation means to apply force in the operation direction, the second movable member is movable in the predetermined direction. By doing so, the second movable member touches the player,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XM-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect XM-4,
The second movable member in the second effect is made of a softer material than the first movable member in the first effect,
A gaming machine characterized by:

The movable member contact effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 129 to 131. FIG. In FIGS. 129 to 131, various movable accessories arranged around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted for ease of viewing.

This movable member contact effect can be executed during the change. That is, various commands received from the sub-control board 90 are analyzed, and when instructions to execute a movable member contact effect are included, various commands received from the sub-control board 90 by the lamp control board 107 (for example, movable member command containing an instruction to execute a contact effect) is analyzed, the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 provided on the game board 2 are operated, and the lower end of the right side of the front frame 53 A projecting portion 603, which is provided on the handle 60 that is arranged, is operated, and a frame that is provided on the front frame 53 on the upper, lower, left, and right sides of the handle 60 that is arranged on the lower end of the right side of the front frame 53 is movable. For example, the bodies 69a to 69d are moved. The lamp control board 107 controls an electric drive source (for example, a motor) that operates the first movable accessory 14 and an electric drive source (for example, a motor) that operates the second movable accessory 15. and an electric drive source (for example, a motor or solenoid) for operating the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d.

Here, the movable member contact effect A will be described first, and the movable member contact effect B and then the movable member contact effect C will be described in order.

[Movable member contact effect A]
The movable member contact effect A will be described with reference to FIG. 129 is a diagram for explaining the movable member contact effect A. FIG. The movable member contact effect A can be executed during the change. 129, the touch switch 114 for detecting the contact of the handle 60, the firing volume 115 for detecting the amount of rotation of the handle 60, and the like are omitted.

First, the handle 60 is arranged at the lower end on the right side of the front frame 53 as described above. As shown in FIGS. 129(A) and 129(B), the handle 60 has a resin ring-shaped operating lever 601 which is connected between a resin cylindrical handle base (not shown) and a resin spherical shell-shaped front cover 602 . It is configured to be rotatably provided between them. The operation lever 601 is formed in an annular shape, and finger hooking projections 601a are integrally formed at three locations on its outer peripheral surface. By placing the player's finger on the space between these three finger-hooking protrusions 601a, when the operating lever 601 is rotated, the finger-hooking protrusion 601a catches the player's finger, making it easier to rotate the operating lever 601. there is

The handle base is made of colored and opaque (for example, white) resin, and the operation lever 601 is made of colored and opaque (for example, black, or may be the same color as the handle base (for example, white)) resin. The front cover 602 is made of colorless and transparent resin. An inner lens is provided on the frontmost side accommodated inside the front cover 602, and a decorative substrate on which a plurality of full-color LEDs are mounted behind the inner lens. is provided. The inner lens and the decorative substrate have through holes formed in portions corresponding to ribs 602aa, which will be described later, with through holes that are larger than the size of the outer periphery of the ribs 602aa. In other words, the inner lens and the decorative substrate are designed not to interfere with the projecting portion 603, which will be described later.

The inner lens irregularly refracts the light from the multiple full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate, making it difficult to recognize the presence of the decorative substrate placed behind the inner lens. . For this reason, even when all of the multiple full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate are turned off, these multiple full-color LEDs are difficult to see through the inner lens. The inner lens may be transparent or translucent.

When a plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate emit light, the light refracted by the inner lens is emitted through the front cover 602, and the front cover 602 emits light. As a result, the light emission mode of the front cover 602 can be changed according to the light emission mode of the plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate.

As for the method of operating the handle 60, first, the player grips the handle 60 with the palm of the hand so as to wrap it from the front, and puts the player's fingers on the spaces between the three finger hooking projections 601a. When the player rotates the control lever 601 in the clockwise direction to increase the amount of rotation, the shooting strength of the game ball increases, and a game is played by the shooting device 112 with the shooting strength of the game ball corresponding to the amount of rotation of the rotation operation. A ball is shot toward a game area 3 partitioned on the game board 2 . When the player loosens the clockwise rotation of the control lever 601, the handle 60 is rotated counterclockwise by the biasing force of a return spring (not shown) provided in the handle 60, thereby weakening the shooting strength of the game ball. If the player continues to rotate the operating lever 601 in the clockwise direction or removes the palm from the handle 60, the operating lever 601 is returned to the original position by the biasing force of a return spring (not shown) provided in the handle 60. , and the shooting of game balls is stopped.

On the spherical surface of the spherical shell-shaped front cover 602, a plurality of elongated holes 602a are formed radially on the same circumference so that the longitudinal direction faces the outer circumference (here, there are 12 elongated holes 602a). A rib 602aa is formed on the peripheral surface of the long hole 602a and projects toward the inner space (depth direction) of the front cover 602 by a predetermined distance (approximately 10 mm in this embodiment), and the inner peripheral surface of the long hole 602a is smooth. is formed in

In the inner space between the front cover 602 and the operating lever 601, a projecting portion 603 is provided corresponding to each elongated hole 602a. Furthermore, a forward/rearward movement mechanism 604 is provided which includes an electric drive source (for example, a motor or a solenoid) that moves the projecting portion 603 in the forward/rearward direction along the inner peripheral surface of the elongated hole 602a. In addition to the electric drive source, the back-and-forth movement mechanism 604 includes, for example, a speed reducer that reduces the rotation of the motor when the electric drive source is a motor, or a rotary motion of the motor (a rotary motion that reduces the rotation of the motor). A motion converting mechanism for converting the linear motion of the projection 603, a mechanism for transmitting the linear motion of the plunger of the solenoid to the linear motion of the projection 603 when the electrical drive source is a solenoid, and in addition to these mechanisms , a return spring, a contact spring that constitutes an overload prevention mechanism, and the like.

The projecting portion 603 can reciprocate between a retracted position (home position) and an advanced position, and is formed of a colored and opaque (for example, red) flexible member. As described above, the front cover 602 has an inner lens formed in a predetermined shape on the frontmost side accommodated inside the front cover 602, and a plurality of full-color LEDs are mounted behind the inner lens. Although the decorative board is provided, even if the light emitting mode of the front cover 602 can be changed by the light emitting mode of a plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative board, the projecting portion 603 is colored and opaque (for example, , red), the light emission mode of the projecting portion 603 cannot be changed.

The plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate are arranged before the timing at which the projection 603 is activated (timing at which the operation mode of the projection 603 is started) (for example, at the timing at which the projection 603 is activated (timing at which the projection 603 The light emission starts in a predetermined light emission mode from 5 seconds before the start of the operation mode), and the light emission continues until the operation of the projecting portion 603 ends. In other words, the plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the decoration board is an effect that foretells the actuation of the projecting portion 603 . Predetermined light emission modes include blue lighting, green lighting, red lighting, purple lighting, golden color (yellow) lighting, and rainbow color lighting, where blue lighting→green lighting→red lighting→purple lighting→golden color (yellow). The probability of winning increases in the order of lighting → rainbow color lighting (rich hit). In other words, the expected degree of hit by the operation of the protruding portion 603 can be suggested by the light emitting mode of the plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate housed inside the front cover 602.

When the protruding portion 603 is arranged at the retracted position (home position), the front surface of the protruding portion 603 is arranged on the inner peripheral surface of the long hole 602a. A predetermined distance dimension (in this embodiment, half the length of the rib 602aa (5 mm)) is recessed in depth (FIG. 129(A)). In other words, even when the player grips the palm of the handle 60 from the front and places the player's fingers between the three finger hooking projections 601a, the projecting portion 603 is at the retracted position (home position). , so that the player's palm does not come into contact with the tip of the projecting portion 603 at all. In addition, since the biasing force of the return spring acts on the projecting portion 603, when the game machine 1 is not powered on, or when the power supply is cut off due to a power failure during the game, the biasing force of the return spring is applied. , the projection 603 is returned to the retracted position (home position).

On the other hand, when the protruding portion 603 is arranged at the advanced position, the protruding portion 603 protrudes from the spherical surface of the front cover 602 through the long hole 602a by a predetermined distance (about 10 mm at maximum in this embodiment). It will be in a state where it is closed (FIG. 129(B)). That is, when the player grasps the handle 60 from the front with the palm wrapped around the player's palm and places the player's fingers between the three finger hooking protrusions 601a, the protruding portion 603 is arranged at the advanced position. The player's palm is designed to come into contact with the tip of the projecting portion 603 .

Note that even if the player's palm comes into contact with the tip of the projecting portion 603, the tip of the projecting portion 603 that is in contact with the player's palm does not move any further ( An overload protection mechanism is provided on the back and forth movement mechanism 604 (which prevents the player's palm from trying to pull away from the handle 60). This overload prevention mechanism is mainly composed of a contact spring. The tip (front surface) of the projecting portion 603 is formed into a rounded shape. As a result, even if the tip of the projecting portion 603 touches the player's palm in a state in which the player is gripping the handle 60 from the front so as to wrap the palm of the hand, the tip of the projecting portion 603 (the front surface of the projecting portion 603) does not touch the player's palm. ) from catching on and causing injury.

The operation modes of the projections 603 are operation mode 1 in which all the projections 603 move simultaneously from the retracted position (home position) to the advanced position and then return to the retracted position (home position) all at once. Operation mode 2 in which the movement is clockwise from the retracted position (home position) to the advanced position and then returns to the retracted position (home position), and one projecting portion 603 moves counterclockwise in order from the retracted position (home position). Operation mode 3, moving to the advanced position and returning to the retracted position (home position), 3 to 4 protrusions 603 form a wave shape, and the protrusions 603 are moved to the retracted position so that the waves propagate clockwise in order. Operation mode 4, moving from (home position) to the advanced position and returning to the retracted position (home position) again, forming waves from three to four protrusions 603 so that the waves propagate in order counterclockwise An operation mode 5 in which the projecting portion 603 is moved from the retracted position (home position) to the advanced position and returned to the retracted position (home position) can be mentioned.

Next, the timing at which the projecting portion 603 is operated (the timing at which the operating mode of the projecting portion 603 is started) will be described. First, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern of the stereoscopic image are rotated from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. A variable effect (variable display) of decorative patterns (symbols: number “1” to number “9”) is started in the display mode. When the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative design is started, the decorative design that is stopped and displayed moves slowly (at a low speed) in a floating display mode for a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 mm) (in other words, Then, as the stop display of the decorative pattern is canceled, the decorative pattern changes to a display mode in which the decorative pattern is about to move, and then the speed is gradually increased from a low speed toward the bottom to change from an opaque state to a translucent state. , resulting in a display mode that fluctuates at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed temporarily and then stopped). The decorative pattern is displayed in a state of being temporarily stopped and slowly moved in the vertical direction in small steps. It should be noted that there are a plurality of background images for variable display of decorative patterns, and one of the plurality of background images is selected.

The variation icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative design, the middle decorative design, and the right decorative design that are currently changing as the digestion of the first special figure reservation is the variable display displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed (placed) at position 9Cd (on the rectangular image (pedestal image)). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as the first special figure hold. In this pending display area, pending icons 9A can be displayed (can be placed) at four pending display positions 9Ad (on rectangular images (pedestal images)), and up to four pending icons 9A can be stocked. can be done. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are a first reserved display position 9Ad, a second reserved display position 9Ad, a third reserved display position 9Ad, and a fourth reserved display position 9Ad from a position near the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. They are linearly arranged and displayed along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the display position 9Ad.

Although both the variable display position 9Cd and the reserved display position 9Ad have a rectangular shape, they may have the same size or different sizes. In this embodiment, both the variable display position 9Cd and the reserved display position 9Ad have a rectangular shape, and the size of the variable display position 9Cd (horizontal distance dimension) is equal to the size of the reserved display position 9Ad (horizontal distance dimension). dimension) (both distance dimensions in the vertical direction are the same distance dimension). This is to distinguish between the variable icon 9C displayed at the variable display position 9Cd and the pending icon 9A displayed at the pending display position 9Ad.

Here, a yellow (gold) star-shaped variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, a white spherical suspension icon 9A is displayed at the first suspension display position 9Ad, and the second suspension display positions 9Ad to No pending icon is displayed at the fourth pending display position 9Ad. In other words, there is only one white spherical pending icon that has not been digested and is stocked. In addition, in the following description, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 after this.

Here, to briefly explain the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icons"), the differences in the shapes and colors of the icons can be used to determine the difference in the degree of expectation of winning during the lottery corresponding to the icon. represents. For example, among six icons: a yellow (gold) star icon, a black sphere icon, a smiling sphere icon, a red sphere icon, a blue sphere icon, and a white sphere icon, the yellow (gold) star icon icon has the highest probability of winning, the black spherical icon has the second highest probability of winning, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest probability of winning, and the red spherical icon has the fourth highest probability of winning. The blue spherical icon has the fifth highest probability of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest probability of winning.

After that, the left decorative pattern is temporarily stopped with the number "2" and slowly moved up and down in small steps, and the right decorative pattern is temporarily displayed with the number "2". It is stopped and displayed, and the display mode is such that it slowly moves in the vertical direction. At this time, the middle decorative pattern continues the variable effect (variable display).

Subsequently, when the battle effect is started, a friendly character appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, an enemy character appears from the left side of the display screen 7a, and a battle effect between the friendly character and the enemy character unfolds in the center of the display screen 7a. be done. The battle effect is a effect in which the expectation of a big hit is set high in advance. In the battle production, the left decorative pattern, the middle decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern disappear from the display screen 7a.

In the battle production, when the ally character wins and the enemy character loses, the left decorative pattern, the middle decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed (confirmed display) with the same pattern, and after that, a winning game (winning effect ) is started. When the win is confirmed, the change icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a due to the end of the change. On the other hand, in the battle production, when the ally character is defeated and the enemy character wins, the left decorative pattern, the middle decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are stopped (confirmed display) at the same timing, and the left decorative pattern and the middle decorative pattern are displayed at the same timing. The decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern are not the same pattern, and are lost. At this time, the change icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a due to the end of the change.

When a friendly character and an enemy character are fighting by battle production, the friendly character moves to the right side of the display screen 7a, and the enemy character moves to the left side of the display screen 7a, a production button is displayed near the bottom center of the display screen 7a. A button image simulating 63 is displayed, and a message image of "continuous hits!" prompting the player to press the effect button 63 is displayed above the button image. This message image MG has a higher hit expectation in the order of "Press!"→"Continuous hits!"→"Long press!". An arrow image pointing downward is also displayed on the display screen 7a between the button image and the message image, and the arrow image reciprocates repeatedly in the vertical direction, so that the player can use the effect button 63 also by the arrow image. A pressing operation (an operation of pressing the pressing operation portion of the production button 63 downward) can be prompted. The button image, the message image, and the arrow image disappear from the display screen 7a when the player presses the production button 63, or when the player does not press the production button 63. It disappears from the display screen 7a after a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed.

When the effect button 63 is pressed, or when a predetermined period of time elapses without the effect button 63 being pressed, a first premium background image (so-called “second 1 rainbow background image”) is displayed on the display screen 7a, the friend character and the enemy character disappear from the display screen 7a, and the second movable accessory 15 provided on the game board 2 moves to the retreat position above the image display device 7. (home position), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 advances (moves) toward the front (front) of the display screen 7a and toward the center position (advance position) of the display screen 7a, and moves for a predetermined time (for example, about 5 seconds). After a predetermined period of time has passed, the second movable accessory 15 returns from the advance position to the retreat position (home position), and a dedicated victory background image is displayed on the display screen 7a as a background image to convey the victory of the teammate character. An enemy character appears (is displayed) in the center of the display screen 7a, and the enemy character becomes smaller in size as it recedes in the depth direction. Become. After that, a special winning background image for conveying the winning is displayed on the display screen 7a as a background image, and the left decorative pattern, the middle decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed with the same pattern (here, number "2").

The second movable accessory 15 provided on the game board 2 moves from the resting position (home position) above the image display device 7 to the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the display screen. In conjunction with the start of the operation of advancing (moving) toward the central position (advanced position) of 7a, the operation mode of the projecting portion 603 provided on the handle 60 arranged at the lower end on the right side of the front frame 53. 1 will be started.

That is, the operation of the second movable accessory 15 provided on the game board 2 and the operation of the projecting portion 603 provided on the handle 60 arranged at the lower end on the right side of the front frame 53 are interlocked to move respectively. It will start.

Specifically, from the state where the second movable accessory 15 is stationary at the retracted position (home position) above the image display device 7, the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the display screen 7a In conjunction with the start of the operation of advancing (moving) toward the central position (advanced position), the projecting portion 603 starts advancing (moving) from the retracted position (home position) toward the advanced position, In conjunction with the second movable accessory 15 stopping for a predetermined time (for example, about 5 seconds) at the advanced position, the protruding part 603 stops for a predetermined time at the advanced position. In conjunction with the accessory 15 starting to return from the advanced position to the retracted position (home position), the projecting part 603 starts returning from the advanced position to the retracted position (home position).

Here, the operation mode of the projecting portion 603 is the operation mode 1, but of course, any of the operation modes 2 to 5 may be used. In this case, the sub-control board 90 determines the operation mode of the projecting portion 603 . In operation mode 2 to operation mode 5, the second movable accessory 15 moves from the state where the second movable accessory 15 is stationary at the retracted position (home position) above the image display device 7 to the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It advances (moves) toward the center position (advancing position) of the display screen 7a and then returns to the retracted position (home position) again during the second movable body accessory actuation period, which is performed continuously. .

Specifically, in the operation mode 2 of the projecting part 603, one projecting part 603 sequentially moves clockwise from the retracted position (home position) to the advanced position and retracts again during the second movable accessory operation period. The operation to return to the position (home position) is continuously performed, and when the second movable accessory actuation period elapses, all the protrusions 603 return to the retracted position (home position), and in the operation mode 3 of the protrusions 603, During the second movable accessory actuation period, one protruding part 603 sequentially moves counterclockwise from the retracted position (home position) to the advanced position and then returns to the retracted position (home position) continuously. , When the second movable accessory actuation period elapses, all the protrusions 603 return to the retracted position (home position), and in the operation mode 4 of the protrusions 603, during the second movable accessory actuation period, three to The protrusions 603 are moved from the retracted position (home position) to the advanced position and then returned to the retracted position (home position) so that waves are formed from the four protrusions 603 and propagate clockwise in order. After the second movable accessory actuation period has elapsed, all the projections 603 return to the retracted position (home position), and in the operation mode 5 of the protrusions 603, during the second movable accessory actuation period , the protrusions 603 are moved from the retracted position (home position) to the advanced position so that waves are formed from three to four protrusions 603 and the waves propagate counterclockwise in order, and then again the retracted position (home position). ) is continuously performed, and when the second movable body accessory actuation period elapses, all the projections 603 return to the retracted position (home position).

As shown in FIG. 129(C), when the effect button 63 is pressed or a predetermined period of time elapses without the effect button 63 being pressed, a first premium background image having seven colors as a background image (so-called , “first rainbow background image”) is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the handle arranged at the lower end on the right side of the front frame 53 interlocks with the movement of the second movable accessory 15 provided on the game board 2. Operation mode 1 of the protrusion 603 provided on 60 has started. However, instead of the second movable accessory 15, the operation mode 1 of the protruding part 603 may be started in conjunction with the operation of the first movable accessory 14 provided on the game board 2.

Specifically, when the effect button 63 is pressed or a predetermined period of time elapses without the effect button 63 being pressed, a first premium background image having seven colors as the background image is displayed as shown in FIG. 129(D). A second premium background image (so-called "second rainbow background image") different from the original is displayed on the display screen 7a, the friend character and the enemy character disappear from the display screen 7a, and the first movable combination provided on the game board 2 is displayed. The object 14 moves from a resting position (home position) on the left side of the image display device 7 to the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and toward the center position (advance position) of the display screen 7a. , and reciprocates repeatedly in the left-right direction in small steps at the center position (advance position) for a predetermined time (for example, about 5 seconds). After a predetermined time elapses, the first movable accessory 14 returns from the advanced position to the retracted position (home position), and a dedicated victory background image is displayed on the display screen 7a as a background image to convey the victory of the teammate character. An enemy character appears (is displayed) in the center of the display screen 7a, and the enemy character becomes smaller in size as it recedes in the depth direction. Become. After that, a special winning background image for conveying the winning is displayed on the display screen 7a as a background image, and the left decorative pattern, the middle decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed with the same pattern (here, number "2").

The first movable accessory 14 provided on the game board 2 is displayed in the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 from the resting position (home position) on the left side of the image display device 7. The protrusion 603 provided on the handle 60 arranged at the lower end on the right side of the front frame 53 moves in conjunction with the start of the operation of advancing (moving) toward the center position (advanced position) of the screen 7a. Aspect 1 will be started.

In other words, the operation of the first movable accessory 14 provided on the game board 2 and the operation of the projecting portion 603 provided on the handle 60 arranged at the lower end on the right side of the front frame 53 are interlocked to move respectively. It will start.

Specifically, from a state where the first movable accessory 14 is stationary at the left retracted position (home position) of the image display device 7, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is in front of the display screen 7a. When the protruding part 603 starts advancing (moving) toward the center position (advancing position), the protruding portion 603 starts advancing (moving) from the retracted position (home position) toward the advanced position. , in conjunction with the reciprocating motion of the first movable accessory 14 in the central position (advance position) for a predetermined period of time (for example, about 5 seconds), the projecting portion 603 moves back and forth at the advanced position for a predetermined period of time. When it stops and a predetermined time elapses, the projecting portion 603 moves from the advanced position to the retracted position (home position) in conjunction with the first movable accessory 14 starting to return from the advanced position to the retracted position (home position). ) again.

Here, the operation mode of the projecting portion 603 is the operation mode 1, but of course, any of the operation modes 2 to 5 may be used. In this case, the sub-control board 90 determines the operation mode of the projecting portion 603 . In operation mode 2 to operation mode 5, the first movable accessory 14 moves from the state where the first movable accessory 14 is stationary at the retreat position (home position) on the left side of the image display device 7 to the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It advances (moves) toward the center position (advancing position) of the display screen 7a, and then returns to the retracted position (home position). there is

Specifically, in the operation mode 2 of the projecting part 603, one projecting part 603 sequentially moves clockwise from the retracted position (home position) to the advanced position and retracts again during the first movable accessory operation period. The operation to return to the position (home position) is continuously performed, and when the first movable body accessory actuation period elapses, all the protrusions 603 return to the retracted position (home position), and in the operation mode 3 of the protrusions 603, During the first movable accessory actuation period, one protruding part 603 sequentially moves counterclockwise from the retracted position (home position) to the advanced position and then returns to the retracted position (home position) continuously. , When the first movable accessory actuation period elapses, all the protrusions 603 return to the retracted position (home position), and in the operation mode 4 of the protrusions 603, during the first movable accessory actuation period, three to The protrusions 603 are moved from the retracted position (home position) to the advanced position and then returned to the retracted position (home position) so that waves are formed from the four protrusions 603 and propagate clockwise in order. After the first movable accessory actuation period has elapsed, all the projecting parts 603 return to the retracted position (home position), and in the operation mode 5 of the projecting parts 603, during the first movable accessory actuation period , the protrusions 603 are moved from the retracted position (home position) to the advanced position so that waves are formed from three to four protrusions 603 and the waves propagate counterclockwise in order, and then again the retracted position (home position). ) is continuously performed, and when the first movable body accessory actuation period elapses, all the projections 603 return to the retracted position (home position).

In the above-described embodiment, since the biasing force of the return spring acts on the projecting portion 603 as described above, when the game machine 1 is not powered on, a power failure occurs during the game and the power is turned off. is blocked, the projection 603 is returned to the retracted position (home position) by the biasing force of the return spring. The projection 603 does not project to the advanced position unless it is the timing at which it reaches the advanced position. Therefore, even if a player who is about to start playing a game or an attendant such as a store clerk at a game parlor disinfects the handle 60 with alcohol, the projecting portion 603 cannot be disinfected with alcohol. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the projecting portion 603 projects to the advanced position when the customer waiting demonstration effect is being performed, and when the customer waiting demonstration effect ends, the projecting portion 603 moves to the retracted position (home position). position). In the state where the projection part 603 protrudes to the advanced position with the demonstration performance for waiting for customers, when the player or staff member of the game parlor touches the handle 60, the player or the staff member of the game parlor or the like touches the handle 60. After a predetermined period of time (for example, about 5 seconds as a period during which the protruding part 603 can be disinfected with alcohol) has passed since the staff touched it, the protruding part 603 is returned to the retracted position (home position). there is

Further, in the above-described embodiment, since the biasing force of the return spring acts on the projecting portion 603 as described above, when the game machine 1 is not powered on, a power failure occurs during the game and the power supply is restored. When the power is cut off, the projecting portion 603 is returned to the retracted position (home position) by the biasing force of the return spring. When the power is turned off, the projecting portion 603 may be moved to the advanced position by the biasing force of the return spring. In this way, for example, a staff member such as a store clerk at a game parlor can confirm that the game machine 1 is in a state where the power is not turned on (a state in which the power of the game machine 1 is shut off) before the business starts or after the business ends. Since the protruding portion 603 can move to the advanced position and be in a protruding state, the protruding portion 603 can be disinfected with alcohol.

[Movable member contact effect B]
Next, the movable member contact effect B will be described with reference to FIG. 130 is a diagram for explaining the movable member contact effect B. FIG. The movable member contact effect B can be executed during the change. 130, the touch switch 114 for detecting the contact of the handle 60, the firing volume 115 for detecting the amount of rotation of the handle 60, and the like are omitted.

First, the handle 60 is arranged at the lower end on the right side of the front frame 53 as described above. As shown in FIGS. 130(A) and 130(B), the handle 60 has a resin ring-shaped operating lever 601 which is connected between a resin cylindrical handle base (not shown) and a resin spherical shell-shaped front cover 602 . It is configured to be rotatably provided between them. The operating lever 601 is formed in an annular shape, and is integrally formed with finger hooking projections 601a at three locations on its outer peripheral surface. By placing the player's finger on the space between these three finger-hooking protrusions 601a, the finger-hooking protrusion 601a can be easily rotated when the operating lever 601 is rotated. there is

The handle base is made of colored and opaque (for example, white) resin, and the operating lever 601 is made of colored and opaque (for example, black, or may be the same color as the handle base (for example, white)) resin. The front cover 602 is made of colorless and transparent resin. An inner lens is provided on the frontmost side accommodated inside the front cover 602, and a decorative substrate on which a plurality of full-color LEDs are mounted behind the inner lens. is provided. The inner lens and the decorative substrate have through holes formed in portions corresponding to ribs 602aa, which will be described later, with through holes that are larger than the size of the outer periphery of the ribs 602aa. In other words, the inner lens and the decorative substrate are designed not to interfere with the projecting portion 603, which will be described later.

The inner lens irregularly refracts the light from the multiple full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate, making it difficult to recognize the presence of the decorative substrate placed behind the inner lens. . For this reason, even when all of the multiple full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate are turned off, the multiple full-color LEDs are difficult to see through the inner lens. The inner lens may be transparent or translucent.

When a plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate emit light, the light refracted by the inner lens is emitted through the front cover 602, and the front cover 602 emits light. As a result, the light emission mode of the front cover 602 can be changed according to the light emission mode of the plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate.

As for the method of operating the handle 60, first, the player grips the handle 60 with the palm of the hand so as to wrap it from the front, and puts the player's fingers on the spaces between the three finger hooking projections 601a. When the player rotates the control lever 601 clockwise to increase the amount of rotation, the shooting strength of the game ball increases, and the shooting device 112 performs a game with the shooting strength of the game ball corresponding to the amount of rotation of the rotation operation. A ball is shot toward a game area 3 partitioned on the game board 2 . When the player releases the clockwise rotation of the control lever 601, the handle 60 is rotated counterclockwise by the biasing force of a return spring (not shown) provided in the handle 60, thereby weakening the shooting strength of the game ball. If the player continues to rotate the operating lever 601 in the clockwise direction or removes the palm from the handle 60, the operating lever 601 is returned to the original position by the biasing force of a return spring (not shown) provided in the handle 60. , and the shooting of game balls is stopped.

A single large hole 602a is provided in the center of the spherical surface of the spherical shell-shaped front cover 602 . A rib 602aa is formed on the peripheral surface of the hole 602a and projects toward the inner space (depth direction) of the front cover 602 by a predetermined distance (approximately 10 mm in this embodiment), so that the inner peripheral surface of the hole 602a is formed smoothly. It is

In the inner space between the front cover 602 and the operating lever 601, a projecting portion 603 is provided that moves in the front-rear direction from the inner space of the front cover 602 along the inner peripheral surface of the hole 602a. A back-and-forth movement mechanism 604 having an electric drive source (for example, a motor or a solenoid) is provided for moving in the back-and-forth direction along the inner peripheral surface of the. In addition to the electric drive source, the back-and-forth movement mechanism 604 includes, for example, a speed reducer that reduces the rotation of the motor when the electric drive source is a motor, or a rotary motion of the motor (a rotary motion that reduces the rotation of the motor). A motion converting mechanism for converting the linear motion of the projection 603, a mechanism for transmitting the linear motion of the plunger of the solenoid to the linear motion of the projection 603 when the electrical drive source is a solenoid, and in addition to these mechanisms , a return spring, a contact spring that constitutes an overload prevention mechanism, and the like.

The projecting portion 603 can reciprocate between a retracted position (home position) and an advanced position, and is formed of a colored and opaque (for example, red) flexible member. As described above, the front cover 602 has an inner lens formed in a predetermined shape on the frontmost side accommodated inside the front cover 602, and a plurality of full-color LEDs are mounted behind the inner lens. Although the decorative board is provided, even if the light emitting mode of the front cover 602 can be changed by the light emitting mode of a plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative board, the projecting portion 603 is colored and opaque (for example, , red), the light emission mode of the projecting portion 603 cannot be changed.

The plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate are arranged before the timing when the protrusion 603 is activated (timing when the operation mode of the protrusion 603 is started) (for example, when the protrusion 603 is activated (timing when the protrusion 603 is activated). The light emission starts in a predetermined light emission mode from 5 seconds before the start of the operation mode), and the light emission continues until the operation of the projecting portion 603 ends. In other words, the plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the decoration board is an effect that foretells the actuation of the projecting portion 603 . Predetermined light emission modes include blue lighting, green lighting, red lighting, purple lighting, golden color (yellow) lighting, and rainbow color lighting, where blue lighting→green lighting→red lighting→purple lighting→golden color (yellow). The probability of winning increases in the order of lighting → rainbow color lighting (rich hit). In other words, the expected degree of hit by the operation of the protruding portion 603 can be suggested by the light emitting mode of the plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate housed inside the front cover 602.

When the protruding portion 603 is arranged at the retracted position (home position), the front surface of the protruding portion 603 is arranged on the inner peripheral surface of the hole 602a. 130(A). In other words, even when the player grips the palm of the handle 60 so as to wrap it from the front and places the player's fingers between the three finger hooking projections 601a, the projecting portion 603 is at the retracted position (home position). , so that the player's palm does not come into contact with the tip of the projecting portion 603 at all. In addition, since the biasing force of the return spring acts on the protruding portion 603, when the game machine 1 is not powered on, or when the power is cut off due to a power failure during the game, the biasing force of the return spring is applied. , the projection 603 is returned to the retracted position (home position).

On the other hand, when the protruding portion 603 is arranged at the advanced position, the protruding portion 603 protrudes from the spherical surface of the front cover 602 through the hole 602a by a predetermined distance dimension (about 10 mm at maximum in this embodiment). state (FIG. 130(B)). That is, when the player grasps the handle 60 from the front with the palm wrapped around the player's palm and places the player's fingers between the three finger hooking protrusions 601a, the protruding portion 603 is arranged at the advanced position. The player's palm is designed to come into contact with the tip of the projecting portion 603 .

Note that even if the player's palm comes into contact with the tip of the projecting portion 603, the tip of the projecting portion 603 that is in contact with the player's palm does not move any further ( An overload protection mechanism is provided on the back and forth movement mechanism 604 (which prevents the player's palm from trying to pull away from the handle 60). This overload prevention mechanism is mainly composed of a contact spring. The tip (front surface) of the projecting portion 603 is formed into a rounded shape. As a result, even if the tip of the projecting portion 603 touches the player's palm in a state in which the player is gripping the handle 60 from the front so as to wrap the palm of the hand, the tip of the projecting portion 603 (the front surface of the projecting portion 603) does not touch the player's palm. ) from catching on and causing injury.

As an operation mode of the projecting portion 603, there is an operation mode in which the projecting portion 603 moves from the retracted position (home position) to the advanced position and then returns to the retracted position (home position). By using this operation mode, for example, it is possible to realize an operation in which the projecting portion 603 is kept projecting to the advanced position for a predetermined period of time, or to realize an operation in which the projecting portion 603 intermittently projects to the advanced position. In addition, it is possible to realize an operation in which the projecting portion 603 continuously projects to the advanced position or retracts to the retracted position (home position) like piston movement.

Next, the timing at which the projecting portion 603 is actuated (the timing at which the operating mode of the projecting portion 603 is started) will be described. First, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern of the stereoscopic image are rotated from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. A variable effect (variable display) of decorative patterns (symbols: number “1” to number “9”) is started in the display mode. When the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative design is started, the decorative design that is stopped and displayed moves slowly (at a low speed) in a floating display mode for a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 mm) (in other words, Then, as the stop display of the decorative pattern is canceled, the decorative pattern changes to a display mode in which it will move from now on), and the speed is gradually increased from a low speed toward the bottom to change from an opaque state to a translucent state. , resulting in a display mode that fluctuates at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed temporarily and then stopped). The decorative pattern is displayed in a state of being temporarily stopped and slowly moved in the vertical direction in small steps. In addition, there are a plurality of background images for the variable display of decorative patterns, and one of the plurality of background images is selected.

The variation icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative design, the middle decorative design, and the right decorative design that are currently changing as the digestion of the first special figure reservation is the variable display displayed in the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed (placed) at position 9Cd (on the rectangular image (pedestal image)). In the region of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as the first special figure hold. In this pending display area, pending icons 9A can be displayed (can be placed) at four pending display positions 9Ad (on rectangular images (pedestal images)), and up to four pending icons 9A can be stocked. is now possible. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are a first reserved display position 9Ad, a second reserved display position 9Ad, a third reserved display position 9Ad, and a fourth reserved display position 9Ad from a position near the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. They are linearly arranged and displayed along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the display position 9Ad.

Although both the variable display position 9Cd and the reserved display position 9Ad have a rectangular shape, they may have the same size or different sizes. In this embodiment, both the variable display position 9Cd and the reserved display position 9Ad have a rectangular shape, and the size of the variable display position 9Cd (horizontal distance dimension) is equal to the size of the reserved display position 9Ad (horizontal distance dimension). dimension) (both distance dimensions in the vertical direction are the same distance dimension). This is for distinguishing between the variable icon 9C displayed at the variable display position 9Cd and the suspended icon 9A displayed at the suspended display position 9Ad.

Here, a yellow (gold) star-shaped variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, a white spherical suspension icon 9A is displayed at the first suspension display position 9Ad, and the second suspension display positions 9Ad to No pending icon is displayed at the fourth pending display position 9Ad. In other words, there is only one white spherical pending icon that has not been digested and is stocked. In addition, in the following description, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 after this.

Here, to briefly explain the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icons"), the differences in the shape and color make it possible to determine the difference in the degree of expectation of winning during the lottery corresponding to the icon. represent. For example, of the six icons: yellow (gold) star icon, black sphere icon, smiling sphere icon, red sphere icon, blue sphere icon, white sphere icon, yellow (gold) star icon icon has the highest probability of winning, the black spherical icon has the second highest probability of winning, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest probability of winning, and the red spherical icon has the fourth highest probability of winning. The blue spherical icon has the fifth highest probability of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest probability of winning.

A variable effect (variable display) of the decorative pattern is started, and after that, the left decorative pattern is temporarily stopped with the number "3" and is displayed in a manner of slowly moving up and down, and the right decorative pattern is temporarily displayed with the number "3". It is stopped and displayed, and the display mode is such that it slowly moves in the vertical direction, and the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern are the same pattern (here, number "3") to form a reach. At this time, the middle decorative pattern continues the variable effect (variable display).

Subsequently, when the battle effect is started, a friendly character appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, an enemy character appears from the left side of the display screen 7a, and a battle effect between the friendly character and the enemy character unfolds in the center of the display screen 7a. be done. The battle effect is a effect in which the expectation of a big hit is set high in advance. In the battle production, the left decorative pattern, the middle decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern disappear from the display screen 7a.

In the battle production, when the ally character wins and the enemy character loses, the left decorative pattern, the middle decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed (confirmed display) with the same pattern, and after that, a winning game (winning effect ) is started. When the win is confirmed, the change icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a due to the end of the change. On the other hand, in the battle production, when the ally character is defeated and the enemy character wins, the left decorative pattern, the middle decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are stopped (confirmed display) at the same timing, and the left decorative pattern and the middle decorative pattern are displayed at the same timing. The decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern are not the same pattern, and are lost. At this time, the change icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a due to the end of the change.

When a friendly character and an enemy character are fighting by battle production, the friendly character moves to the right side of the display screen 7a, and the enemy character moves to the left side of the display screen 7a, a production button is displayed near the bottom center of the display screen 7a. A button image simulating 63 is displayed, and a message image of "Long press!" is displayed above the button image to prompt the player to press the effect button 63 . This message image MG has a higher hit expectation in the order of "Press!"→"Continuous hits!"→"Long press!". An arrow image pointing downward is also displayed on the display screen 7a between the button image and the message image, and the arrow image reciprocates repeatedly in the vertical direction, so that the player can use the effect button 63 also by the arrow image. A pressing operation (an operation of pressing the pressing operation portion of the production button 63 downward) can be prompted. The button image, the message image, and the arrow image disappear from the display screen 7a when the player presses the production button 63, or when the player does not press the production button 63. It disappears from the display screen 7a after a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed.

When the effect button 63 is pressed, or when a predetermined period of time elapses without the effect button 63 being pressed, a first premium background image having seven colors as a background image (so-called "second 1 rainbow background image”) is displayed on the display screen 7a, the friend character and the enemy character disappear from the display screen 7a, and the second movable accessory 15 provided on the game board 2 moves to the retreat position above the image display device 7. (home position), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 advances (moves) toward the front (front) of the display screen 7a and toward the center position (advance position) of the display screen 7a, and moves for a predetermined time (for example, about 5 seconds). After a predetermined period of time has passed, the second movable accessory 15 returns from the advance position to the retreat position (home position), and a dedicated victory background image is displayed on the display screen 7a as a background image to convey the victory of the teammate character. An enemy character appears (is displayed) in the center of the display screen 7a, and the enemy character becomes smaller in size as it recedes in the depth direction. Become. After that, a special win background image for conveying the win is displayed on the display screen 7a as a background image, and the left decorative pattern, the middle decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed with the same pattern (here, number "3").

The second movable accessory 15 provided on the game board 2 moves from the resting position (home position) above the image display device 7 to the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the display screen. In conjunction with the start of the operation of advancing (moving) toward the central position (advanced position) of 7a, the operation mode of the projecting portion 603 provided on the handle 60 arranged at the lower end on the right side of the front frame 53. will be started.

In other words, the operation of the second movable accessory 15 provided on the game board 2 and the operation of the projecting portion 603 provided on the handle 60 arranged at the lower end on the right side of the front frame 53 are interlocked to move respectively. It will start.

Specifically, from the state where the second movable accessory 15 is stationary at the retracted position (home position) above the image display device 7, the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the display screen 7a In conjunction with the start of the operation of advancing (moving) toward the central position (advanced position), the projecting portion 603 starts advancing (moving) from the retracted position (home position) toward the advanced position, In conjunction with the second movable accessory 15 stopping for a predetermined time (for example, about 5 seconds) at the advanced position, the protruding part 603 stops for a predetermined time at the advanced position. In conjunction with the accessory 15 starting to return from the advanced position to the retracted position (home position), the projecting part 603 starts returning from the advanced position to the retracted position (home position).

Here, as the operation mode of the projecting portion 603, the projecting portion 603 moves from the retracted position (home position) to the advanced position, stops for a predetermined period of time, and then returns to the retracted position (home position). Of course, other modes of operation are also possible. In this case, the sub-control board 90 determines the operation mode of the projecting portion 603 . In another operation mode, the second movable accessory 15 moves from the resting position (home position) above the image display device 7 to the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the display screen 7a. It advances (moves) toward the central position (advancing position) of the , and then returns to the retracted position (home position) again during the second movable body accessory actuation period.

Specifically, during the second movable accessory actuation period, the projecting portion 603 intermittently projects to the advanced position (the projecting portion 603 repeats reciprocating movement between the retracted position (home position) and the advanced position). intermittently not continuously) is performed, and when the second movable body role product operation period elapses, the projecting part 603 returns to the retracted position (home position), or during the second movable body role product operation period, An operation in which the protrusion 603 continuously protrudes to the advanced position and retracts to the retracted position (home position) like a piston motion (an action in which the protrusion 603 repeatedly reciprocates between the retracted position (home position) and the advanced position) is performed. Continuous action) is performed, and when the second movable body accessory actuation period elapses, the protruding part 603 returns to the retracted position (home position).

As shown in FIG. 130(C), when the effect button 63 is pressed or a predetermined period of time elapses without the effect button 63 being pressed, a first premium background image having seven colors as a background image (so-called , “first rainbow background image”) is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the handle arranged at the lower end on the right side of the front frame 53 interlocks with the movement of the second movable accessory 15 provided on the game board 2. The operation mode of the projecting portion 603 provided in 60 (the projecting portion 603 moves from the retracted position (home position) to the advanced position, stops for a predetermined period of time, and then returns to the retracted position (home position)) is started. was However, instead of the second movable accessory 15, the operation mode of the projecting part 603 may be started in conjunction with the operation of the first movable accessory 14 provided on the game board 2. FIG.

Specifically, when the effect button 63 is pressed or a predetermined period of time elapses without the effect button 63 being pressed, a first premium background image having seven colors as the background image is displayed as shown in FIG. 130(D). A second premium background image (so-called "second rainbow background image") different from the original is displayed on the display screen 7a, the friend character and the enemy character disappear from the display screen 7a, and the first movable combination provided on the game board 2 is displayed. The object 14 moves from a resting position (home position) on the left side of the image display device 7 to the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and toward the center position (advance position) of the display screen 7a. , and reciprocates repeatedly in the left-right direction in small steps at the center position (advance position) for a predetermined time (for example, about 5 seconds). After a predetermined time elapses, the first movable accessory 14 returns from the advanced position to the retracted position (home position), and a dedicated victory background image is displayed on the display screen 7a as a background image to convey the victory of the teammate character. An enemy character appears (is displayed) in the center of the display screen 7a, and the enemy character becomes smaller in size as it recedes in the depth direction. Become. After that, a special win background image for conveying the win is displayed on the display screen 7a as a background image, and the left decorative pattern, the middle decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed with the same pattern (here, number "3").

The first movable accessory 14 provided on the game board 2 is displayed in front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 from a resting position (home position) on the left side of the image display device 7. The protrusion 603 provided on the handle 60 arranged at the lower end on the right side of the front frame 53 moves in conjunction with the start of the operation of advancing (moving) toward the center position (advancing position) of the screen 7a. Aspects are to be started.

That is, the operation of the first movable accessory 14 provided on the game board 2 and the operation of the projecting portion 603 provided on the handle 60 arranged at the lower end on the right side of the front frame 53 are interlocked to move respectively. It will start.

Specifically, from a state where the first movable accessory 14 is stationary at the retreat position (home position) on the left side of the image display device 7, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is in front of the display screen 7a. When the protruding part 603 starts advancing (moving) toward the center position (advancing position), the protruding portion 603 starts advancing (moving) from the retracted position (home position) toward the advanced position. , in conjunction with the reciprocating motion of the first movable accessory 14 in the central position (advance position) for a predetermined period of time (for example, about 5 seconds), the protruding part 603 moves back and forth at the advanced position for a predetermined period of time. When the first movable accessory 14 starts returning from the advanced position to the retracted position (home position) after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the projecting portion 603 moves from the advanced position to the retracted position (home position). ) again.

Here, as the operation mode of the projecting portion 603, the projecting portion 603 moves from the retracted position (home position) to the advanced position, stops for a predetermined period of time, and then returns to the retracted position (home position). Of course, other modes of operation are also possible. In this case, the sub-control board 90 determines the operation mode of the projecting portion 603 . In another operation mode, the first movable accessory 14 moves from the state where the first movable accessory 14 is stationary at the left retracted position (home position) of the image display device 7 to the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the display screen It advances (moves) toward the central position (advancing position) of 7a and then returns to the retracted position (home position) again during the first movable body accessory actuation period.

Specifically, during the operation period of the first movable body accessory, the operation of intermittently projecting the projecting portion 603 (the operation of repeatedly moving the projecting portion 603 back and forth between the retracted position (home position) and the advanced position) is continuously performed. When the first movable accessory actuation period elapses, the protruding part 603 returns to the retracted position (home position), or during the first movable accessory actuation period, the piston movement The projecting portion 603 continuously protrudes and retracts like this (the projecting portion 603 continuously reciprocates between the retracted position (home position) and the advanced position), and the first movable body When the accessory actuation period elapses, the projecting portion 603 returns to the retracted position (home position).

In the above-described embodiment, since the biasing force of the return spring acts on the projecting portion 603 as described above, when the game machine 1 is not powered on, a power failure occurs during the game and the power is turned off. is blocked, the projection 603 is returned to the retracted position (home position) by the biasing force of the return spring. The projection 603 does not project to the advanced position unless it is the timing at which it reaches the advanced position. Therefore, even if a player who is about to start playing a game or an attendant such as a store clerk at a game parlor disinfects the handle 60 with alcohol, the projecting portion 603 cannot be disinfected with alcohol. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the projecting portion 603 projects to the advanced position when the customer waiting demonstration effect is being performed, and when the customer waiting demonstration effect ends, the projecting portion 603 moves to the retracted position (home position). position). In the state where the projection part 603 protrudes to the advanced position with the demonstration performance for waiting for customers, when the player or staff member of the game parlor touches the handle 60, the player or the staff member of the game parlor or the like touches the handle 60. After a predetermined period of time (for example, about 5 seconds as a period during which the protruding part 603 can be disinfected with alcohol) has passed since the staff touched it, the protruding part 603 is returned to the retracted position (home position). there is

Further, in the above-described embodiment, since the biasing force of the return spring acts on the projecting portion 603 as described above, when the game machine 1 is not powered on, a power failure occurs during the game and the power supply is restored. When the power is cut off, the projecting portion 603 is returned to the retracted position (home position) by the biasing force of the return spring. When the power supply is shut off, the projecting portion 603 may be moved to the advanced position by the biasing force of the return spring. In this way, for example, a staff member such as a store clerk at a game parlor can confirm that the game machine 1 is in a state where the power is not turned on (a state in which the power of the game machine 1 is shut off) before the business starts or after the business ends. Since the protruding portion 603 can move to the advanced position and be in a protruding state, the protruding portion 603 can be disinfected with alcohol.

[Movable member contact effect C]
Next, the movable member contact effect C will be described with reference to FIG. 131 is a diagram for explaining the movable member contact effect C. FIG. The movable member contact effect C can be executed during the change. 131, the touch switch 114 for detecting the contact of the handle 60, the firing volume 115 for detecting the amount of rotation of the handle 60, and the like are omitted.

First, the handle 60 is arranged at the lower end on the right side of the front frame 53 as described above. As shown in FIGS. 131(A) and 131(B), the handle 60 has a resin ring-shaped operating lever 601 which is formed between a resin cylindrical handle base (not shown) and a resin spherical shell-shaped front cover 602 . It is configured to be rotatably provided between them. The operation lever 601 is formed in an annular shape, and finger hooking projections 601a are integrally formed at three locations on its outer peripheral surface. By placing the player's finger on the space between these three finger-hooking protrusions 601a, when the operating lever 601 is rotated, the finger-hooking protrusion 601a catches the player's finger, making it easier to rotate the operating lever 601. there is

The handle base is made of colored and opaque (for example, white) resin, and the operation lever 601 is made of colored and opaque (for example, black, or may be the same color as the handle base (for example, white)) resin. The front cover 602 is made of colorless and transparent resin. An inner lens is provided on the frontmost side accommodated inside the front cover 602, and a decorative substrate on which a plurality of full-color LEDs are mounted behind the inner lens. is provided.

The inner lens irregularly refracts the light from the multiple full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate, making it difficult to recognize the presence of the decorative substrate placed behind the inner lens. . For this reason, even when all of the multiple full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate are turned off, these multiple full-color LEDs are difficult to see through the inner lens. The inner lens may be transparent or translucent.

When a plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate emit light, the light refracted by the inner lens is emitted through the front cover 602, and the front cover 602 emits light. As a result, the light emission mode of the front cover 602 can be changed according to the light emission mode of the plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate.

As for the method of operating the handle 60, first, the player grips the handle 60 with the palm of the hand so as to wrap it from the front, and puts the player's fingers on the spaces between the three finger hooking projections 601a. When the player rotates the control lever 601 in the clockwise direction to increase the amount of rotation, the shooting strength of the game ball increases, and a game is played by the shooting device 112 with the shooting strength of the game ball corresponding to the amount of rotation of the rotation operation. A ball is shot toward a game area 3 partitioned on the game board 2 . When the player loosens the clockwise rotation of the control lever 601, the handle 60 is rotated counterclockwise by the biasing force of a return spring (not shown) provided in the handle 60, thereby weakening the shooting strength of the game ball. If the player continues to rotate the operating lever 601 in the clockwise direction or removes the palm from the handle 60, the operating lever 601 is returned to the original position by the biasing force of a return spring (not shown) provided in the handle 60. , and the shooting of game balls is stopped.

Frame movable bodies 69a to 69d are provided on the front frame 53 in the vertical and horizontal directions of the handle 60 (that is, around the handle 60). That is, the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d are provided on the front frame 53 separately from the handle 60. As shown in FIG. On the right and left sides of the handle 60 shown in FIG. 1, movable frame bodies 69 (also referred to as movable frame accessories 69), which are movable so-called gimmicks, are provided. is formed with a motif of petals surrounding the handle 60 .

In the front frame 53, in addition to frame movable bodies 69a to 69d formed with flower petals as a motif, the movable frame bodies 69a to 69d are electrically operated to rotate and move to the state of buds and to the state of flowering. A rotary movement mechanism 534 having a drive source (for example, a motor or a solenoid) is provided. In addition to the electric drive source, the rotation movement mechanism 534 includes, for example, a speed reducer that reduces the rotation of the motor when the electric drive source is a motor, or a rotary motion of the motor (a rotary motion that reduces the rotation of the motor). A motion converting mechanism for converting the movable frame bodies 69a to 69d into rotary motion, a mechanism for transmitting the linear motion of the plunger of the solenoid to the rotary motion of the movable frame bodies 69a to 69d when the electrical drive source is a solenoid, and , in addition to these mechanisms, a return spring, a contact spring that constitutes an overload prevention mechanism, and the like.

The movable frame bodies 69a to 69d can reciprocate between a retracted position (home position) and an advanced position, and are each formed of a colored and opaque (for example, red) flexible member. As described above, the front cover 602 has an inner lens formed in a predetermined shape on the frontmost side accommodated inside the front cover 602, and a plurality of full-color LEDs are mounted behind the inner lens. Although the decorative board is provided, even if the light emitting mode of the front cover 602 can be changed according to the light emitting mode of the plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative board, the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d are not used as the handle. 60 is provided on the front frame 53, and furthermore, the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d are colored and opaque (for example, red), so the luminescence mode of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d cannot be changed. It's like

The plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate are arranged before the timing at which the movable frame bodies 69a to 69d are actuated (the timing at which the movable frame bodies 69a to 69d start their operation mode) (for example, the movable frame bodies 69a to 69d is activated (5 seconds before the timing at which the operation mode of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d is started)), light emission starts in a predetermined light emission mode, and the operation of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d is completed. Light emission is continued over a period of time. In other words, the plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the decoration board is an effect that announces the operation of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d. Predetermined light emission modes include blue lighting, green lighting, red lighting, purple lighting, golden color (yellow) lighting, and rainbow color lighting, where blue lighting→green lighting→red lighting→purple lighting→golden color (yellow). The expectation of winning increases in the order of lighting → rainbow color lighting (rich hit). In other words, the expected degree of hit by the operation of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d provided on the front frame 53 separately from the handle 60 is mounted on the decorative substrate housed inside the front cover 602 of the handle 60. It can be suggested by the light emission mode of a plurality of full-color LEDs.

When the movable frame bodies 69a to 69d are arranged at the retracted position (home position), the movable frame bodies 69a to 69d are arranged in the flowering state (state shown in FIG. 131(A)). The movable frame bodies 69a to 69d are arranged in a blooming state even when the player grips the palm of the handle 60 so as to wrap it from the front and places the player's fingers on the spaces between the three finger hooking projections 601a. As a result, the back of the player's hand and fingers do not come into contact with the inner peripheral surfaces of the movable frame bodies 69a to 69d. In addition, since the urging force of the return spring acts on the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d, when the game machine 1 is not powered on, or when the power is cut off due to a power failure during the game, the return spring The movable frame members 69a to 69d are returned to the blooming state by the urging force of .

On the other hand, when the movable frame bodies 69a to 69d are arranged at the advanced position, the movable frame bodies 69a to 69d are arranged in a bud state (state shown in FIG. 131(B)). In a state in which the player grips the palm of the handle 60 so as to wrap it from the front and places the player's fingers between the three finger hooking projections 601a, the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d are arranged in a bud state. Therefore, the backs of the hands and fingers of the player are covered by the movable frame bodies 69a to 69d and come into contact with the inner peripheral surfaces of the movable frame bodies 69a to 69d.

It should be noted that even if the back of the player's hand or fingers come into contact with the inner peripheral surfaces of the movable frame bodies 69a to 69d, the movable frame that is in contact with the back of the player's hand or fingers is designed so that the rotational movement mechanism 534 is not overloaded. The rotation movement mechanism 534 is provided with an overload prevention mechanism that prevents the inner peripheral surfaces of the bodies 69a to 69d from further pressing the backs of the hands and fingers of the player. This overload prevention mechanism is mainly composed of a contact spring. In addition, when the back of the player's hand or fingers are in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d, the back of the player's hand or fingers are moved by the inner peripheral surface of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d to the handle 60 (operating lever 601). or the spherical surface of the front cover 602), the player's hand is pressed against the contact spring that constitutes the overload prevention mechanism in order to release the palm from the handle 60. Against the urging force, it can be easily pulled out toward the player from the space formed by the handle 60 and the movable frame bodies 69a to 69d. Of course, when the movable frame bodies 69a to 69d are arranged in the bud state (the state of FIG. 131(B)), the player must release the palm from the handle 60 and operate the handle 60 again. The user's hand can be inserted into the space formed by the handle 60 and the movable frame members 69a to 69d against the urging force of the contact spring that constitutes the overload prevention mechanism. The front and side surfaces of the movable frame bodies 69a to 69d, which are formed with petal motifs, are each formed into a rounded shape. As a result, when the player pulls out the player's hand from the space formed by the handle 60 and the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d toward the player in order to release the palm from the handle 60, the frame can be moved. It is possible to prevent the front surfaces of the bodies 69a to 69d from being caught on the back of the hand or fingers of the player and inflicting injury, and the gap between the movable frame bodies 69a to 69d respectively adjacent to the movable frame bodies 69a to 69d can prevent the player from being injured. When the fingers of the player jump out of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d, the side surfaces of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d are prevented from being caught by the player's fingers and injuring them. Of course, when the movable frame bodies 69a to 69d are arranged in the state of the bud (the state of FIG. 131(B)), after the player releases the palm from the handle 60, the player can operate the handle 60 again. When the player's hand is inserted into the space formed by the handle 60 and the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d, the front surfaces of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d are the player's fingertips (particularly, the base of the nail, The part of the skin covering the nail) can be prevented from catching and injuring.

The movable frame bodies 69a to 69d move from the retracted position (home position) to the advanced position and then return to the retracted position (home position). By using this operation mode, for example, the movable frame bodies 69a to 69d can be protruded to the advanced position for a predetermined period of time to maintain the bud state, and the movable frame bodies 69a to 69d can be intermittently advanced. The movable frame members 69a to 69d can be continuously projected to the advanced position to be in the bud state, or retracted to the retracted position (home position) to bloom. Among the movable frame bodies 69a to 69d, first the left frame movable body 69c, the upper frame movable body 69a, the right frame movable body 69d, and then the lower frame After moving clockwise from the retracted position (home position) to the advanced position in the order of the movable body 69b, all the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d can be simultaneously returned to the retracted position (home position). , the left frame movable body 69c, the lower frame movable body 69b, the right frame movable body 69d, and the upper frame movable body 69a in the order of the retracted position ( After moving from the home position) to the advanced position, all the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d can be simultaneously returned to the retracted position (home position).

Next, the timing at which the movable frame bodies 69a to 69d are actuated (the timing at which the movable frame bodies 69a to 69d start to operate) will be described. First, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern of the stereoscopic image are rotated from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. A variable effect (variable display) of decorative patterns (symbols: number “1” to number “9”) is started in the display mode. When the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative design is started, the decorative design that is stopped and displayed moves slowly (at a low speed) in a floating display mode for a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 mm) (in other words, Then, as the stop display of the decorative pattern is canceled, the decorative pattern changes to a display mode in which it will move from now on), and the speed is gradually increased from a low speed toward the bottom to change from an opaque state to a translucent state. , resulting in a display mode that fluctuates at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed temporarily and then stopped). The decorative pattern is displayed in a state of being temporarily stopped and slowly moved in the vertical direction in small steps. In addition, there are a plurality of background images for the variable display of decorative patterns, and one of the plurality of background images is selected.

The variation icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative design, the middle decorative design, and the right decorative design that are currently changing as the digestion of the first special figure reservation is the variable display displayed in the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed (placed) at position 9Cd (on the rectangular image (pedestal image)). In the region of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as the first special figure hold. In this pending display area, pending icons 9A can be displayed (can be placed) at four pending display positions 9Ad (on rectangular images (pedestal images)), and up to four pending icons 9A can be stocked. is now possible. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are a first reserved display position 9Ad, a second reserved display position 9Ad, a third reserved display position 9Ad, and a fourth reserved display position 9Ad from a position near the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. They are linearly arranged and displayed along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the display position 9Ad.

Although both the variable display position 9Cd and the reserved display position 9Ad have a rectangular shape, they may have the same size or different sizes. In this embodiment, both the variable display position 9Cd and the reserved display position 9Ad have a rectangular shape, and the size of the variable display position 9Cd (horizontal distance dimension) is equal to the size of the reserved display position 9Ad (horizontal distance dimension). dimension) (both distance dimensions in the vertical direction are the same distance dimension). This is for distinguishing between the variable icon 9C displayed at the variable display position 9Cd and the suspended icon 9A displayed at the suspended display position 9Ad.

Here, a yellow (gold) star-shaped variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, a white spherical suspension icon 9A is displayed at the first suspension display position 9Ad, and the second suspension display positions 9Ad to No pending icon is displayed at the fourth pending display position 9Ad. In other words, there is only one white spherical pending icon that has not been digested and is stocked. In addition, in the following description, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 after this.

Here, to briefly explain the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icons"), the differences in the shape and color make it possible to determine the difference in the degree of expectation of winning during the lottery corresponding to the icon. represent. For example, of the six icons: yellow (gold) star icon, black sphere icon, smiling sphere icon, red sphere icon, blue sphere icon, white sphere icon, yellow (gold) star icon icon has the highest probability of winning, the black spherical icon has the second highest probability of winning, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest probability of winning, and the red spherical icon has the fourth highest probability of winning. The blue spherical icon has the fifth highest probability of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest probability of winning.

A variable effect (variable display) of the decorative pattern is started, after which the left decorative pattern is displayed temporarily stopped at the number "8" and is displayed in a manner of slowly moving up and down in small steps, and the right decorative pattern is temporarily displayed at the number "8". It is stopped and displayed, and the display mode is such that it slowly moves in the vertical direction. At this time, the middle decorative pattern continues the variable effect (variable display).

Subsequently, when the battle effect is started, a friendly character appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, an enemy character appears from the left side of the display screen 7a, and a battle effect between the friendly character and the enemy character unfolds in the center of the display screen 7a. be done. The battle effect is a effect in which the expectation of a big hit is set high in advance. In the battle production, the left decorative pattern, the middle decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern disappear from the display screen 7a.

In the battle production, when the ally character wins and the enemy character loses, the left decorative pattern, the middle decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed (confirmed display) with the same pattern, and after that, a winning game (winning effect ) is started. When the win is confirmed, the change icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a due to the end of the change. On the other hand, in the battle production, when the ally character is defeated and the enemy character wins, the left decorative pattern, the middle decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are stopped (confirmed display) at the same timing, and the left decorative pattern and the middle decorative pattern are displayed at the same timing. The decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern are not the same pattern, and are lost. At this time, the change icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a due to the end of the change.

When a friendly character and an enemy character are fighting by battle production, the friendly character moves to the right side of the display screen 7a, and the enemy character moves to the left side of the display screen 7a, a production button is displayed near the bottom center of the display screen 7a. A button image simulating 63 is displayed, and a message image of "continuous hits!" prompting the player to press the effect button 63 is displayed above the button image. This message image MG has a higher hit expectation in the order of "Press!"→"Continuous hits!"→"Long press!". An arrow image pointing downward is also displayed on the display screen 7a between the button image and the message image, and the arrow image reciprocates repeatedly in the vertical direction, so that the player can use the effect button 63 also by the arrow image. A pressing operation (an operation of pressing the pressing operation portion of the production button 63 downward) can be prompted. The button image, the message image, and the arrow image disappear from the display screen 7a when the player presses the production button 63, or when the player does not press the production button 63. It disappears from the display screen 7a after a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed.

When the effect button 63 is pressed, or when a predetermined period of time elapses without the effect button 63 being pressed, a first premium background image (so-called “second 1 rainbow background image”) is displayed on the display screen 7a, the friend character and the enemy character disappear from the display screen 7a, and the second movable accessory 15 provided on the game board 2 moves to the retreat position above the image display device 7. (home position), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 advances (moves) toward the front (front) of the display screen 7a and toward the center position (advance position) of the display screen 7a, and moves for a predetermined time (for example, about 5 seconds). After a predetermined period of time has passed, the second movable accessory 15 returns from the advance position to the retreat position (home position), and a dedicated victory background image is displayed on the display screen 7a as a background image to convey the victory of the teammate character. An enemy character appears (is displayed) in the center of the display screen 7a, and the enemy character becomes smaller in size as it recedes in the depth direction. Become. After that, a special winning background image for conveying the winning is displayed on the display screen 7a as a background image, and the left decorative pattern, the middle decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed with the same pattern (here, the number "8").

The second movable accessory 15 provided on the game board 2 moves from the resting position (home position) above the image display device 7 to the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the display screen. In conjunction with the start of the operation of advancing (moving) toward the central position (advanced position) of 7a, the operation mode of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d provided on the front frame 53 around the handle 60 is started. The Rukoto.

In other words, the operation of the second movable accessory 15 provided on the game board 2 and the operation of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d provided on the front frame 53 separately from the handle 60 interlock with each other to start moving. It will happen.

Specifically, from the state where the second movable accessory 15 is stationary at the retracted position (home position) above the image display device 7, the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the display screen 7a In conjunction with the start of the operation of advancing (moving) toward the central position (advancing position), the movable frame bodies 69a to 69d advance (move) from the retracted position (home position) toward the advancing position. When the second movable accessory 15 stops at the advanced position for a predetermined period of time (for example, about 5 seconds), the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d stop at the advanced position for a predetermined period of time to enter a bud state. After a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the movable frame bodies 69a to 69d move from the advanced position to the retracted position ( home position).

Here, as an operation mode of the movable frame bodies 69a to 69d, the movable frame bodies 69a to 69d move from the retracted position (home position) to the advanced position, stop for a predetermined period of time, and then return to the retracted position (home position). Although it is an operation, it is of course possible to adopt another operation mode. In this case, the sub-control board 90 determines the operation modes of the movable frame bodies 69a to 69d. In another operation mode, the second movable accessory 15 moves from the resting position (home position) above the image display device 7 to the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the display screen 7a. It advances (moves) toward the central position (advancing position) of the , and then returns to the retracted position (home position) again during the second movable body accessory actuation period.

Specifically, during the operation period of the second movable body accessory, the movable frame bodies 69a to 69d intermittently protrude to the advanced position to be in a bud state (the movable frame bodies 69a to 69d are at the retracted position (home position) and the advance position are intermittently performed instead of continuously), and when the second movable body accessory actuation period elapses, the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d move to the retracted position (home position). , or during the period when the second movable body accessory is activated, the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d continuously protrude to the advanced position to be in a bud state, or retract to the retracted position (home position) to be in a flowering state. When the second movable body accessory actuation period elapses, the frame is movable When the bodies 69a to 69d return to the retracted position (home position), or during the operation period of the second movable body accessory, the left frame movable body 69c, the upper frame movable body 69a, and the right frame movable body 69a to 69d among the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d. The frame movable body 69d and the lower frame movable body 69b move clockwise from the retracted position (home position) to the advanced position in that order. The movable frame bodies 69a to 69d return to the retracted position (home position) all at once. The frame movable body 69b, the right frame movable body 69d, and the upper frame movable body 69a move counterclockwise in this order from the retracted position (home position) to the advanced position, and the second movable body accessory actuation period. , all the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d return to the retracted position (home position) all at once.

As shown in FIG. 131(C), when the effect button 63 is pressed or a predetermined period of time elapses without the effect button 63 being pressed, a first premium background image having seven colors as a background image (so-called , “first rainbow background image”) is displayed on the display screen 7a, and in conjunction with the movement of the second movable accessory 15 provided on the game board 2, the frame provided on the front frame 53 around the handle 60 is displayed. The operation mode of the movable bodies 69a to 69d (movement of the movable frame bodies 69a to 69d from the retracted position (home position) to the advanced position, stopping for a predetermined period of time, and then returning to the retracted position (home position)) is started. was However, in place of the second movable accessory 15, the motion mode of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d may be started in conjunction with the operation of the first movable accessory 14 provided on the game board 2.

Specifically, when the effect button 63 is pressed or a predetermined period of time elapses without the effect button 63 being pressed, the first premium background image having seven colors as the background image is displayed as shown in FIG. 131(D). A second premium background image (so-called "second rainbow background image") different from the original is displayed on the display screen 7a, the friend character and the enemy character disappear from the display screen 7a, and the first movable combination provided on the game board 2 is displayed. The object 14 moves from a resting position (home position) on the left side of the image display device 7 to the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and toward the center position (advance position) of the display screen 7a. , and reciprocates repeatedly in the left-right direction in small steps at the center position (advance position) for a predetermined time (for example, about 5 seconds). After a predetermined time elapses, the first movable accessory 14 returns from the advanced position to the retracted position (home position), and a dedicated victory background image is displayed on the display screen 7a as a background image to convey the victory of the teammate character. An enemy character appears (is displayed) in the center of the display screen 7a, and the enemy character becomes smaller in size as it recedes in the depth direction. Become. After that, a special winning background image for conveying the winning is displayed on the display screen 7a as a background image, and the left decorative pattern, the middle decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed with the same pattern (here, the number "8").

The first movable accessory 14 provided on the game board 2 is displayed in front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 from a resting position (home position) on the left side of the image display device 7. In conjunction with the start of the operation of advancing (moving) toward the center position (advanced position) of the screen 7a, the operation mode of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d provided on the front frame 53 around the handle 60 starts. It will be done.

That is, the operation of the first movable accessory 14 provided on the game board 2 and the operation of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d provided on the front frame 53 separately from the handle 60 interlock with each other to start moving. It will happen.

Specifically, from a state where the first movable accessory 14 is stationary at the retreat position (home position) on the left side of the image display device 7, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is in front of the display screen 7a. In conjunction with the start of the operation of advancing (moving) toward the central position (advancing position), the movable frame bodies 69a to 69d advance (moving) from the retracted position (home position) toward the advanced position. , and in conjunction with the reciprocating motion of the first movable accessory 14 in the central position (advance position) for a predetermined period of time (for example, about 5 seconds) in the left-right direction repeatedly in small steps, the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d are moved. It stops for a predetermined time at the advanced position and becomes a bud state, and when the predetermined time elapses, the first movable accessory 14 starts returning from the advanced position to the retracted position (home position) again. The movable bodies 69a to 69d start returning from the advanced position to the retracted position (home position).

Here, as an operation mode of the movable frame bodies 69a to 69d, the movable frame bodies 69a to 69d move from the retracted position (home position) to the advanced position, stop for a predetermined period of time, and then return to the retracted position (home position). Although it is an operation, it is of course possible to adopt another operation mode. In this case, the sub-control board 90 determines the operation modes of the movable frame bodies 69a to 69d. In another operation mode, the first movable accessory 14 moves from the state where the first movable accessory 14 is stationary at the left retracted position (home position) of the image display device 7 to the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the display screen It advances (moves) toward the central position (advancing position) of 7a and then returns to the retracted position (home position) again during the first movable body accessory actuation period.

Specifically, during the operation period of the first movable body accessory, the movable frame bodies 69a to 69d intermittently protrude to the advanced position to be in a bud state (the movable frame bodies 69a to 69d are at the retracted position (home position) and the advance position are repeated intermittently instead of continuously), and when the first movable body accessory actuation period elapses, the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d move to the retracted position (home position). , or during the operation period of the first movable body accessory, the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d continuously protrude to the advanced position to be in a bud state, or retract to the retracted position (home position) to be in a flowering state. When the first movable body accessory actuation period elapses, the frame is movable When the bodies 69a to 69d return to the retracted position (home position), or during the operation period of the first movable body accessory, among the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d, first the left frame movable body 69c, the upper frame movable body 69a, and the right frame movable body 69a The frame movable body 69d and the lower frame movable body 69b move clockwise from the retracted position (home position) to the advanced position in that order. The movable frame bodies 69a to 69d return to the retracted position (home position) all at once. The frame movable body 69b, the right frame movable body 69d, and the upper frame movable body 69a move counterclockwise in this order from the retracted position (home position) to the advanced position, and the first movable body accessory actuation period. , all the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d return to the retracted position (home position) all at once.

In the above-described embodiment, the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d are biased by the return springs as described above. Therefore, when the game machine 1 is not powered on, a power failure occurs during the game. Then, when the power is cut off, the movable frame members 69a to 69d are returned to the blooming state by the biasing force of the return springs. Therefore, a player who is about to start playing a game or an attendant such as a store clerk in a game hall can disinfect the handle 60 with alcohol, and the movable frame bodies 69a to 69d can also be disinfected with alcohol.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d are biased by the return springs as described above, so power failure occurs during the game when the game machine 1 is not powered on. Then, when the power is cut off, the movable frame bodies 69a to 69d are returned to the blooming state by the urging force of the return spring. When an error occurs and the power supply is cut off, the movable frame members 69a to 69d may be moved to the advanced position by the biasing force of the return springs to be in the bud state. Even with this configuration, as described above, even if the back of the hand or fingers of the player come into contact with the inner peripheral surfaces of the movable frame bodies 69a to 69d, the rotation movement mechanism 534 is not overloaded. Since the rotation movement mechanism 534 is provided with an overload prevention mechanism that prevents the inner peripheral surfaces of the movable frame bodies 69a to 69d, which are in contact with the back of the hand and fingers, from further pressing the back of the player's hand and fingers, the game can be started from now on. Even if a player who is about to start the game or a staff member such as a store clerk of the game parlor inserts a finger into the part where the handle 60 and the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d contact to disinfect the handle 60 with alcohol, the overload prevention mechanism is configured. The handle 60 and the inner peripheral surfaces of the movable frame members 69a to 69d can be disinfected with alcohol against the urging force of the contact spring.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the movable member contact effect will be shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, in the movable member contact effect A of FIG. 129 and the movable member contact effect B of FIG. It has a movable projecting portion 603 (movable member) that is operated by an electric drive source, and when the projecting portion 603 (movable member) is operated to start moving, the player's hand operating the handle 60 (operating means) 129 (B) in the movable member contact effect A, and FIG. 130 (B) in the movable member contact effect B) can be executed. ing. According to this configuration, even if movable members such as the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 provided on the conventional game board start to move, these movable members touch the player. However, when the projection 603 (movable member) starts to move while the player grips the palm from the front of the handle 60 (operating means) so as to wrap it, suddenly the player's Since the hand is in contact with the protruding portion 603, it is possible to provide the player with an unprecedented novel presentation of contact performance between the protruding portion 603 (movable member) and the player. Therefore, it is possible to improve interest.
In addition, in the movable member contact effect C of FIG. 131, a handle 60 (operating means) that can be operated by the player is provided, and movable frame movable bodies 69a to 69d ( When the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d (movable members) are actuated to start moving, the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d (movable members) are placed in the hands of the player who operates the handle 60 (operating means). A contactable first effect (FIG. 131(B) in the movable member contact effect C) can be executed. According to this configuration, even if movable members such as the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 provided on the conventional game board start to move, these movable members touch the player. However, when the movable frame bodies 69a to 69d (movable members) start to move while the player grips the handle 60 (operating means) with the palm of the hand so as to wrap it from the front, suddenly, Since the player's hands are in contact with the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d (movable members), a novel effect that has never existed in the form of contact between the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d (movable members) and the player is produced. can be provided to the player. Therefore, it is possible to improve interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the movable member contact effect A of FIG. 129 and the movable member contact effect B of FIG. The handle 60 (operating means) and the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d (movable members) in the movable member contact effect C are provided on the front frame 53 side of the gaming machine 1. According to this configuration, since the player can directly touch the movable member, it is possible to contribute to increasing the player's desire to play the game.

[Effect 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the movable member contact effect A of FIG. 129 and the movable member contact effect B of FIG. At the retracted position (home position) (first position), the hand of the player who operates the handle 60 (operating means) becomes difficult to touch, and the handle 60 (operating means) is operated at the advanced position (second position). A player's hand can be touched. According to this configuration, it is possible to control the state in which the projecting portion 603 (movable member) is in contact with the player's hand and the state in which it is not in contact with the player's hand. ) can surprise the player (give them a sense of tension) by shifting the control from the non-contact state to the contact state.

[Effect 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the movable member contact effect C of FIG. ) The player's hand operating the handle 60 (operating means) at the advanced position (second position) without covering the player's hand operating the handle 60 (operating means) at the (first position). It is designed to cover the According to this configuration, the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d (movable members) can be controlled to contact and not contact the player's hand. By shifting the control from the state in which the movable members 69a to 69d (movable members) do not contact to the state in which they contact, it is possible to surprise the player (give them a sense of tension) and realize an impactful presentation.

[Effect 5]
The game machine 1 of the above embodiment includes the game board 2 that can be visually recognized through the opening formed in the center of the front frame 53. The game board 2 includes the first movable accessory 14 (game board side movable member). and a second movable accessory 15 (game board side movable member) are provided. For example, in the movable member contact performance A in FIG. It is interlocked with the operation of the protruding part 603 (movable member) provided and the operation of the first movable accessory 14 (game board side movable member) and the second movable accessory 15 (game board side movable member) provided on the game board 2. (Figs. 129(C) and (D) in movable member contact effect A, Figs. 130(C) and (D) in movable member contact effect B). According to this configuration, even if the game board side movable member provided on the game board like the conventional one is operated, the player can be surprised, but the projecting part provided on the front frame 53 side The operation of 603 (movable member) and the operation of the first movable accessory 14 (game board side movable member) and the second movable accessory 15 (game board side movable member) provided on the game board 2 are interlocked. Thus, compared with the conventional case where only the game board side movable member provided on the game board is operated, the player is given more surprise (given more tension) to realize a novel presentation. can be done.
In addition, in the movable member contact effect C of FIG. 131, the first effect is the operation of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d (movable members) provided on the front frame 53 side and the first movable accessory 14 provided on the game board 2. (game board side movable member) and the second movable accessory 15 (game board side movable member) can start moving (in the movable member contact effect C, see FIG. 131 (C) , (D)). According to this configuration, even when the game board-side movable member provided on the game board as in the conventional art is operated, the player can be surprised, but the frame provided on the front frame 53 side is movable. The operation of the bodies 69a to 69d (movable members) and the operation of the first movable accessory 14 (game board side movable member) and the second movable accessory 15 (game board side movable member) provided on the game board 2 are combined. By interlocking, compared to the conventional case where only the game board side movable member provided on the game board is operated, the player is given more surprise (more tension) and a novel performance. can be realized.

[Modification]
Modifications of the movable member contact effect are shown below.
[Modification 1]
129, the movable member contact performance B of FIG. 130, and the movable member contact performance C of FIG. . In other words, it was performed in a so-called left-handed game state. However, it may be performed based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 . In other words, it may be performed in a so-called right-handed game state.

[Modification 2]
In the movable member contact effect A of FIG. 129 and the movable member contact effect B of FIG. 603 (movable member) was allowed to make contact. In addition, in the movable member contact effect C of FIG. 131, when the movable frame bodies 69a to 69d (movable members) are operated and start to move, the movable frame bodies 69a to 69d are brought into the hands of the player who operates the handle 60 (operating means). (movable member) was able to contact. However, instead of such a movable member, it may be one that bears the world view of the presentation that is unfolded in the gaming machine 1 . For example, it may be an item possessed by a character, a part of an item, or a part of a character (eg, wings, fangs, claws, fingers, scales, etc.).

[Modification 3]
In the movable member contact effect A of FIG. 129 and the movable member contact effect B of FIG. 603 (movable member) was allowed to make contact. In addition, in the movable member contact effect C of FIG. 131, when the movable frame bodies 69a to 69d (movable members) are operated and start to move, the movable frame bodies 69a to 69d are brought into the hands of the player who operates the handle 60 (operating means). (movable member) was able to contact. However, instead of such a movable member, a left and right divided capsule made of colorless and transparent resin that covers the effect button 63 is provided, and the left and right capsules that are divided into left and right and can move are applied as movable members. You may

Specifically, the left capsule and the right capsule are provided on the front frame 53 side, and when the left capsule and the right capsule are retracted to the retracted position (home position) covering the effect button 63, the left capsule and the right capsule are in a state where the right end of the left capsule and the left end of the right capsule are in surface contact with each other on a vertical line passing through the center of the effect button 63, and the left capsule and the right capsule release the effect button 63. When the left capsule moves horizontally to the left of the vertical line passing through the center of the effect button 63, the right end of the left capsule is greatly separated from the left end of the effect button 63. Further, the right capsule moves horizontally to the right of the vertical line passing through the center of the performance button 63, so that the left end of the right capsule is largely separated from the right end of the performance button 63.例文帳に追加

In the front frame 53, in addition to the left capsule, the right capsule, and the effect button 63, an electric drive source (for example, A rotary movement mechanism including a motor or solenoid) is provided. In addition to the electric drive source, the rotary movement mechanism includes, for example, a speed reducer that reduces the rotation of the motor when the electric drive source is a motor, and the rotary motion of the motor (rotary motion that reduces the rotation of the motor) to the left side. A motion conversion mechanism for converting the motion of the capsule or the right capsule into parallel motion, a mechanism for transmitting the linear motion of the plunger of the solenoid to the parallel motion of the left or right capsule when the electrical drive source is a solenoid, and In addition to these mechanisms, it is composed of a return spring, a contact spring that constitutes an overload prevention mechanism, and the like.

When the left capsule and the right capsule are arranged at the retracted position (home position), they are arranged so as to cover the effect button 63 . Even if the player tries to press the effect button 63, it is blocked by the left capsule and the right capsule. In addition, since the biasing force of the return spring acts on the left capsule and the right capsule, when the game machine 1 is not powered on, or when the power is cut off due to a power failure during the game, the return spring will not be applied. The left capsule and the right capsule are arranged at the retracted position (home position) by the urging force, and are arranged in a state of covering the effect button 63.例文帳に追加

On the other hand, when the left capsule and the right capsule are arranged at the advanced position, the left capsule and the right capsule are arranged in a state in which the production button 63 is released. In this state, the player can press the effect button 63 without being blocked by the left capsule and the right capsule. When the player presses the effect button 63, even if the player's hand comes into contact with the right end of the left capsule and the left end of the right capsule, the player's hand is not overloaded so that the rotation movement mechanism is not overloaded. The rotation movement mechanism is provided with an overload prevention mechanism that moves parallel so that the right end of the left capsule and the left end of the right capsule that are in contact with the . This overload prevention mechanism is mainly composed of a contact spring.

The left capsule and the right capsule move from the retracted position (home position) to the advanced position and then return to the retracted position (home position). By using this operation mode, for example, it is possible to realize an operation in which the left capsule and the right capsule move to the advanced position for a predetermined period of time and the effect button 63 is kept open, and the left capsule and the right capsule are intermittent. It is possible to realize a state in which the left capsule and the right capsule continuously move to the advanced position and release the production button 63. It is possible to realize an operation of retracting to a retracted position (home position) and closing the effect button 63 .

When the operation mode of the left capsule and the right capsule is started, the left capsule and the right capsule move to the retracted position (home position) while the player is pressing the effect button 63 (repeated hits, long presses, etc.). As a result, the player's hand may come into contact with the right end of the left capsule and the left end of the right capsule. Therefore, even if the game board-side movable member provided on the conventional game board starts to move (even if it operates), the game board-side movable member never touches the player. On the other hand, after the left capsule and the right capsule move to the advanced position and the effect button 63 is released, the left capsule and the right capsule move to the retracted position (home position) while the player is pressing the effect button 63. ), the player's hand suddenly contacts the right end of the left capsule and the left end of the right capsule, so that the left capsule (movable member) and the right capsule (movable It is possible to provide the player with an unprecedented novel performance of contact performance between the member) and the player. Therefore, it is possible to improve interest.

[Modification 4]
In the movable member contact effect A of FIG. 129 and the movable member contact effect B of FIG. 130, the projecting portion 603 is formed of a colored and opaque (for example, red) flexible member. However, the projecting portion 603 may be formed of a colored (single-color or multicolor) translucent flexible member or a colorless and transparent flexible member. In this case, the protrusion decoration substrate for causing the protrusion 603 to emit light is housed inside the handle 60 . A plurality of full-color LEDs are mounted on the projection decorative substrate, and the projection 603 emits light when the full-color LEDs emit light. In other words, it is possible to change the light emission mode of the protrusion 603 by a plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate for protrusion. An inner lens formed in a predetermined shape is provided on the frontmost side of the handle 60 that is housed inside the front cover 602, and a decorative substrate on which a plurality of full-color LEDs are mounted is provided behind the inner lens. ing. For this reason, light emission by the plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative board for the protrusion and light emission by the plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative board accommodated inside the front cover 602 are prevented from interfering (mutually A diaphragm is formed inside the handle 60 so as not to affect each other. A light guide member is provided at the lower end of the protrusion 603, and when the light emitted from the plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate for the protrusion is incident on the lower end of the light guide member, the upper end of the light guide member and emitted from the upper end of the projection 603, the upper end of the projection 603 and its surrounding side surfaces (the front surface of the projection 603 and its surrounding side surfaces) emit light. becomes.
In addition, in the movable member contact effect C of FIG. 131, the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d are formed of colored and opaque (for example, red) flexible members. However, the movable frame bodies 69a to 69d may be formed of a colored (monochromatic or polychromatic) translucent flexible member or a colorless and transparent flexible member. In this case, the front frame 53 accommodates the decorative substrate for projecting portion that causes the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d to emit light. A plurality of full-color LEDs are mounted on the protrusion decoration substrate, and when the full-color LEDs emit light, the movable frame bodies 69a to 69d emit light. In other words, it is possible to change the light emission mode of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d by means of a plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the projection decorative substrate. An inner lens formed in a predetermined shape is provided on the frontmost side of the handle 60 that is housed inside the front cover 602, and a decorative substrate on which a plurality of full-color LEDs are mounted is provided behind the inner lens. However, since the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d are provided on the front frame 53 separately from the handle 60, light emission by a plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative board for the projecting portion on the front frame 53 side and the handle do not interfere (do not affect each other) with the light emitted by the plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the decoration board accommodated inside the front cover 602 on the 60 side.

[Modification 5]
In the movable member contact effect C of FIG. 131, the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d are provided on the front frame 53 in the vertical and horizontal directions of the handle 60 (that is, around the handle 60). In other words, the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d are provided on the front frame 53 separately from the handle 60. As shown in FIG. The frame movable bodies 69a to 69d are formed with a motif of flower petals surrounding the handle 60. As shown in FIG. However, either one or both of frame movable bodies 69 (also called frame movable accessories 69), which are movable so-called gimmicks on the right and left sides of the handle 60 shown in FIG. 1, may be operated. . In this way, the player's hand can suddenly come into contact with the frame movable body 69 (the frame movable accessory 69) in a state in which the player's palm is wrapped around the handle 60 (operation means) from the front. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with an unprecedented novel effect of the contact effect between the frame movable body 69 (the frame movable accessory 69) and the player. Therefore, it is possible to improve interest.

[Modification 6]
In the movable member contact effect A of FIG. 129, the movable member contact effect B of FIG. 130, and the movable member contact effect C of FIG. may

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect D6-1]
A gaming machine comprising operation means that can be operated by a player,
having a moveable movable member actuated by an electrical drive source;
When the movable member is actuated to start moving, a first effect is executed in which the movable member can come into contact with the hand of the player operating the operating means.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect D6-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect D6-1,
The operating means and the movable member are provided on the front frame side of the game machine,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect D6-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect D6-1 or aspect D6-2,
The movable member is provided inside the operation means, and is difficult to contact with the hand of the player who operates the operation means at the first position, and is difficult to touch with the hand of the player who operates the operation means at the second position. be accessible,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect D6-4]
A gaming machine according to aspect D6-1 or aspect D6-2,
The movable member is provided outside the operating means, does not cover the hand of the player operating the operating means at the first position, and is used by the player operating the operating means at the second position. cover your hands,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect D6-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D6-2 to D6-4,
A game board visible through an opening formed in the center of the front frame,
The game board is provided with a game board side movable member,
In the first effect, the operation of the movable member and the operation of the game board side movable member are interlocked to start moving.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Other Modifications]
The various display effects described above may include a configuration that does not include some of the effects, or may include effects other than those described above.

The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment has been described by taking a pachinko gaming machine as an example, but it is not limited to this. For example, instead of the pachinko game machine, the present invention may be applied to a reel-type game machine such as a slot machine, an arrange ball game machine, or a mahjong ball game machine. When the game machine 1 is a slot machine, the game medium may be changed from game balls to game medals.

The gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment includes the production button 63, the sword member 65, and the select button 68 as operation units to be operated by the player. , triggers, etc. may be used. Further, in the display effect in the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the button image representing the effect button 63 may be used to execute the display effect. Alternatively, a display effect may be executed using an image representing a lever or trigger.

The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment is a gaming machine equipped with a payout device for paying out balls, but is not limited to this. For example, instead of the game machine 1, the present invention may be applied to a game machine without a payout device, such as a so-called enclosed game machine.

The gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment uses display devices (main display screen 7a, sub-display screen 64, etc.) to execute various effects. In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, these effects may be combined into one display effect. In other words, two or more of the above-described rendering examples and/or modifications may be combined.
Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 includes a sub-display screen 64 in addition to the image display device 7 (main display screen 7a). The display effects performed on the sub display screen 64 may be performed on the main display screen 7a.

The present aspect has been described above based on the embodiments and modifications, but the above-described embodiments are intended to facilitate understanding of the present aspect, and do not limit the present aspect. This aspect may be modified and modified without departing from the spirit and scope of the claims, and this aspect includes equivalents thereof.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1... Game machine 3... Game area 5... Board lamp 7... Image display device 9A, 9B... Reservation image (reservation icon)
9C... Retained image (suspended icon)
14 First movable accessory 15 Second movable accessory 17 Large winning opening opening start opening 20 First start opening (first ball entrance)
21 … Second starting port (second entrance)
64 Sub-display screen 69 Frame movable accessory 66 Frame lamp 81 Game control microcomputer 91 Production control microcomputer 101 Image control microcomputer

Claims (1)

A gaming machine comprising operation means that can be operated by a player,
having a moveable movable member actuated by an electrical drive source;
The movable member is provided outside the operating means in an exposed state without being covered by other members , and does not cover the hand of the player who operates the operating means at the first position, covering the hand of the player operating the operating means at the second position;
When the movable member is actuated to move from the first position to the second position, the movable member covers the player's hand operating the operation means against the biasing force of the spring, thereby covering the operation means. Executes a production that touches the hand of the player who operates the
In a state where the performance is executed and the movable member covers the hand of the player who operates the operation means, when the power supply is cut off, the movable member is moved to the second position by the biasing force of the spring. to the first position, and the movable member does not cover the hand of the player who operates the operation means.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images